JP7357407B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

Some conventional game machines are equipped with display means (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-176415

However, there is room for improvement in the display means of conventional game machines.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a unique display means.

A game machine according to the present invention is a game machine comprising a light emitting means, a display means, and a selection operation means capable of selecting a power saving mode setting according to an operation, the light emitting means When the selection operation means is operated and the power saving mode setting is selected, the display means may shift to a first state corresponding to the power saving mode setting; When the operating means is operated and the setting of the power saving mode is selected, the means may shift to a second state corresponding to the setting of the power saving mode, and when the operating means for selection is operated and the setting of the power saving mode is selected, When the power mode setting is selected and the display means shifts to the second state, the light emitting means shifts after shifting to the first state, and the light emitting means displays a non-demo animation. Even if the selection operation means is operated in a state where the power saving mode setting is selected, the transition to the first state does not occur, but if the selection operation means is operated while the demo animation is being displayed. When the setting of the power saving mode is selected, the display means moves to the first state , and the display means is operated when the selection operation means is operated with the non-demo animation displayed Even if the power mode setting is selected, the display of the demo animation is not started from the beginning, but the selection operation means is operated while the demo animation is being displayed, and the power saving mode setting is selected. and a means for starting the display of the demo animation from the beginning without displaying the display of the demo animation to the end, and it is possible to dim the display on the display means by setting the power saving mode. When the selection operation means is operated and the power saving mode setting is selected while the demo animation is being displayed, the display of the demo animation that starts anew from the beginning is finalized. The gaming machine is characterized in that the display regarding the power saving mode starts to be displayed on the display means before the display is displayed in a certain darkness.

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a unique display means.

1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to Embodiment A1 of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a front view of the slot machine according to Embodiment A1 of the present invention with the front door opened. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control section of a slot machine according to Embodiment A1 of the present invention. (a) It is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel of the slot machine according to Embodiment A1 of the present invention, developed in a two-dimensional manner. (b) It is a diagram showing the winning line of the slot machine according to Embodiment A1 of the present invention. (a) It is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including activation combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination in a 3-card bet game. (b) It is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including activation combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination in a two-stakes bet game. (a) It is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. (b) It is a transition diagram of the AT system gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. (a) It is a diagram showing a lottery table used for internal lottery processing of winning combinations. (b) It is a figure explaining the correct operation order of the push order combination of the slot machine based on Embodiment A1 of this invention. It is a diagram in which display data and the lighting mode of the payout number display 127 are associated with each other. (a) An image of a presentation table included in the first sub-control unit 400 is illustrated. (b) is a diagram showing an example of a judge state effect table. (c) A diagram showing an example of an LMT state production table. (d) is a diagram showing a modified example of the LMT state production table. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit main processing. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing. (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400; (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400; (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400; (a) It is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500; (c) It is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. (d) It is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500. (a)(1) to (a)(4) It is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of starting the first performance (total notification) in the continuous hit performance. (b) (1) to (b) (3) It is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of starting a second performance (privilege performance) in the continuous hit performance. (c) A diagram showing another example of an operation request display. (a) (1) to (a) (8) It is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of starting the third performance (result notification performance) in the judge performance. (b) (7) to (b) (8) An example of a performance when a button image (operation request display) is displayed during a judge performance, but the performance button (first operation means) is not operated. It is a diagram. It is a diagram chronologically showing an example in which a second performance (result notification performance) is started during the execution of the first performance (total notification performance) in a continuous hit performance. (a)(1) to (a)(8) are diagrams chronologically showing an example of starting an operation response performance after displaying an operation request display in a judge victory performance, and FIG. 15(a)(1) This is a diagram corresponding to (a) (8) in the same figure. (b)(1) to (b)(2) A diagram showing an example of a judge defeat performance (a performance when the AT lottery in CZ is not won). FIG. 7 is a diagram chronologically showing an example of a performance when an operation request display is not displayed in the judge resurrection performance (second case). FIG. 6 is a diagram chronologically showing an example of a performance when the operation request display is not displayed in the judge revival performance (second case) and when the operation means is operated and the operation response performance is started (third case). . This diagram shows in chronological order an example of a performance when the operation request display is not displayed in the judge defeat performance (second case), and when the operation means is operated but the operation response performance is not started (fourth case). be. An example of a performance in which an operation response performance is started when the operation means is operated while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating in the case where the operation request display is not displayed in the judge resurrection performance (second case). It is a diagram shown in chronological order. 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. (a) is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a diagram showing a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including activation combinations), symbol combinations, payouts, and activations corresponding to each winning combination. 3 is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of a main control unit of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a flowchart showing the flow of a first sub-control unit main process, a first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and a first sub-control unit timer interrupt process of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. Flow of second sub-control unit main processing, second sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and second sub-control unit image control processing of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention It is a flowchart which shows. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating the outline of a three-coin bet game and a two-coin bet game in Example C1 of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an outline of the effect when a three-coin bet game is executed after the slot machine executes pseudo bonus confirmation notification in Example C1. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an outline of the effect when a two-coin bet game is executed after the slot machine executes pseudo bonus confirmation notification in Example C1. It is a figure explaining an example of the continuous performance in Example C2 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining another example of the continuous performance in Example C2 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 34 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the continuous effect shown in FIG. 33. FIG. It is an example of the effect displayed on the effect image display device in Example C3 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the transition of the performance mode of a performance image display device when a two-copy bet game is executed in Example C3 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. This is a modified example of the effect displayed on the effect image display device in Example C3 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the transition of the performance mode displayed on the performance image display device when the button performance is executed in Example C4 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 39 is a diagram illustrating a change in the performance mode of the performance image display device when, after starting the button performance shown in FIG. 38, one game of a 2-bet bet game is executed in the next game, and then a 3-coin bet game is executed. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a notification period of a two-bet bet notification in Example C5 of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 41 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the notification period of the two-stake bet notification shown in FIG. 40. FIG. It is a figure explaining the modification of the performance performed in Example C5 of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. (A) It is a diagram chronologically showing an example in which a two-coin bet game is performed after a three-coin bet game is performed in a normal state. (B) It is a diagram chronologically showing an example in which a two-coin bet game is executed after a three-coin bet game is executed in the specialized state. (C) It is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of playing a three-coin bet game in the specialized state. (D) It is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of playing a two-coin bet game in the specialized state. (E) It is a diagram showing an example of transition of AT-based gaming states. (A) It is a diagram showing, in chronological order, an example of a three-coin bet game in a normal state. (B) is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of a three-coin bet game in the specialized state. (A) It is a diagram chronologically showing an example in which a two-coin bet game is performed after a three-coin bet game is performed in a normal state. (B) It is a diagram chronologically showing an example in which a two-coin bet game is executed after a three-coin bet game is executed in the specialized state. (C) It is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of a performance when a three-coin bet game is played in the specialized state and the cumulative point number reaches the target value. (D) It is a diagram showing an example of changes in various counters in a time series in a normal state. (E) It is a diagram showing an example of changes in various counters in a time series in a specialized state. (A)(1) to (A)(2) are diagrams chronologically showing an example in which setting suggestion A is started to be displayed in connection with the execution of a 3-coin bet game. (A)(3) to (A)(4) are diagrams chronologically showing an example in which setting suggestion B is started to be displayed in connection with execution of a three-coin bet game. (B)(1) to (B)(2) are diagrams chronologically showing an example in which the setting suggestion A does not start to be displayed in connection with the execution of a two-coin bet game. (B)(3) to (B)(4) are diagrams chronologically showing an example in which setting suggestion B starts to be displayed in connection with execution of a two-coin bet game. (C) It is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of playing a three-coin bet game in a high navigation state. (D) It is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of playing a two-coin bet game in a high navigation state. (A) In a game that has shifted from judge (AT1) to AT2, it is a diagram chronologically showing an example in which a setting suggestion is made in response to a game start operation. (B) In a game where the judge (AT1) has ended, it is a diagram showing in chronological order an example in which a setting suggestion is made in response to a game start operation. (C) It is a diagram chronologically showing an example in which, after a three-coin bet game is executed in the final game of AT2, a setting suggestion is made in the next three-coin bet game using the third stop operation as an opportunity. (D) It is a diagram showing, in chronological order, an example in which a setting suggestion is made in response to an operation of a production button. (A) It is a diagram showing in chronological order an example in which setting suggestions are not made in a state where the victory screen of the judge (AT1) is displayed. (B) It is a diagram showing in chronological order an example in which setting suggestions are not made in a state where the defeat screen of the judge (AT1) is displayed. (C) It is a diagram chronologically showing an example in which, after a three-coin bet game is executed in the final game of AT2, a setting suggestion is made using the third stop operation as a trigger in the next two-coin bet game. (D) It is a diagram chronologically showing an example in which a setting suggestion is not made using the third stop operation as an opportunity in a two-stakes bet game. (A) A diagram showing an example of a predetermined number of sheets acquisition display (setting suggestion display). (B) A diagram showing an example of a lottery table for displaying the acquisition of a predetermined number of coins. (C) A diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion display lottery table. 1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 100. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a handle member 104. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a handle member 104. FIG. 3 is a side view showing the handle member 104. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view showing the handle member 104. FIG. (a) is a partial sectional view of the side plate 103 without the handle member 104, (b) is a side view showing the positional relationship with the handle member 104 when it is attached to the side plate 103, and (c) is a partial sectional view of the side plate 103 without the handle member 104. 2 is an enlarged side view showing a part of the handle member 104. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state of the handle member 104 in the middle of attachment (removal) to the side plate 103. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state of the handle member 104 in the middle of attachment (removal) to the side plate 103. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a modification of the handle member 104. FIG. 1 is a diagram schematically showing a slot machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing various notification means when a door opening error is detected. It is a figure which shows the state of various notification means after display ES21 in the 1st display mode of a 2nd error display, and display ES21' in the 1st display mode of a 2nd same content error display is started. It is a timing chart of a notification mode after a door opening error is detected. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing various notification means when a hopper empty error with an error code of E2 is detected. It is a figure which shows the state of various notification means after the 3rd error display ES30 and the 3rd same content error display ES30' are started. It is a timing chart of the notification mode after the hopper empty error is detected. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing various notification means when a medal passage confirmation error with an error code of E7 is detected. It is a figure which shows the state of various notification means after the 4th error display ES40 and the 4th same content error display ES40' are started. It is a timing chart of a notification mode after a medal passage confirmation error is detected. 12 is a timing chart when a door opening error is detected before a hopper empty error is detected and the error is resolved. It is a timing chart when a door opening error is detected and a medal passage confirmation error is detected before the error is resolved. 7 is a diagram showing a modification of error notification using a first image display device 157 and a second image display device 158. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a modification of error notification continued from FIG. 71. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a modification of error notification continued from FIG. 72. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a line. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door open. 7 is a perspective view showing the configuration of a reel unit 700. FIG. (a) is a perspective view showing the structure of the backlight module 740, and (b) is a front view of the backlight module 740. 77 is a diagram showing the first selection switch 190 etc. shown in FIG. 76. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of selection of setting values using a first selection switch 190 and a second selection switch 194. FIG. FIG. 3 shows a circuit block diagram of a control section. It is a diagram showing a demo animation displayed on the performance image display device 157 in the demonstration performance. (a) is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157 that is displayed when the second chance button 166 is pressed while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed, and (b) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157. 86(h) is a diagram showing a display screen that is displayed when the first chance button 165 is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 86(h). It is a diagram showing step by step the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when a selection is made to set the power saving mode while a non-demo animation is being displayed. 85 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. 84. FIG. The state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps is shown step by step when the front door 102 is opened while the demo animation is being displayed and the front door 102 is opened while holding down the opening/closing piece to set the power saving mode. FIG. 87 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. 86. FIG. The state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps is shown step by step when the front door 102 is opened without pressing the opening/closing piece while the demo animation is being displayed and the selection is made to set the power saving mode. FIG. It is a diagram showing step by step the appearance of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when a selection is made to set the power saving mode while the hopper empty error continues to occur. 1 is a rear view of a pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied, seen from the back side. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a line. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door open. 7 is a perspective view showing the configuration of a reel unit 700. FIG. (a) is a perspective view showing the structure of the backlight module 740, and (b) is a front view of the backlight module 740. 94 is a diagram showing the first selection switch 190 etc. shown in FIG. 93. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of selection of setting values using a first selection switch 190 and a second selection switch 194. FIG. FIG. 3 shows a circuit block diagram of a control section. It is a diagram showing a demo animation displayed on the performance image display device 157 in the demonstration performance. (a) is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157 that is displayed when the second chance button 166 is pressed while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed, and (b) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157. 103(h) is a diagram showing a display screen that is displayed when the first chance button 165 is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 103(h). It is a diagram showing step by step the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when a selection is made to set the power saving mode while a non-demo animation is being displayed. 102 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. 101. FIG. The state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps is shown step by step when the front door 102 is opened while the demo animation is being displayed and the front door 102 is opened while holding down the opening/closing piece to set the power saving mode. FIG. 104 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. 103. FIG. The state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps is shown step by step when the front door 102 is opened without pressing the opening/closing piece while the demo animation is being displayed and the selection is made to set the power saving mode. FIG. It is a diagram showing step by step the appearance of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when a selection is made to set the power saving mode while the hopper empty error continues to occur. It is a figure which shows two examples of operation performance. 92 is a table summarizing the characteristic operation effects of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91. 92 is a diagram showing the relationship between colors in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91. FIG. 108A is a diagram specifically showing some examples of the first operation performance 1 described using FIG. 108(a). FIG. FIG. 108(b) is a diagram specifically showing some examples of the first operation performance 2 described using FIG. 108(b). FIG. 108(c) is a diagram specifically showing some examples of the second operation performance 1 described using FIG. 108(c). FIG. 108(d) is a diagram specifically showing some examples of the second operation performance 2 described using FIG. 108(d). It is a figure which shows the other example of operation performance. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example when an operating means other than the first chance button 165 is operated in the operation performance. 1 is a rear view of a pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied, seen from the back side. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a diagram showing an example of a winning line. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. It is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel developed in a two-dimensional manner. It is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including active winning combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the payout of each winning combination. It is a diagram showing the types of internal winning combinations and a lottery table for internal winning combinations in the special combination 2 internal winning state. (a) is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 117, and (b) is a transition diagram of the performance state in the special combination 2 internal winning state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 117. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit main processing. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing. 125 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit initial setting process (step S101) in FIG. 124. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the flow of setting change processing (step S1013) in FIG. 126. 125 is a flowchart showing the flow of various lottery processes (step S105) in FIG. 124. (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the item addition process (step S1203) in FIG. 128, (b) and (c) are diagrams showing the table used for the lottery in step S1305, and (d) and (e) is a diagram showing a table used for the lottery in step S1315. 129 is a flowchart showing the flow of confrontation setting processing (step S1205) in FIG. 128. (a) is a diagram showing a table used for setting the confrontation mode. (b) is a diagram showing a table used for setting a precursor start zone. (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the point specialization B state transition lottery process (step S1207) in FIG. 128, and (b) is a diagram showing a table used for the transition lottery to point specialization B state. be. 129 is a flowchart showing the flow of AT-related processing (step S1209) in FIG. 128. (a) is a diagram illustrating a lottery table for acquiring items for “defeating 1 body,” (b) is a diagram illustrating a lottery table for adding to the defeat rate by “defeating rate UP” items, and (c) is a diagram showing an AT remaining It is a figure which shows the number of games lottery table, (d) is a figure which shows the AT direct hit lottery table, (e) is a figure which shows the pseudo BB lottery table, and (f) is a figure which shows the AT additional game number lottery. It is a figure showing a table. 125 is a flowchart showing the flow of the status update process (step S117) in FIG. 124. FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the point acquisition process (step S1A01) in FIG. 135, and (b) is a diagram showing a table used in the lottery for determining the value of the acquired points. (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of point specialization A state processing (step S1A11) in FIG. 135, and (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of normal state processing (step S1A15) in FIG. c) is a flowchart showing the flow of point specialization B state processing (step S1A19) in FIG. 135. 136 is a flowchart showing the flow of precursor state processing (step S1A23) in FIG. 135. 136 is a flowchart showing the flow of confrontation state processing (step S1A27) in FIG. 135. (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of AT state processing (step S1A31) in FIG. 135, and (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of pseudo BB state processing (step S1A33) in FIG. 135. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400, and (c) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. 5 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the flow of the production control process (step S309) in FIG. 141. (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the display point management process (step S3003) in FIG. 142, and (b) is a diagram showing a table used in the lottery for determining the value of acquired points. 143 is a flowchart showing the flow of display item management processing (step S3005) in FIG. 142. 145 is a flowchart showing the flow of the item acquisition performance setting process (step S3207) in FIG. 144. (a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500, and (c) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. 3 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the performance performed until a performance state shifts from an initial state to a normal state via a point specialization A state. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance that is executed when the performance state shifts from the normal state to the point specialization B state or the false omen state and returns to the normal state. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of an item acquisition performance when the performance state is a normal state. The flow from the normal state to the true precursor state to the confrontation state will be explained. This figure is a diagram illustrating an example of the performance that is executed from the normal state to the true precursor state to the confrontation state. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing examples of item acquisition performances when the performance state is a confrontation state, and (d) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of item use performances when the performance state is a confrontation state. It is a figure which shows an example, and (g) is a figure which shows the state where the confrontation production has started. It is a figure which shows the example when all wins are won in a confrontation production. It is a diagram showing an example of a case where the player loses the showdown performance. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect performed until it moves from an AT state to a pseudo BB state or an initial state. It is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a power failure occurs in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a power failure occurs in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a power failure occurs in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a power failure occurs in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a power failure occurs in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a power failure occurs in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a power failure occurs in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a power failure occurs in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a power failure occurs in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a power failure occurs in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a power failure occurs in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of redisplaying a hidden item before using (erasing) the item. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a modification example when power is restored after power interruption occurs. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to Embodiment H1 of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a front view of the slot machine according to Embodiment H1 of the present invention with the front door opened. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of a slot machine according to Embodiment H1 of the present invention. (a) It is a diagram illustrating the arrangement of symbols on each reel of the slot machine according to Embodiment H1 of the present invention, developed in a two-dimensional manner. (b) It is a diagram showing the winning line of the slot machine according to Embodiment H1 of the present invention. It is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including activation combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination. (a) It is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. (b), (c) are transition diagrams of the AT system gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. (a) It is a diagram showing a lottery table used for internal lottery processing of winning combinations. (b) It is a figure explaining the correct operation order of the push order combination of the slot machine based on Embodiment H1 of this invention. It is a diagram in which display data and the lighting mode of the payout number display 127 are associated with each other. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit main processing. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing. (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400; (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400; (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400; (a) It is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500; (c) It is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. (d) It is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of initial setting processing. 3 is a flowchart showing the flow of power-on setting-related processing. It is a figure showing an example of various notifications. (a) A diagram showing an example of the flow of setting changes during normal times when no errors occur in the game machine. (b) is a diagram showing an example of the flow of setting confirmation during normal times when no errors occur in the game machine. It is a figure showing an example of various notifications. It is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of a certain performance (pseudo bonus) in which a first performance (first button performance) is executed. It is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of a certain performance (pseudo bonus) in which a first performance (first button performance) is executed. It is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of a certain performance (pseudo bonus) in which a second performance (second button performance) is executed. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). FIG. (a) It is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including active winning combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, payouts (number of awards), and notes for each winning combination. (b) It is a figure showing the types of the normal pressing order bell and the special pressing order bell, and the payout corresponding to each pressing order. (a) A diagram schematically showing an advantageous section and a non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100. (b) It is a diagram showing an example of the transition of the gaming state of the slot machine 100. (a) It is a diagram showing the relationship between the navigation compliance rate and the probability of winning the transition lottery in the first chance state. (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the navigation compliance rate and the probability of winning the transition lottery in the second chance state. (c) It is a diagram showing the relationship between the navigation compliance rate and the winning probability of the set continuation lottery in the AT state. (a) It is a figure showing an example of various navigation systems in a non-AT state. (b) is a diagram showing an example of various types of navigation in an advantageous section (non-AT state). (c) is a diagram showing an example of various types of navigation in an advantageous section (AT state). FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a navigation frequency counter. (a) A diagram showing an example of an execution period and a non-execution period of navigation. (b) to (e) are diagrams showing examples of various notifications. (a) A diagram showing an example of modes in a normal state and count values of a navigation counter 2 corresponding to each mode. (b) It is a figure showing an example of a navigation compliance rate and a lottery value of each mode. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a modification example of the display of the navigation frequency counter. It is a figure showing a modification of the execution period of navigation. It is a figure showing a modification of the navigation. (a) A diagram showing a modification of the AT state. (b) is a diagram showing an example of an AT end screen displayed during the AT extension period. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). FIG. (a) It is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including active winning combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, payouts (number of awards), and notes for each winning combination. (b) It is a figure showing the types of the normal pressing order bell and the special pressing order bell, and the payout corresponding to each pressing order. (A) It is a diagram showing an example of transition of an AT system gaming state. (B) A diagram showing a specific example of advantageous section control (1) when the operation navigation is ignored. (C) A diagram showing a specific example of advantageous section control (2) when the operation navigation is ignored. (A) A diagram showing a specific example of advantageous section control (3) when the operation navigation is ignored. (B) A diagram showing a specific example of an ending when the operation navigation is ignored. (C) A diagram showing a specific example of a bell hit performance. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a specific example of advantageous section control (4) when the operation navigation is ignored. (A), (B) are diagrams showing a specific example of advantageous section control (5) when the operation navigation is ignored. (C) It is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of playing a three-coin bet game in the AT state. (D) It is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of playing a two-coin bet game in the AT state. (A) A diagram showing a first modification of advantageous section control when the operation navigation is ignored. (B) is a diagram showing a second modification of advantageous section control when the operation navigation is ignored.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

[Embodiment A1]
In the slot machine of this embodiment, a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of internal winning of the plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, If the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the multiple reels stop match the predetermined payout conditions, the game media will be paid out and the game will end; if not, the game media will be paid out. This is a game machine that plays a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 1. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface (not shown) are stored in the center of the main body 101, and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the symbol display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible. By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Further, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is arranged on the back of each reel 110 to 112 to illuminate each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 113. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. In addition, inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each reel 110 to 112, and the light emitting part of this optical sensor A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the light-receiving section and the light-receiving section. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line. The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the winning line 114 that becomes valid.

For example, the notification lamp 123 informs the player that he or she has internally won a specific winning combination (specifically, a special winning combination (bonus)) in an internal lottery for winning combinations, which will be described later, or that he or she is playing a bonus game. This is a warning lamp. The notification lamp 123 of this embodiment lights up until the bonus game ends after the bonus is announced to notify the player that the bonus has been confirmed. Note that the notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus notification (at the time of the bonus or immediately before the bonus notification). The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, up to a maximum of three coins, two coins are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as the MAX bet button. The bet button 132 also functions as a performance button that can start a certain performance when an operation is accepted. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a performance button.

In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored token number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout token number display 127 are composed of seven segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of this embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with each reel 110 to 112. . More specifically, by operating the left stop button 137, the left reel 110 can be stopped, by operating the middle stop button 138, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the right stop button 139, the middle reel 111 can be stopped. By operating the right reel 112, it is possible to stop the right reel 112.

Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation will be referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as the second stop operation, the last stop operation will be referred to as the third stop operation, and the first stop operation will be referred to as the third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is sometimes referred to as the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is sometimes referred to as the third stop reel.

Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The order of operations in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 and the stop operation is called "sequential push operation order" or simply "sequence push", and the order of operations in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 and the stop operation is called " This is called "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push." Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body may be turned on to notify the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the AT system gaming state of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can understand that the player is in the high navigation state from the lighting manner of the high navigation state lamp 190.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. A medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided at the bottom of the title panel 162.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to enliven the game. A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided at the top of the presentation device 160. This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed on the back side of the shutter 163. , effect image display device), and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (game display device). The structure is such that it appears on the person's side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of this embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding stop operations (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

Note that it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device, as long as it is configured to be able to display various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, etc. , a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that the entirety can be visually recognized by the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Note that although the notification lamp 123 and the high navigation state lamp 190 are configured to notify predetermined information by causing the lamps to emit light, the manner of notification is not limited to the light emission of the lamps. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a part of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a full-screen liquid crystal slot machine, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). Hereinafter, when the notification lamp 123 or the high navigation state lamp 190 is referred to as lighting, it is meant to include notifications by other presentation devices (for example, display devices) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 2 is a front view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open. The main body 101 is a box that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and has an opening at the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores a main control board inside is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 249 provided at the top of the back plate 242. Three reels 110 to 112 are arranged below. A side plate 260 on the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side, houses a first sub-control board that stores therein a first sub-control board constituting a first sub-control unit. A case 220 is provided. Furthermore, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side as viewed from the outside, which is connected to the main control board and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device.

A medal payout device 180 (a device that pays out medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed on the bottom plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided in front of the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate when the front door 102 is closed.

The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and powers each of the main control section 300, first sub-control section 400, second sub-control section 500, etc., which will be described later. Supplies to the control unit and each device. Furthermore, it is equipped with a power storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to predetermined components (e.g., RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after external power is cut off. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is provided on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is provided behind this storage (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection part to which a power cord 265 is connected, and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 formed in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and on the top of the liquid crystal display device 157 is a presentation device 160 and a presentation control board (not shown) that controls the presentation device 160. (omitted), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. At the bottom of the liquid crystal display device 157, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a passage 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops fraudulent medals, etc. into the medal receiving tray 161. There is. Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 180.

<Circuit configuration of control section>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 3. Note that this figure is a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 is equipped with a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used for internal lottery of winning combinations, stop of reels, etc. ROM 306 for storing position etc., RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. Equipped with WDT (watch dog timer) 314. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz. =1.504ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a number in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. It is equipped with a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal), and when the start signal is input from this start signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (main processing of the main control section described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal input from the medal slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, a stop button 139 sensor, a payment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, an index sensor for the reel 110, The status of the reel 111 index sensor, reel 112 index sensor, etc.) is monitored.

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and insert medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 as medals to be inserted into the game. Detect input operation in case. The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of reel 110, the index sensor of reel 111, and the index sensor of reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes, become the level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives a solenoid provided on the medal selector 170 that sorts the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided on the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored number of coins display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 is provided to drive the display 126, payout number display 127, and high navigation status lamp 190).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects a slot to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. Outputs gaming information (for example, gaming status) of the machine 100. The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply that is supplied to the main control unit 1300. In this embodiment, if the voltage is less than 9 V), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 is one-way communication, and the main control section 300 can send signals such as commands to the first sub-control section 400; Signals such as commands cannot be sent from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control commands. There is. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also has a ROM 406 that stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, backlight lighting patterns, data for controlling various indicators, etc. It is set up.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the audio output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input/output interface. 123 etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at every interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
Next, the symbol arrangement on each of the reels 110 to 112 described above will be explained using FIG. 4(a). Note that this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112).

On each reel 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (in this embodiment, 20 symbols with numbers 0 to 19) of a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Further, the numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on each reel 110 to 112. For example, in this embodiment, the number 19 piece on the left reel 110 has a “bell symbol,” the number 19 piece on the middle reel 111 has a “blank symbol,” and the number 18 piece on the right reel 112 has a “Seven 2 "Designs" are arranged respectively. Note that hereinafter, the "Seven 1 symbol" may be referred to as "Blue 7 (design)" and the "Seven 2 symbol" may be referred to as "Red 7 (design)."

<Winning line>
Next, the winning line will be explained using FIG. 4(b). FIG. 4(b) is a diagram showing the winning line of the slot machine according to Embodiment A1 of the present invention.

The symbol displayed on the upper row of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 1) is placed on the left reel upper row symbol and the symbol displayed on the middle row of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 2). The symbols displayed are the middle symbols of the left reel, the symbols displayed in the lower row of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 3) are the lower symbols of the left reel, and the symbols displayed in the upper row of the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the figure) are The symbol displayed in the middle reel 111 (position 5; also referred to as symbol position 5) is the middle reel middle symbol. The symbol displayed on the lower row of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 6) is placed on the lower row of the middle reel 112 (position 7 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 7). The symbols displayed are the upper symbols of the right reel 112, the symbols displayed in the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 8 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 8) are the symbols displayed in the middle row of the right reel 112, and the symbols displayed in the lower row of the right reel 112 (position 9 shown in the diagram) are The symbols displayed at the position (also referred to as symbol position 9) are called right reel lower symbols, and the symbols on each reel 110 to 112 are displayed vertically three times on each reel 110 to 112 through the symbol display window 113. A total of nine are displayed.

In this embodiment, one winning line 114 is provided, which is a middle winning line L1 consisting of a left reel middle symbol (symbol position 2), a middle reel middle symbol (symbol position 5), and a right reel middle symbol (symbol position 8). ing. The winning line 114 is a line set at the stop position of symbols that can be seen through the reel window 113, and is a line that is set at the stop position of symbols that can be visually recognized through the reel window 113, and is a line that corresponds to a winning combination that will be explained later in FIGS. 5(a) and 5(b). This is the line on which it is determined whether or not a combination has been displayed. In FIG. 4(b), a middle winning line L1 is shown. The valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as gaming media.

The slot machine 100 of this embodiment allows games with a bet of 3 or 2 coins, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 2, none of the winning lines will be activated, and if the number of medals inserted is 3 or 2. When a coin is bet, the winning line L1 becomes valid. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135.

Further, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, there is also a winning line that drops to the right, which is made up of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, and left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of three winning lines, including the winning lines rising to the right, may be set as the valid winning lines 114, or a number of winning lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as the valid winning lines 114.

<Type of winning role>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIGS. 5(a) and 5(b). Note that (a) in the same figure is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including activation combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination in a 3-card bet game. (b) is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including activation combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination in a two-stakes bet game.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include special prizes (special prize 1, special prize 2), general prizes (replay prize 1 to replay prize 13, minor prize 1 to minor prize 5), and the like. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in this embodiment, special combination 1 and special combination 2 are combinations that shift to a special gaming state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Furthermore, re-game winning combinations 1 to 13 are roles that can be played again without inserting new medals. These winning combinations are sometimes called "actuation combinations." In addition, "winning" in this embodiment also includes a case where a symbol combination of an active role that does not involve a medal payout (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the active line. For example, special role 1, This includes winnings in the special winning combination 2 and replaying combinations 1 to 13.

Special combination 1 and special combination 2 are combinations (actuation combinations) that shift to a special gaming state upon winning. In this example, special combination 1 is a winning combination that can only be won in a 3-card bet game, and special combination 2 is a winning combination that can only be won in a 2-card bet game. Note that medals will not be paid out for winning this role itself. The corresponding symbol combinations are "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2" for special winning combination 1 (BB1) and "BAR-BAR-Seven 1" for special winning combination 2 (BB2).

When the special winning combination 1 or special winning combination 2 is internally won, the special winning internal winning flag corresponding to this internally winning winning combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag is set to ON due to the internal winning of the special winning combination 1, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 1 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Furthermore, if the flag is set to ON due to the internal winning of the special winning combination 2, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special winning winning state of the special winning combination 2 (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3). .

This flag remains on until the internally won winning combination is won, and it becomes easier to win the internally winning winning combination in subsequent games. In other words, even if you do not win the special role in a game where you win the special role 1 or 2 internally, you will be in a state where you win the special role internally in the next game and thereafter, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (for example, special If the winning combination is won internally, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2 (BB1)") will be in a state where it is easy to win. The special role 1 internal winning state (RT2) and the special winning role 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to a special gaming state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination 1 or special winning combination 2 being displayed. Furthermore, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of coins (in this example, 110 coins for winning with BB1 and 55 coins for winning with BB2) is paid out, a low re-gaming probability state (hereinafter, this state will be referred to as RT1) ). The special gaming state (RT4) and the low replay probability state (RT1) will be described later.

“Re-gaming role (re-gaming role 1 to re-gaming role 13)” is a winning role (activation role) that allows you to play the next game without inserting medals (game media) by winning a prize. No medals will be paid out. The corresponding symbol combinations are: Replay role 1 (normal replay) is "Replay-Replay-Replay", replay role 2 (direction replay 1) is "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1", and re-game role 3 (Production replay 2) is "Seven 1-Seven 2-Seven 1", etc., as shown in FIG. 5.

“Small role (Small role 1 to Small role 5)” is a winning role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning, and the corresponding symbol combinations are “ANY-Cherry-ANY” for Small role 1 (Cherry), The winning combination 2 (Watermelon 1) is "Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon", etc., as shown in FIG. Further, the corresponding number of coins to be paid out is also as shown in the figure. In the case of "ANY-Cherry-ANY", the symbol on the middle reel 111 only needs to be "cherry", and the symbols on the left reel 110 and right reel 112 can be any symbol.

<Reel stop control>
Next, the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be outlined. The reel stop control is performed by selecting one of multiple types of predetermined reel stop control data based on predetermined conditions (for example, the results of internal lottery processing for winning combinations described later), and stopping the selected reel. Performed based on control data.

In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame slipping control) is performed. Pull-in control is to shift the stop position of the reels 110-112 within a certain number of frames (number of symbols) (pull-in range; here, maximum 4 frames) after the player operates each of the stop buttons 137-139. Control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300. Each reel stop data includes a permission control that allows symbol combinations of a predetermined winning combination to be displayed on the winning line, and a prohibition control that prevents symbol combinations of any winning combination from being displayed on the winning line. It is broadly divided into .

Examples of permissible control include when a certain winning combination is internally won, or when a special winning combination is internally won (the flag is being carried over), and the timing when the player operates each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. Even if the numbers are bad, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning combinations are displayed within the range of the above-mentioned number of frames. However, since it is only "allowed", the symbol combinations may not be aligned depending on the timing of operating each of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

For example, in the case of an internal win for Small Win 2 (Watermelon 1), the watermelon symbol is arranged over four frames, so if the timing of operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not appropriate, the watermelon symbol will be placed on the winning line. Don't stop.

However, depending on the arrangement of symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of symbols drawn, there may be cases where 100% alignment is possible. For example, since the arrangement interval of replay symbols corresponding to replay combination 1 (normal replay) is a maximum of 4 frames, if replay combination 1 is internally won, the winning will be 100% regardless of the timing.

On the other hand, an example in which the prohibition control is performed is, for example, when the internal lottery result is a loss and the special winning combination is not internally won (the flag is being carried over), and the timing when the player operates each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. At best, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning combinations are not displayed together within the range of the above-mentioned number of frames.

<Type of gaming state>
Next, types and changes of gaming states of the slot machine 100 will be explained. FIG. 6(a) is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

The main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a low replay probability state (RT1), a special combination 1 internal winning state with a high replay probability state (RT2), and a special combination 2 internal winning state with a high replay probability state. It has a state (RT3) and a special gaming state (RT4). In this embodiment, these four gaming states are referred to as RT-based gaming states. In addition, in this embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as an AT-based gaming state), and according to the AT-based gaming state determined by the main control unit 300, The first sub-control unit 400 is configured to set the gaming state. The AT system gaming state will be described later using FIG. 6(b).

In addition, the re-gaming low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability that the condition device related to the re-gaming combination operates does not change (default state), special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) and the special gaming state (RT4) are also states in which the probability of activation of the condition device related to the re-gaming combination varies with respect to the default state.

<Lottery table>
FIG. 7(a) is a diagram showing a lottery table used for internal lottery processing for winning combinations. The horizontal axis represents each gaming state (RT system gaming state), and the vertical axis represents the lottery value of each winning combination.

The internal winning probability of each winning combination in each gaming state, which will be explained later, is determined by inputting numerical data corresponding to the range of lottery data associated with each winning combination from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306 to random numbers acquired during the internal lottery. It is calculated by dividing the value by numerical data in the numerical range (for example, 65535). For example, in the re-game low probability state (RT1), the lottery value of the small winning combination 2 is 512, and the winning probability of the small winning combination 1 is 512/65536×100≈0.8%. The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each win or loss.

It is determined which winning combination the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery data corresponds to, and the internal lottery winning combination is determined. This lottery data is prepared with settings 1 to 6 in which the winning probability of at least one winning combination is different, and the staff at the gaming parlor can arbitrarily select and set any of the setting values. Note that the internal winning probability shown in this figure is an example, and is not limited to this probability.

Hereinafter, the RT-type gaming state of the slot machine 100 will be explained with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Low replay probability state (RT1)>
The low replay probability state is a gaming state (disadvantageous to the player) in which the internal winning probability of replaying is the lowest among other gaming states (e.g., gaming states excluding special gaming states), and is referred to as the normal gaming state. There is also. In the low replay probability state, a winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the drawing table in the column "RT1" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 7(a).

The winning combinations that are internally won in the low replay probability state include special combination 1 (condition device No. 1. Only for 3-coin bet games), special combination 2 (not shown; only for 2-coin bet games), and re-gaming combination 1 ( Condition device No. 2), replay combination 2, 4 to 10 (condition device No. 3), replay combination 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13 (condition device No. 4), small combination 1 to small There is a role 5 (conditional device No. 5-9). Note that if you do not win the winning combination, you will lose, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed. Note that the fact that the winning symbol combination is not stopped on the winning line is sometimes referred to as "losing". In addition, not winning the winning combination may be expressed as "winning by mistake."

Here, "Re-gaming role 2, 4 to 10" refers to Re-gaming role 2, Re-gaming role 4, Re-gaming role 5, Re-gaming role 6, Re-gaming role 7, Re-gaming role 8, Re-gaming role 9. , and re-gaming combination 10 are internally won at the same time. In this case, it is determined which symbol combination corresponds to which combination will be displayed according to the player's operation order. More specifically, if the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is the predetermined operation order (in this example, the stop operation is performed by reverse pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to re-gaming combination 2 is It is displayed on the winning line, and in other cases, depending on the timing of the stop operation of each reel 110 to 112, a re-gaming combination 4, a re-gaming combination 5, a re-gaming combination 6, a re-gaming combination 7, and a re-gaming combination are displayed on the winning line. 8, a symbol combination corresponding to either the re-gaming combination 9 or the re-gaming combination 10 is displayed on the winning line. Incidentally, a winning combination, such as the "Re-gaming combinations 2, 4 to 10", whose winning combination is determined by the order of operations may be referred to as a "push order combination".

In addition, "Re-gaming role 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" means Re-gaming role 3, Re-gaming role 4, Re-gaming role 6, Re-gaming role 8, Re-gaming role 10, Re-gaming role 11 , Re-gaming combination 12, and Re-gaming combination 13 are internally won at the same time. In this case, it is determined which symbol combination corresponds to which combination will be displayed according to the player's operation order. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order which is the predetermined operation order (in this example, when the stop operation is performed by reverse pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to re-gaming combination 3 is It is displayed on the winning line, and in other cases, depending on the timing of the stop operation of each reel 110 to 112, re-gaming role 4, re-gaming role 6, re-gaming role 8, re-gaming role 10, re-gaming role A symbol combination corresponding to any one of 11, re-gaming combination 12, and re-gaming combination 13 is displayed on the winning line.

When "Small win 4" is internally won, it is determined whether the symbol combination corresponding to the small win 4 (Bell) will be displayed on the winning line according to the player's operation order (see FIG. 7). a) See notes section). More specifically, if the stop operation is performed in accordance with the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, "Bell-Bell-Bell" will be displayed on the winning line, and 11 medals will be paid out ( Bell prize). On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in accordance with the correct operation order, "Bell-Bell-Bell" is not displayed on the winning line (loss).

Furthermore, if "Small Winning 4" is composed of "Small Winning 4a" and "Small Winning 4b" and "Small Winning 4a" is internally won, "Bell-Bell-Bell" is selected according to the player's operation order. ” will be displayed on the winning line. However, if “Small Role 4b” is internally won, “Bell-Bell-Bell” will be displayed on the winning line regardless of the order of operations. It may be configured so that

Here, using FIG. 7(b), the correct operation order for "Small win 4" will be explained in detail. “Small role 4” is precisely six types: “Small role 4LCR,” “Small role 4LRC,” “Small role 4CLR,” “Small role 4CRL,” “Small role 4RLC,” and “Small role 4RCL.” The game is set up in subdivisions, and different correct operation orders are assigned in correspondence to each of the subdivisions of "Small Wins 4". Note that the range of lottery data associated with each of the six subdivided "small winning combinations 4" is the same.

For example, if "Small win 4 LCR" is internally won among "Small win 4", the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The stop operation is the correct operation, and other stop operations are incorrect operations. Also, if "Small win 4 CRL" is internally won among "Small win 4", the first stop reel will be the middle reel 111, the second stop reel will be the right reel 112, and the third stop reel will be the left reel 110. The correct operation is the stop operation.

FIG. 6(a) shows that when the special winning combination 1 is internally won (when condition (A) is satisfied), the state shifts to the special winning role 1 internal winning state (RT2), which will be described later. When the special winning combination 2 is internally won (when condition (B) is satisfied), it is shown that the state shifts to the special winning combination 2 internal winning state (RT3), which will be described later.

<Special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), special role 2 internal winning state (RT3)>
The special role internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as the "special role internal winning state") are the low replay probability state (RT1). ), the internal winning flag corresponding to special winning combination 1 or special winning combination 2 is set to on, and the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing. This is a gaming state in which a symbol combination corresponding to the special combination corresponding to this flag can be displayed by doing so.

In the special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), a winning combination to be internally won is drawn with reference to the lottery table in the "RT2" column on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 7(a), and the special role 2 internal winning state ( In RT3), a winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the drawing table in the "RT3" column on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 7(a). The winning roles that are internally won in the special role internal winning state include re-gaming roles 1, re-gaming roles 2, 4-10, re-gaming roles 3, 4, 6, 8, 10-13, and small roles 1-4. There is. Note that if you do not win the winning combination, you will lose, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed. In addition, in FIG. 6(a), when the symbol combination corresponding to special role 1 or special role 2 is displayed in the special role internal winning state (when condition (C) is satisfied), the special game described later is A transition to state (RT4) is shown.

<Special gaming state (RT4)>
The special gaming state (RT4) is the most advantageous gaming state for the player among all the gaming states. In the special game state, a winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the drawing table in the "RT4" column on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 7(a). The only winning combination that is internally won in the special gaming state is the small winning combination 5. Furthermore, if the winning combination is not won, the player loses and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

FIG. 6(a) shows that in the special gaming state (RT4), when the specified number of coins are paid out (when condition (D) is satisfied), the state shifts to the low replay probability state (RT1). ing. Specifically, when the special game state is entered based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to special combination 1, if more than 110 medals are paid out, the replay low probability state (RT1) is entered. to move to. In addition, if the special gaming state is entered based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to special combination 2, if more than 55 medals are paid out, the state will be shifted to the low replay probability state (RT1). .

In this embodiment, the special gaming state ends when a specified number of coins are paid out, but for example, the special gaming state may end when a predetermined winning combination (for example, single bonus) is won, or even a predetermined number of payouts ( The game may end when a prize is won (for example, 8 times) or when the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 6 times). That is, the condition (D) shown in FIG. 6(a) is not limited to this example.

<Transition of AT system game state>
Next, the AT system game state will be explained using FIG. 6(b). FIG. 6(b) is a transition diagram of the AT system gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

As shown in the figure, the AT system gaming states are roughly divided into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability that operation navigation will be executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode. The high navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is higher than that in the low navigation state, and is also referred to as AT mode. Here, the operation navigation refers to the internal winning of the push order winning combination (in this example, replaying combinations 2, 4 to 10, replaying combinations 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13, or small combination 4). This refers to the performance that informs the correct operation order in a case. That is, the operation navigation refers to an effect that notifies the contents of the stop operation for acquiring medals, the contents of the stop operation for shifting to an advantageous gaming state, or maintaining an advantageous gaming state.

Here, the operation navigation will be explained using FIG. 7(b) and FIG. 8. In this embodiment, the operation navigation is executed using the payout number display 127 and the effect image display device 157. FIG. 7(b) is a diagram illustrating the correct operation order of the push order combination of the slot machine according to Embodiment A1 of the present invention, and FIG. This is a diagram.

For example, display data 01 is data that suggests a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, display data 02 is data that suggests a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, and display data 03 is data that suggests a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the middle reel 111. , is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112.

Therefore, in the AT mode, when "Re-gaming combinations 2, 4 to 10" or "Re-gaming combinations 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" are internally won, the first stop reel is set to the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is correct, display data 03 indicating that the first stop operation is on the right is selected, and the payout number display 127 displays the lighting mode corresponding to display data 03, as well as the effect image display. The device 157 displays an image (for example, the characters "--1") suggesting that the first stopped reel is the right reel 112.

In addition, display data 04 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. Display data 06 indicates a stop operation in which the left reel is 110, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the middle reel 111. Display data 07, which suggests a stop operation in which the left reel 110 and the third stop reel are the right reel 112, indicates that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel. Display data 08, which is data suggesting a stopping operation in which the first stopping reel is the right reel 112, data suggesting a stopping operation in which the first stopping reel is the right reel 112, the second stopping reel is the left reel 110, and the third stopping reel is the middle reel 112. , display data 09 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110.

Therefore, if the small winning combination 4CLR of "small winning combination 4" is internally won in AT mode, the first stopping reel is the middle reel 111, the second stopping reel is the left reel 110, and the third stopping reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is correct, display data 06 indicating that the first stop operation is middle, the second stop operation is left, and the third stop operation is right is selected, and the payout number display 127 shows display data 06. The lighting mode corresponding to is displayed, and the effect image display device 157 suggests that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. An image (for example, the characters "213") is displayed.

In this embodiment, it is configured such that it is possible to determine whether the internal winning combination is a replay combination or a minor combination 4 based on the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. However, for example, the stop operation for the correct answer for the small winning combination 4 may be made into three choices like a replaying winning combination, and the small winning combination 4 may also be configured to be notified using the display data 01 to 03. In this case, internal winning combinations cannot be determined based only on the lighting pattern. Further, the correct stop operation for the replay winning combination may be set to 6 options like the small win 4, and the replay winning combination may also be configured to be notified using the display data 04 to 09. In this case as well, internal winning combinations cannot be determined based only on the lighting pattern.

Note that in this embodiment, the low navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is defined as a state in which the probability of execution of operation navigation is higher than the low navigation state. A state in which operation navigation is not executed or a high navigation state may be set as a state in which operation navigation is executed. If a stop operation is performed in accordance with the operation contents of the operation navigation, an advantageous result is brought to the player, so the high navigation state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, advantageous specifically refers to the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine compared to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets on the gaming machine when playing for a predetermined period of time. It refers to the ratio, so-called payout rate (ball output rate).

In this embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied in the low navigation state (for example, when a winning combination other than a loss is won), the game shifts to the normal state of the high navigation state. After that, as shown in FIG. 6(c), for example, the transition is made in the order of confirmation notification state → AT1 state → judge state, and from this judge state, the game goes through the pullback state to the normal gaming state or AT2 state. There are routes and routes that directly transition from the judge state to the AT2 state. In this embodiment, when it is determined to shift to the AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state), a predetermined number (for example, 50 games, etc.) of the number of AT mode games (hereinafter referred to as the number of AT games) is provided. Further, although details will be described later, if a certain condition is satisfied in the high navigation state, the state shifts to the LMT (limit) state.

<AT system state transition>
FIG. 6(b) is a diagram showing performance states in each AT system game state. As shown in FIG. 6(b), each AT system gaming state is further subdivided and managed, and this is called a performance state. In detail, the performance states of the low navigation state are the normal state, and the performance states of the high navigation state include the normal state, confirmed notification state, judge state, pullback state, AT1 state, AT2 state, and LMT (limit) state. . Note that the AT1 state, AT2 state, and LMT (limit) state are states in which the number of balls produced increases in principle.

Here, the limit state basically refers to the production state from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state, which is the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state (from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state). There may be cases where the presentation state is not the limit state, but this case will be discussed later). In this embodiment, when there are 20 or fewer games remaining in the high navigation state, an ending effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ED effect") indicating the end of the high navigation state is executed.

<Production table>
Next, the effect table included in the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 9.
@
FIG. 9A shows an image of the effect table included in the first sub-control unit 400. The storage means (eg, ROM 406 and RAM 408 shown in FIG. 3) of the first sub-control unit 400 stores an effect table provided for each effect state.

The first sub-control unit 400, in command processing (step S3604) of the first sub-control unit main process described later, performs performance information (for example, performance state, high navigation state counter, etc.) included in the command received from the main control unit 300. In the subsequent performance control process (step S3605), a performance table corresponding to the performance state, etc. is referred to, and a performance is performed according to the performance state counter, etc. For example, if the current performance state is the AT1 state, the performance table corresponding to the AT1 state (AT1 state performance table) is referred to, and processing such as reading performance data for executing the AT1 performance described later from the ROM 406 is performed. If the performance data needs to be updated, the performance data is updated.

In addition, when the current performance state is a judge state, the performance table corresponding to the judge state (judge state performance table) is referred to, and processing such as reading performance data for executing the judge performance described later from the ROM 406 is performed. If the performance data needs to be updated, the performance data is updated.

FIG. 9(b) is a diagram showing an example of a judge state production table. When the performance state included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is a judge state, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to, for example, a judge state performance table as shown in FIG. A judge performance is performed corresponding to the points and the performance status counter.

Specifically, when performing performance control according to the judge state performance table shown in FIG. 9(b)(1), when the point is 1, the enemy character is <B) A judge performance is performed in which the character changes in the order of A→A→B→B when the point is 2. In addition, when performing performance control according to the judge state performance table shown in FIG. 9(b)(2), when the value of the performance state counter is N (the number of remaining games in the judge state is N), the performance mode is changed to -1→D2-1→D3-1→... Performs a judge performance that changes in the order of turns, and when the value of the performance state counter is N-1 (the number of remaining games in the judge state is N-1), the performance mode is changed. A judge performance is performed in which the numbers are changed in the order of D1-2→D2-2→D3-2→….

In addition, when the current performance state is the LMT state, the performance table corresponding to the LMT state (LMT state performance table) is referred to, and processing such as reading performance data for executing the LMT performance described later from the ROM 406 is performed. If the performance data needs to be updated, the performance data is updated.

FIG. 9(c) is a diagram showing an example of the LMT state production table. When the presentation state included in the command received from the main control section 300 is the LMT state, the first sub-control section 400 refers to the LMT state presentation table as shown in FIG. It is determined whether a corresponding opportunity (such as a start condition or an end condition for an effect) has arrived, and when the opportunity has arrived, an effect corresponding to the counter is performed.

Specifically, when performing performance control according to the LMT state performance table shown in FIG. When the pressing operation (rebaon) is received, a lottery table for setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. to select a predetermined effect, perform processing such as reading out effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406, and execute setting suggestion effect A (for example, display of a character image).

In addition, when the value of the performance state counter is 0 (the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0) and the third stop operation is received, the lottery table for setting suggestion performance B shown in FIG. 9(c)(2) is selected. A predetermined performance is selected from among the multiple types of performances B1 to B10 according to the current setting value, and processing such as reading performance data for executing the performance from the ROM 406 is performed, and setting suggestion performance B is executed. (for example, the background image of the end screen).

Further, although the details will be described later, when controlling to display a specific scene consecutively (not displaying the subsequent scene) in a linked production during a two-stakes bet game, the main control unit 300 controls the production state. Since the value of the counter is not updated, the first sub-control unit 400 continues to display the scene corresponding to the same value of the production state counter. Note that the control method for continuously displaying a specific scene (not displaying the subsequent scene) in the linked production is not limited to this example. It may be configured such that a command for displaying a subsequent scene in the performance is not transmitted.

Note that the performance mode, type, determination method, etc. of the setting suggestion performance are not limited to this example, and may be determined depending on the current performance state counter (the number of remaining games in the LMT state), as shown in FIG. 9(d), for example. The execution probability of the setting suggestion performance may also be changed. For example, when the performance state counter (the number of remaining games in the LMT state) is large than when it is small, the execution probability of the setting suggestion performance may be higher or lower than when the performance state counter is small.

<Operation of slot machine>
Based on the above characteristics, the processing of the main control section 300, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500 will be described below using the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control section main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG. 10 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupts are disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables are initialized to be stored in the RAM 308, and the WDT 314 is enabled and initialized. Configure values, etc.

In step S102, a bet number setting/start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, it is checked whether medals have been inserted or not, and preparations are made to send an insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted. Note that if the player wins a replay combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so there is no need for the player to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether the start lever 135 has been operated or not, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the process advances to step S103.

In step S103, a winning line determination process is performed to determine the number of inserted medals and to determine a valid winning line.

In step S104, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is acquired, and a winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read out according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the obtained random number value, and the results of this internal lottery are displayed. Preparations are made for transmitting the internal lottery command to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the activation combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S105, a reel stop data selection process is performed to select reel stop data based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery process. Note that this reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300. Further, in step S105, preparations are made to transmit a reel stop data command including information regarding the selected reel stop data to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S106, based on the start lever operation, the performance state control process A regarding the control of the AT system game state described above is executed. In step S107, production processing is executed. In this production processing, various production controls and the like are performed.

In step S108, a reel rotation start process is executed, and rotation of all reels 110 to 112 is started.

In step S109, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any stop button is pressed, a stop table of reel stop data is created in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Referring to this, one of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. When all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S110. In addition, in this step S109, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (in detail, for the first stop operation, a stop button reception 1 command, a second stop operation (for the stop button reception 2 command, for the third stop operation, the stop button reception 3 command) is prepared to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel Reel stop command regarding the stop position (in detail, for the first stop reel, reel stop 1 command, for the second stop operation, reel stop 2 command, for the third stop operation, reel stop command) 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, a winning determination process is performed to determine winning. In this winning determination process, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" are aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that a small winning combination 3 (Bell) has been won. Further, in this step S110, preparations are made for transmitting a winning determination command indicating the winning determination result to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S111, medal award processing is performed. In the medal awarding process, if a prize is won in any winning combination that has a payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S112, a gaming state control process is performed. In the game state control process, processing related to transition of each RT-based game state is performed, and the game state is transitioned when the start condition or end condition is satisfied. Also, preparations are made for transmitting a gaming status command including information indicating the current RT-based gaming status.

In step S113, the performance state control process B related to the control of the AT system game state described above is executed. In step S114, high navigation state termination processing regarding the termination of the high navigation state is executed.

With the above, one game ends. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S2006 in FIG. 11) of the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Start processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S2001, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing for temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

In step S2002, the WDT 314 is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed (once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

In step S2003, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each type of sensor 318. The signal state is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S2004, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed. In step S2005, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in respective time units.

In step S2006, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it becomes possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S2007, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

In step S2008, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S2003, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Illustration omitted) Executes error handling. Furthermore, settings are made for the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators according to the current gaming state.

In step S2009, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (if power cutoff is detected), the process advances to step S2011, and if the low voltage signal is off (if power cutoff is not detected), the process goes to step S2010.

In step S2010, various processes are performed to terminate the timer interrupt termination process. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S2001 are set in each original register. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S2011, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at power outage upon power restoration are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as restoration data, and power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 12. Note that FIG. 12A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 12(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 12C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 12(a).

When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S3001. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408, etc. are performed. Through this process, an area for storing internal winning information, which is information representing the result of internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming state, are provided in the RAM 408, respectively.

In step S3002, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S3003. In step S3003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S3004, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S3005, effect control processing is performed. Here, preparations for the performance are made in accordance with the performance reservation information in the performance reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing an update process of the effect data if it is necessary to update the effect data.

In step S3006, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S3005, this command is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S3007, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command for the various lamps 420 in the performance data read in step S3005, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S3008, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if the effect data read in step S3005 includes a command for the shutter 163, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. In step S3009, information output processing is performed to perform settings for transmitting a command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S3005, settings are made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S3002.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 12(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S3101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 12(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S3201, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S3002 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 12A, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S3002, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S3202, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S3009, and the random value for effect is updated.

<Processing of second sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using FIG. 13. Note that FIG. 13A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 13(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 13(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 13(d) is a flowchart of image control processing by the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S4001 of FIG. 13(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S4001. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 508, initialization of the storage area in the VRAM 536, etc. are performed.

In step S4002, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S4003. In step S4003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S4004, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S4005, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S4004, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading out effect data for controlling an image related to a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. It also includes performing processes such as reading out performance data other than this from the ROM 506, and performing update processing of the performance data when it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S4006, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S4005. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S4005, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding display images (notification images, background images) is performed. When this image control processing is completed, the process returns to step S4002.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using FIG. 13(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S4101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 13(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S4201, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S4002 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 13A, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S4002, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S4202, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control process of step S4006 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 13(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S4301, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 536), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 534 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 536. Set the command to start data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S4302, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S4303; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. wait until

In step S4303, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S4301, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 536, image size , VRAM coordinates (location coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 534. The VDP 534 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S4304, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S4305, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S5306; otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal is input. Wait for input.

In step S4306, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Operation means>
Next, the operating means provided in the game machine according to this embodiment will be explained.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of operating means including at least a first operating means provided at a position operable by the player and a second operating means provided at a position operable by the player. It is configured with operating means. The operation means means means that can be operated by at least the player. As an example of the operation means, for example, the start lever 135, stop buttons 137 to 139, bet button 130, bet button 131, performance button (bet button) 132, medal return button 133, and settlement button 134 explained using FIG. In addition to the above, a touch panel may be used, and the first operating means and the second operating means may be configured by a combination of any two of these operating means.

Note that the operating means may be composed of a plurality of operating sections (for example, four buttons on the top, bottom, left, and right sides, and one enter button); in this case, all of the plurality of operating sections (four buttons on the top, bottom, left, and right, and One decision button) may be defined as the operation means, or at least one of the plurality of operation parts (for example, two upper and lower buttons, or one decision button) may be defined as the operation means. good. In addition, when a plurality of effect buttons (including effect operation means other than buttons) are provided, it is possible to configure a combination of any two of these effect buttons.

Moreover, the operating means can be in a plurality of states, including at least a first state and a second state different from the first state. For example, when the operating means includes a light output means capable of outputting light, the first state is one in which the light output means is turned on, off, blinking, etc., and the second state is a state in which the light output means is turned on, off, blinking, etc. is in a state such as on, off, or blinking, which is different from the first state.

Further, for example, when the operating means includes a movable means, the first state is a state in which the movable means is vibrating, rotating, rising, descending, reciprocating, etc., and the second state is a state in which the movable means is The state is one of vibration, rotation, upward movement, downward movement, reciprocating movement, etc., and is different from the first state.

Further, for example, when the operating means includes a display means, the first state is a state in which the display means displays a certain display, and the second state is a state in which the display means displays a display different from the certain display. The first state may be a state in which the display means is displaying a certain display, and the second state is a state in which the display means is displaying a certain display. It may also be a state in which there is no display (or a state in which a part of a certain display is displayed).

Further, for example, when displaying an operation request to prompt an operation using the operating means, the first state is a state in which the first operation request display is displayed when the operating means is operated, and the second state is a state in which the first operation request display is displayed when the operating means is operated. , a state in which a second operation request display different from the first operation request display is displayed at the time of operation by the operating means, which may be a state different from the first state, or a state in which the second operation request display different from the first operation request display is displayed; The second state may be a state in which the operation request display is displayed when the operation means is operated, and the second state may be a state in which the operation request display is not displayed when the operation means is operated.

<Continuous hit performance>
Next, various effects in consecutive hits will be explained using FIG. 14.

Here, the continuous hit performance is a performance that notifies the player of benefits advantageous to the player, and is an example of the "first certain performance" according to the present invention. In addition, "benefits advantageous to players" include, for example, adding on AT games, adding on the number of medals earned, giving AT winning judges such as bonuses and pseudo bonuses from normal times, giving various lottery prizes, and providing bonuses to players. Examples include transition to an advantageous state (AT, bonus, high navigation state, etc.).

In this continuous hit performance (first certain performance), the first performance (in this example, the total notification TG) can be started in response to the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the performance button 132). At the same time, it is possible to start a second performance (in this example, the bonus award performance SG) in response to the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the start lever 135).

<First effect in continuous hit effect (total notification)>
FIG. 14(a)(1) to FIG. 14(a)(4) are diagrams chronologically showing an example of starting the first performance (total notification) in the continuous hit performance.

The effect shown in FIG. 14(a)(1) indicates the start of a continuous hit effect, and in this example, the continuous hit effect is started with the third stop operation as a trigger.

In this example, the continuous hit performance uses the liquid crystal display device 157 to blink a button image (operation request display) BG that imitates the appearance of the performance button (first operation means) 132, and displays a button image BG above the button image BG. , by displaying an instruction image (operation request display) IG containing the words "sequential hit", an operation request display that requests the player to operate the production button 132 multiple times (press the production button 132 repeatedly) is displayed. Is going.

Although not shown, during the period in which the operation request display (in this example, the button image BG and the instruction image IG) is displayed, the LED (light output By executing the effect of blinking the effect button (first operating means) 132, the effect button (first operation means) is shifted to the first state (flashing state).

On the other hand, in this continuous hit performance, the second performance (in this example, the benefit granting performance shown in FIG. 14(b)(3)) is performed in response to the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the start lever 135). However, at the timing shown in FIG. 14(a)(1), an operation request display requesting the player to operate the start lever (second operating means) 135 is not displayed.

The subsequent performance shown in FIG. 14(a)(2) shows the continuation of the continuous hit performance, and in this example, the AT additional notification is started when the performance button (first operation means) 132 is pressed. ing.

In the AT add-on notification of this example, each time a pressing operation of the production button (first operation means) 132 is received, a number indicating a part of the number of add-on games determined to be added is included using the liquid crystal display device 157. By displaying an image, a portion of the number of AT additional games is notified.

The subsequent performance shown in FIG. 14(a)(3) indicates the start of the total notification (first performance) during the continuous hit performance, and in this example, the performance button (the first operation means ) 132 is received a predetermined number of times (the total of the predetermined number of operation response displays is predetermined to be 80 in this example), the total notification TG is started.

In the total notification TG of this example, when the press operation of the production button (first operation means) 132 is received a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the number of additional games determined to be added is displayed using the liquid crystal display device 157. The total number of AT add-on games (in this example, 80G) is notified by displaying an image including a number indicating the total of .

The subsequent performance shown in FIG. 14(a)(4) shows an example of a result notification performance when a pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted in the next game during a continuous hit performance.

In the result notification performance KG of this example, when the press operation of the start lever (second operating means) 135 is accepted in the next game, the display of the number of AT remaining games on the liquid crystal display device 157 is changed from 153G to 232G. (=153G+80G-1G (operation using the start lever)), the result of the AT game (number of remaining AT games) is notified to the player.

<Second performance in continuous hit performance (bonus performance)>
FIG. 14(b)(1) to FIG. 14(b)(3) are diagrams chronologically showing an example of starting the second performance (privilege granting performance) in the continuous hit performance. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 14(b)(1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 14(a)(1), so a description thereof will be omitted.

The effect shown in FIG. 14(b)(2) shows the continuation of the continuous hit effect, and in this example, the next game is started when the specified number of medals (3) have been inserted. . In this example, since no operation of the performance button 132 was accepted during the period in which the operation request display corresponding to the performance button 132 was displayed, the total notification (first performance) was not started.

The subsequent performance shown in FIG. 14(b)(3) indicates the start of the bonus presentation performance (second performance) during the continuous hit performance.In this example, the start lever (second operation) is Means) When one press operation of 135 is received, the privilege award presentation SG and the result notification presentation KG explained using FIG. 14(a)(4) are started.

In the bonus presentation SG of this example, when one press operation of the start lever (second operating means) 135 is received, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display characters (in this example, GREAT ) to notify the player that a bonus (AT add-on) has been awarded.

It goes without saying that various notifications may be made using displays other than GREAT (for example, GOOD, COLL, EXCELLENT, etc.) depending on the total number of additional games.

In addition, in this example, an example was shown in which the total notification is started as the first effect and the bonus award effect is started as the second effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the start lever (second The result notification performance KG that is started in response to the pressing operation of the operating means) 135 may be used as the second performance.

Further, the first performance and the second performance may be the same performance, or one may include a performance and the other may not have a performance. Furthermore, in this example, the total notification and benefit granting performance are performances that notify players about benefits that are advantageous to them, but other types of performances may be used.

Further, the operation request display corresponding to the production button 132 is not limited to the button image BG and instruction image IG shown in FIG. In this case, for example, an operation request display as shown in FIG. 14(c) may be displayed as one of a plurality of patterns.

In the operation request display of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a button image (operation request display) imitating the appearance of the production button (first operation means) 132 as shown in FIG. 14(a)(1). By flashing a button image (big button image) BG2 that is larger than the button image BG, and displaying an instruction image (operation request display) IG2 containing the words "Press it!" above the button image BG2, the production button 132 An operation request display is performed that requests the player to operate the button multiple times (by repeatedly hitting the performance button 132).

<Judge performance>
Next, various performances in consecutive judges will be explained using FIG. 15.

Here, the judge performance is a performance for notifying the result of a game that has ended, and is an example of a "second certain performance" according to the present invention. In addition, the "results of completed games" include, for example, the results of a lottery according to internal winning combinations, the results of a lottery according to the number of CZ games, the number of times you get stuck, etc., the winning results of various lottery, the results of a lottery according to the internal winning combination, the results of a lottery according to the number of CZ games, the number of times you get stuck, etc. Results etc.

In this judge performance (a second certain performance), a third performance (in this example, an operation response performance) can be started in response to the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the performance button 132). However, the performance is not executed in response to the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the start lever 135).

In addition, when the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the start lever 135) is accepted in the judge performance (second certain performance), the first operation means is operated without starting the third performance. It may also be configured such that the operation validity period of . Further, the second certain performance is not limited to the judge performance, but may be, for example, a performance that differs in some performance modes from the consecutive hit performance described using FIG. Good too.

<Third performance in judge performance (operation response performance)>
FIG. 15(a)(1) to FIG. 15(a)(8) are diagrams chronologically showing an example of starting the third performance (result notification performance) in the judge performance.

The effect shown in FIG. 15(a)(1) indicates the start of the judge effect executed in the CZ (chance zone), and in this example, the third stop operation in the game is used as a trigger to shift to the CZ and , has started the judge performance that will be executed during CZ. In the judge performance of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a notification performance including the words "Development!" to notify that the gaming state has shifted to CZ.

Subsequently, FIGS. 15(a)(2) to 15(a)(4) are diagrams showing examples of effects in the first to third games of CZ. In this example, in the first CZ game, a judge performance that includes a video of Tono chasing the old man is performed, in the next CZ second game, a judge performance that includes a video of Tono approaching the old man is performed, and in the next CZ third game, a judge performance that includes a video of Tono approaching the old man is performed. A judge performance is being performed that includes a video of the old man catching up to him and crashing into him.

The subsequent performance shown in FIG. 15(a)(5) shows the continuation of the judge performance executed in the third CZ game. Displaying the results (winning) of the lottery to be executed (AT lottery in this example) has started.

In the result display of the judge performance in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a still image of the master catching the old man and an image containing the words "capture", indicating that the master has won the judge performance ( The player is informed that he or she has won the lottery (AT lottery) held during the CZ.

The subsequent performance shown in FIG. 15(a)(6) shows the continuation of the judge performance executed in the third CZ game, and in this example, the result display explained using FIG. 15(a)(5) In addition, confirmation production has started.

In the confirmation performance of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the button image (operation request display) BG3, which imitates the appearance of the performance button (first operation means) 132, by lighting it up (non-blinking display). By displaying an operation request requesting the player to press the production button 132, and displaying an explanatory image DG including the words "Confirm result" on the right side of the button image BG3, the production button 132 can be pressed. It is suggested to the player that by pressing the button, the lottery results during CZ can be confirmed.

In addition, the button image (operation request display) BG3 during the judge performance in this example is larger than the button image (operation request display) BG during the continuous hit performance described using FIG. 14(a)(1). In addition to being smaller, the display position, color, and display mode are different.

Specifically, the button image (operation request display) BG3 during the judge performance is displayed at the upper left of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, whereas the button image (operation request display) BG during the continuous hit performance is displayed. , is displayed at the lower center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. In addition, the button image (operation request display) BG3 during the judge performance is lit in blue (non-blinking display), while the button image (operation request display) BG during the continuous hit performance is displayed blinking in white. .

According to this example, since the button image (operation request display) BG during the repeated hit performance and the button image (operation request display) BG3 during the judge performance are at least partially different operation request displays, the repeated hit performance (first In a certain production), the second operation means functions as a so-called hidden button, and it can be suggested that the production (second production) corresponding to the operation of this second operation means is a hidden button production. . On the other hand, in the judge performance (second certain performance), the operation of the second operating means is invalid, and it can be suggested that the performance corresponding to the operation of the second operating means will not be executed.

Note that the button image (operation request display) during the repeated hit performance and the button image (operation request display) during the judge performance may be different from each other in at least one of the size, color, and display position. .

In addition, the button image (operation request display) during the repeated hit performance may be displayed in any one of multiple patterns, but the button image (operation request display) during the judge performance may be displayed in any one of multiple patterns. ) is preferably displayed in one pattern.

Although not shown, during the period in which the operation request display (in this example, the button image BG3 and the explanation image DG) is displayed, the LED (light output By executing the effect of lighting up the effect button (first operation means), the effect button (first operation means) 132 is changed from the first state (flashing state) of the effect button (first operation means) 132 during the continuous hit effect. A transition is made to the second state (lighting state).

According to this example, it can be implied that there is a period during which the operation of the second operating means is valid, depending on the state of the operating means and the manner of displaying the operation request.

The subsequent performance shown in FIGS. 15(a) and (7) indicates the start of the operation response performance (third performance) during the judge performance. In this example, the performance button (first operation response) is pressed during the judge performance. Means) The operation response production RG is started when one press operation of 132 is received.

In the operation response production RG of this example, when one press operation of the production button (first operation means) 132 is received, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to suggest the game and internal winning combination that won the AT lottery. (In this example, the lottery result in CZ is announced by displaying an image containing the characters ``Watermelon'', which is an internal winning combination, in the 2nd G of CZ).

In addition, in this embodiment, the winning probability is configured to differ depending on the internal winning combination, but one or more combinations such as the number of games of CZ, the number of times it gets stuck, the number of times it enters CZ, the opportunity to enter, the acquisition status of chance-up items, etc. It may be configured such that the probability of winning differs depending on the winner.

The subsequent performance shown in FIG. 15(a)(8) shows an example of the performance when the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted in the next game during the judge performance.In this example, during the judge performance, Even when a press operation on the start lever (second operating means) 135 is received, no performance is performed in response to the press operation.

In FIG. 15(b)(7) to FIG. 15(b)(8), the button image (operation request display) BG3 is displayed during the judge performance, but the performance button (first operation means) 132 is not operated. It is a figure showing an example of a performance when.

In this example, if the performance button (first operation means) 132 is not operated after starting the confirmation performance explained using FIGS. 132 until a predetermined opportunity arrives (for example, until the next game starts or the operation validity period of the first operation means has elapsed) ), the confirmation performance continues.

<Variation example of continuous hit performance>
Next, using FIG. 16, a modification of the continuous hit sequence described using FIG. 14 will be described.

In the continuous hit performance (first certain performance) of this example, after starting the first performance (in this example, total notification) in response to the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the performance button 132) , when the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the start lever 135) is received while the first performance is being executed, the second operation is performed without executing the remaining part of the first performance. A second performance (in this example, a result notification performance) can be started in response to the operation of the operating means (start lever 135).

16(1), 16(2), and 16(4) are drawings corresponding to FIG. 14(a)(1), 14(a)(2), and 14(a)(4) above. This is a diagram chronologically showing an example in which a second performance (result notification performance) is started during execution of the first performance (total notification performance) in a continuous hit performance.

Specifically, in the AT additional notification (first effect) shown in FIG. The number of AT add-on games is notified by displaying an image including a number indicating a part of the number of add-on games decided to be added.

The subsequent effect shown in FIG. 16(4) shows an example of a result notification effect (second effect) when a press operation of the start lever 135 is received during execution of AT additional notification.

In the result notification performance of this example, when the press operation of the start lever (second operating means) 135 is received while the AT additional notification is being executed, the AT additional notification is executed in the middle (displayed in FIG. 16 (2)). (before the total of the results displayed for each press operation reaches 80), and the display of the number of AT remaining games on the liquid crystal display device 157 is changed from 153G to 232G (= 153G + 80G - 1G (operation using the start lever)). By updating, the result of the AT game (the number of remaining AT games) is notified to the player.

<Claim invention 1>
As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present invention 1 (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a first operation means (for example, a performance button 132) and a second operating means (for example, a start lever 135) provided at a position that can be operated by a player, the game machine is equipped with For example, the continuous hit effect shown in FIG. 14) is the effect corresponding to the operation of the first operating means (hereinafter referred to as the "first effect". For example, the effect shown in FIG. 14(a)(3)) This is a performance that can start a total notification TG), and the first certain performance is a performance (hereinafter referred to as "second performance") corresponding to the operation of the second operating means. For example, in FIG. ) A performance that can start the special performance SG shown in (3)), and is a performance that is different from the first performance (hereinafter referred to as a "second performance"). For example, as shown in FIG. The judge performance shown in FIG. The second certain presentation is a presentation that does not start in response to the operation of the second operating means, and the first certain presentation corresponds to the first operating means. This is an effect including an effect in which an operation request display (hereinafter referred to as "first operation request display"; for example, the button image BG and instruction image IG shown in FIG. 14(a)(1)) is displayed, and the second A certain effect is such that an operation request display (hereinafter referred to as "second operation request display") corresponding to the first operation means (for example, button image BG shown in FIG. 15(a)(6)) is displayed. The game machine is characterized in that the first operation request display and the second operation request display are at least partially different displays.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention 1, since the first operation request display in the first certain performance and the second operation request display in the second certain performance are different operation request displays, the first operation request display In a certain performance, the second operating means functions as a so-called hidden button, and it can be suggested that the performance (second performance) corresponding to the operation of the second operating means is a hidden button performance. On the other hand, in a certain second performance, the operation of the second operating means is invalid, and it can be suggested that the performance corresponding to the operation of the second operating means will not be executed.

Further, the first operating means may be configured to be in a certain state (hereinafter referred to as "first state") for at least a part of the period in which the first operation request display is displayed. The first operation means is configured to display a certain state (hereinafter referred to as a "second state") during at least a part of the period during which the second operation request display is displayed. For example, the first state and the second state may be different states.

With such a configuration, it can be implied that there is a period during which the operation of the second operating means is valid depending on the state of the operating means and the manner of displaying the operation request.

Further, the first operation request display and the second operation request display are displays that include a display that imitates the appearance of the first operation means (for example, the appearance of the production button 132), and The operation request display and the second operation request display may be different from each other in at least one of size, color, and display position.

With such a configuration, the first operation request display and the second operation request display are operation request displays corresponding to the first operation means, and the first operation request display and the second operation request display It can be made clearer that the effects differ depending on the operation of the first operation means.

Further, the first certain performance is a continuous hit performance (for example, the continuous hit performance shown in FIG. 14), and the first performance is such that a plurality of the first operation means are operated in the first certain performance. The second performance may be a performance that is started by operating the second operating means once in the first certain performance. .

With such a configuration, it can be suggested that the first operating means is effective in a certain first production, and it can also be shown that the role of the first operating means is different from that of the second operating means in a certain first production. can be made more clear.

In addition, the first performance includes benefits advantageous to players (for example, adding on AT games, adding on the number of medals acquired, giving AT winning judges such as bonuses and pseudo bonuses from normal times, and various lottery tickets). This is a performance that notifies the player regarding the award, transition to a state advantageous to the player (AT, bonus, high navigation state, etc.), and the second certain performance is a performance that notifies the player of the result of the completed game (for example, internal winnings, etc.). It may be an effect that notifies the results of a lottery according to the winning combination, the result of a lottery according to the number and number of CZ games, the number of winnings, etc., the winning results of various kinds of lottery, the results of mini-games, etc.).

With such a configuration, the difference between a certain first performance in which the second operating means is effective and a certain second performance in which the second operating means is ineffective can be made clearer, The gameplay can be improved.

Further, the first certain performance may be a performance that does not include a performance in which an operation request display corresponding to the second operation means is displayed.

With such a configuration, the second operation means functions as a so-called hidden button in the first certain performance, and the performance (second performance) corresponding to the operation of the second operation means is the hidden button performance. It can be suggested that

Further, the first operation request display may be displayed in any one of a plurality of patterns (for example, the pattern shown in FIG. 14(a)(1) and the pattern shown in FIG. 14(c)(1)). The second operation request display may be a display displayed in one pattern (for example, the pattern shown in FIG. 15(a)(6)).

With such a configuration, the difference between the first operation request display and the second operation request display can be made clearer, and convenience for the player can be improved.

Further, when the second operating means is operated after the first operating means is operated once or multiple times in the first certain production (for example, as shown in FIG. 16, the production button 132 is configured to perform a part of the first performance and start the second performance without executing the remaining part when the start lever 135 is operated after is repeatedly pressed. Good too.

With such a configuration, it is possible to cancel (interrupt) the first performance started by the operation using the first operation means and start the second performance, thereby increasing the convenience for the player. can.

<Judge victory performance>
Next, various performances in the judge victory performance will be explained using FIG. 17.

Here, the judge victory performance is a performance related to the provision or continuation of benefits advantageous to the player, and is an example of "a certain performance" according to the present invention. In addition, "benefits advantageous to players" include, for example, adding on AT games, adding on the number of medals earned, giving AT winning judges such as bonuses and pseudo bonuses from normal times, giving various lottery prizes, and providing bonuses to players. Examples include transition to an advantageous state (AT, bonus, high navigation state, etc.). Further, a certain performance may be a performance that is not related to the provision or continuation of benefits advantageous to the player.

In this judge victory performance (a certain performance), when an operation request display corresponding to the operation means (in this example, the performance button 132) is displayed in relation to the judge victory performance (a certain performance) (in the first case) ), and the operation request display corresponding to the operation means (performance button 132) may not be displayed in connection with the judge victory performance (a certain performance) (second case).

In the first case, when the user is informed that a benefit will be given or that the benefit will continue, and the operation request display is displayed, the operation means (performance button 132) is operated. The response performance begins.

<Operation request display and operation response performance in judge victory performance>
Figures 17(a)(1) to 17(a)(8) are diagrams chronologically showing an example in which an operation response performance is started after displaying an operation request display in a judge victory performance. 15(a)(1) to FIG. 15(a)(8).

The effect shown in FIG. 17(a)(1) indicates the start of the judge victory effect executed in the CZ (chance zone), and in this example, the third stop operation in the game is used as a trigger to shift to the CZ. At the same time, we have started a judge victory performance that will be performed during CZ.

In the judge victory performance of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a notification performance including the words "Development!" to notify that the game has moved to CZ. Note that the trigger for starting the judge victory performance (a certain performance) is not limited to the third stop operation, and may be, for example, the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112.

Subsequently, FIG. 17(a)(2) to FIG. 17(a)(4) are diagrams showing examples of performances in the first to third games of CZ. In this example, in the first CZ game, a judge victory effect is performed that includes a video of Tono chasing the old man, in the next CZ second game, a judge victory effect is performed that includes a video of Tono approaching the old man, and in the next CZ third game, a judge victory effect is performed that includes a video of Tono approaching the old man. , is running a judge victory production that includes a video of Tono catching up to and clashing with the old man.

In this example, the judge victory effect continues for three games, but from the player's perspective, it does not matter whether or not he has won against the judge until the third game of CZ (that is, whether he has won AT or not). Constructed in such a way that it cannot be identified. In addition, in this embodiment, an AT lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination established when the start lever is operated for each game of CZ, and once the AT lottery is won and there are CZ remaining, the AT lottery is performed. Although the configuration is such that there is no lottery, it may be configured such that a lottery is held in each CZ game regardless of the lottery result in order to have a possibility of winning AT twice or more. In this case, it is sufficient to notify that there have been multiple wins in "Result Confirmation" to be described later.

The subsequent performance shown in FIG. 17(a)(5) shows the continuation of the judge victory performance executed in the third CZ game, and in this example, with the third stop operation of the third CZ game as a trigger, The display of the results (winning) of the lottery (in this example, the AT lottery) to be executed has started.

In the result display of the judge victory performance in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a still image of the master catching the old man and an image containing the words "captured". The player is informed that he/she has won the lottery (AT lottery) executed during CZ.

The subsequent performance shown in FIG. 17(a)(6) shows the continuation of the judge victory performance executed in the third CZ game, and in this example, the result explained using FIG. 17(a)(5) In addition to the display, a confirmation performance has started.

In the confirmation performance of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the button image (operation request display) BG3 that imitates the appearance of the performance button (operation means) 132 in a lighting display (non-blinking display). An operation request display is displayed to request the player to press the button image BG3, and an explanatory image DG including the words "Confirm result" is displayed on the right side of the button image BG3. This suggests to players that they can check the lottery results during CZ.

The subsequent performance shown in FIGS. 17(a) and 17(7) shows the start of the operation response performance during the judge victory performance, and in this example, the press operation of the performance button (operation means) 132 is performed during the judge victory performance. Once received, the operation response performance RG is started.

In the operation response production RG of this example, when one press operation of the production button (operation means) 132 is received, a character indicating the number of games won in the AT lottery and an internal winning combination is displayed using the liquid crystal display device 157. (In this example, the lottery result in the CZ is announced by displaying an image including the winning combination of watermelon, which is an internal winning combination, in the 2nd G of the CZ).

Note that the trigger for starting the operation response performance is not limited to the pressing operation of the performance button (operation means) 132, but is triggered by the next operation after the operation validity period of the performance button (operation means) 132 has elapsed (for example, the start lever 135 , a bet button pressing operation, etc.).

The subsequent performance shown in FIG. 17(a)(8) shows an example of the performance when the press operation of the start lever 135 is accepted in the next game during the judge victory performance. Even if a press operation of the start lever 135 is received in , the performance (confirmation of lottery results during CZ) corresponding to the press operation is not executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a series of flows from CZ to AT is shown, but for example, the CZ part has 3G remaining at the end of AT, and this 3G function functions as a judge performance to determine whether or not AT will continue. In this case, the "confirmation of lottery results" is to notify the cause of continuation of AT.

FIG. 17(b)(1) to FIG. 17(b)(2) are diagrams showing an example of a judge defeat performance (a performance when the AT lottery in CZ is non-winning).

In this example, instead of displaying the lottery result (winning) explained using FIGS. 17(a)(5), after starting a defeat effect corresponding to the lottery result display (non-winning), ) The operation request display explained using (6) is not displayed, and the display shifts to another performance (in this example, returns to the normal performance).

In the defeat performance of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a still image of the master escaping the old man and an image containing the words "escape", indicating that the master has lost in the judge performance (during the CZ). The player is informed that he/she has lost in the lottery to be executed (AT lottery).

<Judge revival production>
Next, various performances in the judge resurrection performance will be explained using FIGS. 18 and 19.

In this judge resurrection performance (a certain performance), when an operation request display corresponding to the operation means (in this example, the performance button 132) is displayed in connection with the judge resurrection performance (a certain performance) (in the first case) ), and there is also a case (second case) in which the operation request display corresponding to the operation means (performance button 132) is not displayed in connection with the judge resurrection performance (a certain performance).

In the second case, it is announced that the benefit will be granted after once indicating that the benefit will not be granted, or that the benefit will continue after once indicating that the benefit will not continue. If the operation means (performance button 132) is operated while the operation request display is not displayed, there is a case (third case) in which the operation response performance is started, and in this third case, the operation response performance is started. After this is executed, it is announced that the benefit will be granted or that the benefit will continue.

FIGS. 18(1) to 18(9) are diagrams chronologically showing examples of effects when the operation request display is not displayed in the judge revival effect (second case). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 18(1) to 18(4) are the same as the judge victory effect described using FIG. 17, so a description thereof will be omitted.

The effect shown in FIG. 18 (5) is a continuation of the judge revival effect executed in the third CZ game, and in this example, the lottery executed during the CZ is triggered by the third stop operation of the third CZ game. (In this example, AT lottery) result display (non-winning) has started.

In the result display of the judge resurrection performance in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a still image of the master escaping the old man and an image containing the word "escape", indicating that the judge has been defeated in the judge resurrection performance. The player is notified of this fact (that he/she has lost in the lottery (AT lottery) executed during the CZ, that is, confirmation of the lottery result during the CZ).

In addition, in this example, a series of flows from CZ to AT are shown, but for example, the CZ part is the remaining 3G at the end of AT, and this 3G functions as a judge performance to determine whether or not AT will continue. In this case, "confirmation of lottery results" is to notify the cause of not continuing AT.

The subsequent performance shown in FIG. 18 (6) shows an example of a revival performance. In the resurrection performance of this example, in the next game, upon receiving the press operation of the start lever 135, the master will raise the old man. By displaying a video of the player chasing again and an image containing the words "Let's run away!", the player is notified that a benefit (in this example, an AT game) will be given or continued.

Figures 19 (1) to (10) show the case where the operation request display is not displayed in the judge revival performance (second case) and the case where the operation means is operated and the operation response performance is started (third case). ) is a diagram showing an example of the performance in chronological order. Note that the effects other than the effect shown in FIG. 19(6) are the same as the judge resurrection effect described using FIG. 18, so the description thereof will be omitted.

The performance shown in FIG. 19 (6) indicates the start of the operation response performance during the judge resurrection performance. In this example, during the judge resurrection performance, the performance button (operation means) 132 which is a hidden button is pressed Once received, the operation response performance RG is started.

In the operation response production RG of this example, when one press operation of the production button (operation means) 132 is received, a character indicating the number of games won in the AT lottery and an internal winning combination is displayed using the liquid crystal display device 157. (In this example, the lottery result in the CZ is announced by displaying an image including the winning with the watermelon internal winning combination in the 2nd G of the CZ, that is, confirmation of the lottery result in the CZ).

In addition, in this embodiment, a series of flows from CZ to AT is shown, but for example, the CZ part has 3G remaining at the end of AT, and this 3G function functions as a judge performance to determine whether or not AT will continue. In this case, the "confirmation of lottery results" is to notify the cause of continuation of AT.

According to this example, even if the operation request display corresponding to the production button (operation means) 132 is not displayed, the operation response production RG may be started in response to the operation of the production button (operation means) 132. Therefore, by giving the player a sense of discomfort in relation to a certain performance, it is possible to draw attention to the operation request display.

Note that this operation response performance RG also functions as a performance that notifies the cause of granting or continuation of a benefit (a performance that foretells that a revival performance will be executed in the next game). Furthermore, the operation response performance RG in the judge revival performance of this example and the operation response performance RG in the judge victory performance described using FIGS. 17(a) (7) are the same performance.

<Judge defeat performance>
Next, various effects in the judge defeat effect will be explained using FIG. 20.

In this judge defeat performance (a certain performance), when an operation request display corresponding to the operation means (in this example, the performance button 132) is displayed in relation to the judge defeat performance (a certain performance) (in the first case ), and there is also a case (second case) in which the operation request display corresponding to the operation means (performance button 132) is not displayed in connection with the judge defeat performance (a certain performance).

In the second case, it is announced that the benefit will be granted after once indicating that the benefit will not be granted, or that the benefit will continue after once indicating that the benefit will not continue. If the operation means (performance button 132) is operated in a state where the operation request display is not displayed, the operation response performance may not be started (fourth case).

Figures 20 (1) to (7) show cases where the operation request display is not displayed in the judge defeat performance (second case) and cases where the operation response performance does not start even though the operating means is operated (the fourth case). FIG. 3 is a diagram chronologically showing an example of the performance of the case). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 20(1) to 20(4) are the same as the judge victory effect described using FIG. 17, so the description thereof will be omitted.

The effect shown in FIG. 20 (5) is a continuation of the judge defeat effect executed in the third CZ game, and in this example, the lottery executed during the CZ is triggered by the third stop operation of the third CZ game. (In this example, AT lottery) result display (non-winning) has started.

In the result display of the judge defeat performance in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a still image of the master running away from the old man and an image containing the words "escape", thereby indicating that the judge has lost the judge defeat performance. The player is notified of this fact (that he/she has lost in the lottery (AT lottery) executed during CZ).

The subsequent performance shown in FIG. 20 (6) is a continuation of the defeat performance shown in FIG. , the operation response performance is not started, but is configured to move to another performance (in this example, return to the normal performance).

<Variation example of judge revival performance>
Next, a modified example of the judge resurrection effect will be described using FIG. 21.

In the judge revival performance explained using FIG. 19, the defeat performance is started using the third stop operation as a trigger, and when the operation of the operation means (performance button 132) is received after the third stop operation, the operation response performance is performed. Although an example has been shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured such that the operation response effect is started when the operation means is operated while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating.

FIG. 21 shows a case where the operation response effect is started when the operation means is operated while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, when the operation request display is not displayed in the judge revival effect (second case). It is a diagram showing an example of performance in chronological order. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 21(1) to 21(5) are the same as the judge resurrection effect described using FIG. 19, so the description thereof will be omitted.

The effect shown in FIG. 21(6) is an example of a revival effect. In the revival effect of this example, in the next game after the game in which the defeat effect was executed, it is assumed that the press operation of the start lever 135 has been received. As a trigger, the player is informed that a benefit (in this example, AT game) will be granted or continued by displaying a video of Tono chasing the old man again and an image that includes the words "Let me run away!" are doing.

The subsequent performance shown in FIG. 21 (7) indicates the start of the operation response performance during the judge revival performance. The operation response effect RG is started when one press operation of the effect button (operation means) 132, which is a hidden button, is received while at least one of the buttons is rotating.

In the operation response production RG of this example, when one press operation of the production button (operation means) 132 is received, a character indicating the number of games won in the AT lottery and an internal winning combination is displayed using the liquid crystal display device 157. (In this example, the lottery result in the CZ is announced by displaying an image including the winning with the watermelon internal winning combination in the 2nd G of the CZ, that is, confirmation of the lottery result in the CZ).

In addition, in this embodiment, a series of flows from CZ to AT is shown, but for example, the CZ part has 3G remaining at the end of AT, and this 3G function functions as a judge performance to determine whether or not AT will continue. In this case, the "confirmation of lottery results" is to notify the cause of continuation of AT.

In addition, in the judge victory effect explained using FIG. 17, the period from when the third stop operation is accepted in the game until the start of the next game is the operation acceptance valid period in which the operation of the operation means can be accepted. However, in this example, the period from when the third stop operation is accepted in the game until the third stop operation is accepted in the next game is the operation acceptance valid period, and the judge victory performance (in the first case ) and the judge resurrection performance (in the second case), the operation reception validity period is different.

Note that the operation reception valid period is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a period from when the third stop operation is accepted in the game until a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, or when the third stop operation is received in the game. It may be the period from when the operation is accepted until a specified number of medals are bet, and the starting point of the operation acceptance valid period is the pressing operation of the start lever 135, the first stop operation, or the second stop. It may be after the operation is received.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 21 (8), the operation response effect RG continues until the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button (operation means) 132 passes (in this example, until the third stop operation is accepted). May be executed. Further, in this example, an example is shown in which the operation response production RG is started when the operation of the production button 132 is received, but when the operation of other operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) is received, the operation is performed. A response performance RG may be started.

<Claim invention 2-1>
As explained above, the game machine according to the present invention 2-1 (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has an operation means (for example, the performance button ), in which an operation request display (for example, the button image BG shown in FIG. 17(a)(6)) corresponding to the operation means is provided in connection with a certain performance (for example, a judge performance). (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"; for example, the judge victory performance shown in FIG. 17), and the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed in connection with the certain performance ( Hereinafter, it will be referred to as a "second case." For example, there is a judge resurrection effect shown in FIG. In this case, an operation response effect (for example, operation response effect RG shown in FIG. 17(a)(7), operation response effect RG shown in FIG. 19(6)) corresponding to the operation of the operating means is started. This is a game machine that features:

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to Invention 2-1 (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a first operating means (for example, the performance button 132) provided at a position that can be operated by a player. and a second operation means (for example, a start lever 135) provided at a position that can be operated by a player, the game machine comprising: There are cases where a corresponding operation request display (for example, the button image BG shown in FIGS. 17A and 6) is displayed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"; for example, the judge victory effect shown in FIG. 17). , when the operation request display corresponding to the first operation means and the second operation means is not displayed in relation to the certain performance (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"; for example, the judge shown in FIG. 19 In the first case, at least when the first operating means is operated, there is an operation response effect (for example, FIG. 17(a)) corresponding to the operation of the first operating means. 7) is started, and in the second case, when at least the second operating means is operated, the operation response effect (for example, , the operation response effect RG shown in FIG. 19(6)) is started.

According to the game machine according to the present invention 2-1, even if the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed, the operation response performance may be started in response to the operation of the operation means. By giving the player a sense of discomfort in relation to the performance, it is possible to draw attention to the operation request display.

<Claim invention 2-2>
As explained above, the gaming machine according to Invention 2-2 (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. ), the gaming machine is a slot machine, and an operation request display (for example, FIG. 17(a)) corresponding to the operation means in connection with a certain performance (for example, a judge performance). There are cases in which the button image BG shown in (6) is displayed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"; for example, the judge victory effect shown in FIG. 17), and the operation means is displayed in connection with the certain effect. There are cases in which the corresponding operation request display is not displayed (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"; for example, the judge resurrection effect shown in FIG. 19), and in either of the first case and the second case. However, when the operating means is operated, the operation response effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means (for example, the operation response effect RG shown in FIG. 17(a)(7), the operation shown in FIG. 19(6)) The game machine is characterized in that the response production RG) is started, and in the first case, the display of the operation request display is started in a state where all the reels are stopped.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to Invention 2-1 (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a first operating means (for example, the performance button 132) provided at a position that can be operated by a player. and a second operating means (for example, a start lever 135) provided at a position that can be operated by a player, the gaming machine being a slot machine, and a second operating means (for example, a start lever 135) provided at a position that can be operated by a player. A case where an operation request display (for example, the button image BG shown in FIG. 17A) (6) corresponding to the first operation means is displayed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"; for example, 17), and the operation request display corresponding to the first operating means and the second operating means is not displayed in relation to the certain performance (hereinafter referred to as "the second case"). For example, in the first case, when the first operating means is operated, an operation response corresponding to the operation of the first operating means The effect (for example, the operation response effect RG shown in FIG. 17(a)(7)) is started, and in the second case, when at least the second operation means is operated, the second operation means An operation response effect (for example, the operation response effect RG shown in FIG. 19 (6)) is started in response to the operation, and in the first case, the operation request display is displayed with all reels stopped. This game machine is characterized in that:

According to the game machine according to Invention 2-2, even if the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed, the operation response effect may be started in response to the operation of the operation means. By giving the player a sense of discomfort in relation to the performance, it is possible to draw attention to the operation request display. Further, when the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is displayed, since the operation request display is started after all the reels have stopped, the player can concentrate on the operation using the operation means.

<Claim invention 2-3>
As explained above, the game machine according to Invention 2-3 (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has an operation means (for example, the performance button 13 ), in which an operation request display (for example, the button image BG shown in FIG. 17(a)(6)) corresponding to the operation means is provided in connection with a certain performance (for example, a judge performance). (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"; for example, the judge victory performance shown in FIG. 17), and the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed in connection with the certain performance ( Hereinafter, it will be referred to as a "second case." For example, there is a judge resurrection effect shown in FIG. In this case, an operation response effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means (for example, operation response effect RG shown in FIG. 17(a)(7), operation response effect RG shown in FIG. 19(6)) is started, This game machine is characterized in that the first case appears more easily than the second case.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present invention 2-3 (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a first operation means (for example, the performance button 132) provided at a position that can be operated by the player. and a second operation means (for example, a start lever 135) provided at a position that can be operated by a player, the game machine comprising: There are cases where a corresponding operation request display (for example, the button image BG shown in FIGS. 17A and 6) is displayed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"; for example, the judge victory effect shown in FIG. 17). , when the operation request display corresponding to the first operation means and the second operation means is not displayed in relation to the certain performance (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"; for example, the judge shown in FIG. 19 In the first case, at least when the first operating means is operated, there is an operation response effect (for example, FIG. 17(a)) corresponding to the operation of the first operating means. 7) is started, and in the second case, when at least the second operating means is operated, the operation response effect (for example, , operation response effect RG shown in FIG. 19(6)) is started, and the game machine is characterized in that the first case is more likely to appear than the second case.

According to the game machine according to the present invention 2-3, even if the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed, the operation response effect may be started in response to the operation of the operation means, so that By giving the player a sense of discomfort in relation to the performance, it is possible to draw attention to the operation request display. Further, since the operation request display corresponding to the operation means appears more frequently than the case where the operation request display is not displayed, it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort. Note that the configuration may be such that the second case occurs more easily than the first case.

<Claim invention 2-4>
As explained above, the game machine according to the present invention 2-4 (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. ), in which an operation request display (for example, the button image BG shown in FIG. 17(a)(6)) corresponding to the operation means is provided in connection with a certain performance (for example, a judge performance). (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"; for example, the judge victory performance shown in FIG. 17), and the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed in connection with the certain performance ( Hereinafter, it will be referred to as a "second case." For example, there is a judge resurrection effect shown in FIG. In this case, an operation response effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means (for example, operation response effect RG shown in FIG. 17(a)(7), operation response effect RG shown in FIG. 19(6)) is started, The game machine is characterized in that the performance is a performance performed in connection with benefits advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present invention 2-4 (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a first operation means (for example, the performance button 132) provided at a position that can be operated by the player. and a second operation means (for example, a start lever 135) provided at a position that can be operated by a player, the game machine comprising: There are cases where a corresponding operation request display (for example, the button image BG shown in FIGS. 17A and 6) is displayed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"; for example, the judge victory effect shown in FIG. 17). , when the operation request display corresponding to the first operation means and the second operation means is not displayed in relation to the certain performance (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"; for example, the judge shown in FIG. 19 In the first case, at least when the first operating means is operated, there is an operation response effect (for example, FIG. 17(a)) corresponding to the operation of the first operating means. 7) is started, and in the second case, when at least the second operating means is operated, the operation response effect (for example, , an operation response performance RG shown in FIG. 19(6)) is started, and the certain performance is a performance executed in connection with a benefit advantageous to the player.

According to the game machine according to Invention 2-4, even if the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed, the operation response effect may be started in response to the operation of the operation means, so that By giving the player a sense of discomfort in relation to the performance, it is possible to draw attention to the operation request display. Further, since a certain performance is a performance performed in connection with a benefit advantageous to the player, it is possible to improve the player's expectations.

In addition, the above-mentioned performance may include benefits advantageous to the player (for example, adding on AT games, adding on the number of medals acquired, giving AT winning judges such as bonuses and pseudo bonuses from normal times, giving various lottery prizes, It is a performance related to the granting or continuation of a state advantageous to a person (such as transition to an AT, bonus, etc.), and in the first case, the provision of the benefit or the continuation of the benefit. In the first case, when the operation means (or at least the first operation means) is operated while the operation request display is displayed, the operation response effect is started; In the second case, it is announced that the benefit will be granted after once indicating that the benefit will not be granted, or it is announced that the benefit will continue after once indicating that the benefit will not continue. In the second case, when the operation means (or at least the second operation means) is operated while the operation request display is not displayed, the operation response effect is started (hereinafter referred to as , referred to as a "third case"), and in the third case, it is announced that the benefit will be granted or that the benefit will continue after the operation response effect is executed. It may be something.

With such a configuration, when the operation response performance is started when the operation means is operated while the operation request display is not displayed (the third case), it is possible to provide advantageous benefits to the player or This functions as a continuous notice and can increase the player's interest.

In the second case, when the operation response effect is not started when the operation means (or at least the second operation means) is operated while the operation request display is displayed (hereinafter referred to as (referred to as a "fourth case"), and the benefit may be more easily granted or continued in the third case than in the fourth case.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation in the case where the operation response performance is started when the operation means is operated while the operation request display is not displayed (the third case). can.

Further, the operation response performance may be the same performance in the first case and the second case.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the operation response effect the same regardless of whether or not an operation request is displayed, and it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort.

Furthermore, the operation response performance may be a performance that notifies the cause of granting or continuation of the benefit.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation when the operation response performance is started, so that the player can be made to actively perform operations using the operation means.

Further, the length of the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid may be different between the first case and the second case. Furthermore, the length of the period during which the operation of the first operating means is valid in the first case is different from the length of the period during which the operation of the second operating means is valid in the second case. It's okay.

With such a configuration, the difference between the first case and the second case can be made clear, and the gameplay can be enhanced.

Further, the period during which the operation of the operating means is effective may be longer or shorter in the first case than in the second case. Furthermore, the length of the period during which the operation of the second operating means is valid in the second case is longer than the period during which the operation of the first operating means is valid in the first case. It can be long or short.

In the second case, even if at least one of the plurality of reels is rotating, when the operating means (or the second operating means) is operated, the An operation response effect may be started.

With such a configuration, even while the reels are rotating, an operation by the operating means can be accepted and an operation response performance can be started, thereby increasing the performance effect.

Further, in either of the first case and the second case, if the operating means is not operated, the operation response effect may not be started. Further, when the first operating means is not operated in the first case, and/or when the second operating means is not operated in the second case, the operation response effect is It may not be started.

With such a configuration, the difference from the case where the operating means is operated can be made clear.

Further, the game machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one in which game balls enclosed within the game machine are reused. Further, the main control section, the first sub-control section, and the second sub-control section may be configured in one chip, or the main control section and the first sub-control section may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Moreover, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Further, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Further, by applying the content described in one of the plurality of configurations described in the above embodiment to another configuration, the range of games may be further expanded.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the slot machine of this embodiment, a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of internal winning of the plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop match the predetermined payout conditions, the game media will be paid out and the game will end; if not, the game media will be paid out. This is a game machine that plays a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 22 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface (not shown) are stored in the center of the main body 101, and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the reel window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible. By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Further, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the reel window 113 is arranged on the back side of each reel 110 to 112. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. In addition, inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each reel 110 to 112, and the light emitting part of this optical sensor A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the light-receiving section and the light-receiving section. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the winning line 114 that becomes valid. The valid winning line 114 is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. There are five winning lines 114. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line will be valid, and if two medals are being bet, three horizontal winning lines (the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line) will be valid, and the medal will be When 3 coins are bet, 5 lines including the downward right winning line and the upward right winning line may be made valid as the winning lines. Note that the number of winning lines 114 is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right horizontal winning line, The five winning lines, the downward winning line and the upward winning line to the right, may be set as valid winning lines, or the same number of winning lines may be uniformly set as valid winning lines, regardless of the number of bets.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery for winning combinations, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. be. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, up to a maximum of three coins, two coins are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as the MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up. Hereinafter, in this embodiment, a game in which three medals are inserted may be referred to as a "three-bet bet game," and a game in which two medals are inserted may be referred to as a "two-bet bet game."

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In this embodiment, the stored token number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout token number display 127 are composed of seven segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of this embodiment also functions as an effect device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, the order of operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with each reel 110 to 112. . More specifically, by operating the left stop button 137, the left reel 110 can be stopped, by operating the middle stop button 138, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the right stop button 139, the middle reel 111 can be stopped. By operating the right reel 112, it is possible to stop the right reel 112.

Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation will be referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as the second stop operation, the last stop operation will be referred to as the third stop operation, and the first stop operation will be referred to as the third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is sometimes referred to as the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is sometimes referred to as the third stop reel. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The order of operations in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 and the stop operation is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order", and the order of operations in which the first stop reel is the center reel 111 and the stop operation is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order". The operation sequence in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 as a stop operation is called the "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push." Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body may be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. A medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided at the bottom of the title panel 162.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to enliven the game. A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided at the top of the presentation device 160. This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed on the back side of the shutter 163. , effect image display device), and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (on the player's side). It has a structure that appears.

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of this embodiment also functions as a presentation device that executes a presentation to be described later.

The effect button 192 is a button that can be operated when executing a predetermined effect. In this embodiment, based on the operation of the performance button 192, a performance suggesting the provision of a benefit may be executed.

Note that it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device, as long as it is configured to be able to display various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, etc. , a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that the entirety can be visually recognized by the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

<Circuit configuration of control section>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 23. Note that this figure is a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 is equipped with a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used for internal lottery of winning combinations, stop of reels, etc. ROM 306 for storing position etc., RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. Equipped with WDT (watch dog timer) 314. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz. =1.504ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a number in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. It is equipped with a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal), and when the start signal is input from this start signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (main processing of the main control section described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal input from the medal slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, a stop button 139 sensor, a payment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, an index sensor for the reel 110, The state of the reel 111 index sensor, reel 112 index sensor, performance button 192 sensor, etc.) is monitored.

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and insert medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 as medals to be inserted into the game. Detect input operation in case. The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of reel 110, the index sensor of reel 111, and the index sensor of reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes, become the level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives a solenoid provided on the medal selector 170 that sorts the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided on the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored number of coins display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 is provided for driving the display 126 and the payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects a slot to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. Outputs gaming information (for example, gaming status) of the machine 100. The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply that is supplied to the main control unit 1300. In this embodiment, if the voltage is less than 9 V), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 is one-way communication, and the main control section 300 can send signals such as commands to the first sub-control section 400; Signals such as commands cannot be sent from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control commands. There is. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also has a ROM 406 that stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, backlight lighting patterns, data for controlling various indicators, etc. It is set up.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls audio output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input/output interface. 123 etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at every interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
The symbol arrangement on each of the reels 110 to 112 described above will be explained using FIG. 24(a). Note that this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112).

On each reel 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (in this embodiment, 21 symbols with numbers 0 to 20) of a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Further, the numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on each reel 110 to 112. For example, in this embodiment, the number 1 piece on the left reel 110 has a “Replay” symbol, the number 0 piece on the middle reel 111 has a “Bell” symbol, and the number 2 piece on the right reel 112 has a “Bell” symbol. "Watermelon" designs are placed on each page.

<Type of winning role>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 24(b). The figure shows the types of winning combinations (including activation combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination. Among the winning combinations in this embodiment, the big bonus (BB1, BB2) and the regular bonus (RB) are used as bonus combinations that transfer to bonus games, and replays are played without inserting new medals. The winning roles that can be played are sometimes called "operating roles" to be distinguished from the winning roles, but the "winning roles" in this embodiment include the operating roles, such as the big bonus, regular bonus, and re-playing role. is included. In addition, "winning" in this embodiment includes the case where a symbol combination of an active role that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the active line, such as a big bonus, a regular Includes bonuses and replay wins.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include a big bonus (BB1, BB2), a regular bonus (RB), a small winning combination (cherry, watermelon, bell), and a replay. It goes without saying that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

"Big Bonus (BB1, BB2)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "BB") is a special winning combination (activation winning combination) that starts a big bonus game (BB game) upon winning. The corresponding symbol combinations are "BB1 symbol (also called white 7) - BB1 symbol - BB1 symbol" for BB1, and "BB2 symbol (also called blue 7) - BB2 symbol - BB2 symbol" for BB2. Furthermore, flag carryover is performed for BB1 and BB2. In other words, if BB1 or BB2 is internally won, a flag indicating this will be set (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300), but even if BB1 or BB2 is not won in that game, the winning will not be possible. The flag indicating internal winning will remain on until the next game, and even after the next game, BB1 and BB2 will be internally won, and the symbol combination "White 7-White 7-White 7" corresponding to BB1 and the symbol corresponding to BB2 will remain on. The combination "Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7" is in a state where they all win prizes.

"Regular Bonus (RB)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "RB") is a special combination (operating combination) that starts a regular bonus game (RB game) upon winning. The corresponding symbol combination is "RB symbol (also referred to as bonus) - RB symbol - RB symbol". Note that flag carryover is also carried out for RB in the same way as for BB described above. However, in the big bonus game (BB game), the start of the big bonus game is not subject to the internal winning of the regular bonus game (RB game) or the display of the symbol combination on the winning line. The regular bonus game may be started later, and when one regular bonus game ends, the next regular bonus game may be started immediately, so that the regular bonus game is automatically started.

``Small winning combinations (cherry, watermelon, bell) (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as ``cherry,'' ``watermelon,'' and ``bell'') are winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning, and the corresponding symbols The combinations are "cherry pattern - ANY pattern - ANY pattern" for cherry, "watermelon pattern - watermelon pattern - watermelon pattern" for watermelon, and "bell pattern - bell pattern - bell pattern" for bell. The corresponding payout numbers are as shown in the same figure, and are 4 for cherries, 12 for watermelons, and 8 for bells. In the case of "cherry symbol - ANY symbol - ANY symbol", the symbol on the left reel 110 only needs to be the "cherry" symbol, and the symbols on the middle reel 111 and right reel 112 may be any symbol.

"Replay" is a winning combination (activation combination) that allows you to play the next game without inserting medals (game media) by winning a prize, and no medals are paid out. Note that the corresponding symbol combination for replay is "replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol."

Here, we will outline the internal winning probability of winning combinations.

The internal winning probability for each role is calculated by converting numerical data corresponding to the range of lottery data associated with each role to numerical data within the range of random numbers obtained during the internal lottery (65536 in this embodiment), which will be described later. It is calculated by dividing the value by . The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each win or loss. In the winning combination internal lottery process to be described later, it is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is a value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to any combination, and the internal winning combination is determined. In reality, this lottery data has settings 1 to 6 with different winning probabilities for at least one role, and game parlor staff can arbitrarily select and set any of the settings. .

In this embodiment, watermelon and cherry are each won internally in the winning combination internal lottery process, and when the operation timing of the stop operation is suitable. Hereinafter, watermelon and cherry will also be referred to as chance roles. In addition, Bell wins when the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process and the stopping operations are performed in the correct stopping operation order. Hereinafter, Bell will also be referred to as Oshiunyaku.

The AT state is a gaming state in which information (details of a stop operation) that is advantageous to the player is notified when a chance winning combination or a pushing success winning combination is internally won. In the AT state, the effect image display device 157 and the payout number display device 127 are used to execute an operation navigation that notifies you of the details of the stop operation that will help you win a prize. Specifically, if the push winning combination is internally won in the AT state, the stop operation order is announced, and if the chance combination is internally won in the AT state, the stop operation timing (indication of the internally won combination) is notified. Since the operation navigation is executed, the player can easily win a predetermined small winning combination by following the stop operation details of the operation navigation. In other words, the AT state is a state in which a large profit is given to the player by the operation navigation.

On the other hand, the normal state is a state in which the operation navigation is not executed even if a chance winning combination or a pushing success winning combination is internally won.

In this embodiment, if the AT lottery is won in the normal state, the AT state is entered. In the AT lottery, for example, the propriety of winning may be determined based on the results of an internal lottery for winning combinations. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the number of games played in the normal state after the end of the AT state reaches a predetermined threshold (hereinafter referred to as the number of ceiling games), the AT state is entered. That is, if the player wins the AT lottery in the normal state or if the number of games played in the normal state reaches the ceiling number of games, the player shifts to the AT state and is given a predetermined number of AT games. In addition, in the AT state, an AT additional lottery for adding the number of AT games is performed, and if the AT additional lottery is won, a predetermined number of AT games is added. On the other hand, in the AT state, when the allotted number of AT games is played out, the AT state ends and the state shifts to the normal state.

<Operation of slot machine>
Next, the processing of the main control section 300, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500 will be explained using the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control section main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on, first, in step S101, various initial setting processes are performed. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupts are disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables are initialized to be stored in the RAM 308, and the WDT 314 is enabled and initialized. Configure values, etc.

In step S102, a medal insertion/start operation reception process is executed. Here, it is determined by detection by the sensor circuit 320 whether there is an electronic medal insertion operation using the bet buttons 130 to 132 or a direct medal insertion operation from the medal insertion slot 141. turns on the winning line display lamp 120 according to the number of medals inserted. Also, preparations are made to transmit a medal insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that if the player wins a replay combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so there is no need for the player to insert medals.

Further, a check is made as to whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated based on the detection by the sensor circuit 320, and if it is determined that the start lever 135 has been operated, the number of medals that have been inserted is determined, and the first sub-control unit 400 In response, preparations are made to send a start lever acceptance command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated.

In step S103, valid winning lines are determined.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is obtained.

In step S105, an internal lottery process for winning combinations is performed. In the internal lottery process for winning combinations, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read out according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the random number value acquired in step S104. As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including an activation combination) is internally won, the condition device (flag) of the internally won combination is activated (the flag of that winning combination is turned ON). Further, in this step S105, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating the result of the winning internal lottery to the first sub-control unit 400. For example, if a watermelon is internally won, preparations are made to send an internal winning command indicating that a watermelon has been internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and the result of the internal lottery for the winning combination is a loss (the winning combination is not the winning combination). (non-winning), preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating a loss to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S106, reel stop data is selected based on the results of the winning combination internal lottery in step S105. Regarding the reel stop data of winning combinations in which the stop operation order is questioned, the operation conditions are also set, and when the reel stop data corresponding to these is selected, the operation conditions are also set.

In step S107, reel rotation start processing is executed to start rotation of all reels 110 to 112 based on the start operation.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any stop button is pressed, the stop data of the reel stop data is sent to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Referring to this, any one of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop data. If all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S109. In addition, in this step S108, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (in detail, for the first stop operation, a stop button reception 1 command, a second stop operation (for the stop button reception 2 command, for the third stop operation, the stop button reception 3 command) is prepared to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel Reel stop command regarding the stop position (in detail, for the first stop reel, reel stop 1 command, for the second stop operation, reel stop 2 command, for the third stop operation, reel stop command) 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S109, winning determination processing is performed. In the winning determination process, a winning determination is made for the symbols that stopped when the stop buttons 137 to 139 were pressed, and if a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, the winning combination is determined. It is determined that the role has been won. For example, if "watermelon symbol - watermelon symbol - watermelon symbol" are aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the watermelon prize has been won. Further, in this step S109, preparations are made to transmit a display determination command indicating the result of winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout process, if a winning combination has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination will be paid out. Further, in step S110, preparations are made to transmit a medal payout command indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S111, a game state control process is performed. In this gaming state control process, control for shifting the gaming state is performed, and for example, in the case of a BB win, preparations are made so that the BB game can be started from the next time. Further, in this step S111, preparations are made to transmit a gaming status command indicating the gaming status to the first sub-control unit 400.

With the above, one game ends. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 26) of the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control section timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 will be explained using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Start processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing for temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed (once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each type of sensor 318. The signal state is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S205, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in respective time units.

In step S206, a command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it becomes possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S207, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Illustration omitted) Executes error handling. Furthermore, settings are made for the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators according to the current gaming state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S211, and if the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt termination process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set to the original registers. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at power outage upon power restoration are saved to a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as recovery data, and power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 27. Note that FIG. 27A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 27(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 27(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 27(a).

When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408, etc. are performed. Through this process, an area for storing internal winning information, which is information representing the result of internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming state, are provided in the RAM 408, respectively.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S303.

In step S303, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S304, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, effect control processing (details will be described later) is performed. Here, preparations for the performance are made in accordance with the performance reservation information in the performance reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing an update process of the effect data if it is necessary to update the effect data.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for the various lamps 420 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if the effect data read in step S305 includes a command for the shutter 163, this command is output to the drive circuit 424.

In step S309, information output processing is performed to perform settings for transmitting a command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S305, settings are made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 27(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 27(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S501, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 27(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S502, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, and the random value for effect is updated.

<Processing of second sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 28. Note that FIG. 28A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 28(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 28(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 28(d) is a flowchart of image control processing by the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S3001 of FIG. 28(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first performed in step S601. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 508, initialization of the storage area in the VRAM 518, etc. are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S603.

In step S603, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S604, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines each command received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S605, production control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading out effect data for controlling an image related to a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. It also includes performing processes such as reading out performance data other than this from the ROM 506, and performing update processing of the performance data when it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S605, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding display images (notification images, background images) is performed. When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S602.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using FIG. 28(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 28(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S801, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 28(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S802, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control process of step S4006 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 28(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S902, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the VDP 516. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process advances to step S903; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. wait until

In step S903, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S901, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (location coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S905, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S906; otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal is input. Wait for input.

In step S906, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Playability>
Next, the gameplay common to Examples C1 to C5 below will be explained. In this embodiment, the two-coin bet game is a game that is disadvantageous to the player compared to the three-coin bet game. Here, the term "disadvantageous" specifically means that, in a two-bet game, a process for awarding benefits advantageous to the player is not executed. For example, in a two-stakes game, there are AT drawings to award the number of AT games in the normal state, AT additional drawings to award the additional number of AT games in the AT state, and lottery to move to a specialized zone. The number of games in the normal state after the end of the AT state is not updated in a two-bet game. For this reason, in a 2-card bet game, a ``2-card bet notification'' is executed to notify the player that it is a 2-card bet game, to alert the player that they are playing a game with disadvantages. ing. In this way, the slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a gaming machine in which a 3-coin bet game is recommended.

<Example C1>
First, with reference to FIG. 29, the performances of the 3-bet bet game and the 2-bet bet game in Example C1 will be described. FIG. 29(a) shows an example of a performance displayed on the performance image display device 157 in a 3-coin bet game, and FIG. 29(b) shows an example of a performance displayed on the performance image display device 157 in a 2-coin bet game. An example of a performance is shown.

As shown in FIG. 29(a), in the three-coin bet game, the game number display d1 is updated based on the start lever operation while a predetermined effect image is being displayed. For example, the predetermined performance image may be a performance that reflects the results of the winning combination internal lottery process. The game number display d1 is an effect that displays the number of games in the normal state after the AT state ends. In the embodiment C1, as described above, when the number of games in the normal state after the end of the AT state reaches the ceiling number of games, the system is configured to shift to the AT state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 29(b), in the two-coin bet game, the display of the two-coin bet notification d2 is started based on the start lever operation. As described above, the two-coin bet notification d2 is a warning performance that notifies the player that it is a two-coin bet game. The two bet notification d2 is, for example, an image effect displayed on the entire surface of the effect image display device 157, and is displayed from after the start lever operation to the third stop operation. In other words, the predetermined effect image is not displayed while the two-coin bet notification d2 is being displayed. Further, after the third stop operation, the original effect image is returned, but the game number display d1 is not updated. This is because the number of games in the normal state is not updated in the two-coin bet game. The game number display d1 is updated when the start lever is operated in the next 3-bet bet game.

In the example shown in FIG. 29(a), the two-bet bet notification d2 was executed from after the start lever was operated until the third stop operation; however, this is not limited to this, and from after the start lever was operated to the first It may continue until the stop operation or the second stop operation, or it may continue until the bet operation for the next game. Further, the two bet notification d2 may continue for a predetermined period of time after the start lever is operated.

In addition, in the following, the case where the start lever is operated in a 3-card bet game is referred to as "the case where the 3-card bet game is executed", and the case where the start lever is operated in a 2-card bet game is referred to as "the case where the start lever is operated in a 2-card bet game". "When a game is executed."

FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating an outline of the effect when a 3-coin bet game is executed after executing the pseudo bonus confirmation notification d3 in the normal state. Specifically, FIG. 30(a) is a time chart of the game progress when a 3-coin bet game is executed after the pseudo bonus confirmation notification d3 is executed in the normal state, and FIG. 30(b) is a time chart of the game progress when the pseudo bonus is confirmed in the normal state. An example of the effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 when a three-coin bet game is executed after the notification d3 is executed is shown. Note that the pseudo bonus confirmation notification d3 is, for example, an image effect displayed on the effect image display device 157, and is an effect that notifies the granting of a benefit. Specifically, the pseudo bonus is an AT state for 30 games, and the pseudo bonus confirmation notification d3 is an effect that suggests a transition to the AT state.

In the embodiment C1, when a three-coin bet game is executed in the next game after the execution of the pseudo bonus confirmation notification d3, the slot machine 100 executes a reel action based on the start lever operation. The reel action is an effect related to rotation and stopping of the reels 110 to 112. Based on the execution of the reel action, the slot machine 100 displays a special symbol combination (for example, a bonus symbol) on the active line and executes symbol alignment notification d4. The symbol alignment notification d4 is, for example, an image effect displayed on the effect image display device 157, and is an effect that notifies that a special symbol combination has been aligned by reel action, that is, that a privilege has been awarded. .

Next, the slot machine 100 starts rotating the reels 110 to 112 and executes a performance d5 indicating that it has entered the AT state. The effect d5 indicating the transition to the AT state is, for example, an image effect displayed on the effect image display device 157, and when the push order combination is internally won in the game, the effect d5 is an image effect that indicates the order of the stop operation. Display the image.

FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an outline of the effect when a two-coin bet game is executed after executing the pseudo bonus confirmation notification d3 in the normal state. In detail, FIG. 31(a) is a time chart of the game progress when, after executing the pseudo bonus confirmation notification d3 in the normal state, first a two-coin bet game is executed, and then a three-coin bet game is executed. (b) shows an example of the performance displayed on the performance image display device 157 when a two-coin bet game is first executed, and then a three-coin bet game is executed after executing the pseudo bonus confirmation notification d3 in the normal state. It shows.

In Example C1, when a two-coin bet game is executed in the next game after the execution of the pseudo bonus confirmation notification d3, the slot machine 100 does not execute the reel action based on the start lever operation and issues the two-coin bet notification d2. is set to start running.

As described above, in the embodiment C1, the reel action is reserved for the game in which the pseudo bonus confirmation notification d3 is executed, but it is not executed when the 2-coin bet game is executed in the next game. This is executed when a three-coin bet game is executed.

Therefore, when a three-coin bet game is executed after a two-coin bet game is executed, the slot machine 100 executes a reel action based on the start lever operation. Based on the execution of the reel action, the slot machine 100 displays a special symbol combination (for example, a bonus symbol) on the active line, ends the two-bet bet notification d2, and executes the symbol alignment notification d4. That is, as shown in FIG. 31(b), the two-coin bet notification d2 is continuously executed from the start lever operation for the two-coin bet game until the symbol alignment notification d4 for the three-coin bet game is executed. be done.

In this way, in the embodiment C1, even in a 3-card bet game, there is a period in which the 2-card bet notification d2 is executed, and in a 3-card bet game, the 2-card bet made during the previous 2-card bet game is After the performance to notify is continuously executed for a certain period (in Example C1, the period until just before the symbol alignment is announced by the reel action), the performance to notify that the bonus is given is executed. .

After the reel action ends, the slot machine 100 starts rotating the reels 110 to 112 and executes a performance d5 indicating that the slot machine 100 has entered the AT state.

As described above, according to the embodiment C1, since the notification of the 2-bet bet game is executed in the game in which the awarding of benefits is announced, which is a performance that attracts a high degree of attention from players, it is possible to emphasize calling attention to the 2-bet bet game. .

In addition, in Example C1, the case of a pseudo bonus was given as an example where a benefit is given, but other cases, for example, when an AT game is added, when the number of acquired coins is added, when the special zone is Of course, it may also be applied to cases such as when entering a vehicle.

Further, in the embodiment C1, the reel action is executed when executing the 3-coin bet game after executing the pseudo bonus confirmation notification d3, but the performance executed is not limited to this. For example, a freeze effect may be performed. The freeze performance is a performance that does not accept any operation by the player for a predetermined period of time, for example, the reels 110 to 112 do not start rotating for a predetermined period of time even if the start lever is operated.

Further, in the embodiment C1, one type of two-coin bet notification d2 was executed, but a plurality of types of two-coin bet notification d2 are provided, and any one of the two-coin bet notification d2 is executed according to the situation. Good too.

In addition, the two-coin bet notification d2 of the embodiment C1 is only an image effect and does not perform an audio effect that outputs a sound, but an audio effect may be performed.

<Example C2>
Next, the continuous performance of Example C2 will be explained using FIG. 32. FIG. 32(a) is a time chart showing the flow of a continuous performance in a 3-bet bet game, and FIG. 32(b) is a time chart showing the performance mode of the continuous performance displayed on the performance image display device 157 in a 3-bet bet game. An example is shown.

The continuous performance d10 executed in Example C2 is a performance that is developed over three games, and is a performance that makes the player expect to receive a bonus. Specifically, the continuous performance d10 includes an introduction performance d11 that is executed in the first game of the continuous performance, a drinking competition performance d12 that is performed in the second game of the continuous performance, and a drinking competition performance d12 that is performed in the third game of the continuous performance. It consists of a result effect d13. Note that although FIG. 32 shows a continuous effect as an image display effect, the continuous effect also includes an audio effect that outputs audio and a lamp effect that involves lamp lighting.

In the first game of the continuous performance d10, as shown in FIG. 32(b), in a three-bet game, the game number display d1 is updated based on the start lever operation, for example. In addition, in the result display d13 of the third game of the continuous display, the result (win or loss) of the drinking comparison display d12 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 32(b), and if you win the drinking competition, you will receive a benefit. It is now granted. For example, when performing the continuous performance d10 in the normal state, the benefit may be transferred to the AT state.

FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating another example of continuous performance in Example C2. FIG. 33(a) is a time chart showing the flow of continuous performance when a 3-piece bet game and a 2-piece bet game are mixed, and FIG. 33(b) is a time chart showing a flow of continuous performance when a 3-piece bet game and a 2-piece bet game are mixed. An example of a presentation mode of a continuous presentation displayed on the presentation image display device 157 in the case of the above is shown. Specifically, in FIG. 33, when the game in which the continuous performance has started is the first game, the first and fourth games are 3-bet bet games, and the second and third games are 2-bet bet games. This shows the case when executed.

Since the first game in which the continuous performance is started is the same as the example shown in FIG. 32, the explanation will be omitted. Although the second game is a two-coin bet game, the slot machine 100 executes the drinking comparison performance d12 similarly to FIG. 32. In other words, the slot machine 100 does not execute the two-coin bet notification d2 even in a two-coin bet game and develops a continuous performance. However, in the drinking comparison performance d12 in this case, no sound is output, and only the performance image is displayed. This is to give a penalty to the player who played the two-coin bet game.

In addition, as for the penalty, the example of the continuous performance shown in FIG. The player suffers a loss due to the amount of play. Also, although not shown in FIG. 12, if you lose in the drinking competition performance d12 and the normal state continues, the number of games in the normal state will not be updated as described above, so you can simply change the number of medals you have inserted. Not only will you suffer a loss, but you will also be delayed in reaching your ceiling number of games.

Next, the slot machine 100 executes the two-coin bet notification d2 in the third game. That is, when a two-coin bet game is executed in two consecutive games, a continuous performance is executed in the first game, and a two-coin bet notification d2 is executed in the second game. Specifically, the two bet notification d2 is executed from after the start lever operation for the third game until the third stop operation. In other words, the continuous performance is not executed in the third game.

Next, in the fourth game, the slot machine 100 executes a result performance d13 corresponding to the third game of the continuous performance. If a two-coin bet game is executed while the continuous performance is being executed in this way, the two-coin bet notification d2 for calling attention will be executed, and as a result, the period for executing the continuous performance will be extended.

In a two-piece bet game, as mentioned above, the number of games in the normal state is not updated after the AT state ends, so in a two-piece bet game, the number of games in a continuous performance is updated by intervening the two-piece bet notification d2. We are trying to make adjustments to prolong the period of time in which players are encouraged.

As described above, according to the embodiment C2, since the notification of the two-bet bet game is executed during the execution of the continuous performance, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to emphasize the attention to the two-bet bet game.

FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the continuous effect in Example C2. FIG. 34 shows a modified example of the performance mode of the continuous performance displayed on the performance image display device 157 when a 3-coin bet game and a 2-coin bet game are mixed.

In the example shown in FIG. 33, the slot machine 100 executes the two-coin bet notification d2 in the third game, but the period during which the two-coin bet notification d2 is executed is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 34, the slot machine 100 may execute the two-coin bet notification d2 after the second stop operation of the second game. That is, a part of the drinking comparison effect d12 may be executed during a part of the period of the second game, and then the two-coin bet notification d2 may be executed during the remaining period of the second game. In this case, there is a part in the second game in which the drinking comparison effect d12 is not executed.

In this manner, according to the modification of the embodiment C2, since the continuous performance d10 and the two-coin bet notification d2 are mixed in one game, it is possible to emphasize the call to attention for the two-coin bet game.

<Example C3>
Next, the two-bet bet notification d2 executed in the embodiment C3 will be described using FIG. 35. In Example C3, there are two types of two-coin bet notifications d2. One is the 2-bet bet notification d2A that is executed in a state where the bonus role has not been internally won and there is no possibility of winning the bonus role (hereinafter referred to as the first state), and the other is, This is a two-bet bet notification d2B that is executed in a state (hereinafter referred to as a second state) in which the bonus winning combination has been internally won and there is a possibility of winning the bonus winning combination.

FIG. 35(b) shows an example of the display mode of the two-coin bet notification d2A displayed on the effect image display device 157, and FIG. An example of a display mode of notification d2B is shown. The two-coin bet notification d2A and the two-coin bet notification d2B are at least partially the same (for example, the display wording is "!2-coin bet game in progress!"), but the display format, color, and size are different. , the display area etc. are different. For example, the two bet notification d2A may be an effect image displayed over the entire screen, and the two bet notification d2B may be an effect image displayed in a partial area of the screen. Furthermore, the contents of the background images of the two bet notification d2A and the two bet notification d2B may be the same, but the colors of the background images may be different.

By the way, in Example C3, if a player wins a bonus combination in a two-bet bet game, the game shifts to a disadvantageous bonus game. Disadvantageous bonus games include, for example, when an AT lottery is not executed during a bonus game, when an AT additional lottery is not executed during a bonus game, when a bonus game ends with the specified number of medals being paid out, or when the number of medals paid out is less than the specified number. This is a bonus game in which a large number of medals are required to be inserted to reach this point, and the number of medals does not actually increase, and a large number of games are required to complete the bonus game.

Therefore, when executing the two bet notification d2B in the second state in the embodiment C3, as shown in FIG. 35(c), the chance win notification d21 is executed to avoid winning the bonus combination. The chance win notification d21 is one of the above-mentioned operation navigations.

Here, to explain the chance win notification d21, when a chance win (specifically, cherry, watermelon) is internally won in the AT state, the slot machine 100 will notify the chance win notification d21 as shown in FIG. 35(a). Execute d21. The chance win notification d21 is an effect image that suggests that the chance win has been internally won. By recognizing this effect image, the player performs a stop operation aiming at the cherry symbol. As a result, the system is configured so that it is easy to win a chance prize.

On the other hand, the chance combination notification d21 that is executed together with the two-bet bet notification d2B in the second state is also executed in order to make the player perform a stop operation aiming at the cherry symbol. This is because the player aims for the cherry symbol by recognizing the performance image of the chance combination notification d21, as in the case of FIG. 35(a). By this stop operation, it is possible to avoid winning the bonus combination as a result.

FIG. 36(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the performance mode of the performance image display device 157 when a two-bet bet game is executed in the first state, and FIG. It is a diagram showing the transition of the performance mode of the performance image display device 157 when a bet game is executed. In either case, from the start lever operation of the 2-bet bet game until the third stop operation, the 2-bet bet notification d2 (in the case of the first state, the 2-bet bet notification d2A, in the case of the second state) , 2 bet notification d2B) is displayed.

Note that while the two-coin bet notification d2 is being displayed, the original effect image (hereinafter referred to as a background image) is not displayed on the effect image display device 157.

As described above, according to the embodiment C3, it is possible to make the two-card bet notification d2B stand out in a two-card bet game that avoids winning a bonus combination, so games that require special attention in a two-card bet game are emphasized and notified. be able to.

FIG. 37(a) shows an image of a modified example of the two bet notification d2A. As shown in FIG. 37(a), the background image may be left and the two bet notification d2A may be displayed on the background image. In other words, it is not necessary to display the two bet notification d2A over the entire screen of the effect image display device 157.

FIG. 37(b) shows an image of a modified example of the two bet notification d2B. As shown in FIG. 37(b), the background image may be left and the two bet notification d2B and the chance combination notification d21 may be displayed on the background image.

In addition, as in the case of adopting the two-piece bet notification d2A shown in FIG. 37(a) and the two-piece bet notification d2B shown in FIG. 37(b), the contents of both notification images (wording, color, size, etc.) may be the same, but their display positions may be different.

Note that a two-bet bet notification d2B as shown in FIG. 37(c) may be adopted. In other words, as long as part of the wording of the two-coin bet notification d2A and the two-coin bet notification d2B is the same (for example, 2 coins), the wording of the two does not have to be completely the same.

<Example C4>
Next, the button effect of Example C4 will be explained using FIG. 38. In Example C4, a button effect may be executed in a three-copy bet game in the normal state. Button performance is a performance that displays a prompt to operate the performance button 192 after the third stop operation, and when the performance button 192 is operated, displays a result that suggests winning or not winning the award. be. Incidentally, the granting of benefits in Example C4 specifically means transition to the AT state.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the transition of the effect mode of the effect image display device 157 when the button effect is executed in the three-coin bet game.

As shown in FIG. 38, the button presentation includes a start display d30, an operation promotion display d31, and an operation response display d32. The start display d30 is a display that notifies the start of the button effect, and is displayed after the third stop operation. The operation promotion display d31 is displayed after the third stop operation and after the start display d30 ends, and is a display that prompts the user to operate the production button 192. The operation response display d32 is a display that suggests the result of awarding a benefit based on the operation of the performance button 192. The operation response display d32 includes an operation response display d32A that suggests winning of a benefit award, and an operation response display d32B that suggests non-winning of a benefit award. Note that if the production button 192 is not operated, the operation response display d32 is not executed.

When the operation response display d32A is displayed in the button performance, that is, when a benefit is awarded, AT starts to display the wording indicating bonus grant (for example, "bonus confirmed") based on the start lever operation of the next game. Image d33A is displayed.

On the other hand, when the operation response display d32B is displayed in the button presentation, that is, when no privilege is given, the normal image d33B, which is the background image of the normal state, is displayed based on the start lever operation of the next game.

FIG. 39 shows a change in the effect mode of the effect image display device 157 when a button effect is started in a three-piece bet game, one game of a two-piece bet game is executed in the next game, and then a three-piece bet game is executed. FIG. Note that FIG. 39 shows an example in which a privilege is awarded without any operation on the performance button 192 in the button performance.

If the next game in which the operation promotion display d31 is displayed in the button performance is a two-coin bet game, the slot machine 100 executes the two-coin bet notification d2 based on the start lever operation. The two bet notification d2 is displayed from after the start lever operation until the third stop operation.

Next, the slot machine 100 executes the start display d30 after the third stop operation of the two-coin bet game. The start display d30 continues to be displayed until the start lever is operated for the next game, a 3-bet bet game.

Next, the slot machine 100 displays the AT start image d33A based on the start lever operation of the next game, the 3-bet bet game. In other words, the start display d30 is continuously displayed after the third stop operation in the 2-bet game until the start lever operation in the 3-bet game, but after that, the operation promotion display d31 and the operation response display d32A are not displayed. , the AT start image d33A is suddenly displayed.

In this way, in Example C4, the start display d30 is continuously displayed after the third stop operation of the 2-bet bet game until the start lever operation of the 3-bet bet game, but the operation promotion display d31 is not executed. Even if the production button 192 is operated during the period after the third stop operation of the 2-bet bet game until the start lever operation of the 3-coin bet game, the operation of the production button 192 is not valid, and the operation response is not valid. Display d32 is also not executed.

As described above, according to the embodiment C4, if the next game after executing the button effect is a 2-piece bet game, even if a 3-piece bet game is executed thereafter, a part of the button effect is not executed. It is possible to emphasize calling attention to the two-coin bet game.

In the example shown in FIG. 39, the 2-bet bet notification d2 was executed from the start lever operation of the 2-bet bet game to the third stop operation, but the 2-bet bet notification d2 was executed by the start lever operation of the 2-bet bet game. It is also possible to perform the operations from 3 to 3rd stop operation of the 3-coin bet game. Further, in a two-coin bet game, the two-coin bet notification d2 may not be executed. In other words, a configuration in which the second two-coin bet notification d2 shown in FIG. 39 is not provided may be adopted, and a part of the button effects may not be executed. The fact that a part of the button performance is not executed functions as a notice to call attention to the fact that it is a two-bet bet game.

Further, in Example C4, the operation response display d32 was not executed when the next game after executing the button effect was a 2-coin bet game, but after executing the button effect, the operation response display d32 was executed. Cases where this is not the case are not limited to this. For example, it may be applied in the case of opening the door (for example, in the case of opening the door by a store clerk or in the case of fraudulent activity), and the operation response display d32 may not be executed.

In addition, in the case where a plurality of types of button effects are provided, each with a different trigger for execution, the operation response display d32 may not be executed for any button effect when a two-coin bet game is executed. Note that for some of the plurality of types of button performances, even if a two-coin bet game is executed, the operation response display d32 may be executed in a subsequent three-coin bet game.

<Example C5>
In the fifth embodiment, the notification period of the two-bet bet notification d2 will be explained in detail. FIG. 40(a) is a time chart showing the notification period of the 2-bet bet notification d2 in the 2-bet bet game, and FIG. 40(b) is a time chart of the effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the 2-bet bet game. It is a figure which shows an example of a presentation aspect.

In the above embodiments C1 to C4, it was explained that the two-coin bet notification d2 is executed from after the start lever operation of the two-coin bet game until the third stop operation. As shown in , the two-bet bet notification d2 is executed from when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start lever operation until the third stop operation. Furthermore, after the third stop operation, the image of the effect that was being executed before the start lever operation for the 2-bet bet game, that is, the image of the effect that was displayed in the 3-bet bet game (hereinafter referred to as the normal image), is displayed. Ru. Since the two-coin bet notification d2 is displayed over the entire screen of the effect image display device 157, when the two-coin bet notification d2 is executed, the normal image becomes difficult to see.

In the normal state two-bet game, as shown in FIG. 40(b), the number of games display d1 is performed, but the number of games display d1 is not updated. The number of games shown in the number of games display d1 is the number of games in the normal state after the end of the AT state, and when this number of games reaches the ceiling number of games (for example, 700 games, etc.), the number of games shown in the number of games display d1 is the number of games in the normal state after the end of the AT state. A transition takes place. Therefore, the number of games display d1 that is not updated can also be said to be a penalty notification regarding the provision of benefits to the player.

Here, the notification timings of the number of games display d1 and the two-stake bet notification d2 in the two-stake bet game are different. Specifically, in the two-coin bet game, after the start lever is operated, the game number display d1 is first executed, and then the two-coin bet notification d2 is executed. As a result, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize the penalty notification.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 40(b), the display area of the two-bet bet information d2 is configured to be larger than the display area of the game number display d1.

As described above, according to the embodiment C5, in a two-bet bet game, the execution timings of the two-bet bet notification d2 that notifies that it is a two-bet bet game and the game number notification d1 that notifies the number of games in the normal state are made different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking each notification and to make it easier for the player to recognize that the game is a game in which a penalty has been given.

Next, a modification of the notification period of the two bet notification d2 will be described using FIG. 41. FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b) are diagrams illustrating an example of the performance mode of the performance displayed on the performance image display device 157 in a two-stakes bet game.

As shown in FIG. 41(a), the 2-bet bet notification d2 is executed from after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start lever operation of the 2-bet bet game until a 3-bet bet is made in the next game. It's okay.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 41(b), the two-coin bet notification d2 may start immediately after the start lever operation of the two-coin bet game, and may end when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start lever operation. After that, as shown in FIG. 41(b), the game number display d1A that emphasizes that the number of games has not been changed (for example, the display area, display position, color, etc. is different from the game number display d1) changes to the third stop. operations may even be performed. That is, in a two-coin bet game, after the start lever is operated, the two-coin bet notification d2 may be executed first, and then the game number display d1 may be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41(b), the two-coin bet notification d2 may be executed again from the third stop operation until a three-coin bet is made in the next game. In other words, the two bet notification d2 and the number of games display d1 may be repeatedly displayed.

Next, a modification of the display area of the two bet notification d2 will be described using FIG. 42(a). FIG. 42(a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode of an effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 in a two-stakes bet game.

The two bet notification d2 may be displayed on a part of the screen of the effect image display device 157, as shown in FIG. 42(a). In this case, the normal image and the number of games display d1 may be displayed in the display area outside the two-bet bet information d2. In other words, the two-bet bet information d2 and the game number display d1 may be displayed simultaneously in different display areas of one display device. Further, in this case, the display area of the two-bet bet information d2 and the display area of the number-of-games display d1 may be displayed so as to overlap.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42(b), a modification example in which the two bet notification d2 and the game number display d12 are displayed on different display devices will be described. FIG. 42(b) is a diagram illustrating an example of the performance mode of the performance displayed on the performance image display device 157 and the sub performance image display device 195 in a two-stakes bet game.

FIG. 42(b) shows a modification example in which a two-bet bet notification d2 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 and a game number display d1 is displayed on the sub effect image display device 195. In this case, from the start lever operation to the third stop operation of the two-stakes bet game, the highlighted game number display d1A (for example, the color and wording are different from the game number display d1) is displayed on the sub effect image display device 195. may be displayed.

Note that although the execution end timings of the game number display d1 and the two-coin bet notification d2 are different as shown in FIGS. 40 to 42, they may be the same.

Although examples C1 to C5 of this embodiment have been described above, the examples of this embodiment are not limited thereto, and may be configured by combining each example.

<Summary of embodiments>
(1) As described above, according to the game machine (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, Example C1),
It is possible to set any number of bets among a plurality of bet numbers including a first number of bets (for example, 3 coins) and a second number of bets smaller than the first bet number (for example, 2 coins). A bet number setting means (for example, medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, medal insertion slot 141, main control unit 300, medal insertion start operation reception processing S102),
A game execution means (for example, main control section 300, main control section main processing, main control section timer interrupt processing) that executes a game based on the number of bets set by the bet number setting means;
Production means capable of executing a predetermined production (for example, production image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, first sub-control unit main processing, second sub-control unit) main processing, etc.) and
A game machine comprising:
The gaming machine is
A game that is executed with the first number of bets set (hereinafter referred to as "first number of bets game") is recommended,
The presentation means is configured to provide a first system for notifying that the second number of bets is the game in which the second number of bets is set and the game is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "second number of bets game"). It is a means that can execute a performance (for example, 2-coin bet notification d2),
When the performance means executes the first performance during at least a part of the certain first bet number game (hereinafter referred to as the "predetermined game") (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), ) (for example, Fig. 31(a) and (b)),
This is the first basic configuration.

According to this first basic configuration, in a certain first number of bets game, there is a case where the first performance is executed to notify that the number of bets is the second number, so that the second number of bets game is executed. It can emphasize warnings.

In the above first basic configuration,
The performance means is a means capable of executing a second performance (for example, symbol alignment notification d4) in the predetermined game,
In the first case, the presentation means executes the second presentation after executing the first presentation (for example, FIGS. 31(a) and (b));
This is the first preferred configuration.

According to the first preferred configuration, it is possible to emphasize calling attention to the second bet number game by executing the first performance and the second performance in succession.

In the first preferred configuration,
The predetermined game is a game involving reel action,
The effect means executes the first effect while the reel action is being executed in the predetermined game, and starts executing the second effect in connection with the end of the reel action (for example, as shown in FIG. 31). a) and (b)),
This is the second preferred configuration.

According to the second preferred configuration, by executing the reel action, it is possible to emphasize calling attention to the second bet number game.

In the second preferred configuration,
The reel action is reserved for execution in a game (hereinafter referred to as "reserved game") before the predetermined game,
If the game set as the reserved game is the second bet number game, the reel action is not executed, and thereafter, the game that becomes the first bet number game is the reel action in the predetermined game. is executed (for example, FIGS. 31(a) and (b)),
This is the third preferred configuration.

According to the third preferred configuration, it is possible to emphasize the alert for the second number-of-bets game and to notify that the first number-of-bets game is a recommended game.

In the first basic configuration, first preferred configuration, second preferred configuration, or third preferred configuration,
The predetermined game is a game that notifies the player of advantageous benefits (for example, transition from normal state to AT state, addition of AT game, etc.);
This is the fourth preferred configuration.

According to the fourth preferred configuration, it is possible to call attention to the second bet number game in a game that is important to the player.

In the first basic configuration, first preferred configuration, second preferred configuration, third preferred configuration, or fourth preferred configuration,
The first case occurs in at least a part of the game immediately after the second bet number game (for example, FIGS. 31(a) and (b)),
This is the fifth preferred configuration.

According to the fifth preferred configuration, since the first performance is executed immediately after the second number-of-bets game, it is possible to clearly make it clear that it is a warning for the second number-of-bets game.

(2) As described above, according to the game machine (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, Example C2),
It is possible to set any number of bets among a plurality of bet numbers including a first number of bets (for example, 3 coins) and a second number of bets smaller than the first bet number (for example, 2 coins). A bet number setting means (for example, medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, medal insertion slot 141, main control unit 300, medal insertion start operation reception processing S102),
A game execution means (for example, main control section 300, main control section main processing, main control section timer interrupt processing) that executes a game based on the number of bets set by the bet number setting means;
Production means capable of executing a predetermined production (for example, production image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, first sub-control unit main processing, second sub-control unit) main processing, etc.) and
A game machine comprising:
The game machine is recommended for a game that is executed with the first number of bets set (hereinafter referred to as "first number of bets game"),
The performance means provides a first performance that notifies that the second number of bets is the second number of bets in a game that is executed with the second number of bets set (hereinafter referred to as "second number of bets game"). (For example, 2 bet notification d2) is a means that can execute,
The performance means executes a second performance (for example, a drinking comparison performance d12 of the continuous performance d10) during at least a part of a certain second bet number game (hereinafter referred to as a "predetermined game"). (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") (for example, FIGS. 33(a) and (b)),
This is the second basic configuration.

According to this second basic configuration, since the second effect may be executed in a certain second number-of-bets game, it is possible to emphasize calling attention to the second number-of-bets game.

In the second basic configuration above,
The performance means is a means capable of executing a continuous performance (for example, continuous performance d10) over a plurality of games (for example, 3 games),
The game immediately before the predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as the "previous game") is the first bet number game,
When the immediately preceding game and the predetermined game are played during execution of the continuous presentation, the presentation means executes a part of the continuous presentation that spans a plurality of games in the immediately preceding game, and means for executing the second performance as part of the continuous performance during at least a part of the period (for example, FIGS. 10(a) and (b)),
This is the sixth preferred configuration.

According to the sixth preferred configuration, since the second performance may be executed during the execution of the continuous performance, it is possible to emphasize calling attention to the second bet number game.

In the sixth preferred configuration,
When the game following the predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as the "next game") is the second number of bets game, the performance means executes the first performance in the next game; It is a means of not performing the second performance (for example, FIGS. 33(a) and (b)),
This is the seventh preferred configuration.

According to the seventh preferred configuration, the first performance is performed during the continuous performance, and the second performance is not performed, so that it is possible to emphasize calling attention to the second bet number game.

In the sixth preferred configuration or the seventh preferred configuration, the continuous performance is a performance that includes at least a display performance that displays an image and an audio performance that outputs a sound;
In the first case, the presentation means executes the display presentation and does not execute the audio presentation during a part of the continuous presentation;
This is an eighth preferred configuration.

According to the eighth preferred configuration, since the audio performance is not performed during the continuous performance, it is possible to emphasize calling attention to the second bet number game as a penalty.

In the second basic configuration, the sixth preferred configuration, the seventh preferred configuration, or the eighth preferred configuration, benefits advantageous to the player (for example, transition from normal state to AT state, AT game a benefit-related processing means (for example, main control unit 300, etc.) that executes processing related to (addition of benefits, etc.) (hereinafter referred to as benefit-related processing),
In the first case, the benefit-related processing means is a means for not executing the benefit-related processing in the predetermined game.
This is the ninth preferred configuration.

According to the ninth preferred configuration, in the first case, the bonus-related process is not executed, so it is possible to draw attention to the second bet number game.

(3) As described above, according to the game machine (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, Example C3),
It is possible to set any number of bets among a plurality of bet numbers including a first number of bets (for example, 3 coins) and a second number of bets smaller than the first bet number (for example, 2 coins). A bet number setting means (for example, medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, medal insertion slot 141, main control unit 300, medal insertion start operation reception processing S102),
A game execution means (for example, main control section 300, main control section main processing, main control section timer interrupt processing) that executes a game based on the number of bets set by the bet number setting means;
Production means capable of executing a predetermined production (for example, production image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, first sub-control unit main processing, second sub-control unit) main processing, etc.) and
A game machine comprising:
The game machine is recommended for a game that is executed with the first number of bets set (hereinafter referred to as "first number of bets game"),
The presentation means is configured to provide a first system for notifying that the second number of bets is the game in which the second number of bets is set and the game is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "second number of bets game"). A means capable of executing a performance (for example, 2-coin bet notification d2A) or a second performance (for example, 2-coin bet notification d2B) that notifies that it is the second bet number game,
The first performance is at least partially the same performance as the second performance (for example, FIG. 35, FIG. 36),
This is the third basic configuration.

According to this third basic configuration, since the first effect or the second effect is executed in the second bet number game, it is possible to emphasize calling attention to the second bet number game.

In the third basic configuration above,
The performance means is capable of executing the first performance when the game is in the second bet number game and is in the first state (for example, a state where it is impossible to win a bonus role);
The presentation means is capable of executing the second presentation when the game is the second number of bets game and is in a second state (for example, a state where it is possible to win a bonus role).
This is the tenth preferred configuration.

According to the tenth preferred configuration, the first performance or the second performance is executed depending on the state of the second number of bets game, so it is possible to emphasize calling attention to the second number of bets game. can.

In the tenth preferred configuration,
The first performance and the second performance are display performances that display images,
The first performance and the second performance are performances that partially differ in at least one of display mode, display area, color, or size;
This is an eleventh preferred configuration.

According to the eleventh preferred configuration, since the first performance and the second performance are different in performance mode, it is possible to emphasize calling attention to the second bet number game.

In the tenth preferred configuration or the eleventh preferred configuration,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
Internal winning result determining means (for example, main control unit 300, winning combination internal lottery process S105) that determines the internal winning result based on lottery information;
winning determination means (for example, main control unit 300, winning determination processing S109) that determines winning based on the result of the internal winning result determining means and the stop state of the plurality of reels;
Equipped with
The first state is a state in which there is no possibility that a certain internal winning combination (for example, a bonus combination) will win in the second bet number game,
The second state is a state in which there is a possibility that the certain internal winning combination (for example, a bonus combination) will win in the second bet number game,
If a prize is won in the internal winning combination in the second state, a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a bonus game where the AT lottery is not executed, the number of games is not updated, the number of medals is not increased, etc.) ) occurs,
This is the twelfth preferred configuration.

According to the twelfth preferred configuration, it is possible to emphasize games that require special attention in a two-bet game.

(4) As described above, according to the game machine (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, Example C4),
It is possible to set any number of bets among a plurality of bet numbers including a first number of bets (for example, 3 coins) and a second number of bets smaller than the first bet number (for example, 2 coins). A bet number setting means (for example, medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, medal insertion slot 141, main control unit 300, medal insertion start operation reception processing S102),
A game execution means (for example, main control section 300, main control section main processing, main control section timer interrupt processing) that executes a game based on the number of bets set by the bet number setting means;
Production means capable of executing a predetermined production (for example, production image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, first sub-control unit main processing, second sub-control unit) main processing, etc.) and
A game machine comprising:
The game machine is recommended for a game that is executed with the first number of bets set (hereinafter referred to as "first number of bets game"),
The performance means is a means capable of executing a first performance (for example, a button performance) in the first bet number game,
The performance means starts a game (hereinafter referred to as "second game") to be executed with the second number of bets set from the next game after starting execution of the first performance (hereinafter referred to as "next game"). If one or more games (referred to as "bet number game") are executed (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), a part of the first effect is not performed (for example, FIGS. 38 and 39 ),
This is the fourth basic configuration.

According to this fourth basic configuration,
In the fourth basic configuration, by not executing a part of the first performance, it is possible to emphasize calling attention to the second bet number game.

The first performance is a performance that suggests whether or not to shift to a gaming state (for example, an AT state) that is advantageous to the player.
This is the thirteenth preferred configuration.

According to the thirteenth preferred configuration, since a part of the first performance advantageous to the player is not executed, it is possible to emphasize calling attention to the second bet number game while giving a penalty.

In the thirteenth preferred configuration,
It includes a predetermined operation means (for example, a performance button 192) provided at a position that can be operated by a player,
The first performance includes an operation promotion performance (for example, operation promotion display d31) that prompts an operation on the predetermined operation means, and an operation response performance (for example, an operation response) that is executed based on the operation in the operation promotion performance. Display d32) is a production including,
In the first case, the presentation means is a means for not performing the operation response presentation (for example, FIG. 39);
This is the fourteenth preferred configuration.

According to the fourteenth preferred configuration, it is possible to emphasize calling attention to the second bet number game while giving a penalty that the operation response performance is not executed.

In the fourteenth preferred configuration,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
stop operation accepting means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) that accepts a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels;
Equipped with
The performance means is a means capable of executing a second performance (for example, 2 bet notification d2) that notifies that the second bet number game is the second bet number game during a part of the period of the second bet number game. can be,
In the first case, the performance means executes the second performance until a final stop operation (for example, a third stop operation) for the plurality of reels is received in the second bet number game; After the final stop operation, the means executes the first effect while not executing the operation promotion effect and the operation response effect that are part of the first effect, and then the first bet effect is executed. It is a means for notifying the result of whether or not to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player in a number game (for example, FIG. 39),
This is the fifteenth preferred configuration.

According to the fifteenth preferred configuration, it is possible to emphasize calling attention to the second bet number game while giving a penalty that the operation promotion performance and the operation response performance are not executed.

In the fifteenth preferred configuration,
The performance means is a means for executing the operation promotion performance after receiving the last stop operation in the first bet number game (for example, FIG. 38),
This is the sixteenth preferred configuration.

According to the sixteenth preferred configuration, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation after the final stop operation of the first bet number game.

(5) As described above, according to the gaming machine (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, Example C5),
It is possible to set any number of bets among a plurality of bet numbers including a first number of bets (for example, 3 coins) and a second number of bets smaller than the first bet number (for example, 2 coins). A bet number setting means (for example, medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, medal insertion slot 141, main control unit 300, medal insertion start operation reception processing S102),
A game execution means (for example, main control section 300, main control section main processing, main control section timer interrupt processing) that executes a game based on the number of bets set by the bet number setting means;
Production means capable of executing a predetermined production (for example, production image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, first sub-control unit main processing, second sub-control unit) main processing, etc.) and
A game machine comprising:
The game machine is recommended for a game that is executed with the first number of bets set (hereinafter referred to as "first number of bets game"),
The presentation means is configured to provide a first presentation regarding a penalty (for example, a number of games display d1) in a game executed with the second number of bets set (hereinafter referred to as a "second number of bets game"). , a second performance (for example, 2 bet notification d2) that notifies that it is the second bet number game,
The execution start timing of the first performance is different from the execution start timing of the second performance (for example, FIGS. 40 to 42),
This is the fifth basic configuration.

According to this fifth basic configuration, in the second bet number game, the execution start timings of the first effect regarding the penalty and the second effect notifying that it is the second bet number game are the same. Since the number of bets is different, it is possible to notify that it is a penalty for the second number-of-bets game and to alert you to the second number-of-bets game from next time onwards.

In the fifth basic configuration above,
A game number updating means (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, etc.) that updates the number of games;
When the number of games updated by the number of games updating means reaches a predetermined number (e.g., the number of ceiling games), a benefit that is advantageous to the player (e.g., transition from a normal state to an AT state, etc.) is granted. A privilege granting means (for example, main control unit 300, etc.),
Equipped with
The first performance is a notification performance (for example, a game number display d1) that notifies the number of games,
The number of games updating means is a means that does not update the number of games when the second number of bets game is executed,
The effect means executes the first effect in which the number of games is not updated when the second bet number game is executed (for example, FIGS. 40 to 42);
This is the seventeenth preferred configuration.

According to the seventeenth preferred configuration, it can be made clear that it is a penalty for the second bet number game.

In the seventeenth preferred configuration,
Comprising a game start means (for example, a start lever 135, a main control unit 300) that accepts a game start operation,
The number of games updating means is a means for updating the number of games in relation to the game start operation,
In the second number of bets game, the performance means is configured to perform the game after a period in which the number of games is not updated as the first performance after the game start means receives the game start operation. Execute the second performance (for example, FIGS. 40 to 42),
This is the eighteenth preferred configuration.

According to the 18th preferred configuration, by executing the first performance and the second performance consecutively, it is possible to emphasize calling attention to the second bet number game.

In the fifth basic configuration, the seventeenth preferred configuration, or the eighteenth preferred configuration,
The effect means is a means capable of executing the first effect using a first effect device (for example, effect image display device 157, sub effect image display device 195),
The effect means is a means capable of executing the second effect using a second effect device (for example, effect image display device 157),
The first presentation device and the second presentation device are the same or different presentation devices,
This is the nineteenth preferred configuration.

According to the nineteenth preferred configuration, it is possible to make the first effect and the second effect stand out.

In the fifth basic configuration, the seventeenth preferred configuration, the eighteenth preferred configuration, or the nineteenth preferred configuration,
It includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) that are decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate,
The performance means terminates the second performance being executed after all of the plurality of reels have stopped in the second bet number game.
This is the 20th preferred configuration.

According to the 20th preferred configuration, the second effect is executed until all the reels stop, so the second effect can be made to stand out.

<Other game machines>
Note that the slot machine may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, and in this case, the gaming medium includes electronic data equivalent to the medals, and the gaming medium is The input is made from a predetermined external device (an electronic storage device with a function that can electronically store the number of lent medals or a function that can electronically store the number of medals won by winning). , includes inputting electronic data, and paying out game media includes outputting electronic data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiments of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. Modifications may be made, and those involving such modifications and changes are also included within the technical scope of the present invention. In addition, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are those described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to things.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the game machine of this embodiment (slot machine in this example), a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are rotated by a predetermined rotation start instruction operation (for example, as described below). The rotation starts when the rotation start instruction operation (for example, operation using the stop button described later) is received, and based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation (for example, operation using the stop button described later), the internal winning of multiple types of winning combinations is determined by lottery. Each of the plurality of reels stops rotating individually by accepting a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, and the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the lottery result and the symbol combination when the plurality of reels stop are determined. This is a gaming machine that runs a series of games in which if a predetermined payout condition is met, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if it is not met, the game is finished without paying out the game medium.

Next, the slot machine of this embodiment will be explained in detail using FIGS. 43 to 49. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 43 to 49 are basically used only for explaining this embodiment, and even if the same symbols are shown in other drawings, they will not be used in the explanation of this embodiment. Priority is given to the codes shown in 43 to 49. Moreover, each example of this embodiment and each example of other embodiments can be applied in combination with each other.

<Basic configuration>
First, the basic configuration of the slot machine will be explained. The slot machine includes a main body and a front door that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body. Three reels (left reel, middle reel, and right reel) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are housed inside the center of the main body, and are configured to be rotated inside the slot machine. These three reels are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a strip member at equal intervals, and each reel is constructed by pasting this strip member on a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels are displayed vertically from the symbol display window, making a total of nine symbols visible. By rotating each reel, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Further, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

The first to third bet buttons are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine. In this embodiment, each time the first bet button is pressed, one coin is inserted up to a maximum of three coins, and when the second bet button is pressed, two coins are inserted, and the third bet button is pressed. Then, three pieces will be inserted. Hereinafter, the third bet button will also be referred to as the MAX bet button. Further, the third bet button also functions as a performance button that can start a certain performance when an operation is accepted. Hereinafter, the third bet button will also be referred to as a performance button.

The start lever is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the three reels. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot or the first to third bet buttons are operated and the start lever is operated, the three reels start rotating. The operation on the start lever is called a game start operation.

The left stop button, middle stop button, and right stop button are button-shaped push-down switches for individually stopping the three reels that have started rotating by operating the start lever, and are provided in association with each reel. ing. More specifically, the left reel can be stopped by operating the left stop button, the middle reel can be stopped by operating the middle stop button, and the right reel can be stopped by operating the right stop button. You can stop the reels.

Hereinafter, the operation on the stop button will be referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation will be referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as the second stop operation, and the last stop operation will be referred to as the third stop operation, and the target of the first stop operation. The reel that is the target of the second stop operation is sometimes referred to as the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is referred to as the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is sometimes referred to as the third stop reel.

Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons are operated to stop all of the rotating reels is called an operation order or a pressing order. The operation order in which the first stop reel is the left reel and the stop operation is called the "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push," and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel and the stop operation is the "reverse push operation order." This is called ``order of operations'' or simply ``reverse push''.

The high navigation state lamp is a lamp that lights up when the AT system gaming state of the main control unit is in the high navigation state described later. The player can understand that the player is in the high navigation state from the lighting manner of the high navigation state lamp.

A presentation device is installed above the front door. This production device is equipped with a shutter (shielding device) consisting of two shutters (a right shutter and a left shutter) that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device placed behind the shutters. When the shutter opens horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display, the display screen of the liquid crystal display appears in front of the slot machine (on the player's side). The liquid crystal display device of this embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding stop operations (for example, the operation order and operation timing of stop buttons).

<Circuit configuration of control section>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine will be explained. The control section of a slot machine can be roughly divided into a main control section that controls the progress of the game, and a main control section that controls the main effects according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control section. and a second sub-control unit that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit.

The main control section includes an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section, and enables communication with the first sub-control section. Note that information communication between the main control unit and the first sub-control unit is one-way communication, and the main control unit can send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit. Unable to send commands or other signals to the unit.

The first sub-control unit includes a basic circuit that receives control commands transmitted by the main control unit via an input interface, and controls the entire first sub-control unit based on the control commands. The first sub-control unit controls sound output means (speakers, sound source ICs, etc.), various lamps, and the like.

The second sub-control unit includes a basic circuit that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit via the input interface, and controls the entire second sub-control unit based on the control command. The second sub-control unit controls the liquid crystal display device and the like.

<Winning line>
Next, the winning line will be explained.

The symbols displayed on the upper row of the left reel are the left reel upper row symbols, the symbols displayed on the middle row of the left reel are the left reel middle row symbols, the symbols displayed on the lower row of the left reel are the left reel lower row symbols, and the symbols displayed on the middle reel upper row. The displayed symbol is the middle reel upper symbol, the symbol displayed in the middle reel is the middle reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed in the lower middle reel is the middle reel lower symbol, and the symbol displayed in the upper right reel is the middle reel lower symbol. The symbols displayed in the upper row of the right reel, the symbols displayed in the middle row of the right reel are called the right reel middle symbols, and the symbols displayed in the lower row of the right reel are called the right reel lower symbols. Each symbol on each reel can be viewed through the symbol display window. Each reel will display three vertically, nine in total.

In this embodiment, one winning line is provided, which is a middle winning line consisting of a left reel middle row symbol, a middle reel middle row symbol, and a right reel middle row symbol. The winning line is a line set at a stop position of symbols that can be visually recognized through the symbol display window, and is a line on which it is determined whether a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed. The valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as gaming media.

The slot machine of this embodiment allows games with a bet of 3 or 2 coins, and if the number of inserted medals is less than 2, none of the winning lines will be activated, and the number of medals placed is 3 or 2. The winning line becomes active when a bet is placed. Once the winning line is activated, the player can start the game by operating the start lever.

Further, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line, there is also a downward-sloping winning line that consists of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, and left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of three winning lines, including the upward winning lines to the right, may be set as valid winning lines, or a number of winning lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid winning lines.

<Type of winning role>
Next, the types of winning combinations of slot machines will be explained.

The winning combinations of the slot machine include special prizes (special prize 1, special prize 2), general prizes (replay prize 1 to replay prize 13, small prize 1 to small prize 5), and the like. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in this embodiment, special combination 1 and special combination 2 are combinations that shift to a special gaming state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Furthermore, re-game winning combinations 1 to 13 are roles that can be played again without inserting new medals. These winning combinations are sometimes called "actuation combinations." In addition, "winning" in this embodiment also includes a case where a symbol combination of an active role that does not involve a medal payout (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the active line. For example, special role 1, This includes winnings in the special winning combination 2 and replaying combinations 1 to 13.

Special combination 1 and special combination 2 are combinations (actuation combinations) that shift to a special gaming state upon winning. In this example, special combination 1 is a winning combination that can only be won in a 3-card bet game, and special combination 2 is a winning combination that can only be won in a 2-card bet game. Note that medals will not be paid out for winning this role itself.

When the special winning combination 1 or 2 is internally won, the special winning internal winning flag corresponding to the internally winning winning combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit). When the flag is set to ON due to the internal winning of the special winning combination 1, the main control section shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 1 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Further, when the flag is set to ON due to the internal winning of the special winning combination 2, the main control section shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 2 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3).

This flag remains on until the internally won winning combination is won, and it becomes easier to win the internally winning winning combination in subsequent games. That is, even if the player does not win the special winning combination in a game in which the special winning combination 1 or special winning combination 2 is internally won, the special winning combination will be internally won in the next and subsequent games. The special role 1 internal winning state (RT2) and the special winning role 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit shifts the gaming state to a special gaming state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination 1 or special winning combination 2 being displayed. Furthermore, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of coins (in this example, 110 coins for winning with BB1 and 55 coins for winning with BB2) is paid out, a low re-gaming probability state (hereinafter, this state will be referred to as RT1) ). The special gaming state (RT4) and the low replay probability state (RT1) will be described later.

“Re-gaming role (re-gaming role 1 to re-gaming role 13)” is a winning role (activation role) that allows you to play the next game without inserting medals (game media) by winning a prize. No medals will be paid out. “Small role (Small role 1 to Small role 5)” is a winning role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning.

<Reel stop control>
Next, an overview of reel stop control will be explained. The reel stop control is performed by selecting one of multiple types of predetermined reel stop control data based on predetermined conditions (for example, the results of internal lottery processing for winning combinations described later), and stopping the selected reel. Performed based on control data.

In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame slipping control) is performed. Pull-in control refers to control that shifts the stop position of the reel within a range of a certain number of frames (number of symbols) (pull-in range; here, a maximum of 4 frames) after each stop button is operated by the player. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM of the main control section. Each reel stop data includes a permission control that allows symbol combinations of a predetermined winning combination to be displayed on the winning line, and a prohibition control that prevents symbol combinations of any winning combination from being displayed on the winning line. It is broadly divided into .

Examples of cases in which permissive control is performed include when a winning combination is internally won, or when a special winning combination is internally won (the flag is being carried over), and the player operates each stop button at the wrong time. Control is also performed so that the symbol combinations of winning combinations are displayed within the range of the above-mentioned number of frames. However, since it is only "allowed", the symbol combinations may not come together depending on the timing of operating each stop button.

For example, if you win the small prize 2 (Watermelon 1) internally, the watermelon symbol is arranged over 4 frames, so if you operate the stop button at the wrong time, the watermelon symbol will not stop on the winning line. .

However, depending on the arrangement of the symbols on the reels and the number of symbols drawn, there are cases where it will be 100% aligned. For example, since the arrangement interval of replay symbols corresponding to replay combination 1 (normal replay) is a maximum of 4 frames, if replay combination 1 is internally won, the winning will be 100% regardless of the timing.

On the other hand, an example of prohibition control being performed is, for example, when the internal lottery result is a loss and the special winning combination is not internally won (flag carryover), and the timing of the player's operation of each stop button is good. Also, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning combinations are not displayed together within the range of the above-mentioned number of frames.

<Type of gaming state>
Next, the types and changes of gaming states of slot machines will be explained.

The main control unit of the slot machine can be roughly divided into a low replay probability state (RT1), a special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2) with a high replay probability state, and a special combination 2 internal winning state with a high replay probability state (RT2). RT3), and a special gaming state (RT4). In this embodiment, these four gaming states are referred to as RT-based gaming states. In addition, in this embodiment, the main control unit also controls a state related to so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as an AT-based gaming state), and the first The sub-control unit is configured to set the gaming state. The AT system gaming state will be described later using FIG. 43(E).

In addition, the re-gaming low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability that the condition device related to the re-gaming combination operates does not change (default state), special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) and the special gaming state (RT4) are also states in which the probability of activation of the condition device related to the re-gaming combination varies with respect to the default state.

Hereinafter, the RT-type gaming state of the slot machine will be explained.

<Low replay probability state (RT1)>
The low replay probability state is a gaming state (disadvantageous to the player) in which the internal winning probability of replaying is the lowest among other gaming states (e.g., gaming states excluding special gaming states), and is referred to as the normal gaming state. There is also.

If special role 1 is internally elected, the state will move to special role 1 internally elected state (RT2), which will be described later.If special role 2 is internally elected, it will move to special role 2 internally elected state (RT3), which will be described later. do.

<Special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), special role 2 internal winning state (RT3)>
The special role internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as the "special role internal winning state") are the low replay probability state (RT1). ), the internal winning flag corresponding to special winning combination 1 or special winning combination 2 is set to on, and the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing. This is a gaming state in which a symbol combination corresponding to the special combination corresponding to this flag can be displayed by doing so.

In the special role internal winning state, when a symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is displayed, a transition is made to a special game state (RT4) to be described later.

<Special gaming state (RT4)>
The special gaming state (RT4) is the most advantageous gaming state for the player among all the gaming states.

In the special gaming state (RT4), when a specified number of coins are paid out, the state shifts to a low re-gaming probability state (RT1). Specifically, when the special game state is entered based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to special combination 1, if more than 110 medals are paid out, the replay low probability state (RT1) is entered. to move to. In addition, if the special gaming state is entered based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to special combination 2, if more than 55 medals are paid out, the state will be shifted to the low replay probability state (RT1). .

<Transition of AT system game state>
Next, the AT system game state will be explained.

The AT system gaming state is broadly divided into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability that operation navigation will be executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode. The high navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is higher than that in the low navigation state, and is also referred to as AT mode.

Here, the operation navigation refers to an effect that notifies you of the correct operation order when the push order combination is internally won. That is, the operation navigation refers to an effect that notifies the contents of the stop operation for acquiring medals, the contents of the stop operation for shifting to an advantageous gaming state, or maintaining an advantageous gaming state. In this embodiment, the operation navigation is executed using the payout number display and the effect image display device.

Note that in this embodiment, the low navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is defined as a state in which the probability of execution of operation navigation is higher than the low navigation state. A state in which operation navigation is not executed or a high navigation state may be set as a state in which operation navigation is executed. If a stop operation is performed in accordance with the operation contents of the operation navigation, an advantageous result is brought to the player, so the high navigation state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, advantageous specifically refers to the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine compared to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets on the gaming machine when playing for a predetermined period of time. It refers to the ratio, so-called payout rate (ball output rate).

In this embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied in the low navigation state (for example, when a winning combination other than a loss is won), a transition is made to the normal state (normal gaming state) of the high navigation state. After that, as shown in FIG. 43(E), for example, the state transitions to the AT1 state (judge state), and from this AT1 state (judge state), there is a route to directly transition to the AT2 state or via a pullback state. There are routes that transition to the normal gaming state or the AT2 state. In this embodiment, when it is determined to shift to the AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state), a predetermined number (for example, 50 games, etc.) of the number of AT mode games (hereinafter referred to as the number of AT games) is provided. Further, if a certain condition is satisfied in the high navigation state, the state shifts to the LMT (limit) state.

<AT system state transition>
Each gaming state of the AT system is managed in a further subdivided manner, and this is called a performance state. In detail, the performance states of the low navigation state are the normal state, and the performance states of the high navigation state include the normal state, confirmed notification state, judge state, pullback state, AT1 state, AT2 state, and LMT (limit) state. . Note that the AT1 state, AT2 state, and LMT (limit) state are states in which the number of balls produced increases in principle.

Here, the limit state basically refers to the production state from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state, which is the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state (from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state). (It is also possible that the performance state of is not the limit state). In this embodiment, when there are 20 or fewer games remaining in the high navigation state, an ending effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ED effect") indicating the end of the high navigation state is executed.

<Production table>
Next, the effect table included in the first sub-control unit will be explained.
@
The storage means (for example, ROM) of the first sub-control unit stores an effect table provided for each effect state. The first sub-control unit acquires performance information (for example, performance status, high navigation state counter, performance status counter, etc.) included in the command received from the main control unit, and refers to a performance table corresponding to the performance status, etc. , performs a performance according to the performance state counter, etc. For example, if the current performance state is the AT1 state, the performance table corresponding to the AT1 state (AT1 state performance table) is referred to, and processing such as reading performance data for executing the AT1 performance described later from the ROM is performed. If the performance data needs to be updated, the performance data is updated.

In addition, if the current performance state is a judge state, the performance table corresponding to the judge state (judge state performance table) is referred to, and processing such as reading performance data for executing the judge performance described later from the ROM is performed. If the performance data needs to be updated, the performance data is updated.

When a certain condition is met, the first sub-control unit selects a predetermined performance from among multiple types of performances according to the current setting value using a lottery table for setting suggestion performance A, and selects a predetermined performance according to the current setting value. Processing such as reading production data for executing the above from the ROM is performed, and display of setting suggestion A (for example, display of a character image) to be described later is executed.

Further, when a certain condition is met, the first sub-control unit selects a predetermined performance from among multiple types of performances according to the current setting value using the lottery table for setting suggestion performance B, and Processing such as reading performance data for executing the performance from the ROM is performed, and display of setting suggestion B (for example, a background image of the end screen) to be described later is executed.

<Point display/overview in non-recommended bet amount games>
Next, an overview of point display in the non-recommended bet number game will be explained using FIG. 43.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment (in this example, a slot machine) includes a display means (in this example, a liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 43(A) etc.) capable of displaying multiple types of displays, and A control means (in this example, a main control section, a first sub-control section, etc.) for shifting to one of the states is provided.

One of the plurality of types of displays is a counter display related to the player's advantage. Examples of this counter display include, for example, the cumulative point display TP showing the cumulative number of points earned by the player, as shown in FIGS. Examples include a count display showing the number of games, a count display showing the number of bonuses and winning combinations, a count display showing the number of AT additions, a count display showing the number of remaining AT games, etc.

Furthermore, one of the plurality of types of displays is a certain display that shows the amount of change in the counter display in a certain game. As an example of this certain display, for example, in addition to the point award displays GP1 and GP2 showing the number of points awarded in the game shown in FIGS. 43(A) and 43(B), items awarded in the game and Examples include a display showing the number of game media, a display showing the number of AT additions given in the game, etc. Note that a certain display is not limited to a display when the advantage increases, but may also be a display when the advantage decreases. For example, a display indicating the number of points spent in the game (for example, "- 20 points).

The plurality of states include a first state (in this example, the normal state shown in FIG. 43(A)) and a second state (in this example, the normal state shown in FIG. 43(A)) in which the degree of change in the counter display is different. B)), and the certain display in the first state (the first certain display; in this example, the point giving display GP1 shown in FIG. The certain display (a second certain display, in this example, the point giving display GP2 shown in FIG. 43(B)) in the state is a different display. Further, the second state is a state in which the degree of change in the counter display is greater than that in the first state (in this example, a state in which points are easily awarded).

Examples of combinations of the first state and the second state include the normal state and specialized state (a state in which points are more easily awarded than the normal state), as well as the normal game state with a high navigation state and the judge state (normal game state). state), normal state and bonus game state (state where it is easier to obtain game media than the normal state), normal state and high replay probability state (state where it is easier to obtain the number of AT additional games than the normal state), A state in which it is easy to win a game winning combination), a low navigation state and a high navigation state (a state in which navigation is more likely to appear than in a low navigation state), etc.

Further, the game machine according to the present embodiment (in this example, a slot machine) is used for a first game (in this example, 3 pieces) in which the number of game media bet is a first number (3 pieces in this example). A second game in which the number of game media bet is a second number (in this example, 2 pieces) different from the first number (in this example, a 2-piece bet game) can be executed. The first game is more advantageous for the player than the second game.

FIG. 43(A) is a diagram chronologically showing an example in which a two-piece bet game is performed after a three-piece bet game in the normal state, and FIG. It is a diagram showing in chronological order an example in which a two-coin bet game is performed after playing a game.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 43(A)(1) to FIG. 43(A)(3), a 3-bet bet game (first game) is started in the normal state (first state), and the When a predetermined number of points (20 points in this example) are awarded in a game, the third stop operation triggers a point award display GP1 (a first certain display) indicating the number of points awarded in the game. In this example, display of an image including the characters "+20") is started.

Additionally, since points were awarded in the game, the third stop operation triggered the cumulative point display TP indicating the cumulative number of points earned by the player from "200/1000pt" to "220/1000pt". It is being updated. In this example, when the cumulative number of points earned by a player reaches 1000 points, the player will be transferred to the CZ (Chance Zone), where there is a high expectation of transitioning to AT gaming, or a benefit that will make it easier to transition to AT gaming. (Items, etc.) are awarded by lottery.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 43(B) to 43(B)(3), a 3-bet bet game (first game) is started in the specialized state (second state), and a predetermined When points (20 points in this example) are awarded, the third stop operation is used as a trigger to display point award display GP2 (a second certain display; in this example , display of an image of the characters "+20" enclosed in a square) begins.

In addition, since one game in the specialized state has been completed in the game, using the third stop operation as a trigger, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the counter that manages the number of games in the specialized state, and the remaining number of games in the specialized state is The remaining number of games display DP indicating the number of games played is updated from "4G remaining" to "3G remaining".

Here, in the specialized state, points are more easily awarded than in the normal state, and it is easier for the cumulative number of points to reach the target value (1000 in this example). The second certain display) is a more conspicuous display than the point awarding display GP1 (the first certain display) in the normal state. Note that the point award display GP1 (a first certain display) and the point award display GP2 (a second certain display) may be different displays; for example, one may be a blinking display and the other may be a non-blinking display. Alternatively, one, more than one, or all of the shapes, colors, sizes, and patterns may be displayed differently.

Further, the game machine according to the present embodiment (in this example, a slot machine) can play a second game (in this example, a slot machine) in a state where a certain first display (in this example, point award display GP1) is displayed. , 2 bet game) is started, the first certain display is not displayed after the second game ends, and the second certain display (the main game) is started. In the example, if execution of the second game is started while the point award display GP2) is being displayed, a certain second display is displayed after the second game is finished. It is configured as follows.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 43(A)(3), in a state where point award display GP1 (first certain display) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 43(A)(4), , when a two-bet bet game (second game) is started as the next game, as shown in FIG. (after the stop operation), the point award display GP1 (first certain display) is configured not to be displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43(B)(3), in a state where the point award display GP2 (a second certain display) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 43(B)(4), the next When the execution of a two-bet bet game (second game) is started, as shown in (B) (5) in the same figure, after the second game ends (after the third stop operation) ), and a point award display GP2 (a second certain display) is displayed.

In addition, in the 3-bet bet game (first game) explained using FIG. 43 (B) (1) to FIG. 3 Using the stop operation as a trigger, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the counter that manages the number of games in the specialized state, and the remaining game number display DP indicating the remaining number of games in the specialized state changes from "4G to go" to "3G to go". ", but if a 2-bet game (second game), which is a non-recommended bet number game, is executed, the count value of the counter that manages the number of games in the specialized state is not updated, and the corresponding The number of remaining games display DP indicating the count value is also configured not to be updated.

In addition, in this example, when a two-bet bet game (second game), which is a non-recommended bet number game, is executed, the As such, the system is configured to start a warning display CD (in this example, a display including the text "2 bet game in progress") indicating that a game with a non-recommended bet number has been executed. Note that such a warning display is not limited to one that is displayed in a part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. For example, if the warning display is performed using the entire display area, it will be possible to alert the player. Evocation can be performed more reliably.

FIG. 43(C) is a diagram chronologically showing an example of a three-coin bet game in the specialized state, and FIG. 43(D) is a time-series diagram showing an example of a two-coin bet game in the specialized state. It is a diagram shown in series.

In this example, the display means is a means capable of displaying an operation navigation, and the control means is a means capable of executing control for transitioning to one of a plurality of states including a normal state and an advantageous state. The advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state regarding the display of the operation navigation, the second state is one state included in the advantageous state, and the first state related to the advantageous state is (for example, the first counter shown in FIGS. 43(C) and 43(D), a counter that manages the number of games in the specialized state), and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the first counter shown in FIGS. The count value of the counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value") can be updated, and for example, as shown in FIG. 43(C), the first game (for example, , 3-coin bet game), both the first count value and the count value regarding the count display (for example, the cumulative point display TP shown in FIGS. 43(A) and 43(B)) is configured such that the count value of is updated, and when execution of the second game (for example, a 2-coin bet game) is started in the advantageous state, only the first count value is updated, The count value related to the count display is configured not to be updated.

Further, in this example, the advantageous state is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states, and one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a certain advantageous gaming state. 43(C) and (D)), and each time one game is played in the certain advantageous gaming state, The count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is configured to be updateable, and one of the plurality of types of displays indicates a certain value. A display including an image (hereinafter referred to as a "first display"; for example, the first display d1 shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D)), and one of the plurality of types of displays is: The display includes an image representing the updated value of the certain value (hereinafter referred to as "second display"; for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 43(C)), and the certain value is It is a value related to the second count value, and for example, as shown in FIG. 43(C), when execution of the first game (for example, 3-coin bet game) is started in the certain advantageous game state. In this case, both the first count value and the second count value are updated, and the second display is configured to be displayable in the first game, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in D), when execution of the second game (for example, a two-coin bet game) is started in the certain advantageous gaming state, the first count value and the second count value Of these, only the first count value is updated, and the second display is not displayed in the second game.

<Point display/specific example in non-recommended bet number games>
Next, a specific example of point display in the non-recommended bet number game will be explained using FIGS. 44 and 45.

<Point display in non-recommended bet number games/Normal state 3 bet games>
FIG. 44(A) is a diagram chronologically showing an example of a three-coin bet game in the normal state.

The state shown in FIG. 44(A)(2) is a state in which, after three medals have been bet in the normal state, a three medal bet game has been started in response to the pressing operation of the start lever. In this example, when the start lever is pressed down, the liquid crystal display device 157 continues to display the cumulative point display TP "200/1000pt" of the previous game.

In the subsequent states shown in FIGS. 44(A)(3) to 44(A)(6), after the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation, the cumulative point display TP is updated. has started. In this example, since 20 points were awarded in the game, the cumulative point display TP is changed from "200/1000pt" shown in (A) (4) of the same figure to (A) using the third stop operation as a trigger. ) The update display to update to "220/1000pt" shown in (6) has started.

In addition, in this example, as the cumulative point display, an example was shown in which the cumulative point number after addition (220 in this example) and the target value of the cumulative point number (1000 in this example) are displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Without limitation, the number of points obtained by subtracting the cumulative points from the target value of cumulative points (for example, 780 (=1000-220)) may be displayed.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 44(A) (7) is a state in which the point allocation display GP1 is started upon completion of the updated display of the cumulative point display TP. In this example, since 20 points were awarded in the game, the point award display GP1 (first certain display; in this example, an image containing the characters "+20") indicates the number of points awarded in the game. display) has started.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 44(A) (9) is a state in which after three medals have been bet, the next three medal bet game has been started in response to the pressing operation of the start lever. In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to continue displaying the accumulated point display TP "220/1000pt" of the previous game and the point award display GP1 of the previous game.

In the subsequent states shown in FIG. 44(A)(10) to FIG. 44(A)(12), after the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation, the point award display GP1 is updated. has started. In this example, since no points are awarded in the game, the third stop operation is used as a trigger to start a display (fade-out display) that gradually erases the point assignment display GP1.

In this example, after displaying the point award display GP1 from the previous game to the current game, the third stop operation in the next game is used as an opportunity to start updating the point award display GP1 (in this example, the fade-out display is Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the fade-out display of the point award display GP1 may be started in response to the first stop operation or the second stop operation in the next game. , when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display of the point award display GP1 was started in the previous game, the fade-out display of the point award display GP1 may be started.

Further, after starting the display of the point award display GP1 in the previous game, the display of the point award display GP1 may be continued until at least a pressing operation of the start lever is received in the next game. Further, the method of erasing the point award display GP1 is not limited to the fade-out display, and may be a mode of simply erasing the display.

<Point display in non-recommended bet number games/3 bet games in specialized state>
FIG. 44(B) is a diagram showing, in chronological order, an example of a three-coin bet game in the specialized state.

The state shown in FIG. 44(B)(2) is a state in which, after three medals have been bet in the specialized state, a three medal bet game has been started in response to the pressing operation of the start lever. In this example, since the normal state has transitioned to the specialized state (a state in which points are more easily awarded than the normal state), when the start lever is pressed, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display the specialized state. A specialization state suggestion display that suggests a specialization state (in this example, increased PT suggestion production A) and a specialization state suggestion display that suggests a specialization state (in this example, a text display of "PT specialization zone") display) has started.

In addition, in this example, since the normal state has transitioned to the specialized state, the cumulative point display TP changes from "200/1000 pt" shown in (B) (1) of the same figure, using the press operation of the start lever as a trigger. The cumulative point display TP2 (in this example, the display including the character display of "200") shown in (B) (2) of the same figure is changed, and the remaining game number display DP (main In the example, a display including the characters "4G remaining" is started.

In the subsequent states shown in FIG. 44(B)(3) to FIG. 44(B)(7), after the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation, the point award display GP2 is started. At the same time, the updated display of the cumulative point display TP2 has started.

In this example, since 20 points were awarded in the game, the third stop operation is used as a trigger to display the point award display GP2 (a second certain display; in this example The display of an image of the characters "+20" surrounded by a square) is started, and the display overlaps with the specialization state suggestion effect (in this example, increased PT suggestion effect A), and the cumulative point display TP2 is displayed in the same figure ( B) An update display has started from "200" shown in (4) to "220" shown in (7) of FIG.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 44(B) (9) is a state in which after three medals have been bet, the next three medal bet game has been started in response to the pressing operation of the start lever. In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to continue displaying the cumulative point display TP2 "220" from the previous game, while erasing the display of the point awarding display GP2 from the previous game, and displaying a new specialized state suggestion effect. (In this example, increased PT suggestion effect C) is started. Note that the specialization state suggestion performance (increased PT suggestion performance C) of this example also functions as a performance suggesting that 50 points have been awarded in the game.

According to this example, in order to erase the display of point award display GP2 of the previous game and start a new specialization state suggestion performance (increased PT suggestion performance C), the player instructs the player to move to a new specialization state. be clearly informed.

In the subsequent states shown in FIG. 44(B)(10) to FIG. 44(B)(13), after the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation, the point award display GP2 is started. At the same time, the updated display of the cumulative point display TP2 has started.

In this example, since 50 points were awarded in the game, the third stop operation is used as a trigger to display the point award display GP2 (a second certain display; in this example The display of an image of the characters "+50" surrounded by a square) is started, and the display overlaps with the specialization state suggestion production (in this example, increased PT suggestion production C), and the cumulative point display TP2 is displayed (in the same figure). B) An update display has started to update from "220" shown in (11) to "270" shown in (13) of FIG.

<Point display in non-recommended bet number games/3 bet games → 2 bet games>
FIG. 45(A) is a diagram chronologically showing an example in which a two-bet game is performed after a three-coin bet game is performed in the normal state.

The state shown in FIG. 44(A)(8) is the same state as FIG. 44(A)(8), and is a state in which point award display GP1 and accumulated point display TP are performed in a 3-card bet game in the normal state. It is.

The following state shown in FIG. 45(A)(1) is a state in which the point award display GP1 (first certain display) is displayed in the previous three-coin bet game, and the next game is a two-coin bet game ( This is the state in which the execution of the second game) has started.

In this example, a 2-bet bet game (second game), which is a non-recommended bet number game, was executed while the point award display GP1 (first certain display) was being displayed. While the warning display CD indicating that the bet number game has been executed is started, the point award display GP1 (first certain display) is configured not to be displayed.

Note that such a warning display is not limited to one that is displayed in a part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. For example, if the warning display is performed using the entire display area, it will be possible to alert the player. Evocation can be performed more reliably.

In addition, there is no particular limitation on the method of not displaying the point award display GP1 (first certain display) in the two-stakes bet game (second game). By displaying at least a part of the warning display in an overlapping manner, the point award display GP1 (first certain display) may be made invisible (or difficult to see) from the front, and the display may be made invisible (or difficult to see) from the front by The started point award display GP1 (a certain first display) may be erased after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Further, the point awarding display GP1 (first certain display) may be configured not to be displayed at least during the period when the attention display is displayed.

In the following states shown in FIGS. 45(A)(2) to 45(A)(4), after the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation, the warning display CD is erased. state. In this example, the alert display CD is erased using the third stop operation as a trigger, but the alert display CD may also be erased using the first stop operation or the second stop operation as a trigger.

FIG. 45(B) is a diagram chronologically showing an example in which a 3-bet bet game is performed and then a 2-bet bet game is performed in the specialized state.

The state shown in FIG. 44(B)(8) is the same state as FIG. 44(B)(8), in which point award display GP2 and accumulated point display TP2 are performed in the 3-coin bet game in the specialized state. state.

In this example, a 2-bet bet game (second game), which is a non-recommended bet number game, was executed while the point award display GP2 (a second certain display) was being displayed. A warning display CD indicating that a bet number game has been executed has started.

In the following states shown in FIG. 45(B)(2) to FIG. 45(B)(4), after the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation, the alert display CD is erased. On the other hand, the point award display GP2 (a second certain display) has started.

In this example, a two-bet bet game (second game), which is a non-recommended bet number game, is executed while the point award display GP2 (a second certain display) is displayed, and the third stop operation Since the game has ended, a point award display GP2 (a second certain display) is displayed.

According to this example, it is possible to grasp the latest gaming state (in this example, the normal state or the specialized state) based on the display mode of a certain display, and it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

FIG. 45(C) is a diagram chronologically showing an example of a performance when a three-coin bet game is played in the specialized state and the cumulative point number reaches the target value.

The states shown in FIG. 45(C)(1) to FIG. 45(C)(4) are states in which updated display of the cumulative point display TP2 has started in response to the third stop operation. In this example, since 20 points were awarded in the game, the third stop operation is used as a trigger to display the point award display GP2 (a second certain display; in this example The display of an image of the characters "+20" surrounded by a square) is started, and the display overlaps with the specialization state suggestion effect (in this example, increased PT suggestion effect A), and the cumulative point display TP2 is displayed in the same figure ( C) An update display has started to update from "990" shown in (1) to "1010" shown in (4) of FIG.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 45(C)(5) is a CZ effect (in this example, " This is the state in which the production (including the text display of "CZ entry!!") has started.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 45(C)(6) is a state in which after three medals have been bet, the next three medal bet game has been started in response to the pressing operation of the start lever. In this example, since the cumulative point number reached the target value (1000 in this example) in the previous game, the game shifts to the CZ state.

FIG. 45(D) is a diagram showing an example of changes in various counters in a time series in a normal state, and FIG. 45(E) is a diagram showing an example in a time series of changes in various counters in a specialized state. It is.

As mentioned above, the specialized state is a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. For example, in this example, the CZ transition counter in the specialized state is a state where the number is more likely to increase than the CZ transition counter in the normal state. In other words, the configuration is such that it is easy to shift to the CZ state, which is advantageous for the player.

In addition, in this example, when execution of the first game (3 bet game) is started in the normal state or the specialized state, both the count value of the high navigation state counter and the count value of the ceiling G number counter While the count value of the high navigation state counter and the ceiling G number counter are updated, if execution of the second game (two bet game) is started in the normal state or specialized state, the count value of the high navigation state counter and the ceiling G number counter are updated. Of the count values, only the count value of the high navigation state counter is updated.

As explained above, the gaming machine (for example, a slot machine) according to the present embodiment includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. A game machine is provided with a control means (for example, a main control section, a first sub-control section, etc.) for transitioning to a state, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is based on a player's advantage. It is a related counter display (for example, the cumulative point display TP shown in FIGS. 43(A) and 43(B)), and one display among the plurality of types of displays is for a certain game (for example, one of the plurality of games). A certain display indicating the amount of change in the counter display in one game or two or more games out of a plurality of games, and the plurality of types of states include a first state in which the degree of change in the counter display is different; (for example, a normal state) and a second state (for example, a specialized state), and the certain display in the first state (hereinafter referred to as "first certain display"). For example, FIG. The point award display GP1) shown in A) and the certain display in the second state (hereinafter referred to as "second certain display"; for example, the point award display GP2 shown in FIG. 43(B)) are different. This game machine is characterized by a display (for example, a different display mode, a different display position, etc.).

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to grasp the latest gaming state based on the display mode of a certain display, and it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

In addition, a first game (in this example, a 3-bet game) in which the number of gaming media bet is a first number (in this example, 3) and a second number (in this example, a 3-bet bet game) in which the number of gaming media bet is a first number (in this example, 3) In this example, the system is configured to be able to execute a second game (in this example, a two-bet bet game) that is 2 coins), the first number and the second number are different numbers, and the first number and the second number are different numbers. The first game is a game that is more advantageous for the player than the game, and execution of the second game is started in a state where a certain display of the first game is being displayed. In this case, after the second game is finished, the first certain display is not displayed, and the second certain display is displayed. When execution of the second game is started, the second certain display may be displayed after the second game is finished.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible to grasp the latest gaming status based on whether a certain display is displayed, and it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

Further, the first state is a state in which the counter display may or may not change when the first game is played, and the second state is a state in which the counter display may or may not change when the first game is played. The counter display may be in a state in which the counter display always changes when the above is performed.

Conventionally, in an advantageous situation where the amount of point change is large, players focus on how many points have changed, and there is a risk that they will not be able to confirm the amount of point change if they have hurriedly played a two-coin bet game after the previous result was displayed. was there. However, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in an advantageous situation, a player who has already played an unfavorable two-coin bet game can be shown the previous result display. It is possible to maintain the desire to play. Conversely, in a non-advantageous state where the amount of point change is small, the player does not focus on how many points have changed, but rather is concerned about whether to move to an advantageous state where the amount of point change is large, for example, or whether the player will have strong points related to CZ or AT transition. Since the focus is on whether or not a performance will occur, by not displaying the result display, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the game.

Further, the second state may be a state in which the degree of change in the counter display is greater than that in the first state (for example, a state in which points are easily awarded).

With such a configuration, it is possible to further maintain the desire of a player who has played an unfavorable two-coin bet game.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying an operation navigation, and the control means is a means capable of executing control for transitioning to one of a plurality of states including a normal state and an advantageous state. , the advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the display of the operation navigation, and the second state (or/and the first state) is one state included in the advantageous state. 43 (C) and (D), a counter that manages the number of games in the specialized state), and includes a first counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the first counter shown in FIGS. The count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value") can be updated each time the count value of the first counter is updated.For example, as shown in FIG. 43(C), the advantageous state When execution of the first game (for example, 3-coin bet game) is started, the first count value and the count display (for example, the accumulated points shown in FIGS. 43(A) and 43(B)) Display TP) is configured such that both count values are updated, and when execution of the second game (for example, a two-coin bet game) is started in the advantageous state, the first The configuration may be such that only the count value of is updated, and the count value related to the count display is not updated.

With such a configuration, when the execution of the second game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the first count value of the first count value and the count value related to the count display is Since only the count value of is updated, it becomes possible to inform the player that the second game has been played in a manner that does not embarrass the player. Also, since the first counter (counter related to advantageous conditions) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game can be played with a player who played correctly in the first game. It becomes possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing the game.

Further, in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states, and one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a certain advantageous gaming state, A second counter (for example, the second counter shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D)) relating to the certain advantageous gaming state is provided, and each time one game is played in the certain advantageous gaming state, The count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is configured to be updateable, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image indicating a certain value. (hereinafter referred to as the "first display"; for example, the first display d1 shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D)), and one display among the plurality of types of displays is based on the certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "second display"; for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 43(C)) including an image representing the updated value of The value is related to a count value, and when execution of the first game is started in the certain advantageous gaming state, both the first count value and the second count value are updated. , the second display is configured to be displayable in the first game, and for example, as shown in FIG. 43(D), when the second game is executed (for example, 2-bet game) is started, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated, and in the second game, the second count value is updated. The display may be configured so that the display is not displayed.

With such a configuration, when the execution of the second game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the first of the first count value and the second count value is Only the count value is updated and the second display (display including an image representing the updated value of the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, so the second game is not played. It becomes possible to notify the player of the fact in a manner that does not embarrass the player. Also, since the first counter (counter related to advantageous conditions) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game can be played with a player who played correctly in the first game. It becomes possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing the game.

Further, when execution of the second game is started while a certain first display is being displayed, a specific display (for example, the warning display shown in FIGS. 43(A) and 43(B)) CD) is configured so that it can be started, and when execution of the first game is started in a state where the second certain display is displayed, the specific display is not started. It may be.

With such a configuration, the player can be made aware that execution of the second game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game, has started.

Furthermore, if execution of the second game is started while the first certain display is being displayed, the first certain display is not displayed after the second game is finished. One of the plurality of types of displays is a display (hereinafter referred to as a "third display") indicating the cumulative amount accumulated based on the execution of the game. 43(A) and (B), and when execution of the first game is started, the second certain display is displayed after the first game is finished. and the third certain display is updated, and if execution of the second game is started while the second certain display is being displayed, the third certain display is updated. The second display may be displayed after the second game ends, and the third display may not be updated.

With such a configuration, when the execution of a second game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the display indicating the cumulative amount is not updated, thereby preventing players from misunderstanding the cumulative amount. This can be prevented.

In addition, if execution of the first game is started while a certain first display is displayed, the time when the first stop operation or the second stop operation in the first game is completed. is configured such that a certain first display is displayed, and when execution of the first game is started while a certain second display is being displayed, It may be configured such that the second certain display is not displayed at the time when the first stop operation or the second stop operation in the game ends.

Further, the first certain display may be a display that does not change for each game, and the second certain display may be a display that changes for each game. Further, the first state may be a game more advantageous to the player than the second state, or may be a game more disadvantageous to the player than the second state. Further, the first state and the second state are such that after the display of the certain display (for example, point award display GP1 shown in FIG. 43(A)) is started, the count display (for example, The time until the cumulative point display TP) shown in (A) and (B) starts to be displayed may be in different states.

<Setting suggestions/overview for non-recommended bet amount games>
Next, using FIG. 46, an overview of setting suggestions in the non-recommended bet number game will be explained.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment (in this example, a slot machine) includes a display means (in this example, a liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 43(A) etc.) capable of displaying multiple types of displays, and A set value setting means (in this example, a main control unit, etc.) that can set any one of the set values is provided.

One of the plurality of types of displays is a first type of display (first display) that suggests the setting value that has been set. As an example of this first display, for example, in addition to the setting suggestion A that suggests the setting value set in the slot machine as shown in FIG. Displays that suggest, displays that suggest that the set value is larger (or smaller) than a certain set value, displays that suggest other game information along with the set value (for example, AT that suggests that the AT game will end) Examples include displaying an end screen and displaying an ED (ending) end screen.

Further, one of the plurality of types of displays is a second type of display (second display) that suggests the set value that has been set. As an example of this second display, for example, in addition to the setting suggestion B that suggests the setting value set in the slot machine shown in FIG. Displays that suggest, displays that suggest that the set value is larger (or smaller) than a certain set value, displays that suggest other game information along with the set value (for example, AT that suggests that the AT game will end) Examples include displaying an end screen and displaying an ED (ending) end screen.

Further, the game machine according to the present embodiment (in this example, a slot machine) is used for a first game (in this example, 3 pieces) in which the number of game media bet is a first number (3 pieces in this example). A second game in which the number of game media bet is a second number (in this example, 2 pieces) different from the first number (in this example, a 2-piece bet game) can be executed. The first game is more advantageous for the player than the second game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (in this example, a slot machine) displays a first display (in this example, in FIG. The setting suggestion A) shown in FIG. ) is configured so that the setting suggestion A) shown in FIG.

FIG. 46(A)(1) to FIG. 46(A)(2) are diagrams showing in chronological order an example in which the setting suggestion A starts to be displayed in connection with the execution of a three-coin bet game. (B) (1) to (B) (2) are diagrams chronologically showing an example in which the setting suggestion A does not start to be displayed in connection with the execution of a two-coin bet game.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 46(A)(1) to FIG. 46(A)(2), when a 3-bet bet game (first game) is started, the game start operation (in this example , the start lever press operation), the setting suggestion A (first display) is started, and the setting suggestion A (first display) is displayed until at least the third stop operation is performed in the game. continue.

On the other hand, in this example, as shown in FIG. 46(B)(1) to FIG. In the example, when the start lever is pressed (pressing the start lever), a warning display CD is started that suggests that a game with a non-recommended number of bets has been executed, but in this game, setting suggestion A (first display) is displayed. Never start.

Note that the first display is preferably a display that does not end with the passage of time; for example, the display starts when a bet button is pressed, a first stop operation, a second stop operation, etc. After that, the display may be continued even if a first stop operation, a second stop operation, a third stop operation, a game medium payout operation, etc. are performed.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (in this example, a slot machine) displays a second display (in this example, in FIG. The setting suggestion B) shown in (A) is configured to be able to start being displayed, and the second display (setting suggestion B) can be started being displayed in connection with the execution of the second game (in this example, a 2-coin bet game). It is composed of

FIG. 46(A)(3) to FIG. 46(A)(4) are diagrams showing in chronological order an example in which the setting suggestion B starts to be displayed in connection with the execution of a 3-coin bet game. (B) (3) to (B) (4) are diagrams chronologically showing an example in which the setting suggestion B starts to be displayed in connection with the execution of a two-coin bet game.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 46(A)(3) to FIG. 46(A)(4), when a three-bet bet game (first game) is started, or as shown in FIG. 3) ~ As shown in (B) and (4) of the same figure, when a two-bet bet game (second game) is started, setting suggestion B (second display) is triggered by the third stop operation. Start.

The second display is preferably a display that ends with the passage of time; for example, the display starts when the bet button is pressed, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, etc.; In addition, the display ends when the first stop operation, second stop operation, third stop operation, payout operation of game media, press operation of a bet button or press operation of a start lever in the next game are triggered. Good too.

In addition, the second display may or may not be displayed depending on the game result of the game (for example, whether or not you won a specific prize winning combination, whether you won a lottery or not) in a certain state. It may be displayed as follows.

FIG. 46(C) is a diagram chronologically showing an example in which a three-coin bet game is played in the high navigation state, and FIG. It is a diagram shown in series.

In this example, the control means (for example, the main control unit, the control unit, etc.), and a first counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the first counter shown in FIGS. The count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value") can be updated every time one game is played in the advantageous state. One of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 state), and the first advantageous gaming state is (For example, the second counter shown in FIGS. 46(C) and 46(D), a counter that manages the number of games in the AT2 state), and each time one game is played in the first advantageous state, The count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is configured to be updateable, and one of the plurality of types of displays indicates a certain value. A display including an image (hereinafter referred to as "third display"; for example, third display d3 shown in FIGS. 46(C) and (D)), and one of the plurality of types of displays is: A display including an image representing an updated value of the certain value (hereinafter referred to as a "fourth display"; for example, the fourth display d4 shown in FIGS. 46(C) and (D)), and the above-mentioned or The value related to the second count value is a value related to the second count value, and for example, as shown in FIG. 46(C), after the third display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, When execution of a game (for example, a 3-coin bet game) is started, both the first count value and the second count value are updated, and the fourth count value is updated in the first game. For example, as shown in FIG. 46(D), after the third display is displayed in the first advantageous game state, the second game (for example, When execution of a 2-bet bet game) is started, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated, and the second count value is updated in the second game. The display is configured so that the display shown in Figure 4 is not displayed.

<Suggestions/specific examples of settings for non-recommended bet amount games>
Next, a specific example of the setting suggestion in the non-recommended bet number game will be explained using FIGS. 47 and 48.

FIG. 47(A) is a diagram chronologically showing an example in which a setting suggestion is made in response to a game start operation in a game that has shifted from judge (AT1) to AT2.

The states shown in FIGS. 47(A)(2) to 47(A)(3) are states in which the judge (AT1) executes a 3-coin bet game and the transition to AT2 is determined. In this example, a 3-piece bet game (first game) is started in the judge (AT1), and a shift to AT2 is decided in that game, so the third stop operation is used as a trigger to suggest a shift to AT2. The effect (in this example, the display of the victory screen) has started.

The subsequent states shown in FIG. 47(A)(4) to FIG. 47(A)(6) are states in which a 3-coin bet game is executed in the next game after the transition from judge (AT1) to AT2. In this example, when a 3-coin bet game (first game) is started, the game start operation (in this example, the push operation of the start lever) triggers the AT2 start that suggests the set value. The display of screen 1 (first display) is started, and the display of this AT2 start screen 1 (first display) is continued until at least the third stop operation is performed in the game.

FIG. 47(B) is a diagram chronologically showing an example in which a setting suggestion is made in response to a game start operation in a game where the judge (AT1) has finished.

The states shown in FIG. 47(B)(2) to FIG. 47(B)(3) are states in which the judge (AT1) executes a 3-coin bet game and the end of the judge(AT1) is determined. In this example, a 3-coin bet game (first game) is started in the judge (AT1), and since the judge (AT1) has finished the game and has decided not to proceed to AT2, the third stop operation is performed. As a trigger, an effect (in this example, display of a defeat screen) indicating the end of the judge (AT1) is started.

The subsequent states shown in FIG. 47(B)(4) to FIG. 47(B)(6) are states in which a 3-coin bet game is executed in the next game after the judge (AT1) has finished. In this example, when a 3-coin bet game (first game) is started, the game start operation (in this example, the start lever pressing operation) is used as a trigger to indicate the set value and end the judge. The display of screen 1 (first display) is started, and the display of this judge end screen 1 (first display) is continued until at least the third stop operation is performed in the game.

FIG. 47(C) is a diagram chronologically showing an example in which, after a 3-piece bet game is executed in the final game of AT2, a setting suggestion is made using the third stop operation as a trigger for the next 3-piece bet game. .

The states shown in FIG. 47(C)(2) to FIG. 47(C)(3) are states in which a three-copy bet game is executed in the final game of AT2 and AT2 has ended, and the state shown in FIG. 47(C)(3) is the state shown in FIG. The states shown in 4) to (C) and (6) in the figure are states in which a 3-coin bet game is executed in the next game after AT2 has ended.

In this example, when a 3-bet bet game (first game) is started in the next game after AT2 ends, the game start operation (in this example, pressing the start lever) is triggered to end AT2. After starting to display the AT2 end screen suggesting the set value, using the third stop operation as a trigger, start displaying image 1 (second display) suggesting the set value, and at least press the bet button for the next game. This image 1 (second display) continues to be displayed until the pressing operation is performed.

Note that the trigger for starting the display of image 1 (second display) is not limited to the third stop operation; for example, as shown in FIG. After starting to display, as shown in (D) (6) in the same figure, when the production button is pressed after the third stop operation, image 1 (the second image) suggesting the set value is displayed. It may be configured to start displaying the image 1 (second display) and continue displaying this image 1 (second display) at least until the bet button for the next game is pressed.

FIG. 48(A) is a diagram chronologically showing an example in which setting suggestions are not made in a state where the victory screen of the judge (AT1) is displayed.

The states shown in FIG. 48(A)(2) to FIG. 48(A)(3) are states in which the judge (AT1) executes a 3-coin bet game and the transition to AT2 is determined. In this example, a 3-piece bet game (first game) is started in the judge (AT1), and a shift to AT2 is decided in that game, so the third stop operation is used as a trigger to suggest a shift to AT2. The effect (in this example, the display of the victory screen) has started.

The states shown in FIG. 48(A)(4) to FIG. 48(A)(6) will occur in the next game when the effect suggesting transition to AT2 (in this example, the display of the winning screen) continues. This is a state in which a two-coin bet game (second game) has been executed.

In this example, when a two-coin bet game (second game) is started, the game start operation (in this example, the start lever pressing operation) triggers a notification that a non-recommended bet number game has been executed. While starting the display of the suggested attention-calling display CD, the game is configured so as not to start displaying the AT2 start screen 1 (first display) explained using FIG. 005(A)(4). ing.

FIG. 48(B) is a diagram chronologically showing an example in which setting suggestions are not made while the defeat screen of the judge (AT1) is being displayed.

The states shown in FIGS. 48(B)(2) to 48(B)(3) are states in which the judge (AT1) has executed a three-coin bet game and the judge (AT1) has finished. In this example, a 3-coin bet game (first game) is started in the judge (AT1), and since the judge (AT1) has finished the game and has decided not to proceed to AT2, the third stop operation is performed. As a trigger, an effect (in this example, display of a defeat screen) indicating the end of the judge (AT1) is started.

The following states shown in FIG. 48(B)(4) to FIG. 48(B)(6) indicate that the next time the effect indicating the end of the judge (AT1) is continuing (in this example, the defeat screen is displayed). This is a state in which a two-bet bet game (second game) is executed in the game.

In this example, when a two-coin bet game (second game) is started, the game start operation (in this example, the start lever pressing operation) triggers a notification that a non-recommended bet number game has been executed. While starting the display of the suggested caution display CD, the game is configured so as not to start displaying the judge end screen 1 (first display) explained using FIG. 005(B)(4). ing.

According to this example, while preferential treatment is given to a player who is playing the first game (a recommended betting game that is advantageous to the player), the player who is playing the second game (a non-recommended betting game that is disadvantageous to the player) is given preferential treatment. By not displaying the first display, it is possible to inform the player who is playing the second game in a manner that does not embarrass the player.

FIG. 48(C) is a diagram chronologically showing an example in which, after a three-coin bet game is executed in the final game of AT2, a setting suggestion is made using the third stop operation as a trigger in the next two-coin bet game. .

In the states shown in FIGS. 48(C)(2) to 48(C)(3), a 3-coin bet game is executed in the final game of AT2, and the states shown in FIGS. 48(C)(4) to 48(C) continue. The state shown in (6) is a state in which AT2 is continued because a two-coin bet game has been executed in the next game.

In this example, when a two-bet bet game (second game) is started in the next game of the final game of AT2, the game start operation (in this example, pressing the start lever) is triggered by AT2's After starting to display the AT effect that suggests continuation, using the third stop operation as a trigger, start displaying image 1 (second display) that suggests the set value, and at least bet on the next game. This image 1 (second display) continues to be displayed until the button is pressed.

Image 1 (second display) shows that in a certain state, whether the game is a 3-bet bet game (first game) or a 2-bet bet game (second game), The display may or may not be displayed depending on the game result.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 006(D)(5), the symbol combination displayed on the symbol display window after the third stop operation is the display result 2 (second symbol combination. combination), image 1 (second display) is not displayed, and as shown in Figure 006(C)(5), the symbol combination displayed in the symbol display window after the third stop operation is not displayed. In the case of result 1 (first symbol combination; for example, symbol combination corresponding to a certain winning combination), image 1 (second display) may be displayed.

<Predetermined number of sheets acquired display (setting suggestion display)>
Next, the predetermined number of sheets acquisition display (setting suggestion display) will be explained using FIGS. 49(A) and 49(B). FIG. 49(A) is a diagram showing an example of a predetermined number of coins acquisition display (setting suggestion display), and FIG. 49(B) is a diagram showing an example of a predetermined number of coins acquisition display lottery table.

The first sub-control unit determines the number of remaining AT2 coins to be acquired based on the AT2 scheduled acquisition number information (count value of the AT2 scheduled acquisition number counter) and the AT2 acquisition quantity information (count value of the AT2 acquisition number counter) received from the main control unit. Update the count value of the display counter.

Then, at the end of one game, the predetermined number of acquired coins display lottery table shown in FIG. ), and when the current presentation state is the AT2 state (or LMT state), the predetermined number of obtained medals display is determined based on the count value of the total number of obtained medals display counter.

Note that the conditions for determining the display of the predetermined number of acquired pieces are not limited to this example; for example, when the total number of acquired pieces reaches a predetermined number regardless of the presentation state (the count value of the total number of acquired pieces display counter is a certain value) ), it may be determined to display the acquisition of a predetermined number of coins.

For example, if it is determined that the total number of acquired coins has reached 135, if the setting value is an odd number (setting 1, setting 3, or setting 5), it is determined that the total number of acquired coins has reached 135 with a probability of 2/100. A display indicating the acquisition of a predetermined number of coins (for example, a display including the character string "over 135 coins") is performed, and when the set value is an even number, the display of acquisition of the predetermined number of coins is not displayed. Therefore, when a predetermined number of sheets acquisition display indicating that 135 sheets have been reached is displayed, it is confirmed that the set value is an odd number (setting 1, setting 3, or setting 5). Therefore, the display can be called a setting suggestion display (odd setting suggestion display) that suggests that the setting value is an odd number.

Also, if it is determined that the total number of acquired coins has reached 246, when the setting value is an even number (setting 2, setting 4, or setting 6), it is determined that the total number of acquired coins has reached 246 with a probability of 2/100. A display indicating that a predetermined number of sheets have been acquired is displayed (for example, a display including a character string such as "over 246 sheets"), and when the set value is an odd number, a display indicating that a predetermined number of sheets have been acquired is not displayed. Therefore, when the predetermined number of sheets acquisition display indicating that 246 sheets have been reached is displayed, it is confirmed that the set value is an even number (setting 2, setting 4, or setting 6). Therefore, the display can be called a setting suggestion display (even number setting suggestion display) that suggests that the setting value is an even number.

In addition, if it is determined that the total number of acquired coins has reached 333, when the setting value is set to 3, a predetermined number of acquired tokens will be displayed (for example, " When the set value is set to 4, the same predetermined number of pieces obtained will be displayed with a probability of 2/100, and when the set value is set to 5 or 6, 1 The same predetermined number of acquisition display is performed with a probability of /100, and when the setting value is other than that, the predetermined number of acquisition display is not displayed. Therefore, when a predetermined number of sheets acquisition display indicating that 333 sheets have been reached is displayed, it is confirmed that the set value is set to 3 or higher. Therefore, this display can be said to be a setting suggestion display (display suggesting setting 3 or more) that suggests that the setting value is setting 3 or higher.

When the total number of acquired coins reaches 456 pieces, 555 pieces, and 666 pieces, the predetermined number of acquired pieces is displayed, respectively. This can be called a setting suggestion display suggesting that the setting value is setting 5 or more (setting 5 or more suggestion display), and a setting suggestion display suggesting that the setting value is setting 6 (setting 6 suggestion display).

Additionally, if it is determined that the total number of acquired coins has reached 500, a predetermined number of acquired tokens will be displayed indicating that the total number of acquired tokens has reached 500 with a probability of 100/100, regardless of the setting value (for example, "Over 500 ”), and if it is determined in step S2709 that the total number of acquired coins has reached 1000 coins, it is suggested that the total number of acquired coins has reached 1000 coins with a probability of 100/100, regardless of the setting value. A display indicating that a predetermined number of coins have been acquired (for example, a display including a character string "over 1000 coins") is performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 49(A), since the total number of acquired coins has reached the predetermined number (500 coins) and the presentation state is AT2, the third stop operation is triggered by the total acquired number display counter. Based on the count value (500 in this example), a predetermined number of medals acquired is determined, and the predetermined number indicates that the number of acquired medals has reached 500 with a probability of 100/100, regardless of the set value. Acquisition display TG (in this example, a display including the character string "over 500 coins") is performed.

FIG. 49C is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion display lottery table. In this example, when the judge (AT1) ends, the first sub-control unit refers to the setting suggestion display lottery table shown in FIG. decide.

For example, when the setting suggestion display lottery table shown in FIG. One judge end screen is determined by lottery etc. from among the setting suggestion display suggesting that the value is an even number), judge end screen 3 (setting suggestion display suggesting that the setting value is other than setting 1), etc. Then, the judgment end screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

The content of the setting suggestion display lottery table is not limited to this example, and for example, as in the setting suggestion display lottery table shown in FIG. (indication that does not suggest a value) may be added. Further, the trigger for starting the display of the setting suggestion display is not particularly limited. For example, the setting suggestion display may be determined at the start of the judgment (AT1) and the setting suggestion display may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device, or the setting suggestion display may be displayed on the third display. The setting suggestion display may be started by an operation other than a stop operation.

As explained above, the game machine (for example, a slot machine) according to the present embodiment includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one of the plurality of types of setting values. a set value setting means (in this example, a main control unit, etc.) capable of setting a set value of A first type of display that suggests a setting value (hereinafter referred to as "first display". For example, in addition to the setting suggestion A shown in FIG. 46(A), a predetermined number of sheets acquisition display TG shown in FIG. 49(A), A first game in which the number of game media bet is a first number (for example, 3 coins) (in this example, 3 coins) is displayed (e.g., the predetermined number of coins has been reached (456 coins exceeded) shown in FIG. 49(B)) The player is configured to be able to execute a second game in which the number of game media bet is a second number (in this example, a two-bet bet game), and the first number and the second number are The numbers (for example, two) are different numbers, the first game is a game that is more advantageous for the player than the second game, and the The first display is configured to be able to start displaying (or configured to be (always) displayed), and the first display is configured not to start displaying in connection with the execution of the second game. This game machine is characterized by:

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, preferential treatment is given to players who are playing the first game (recommended bet game that is advantageous to the player), while preferential treatment is given to the player who is playing the first game (recommended bet game that is disadvantageous to the player). By not displaying the first display, it is possible to notify a player who is playing the second game in a manner that does not embarrass the player.

Furthermore, one of the plurality of types of display is a second type of display (hereinafter referred to as "second display") that suggests the setting value that has been set. For example, as shown in FIG. setting suggestion B), the second display is configured to be able to start displaying in connection with the execution of the first game, and the second display is displayed in connection with the execution of the second game. It may be configured such that it can be started.

With such a configuration, not only a player playing the first game (a recommended betting game that is advantageous to the player) but also a player playing the second game (a non-recommended betting game that is disadvantageous to the player) It is also possible to provide advantageous information to players who are currently playing games.

Furthermore, the first display may be a display that does not end with the passage of time, and the second display may be a display that does not end with the passage of time.

With such a configuration, in the second game (a non-recommended betting game that is disadvantageous to the player), by performing a second display that ends as time passes, the second game (a non-recommended betting game that is disadvantageous to the player) is displayed. It is possible to reduce the feeling of regret felt by a player who is playing a disadvantageous non-recommended bet game.

Furthermore, the game is configured such that multiple operations are required to execute one game, and the multiple operations include a first operation and a second operation, and the first operation is the same as the first operation. The second operation is an operation performed before the second operation (the first operation among the plurality of operations, for example, the start lever pressing operation), and the second operation is the first operation among the plurality of operations. (e.g., a third stop operation), and the first display does not start displaying because the second operation is performed, and the first display is not started because the first operation is performed. The second display is a display that can be started by performing the first operation, and the second display is a display that can be started by performing the second operation. You can.

With such a configuration, by starting to display the second display in response to the second operation, the feeling of regret felt by the player who has finished the second game (a non-recommended betting game that is disadvantageous to the player) can be reduced. can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the case of winning a re-gaming combination, there is no need to press the bet button. The first operation of the game corresponds to the pressing operation of the start lever.

Further, the game is configured to require a plurality of operations in order to proceed with the game, and the plurality of operations include a first operation and a second operation, and the first display is A display that can be started when one of a plurality of operations (first operation; for example, a start lever pressing operation) is performed, and the display is a display that can be started when one of the plurality of operations is performed (first operation, for example, a start lever pressing operation). The display is a display that never ends before the next operation is performed, and the second display is a display that does not end before the next operation is performed. A display that can be started when a second operation (for example, a third stop operation) is performed, and before the next operation of the second operation among the plurality of operations is performed. It may be a display that may end.

Furthermore, it is equipped with operating means (for example, a start lever, a stop button, a bet button) provided at a position that can be operated by the player, and it is possible to operate the operating means multiple times from the start to the end of one game. The first display is started at least from a first operation (for example, a pressing operation of a bet button (or start lever)) of a plurality of operations of the operation means, and the first display This is a display that does not end before an operation other than the operation (for example, a third stop operation), and the second display is a display that does not end before an operation other than the operation (for example, a third stop operation), and the second display The display may start at least from the second operation (for example, the third stop operation) and end before the operation performed after the second operation (for example, the operation to press the bet button for the next game). It may be a display.

With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly alleviate the feeling of regret felt by the player who is playing the second game (a non-recommended betting game that is disadvantageous to the player).

Further, the variations (types) of the display mode of the first type of display (first display) may be greater than the variations (types) of the display mode of the second type of display (second display). .

With such a configuration, the first type of display (first display), which has many variations, is shown only to the player who played the first game (recommended bet game that is advantageous to the player), thereby improving the game. Fairness can be ensured.

In addition, the second display may or may not be displayed depending on the game result of the game (for example, whether or not you won a specific prize winning combination, whether you won a lottery or not) in a certain state. It may be displayed in some cases. Further, the second display may be displayed when the result of the game in a certain state is the first result, and the result of the game in the certain state is different from the first result. The display may not be displayed in the case of a different second result.

With such a configuration, the second display may be displayed depending on the game result in the second game (a non-recommended betting game that is disadvantageous to the player). It is possible to reduce the feeling of regret felt by a player who is playing a game (a non-recommended betting game).

Further, a control means (for example, a main control unit, a first sub-control unit etc.), and includes a first counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the first counter shown in FIGS. Each time a game is played, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value") can be updated, and in the advantageous state, one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is One of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 state), and the first advantageous gaming state related to the first advantageous state is It is equipped with two counters (for example, the second counter shown in FIGS. 46(C) and (D), a counter that manages the number of games in the AT2 state), and each time one game is played in the first advantageous state, The count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as the "second count value") is configured to be updateable, and one of the plurality of types of display displays an image indicating a certain value. (hereinafter referred to as the "third display"; for example, the third display d3 shown in FIGS. 46(C) and (D)), and one of the plurality of types of displays is (hereinafter referred to as "fourth display"; for example, the fourth display d4 shown in FIGS. 46(C) and (D)), which includes an image representing the updated value of the certain value. is a value related to the second count value, and for example, as shown in FIG. 46(C), after the third display is displayed in the first advantageous game state, the first game ( For example, when execution of a three-coin bet game is started, both the first count value and the second count value are updated, and the fourth display in the first game is updated. For example, as shown in FIG. 46(D), after the third display is displayed in the first advantageous game state, the second game (for example, two When execution of a betting game (betting game) is started, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated, and in the second game, the fourth count value is updated. The display may be configured so that the display is not displayed.

With such a configuration, when the execution of the second game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the third count value of the third count value and the fourth count value is Only the count value is updated and the fourth display (display including an image representing the updated value regarding the fourth count value) is not displayed in the second game, so the second game is not played. It becomes possible to notify the player of the fact in a manner that does not embarrass the player. In addition, since the third counter (counter related to advantageous conditions) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game can be played with a player who played correctly in the first game. It becomes possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing the game.

Further, the second display may be a display that can be started after the last operation among the plurality of operations is performed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly alleviate the feeling of regret felt by the player who is playing the second game (a non-recommended betting game that is disadvantageous to the player).

Furthermore, the possibility that the second display will start in the second game in a certain state is greater than the possibility that the second display will start in the first game in a certain state. It may be low.

With such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the player's desire to play by displaying the second display even for the player who is playing the second game (a non-recommended betting game that is disadvantageous to the player). can.

The first display is a display that can be started before transitioning to a certain AT state, and the second display is a display that can be started after shifting to the certain AT state, It may be less likely to be displayed before transitioning to the certain AT state than after transitioning to the certain AT state.

Further, the display of the second display may be started while the first display is displayed, or the display of the second display may be started while the first display is displayed. There is no need to start displaying the display. Further, the first display may be a display that is (always) displayed, and the second display may be a display that may be displayed (or may not be displayed).

<Other embodiments>
Next, a game machine according to another embodiment will be described.

The game machine (e.g., slot machine) according to the present embodiment has operating means (e.g., left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button), a normal state (e.g., low navigation state) and an advantageous state (e.g., high navigation state). A game machine comprising a control means (e.g., a main control section) for shifting to one of the states (navigation state), and a display means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. The advantageous state is configured to be able to notify operation information of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation"; for example, operation navigation using a payout number display, liquid crystal display). The operation navigation is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state regarding the operation navigation using the device, and the operation navigation is the navigation regarding the push order, and the first counter related to the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 43(C) , a first counter shown in (D), and a high navigation state counter indicating the number of remaining games in the high navigation state), and each time a game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as , referred to as a "first count value." The termination condition is a condition that is satisfied when the first count value reaches a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times). , in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states, and one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2), the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, and a second counter (for example, FIG. 43(C), (D ), and a performance state counter that indicates the number of remaining games in the performance navigation state (AT1 state, AT2 state, LMT state, etc.), and each time a game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, , the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as the "second count value") is configured to be able to be updated, and a game in which the push winning combination has not been won in the first advantageous gaming state is performed. Even in the case where the second count value is configured to be updatable, the first game in which the number of game media bet is the first number (for example, a three-bet bet game) and the game The medium is configured to be able to execute a second game in which the number of bets is a second number (for example, a two-bet bet game), and the second number is a different number from the first number. , in the advantageous state, the first game is a more advantageous game for the player than the second game, and one of the plurality of types of displays displays an image indicating a certain value. (hereinafter referred to as the "first indication"). For example, in the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D), one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image representing the updated value of the certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "second display"; for example, second display d2 shown in FIG. 43(C)), and the certain value is a value related to the second count value, and the certain value is a value related to the second count value, If execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in an advantageous gaming state, both the first count value and the second count value are updated. and the second display is configured to be displayable in the first game, and after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state, execution of the second game is started. is configured such that only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated and the second display is not displayed in the second game. This game machine is characterized by:

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, when execution of the second game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the difference between the first count value and the second count value is determined. Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image representing the updated value regarding the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game It becomes possible to notify the player of the fact that he/she has done so in a manner that does not embarrass the player. Also, since the first counter (counter related to advantageous conditions) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game can be played with a player who played correctly in the first game. It becomes possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing the game.

Furthermore, one of the plurality of types of displays includes an image indicating that the number of remaining games in the first advantageous gaming state is 0 (hereinafter referred to as the "third display"). and when the second game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, the first advantageous gaming state may end without the third display being displayed. .

Further, even if the first game is played after the second game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, the third display is not displayed and the first game is played. There may be cases where the advantageous gaming state ends.

Further, one advantageous gaming state among the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a second advantageous gaming state, and the second advantageous gaming state is the operation different from the first advantageous gaming state. The third display is displayed when the navigation is possible in an advantageous gaming state and the first game is played after the second game is played in the first advantageous gaming state. There may be cases in which the first advantageous gaming state ends without any delay and the second advantageous gaming state starts.

Further, the first advantageous gaming state may end when the second count value reaches a predetermined value in the first advantageous gaming state.

Further, one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image regarding an increase in the number of remaining games in the first advantageous gaming state (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth display"), When the first game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, the fourth display may be displayed, and when the second game is played in the first advantageous gaming state. Alternatively, the fourth display may not be displayed.

Further, in a state where at least the first count value is updatable and a winning probability of a re-gaming combination that allows a game to be played without inserting gaming media is higher than the normal state, the first count value may be updated. The winning probability of the re-gaming combination in the second game may be higher than the winning probability of the re-gaming combination in the first game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (e.g., slot machine) according to the present embodiment has operating means (e.g., left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button), a normal state (e.g., low navigation state), and an advantageous state (e.g., low navigation state). , a high navigation state), a control means (for example, a main control unit), and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays; The gaming machine is configured to be able to notify operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is caused by notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, when the number of payout coins display is It is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the operation navigation used (the operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device), the operation navigation is a navigation regarding the push order, and the first counter ( For example, a first counter (high navigation state counter) shown in FIGS. The first count value) is configured to be updatable, and when one of a plurality of termination conditions including the first termination condition and the second termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous count value is updated. The state is configured to transition from the normal state to the normal state, and the first termination condition is when the first count value becomes a first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, an advantageous state). This condition can be satisfied when the number of games played after the transition reaches the upper limit number of games), and is configured to be able to transition to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states in the advantageous state, and One of the advantageous gaming states is a first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2), and the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed; A second counter related to the first advantageous gaming state (for example, a second counter shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D), a performance state counter) is provided, and one game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state. It is configured such that the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") can be updated each time the player wins the winning combination in the first advantageous gaming state. Even if a game is played, the second count value is configured to be updateable, and the first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, a three-bet bet game) and is configured to be able to execute a second game (for example, a two-bet game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number, and the second number is different from the first number. In the advantageous state, the first game is a more advantageous game for the player than the second game, and one of the plurality of types of displays indicates a certain value. (hereinafter referred to as the "first display"). For example, in the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D), one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image representing the updated value of the certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "second display"; for example, second display d2 shown in FIG. 43(C)), and the certain value is a value related to the second count value, and the certain value is a value related to the second count value, If execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in an advantageous gaming state, both the first count value and the second count value are updated. and the second display is configured to be displayable in the first game, and after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state, execution of the second game is started. is configured such that only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated and the second display is not displayed in the second game. The system is equipped with a third counter that counts the total number of game media that the player has acquired based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state. Each time a game is performed, the count value of the third counter (hereinafter referred to as the "third count value") is calculated. The second end condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the third count value reaches a second specific value (for example, 1840). and the third count value is configured to be updateable based on the result of the game even if either of the first game and the second game is executed in the advantageous state. and includes setting value setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values, and one of the plurality of types of display indicates the setting value that has been set. A certain display (hereinafter referred to as "third display"; for example, setting suggestion A (setting suggestion performance) shown in FIG. 46(A)), when the first game is played in the advantageous state. is configured such that the third display may be displayed, and if the second game is played in the advantageous state, the third display may not be displayed. If the first game is executed after the execution of the second game in the first advantageous gaming state, in the first game, the second game and the first game are executed. A display regarding the number of game media acquired in the first advantageous gaming state based on both game results of the game (for example, a display of the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state shown in FIG. 49(A). This gaming machine is characterized by being configured to be able to display "over 500 coins").

According to the game machine according to the present example, when the execution of the second game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the corresponding one of the first count value and the second count value is Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image representing the updated value regarding the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game cannot be played. It becomes possible to inform the player of what he or she has been doing in a manner that does not embarrass the player. Also, in both the first game and the second game, the first counter (the counter related to the advantageous state) and the third counter (the total number of gaming media acquired by the player) are updated, so the first It is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is playing the second game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (e.g., slot machine) according to the present embodiment has operating means (e.g., left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button), a normal state (e.g., low navigation state), and an advantageous state (e.g., low navigation state). , a high navigation state), a control means (for example, a main control unit), and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays; The gaming machine is configured to be able to notify operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is caused by notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, when the number of payout coins display is It is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the operation navigation used (the operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device), the operation navigation is a navigation regarding the push order, and the first counter ( For example, a first counter (high navigation state counter) shown in FIGS. (hereinafter referred to as a "first count value") is configured to be able to update a first count value, and is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is met, and when the certain end condition is met, the advantageous state is shifted to the normal state. is a condition that can be satisfied when the first count value reaches a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after transitioning to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times), The advantageous state is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states, and one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 ), the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, and a second counter related to the first advantageous gaming state (for example, FIGS. 43(C) and (D) A count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is provided each time one game is played in the first advantageous gaming state. ) is configured to be updateable, and the second count value is configured to be updateable even if a game is played in which the push winning combination is not won in the first advantageous gaming state. A first game in which the number of bets on the game media is a first number (for example, a 3-piece bet game) and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number (for example, a 2-piece bet game). game), the second number is a different number from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first game is more likely to be played than the second game. This is an advantageous game for the player, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image indicating a certain value (hereinafter referred to as "first display"). For example, in the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D), one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image representing the updated value of the certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "second display"; for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 43(C)), and one display among the plurality of types of displays is the first display and This is a specific display that is different from either of the second displays (hereinafter referred to as the "third display"; for example, a display that makes the entire screen black, a special effect display, a display of a certain character image), and The value is a value related to the second count value, and when execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, the value is the value related to the second count value. Both the first count value and the second count value are updated, the second display is configured to be displayable in the first game, and the second display is configured to be displayable in the first advantageous game state. If execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated. The game machine is characterized in that it is configured such that the third display can be displayed without displaying the second display during the second game.

According to the gaming machine according to the present example, when the execution of the second game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the corresponding one of the first count value and the second count value is Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image representing the updated value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game cannot be played. It becomes possible to inform the player of what he or she has been doing in a manner that does not embarrass the player. Also, since the first counter (counter related to advantageous conditions) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game can be played with a player who played correctly in the first game. It becomes possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing the game. In addition, it becomes possible to inform the player that he/she has played a disadvantageous game (second game) in a manner that does not embarrass the player.

In addition, the apparatus is provided with a setting value setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values, and one of the plurality of types of display indicates the setting value that has been set. (hereinafter referred to as the "third display"; for example, the setting suggestion A (setting suggestion effect) shown in FIG. 46(A)), and when the first game is played in the advantageous state, , the third display may be displayed, and if the second game is played in the advantageous state, the third display may not be displayed. The game is configured such that a certain effect can be executed over multiple games, and the certain effect is a first scene (for example, an "enemy attack" scene) and a second scene. (for example, an "ally attack" scene), and the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the first scene is performed. is configured such that the performance of the second scene can be started in the first game, and the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the first scene is performed. If the performance of the second scene is not started in the second game, and then the first game is started, the performance of the second scene is not started in the second game. The configuration may be such that execution of the second scene can be started.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (for example, a slot machine) according to the present embodiment has operating means (for example, a left stop button, a middle stop button, a right stop button), a normal state (for example, a low navigation state) and an advantageous state (for example, a low navigation state). A control means (e.g., main control unit) that causes the transition to one of a plurality of states including a high navigation state), and a display means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying multiple types of displays. The gaming machine is configured to be able to notify operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is determined by notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation"; for example, using a payout number display). This is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the operation navigation (operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device, operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device), and the operation navigation is a navigation regarding the push order, and the first counter related to the advantageous state (e.g. , a first counter (high navigation state counter) shown in FIGS. 1 count value) can be updated, and is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain termination condition is met, and the certain termination condition is , is a condition that can be satisfied when the first count value reaches a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times); In the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states, and one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2). The first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, and a second counter related to the first advantageous gaming state (for example, in FIGS. 43(C) and (D) and a count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") each time one game is played in the first advantageous gaming state. is configured to be updateable, and even if a game is played in which the push winning combination is not won in the first advantageous gaming state, the second count value is configured to be updateable. , a first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is a first number (e.g., a three-piece bet game), and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number (e.g., a two-piece bet game). ), the second number is a different number from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first game is played more than the second game. This is an advantageous game for players, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image indicating a certain value (hereinafter referred to as "first display"). For example, in the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D), one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image representing the updated value of the certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "second display"; for example, second display d2 shown in FIG. 43(C)), and the certain value is a value related to the second count value, and the certain value is a value related to the second count value, If execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in an advantageous gaming state, both the first count value and the second count value are updated. and the second display is configured to be displayable in the first game, and after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state, execution of the second game is started. is configured such that only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated and the second display is not displayed in the second game. One of the plurality of types of displays is a start display of a certain performance (hereinafter referred to as the "third display"; for example, a display of the start of a judge performance), When execution of the first game is started in a certain state in the gaming state, the third display is configured to be displayable in the first game, and in the certain state, the third display is displayed. The gaming machine is characterized in that the third display is not displayed in the second game when execution of the game starts.

According to the gaming machine according to the present example, when the execution of the second game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the corresponding one of the first count value and the second count value is Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image representing the updated value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game cannot be played. It becomes possible to inform the player of what he or she has been doing in a manner that does not embarrass the player. Also, since the first counter (counter related to advantageous conditions) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game can be played with a player who played correctly in the first game. It becomes possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing the game. Further, by giving preferential treatment to the player who played the first game correctly, it can be expected that the player who did not play the game correctly will be able to make corrections.

In addition, the apparatus is provided with a setting value setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values, and one of the plurality of types of display indicates the setting value that has been set. (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth display"; for example, the setting suggestion A (setting suggestion effect) shown in FIG. 46(A)), and when the first game is played in the advantageous state, , the third display may be displayed, and if the second game is played in the advantageous state, the third display may not be displayed. The system is configured such that a certain benefit can be granted when a certain benefit granting condition (for example, a condition for starting a high navigation state) is satisfied, and the first benefit in the advantageous state is In the execution of a game, the certain profit granting condition may be established, and in the execution of the second game in the advantageous state, the certain profit granting condition may not be satisfied.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (e.g., slot machine) according to the present embodiment has operating means (e.g., left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button), a normal state (e.g., low navigation state), and an advantageous state (e.g., low navigation state). , a high navigation state), a control means (for example, a main control unit), and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays; The gaming machine is configured to be able to notify operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is caused by notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, when the number of payout coins display is It is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the operation navigation used (the operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device), the operation navigation is a navigation regarding the push order, and the first counter ( For example, a first counter (high navigation state counter) shown in FIGS. The first count value) is configured to be updatable, and when one of a plurality of termination conditions including the first termination condition and the second termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous count value is updated. The state is configured to transition from the normal state to the normal state, and the first termination condition is when the first count value becomes a first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, an advantageous state). This condition can be satisfied when the number of games played after the transition reaches the upper limit number of games), and is configured to be able to transition to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states in the advantageous state, and One of the advantageous gaming states is a first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2), and the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed; A second counter related to the first advantageous gaming state (for example, a second counter shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D), a performance state counter) is provided, and one game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state. It is configured such that the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") can be updated each time the player wins the winning combination in the first advantageous gaming state. Even if a game is played, the second count value is configured to be updateable, and the first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, a three-bet bet game) and is configured to be able to execute a second game (for example, a two-bet game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number, and the second number is different from the first number. In the advantageous state, the first game is a more advantageous game for the player than the second game, and one of the plurality of types of displays indicates a certain value. (hereinafter referred to as the "first display"). For example, in the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D), one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image representing the updated value of the certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "second display"; for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 43(C)), and one display among the plurality of types of displays is the first display and This is a specific display that is different from either of the second displays (hereinafter referred to as the "third display"; for example, a display that makes the entire screen black, a special effect display, a display of a certain character image), and The value is a value related to the second count value, and when execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, the value is the value related to the second count value. Both the first count value and the second count value are updated, the second display is configured to be displayable in the first game, and the second display is configured to be displayable in the first advantageous game state. If execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated. and is configured to be able to display the third display without displaying the second display in the second game, and based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state. , a third counter that counts the total number of game media that the player has acquired, and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the third counter (hereinafter referred to as the "third count value") ''.For example, the differential number counter) is configured to be able to be updated, and the second termination condition is satisfied when the third count value reaches a second specific value (for example, 1840). This is a possible condition, and even if either of the first game and the second game is executed in the advantageous state, the third count value is updated based on the result of the game. This game machine is characterized in that it is configured to allow

According to the gaming machine according to the present example, when the execution of the second game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the corresponding one of the first count value and the second count value is Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image representing the updated value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game cannot be played. It becomes possible to inform the player of what he or she has been doing in a manner that does not embarrass the player. Also, since the first counter (counter related to advantageous conditions) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game can be played with a player who played correctly in the first game. It becomes possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing the game.

Furthermore, in the case where the first game is executed after the execution of the second game in the first advantageous gaming state, in the first game, both the second game and the first game are executed. It is configured to be able to display a display regarding the number of game media acquired in the first advantageous gaming state based on the game result (for example, a display of the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state "GET 1326 pieces"). , is configured to be able to execute a certain effect over multiple games, and the certain effect includes a first scene (for example, an "enemy attack" scene) and a second scene (for example, an "ally attack" scene). If the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the first scene was performed, If the execution of the second scene is started in one game, and the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the first scene is performed, , if the performance of the second scene is not started in the second game, and then the first game is started, the performance of the second scene in the first game is It may be configured such that execution of the performance can be started.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (e.g., slot machine) according to the present embodiment has operating means (e.g., left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button), a normal state (e.g., low navigation state), and an advantageous state (e.g., low navigation state). , a high navigation state), a control means (for example, a main control unit), and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays; The gaming machine is configured to be able to notify operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is caused by notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, when the number of payout coins display is It is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the operation navigation used (the operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device), the operation navigation is a navigation regarding the push order, and the first counter ( For example, a first counter (high navigation state counter) shown in FIGS. The first count value) is configured to be updatable, and when one of a plurality of termination conditions including the first termination condition and the second termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous count value is updated. The state is configured to transition from the normal state to the normal state, and the first termination condition is when the first count value becomes a first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, an advantageous state). This condition can be satisfied when the number of games played after the transition reaches the upper limit number of games), and is configured to be able to transition to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states in the advantageous state, and One of the advantageous gaming states is a first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2), and the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed; A second counter related to the first advantageous gaming state (for example, a second counter shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D), a performance state counter) is provided, and one game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state. It is configured such that the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") can be updated each time the player wins the winning combination in the first advantageous gaming state. Even if a game is played, the second count value is configured to be updateable, and the first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, a three-bet bet game) and is configured to be able to execute a second game (for example, a two-bet game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number, and the second number is different from the first number. In the advantageous state, the first game is a more advantageous game for the player than the second game, and one of the plurality of types of displays indicates a certain value. (hereinafter referred to as the "first display"). For example, in the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D), one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image representing the updated value of the certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "second display"; for example, second display d2 shown in FIG. 43(C)), and the certain value is a value related to the second count value, and the certain value is a value related to the second count value, If execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in an advantageous gaming state, both the first count value and the second count value are updated. and the second display is configured to be displayable in the first game, and after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state, execution of the second game is started. is configured such that only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated and the second display is not displayed in the second game. The system is equipped with a third counter that counts the total number of game media that the player has acquired based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state. The count value of the third counter (hereinafter referred to as the "third count value"; for example, the difference number counter) can be updated each time the above-mentioned second termination condition is performed. This is a condition that can be established when the count value of 3 reaches a second specific value (for example, 1840), and which game of the first game and the second game is executed in the advantageous state. Even in such a case, the third count value is configured to be updateable based on the result of the game, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a start display of a certain performance (hereinafter referred to as "start display"). , is referred to as a "third display" (for example, a display indicating the start of a judge performance), and when execution of the first game is started in a certain state in the first advantageous gaming state, the first display is called a "third display". The third display is configured to be displayable in the game, and when execution of the second game is started in the certain state, the third display is displayed in the second game. This game machine is characterized in that it is configured so that it does not play.

According to the gaming machine according to the present example, when the execution of the second game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the corresponding one of the first count value and the second count value is Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image representing the updated value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game cannot be played. It becomes possible to inform the player of what he or she has been doing in a manner that does not embarrass the player. Also, since the first counter (counter related to advantageous conditions) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game can be played with a player who played correctly in the first game. It becomes possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing the game. Further, by giving preferential treatment to the player who played the first game correctly, it can be expected that the player who did not play the game correctly will be able to make corrections.

Furthermore, in the case where the first game is executed after the execution of the second game in the first advantageous gaming state, in the first game, both the second game and the first game are executed. It is configured to be able to display a display regarding the number of game media acquired in the first advantageous gaming state based on the game result (for example, a display of the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state "GET 1326 pieces"). , when a certain profit granting condition (for example, a condition for executing a process related to a high navigation state) is satisfied, a certain profit can be given, and the execution of the first game in the advantageous state In this case, the certain profit granting condition may be configured so that it can be satisfied, and the certain profit granting condition may not be satisfied when the second game is executed in the advantageous state.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (e.g., slot machine) according to the present embodiment has operating means (e.g., left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button), a normal state (e.g., low navigation state), and an advantageous state (e.g., low navigation state). , a high navigation state), a control means (for example, a main control unit), and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays; The gaming machine is configured to be able to notify operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is caused by notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, when the number of payout coins display is It is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the operation navigation used (the operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device), the operation navigation is a navigation regarding the push order, and the first counter ( For example, a first counter (high navigation state counter) shown in FIGS. (hereinafter referred to as a "first count value") is configured to be able to update a first count value, and is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is met, and when the certain end condition is met, the advantageous state is shifted to the normal state. is a condition that can be satisfied when the first count value reaches a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after transitioning to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times), The advantageous state is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states, and one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 ), the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, and a second counter related to the first advantageous gaming state (for example, FIGS. 43(C) and (D) A count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is provided each time one game is played in the first advantageous gaming state. ) is configured to be updateable, and the second count value is configured to be updateable even if a game is played in which the push winning combination is not won in the first advantageous gaming state. A first game in which the number of bets on the game media is a first number (for example, a 3-piece bet game) and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number (for example, a 2-piece bet game). game), the second number is a different number from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first game is more likely to be played than the second game. This is an advantageous game for the player, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image indicating a certain value (hereinafter referred to as "first display"). For example, in the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D), one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image representing the updated value of the certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "second display"; for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 43(C)), and one display among the plurality of types of displays is the first display and This is a specific display that is different from either of the second displays (hereinafter referred to as the "third display"; for example, a display that makes the entire screen black, a special effect display, a display of a certain character image), and The value is a value related to the second count value, and when execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, the value is the value related to the second count value. Both the first count value and the second count value are updated, the second display is configured to be displayable in the first game, and the second display is configured to be displayable in the first advantageous game state. If execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated. and is configured such that the third display can be displayed without the second display being displayed in the second game, and one of the plurality of types of displays is displayed at the start of a certain performance. display (hereinafter referred to as "fourth display"; for example, display of start of judge performance), and when execution of the first game is started in a certain state in the first advantageous gaming state, The fourth display is configured to be displayable in the first game, and when execution of the second game is started in the certain state, the fourth display is displayed in the second game. This game machine is characterized in that it is configured so that no display is displayed.

According to the gaming machine according to the present example, when the execution of the second game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the corresponding one of the first count value and the second count value is Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image representing the updated value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game cannot be played. It becomes possible to inform the player of what he or she has been doing in a manner that does not embarrass the player. Also, since the first counter (counter related to advantageous conditions) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game can be played with a player who played correctly in the first game. It becomes possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing the game. Further, by giving preferential treatment to the player who played the first game correctly, it can be expected that the player who did not play the game correctly will be able to make corrections.

Note that the game is configured so that a certain effect can be executed over multiple games, and the certain effect is a first scene (for example, an "enemy attack" scene) and a second scene (for example, an "enemy attack" scene). If the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the first scene is performed, The player is configured to be able to start the performance of the second scene in a first game, and when the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the first scene is performed. In the case where the performance of the second scene is not started in the second game and then the first game is started, the second scene is not executed in the first game. is configured to be able to start execution of the performance, and is configured to be able to provide a certain profit when a certain profit granting condition (for example, a condition for starting a high navigation state) is satisfied, When the first game is executed in the advantageous state, the certain profit granting condition is configured to be satisfied, and when the second game is executed in the advantageous state, the certain profit granting condition is not satisfied. may be configured.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (e.g., slot machine) according to the present embodiment has operating means (e.g., left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button), a normal state (e.g., low navigation state), and an advantageous state (e.g., low navigation state). , a high navigation state), a control means (for example, a main control unit), and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays; The gaming machine is configured to be able to notify operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is caused by notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, when the number of payout coins display is It is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the operation navigation used (the operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device), the operation navigation is a navigation regarding the push order, and the first counter ( For example, a first counter (high navigation state counter) shown in FIGS. (hereinafter referred to as a "first count value") is configured to be able to update a first count value, and is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is met, and when the certain end condition is met, the advantageous state is shifted to the normal state. is a condition that can be satisfied when the first count value reaches a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after transitioning to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times), The advantageous state is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states, and one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 ), the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, and a second counter related to the first advantageous gaming state (for example, FIGS. 43(C) and (D) A count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is provided each time one game is played in the first advantageous gaming state. ) is configured to be updateable, and the second count value is configured to be updateable even if a game is played in which the push winning combination is not won in the first advantageous gaming state. A first game in which the number of bets on the game media is a first number (for example, a 3-piece bet game) and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number (for example, a 2-piece bet game). game), the second number is a different number from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first game is more likely to be played than the second game. This is an advantageous game for the player, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image indicating a certain value (hereinafter referred to as "first display"). For example, in the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D), one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image representing the updated value of the certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "second display"; for example, second display d2 shown in FIG. 43(C)), and the certain value is a value related to the second count value, and the certain value is a value related to the second count value, If execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in an advantageous gaming state, both the first count value and the second count value are updated. and the second display is configured to be displayable in the first game, and after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state, execution of the second game is started. is configured such that only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated and the second display is not displayed in the second game. and includes setting value setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values, and one of the plurality of types of display indicates the setting value that has been set. (hereinafter referred to as "third display"; for example, setting suggestion A (setting suggestion performance) shown in FIG. 44(A)), and the first game is played in the advantageous state. is configured such that the third display may be displayed, and when the second game is played in the advantageous state, the third display may be displayed. This game machine is characterized in that it is configured such that there is no.

According to the gaming machine according to the present example, when the execution of the second game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the corresponding one of the first count value and the second count value is Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image representing the updated value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game cannot be played. It becomes possible to inform the player of what he or she has been doing in a manner that does not embarrass the player. Also, since the first counter (counter related to advantageous conditions) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game can be played with a player who played correctly in the first game. It becomes possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing the game. Further, by giving preferential treatment to the player who played the first game correctly, it can be expected that the player who did not play the game correctly will be able to make corrections.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (e.g., slot machine) according to the present embodiment has operating means (e.g., left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button), a normal state (e.g., low navigation state), and an advantageous state (e.g., low navigation state). , a high navigation state), a control means (for example, a main control unit), and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays; The gaming machine is configured to be able to notify operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is caused by notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, when the number of payout coins display is It is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the operation navigation used (the operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device), the operation navigation is a navigation regarding the push order, and the first counter ( For example, a first counter (high navigation state counter) shown in FIGS. (hereinafter referred to as a "first count value") is configured to be able to update a first count value, and is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is met, and when the certain end condition is met, the advantageous state is shifted to the normal state. is a condition that can be satisfied when the first count value reaches a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after transitioning to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times), The advantageous state is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states, and one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 ), the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, and a second counter related to the first advantageous gaming state (for example, FIGS. 43(C) and (D) A count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is provided each time one game is played in the first advantageous gaming state. ) is configured to be updateable, and the second count value is configured to be updateable even if a game is played in which the push winning combination is not won in the first advantageous gaming state. A first game in which the number of bets on the game media is a first number (for example, a 3-piece bet game) and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number (for example, a 2-piece bet game). game), the second number is a different number from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first game is more likely to be played than the second game. This is an advantageous game for the player, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image indicating a certain value (hereinafter referred to as "first display"). For example, in the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D), one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image representing the updated value of the certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "second display"; for example, second display d2 shown in FIG. 43(C)), and the certain value is a value related to the second count value, and the certain value is a value related to the second count value, If execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in an advantageous gaming state, both the first count value and the second count value are updated. and the second display is configured to be displayable in the first game, and after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state, execution of the second game is started. is configured such that only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated and the second display is not displayed in the second game. If the first game is executed after the execution of the second game in the first advantageous gaming state, in the first game, the second game and the first game are It is configured to be able to display a display regarding the number of game media acquired in the first advantageous gaming state based on both game results (for example, display of the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state "GET 1326 pieces"). This game machine is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine according to the present example, when the execution of the second game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the corresponding one of the first count value and the second count value is Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image representing the updated value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game cannot be played. It becomes possible to inform the player of what he or she has been doing in a manner that does not embarrass the player. Also, since the first counter (counter related to advantageous conditions) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game can be played with a player who played correctly in the first game. It becomes possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing the game. In addition, since the number of game media acquired in an advantageous state is displayed based on the game results of both the second game and the first game, the player who played correctly in the first game, It becomes possible to ensure the fairness of the players playing the second game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (e.g., slot machine) according to the present embodiment has operating means (e.g., left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button), a normal state (e.g., low navigation state), and an advantageous state (e.g., low navigation state). , a high navigation state), a control means (for example, a main control unit), and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays; The gaming machine is configured to be able to notify operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is caused by notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, when the number of payout coins display is It is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the operation navigation used (the operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device), the operation navigation is a navigation regarding the push order, and the first counter ( For example, a first counter (high navigation state counter) shown in FIGS. (hereinafter referred to as a "first count value") is configured to be able to update a first count value, and is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is met, and when the certain end condition is met, the advantageous state is shifted to the normal state. is a condition that can be satisfied when the first count value reaches a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after transitioning to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times), The advantageous state is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states, and one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 ), the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, and a second counter related to the first advantageous gaming state (for example, FIGS. 43(C) and (D) A count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is provided each time one game is played in the first advantageous gaming state. ) is configured to be updateable, and the second count value is configured to be updateable even if a game is played in which the push winning combination is not won in the first advantageous gaming state. A first game in which the number of bets on the game media is a first number (for example, a 3-piece bet game) and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number (for example, a 2-piece bet game). game), the second number is a different number from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first game is more likely to be played than the second game. This is an advantageous game for the player, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image indicating a certain value (hereinafter referred to as "first display"). For example, in the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D), one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image representing the updated value of the certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "second display"; for example, second display d2 shown in FIG. 43(C)), and the certain value is a value related to the second count value, and the certain value is a value related to the second count value, If execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in an advantageous gaming state, both the first count value and the second count value are updated. and the second display is configured to be displayable in the first game, and after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state, execution of the second game is started. is configured such that only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated and the second display is not displayed in the second game. The game is configured so that a certain effect can be executed over multiple games, and the certain effect is a first scene (for example, an "enemy attack" scene) and a second scene (for example, an "enemy attack" scene). , "ally attack" scene), and if execution of the first game is started after the game in which the first scene is performed, , configured such that execution of the second scene production can be started in the first game, and execution of the second game is started after the game in which the first scene production is performed. In this case, if execution of the second scene effect is not started in the second game, and then execution of the first game is started, the second scene effect is not started in the first game. This game machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to start the execution of the scene.

According to the gaming machine according to the present example, when the execution of the second game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the corresponding one of the first count value and the second count value is Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image representing the updated value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game cannot be played. It becomes possible to inform the player of what he or she has been doing in a manner that does not embarrass the player. Also, since the first counter (counter related to advantageous conditions) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game can be played with a player who played correctly in the first game. It becomes possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing the game. In addition, it becomes possible to inform the player that he/she has played a disadvantageous game (second game) in a manner that does not embarrass the player.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (e.g., slot machine) according to the present embodiment has operating means (e.g., left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button), a normal state (e.g., low navigation state), and an advantageous state (e.g., low navigation state). , a high navigation state), a control means (for example, a main control unit), and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays; The gaming machine is configured to be able to notify operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is caused by notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, when the number of payout coins display is It is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the operation navigation used (the operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device), the operation navigation is a navigation regarding the push order, and the first counter ( For example, a first counter (high navigation state counter) shown in FIGS. (hereinafter referred to as a "first count value") is configured to be able to update a first count value, and is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is met, and when the certain end condition is met, the advantageous state is shifted to the normal state. is a condition that can be satisfied when the first count value reaches a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after transitioning to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times), The advantageous state is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states, and one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 ), the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, and a second counter related to the first advantageous gaming state (for example, FIGS. 43(C) and (D) A count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is provided each time one game is played in the first advantageous gaming state. ) is configured to be updateable, and the second count value is configured to be updateable even if a game is played in which the push winning combination is not won in the first advantageous gaming state. A first game in which the number of bets on the game media is a first number (for example, a 3-piece bet game) and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number (for example, a 2-piece bet game). game), the second number is a different number from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first game is more likely to be played than the second game. This is an advantageous game for the player, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image indicating a certain value (hereinafter referred to as "first display"). For example, in the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D), one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image representing the updated value of the certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "second display"; for example, second display d2 shown in FIG. 43(C)), and the certain value is a value related to the second count value, and the certain value is a value related to the second count value, If execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in an advantageous gaming state, both the first count value and the second count value are updated. and the second display is configured to be displayable in the first game, and after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state, execution of the second game is started. is configured such that only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated and the second display is not displayed in the second game. The system is configured such that a certain profit can be awarded when a certain profit granting condition (for example, a condition for starting a high navigation state) is satisfied, and the first game in the advantageous state is In the execution, the certain profit granting condition is configured to be satisfied, and in the execution of the second game in the advantageous state, the certain profit granting condition is configured not to be satisfied. It's a game machine.

According to the game machine according to the present example, when the execution of the second game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the corresponding one of the first count value and the second count value is Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image representing the updated value regarding the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game cannot be played. It becomes possible to inform the player of what he or she has been doing in a manner that does not embarrass the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter related to advantageous conditions) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game can be played with a player who played correctly in the first game. It becomes possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing the game. Further, by giving preferential treatment to the player who played the first game correctly, it can be expected that the player who did not play the game correctly will be able to make corrections.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (e.g., slot machine) according to the present embodiment has operating means (e.g., left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button), a normal state (e.g., low navigation state), and an advantageous state (e.g., low navigation state). , a high navigation state), a control means (for example, a main control unit), and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays; The gaming machine is configured to be able to notify operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is caused by notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, when the number of payout coins display is It is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the operation navigation used (the operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device), the operation navigation is a navigation regarding the push order, and the first counter ( For example, a first counter (high navigation state counter) shown in FIGS. The first count value) is configured to be updatable, and when one of a plurality of termination conditions including the first termination condition and the second termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous count value is updated. The state is configured to transition from the normal state to the normal state, and the first termination condition is when the first count value becomes a first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, an advantageous state). This condition can be satisfied when the number of games played after the transition reaches the upper limit number of games), and is configured to be able to transition to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states in the advantageous state, and One of the advantageous gaming states is a first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2), and the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed; A second counter related to the first advantageous gaming state (for example, a second counter shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D), a performance state counter) is provided, and one game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state. It is configured such that the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") can be updated each time the player wins the winning combination in the first advantageous gaming state. Even if a game is played, the second count value is configured to be updateable, and the first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, a three-bet bet game) and is configured to be able to execute a second game (for example, a two-bet game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number, and the second number is different from the first number. In the advantageous state, the first game is a more advantageous game for the player than the second game, and one of the plurality of types of displays indicates a certain value. (hereinafter referred to as the "first display"). For example, in the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D), one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image representing the updated value of the certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "second display"; for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 43(C)), and one display among the plurality of types of displays is the first display and This is a specific display that is different from either of the second displays (hereinafter referred to as the "third display"; for example, a display that makes the entire screen black, a special effect display, a display of a certain character image), and The value is a value related to the second count value, and when execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, the value is the value related to the second count value. Both the first count value and the second count value are updated, the second display is configured to be displayable in the first game, and the second display is configured to be displayable in the first advantageous game state. If execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated. and is configured to be able to display the third display without displaying the second display in the second game, and based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state. , a third counter that counts the total number of game media that the player has acquired, and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the third counter (hereinafter referred to as the "third count value") ''.For example, the differential number counter) is configured to be able to be updated, and the second termination condition is satisfied when the third count value reaches a second specific value (for example, 1840). This is a possible condition, and even if either of the first game and the second game is executed in the advantageous state, the third count value is updated based on the result of the game. One of the plurality of types of displays is a start display of a certain performance (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth display"; for example, a display of the start of a judge performance), and When execution of the first game is started in a certain state in one advantageous gaming state, the fourth display is configured to be able to be displayed in the first game, and in the certain state The gaming machine is characterized in that the fourth display is not displayed in the second game when execution of the second game is started.

According to the gaming machine according to the present example, when the execution of the second game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the corresponding one of the first count value and the second count value is Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image representing the updated value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game cannot be played. It becomes possible to inform the player of what he or she has been doing in a manner that does not embarrass the player. Also, since the first counter (counter related to advantageous conditions) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game can be played with a player who played correctly in the first game. It becomes possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing the game. Further, by giving preferential treatment to the player who played the first game correctly, it can be expected that the player who did not play the game correctly will be able to make corrections.

Furthermore, the gaming machine (e.g., slot machine) according to the present embodiment has operating means (e.g., left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button), a normal state (e.g., low navigation state), and an advantageous state (e.g., low navigation state). , a high navigation state), a control means (for example, a main control unit), and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays; The gaming machine is configured to be able to notify operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is caused by notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, when the number of payout coins display is It is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the operation navigation used (the operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device), the operation navigation is a navigation regarding the push order, and the first counter ( For example, a first counter (high navigation state counter) shown in FIGS. The first count value) is configured to be updatable, and when one of a plurality of termination conditions including the first termination condition and the second termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous count value is updated. The state is configured to transition from the normal state to the normal state, and the first termination condition is when the first count value becomes a first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, an advantageous state). This condition can be satisfied when the number of games played after the transition reaches the upper limit number of games), and is configured to be able to transition to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states in the advantageous state, and One of the advantageous gaming states is a first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2), and the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed; A second counter related to the first advantageous gaming state (for example, a second counter shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D), a performance state counter) is provided, and one game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state. It is configured such that the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") can be updated each time the player wins the winning combination in the first advantageous gaming state. Even if a game is played, the second count value is configured to be updateable, and the first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, a three-bet bet game) and is configured to be able to execute a second game (for example, a two-bet game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number, and the second number is different from the first number. In the advantageous state, the first game is a more advantageous game for the player than the second game, and one of the plurality of types of displays indicates a certain value. (hereinafter referred to as the "first display"). For example, in the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 43(C) and (D), one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image representing the updated value of the certain value. (hereinafter referred to as "second display"; for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 43(C)), and one display among the plurality of types of displays is the first display and This is a specific display that is different from either of the second displays (hereinafter referred to as the "third display"; for example, a display that makes the entire screen black, a special effect display, a display of a certain character image), and The value is a value related to the second count value, and when execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, the value is the value related to the second count value. Both the first count value and the second count value are updated, the second display is configured to be displayable in the first game, and the second display is configured to be displayable in the first advantageous game state. If execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated. and is configured to be able to display the third display without displaying the second display in the second game, and based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state. , a third counter that counts the total number of game media that the player has acquired, and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the third counter (hereinafter referred to as the "third count value") ''.For example, the differential number counter) is configured to be able to be updated, and the second termination condition is satisfied when the third count value reaches a second specific value (for example, 1840). This is a possible condition, and even if either of the first game and the second game is executed in the advantageous state, the third count value is updated based on the result of the game. and includes a setting value setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values, and one of the plurality of types of display is displayed according to the set setting. A display that suggests a value (hereinafter referred to as "fourth display"; for example, setting suggestion A (setting suggestion performance) shown in FIG. 46(A)), and the first game is executed in the advantageous state. If the second game is played in the advantageous state, the fourth display may be displayed. This game machine is characterized in that it is configured so that there is no possibility of the game being damaged.

According to the gaming machine according to the present example, when the execution of the second game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game is started, the corresponding one of the first count value and the second count value is Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image representing the updated value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game cannot be played. It becomes possible to inform the player of what he or she has been doing in a manner that does not embarrass the player. Also, since the first counter (counter related to advantageous conditions) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game can be played with a player who played correctly in the first game. It becomes possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing the game. Further, by giving preferential treatment to the player who played the first game correctly, it can be expected that the player who did not play the game correctly will be able to make corrections.

In addition, the game machine (for example, a slot machine) according to the present embodiment includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying multiple types of displays, and an operation means (for example, a left stop button, a middle stop button, a right stop button, a right a stop button), and a control means (e.g., a main control unit) for transitioning to one of a plurality of states including a normal state (e.g., low navigation state) and an advantageous state (e.g., high navigation state); and information that allows identification of the stop position, stop order, stop timing, etc. of each reel, including operation information of the operation means (for example, operation navigation using a payout number display, operation navigation using a liquid crystal display, etc.) ), and the advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to notification of the operation information, and the advantageous state is based on the number of used game media and the number of paid out game media in the advantageous state. , a first counter (for example, a difference number counter) that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player, and the first count of the first counter is increased every time one game is played in the advantageous state. It is configured to be able to update a value (for example, the count value of a difference number counter), and is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when an advantageous state ending condition is satisfied, and the advantageous state is changed to the normal state. The termination condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least when the first count value reaches the first value (for example, when the number of games played after transitioning to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times), and the A second counter (for example, AT2) configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states in an advantageous state, and related to management of a certain advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2) among the plurality of advantageous gaming states. For example, the second count value of the second counter (for example, the count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) is provided, each time one game is played in the certain advantageous gaming state. is configured to be updateable, and the certain advantageous gaming state is configured to end when a certain advantageous gaming state ending condition is satisfied, and the certain advantageous gaming state ending condition is configured such that at least the above-mentioned This is a condition that can be satisfied when the second count value reaches the second value (for example, when the number of gaming media paid out after transitioning to the AT2 state reaches the AT2 expected acquisition number), and the above-mentioned plurality of One of the types of displays is a first display indicating a value related to the second count value (for example, the remaining number of coins display (remaining 280 coins) shown in FIG. 49(A)), and the game media A first game (for example, a 3-coin game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a first number (for example, 3), and a second game in which the number of bets on the gaming medium is a second number (for example, 2). (for example, a two-coin game), the second number is a number different from the first number, and in the certain advantageous gaming state, the second number is However, the first game is more advantageous for the player (for example, the number of gaming media paid out per hour is large, the amount of profit per hour is large, the net increase in the number of coins per game is large, it is more advantageous than the normal state) (e.g., it is easy to shift to a normal state, it is difficult to shift from an advantageous state to a normal state, etc.), and the execution result of the first game is a number in which the number of payouts of game media is different from the first number (for example, 11). (hereinafter referred to as the "first result"). ), and the execution result of the second game is a result in which the number of game media paid out is different from the second number (for example, 11) (hereinafter referred to as " The first game is executed in the certain advantageous gaming state in which the first display is displayed. If the first result is the first result, the number of gaming media used (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game are both the first count value and the second count value. and the number of gaming media used (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game can be reflected on the first display, and in the certain advantageous gaming state. If the second game is executed with the first display displayed and the second result is the second result, the number of gaming media used (or the number of bets) related to the execution of the second game. ) and the number of payouts can be reflected only in the first count value of the first count value and the second count value, and the number of game media used (or The system is configured so that the number of bets) and the number of payouts are not reflected in the first display, and the number of gaming media used in a certain gaming period (hereinafter referred to as "predetermined gaming period") in the advantageous state. The total number of gaming media that the player has acquired, which is derived based on the number of payouts (hereinafter referred to as the "total number of acquired media"; for example, the number indicated by the total acquired number display counter shown in FIG. 49(A) (506 media)) is configured to be able to display a predetermined number of coins acquisition display (for example, a predetermined number of coins acquisition display TG shown in FIG. 49(A)) when the number of coins has reached a predetermined number, and the first game in the predetermined game period. When the total number of coins acquired reaches the predetermined number due to execution, the display is configured such that the predetermined number of coins acquired display can be displayed based on the execution of the first game, and the number of coins acquired in the second game during the predetermined game period is Even if the total number of coins acquired reaches the predetermined number due to execution, the display is configured such that the predetermined number of coins acquisition display is not displayed based on the execution of the second game, and among the plurality of types of displays, The first display is a start display of a certain performance (hereinafter referred to as a "second display"; for example, a display of the start of a judge performance), and in a certain state in the certain advantageous gaming state, the first game When the execution of the second game is started, the second display is configured to be displayable in the first game, and when the execution of the second game is started in the certain state, The gaming machine is characterized in that the second display is not displayed during the second game.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, even if the total number of game media acquired by the player reaches a predetermined number by executing the second game in a certain game period, the second game Since the predetermined number of coins acquired display is not displayed based on the execution of the second game, it is possible to reduce the feeling of disappointment (feeling of loss) of the player who has executed the second game due to an operation error etc. . Further, by giving preferential treatment to the player who played the first game correctly, it can be expected that the player who did not play the game correctly will be able to make corrections.

In addition, the game machine (for example, a slot machine) according to the present embodiment includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying multiple types of displays, and an operation means (for example, a left stop button, a middle stop button, a right stop button, a right a stop button), and a control means (e.g., a main control unit) for transitioning to one of a plurality of states including a normal state (e.g., low navigation state) and an advantageous state (e.g., high navigation state); and information that allows identification of the stop position, stop order, stop timing, etc. of each reel, including operation information of the operation means (for example, operation navigation using a payout number display, operation navigation using a liquid crystal display, etc.) ), and the advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to notification of the operation information, and the advantageous state is based on the number of used game media and the number of paid out game media in the advantageous state. , a second counter (for example, a difference number counter) that counts the total number of game media that the player has acquired, and the second count of the second counter is increased every time one game is played in the advantageous state. It is configured to be able to update a value (for example, the count value of a difference number counter), and is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when conditions for ending the advantageous state are met, and the advantageous state ends. The condition is met at least when the second count value reaches the first value (for example, when the number of games played after transitioning to an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of games (or a certain number of games)) is a possible condition, and is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states in the advantageous state, and one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a first advantageous gaming state. is a gaming state, and includes a third counter related to management of the first advantageous gaming state (for example, an AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter indicating the number of gaming media that can be obtained in AT2), and the first advantageous gaming state is The third count value of the third counter (for example, the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter) can be updated every time one game is played, and the first advantageous game state ending condition is The first advantageous gaming state is configured to end when the third count value reaches a second value (for example, when the third count value reaches a second value). , when the number of gaming media paid out after transitioning to the AT2 state reaches the AT2 planned acquisition number), and one of the plurality of display types is displayed according to the third count. A first display indicating a value (for example, the remaining number of coins display (remaining 280 coins) shown in FIG. is configured to be able to execute a game (for example, a 3-coin game) and a second game (for example, a 2-coin game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number (for example, 2), The second number is a number different from the first number, and in the first advantageous gaming state, the first game is more advantageous for the player than the second game ( For example, the number of gaming media paid out per hour is large, the profit amount per hour is large, the net increase in number of coins per game is large, it is easy to shift from a normal state to an advantageous state, it is difficult to shift from an advantageous state to a normal state, etc. ), and the execution result of the first game is a result in which the number of game media paid out is a number different from the first number (for example, 11) (hereinafter referred to as "first result"). ), and the execution result of the second game is a result in which the number of game media paid out is different from the second number (for example, 11) (hereinafter referred to as " The first game is executed in the first advantageous gaming state and the first display is displayed. If the result is the first result, the number of gaming media used (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game are counted by both the second count value and the third count value. It is configured such that the number of game media used (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game can be reflected in the first display, and the first advantageous game If the second game is executed in a state where the first display is displayed and the second result is the second result, the number of game media used (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts can be reflected only in the second count value of the second count value and the third count value, and the number of gaming media used in connection with the execution of the second game; (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts are not reflected in the first display, and the use of gaming media during a certain gaming period (hereinafter referred to as "predetermined gaming period") in the advantageous state A first counter (for example, a counter that displays the total number of pieces acquired) that counts the total number of game media that the player has acquired during the predetermined gaming period (hereinafter referred to as the "total number of acquired pieces") based on the number of game media and the number of payouts. The display means is a means capable of displaying a predetermined number of coins acquired display (for example, a predetermined number of coins acquired display TG shown in FIG. 49(A)) when the total number of acquired coins reaches a predetermined value, When the total number of coins acquired reaches the predetermined value due to the execution of the first game during the game period, the display is configured to display the predetermined number of coins acquired based on the execution of the first game; Even if the total number of coins acquired reaches the predetermined value by executing the second game during the gaming period, the display is configured such that the display of the predetermined number of coins acquired is not displayed based on the execution of the second game. You can.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the number of used game media and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display, so the game machine is more disadvantageous than the first game. It becomes possible to inform the player that the second game has been executed in a manner that does not embarrass the player. In addition, even if the second game is executed, the total number acquired will reflect the number of game media used and the number of payouts, so the player who is executing the first game and the second game In some cases, it may be possible to ensure the fairness of players playing games. In addition, even if the number of game media increases in the second game, the number of game media used and the number of payouts will not be reflected in the third count value, and will not affect the first advantageous game state ending condition. (because the first advantageous game advantageous state does not progress), it is possible to reduce the sense of disappointment (feeling of loss) of the player who has executed the second game due to an operational error or the like.

Further, the third counter counts the total number of game media that the player has acquired in the first advantageous gaming state based on the number of game media used and the number of payouts in the first advantageous gaming state. It may also be a counter.

Further, it is configured such that a certain winning combination can be won by executing the first game, and the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the certain winning combination is a certain number of 1 or more (for example, 11), In a certain state in which the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined value by executing the second game during the predetermined gaming period, if the winning combination is not won by executing the first game; The display is configured such that the predetermined number of coins acquired display is not displayed, and in a certain state in which the total number of coins acquired has reached the predetermined value by executing the second game during the predetermined game period, the first When the player wins the certain combination by playing the game, the predetermined number of winnings display may be displayed.

Further, one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display indicating a value regarding the total number of acquisitions, and is in the first advantageous gaming state and is different from the first display and the second display. If the first game is executed with both displays being displayed and the first result is the first result, the number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game are the first result. can be reflected in all the count values of the first count value, the second count value, and the third count value of the counter, and the number of used game media and the number of payouts related to the execution of the first game. is configured to be reflected on both the first display and the second display, and the first advantageous gaming state is displayed on both the first display and the second display. is displayed and the second game is executed and the second result is the second result, the number of game media used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are the first count value, can be reflected in the first count value and the second count value of the second count value and the third count value, and the number of game media used regarding the execution of the second game; The number of payouts may not be reflected in the first display, but may be configured to be reflected in the second display.

Further, the game machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one in which game balls enclosed within the game machine are reused. Further, the main control section, the first sub-control section, and the second sub-control section may be configured in one chip, or the main control section and the first sub-control section may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Moreover, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Further, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Further, by applying the content described in one of the plurality of configurations described in the above embodiment to another configuration, the range of games may be further expanded.

In the embodiment of the slot machine described below, a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. , based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, determines the validity of internal winning of multiple types of winning combinations by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop match the predetermined payout conditions, the game media will be paid out and the game will end; if they do not match, the game will end. This is a game machine that plays a series of games that end without dispensing any media.

[overall structure]
First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 50 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front side of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. The outer panel constituting the main body 101 is composed of five wooden boards (top surface, bottom surface, right side surface, left side surface, and back surface). A handle member 104 is attached to a side plate 103 forming the left and right side surfaces of the outer plate forming the casing of the main body 101 . Note that all of the outer panels constituting the main body 101 may be made of metal, or some of the plates may be made of metal and the remaining plates may be made of wood. In this case, since it is necessary to form a hole 103h in the side plate 103 to which the handle member 104 is attached, it may be made of wood, which is easy to process, and the remaining plate may be made of metal.

Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface are stored inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible. By rotating each of the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. Note that as such a display device, in addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be employed. Further, although the slot machine 100 includes three reels inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the display window 113 is arranged on the back of each reel 110 to 112. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. Note that inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the two. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this optical sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. The winning line is a line on which it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed. The winning line that becomes valid (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as game media. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135. Note that the number of winning lines can be set arbitrarily.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that he has internally won a specific winning combination in an internal lottery to be described later, or that he is in a gaming state related to this specific winning combination. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay combination that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. This is a warning lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two coins are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. (maximum 3). Hereinafter, the bet button 132 will also be referred to as the MAX bet button. Note that the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start button is activated to notify that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal slot 141 is an slot into which the player inserts medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a specific game state). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored token number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout token number display 127 are composed of seven segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 that are composed of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. More specifically, by operating the left stop button 137, the left reel 110 can be stopped, by operating the middle stop button 138, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the right stop button 139, the middle reel 111 can be stopped. By operating the right reel 112, it is possible to stop the right reel 112. Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body may be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker provided below inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to enliven the game. A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided at the top of the presentation device 160 for outputting sound from a speaker provided above inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. It is provided. This effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and an effect image display device 157 (liquid crystal display) disposed on the back side of this shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). ). Note that the display device does not need to be a liquid crystal display device, but may be any display device that can display various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, etc. , a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, it is also possible to provide a decoration (not shown) around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen appears oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

[Handle member]
The handle member 104 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 51, 52, 53, and 54. 51 and 52 are perspective views showing the handle member 104, FIG. 53 is a side view showing the handle member 104, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view showing the handle member 104.

As shown in FIG. 51, an opening OP is formed at one end of this handle member 104. Hereinafter, the handle member 104 will be described with the side facing the opening OP as the front, the longitudinal direction of the opening OP as the left-right direction, and the lateral direction as the up-down direction based on the attached state. In the handle member 104, a bag-shaped internal space SP is formed from the opening OP. When the handle member 104 is attached to the side plate 103, the slot machine 100 is grasped by inserting a hand into the internal space SP through the opening OP.

The opening OP of the handle member 104 is formed by the peripheral portion 1041. This peripheral portion 1041 is larger than a hole 103h of the side plate 103, which will be described later, and when the handle member 104 is attached to the side plate 103, the handle member 104 moves inside the main body 101 (toward the back side of the installation position) and falls. It has the role of a stopper to prevent this from happening. Note that if the thickness of the peripheral edge part 1041 protrudes to the outside of the side plate 103, it may cause damage to the handle member 104 during movement. It is best to provide a counterbore (drop-in recess). When the side plate 103 is made of metal, the thickness of the side plate 103 is not as thick as that of wood, so it is preferable to provide a recess corresponding to a counterbore.

An introduction part 1042 is formed from the peripheral part 1041. This introduction part 1042 is a part that fits into the hole 103h when the handle member 104 is attached to the side plate 103, and has a size that matches the hole 103h of the side plate 103. Further, the introduction portion 1042 forms a portion of the internal space SP that extends from the opening OP to the back side.

An intermediate portion 1043 is formed from the introduction portion 1042 . This introduction part 1043 is a part that connects the introduction part 1042 and a fingertip storage part 1044, which will be described later, and forms a curved part that connects a part extending toward the back side and a part extending upward in the internal space SP. . More specifically, the upper surface of the introduction section 1042 and the front surface of the fingertip storage section 1044 are connected by a curved part, and the lower surface of the introduction section 1042 and the rear surface of the fingertip storage section 1044 are connected. By making it a part where a curved part and a smooth part are connected, the whole is made to form a curved L-shape.

A fingertip storage section 1044 is formed from the intermediate section 1043. This fingertip accommodating portion 1044 forms a portion extending upward in the internal space SP and the innermost portion thereof (the uppermost portion in FIG. 51). Note that this fingertip storage section 1044 is configured such that the length in the left-right direction becomes shorter (narrower in the left-right direction) as it advances upward. With this configuration, it becomes difficult for the fingertips to move when transporting the slot machine 100, and the work can be performed stably.

The handle member 104 has an L-shape as a whole due to the introduction part 1042, intermediate part 1043, and fingertip storage part 1044, and a stepped part 1045 extending in the left-right direction is provided on the inside of this curved corner. ing. This stepped portion 1045 is one step higher than the upper surface of the introduction portion 1042 and is one step higher than the front surface of the fingertip accommodating portion 1044 . The position of the front surface of the stepped portion 1045 is configured such that the side plate 103 can be sandwiched between the peripheral edge portion 1041 and the stepped portion 1045.

Moreover, an elastic engagement part 1046 for sandwiching the side plate 103 between the handle member 104 and the peripheral edge part 1041 is provided on the lower side of the handle member 104 .

As shown in FIG. 54, the handle member 104 is constructed by combining two parts, a right part 104A and a left part 104B. Of these, the left part 104B has a joint part that is slightly smaller so that the joint part fits inside the right part 104A. A step is formed for 104B to fit inside. Furthermore, these two parts engage in a so-called snap-fit type at a total of three engagement parts, a first engagement part 1047, a second engagement part 1048, and a third engagement part 1049 in the fingertip storage part 1044. configured to match.

The first engaging portion 1047 is composed of a wedge-shaped first locking portion 1047B of the left side component 104B and a first locked portion 1047A of the right side component 104A with which this first locking portion 1047B engages.

The second engaging portion 1048 is composed of a wedge-shaped second locking portion 1048B of the left side component 104B and a second locked portion 1048A of the right side component 104A with which this second locking portion 1048B engages.

The third engaging portion 1049 includes a wedge-shaped third locking portion 1049A of the right side component 104A, and a third locked portion 1049B of the left side component 104B that is engaged with the third locking portion 1049A. Note that the third locked portion 1049B is configured to cover the boundary between the joint portion on the back side of the right side component 104A and the left side component 104B, and also has the role of protecting this joint portion.

In the first to third engaging parts 1047 to 1049, each of the locking parts (1047B, 1048B, 1049A) is bent and elastically deformed as it is inserted into the locked part (1047A, 1048A, 1049B). When the engagement position is reached and elastically returned, the claw portion of the locking portion engages with the locked portion, thereby maintaining the joined state of the right side component 104A and the left side component 104B. In this combined state, the first locked part 1047A is higher than the first locking part 1047B in the front direction, and the second locked part 1047A is higher than the second locking part 1048B in the upward direction. The locking portion 1048A is higher, and the third locked portion 1049B is higher than the third locking portion 1049A in the back direction.

Based on the configuration of the handle member 104 described above, the handle member 104 in a state attached to the side plate 103 will be described using FIGS. 55, 56, and 57. 55(a) is a partial sectional view of the side plate 103 without the handle member 104, and FIG. 55(b) is a side view showing the positional relationship with the handle member 104 when it is attached to the side plate 103. . Further, FIGS. 56 and 57 are diagrams showing an example of the state of the handle member 104 in the middle of attachment (removal) to the side plate 103.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), a hole 103h penetrating the side plate 103 in its thickness direction is formed. When attaching the handle member 104 to the side plate 103, insert the handle member 104 into the hole 103h from the fingertip storage part 1044 side as shown in FIG. Rotate it. At this time, the elastic engagement part 1046 is bent and elastically deformed as the handle member 104 is inserted, so that it can pass through the hole 103h. Finally, when the peripheral portion 1041 is pressed against the side plate 103, the side plate 103 is sandwiched between the peripheral portion 1041 and the stepped portion 1045 above the introduction portion 1042. Further, below the introduction part 1042, the elastic engagement part 1046 that has passed through the hole 103h returns elastically, and the side plate 103 is sandwiched between the elastic engagement part 1046 and the peripheral edge part 1041. In this way, the handle member 104 is fitted so as to close the hole 103h, resulting in the state shown in FIG. 55(b).

On the other hand, when removing the handle member 104, the elastic engagement portion 1046 is bent from the inside of the main body 101 to release the engagement state with the side plate 103 on the lower side of the handle member 104, and the elastic engagement portion 1046 While pushing the handle member 104 into the hole 103h, the handle member 104 is rotated using the upper end portion of the peripheral edge portion 1041 as a fulcrum, thereby releasing the fitted state of the side plate 103 above the handle member 104 and bringing it into the state shown in FIG. 57. Then, the handle member 104 can be removed by rotating the handle member 104 so that it assumes the attitude shown in FIG. 56 and moving it out of the main body 101.

This handle member 104 has the role of preventing injuries during transportation and installation of the slot machine 100. Note that the hole 103h itself can also be used as a handle. However, if the hole 103h is used as a handle, the side plate 103 may dig into fingers due to the load, causing injury. In addition, if the side plate 103 is made of plywood made of compressed wood chips, there is a risk of the wood chips getting stuck when you put your finger on the edge of the brittle hole 103h, and if the side plate 103 is made of sheet metal , there is a risk of injury to fingers around the periphery of the hole 103h. Since the handle member 104 can disperse the load applied to the fingers and prevent the fingers from directly touching the side plate 103, the above problem can be solved. Furthermore, it also becomes difficult for foreign matter to enter the inside of the slot machine 100 from the outside. Note that the handle member 104 may be fixed to the hole 103h using a separate fixing member such as a screw, or may be attached during transportation and removed after installation. Further, even if the handle member 104 is removed, the size of the hole 103h should be as small as possible (for example, 80 to 90 mm in width and 30 to 40 mm in height) so that fraudulent acts using the hole 103h are difficult. degree) is preferable.

[Features (1) of handle member 104]
The handle member 104 has a curved shape, and when the handle member 104 is attached to the side plate 103, a part of the handle member 104 (fingertip storage portion 1044) is attached to the side plate 103, as shown in FIG. 55(b). will be facing each other. At this time, the first engaging portion 1047 of the handle member 104 is located in the space between the side plate 103 and the handle member 104. The engagement portion provided at such a position may collide with the side plate 103 when force is applied to the handle member 104, and the engagement may be released due to the impact or damage. Furthermore, there is a possibility that such a collision may be intentionally performed in order to release the engagement for fraudulent purposes.

In the above-described handle member 104, when attached to the side plate 103, the stepped portion 1045 is located closer to the side plate 103 than the first engaging portion 1047. With this configuration, when a force toward the side plate 103 is applied to the handle member 104, the movement of the handle member 104 is restricted by the stepped portion 1045 before the first engagement portion 1047 collides with the side plate 103, and the first engagement portion Collision between the portion 1047 and the side plate 103 can be prevented. In this way, if the handle member 104 has a restriction portion that restricts movement at a position closer to the side plate 103 than the first engaging portion 1047 in the space between the side plate 103 and the handle member 104, the side plate 103 and the first engaging portion 1047 can be prevented from colliding.

Note that the position where such a restricting part is provided is not limited to being provided in a curved part like the step part 1045 described above, but for example, as shown in FIG. It may be located directly below the portion 1047, may be located directly above the first engaging portion 1047, or may be located both directly below and above the first engaging portion 1047. Furthermore, they may be provided on the left and right sides of the first engaging portion 1047. However, if the step part 1045 is provided only on one of the right part 104A and the left part 104B, there is a risk that the engagement will be released due to collision between the step part 1045 and the side plate 103. It is preferable to provide a stepped portion 1045 on both sides. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 58(b), it may be provided on the upper surface of the introduction part 1042. Furthermore, although the stepped portion 1045 of the handle member 104 extends in the left-right direction, it may be arranged diagonally in a plane consisting of the left-right direction and the up-down direction, and may extend in the up-down direction. It may be something that does. The handle member 104 and the stepped portion 1045 may be separate members, and the stepped portion 1045 may be provided in accordance with the thickness of the side plate 103. In any case, the position is not limited as long as it restricts the movement of the first engaging part 1047 toward the side plate 103.

Note that if the restricting part is not provided in the curved part, the force will concentrate on this curved part and the handle member 104 will bend, causing the first engaging part 1047 to collide with the side plate 103 or the engaging part to be bent. Although there is a risk that the engagement may become easily disengaged, it is necessary to provide the regulating portion in a curved portion like the stepped portion 1045 of the handle member 104, or in a portion closer to the curved portion than the first engaging portion 1047. By providing a regulating portion, it is possible to make the curved portion less likely to bend, thereby making it less likely that such a problem will occur.

In the handle member 104 described above, the stepped portion 1045 plays a role as a regulating portion that prevents the first engaging portion 1047 from colliding with the side plate 103. Although this stepped portion 1045 extends in the left-right direction, the length of this regulating portion in the left-right direction is not limited to this length, and may be shorter. However, as the restricting portion becomes shorter, the handle member 104 bends and the first engaging portion 1047 and the side plate 103 tend to collide with each other, making it difficult to perform its role as a restricting portion. Regarding this, since the force applied to the fingertip when transporting the slot machine 100 is concentrated at the tip of the fingertip storage section 1044, the length of the regulating section is determined by the tip of the fingertip storage section 1044 (more specifically, the inside By making the length longer than the length in the left-right direction at the innermost part of the space SP, it can fulfill its role as a regulating part. Note that the regulating section is not limited to being integrated like the stepped section 1045, but may be provided in multiple locations. In this case, the total length of these left and right directions is equal to the fingertip storage section 1044. It is sufficient that the length is equal to or longer than the length in the left-right direction at the distal end.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58(a), a space may be formed in the side plate 103 into which the regulating portion including the stepped portion 1045 fits, and a space (spotbore) into which the peripheral edge portion 1041 fits. may be formed on the side plate 103.

[Features (2) of handle member 104]
As shown in FIG. 55(b) above, when the handle member 104 is attached to the side plate 103, the side plate 103 is sandwiched between the opposing surfaces of the stepped portion 1045 and the peripheral edge portion 1041 on the upper surface of the introduction portion 142. It becomes. When removing the handle member 104, push the elastic engagement portion 1046 into the hole 103h and rotate the handle member 104 using the upper end portion of the peripheral portion 1041 as a fulcrum to release the pinched state of the side plate 103 on the upper surface of the introduction portion 142. After the handle member 104 is brought into the state shown in FIG. 57, the handle member 104 is further rotated and moved out of the main body 101 so as to take the position shown in FIG. Here, if the height of the surface of the step part 1045 is higher than the height of the surface of the peripheral part 1041 in the upward direction of the opposing surfaces of the step part 1045 and the peripheral part 1041, then Even if the handle member 104 is rotated using the upper end portion as a fulcrum, the side plate 103 is not easily released from being sandwiched between the opposing surfaces of the stepped portion 1045 and the peripheral edge portion 1041, and the removal operation takes time.

Regarding this point, in the handle member 104, as shown in FIG. It is lower than the height H2 of the surface of the portion 1041. With this configuration, the amount of rotation and load required to release the side plate 103 from being sandwiched between the opposing surfaces of the stepped portion 1045 and the peripheral edge portion 1041 can be reduced, making it easier to remove the handle member 104. can do. In addition, regarding such a configuration, the height of the surface of the stepped portion 1045 may be less than or equal to the height of the surface of the peripheral edge portion 1041 in the upward direction of the opposing surfaces of the stepped portion 1045 and the peripheral edge portion 1041. .

Regarding the stepped portion 1045, even if, for example, the side plate 103 is thicker than expected and the side plate 103 cannot be sandwiched between the opposing surfaces of the stepped portion 1045 and the peripheral edge portion 1041, the fingertip storage portion 1044, The side plate 103 can be sandwiched between the side plate 103 and the peripheral edge 1041 facing this, and the handle member 104 can be attached with the side plate 103 placed on the stepped portion 1045. That is, the range of the thickness of the side plate 103 that can be attached can have a wide range.

Regarding the upward height of the opposing surfaces of the stepped portion 1045 and the peripheral edge portion 1041, when adopting a configuration in which the height of the stepped portion 1045 is equal to or less than the height of the peripheral edge portion 1041, the above-mentioned The present invention is not limited to a handle member composed of a plurality of parts like the handle member 104 described above, but may also be adopted as a handle member integrally molded. However, in a handle member composed of a plurality of parts like the handle member 104 described above, there is a risk that the engagement state may be released due to a load applied during removal, so in such a handle member, Regarding the upward height of the opposing surfaces of the step portion 1045 and the peripheral edge portion 1041, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the height of the surface of the step portion 1045 is equal to or less than the height of the surface of the peripheral edge portion 1041.

Furthermore, although the above-described handle member 104 has an L-shaped shape when viewed from the side, the height of the surface of the step portion 1045 is is lower than the height of the surface of the peripheral edge 1041, even if the shape is different from this, the handle member 104 can be rotated using the upper end of the peripheral edge 1041 as a fulcrum. This makes the removal work easier.

Furthermore, if the upper end of the peripheral edge 1041 has a wavy design, the fulcrum of the rotational movement when removing the handle member 104 is the highest part of the upper end of the peripheral edge 1041. The surface facing the portion 1041 may be configured to have a height equal to or less than that height.

[Features (3) of handle member 104]
The handle member 104 described above is a combination of a right side part 104A and a left side part 104B, and there is a joint between these parts. These joints are weaker than other parts, and in particular, it is conceivable that the joint on the back side of the handle member 104 may be destroyed in order to commit some kind of fraud to the inside of the slot machine 100. However, as shown in FIG. 52, in the handle member 104, the joint portion between the right side part 104A and the left side part 104B is covered by the third locked part 1049B of the third engaging part 1049, preventing foreign matter from entering through the opening OP. Even if an attempt is made to allow the foreign object to enter the main body 101 through the joint, there is a third locked portion 1049B outside the joint that is difficult to see from the outside of the slot machine 100, making it difficult for the foreign object to enter the main body 101. . Specifically, even if a foreign object is allowed to enter the vicinity of the third engaging portion 1049 with the aim of disengaging the third engaging portion 1049, and even if the third engaging portion 1049 is successfully disengaged, the third engaging portion 1049 may be disengaged. Since the third locked portion 1049B is provided near the portion 1049, it is necessary to try to enter from a location different from the location near the third engaging portion 1049. In this way, the border on the back side is protected, making it possible to prevent fraudulent acts targeting the joint.

Further, since the handle member 104 may be removed and reused, it is desired that the handle member 104 is less susceptible to damage due to attachment and detachment. When attaching and detaching the handle member 104, the back side (especially the curved portion) of the handle member 104 tends to come into contact with the side plate 103 as shown in FIG. 56, and this contact may damage the joint portion. Since the joint portion on the back side is protected by the locked portion 1049B, it is possible to prevent such a problem from occurring.

In addition, in the above-described handle member 104, the third engaging part 1049 is configured to have the role of protecting the joint part on the back side, but there is also a protective part that protects the joint part separately from the engaging part. A configuration may also be provided. However, as in the above-described handle member 104, by integrating the engaging portion and the protective portion, a stronger structure can be achieved, and the effects of preventing fraud and damage can be enhanced.

Note that this third locked part 1049B is higher than the third locked part 1049A in the back direction, and the claw part of the third locked part 1049A is higher than the third locked part 1049B. Since it is configured not to protrude, even if the back side of the handle member 104 contacts the side plate 103, the third locking portion 1049A does not contact the side plate 103, making it difficult to release the engaged state. Can be done.

≪Others≫
In addition, in this embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game machine that employs the handle member 104, but the present invention is not limited to this, and game balls (e.g. , Pachinko balls) as a game medium, a Pachinko machine, an arranged ball game machine, a Jumpball game machine, a smart ball, etc.

Although the present embodiment has been described above, it is not limited to the embodiment described above, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. , those involving such modifications and changes are also included within the technical scope of the present invention. In addition, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done.

≪Configuration of technical ideas included in the embodiments≫
Hereinafter, the technical idea described in the above description will be described with reference to the corresponding configuration.

In the above explanation,
A handle (for example, handle member 104) having a curved outer shape forms an opening into which a fingertip can be inserted (for example, opening OP) and a bag-shaped interior space (for example, interior space SP) continuing from the opening, and has a curved outer shape. A game machine (for example, a slot machine 100) attached to a side plate (for example, a side plate 103),
The handle is configured by combining a plurality of parts (for example, the right part 104A and the left part 104B),
The internal space is formed by a combination of the plurality of parts,
The handle is provided with an engaging part (for example, a first engaging part 1047, a second engaging part 1048, and a third engaging part 1049) with which the plurality of parts engage,
The handle is provided with an outer plate-side engaging portion (for example, a first engaging portion 1047), which is the engaging portion, on a surface facing the outer plate inside the gaming machine,
The handle is provided with a regulating portion (for example, a stepped portion 1045) at a position closer to the outer plate than the outer plate side engaging portion (see, for example, FIG. 55(b));
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The handle is provided with a curved part (for example, an intermediate part 1043) inside the game machine,
The regulating portion is provided at a location closer to the curved portion than the outer plate side engaging portion (for example, see FIG. 53);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A handle (for example, handle member 104) having a curved outer shape forms an opening into which a fingertip can be inserted (for example, opening OP) and a bag-shaped interior space (for example, interior space SP) continuing from the opening, and has a curved outer shape. A game machine (for example, a slot machine 100) attached to a side plate (for example, a side plate 103),
The handle is configured by combining a plurality of parts (for example, the right part 104A and the left part 104B),
The internal space is formed by a combination of the plurality of parts,
The handle is provided with an engaging part (for example, a first engaging part 1047, a second engaging part 1048, and a third engaging part 1049) with which the plurality of parts engage,
The handle is provided with an outer plate-side engaging portion (for example, a first engaging portion 1047), which is the engaging portion, on a surface facing the outer plate inside the gaming machine,
The handle is provided with a regulating portion (for example, a stepped portion 1045) at a position closer to the outer plate than the outer plate side engaging portion (see, for example, FIG. 55(b));
The regulating portion is provided along the longitudinal direction of the opening (for example, see FIG. 51),
The length of the internal space along the longitudinal direction of the opening becomes shorter as it goes deeper into the internal space (see, for example, FIGS. 51 and 54);
The length of the regulating portion is longer than the innermost length of the internal space along the longitudinal direction of the opening (for example, see the description of [Features (1) of handle member 104]);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A handle (for example, handle member 104) having a curved outer shape forms an opening into which a fingertip can be inserted (for example, opening OP) and a bag-shaped interior space (for example, interior space SP) continuing from the opening, and has a curved outer shape. A game machine (for example, a slot machine 100) attached to a side plate (for example, a side plate 103),
The handle is configured by combining a plurality of parts (for example, the right part 104A and the left part 104B),
The internal space is formed by a combination of the plurality of parts,
The handle is provided with an engaging part (for example, a first engaging part 1047, a second engaging part 1048, and a third engaging part 1049) with which the plurality of parts engage,
The handle is provided with an outer plate-side engaging portion (for example, a first engaging portion 1047), which is the engaging portion, on a surface facing the outer plate inside the gaming machine,
The handle is provided with a plurality of regulating parts (for example, a step part 1045) at a position closer to the outer plate than the outer plate side engaging part (for example, as shown in FIG. 55(b), [Handle (See description of feature (1) of member 104),
The plurality of regulating portions are provided along the longitudinal direction of the opening (for example, see FIG. 51),
The length of the internal space along the longitudinal direction of the opening becomes shorter as it goes deeper into the internal space (see, for example, FIGS. 51 and 54);
The total length of the plurality of restricting portions is equal to or longer than the innermost length of the internal space along the longitudinal direction of the opening (for example, as described in [Features (1) of handle member 104]). reference),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The handle is provided with a curved part (for example, an intermediate part 1043) inside the game machine,
The regulating portion is provided at a location closer to the curved portion than the outer plate side engaging portion (for example, see FIG. 53);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A handle (for example, handle member 104) having a curved outer shape forms an opening into which a fingertip can be inserted (for example, opening OP) and a bag-shaped interior space (for example, interior space SP) continuing from the opening, and has a curved outer shape. A game machine (for example, a slot machine 100) attached to a side plate (for example, a side plate 103),
The handle is provided with a peripheral edge part (for example, a peripheral edge part 1041) that forms the opening,
It is possible to sandwich the outer panel having a thickness equal to or less than a predetermined thickness between the upper edge of the peripheral edge and a stepped portion (for example, stepped portion 1045) provided inside the gaming machine (for example, , see FIG. 55(b)),
The height of the surface of the step portion facing the outer panel is less than or equal to the height of the surface of the upper edge portion facing the outer panel (for example, see FIG. 55(c));
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The stepped portion is provided between the upper edge portion and a surface that faces the outer plate and is higher than the height to the upper end of the stepped portion (for example, the fingertip accommodating portion 1044). For example, see FIG. 55(b)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The handle is configured by combining a plurality of parts (for example, the right part 104A and the left part 104B),
The internal space is formed by a combination of the plurality of parts,
The handle is provided with an engaging part (for example, a first engaging part 1047, a second engaging part 1048, and a third engaging part 1049) with which the plurality of parts engage.
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A handle (for example, handle member 104) having a curved outer shape forms an opening into which a fingertip can be inserted (for example, opening OP) and a bag-shaped interior space (for example, interior space SP) continuing from the opening, and has a curved outer shape. A game machine (for example, a slot machine 100) attached to a side plate (for example, a side plate 103),
The handle is configured by combining a plurality of parts (for example, the right part 104A and the left part 104B),
The internal space is formed by a combination of the plurality of parts,
The handle is provided with an engaging part (for example, a first engaging part 1047, a second engaging part 1048, and a third engaging part 1049) with which the plurality of parts engage,
The handle is provided with a protective part (for example, a third locked part 1049B) that covers the joints of the plurality of parts inside the game machine,
The protective portion is provided on a surface of the handle facing inside the gaming machine (for example, see FIG. 52);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The handle is provided with a game machine inside side engaging part (for example, a third engaging part 1049), which is the engaging part, on a surface of the handle facing inside the game machine. ,
The gaming machine inner side engaging part and the protecting part are integrated (for example, see FIG. 52);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The handle is provided with a game machine inside side engaging part (for example, a third engaging part 1049), which is the engaging part, on a surface of the handle facing inside the game machine. ,
The gaming machine interior side engaging portion includes a locking portion having a claw portion (for example, third locking portion 1049A), and a locked portion that is locked by the claw portion (for example, third locking portion 1049B). ),
The claw portion locked to the locked portion is configured so as not to protrude further into the gaming machine than the locked portion (for example, [Feature (3) of the handle member 104] ),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Hereinafter, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel gaming machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 59 to 73. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 59 to 73 are, in principle, used only for explanations using FIGS. 59 to 73, and even if the same symbols are shown in other drawings, In the explanation using FIG. 73, priority will be given to the symbols shown in FIGS. 59 to 73.
<Overall configuration>
FIG. 59 is a diagram schematically showing a slot machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied. In the slot machine 100, a game is started by inserting medals, and medals are paid out according to the result of the game.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 59 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102. The front door 102 is a door member rotatably attached to the main body 101 via a hinge (not shown) provided on the left side of the main body 101. The front door 102 is provided with a locking function, so that only an employee of the game parlor can open the front door 102. FIG. 59(a-1) is a plan view of the slot machine 100 viewed from above with the front door 102 closed, and the lower side of the figure is the front side (player side). FIG. 59(a-2) shown below is a front view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front with the front door 102 closed, with the front side on the paper being the front side, and the horizontal and vertical directions indicated by arrows. That's right.

When the main body 101 is divided into three parts, an upper part, a middle part, and a lower part, the first image display device 157 is arranged in the upper part. The first image display device 157 is a liquid crystal display device, but it may be configured to be capable of displaying various effect images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic It may be an EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that the entirety can be visually recognized by the player. A display screen 1571 shown in FIG. 59(a-2) displays a background display for effect represented by hatching diagonally downward to the left. The display screen 1571 shown in FIG. 59 is a horizontally long rectangle with a horizontal length longer than a vertical length, but it may also be a square. Further, although the display screen 1571 is a flat surface, it may be a curved surface.

Side lamps 144 capable of emitting nine colors of light are arranged on the left and right sides of the display screen 1571. The side lamp 144 is a decorative lamp for enlivening the game.

The middle and lower parts of the main body 101 are covered by a front door 102. Sound holes 181 are arranged on the left and right sides of the lower part of the front door 102. The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker 180 provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Furthermore, a medal payout opening 155 for paying out medals is arranged at the center of the lower part of the front door 102.

In the upper center of the front door 102, three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols (not shown in FIG. 59) arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored. In 59(a-2), L is written on the left reel 110, C is written on the middle reel 111, and R is written on the right reel 112. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

A suitable number of each pattern on the reel is printed on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute each reel 110-112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically, making a total of nine symbols visible. By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display means that variably displays a plurality of symbol combinations. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. Note that the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to those described here.

A backlight (not shown) is arranged on the back of each reel 110 to 112 to illuminate each symbol. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. Note that inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light emitter and a light receiver is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the two. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

A second image display device 158 is arranged on the left side of the three reels 110-112. The second image display device 158 is also a liquid crystal display device, but it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information, for example, a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic It may be an EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 also has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that the entirety can be visually recognized by the player. The display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 59(a-2) also displays a background display for effect represented by hatching diagonally downward to the left. The display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 59 is a vertically long rectangle whose vertical length is longer than its horizontal length, but it may also be a square. Further, the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 is smaller than the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157.

On the right side of the three reels 110 to 112, a stored number display 125 and a payout number display 127 are arranged. The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination.

An operation panel 120 is arranged below the three reels 110 to 112. The operation panel 120 is provided with a start lever, a medal slot, three stop buttons, a bet button, a settlement button, a chance button, a volume adjustment button, and the like. The start lever is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. The medal slot is an slot into which the player inserts medals when starting a game. The bet button is a button for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using a bet button, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from a medal slot, and the term "insertion" includes both. The three stop buttons are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. When the settlement button is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The chance button is a button provided for executing a predetermined performance. The volume adjustment button is a button for adjusting the volume of the speaker 180.

The front door 102 is provided with a key hole 140, and when a key is inserted into the key hole 140 and turned clockwise, the door is unlocked, and when turned counterclockwise, the door is locked. The slot machine 100 is provided with an open sensor (not shown) that detects when the front door 102 is opened.

FIG. 59(b-1) is a plan view of the slot machine 100 seen from above with the front door 102 opened to 90 degrees via a hinge (not shown) provided on the left side, and the bottom of the figure is It will be on the front side (player side). FIG. 59(b-2) shown below is a side view of the slot machine 100 seen from the left side with the front door 102 open to 90 degrees, and the right side of the figure is the front side.

The second image display device 158 disposed on the front door 102 is rotated together with the front door 102. As a result, in the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open to 90 degrees, the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 disposed on the main body 101 cannot be seen from the left side, but the front door 102 cannot be viewed from the left side. The display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 disposed in is visible. On the other hand, from the front side, the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 placed on the front door 102 cannot be seen, but the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 placed on the main body 101 cannot be seen. can do.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 59, the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the payout number display 127, the side lamp 144, and the speaker 180 correspond to an example of the notification means.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing various notification means when a door opening error is detected.

In FIG. 60, a first image display device 157, a second image display device 158, a payout number display 127, and a speaker 180 are illustrated as an example of the notification means.

FIG. 60(a) shown on the left side of the figure shows the state immediately after the front door 102 is opened.

The background display for effect represented by hatching diagonally downward to the left that was displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 and the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 59 disappears, and the respective display screens At 1571 and 1581, a background display for error notification is displayed in a single color (in this case, only white). Further, on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, a first error display ES10 "Error Occurrence" is displayed. This first error display ES10 is a blinking display that disappears momentarily and then repeats being displayed. In FIG. 60(a), diagonal lines are displayed at the four corners of the first error display ES10, which indicates that the first error display ES10 is repeatedly displayed by disappearing momentarily. (The same applies to other figures). The first error display ES10 is a type of error notification indicating that an error has been detected in the slot machine 100, but is a type of error notification in which it is impossible to specify what kind of error the detected error is. Furthermore, an error list display EL1 is also displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157. The error list display EL1 is always displayed.

Here, the contents of various errors listed in the error list display EL1 and how to clear the errors will be explained.

A door open error with an error code of E1 is notified when the front door 102 is in the open state. When the front door 102 is returned to the closed state, the error is canceled.

A hopper empty error with an error code of E2 is notified when there are no payout medals stored inside the slot machine 100 and no payout can be made. That is, a motor-driven medal discharging device is provided inside the slot machine 100, and during the medal dispensing operation, when the medal discharging device runs out of game medals, the payout switch that counts the medals to be dispensed is switched to a predetermined number. This notification is issued when the motor is not turned on even after one period of time has elapsed and the motor cannot be restored even after performing the restoration process of rotating the motor in the reverse direction. Either open the front door 102, replenish the medal ejection device with medals, and press the reset button provided inside the slot machine 100, or close the front door 102 and turn the key inserted in the key hole 140 to the left. The error will be cleared.

A hopper clogging error with an error code of E3 occurs when the medals in the medal dispensing device become clogged during the medal dispensing operation, and the medals do not pass through the dispensing switch within a predetermined second period of time, and the above recovery process is performed. will be notified if recovery is not possible. The error can be cleared by opening the front door 102, removing the jammed medals from the medal ejecting device, and pressing the reset button, or closing the front door 102 and turning the key inserted in the key hole 140 to the left. .

A medal auxiliary box full error with an error code of E4 is notified at the next game start when the medal auxiliary box installed inside the slot machine 100 is full. That is, a sensor is provided to detect when the medal auxiliary box is full, and a notification is issued when this sensor detects that the medal auxiliary box is full. The error can be canceled by opening the front door 102, taking out the medals from the medal auxiliary box, and pressing the reset button, or by closing the front door 102 and turning the key inserted into the keyhole 140 to the left.

A medal passing number error with an error code of E5 is notified when the medals inserted from the medal slot become jammed. That is, a first input switch and a second input switch are provided inside the slot machine 100 to count the medals inserted from the medal input slot, and when the front door 102 is in the closed state, the second input switch is installed. Notification is made when the closing switch is in the on state for a predetermined third period of time or more. Alternatively, the notification is also made when the number of medals that have passed through the first throw-in switch and the second throw-in switch and the number of medals that have passed through the second throw-in switch are outside the allowable range. Open the front door 102, remove any medals that are stuck in the medal passing path leading from the medal slot, and press the reset button, or close the front door 102 and turn the key inserted in the key hole 140 to the left. This will clear the error.

A medal passing time error with an error code of E6 occurs when the medals inserted through the medal slot become clogged, and as a result, the medals do not pass through the first input switch or the second input switch within a predetermined fourth time. You will be notified if this is not the case. Open the front door 102, remove any medals that are stuck in the medal passing path leading from the medal slot, and press the reset button, or close the front door 102 and turn the key inserted in the key hole 140 to the left. This will clear the error. If the error still cannot be cleared, turn off the power switch and turn it on, press the reset button above, or close the front door 102 and turn the key inserted in the key hole 140 to the left. good.

A medal passage confirmation error with an error code of E7 occurs when the first input switch is turned on for more than the fifth predetermined time period as a result of the medals inserted from the medal slot becoming jammed, etc. will be notified from time to time. Alternatively, the notification is also made when the first closing switch or the second closing switch is turned on at a time other than the predetermined sixth time that is set when the first closing switch is turned on. Open the front door 102, remove any medals that are stuck in the medal passing path leading from the medal slot, and press the reset button, or close the front door 102 and turn the key inserted in the key hole 140 to the left. This will clear the error. If the error still cannot be cleared, turn off the power switch and turn it on, press the reset button above, or close the front door 102 and turn the key inserted in the key hole 140 to the left. good.

A medal backflow error with an error code of E8 occurs when medals, etc. inserted from the medal slot flow in the opposite direction along the medal passage path, and the first input switch and the second input switch are passed through in a manner other than the specified order. You will be notified if passing is detected. The error can be cleared by opening the front door 102, removing any medals stuck in the medal passing path, and pressing the reset button, or closing the front door 102 and turning the key inserted in the key hole 140 to the left. be done. If the error still cannot be cleared, turn off the power switch and turn it on, press the reset button above, or close the front door 102 and turn the key inserted in the key hole 140 to the left. good.

The slot machine 100 is provided with an external centralized terminal board that outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device (hall computer). When the above-described eight types of errors are detected, they are output from the external centralized terminal board to an external device, allowing the game parlor to notice that an error has occurred. The signal output from the external centralized terminal board to the external device includes information (for example, an error code) that can identify the detected error.

In addition, for errors with error codes E2 to E8, the error cannot be canceled unless the front door 102 is opened, and if the clerk opens the front door 102 to 90 degrees, even the clerk who is far away on the left can The display screen 1581 of the two-image display device 158 can be visually recognized, and the display screen 1581 can also be captured by the surveillance camera installed on the left side, indicating that the error cancellation operation is being performed. Furthermore, even if the front door 102 is opened illegally, even a clerk far away on the left side can see the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158, and the surveillance camera installed on the left side can also see the display screen 1581. 1581, and may be able to realize that the front door 102 has been opened illegally.

The player does not know which error has occurred among the eight errors displayed in the error list display EL1 just by looking at the first error display ES indicating "Error Occurrence." For example, it is impossible to determine whether it is a door open error or a hopper empty error. Here, for those who illegally open the front door 102 in order to commit a fraudulent act, the fact that the door opening error is not reported makes them anxious that they may have done something else. , may be able to deter fraudulent behavior.

On the other hand, if an error occurs that the player did not intend (an error other than a door opening error), the player must either press the reset button provided inside the slot machine 100 or press the reset button provided inside the slot machine 100 to clear the error. Since he needs the key, he has no choice but to call the clerk at the game store. Therefore, even if it is not possible to identify the error that has occurred, if the customer only knows that an error has occurred, there is a possibility that a store clerk will be called. You can also expect to have a store clerk called to find out what the error is that has occurred. Furthermore, the first error display ES is also displayed when the clerk opens the front door 102 using the key, but since the clerk knows that the error that has occurred is a door opening error, There is no need to go to the trouble of notifying that the error is a door opening error. Considering these facts, it is sufficient to notify the minimum necessary information such as the first error display ES10.

Furthermore, the error list display EL1 displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 shown in FIG. 60(a) only displays error codes and error names; This is not a display that specifies E1 or door opening error).

The display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 also displays the words "Error Occurrence". This character display has the same content as the first error display ES10, but is similar in size and smaller in size than the first error display ES10. Hereinafter, the character display "Error Occurrence" displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 will be referred to as a first error display ES10'. The first error display ES10' displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 60(a) is also a display that blinks in synchronization with the blinking of the first error display ES10, and This is a type of error notification indicating that an error has been detected in the machine 100, but it is a type of error notification in which it is impossible to specify what kind of error the detected error is.

Furthermore, a list display with the same contents as the error list display EL1 is also displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158. This list display is similar in size and smaller than the error list display EL1. Hereinafter, the list display displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 will be referred to as the same content error list display EL1'. Similar to the error list display EL1, the same content error list display EL1' displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 60(a) is always displayed, and the error code and error name are displayed. It is not a display that specifies a specific error code or error name.

The speaker 180 shown in FIG. 60(a) outputs a first error sound such as "Error Occurrence", but does not output a sound such as "Door Opening Error". The first error sound is also a type of error notification indicating that an error has been detected in the slot machine 100, but is a type of error notification in which it is impossible to specify what kind of error the detected error is.

As explained above, a door opening error occurs in the error list display EL1 displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, in the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158, and in the speaker 180. There was no error notification to specify what had happened. On the other hand, the first same-content error display ES10' displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 and the first error sound from the speaker 180 notify that some kind of error has occurred.

Further, the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 60(a) is in a non-display state. When there is a payout during the game, the payout number display 127 displays a number representing the number of medals to be paid out. However, when the front door 102 is opened, the number of medals paid out The displayed numbers disappear and the display switches to nothing. Furthermore, while the first error display ES10 or the first error display ES10' with the same content is displayed on the payout number display 127, or while the first error sound is being output, an error does not occur in the slot machine 100. Er may be displayed as a type of error notification indicating that the error has been detected.

60(b) shown on the right side of FIG. 60, the first error display ES10 disappears from the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, and the first error display ES10 with the same contents disappears from the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158. ' is shown after it disappears.

Both the first error display ES10 and the first error display ES10' with the same content disappear from the display screens 1571 and 1581 at the same timing. The error list display EL1 is still constantly displayed on the display screen 1571 where the first error display ES10 has disappeared. When the first error display ES10 disappears, a display specifying the error that has occurred is displayed in the error list display EL1. Here, as an error display specifying the door opening error, E1 and the character display of the door opening error are surrounded by a thick rectangular frame. Hereinafter, the error display that specifies the door opening error will be referred to as a second error display. Furthermore, in the error list display EL1, the square bold frame display surrounding E1 and the character display of door open error is referred to as a display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display. The display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display corresponds to a type of error notification that can specify that the error detected in the slot machine 100 is a door opening error.

Further, the same content error list display EL1' is still constantly displayed on the display screen 1581 where the first same content error display ES10' has disappeared. When the first same-content error display ES10' disappears, a display identifying the error that has occurred is also performed in the same-content error list display EL1'. Here, as an error display specifying the door opening error, E1 and the character display of the door opening error are surrounded by a thick rectangular frame. Hereinafter, the error display that specifies the door opening error on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 will be referred to as a second same-content error display. In addition, in the same content error list display EL1', the square bold frame display surrounding the character display of E1 and door open error is referred to as a display ES21' in the first display mode of the second same content error display. The display ES21' of the second same-content error display in the first display mode also corresponds to a type of error notification that can specify that the error detected in the slot machine 100 is a door opening error.

In addition, whether the display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display or the display ES21' in the first display mode of the second error display with the same content is displayed, the text display of E1 and door open error blinks. It's okay. Alternatively, the eight error codes may be displayed separately from the list display, and only the E1 error code may be displayed in the first display mode of the second error display ES21 or the first display mode of the second error display with the same content. The display may be performed together with the display ES21'.

Further, the speaker 180 shown in FIG. 60(b) outputs a second error sound such as "door opening error", and the audio output also indicates that the error detected in the slot machine 100 is a door opening error. becomes identifiable. That is, the second error sound also corresponds to a type of error notification that can identify that the error detected in the slot machine 100 is a door opening error.

Note that the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 60(b) remains in a non-display state, and no error notification is performed.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing the state of various notification means after the display ES21 of the second error display in the first display mode and the display ES21' of the second error display with the same content in the first display mode are started.

Also in FIG. 61, the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the payout number display 127, and the speaker 180 are illustrated as an example of the notification means.

FIG. 61(a) shown on the left side of the figure shows a state continued from FIG. 60(b). 61 shows the aspect ratio (14:25) of the display screen 1571 on the first image display device 157, and also shows the aspect ratio (11:6) of the display screen 1581 on the second image display device 158. It is shown. The aspect ratios of both are expressed on the same scale, and the vertical length of the horizontally long display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 is longer than the vertical length of the vertically long display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158. The length is longer.

On the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 shown in FIG. 61(a), the error list display EL1 is still always displayed, and the display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display is also displayed. Furthermore, in the same area as the area where the first error display ES10 "Error Occurrence" shown in FIG. Character display is displayed. This "door error" is an abbreviation for door opening error, corresponds to an error display that specifies a door opening error, and corresponds to a type of second error display. Hereinafter, the character display "Door Error" will be referred to as display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display. The display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display blinks while the display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display is displayed. Therefore, there are two types of display modes for the second error display, and there is a period in which the displays ES21 and ES22 of these two types of display modes are executed overlappingly. Note that the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display may be performed by changing the abbreviation display such as "Door Error" to a formal display such as "Door Open Error". FIG. 61(a) also shows the aspect ratio (3:10) of the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display. This aspect ratio is expressed on the same scale as the aspect ratio of the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, and the display according to the second display mode of the second error display with respect to the horizontal length of the display screen 1571. The lateral length ratio of ES22 is 10/25. Further, the ratio of the vertical length of the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display to the vertical length of the display screen 1571 is 3/14.

The same content error list display EL1' is still always displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 61(a), and the display ES21' of the second same content error display in the first display mode is also displayed. Furthermore, in the same area where the first error display ES10' with the same content "Error Occurrence" shown in FIG. 60(a) was displayed (the area to the right of the display area of the error list display EL1' with the same content) , the text "Door Error" is displayed, which has the same content as the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display displayed on the display screen 1581 of the first image display device 158. Hereinafter, the character display "DOOR ERROR" on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 will be referred to as display ES22' in the second display mode of the second error display with the same content. The display ES22' in the second display mode of the second error display with the same content is also displayed during the display ES21' in the first display mode of the second error display with the same content. The display blinks in synchronization with the blinking display. Therefore, there are two types of display modes for the second error display with the same content, and these two types of display modes ES21' and ES22' have periods in which they are executed overlappingly. Note that the abbreviated display such as "Door Error" may be changed to a formal display such as "Door Open Error", and the display ES22' in the second display mode of the second error display with the same content may be performed. FIG. 61(a) also shows the aspect ratio (0.9:3) of the display ES22' in the second display mode of the second error display with the same content. This aspect ratio is expressed in the same scale as the aspect ratio of the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158, and the second display mode of the second same content error display is expressed with respect to the horizontal length of the display screen 1581. The ratio of the horizontal length of the display ES22' is 3/6. Further, the ratio of the vertical length of the display ES22' in the second display mode of the second error display with the same content to the vertical length of the display screen 1581 is 0.9/11. Note that the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display is larger than the display ES22' in the second display mode of the second error display with the same content.

As is clear from FIG. 61(a), the horizontal direction from the end of the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 to the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display displayed on the display screen 1571 is The distance is longer than the distance in the horizontal direction from the end of the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 to the display ES22' of the second same-content error display in the second display mode displayed on the display screen 1581. Further, the vertical distance from the end of the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 to the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display displayed on the display screen 1571 is also the same as that of the second image display device 157. It is longer than the vertical distance from the end of the display screen 1581 to the display ES22' in the second display mode of the second same content error display displayed on the display screen 1581. Note that the distance in the horizontal direction and the distance in the vertical direction may be shortened. Previously, even if an error was displayed on one display screen, the player might not notice, but by displaying the error on a different display screen, it is possible to make the player notice that an error has occurred. There are cases where it is possible. Furthermore, by making the distance from the edge of the display screen to the error display different for each display screen, it may be easier for the player to notice that an error has occurred. In particular, both the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display and the display ES22' in the second display mode of the second error display with the same content are horizontally long displays, so the horizontal distance is By being different, it is possible to give different impressions even when displaying the same content, making it easier to attract the player's attention. For example, the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 has a small but congested-looking display that tends to attract the player's attention.

Further, as is clear from FIG. 61(a), the display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 is the display screen of the second image display device 158. This is a larger display than the display ES21' in the first display mode of the second same-content error display displayed at 1581.

The speaker 180 shown in FIG. 61(a) continues to output a sound such as "door open error" which is the second error sound. Note that the second error sound may be an audio output such as "door error".

The payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 61(a) still remains in a hidden state, and no error notification is made.

FIG. 61(b) shown on the right side of FIG. 61 shows the state after the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display and the display ES22' in the second display mode of the second error display with the same contents have started. It is shown.

The error list display EL1 is still constantly displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 shown in FIG. 61(b), and the display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display is also displayed. Furthermore, in the area where the display ES22 according to the second display mode of the second error display was displayed, the words "Door is open" are displayed in a frame with a certain background color (here, gray). There is. This frame display displaying the words "Door is open" corresponds to a display representing the state of the slot machine 100 in which a door opening error has occurred, and is hereinafter referred to as a state display SS10. The status display SS10 can also be seen as a form of error display. The size of the status display SS10 is larger than the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display. Further, while the display ES22 according to the second display mode of the second error display is a blinking display, the status display SS10 is a lighting display that continues to be lit without momentarily disappearing. The status display SS10 and the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display are displayed alternately.

The same content error list display EL1' is still always displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 61(b), and the display ES21' of the second same content error display in the first display mode is also displayed. Further, in the area where the display ES22' according to the second display mode of the second error display with the same content was displayed, a "door door" display with the same content as the status display SS10 displayed on the display screen 1581 of the first image display device 158 is displayed. is open.'' is displayed. This character display is also a frame display displayed within a frame with a certain background color (here, gray). Hereinafter, this frame display in which the words "door is open" are displayed will be referred to as the same content status display SS10'. The content status display SS10' can also be seen as a form of error display. The background color of the same content status display SS10' and the background color of the status display SS10 are the same color, but may be different colors. The size of the same content status display SS10' is larger than the display ES22' in the second display mode of the second same content error display. Further, the same content status display SS10' and the display ES22' in the second display mode of the second same content error display are displayed alternately.

The speaker 180 shown in FIG. 61(b) outputs an audio status notification sound such as "The door is open," and the audio output also reports the status of the slot machine 100 in which the door opening error has occurred. . The speaker 180 alternately outputs the voice "The door is open" (status notification sound) and the voice "Door opening error" (second error sound).

The payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 61(b) still remains in a hidden state, and no error notification is made.

The notification mode after the door opening error described above is detected will be explained again using a timing chart.

FIG. 62 is a timing chart of the notification mode after the door opening error is detected. In FIG. 62, time passes from left to right in the diagram.

FIG. 62 shows notification modes in the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the speaker 180, and the payout number display 127, respectively.

First, a door opening error is detected by an opening sensor. When a door opening error is detected, the first image display device 157 starts displaying a first error display ES10 such as "Error Occurred" and an error list display EL1, and the second image display device 158 also displays a first error display ES10 such as "Error Occurred". 1. Display of the same content error display ES10' and the same content error list display EL1' is started. Further, the speaker 180 outputs a first error sound such as "Error Occurrence". Note that the payout number display 127 is in a non-display state in which nothing is displayed.

The display of the first error display ES10, the error list display EL1, the first error display ES10', the error list EL1', and the output of the first error sound are as follows: They are performed at the same timing, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the display of the first error display ES10, the display of the first error display ES10' with the same content, and the output of the first error sound end at the same timing. On the other hand, the display of the error list display EL1 and the display of the same content error list display EL1' continue to be displayed even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. The error list display EL1 and the same error list display EL1' continue to be displayed until the door open error is canceled.

In the first image display device 157, when the display of the first error display ES10 is finished, display of the display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display that can identify the door opening error is started. The display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display continues to be displayed until the door opening error is canceled. Note that the display ES21 according to the first display mode of the second error display is a lit display, but it may also be a display in which a square thick frame display blinks. The flashing display will be repeated.

In the second image display device 158, when the display of the first error display ES10' with the same content is finished, display of the display ES21' in the first display mode of the second error display with the same content that can identify the door opening error is started. . The display ES21' of the second same-content error display in the first display mode also continues to be displayed until the door opening error is canceled. Note that the display ES21' in the first display mode of the second error display with the same content is also a lit display, but it may also be a display in which a square thick frame display blinks, and in this case, the door open error is canceled. The blinking display will be repeated until the

When the speaker 180 finishes outputting the first error sound, it then starts outputting a second error sound such as "door open error". Note that the payout number display 127 remains in a non-displayed state.

In the first image display device 157, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of displaying the display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display, the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display is displayed; A status display SS10 such as "Door is open" is displayed alternately. That is, after the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display is displayed blinking, the status display SS10 is displayed on and off, the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display is displayed blinking again, and so on. The alternate display is repeated until the door open error is cleared. In this alternate display, the display period of the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display and the display period of the status display SS10 are the same length, but the former display period is long and the latter display period is short. Alternatively, on the contrary, the former display period may be short and the latter display period may be long.

In the second image display device 158, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the display of the display ES21' in the first display mode of the second error display with the same content is started, the second image display device 158 displays the display with the second display mode of the second error display with the same content. After ES22' is displayed blinking, the same content status display SS10' is lit up, and the display ES22' in the second display mode of the second same content error display is blinked again. Repeats until the error is cleared. The alternate display on the second image display device 158 is performed in synchronization with the alternate display on the first image display device 157.

In the speaker 180, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the output of the second error sound such as "Door open error" has been started, the second error sound is switched to a status notification sound such as "Door is open". This switching timing is synchronized with the timing at which the first image display device 157 starts displaying the status display. The status notification sound and the second error sound are output alternately until the door opening error is canceled. The output switching timing of the status notification sound and the second error sound is also synchronized with the display switching timing of the display ES22 in the second display mode of the status display and the second error display on the first image display device 157.

In the example shown in FIG. 62, the payout number display 127 remains hidden until the door opening error is canceled.

In addition, although the display name on the second image display device 158 was explained with the words "same content" to distinguish the two from each other in comparison to the display name on the first image display device 157, since the display content is the same, , both indications may be handled without distinction.

Additionally, the speaker 180 outputs three different sounds: a first error sound, a second error sound, and a status notification sound, but the same sound is consistently output from the stage when the door opening error is detected. You may also do so. For example, the first error sound may continue to be output, the second error sound may continue to be output, or the status notification sound may continue to be output from the time the door opening error is detected until the error is resolved. However, an alarm sound other than audio may continue to be output.

FIG. 63 is a diagram showing various notification means when an empty hopper error with an error code of E2 is detected.

Similarly to FIG. 60, FIG. 63 also shows a first image display device 157, a second image display device 158, a payout number display 127, and a speaker 180 as an example of the notification means. Note that the explanation may be omitted for content that overlaps with the content explained using FIG. 60.

FIG. 63(a) shown on the left side of the figure shows the situation immediately after the hopper empty error is detected.

On the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 and the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 63(a), a background display for error notification expressed in a single color (here, solid white) is displayed. ing. Further, on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, a first error display ES10 indicating "Error Occurrence" is blinking. Furthermore, although the error list display EL1 is constantly displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, no error display that can identify that the error that has occurred is an empty hopper error is displayed yet. .

Also on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 63(a), a first error display ES10' with the same content "Error Occurrence" is blinking in synchronization with the blinking display of the first error display ES10. There is. Furthermore, the same content error list display EL1' is also displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158, but no error display is displayed that can identify that the error that has occurred is an empty hopper error. .

The speaker 180 shown in FIG. 63(a) outputs the first error sound such as "Error Occurrence", but does not output the sound "Hopper Empty Error".

The payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 63(a) is different from the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 60(a) in that it displays E2, which is the error code of the detected error. Even a person who does not remember the error code can know the error name by looking at the error list display EL1 or the same content error list display EL1'. Therefore, it can be said that the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 63(a) displays an error display that can identify the hopper empty error. However, since the payout number display 127 displays the number of medals, there is a high possibility that anyone who does not know that an error display is displayed on the payout number display 127 will not notice it. The store clerk notices. Immediately after the occurrence of a hopper empty error, the error display on the payout number display 127 that can identify that the error that has occurred is a hopper empty error can be said to be an error display for the store clerk, but even if the player does not know it. The clerk can immediately identify that the error that has occurred is a hopper empty error.

63(b) shown on the right side of FIG. 63, the first error display ES10 disappears from the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, and the first error display ES10 with the same contents disappears from the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158. ' is shown after it disappears.

Both the first error display ES10 and the first error display ES10' with the same content disappear from the display screens 1571 and 1581 at the same timing. The error list display EL1 is still constantly displayed on the display screen 1571 where the first error display ES10 has disappeared. When the first error display ES10 disappears, a display specifying the error that has occurred is displayed in the error list display EL1. Here, as an error display for specifying the hopper empty error, the character display E2 and the hopper empty error are surrounded by a thick rectangular frame. Hereinafter, the error display specifying the hopper empty error will be referred to as a third error display ES30. The display mode of the third error display ES30 is such that the character display of E2 and the hopper empty error displayed in the error list display EL1 are surrounded by a thick rectangular frame.

Further, the same content error list display EL1' is still constantly displayed on the display screen 1581 where the first same content error display ES10' has disappeared. When the first same-content error display ES10' disappears, a display identifying the error that has occurred is also performed in the same-content error list display EL1'. Here again, as an error display specifying the hopper empty error, the character display E2 and the hopper empty error are surrounded by a thick rectangular frame. Hereinafter, the error display that specifies the hopper empty error on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 will be referred to as a third error display ES30'. The display mode of the third same-content error display ES30' is such that the text display of E2 and hopper empty error displayed in the same-content error list display EL1' is surrounded by a thick rectangular frame.

It should be noted that whether the third error display ES30 or the third error display ES30' with the same content is set, the display may be a display in which the characters E2 and hopper empty error are blinked. Alternatively, the eight error codes can be displayed separately from the list display, and as a different display mode of the third error display ES30 or the third error display ES30' with the same content, a display in which only the E3 error code blinks can be displayed with a thick rectangular frame. It may also be performed together with display in the display mode surrounded by .

Further, the speaker 180 shown in FIG. 63(b) outputs a third error sound such as "hopper empty error", and the audio output also indicates that the error detected in the slot machine 100 is a hopper empty error. becomes identifiable. That is, the third error sound also corresponds to a type of error notification that can specify that the error detected in the slot machine 100 is a hopper empty error.

Note that the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 63(b) continues to display E2, which is the error code of the hopper empty error.

FIG. 64 is a diagram showing the states of various notification means after the third error display ES30 and the third same-content error display ES30' are started.

Also in FIG. 64, the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the payout number display 127, and the speaker 180 are illustrated as an example of the notification means.

FIG. 64(a) shown on the left side of the figure shows a situation continued from FIG. 63(b).

The error list display EL1 is still constantly displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 shown in FIG. 64(a), and the third error display ES30 is also displayed. Furthermore, in the same area as the area where the first error display ES10 "Error Occurrence" shown in FIG. ” is displayed. This character display "Please call the store clerk" corresponds to a type of instruction notification indicating an instruction to the player. Hereinafter, the character display "Please call a store clerk" will be referred to as an instruction display IS10. This instruction display IS10 blinks while the third error display ES30 is displayed. Therefore, there is a period in which the instruction display IS10 and the third error display ES30 are executed overlappingly.

On the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 64(a), the same content error list display EL1' is still always displayed, and the third same content error display ES30' is also displayed. Furthermore, in the same area where the first error display ES10' with the same content "Error Occurrence" shown in FIG. 63(a) was displayed (the area to the right of the display area of the error list display EL1' with the same content) , the text "Please call a store clerk" is displayed, which is the same as the instruction display IS10 displayed on the display screen 1581 of the first image display device 158. Hereinafter, the character display "Please call a store clerk" on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 will be referred to as the same content instruction display IS10'. The same content instruction display IS10' also flashes in synchronization with the blinking display of the instruction display IS10 while the third same content error display ES30' is displayed. Therefore, there is a period in which the same content instruction display IS10' and the third same content error display ES30' are executed overlappingly.

The speaker 180 shown in FIG. 64(a) outputs an instruction notification sound such as "Please call the store clerk." That is, the third error sound is switched to the instruction notification sound. Note that even if the instruction display IS10 is displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, the third error sound may be continuously output.

The payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 64(a) still displays E2, which is the error code for the hopper empty error.

FIG. 64(b) shown on the right side of FIG. 64 shows the state after the instruction display IS10 and the content instruction display IS10' have started to be displayed.

The error list display EL1 is still constantly displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 shown in FIG. 64(b), and the third error display ES30 is also displayed. Further, in the area where the instruction display IS10 was displayed, the words "Please replenish medals and press the reset switch" are displayed in a frame with a certain background color (here, gray). This frame display with the words "Please replenish medals and press the reset switch" corresponds to an explanation notification explaining how to cancel the hopper empty error that has occurred, and will be referred to as the first error cancellation explanation display RS10 below. to be called. The first error release explanation display RS10 can also be seen as one form of error display. Further, the first error release explanation display RS10 can also be seen as a form of error display that can specify that the error that has occurred is an empty hopper error. Furthermore, the size of the first error cancellation explanation display RS10 is about the same as the size of the instruction display IS10, but while the instruction display IS10 is a blinking display, the first error cancellation explanation display RS10 is a lighting display. be. This is because the first error release explanation display RS10 has more characters displayed than the instruction display IS10, so it is displayed as a lit display so that it can be read clearly. The first error release explanation display RS10 and the instruction display IS10 are displayed alternately. Note that the first error cancellation explanation display RS10 may be displayed larger than the instruction display IS10.

Also on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 64(b), the same content error list display EL1' is still always displayed, and the second same content error display is displayed in the first display mode ES21'. is also displayed. Furthermore, in the area where the display ES22' according to the second display mode of the second error display with the same content was displayed, the same content as the first error cancellation explanation display RS10 displayed on the display screen 1581 of the first image display device 158 is displayed. The message ``Please replenish medals and press the reset switch'' is displayed. This character display is also a frame display displayed within a frame with a certain background color (here, gray). Hereinafter, this frame display in which the words "Please replenish medals and press the reset switch" are displayed will be referred to as a first same-content error release explanation display RS10'. The first same-content error cancellation explanation display RS10' can be seen as a form of error display, or it can also be seen as a form of error display that can specify that the error that has occurred is a hopper empty error. Although the background color of the first same content error cancellation explanation display RS10' and the background color of the same content instruction display IS10' are different colors, they may be the same color. Further, the size of the first same-content error cancellation explanation display RS10' is about the same as the size of the same-content instruction display IS10', but whereas the same-content instruction display IS10' was a blinking display, the first The same content error release explanation display RS10' is a lighting display. The first same content error cancellation explanation display RS10' and the same content instruction display IS10' are displayed alternately. Note that the first same content error cancellation explanation display RS10' may be displayed larger than the same content instruction display IS10'.

The speaker 180 shown in FIG. 64(b) provides an audio explanation of how to clear the error, such as "Please replenish medals and press the reset switch." Hereinafter, this sound will be referred to as the first error release explanation notification sound. The speaker 180 alternately outputs a first error release explanation notification sound and an instruction notification sound such as "Please call the store clerk." Note that the speaker 180 may output only the instruction notification sound without outputting the first error cancellation explanation notification sound.

The payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 64(a) still displays E2, which is the error code for the hopper empty error.

The notification mode after the hopper empty error described above is detected will be explained again using a timing chart.

FIG. 65 is a timing chart of the notification mode after the hopper empty error is detected. In this FIG. 65 as well, time passes from left to right in the figure, and the notification modes in each of the first image display device 157, second image display device 158, speaker 180, and payout number display 127 are described. ing.

First, a hopper empty error is detected. When the hopper empty error is detected, the first image display device 157 starts displaying a first error display ES10 saying "Error Occurred" and error list display EL1, and the second image display device 158 also starts displaying a first error display ES10 saying "Error Occurred". 1. Display of the same content error display ES10' and the same content error list display EL1' is started. Further, the speaker 180 outputs a first error sound such as "Error Occurrence". Further, when a hopper empty error is detected, the payout number display 127 displays the error code (here, E2) of the error that has occurred. Start displaying the first error display ES10, start displaying the error list display EL1, start displaying the first error display ES10' with the same content, start displaying the error list display EL1' with the same content, start outputting the first error sound, and payout. The display of the error code on the number of sheets display 127 is performed at the same timing, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the first error display ES10 is displayed, the first error display ES10' with the same content is displayed, and the first error sound is output. ends at the same timing. On the other hand, the display of the error list display EL1, the display of the same content error list display EL1', and the display of the error code on the payout number display 127 continue to be displayed even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. The display of the error list display EL1 and the display of the same content error list display EL1' continue to be displayed until the hopper empty error is canceled. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 65, the error code on the payout number display 127 continues to be displayed until the hopper empty error is canceled.

Note that among the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the speaker 180, and the payout number display 127, the payout number display 127 may start reporting the error code the fastest. As described above, the notification of the error code on the payout number display 127 can be said to be an error display for the clerk, but the clerk may be notified as soon as possible that the hopper empty error has occurred.

In the first image display device 157, when the display of the first error display ES10 is finished, display of a third error display ES30 that allows identification of the hopper empty error is started. This third error display ES30 continues to be displayed until the hopper empty error is canceled. Note that the third error display ES30 is a lit display, but it may also be a display with a blinking square thick frame. In this case, the blinking display will be repeated until the hopper empty error is cleared. Become.

In the second image display device 158, when the display of the first error display ES10' with the same content ends, display of the third error display ES30' with the same content, which allows the hopper empty error to be specified, starts to be displayed. This third error display ES30' also continues to be displayed until the hopper empty error is canceled. Note that the third error display ES30' with the same content is also a lit display, but it may also be a display with a square thick frame that blinks. In this case, the blinking display is repeated until the hopper empty error is cleared. It will be.

When the output of the first error sound is finished, the speaker 180 starts outputting a third error sound such as "hopper empty error". Note that the error code (E2) of the hopper empty error continues to be displayed on the payout number display 127.

On the first image display device 157, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the third error display ES30 started to be displayed, an instruction display IS10 such as "Please call the clerk" and "Please replenish medals and press the reset switch" are displayed. ” and the first error cancellation explanation display RS10 are alternately displayed. That is, after the instruction display IS10 is displayed blinking, the first error cancellation explanation display RS10 is displayed lit, the instruction display IS10 is displayed blinking again, and so on.This alternating display is repeated until the hopper empty error is canceled. . In this alternate display, the display period of the instruction display IS10 and the display period of the first error cancellation explanation display RS10 are the same length, but the former may be longer and the latter may be shorter, or the opposite Furthermore, the former display period may be short and the latter display period may be long.

In the second image display device 158, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the third error display ES30' started to be displayed, the instruction display IS10' blinks, and then the first error cancellation explanation The display RS10' is lit up, the same content instruction display IS10' is displayed blinking again, and so on, and so on, and so forth, and so on.This alternate display is repeated until the hopper empty error is cleared. The alternate display on the second image display device 158 is performed in synchronization with the alternate display on the first image display device 157.

When the speaker 180 starts outputting the third error sound such as "hopper empty error" and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the third error sound is switched to an instruction notification sound such as "please call a clerk." This switching timing is synchronized with the timing at which the first image display device 157 starts displaying the instruction display. Furthermore, in synchronization with the timing at which the first error release explanation display RS10 is started on the first image display device 157, a first error release explanation message such as "Please replenish medals and press the reset switch" is also sent from the speaker 180. Sound is output. The speaker 180 outputs an instruction notification sound and a first error cancellation explanation notification sound alternately until the hopper empty error is canceled. The output switching timing of the instruction notification sound and the first error cancellation explanation notification sound is also synchronized with the display switching timing of the instruction display IS10 and the first error cancellation explanation display RS10 on the first image display device 157.

In addition, although the display name on the second image display device 158 has been described here with the words "same content" attached to the display name on the first image display device 157 to distinguish between the two, it is possible that the display content is the same. Therefore, both indications may be treated without distinction.

Furthermore, the speaker 180 outputs four different sounds: a first error sound, a third error sound, an instruction notification sound, and a first error cancellation explanation notification sound, but when the hopper empty error is detected, The same sound may be output consistently from the initial stage. For example, the first error sound may continue to be output, the third error sound may continue to be output, or the instruction notification sound may continue to be output from the time the hopper empty error is detected until the error is resolved. However, the first error release explanation notification sound may continue to be output, or an alarm sound other than voice may continue to be output.

FIG. 66 is a diagram showing various notification means when a medal passing confirmation error with an error code of E7 is detected.

Similarly to FIG. 63, FIG. 66 also shows a first image display device 157, a second image display device 158, a payout number display 127, and a speaker 180 as an example of the notification means. Note that the description of contents that overlap with those described using FIG. 63 may be omitted.

FIG. 66(a) shown on the left side of the figure shows the situation immediately after the medal passage confirmation error is detected.

On the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 and the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 66(a), a background display for error notification expressed in a single color (here, solid white) is displayed. ing. Further, on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, a first error display ES10 indicating "Error Occurrence" is blinking. Furthermore, although the error list display EL1 is constantly displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, an error display that can identify that the error that has occurred is a medal passage confirmation error is not yet displayed. do not have.

Also on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 66(a), a first error display ES10' with the same content "Error Occurrence" is blinking in synchronization with the blinking display of the first error display ES10. There is. Furthermore, the same error list display EL1' is displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158, but no error display is displayed that can identify that the error that has occurred is a medal passage confirmation error. do not have.

The speaker 180 shown in FIG. 66(a) outputs the first error sound such as "Error Occurrence", but does not output the sound "Medal Passage Confirmation Error".

The payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 66(a) displays E7, which is the error code of the detected error.

66(b) shown on the right side of FIG. 66, the first error display ES10 disappears from the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, and the first error display ES10 with the same contents disappears from the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158. ' is shown after it disappears.

Both the first error display ES10 and the first error display ES10' with the same content disappear from the display screens 1571 and 1581 at the same timing. The error list display EL1 is still constantly displayed on the display screen 1571 where the first error display ES10 has disappeared. When the first error display ES10 disappears, a display specifying the error that has occurred is displayed in the error list display EL1. Here, as an error display specifying the medal passage confirmation error, E7 and the text display of medal passage confirmation error are surrounded by a thick rectangular frame. Hereinafter, the error display that specifies the medal passage confirmation error will be referred to as a fourth error display ES40. The display mode of the fourth error display ES40 is such that the text display of E7 and the medal passage confirmation error displayed in the error list display EL1 is surrounded by a thick rectangular frame.

Further, the same content error list display EL1' is still constantly displayed on the display screen 1581 where the first same content error display ES10' has disappeared. When the first same-content error display ES10' disappears, a display identifying the error that has occurred is also performed in the same-content error list display EL1'. Here again, as an error display specifying the medal passage confirmation error, the character display E7 and the medal passage confirmation error are surrounded by a thick rectangular frame. Hereinafter, the error display that specifies the medal passage confirmation error on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 will be referred to as a fourth error display ES40'. The display mode of the fourth same-content error display ES40' is such that the character display of E7 and medal passage confirmation error displayed in the same-content error list display EL1' is surrounded by a thick rectangular frame.

In addition, whether the fourth error display ES40 or the fourth error display E70' with the same content is displayed, the display may be such that the characters E7 and the medal passage confirmation error are blinked. Alternatively, the eight error codes can be displayed separately from the list display, and as a different display mode for the fourth error display ES40 or the fourth error display E70' with the same content, a display in which only the E7 error code blinks can be displayed with a thick rectangular frame. It may also be performed together with display in the display mode surrounded by .

Further, the speaker 180 shown in FIG. 66(b) outputs a fourth error sound such as "Medal passing confirmation error", and the audio output also indicates that the error detected in the slot machine 100 is a medal passing confirmation error. It becomes possible to specify something. That is, the fourth error sound also corresponds to a type of error notification that can specify that the error detected in the slot machine 100 is a medal passage confirmation error.

Note that the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 66(b) continues to display E7, which is the error code for the medal passage confirmation error.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing the state of various notification means after the fourth error display ES40 and the fourth error display ES40' of the same content are started.

Also in FIG. 67, the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the payout number display 127, and the speaker 180 are illustrated as an example of the notification means.

FIG. 67(a) shown on the left side of the figure shows a state continued from FIG. 66(b).

The error list display EL1 is still constantly displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 shown in FIG. 67(a), and the fourth error display ES40 is also displayed. Furthermore, in the same area where the first error display ES10 "Error Occurrence" shown in FIG. 67(a) was displayed (the area to the right of the display area of the error list display EL1), "Please call a store clerk" is displayed. An instruction display IS10 is blinking. The instruction display IS10 here also has a period in which it is executed overlappingly with the fourth error display ES40.

On the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 67(a), the same content error list display EL1' is still always displayed, and the fourth same content error display ES40' is also displayed. Furthermore, in the same area where the first error display ES10' with the same content "Error occurrence" shown in FIG. 66(a) was displayed (the area to the right of the display area of the error list display EL1' with the same content). , an instruction display IS10' having the same content as the instruction display IS10 displayed on the display screen 1581 of the first image display device 158, such as "Please call a store clerk", is displayed. This same content instruction display IS10' also flashes in synchronization with the blinking display of the instruction display IS10 while the fourth same content error display ES40' is displayed. Therefore, there is a period in which the same content instruction display IS10' and the fourth same content error display ES40' are executed overlappingly.

The speaker 180 shown in FIG. 67(a) outputs an instruction notification sound such as "Please call the store clerk." That is, the third error sound is switched to the instruction notification sound. Note that even if the instruction display IS10 is displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, the third error sound may be continuously output.

The payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 67(a) still displays E7, which is the error code for the medal passage confirmation error.

FIG. 67(b) shown on the right side of FIG. 67 shows the state after the instruction display IS10 and the content instruction display IS10' have started to be displayed.

The error list display EL1 is still constantly displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 shown in FIG. 67(b), and the fourth error display ES40 is also displayed. Further, in the area where the instruction display IS10 was displayed, the words "Please remove the medal and press the reset switch" are displayed in a frame with a certain background color (here, gray). This frame display with the words "Please remove the medal and press the reset switch" corresponds to an explanation notification explaining how to cancel the medal passage confirmation error that has occurred, and is hereinafter referred to as the second error cancellation explanation display RS20. . Like the first error cancellation explanation display RS10, the second error cancellation explanation display RS20 can also be seen as a form of error display, and is also a form of error display that can identify that the error that has occurred is a medal passage confirmation error. It can also be seen as a mode. Furthermore, the size of the second error cancellation explanation display RS20 is about the same as the size of the instruction display IS10, but whereas the instruction display IS10 is a blinking display, the second error cancellation explanation display RS20 is also similar to the first error cancellation explanation display RS20. Like the error release explanation display RS10, the display is illuminated so that the large number of displayed characters can be clearly read. The second error release explanation display RS20 and the instruction display IS10 are displayed alternately. Note that the second error cancellation explanation display RS20 may be displayed larger than the instruction display IS10.

The same content error list display EL1' is still always displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 67(b), and the display ES21' of the second same content error display in the first display mode is also displayed. Furthermore, in the area where the display ES22' according to the second display mode of the second error display with the same content was displayed, the same as the second error cancellation explanation display RS20 displayed on the display screen 1581 of the first image display device 158 is displayed. A frame display of contents is displayed. This frame display is also displayed with a certain background color (gray here), and is hereinafter referred to as a second same-content error cancellation explanation display RS20'. The second same-content error cancellation explanation display RS20' can be seen as a form of error display, or it can also be seen as a form of error display that can specify that the error that has occurred is a medal passage confirmation error. Although the background color of the second same content error cancellation explanation display RS20' and the background color of the same content instruction display IS10' are different colors, they may be the same color. Further, the size of the second same content error cancellation explanation display RS20' is approximately the same as the size of the same content instruction display IS10', but whereas the same content instruction display IS10' was a blinking display, the second The same content error cancellation explanation display RS20' is a lit display. The second same content error release explanation display RS20' and the same content instruction display IS10' are displayed alternately. Note that the second same content error cancellation explanation display RS20' may be displayed larger than the same content instruction display IS10'.

The speaker 180 shown in FIG. 67(b) provides an audio explanation of how to clear the error, such as "Please remove the medal and press the reset switch." Hereinafter, this sound will be referred to as the second error release explanation notification sound. The speaker 180 alternately outputs a second error release explanation notification sound and an instruction notification sound such as "Please call the store clerk." Note that the speaker 180 may output only the instruction notification sound without outputting the second error cancellation explanation notification sound.

The payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 67(a) still displays E7, which is the error code for the medal passage confirmation error.

The notification mode after the medal passage confirmation error described above is detected will be explained again using a timing chart.

FIG. 68 is a timing chart of the notification mode after the medal passage confirmation error is detected. In this FIG. 68 as well, time passes from left to right in the figure, and the notification modes in each of the first image display device 157, second image display device 158, speaker 180, and payout number display 127 are described. ing.

First, a medal passage confirmation error is detected. When a medal passage confirmation error is detected, the first image display device 157 starts displaying a first error display ES10 indicating “an error has occurred” and an error list display EL1, and the second image display device 158 also starts displaying a message “an error has occurred”. Display of the first same content error display ES10' and the same content error list display EL1' is started. Further, the speaker 180 outputs a first error sound such as "Error Occurrence". Further, when a medal passage confirmation error is detected, the payout number display 127 displays the error code (here, E7) of the error that has occurred. Start displaying the first error display ES10, start displaying the error list display EL1, start displaying the first error display ES10' with the same content, start displaying the error list display EL1' with the same content, start outputting the first error sound, and payout. The display of the error code on the number of sheets display 127 is performed at the same timing, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the first error display ES10 is displayed, the first error display ES10' with the same content is displayed, and the first error sound is output. ends at the same timing. On the other hand, the display of the error list display EL1, the display of the same content error list display EL1', and the display of the error code on the payout number display 127 continue to be displayed even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. The display of the error list display EL1 and the display of the same content error list display EL1' continue to be displayed until the medal passage confirmation error is canceled. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 68, the error code on the payout number display 127 continues to be displayed until the medal passage confirmation error is canceled.

Note that among the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the speaker 180, and the payout number display 127, the payout number display 127 may start reporting the error code the fastest.

In the first image display device 157, when the display of the first error display ES10 ends, display of a fourth error display ES40 that allows identification of the medal passage confirmation error is started. This fourth error display ES40 continues to be displayed until the medal passage confirmation error is canceled. Although the fourth error display ES40 is a lit display, it may also be a display with a square thick frame that blinks, and in this case, the blinking display will be repeated until the medal passage confirmation error is canceled. become.

In the second image display device 158, when the display of the first error display ES10' with the same content ends, display of the fourth error display ES40' with the same content, in which the medal passing confirmation error can be identified, starts to be displayed. This fourth same-content error display ES40' also continues to be displayed until the medal passage confirmation error is canceled. Note that the fourth error display ES40' with the same content is also a lit display, but it may also be a display with a square thick frame that blinks. In this case, the blinking display remains until the medal passage confirmation error is canceled. It will be repeated.

When the output of the first error sound is finished, the speaker 180 starts outputting a fourth error sound such as "Medal Passage Confirmation Error". Note that the payout number display 127 continues to display an error code (E7) indicating a medal passage confirmation error.

In the first image display device 157, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fourth error display ES40 started to be displayed, an instruction display IS10 such as "Please call the store clerk" and a message such as "Please remove the medal and press the reset switch" are displayed. The second error release explanation display RS20 is displayed alternately. That is, after the instruction display IS10 is displayed blinking, the second error cancellation explanation display RS20 is displayed lit, the instruction display IS10 is displayed blinking again, and so on.This alternating display is repeated until the medal passage confirmation error is canceled. It will be done. In this alternate display, the display period of the instruction display IS10 and the display period of the second error release explanation display RS20 are the same length, but the former may be longer and the latter may be shorter, or the opposite Furthermore, the former display period may be short and the latter display period may be long.

In the second image display device 158, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fourth error display ES40' started to be displayed, the instruction display IS10' blinks, and then the second error cancellation explanation ES40' is displayed blinking. The display RS20' is lit up, the same content instruction display IS10' is displayed blinking again, and so on, and so on, and so forth, and so on, and so on.This alternating display is repeated until the medal passage confirmation error is canceled. The alternate display on the second image display device 158 is performed in synchronization with the alternate display on the first image display device 157.

In the speaker 180, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the output of the fourth error sound such as "Medal Passage Confirmation Error" started, the fourth error sound is switched to an instruction notification sound such as "Please call a store clerk." This switching timing is synchronized with the timing at which the first image display device 157 starts displaying the instruction display. Furthermore, in synchronization with the timing at which the second error release explanation display RS20 is started on the first image display device 157, a second error release explanation notification sound such as "Please remove the medal and press the reset switch" is also output from the speaker 180. Output. The instruction notification sound and the second error cancellation explanation notification sound are alternately output from the speaker 180 until the medal passage confirmation error is canceled. The output switching timing of the instruction notification sound and the second error cancellation explanation notification sound is also synchronized with the display switching timing of the instruction display IS10 and the second error cancellation explanation display RS20 on the first image display device 157.

In addition, although the display name on the second image display device 158 has been described here with the words "same content" attached to the display name on the first image display device 157 to distinguish between the two, it is possible that the display content is the same. Therefore, both indications may be treated without distinction.

In addition, four different sounds are output from the speaker 180: a first error sound, a fourth error sound, an instruction notification sound, and a second error cancellation explanation notification sound, but a medal passage confirmation error is detected. The same sound may be output consistently from the stage in which the For example, after the medal passage confirmation error is detected until the error is resolved, the first error sound may continue to be output, the fourth error sound may continue to be output, or the instruction notification sound may continue to be output. Alternatively, the second error release explanation notification sound may continue to be output, or an alarm sound other than voice may continue to be output.

In addition, the explanation using FIGS. 66 to 68 was an explanation in which a medal passage confirmation error with error code E7 was detected, but also when various errors with error codes E3 to E6 and E8 are detected, A similar error notification will be made. That is, a first error display ES10 indicating "Error Occurrence" and a first error display ES10' with the same content indicating "Error Occurrence" are displayed, and a first error sound indicating "Error Occurrence" is output. After that, the target error code and error name in the error list display EL1 are displayed with a thick rectangular frame, or the target error code and error name in the error list display EL1' with the same content are displayed in a thick rectangle. An error display surrounded by a frame is displayed, and the instruction display IS10 and the second error cancellation explanation display RS20 are alternately displayed, and the same content instruction display IS10' and the second error cancellation explanation display RS20' are also alternately displayed. Further, after the error name is outputted in audio form, the speaker 180 outputs an instruction notification sound and a second error cancellation explanation notification sound alternately.

Next, a case where error notifications overlap will be explained.

FIG. 69 is a timing chart when a door opening error is detected before the hopper empty error is detected and the error is resolved. In this FIG. 69 as well, time passes from left to right in the figure, and the notification modes in each of the first image display device 157, second image display device 158, speaker 180, and payout number display 127 are described. ing.

First, a hopper empty error is detected. When the hopper empty error is detected, the first image display device 157 starts displaying a first error display ES10 saying "Error Occurred" and error list display EL1, and the second image display device 158 also starts displaying a first error display ES10 saying "Error Occurred". 1. Display of the same content error display ES10' and the same content error list display EL1' is started. Further, the speaker 180 outputs a first error sound such as "Error Occurrence". Further, when a hopper empty error is detected, the payout number display 127 displays the error code (here, E2) of the error that has occurred. Start displaying the first error display ES10, start displaying the error list display EL1, start displaying the first error display ES10' with the same content, start displaying the error list display EL1' with the same content, start outputting the first error sound, and payout. The display of the error code on the number of sheets display 127 is performed at the same timing, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the first error display ES10 is displayed, the first error display ES10' with the same content is displayed, and the first error sound is output. ends at the same timing. On the other hand, the display of the error list display EL1, the display of the same content error list display EL1', and the display of the error code on the payout number display 127 continue to be displayed even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

In the first image display device 157, when the display of the first error display ES10 is finished, display of a third error display ES30 that allows identification of the hopper empty error is started. Furthermore, in the second image display device 158, when the display of the first error display ES10' with the same content ends, display of the third error display ES30' with the same content, which allows the hopper empty error to be specified, starts to be displayed.

When the output of the first error sound is finished, the speaker 180 starts outputting a third error sound such as "hopper empty error". Note that the error code (E2) of the hopper empty error continues to be displayed on the payout number display 127.

On the first image display device 157, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the third error display ES30 started to be displayed, an instruction display IS10 such as "Please call the clerk" and "Please replenish medals and press the reset switch" are displayed. ” and the first error cancellation explanation display RS10 are alternately displayed. In addition, in the second image display device 158, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the third same-content error display ES30' was started, the same-content instruction display IS10' and the first same-content error cancellation explanation display RS10' are displayed. will be displayed alternately. The alternate display on the second image display device 158 is performed in synchronization with the alternate display on the first image display device 157.

In the speaker 180, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the output of the third error sound such as "hopper empty error" is started, an instruction display IS10 and a first error cancellation explanation display RS10 are alternately displayed on the first image display device 157. In synchronization with this, an instruction notification sound such as ``Please call the clerk'' and a first error release explanation notification sound such as ``Please replenish medals and press the reset switch'' are output alternately.

The payout number display 127 continues to display the error code (E2).

A door opening error is detected while the second instruction notification (display of the instruction display IS10, display of the same content instruction display IS10', and output of the instruction notification sound) is being performed. However, even if a door open error is detected while the hopper empty error has not been canceled, no error notification based on the detection of the door open error is started, and the error notification regarding the hopper empty error continues. That is, the display of the first error display ES10 such as "Error Occurrence", the display of the first error display ES10' with the same content, the output of the first error sound, and the display of the second error display ES21, ES22 that can identify the door opening error. The display of the second error display ES21', ES22' with the same content and the output of the second error sound are not started, and the first image display device 157 alternately displays the instruction display IS10 and the first error cancellation explanation display RS10. , the second image display device 158 alternately displays the same content instruction display IS10' and the first same content error release explanation display RS10', and the speaker 180 alternately outputs the instruction notification sound and the first error release explanation notification sound. continues. Further, the error code (E2) continues to be displayed on the payout number display 127. Note that the error list display EL1 is also continuously displayed on the first image display device 157, and the text display E2 and hopper empty error in the error list display EL1 are displayed in the first image display device 157. 3 error display ES30 continues to be displayed. In addition, the second image display device 158 continues to display the error list display EL1' with the same content, and the characters E2 and hopper empty error in the error list display EL1' with the same content are displayed in squares. The third error message ES30' surrounded by a thick frame continues to be displayed.

In the example explained using FIG. 69, the error that occurred first was the hopper empty error with the error code E2, but even if the error code is E3 to E8, those errors are cleared. Even if a door opening error is detected in a state where the door opening error is not detected, no error notification is started based on the detection of the door opening error. By doing so, the clerk at the game parlor may be able to concentrate on responding to the error that occurred first. Furthermore, while the door open error is a simple error that can be cleared by closing the front door 102, the errors E2 to E8 are complex errors that require the work of replenishing or removing medals. Notification is given priority over open errors. In other words, among error notifications, errors for which an error cancellation explanation notification is given are given priority over errors for which an error cancellation explanation notification is not given.

FIG. 70 is a timing chart when a door opening error is detected and a medal passage confirmation error is detected before the error is resolved. In this FIG. 70 as well, time passes from left to right in the figure, and the notification modes in each of the first image display device 157, second image display device 158, speaker 180, and payout number display 127 are described. ing.

First, a door opening error is detected. When a door opening error is detected, the first image display device 157 starts displaying a first error display ES10 such as "Error Occurred" and an error list display EL1, and the second image display device 158 also displays a first error display ES10 such as "Error Occurred". 1. Display of the same content error display ES10' and the same content error list display EL1' are started. Further, the speaker 180 outputs a first error sound such as "Error Occurrence". Note that the payout number display 127 is in a non-display state in which nothing is displayed. The display of the first error display ES10, the error list display EL1, the first error display ES10', the error list EL1', and the output of the first error sound are as follows: They are performed at the same timing, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the display of the first error display ES10, the display of the first error display ES10' with the same content, and the output of the first error sound end at the same timing. On the other hand, the display of the error list display EL1 and the display of the same content error list display EL1' continue to be displayed even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

In the first image display device 157, when the display of the first error display ES10 is finished, a display ES21 of a second error display in the first display mode that allows identification of the door opening error is started. Further, in the second image display device 158, when the display of the first error display ES10' with the same content is finished, a display ES21' of the second error display with the same content in the first display mode, which allows the door opening error to be identified, is started. .

When the speaker 180 finishes outputting the first error sound, it then starts outputting a second error sound such as "door open error". Note that the payout number display 127 remains in a non-displayed state.

In the first image display device 157, when a predetermined time elapses after the start of the display ES21 of the second error display in the first display mode, the display ES22 of the second error display in the second display mode such as "Door Error" is displayed. The display and the status display SS10 such as "The door is open" are alternately displayed. Further, in the second image display device 158, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display ES21' in the first display mode of the second error display with the same content is started, a second error display with the same content such as "Door Error" is displayed. The display ES22' in two display modes and the same status display SS10' such as "The door is open" are alternately displayed. The alternate display on the second image display device 158 is performed in synchronization with the alternate display on the first image display device 157.

After the speaker 180 starts outputting the second error sound such as "Door Error", the speaker 180 outputs a status notification sound such as "The door is open" in synchronization with the start of displaying the status display SS10 on the first image display device 157. is output, and thereafter, the second error sound and the status notification sound are output alternately. This alternate output from the speaker 180 is performed in synchronization with the alternate display of the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display and the status display SS10 on the first image display device 157. Note that the payout number display 127 remains in a non-displayed state.

A medal passage confirmation error is detected while the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display such as the second "door error" is being performed. Then, even if the door opening error has not been canceled, the error notification regarding the door opening error ends, and instead, the error notification based on the detection of the medal passage confirmation error starts. That is, the display of the first error display ES10 such as "Error Occurrence", the display of the first error display ES10' with the same contents, and the output of the first error sound are performed by the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, and the speaker. 180 respectively. Further, the payout number display 127, which has been hidden until now, starts displaying E7, which is an error code for a medal passage confirmation error. Note that in the first image display device 157, the error list display EL1 that was started to be displayed as an error notification regarding the door opening error continues to be displayed, but the second error display using the error list display EL1 is The display ES21 in one display mode has ended. Also, on the second image display device 158, the error list display EL1' with the same content that was started to be displayed as an error notification regarding the door opening error continues to be displayed. The display ES21' of the second same-content error display in the first display mode has ended.

Eventually, the first image display device 157 starts displaying a fourth error display ES40 using the error list display EL1, and the second image display device 158 starts displaying a fourth error display ES40 with the same content using the error list display EL1'. Display of error display ES40' is started. Furthermore, the error code (E7) continues to be displayed on the payout number display 127. Thereafter, the first image display device 157 alternately displays the instruction display IS10 and the second error release explanation display RS20, and the second image display device 158 displays the same content instruction display IS10' and the second error release explanation display RS20. ', and the speaker 180 continues to alternately output the instruction notification sound and the second error release explanation notification sound. Furthermore, the error code (E7) continues to be displayed on the payout number display 127.

In the example explained using FIG. 70, the newly generated error was a medal passage confirmation error with an error code of E7, but the error code changed to E2 to E6 while the door open error was not cleared. Also when any of the errors E8 and E8 is detected, the error notification regarding the door opening error ends, and instead, the error notification based on the newly generated error is started. Again, the door open error is a simple error that can be cleared by closing the front door 102, whereas the errors E2 to E8 are complex errors that involve adding or removing medals. Notification is given priority over door opening errors. In other words, among error notifications, errors for which an error cancellation explanation notification is given are given priority over errors for which an error cancellation explanation notification is not given.

In the explanations from FIG. 60 to FIG. Error notification may also be performed. For example, a color representing each error (color other than white) is displayed in the error list display EL1 and the same content error list display EL1', and in the case of the first error notification indicating that an error has been detected, the side The lamp 144 may be made to blink in white, and in the case of error notification that specifies each error, the side lamp 144 may be made to blink in a color representing each error.

Next, a modification of error notification using the first image display device 157 and the second image display device 158 will be described.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a modification of error notification using the first image display device 157 and second image display device 158, and FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a modification of error notification continued from FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a modification of error notification continued from FIG. 72. FIG. 71(a-2) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 71(a-1), and FIG. 71(b-2) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 71(b-1). Further, FIG. 72(a-2) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 72(a-1), and FIG. 72(b-2) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 72(b-1). Furthermore, FIG. 73(a-2) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 73(a-1), and FIG. 73(b-2) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 73(b-1).

FIG. 71(a-1) shows the first image display device 157 on which a background display for effect represented by hatching diagonally downward to the left is displayed on the display screen 1571, and the first image display device 157 displaying a background display for effect represented by hatching diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 1581; A second image display device 158 is shown in which a background display for effect represented by hatching is displayed.

Here, the configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The control section of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control section that controls the progress of the game, a first sub-control section that controls the main effects in accordance with command signals transmitted from the main control section, and a first sub-control section that controls the main effects according to command signals transmitted from the main control section. and a second sub-control unit that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit. The second sub-control unit is provided with a VDP (video display processor), and a ROM and VRAM 518 are connected to this VDP via a bus. The VRAM 518 is divided into an area for the first effect image display device 157 (hereinafter referred to as the “first area”) and an area for the second effect image display device 158 (hereinafter referred to as the “second area”). It is provided. The VDP reads image data etc. stored in the ROM based on a signal from the CPU of the second sub-control unit, develops the image data in a first area provided in the work area of the VRAM 518, and performs drawing processing. I do. When the generation of the display image of the entire display screen 1571 in the first area is completed, the image is displayed on the first effect image display device 157. Further, the VDP reads image data etc. stored in the ROM based on a signal from the CPU of the second sub-control unit, develops the image data in a second area provided in the work area of the VRAM 518, Performs drawing processing. When the generation of the display image of the entire display screen 1581 in the second area is completed, the image is displayed on the second effect image display device 158. A plurality of drawing areas are prepared for both the first area and the second area.

FIG. 71(a-2) shows a first drawing area 5181 in the first area of the VRAM 518 included in the slot machine 100 and a first drawing area 5182 in the second area. In the second drawing area in the first area, which was not shown in FIG. 71(a-2), there is a background for effect represented by hatching diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 157 in FIG. 71(a-1). Generation of the display image is complete. Also, in the second drawing area in the second area, which was also not shown in FIG. The generation of the background display image has been completed. On the other hand, nothing is drawn in either the first drawing area 5181 in the first area or the first drawing area 5182 in the second area shown in FIG. 71(a-2).

In the first drawing area 5181 in the first area shown in FIG. 71(b-2), the entire display image of the first error display ES10 "Error Occurrence" is generated, but the display image of the error list display EL1 is generated. is only partially generated. Therefore, generation of the display image for the entire display screen 1571 has not yet been completed. Furthermore, no single-color background image that serves as a background display for error notification is generated. From the above, on the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 71(b-1), the background display for effect remains displayed, and no other display is additionally displayed. Not yet.

In the first drawing area 5182 in the second area shown in FIG. 71(b-2), the entire display image of the first error display ES10' with the same content "Error Occurrence" is generated, and a list of errors with the same content is displayed. Generation of the display image of EL1' has also been completed. Therefore, generation of the display image for the entire display screen 1581 has been completed. In this modification, when displaying images, a background display image and display images other than the background image, such as the first same-content error display ES10' and the same-content error list display EL1', are handled separately. In the first drawing area 5182 in the second area, the monochrome background image serving as the background display for error notification is generated only halfway. As a result, on the display screen 1581 of the second effect image display device 158 shown in FIG. 71(b-1), the background display remains the background display for effect, but the first error display ES10' Content error list display EL1' is additionally displayed. Note that the background display image and the display image that is different from the background image may be handled together; in this case, the generation of the display image for the entire display screen is not completed, and additional display will not be carried out. Alternatively, the display image of the first error display ES10' with the same content and the display image of the first error display ES10 and the display image of the error list display EL1' with the same content and the error list display EL1 may be handled separately, for example, in FIG. ), only the first error display ES10 may be displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157.

At the stage of FIG. 71(b-2), the generation of the display image is more advanced in the first drawing area 5182 in the second area than in the first drawing area 5181 in the first area.

In the first drawing area 5181 in the first area shown in FIG. 72(a-2), the entire display image of the first error display ES10 "Error Occurrence" is generated, as well as the display image of the error list display EL1. Generation is complete. Therefore, generation of the display image for the entire display screen 1571 has been completed. On the other hand, in the first drawing area 5181 in the first area, the monochrome background image serving as the background display for error notification is generated only halfway. As a result, on the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 72(a-1), the background display remains the background display for effect, but the first error display ES10 and the error list display EL1 is displayed.

In the first drawing area 5182 in the second area shown in FIG. 72(a-2), an error was generated only halfway in the first drawing area 5182 in the second area shown in FIG. 71(b-2). The generation of the monochrome background image that will be the background display for notification has also been completed, and on the display screen 1581 of the second effect image display device 158 shown in FIG. 72(a-1), the background display is also the background display for error notification. The background image is a single color (in this case, all white).

Even at the stage of FIG. 72(a-2), the generation of the display image is more advanced in the first drawing area 5182 in the second area than in the first drawing area 5181 in the first area.

In the first drawing area 5181 in the first area shown in FIG. 72(b-2), an error was generated only halfway in the first drawing area 5181 in the first area shown in FIG. 72(a-2). The generation of the monochrome background image that will serve as the background display for notification has also been completed, and on the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 72(b-1), the background display is also the background display for error notification. The background image is a single color (in this case, all white).

In the first drawing area 5181 in the first area shown in FIG. 73(a-2), the display image of the first error display ES10 "Error Occurrence" is erased, and in the error list display EL1, the display image of E1 and the door opening error is erased. The display image of the display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display, which is a thick rectangular frame surrounding the character display, has been generated halfway. As a result, the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 73(a-1) remains the same as the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 72(b-1). .

In the first drawing area 5182 in the second area shown in FIG. 73(a-2), the display image of the first same-content error display ES10', "Error Occurrence", is erased, and in the same-content error list display EL1', The generation of the display image of the display ES21' in the first display mode of the second error display with the same content, which is a square thick frame display surrounding E1 and the character display of door open error, has been completed. As a result, on the display screen 1581 of the second effect image display device 158 shown in FIG. 73(a-1), the first error display ES10' with the same content "Error Occurrence" disappears, and in the error list display EL1' with the same content, A display ES21' is displayed in the first display mode of a second error display with the same contents, which is a thick rectangular frame surrounding E1 and the character display of door open error. In this modified example, the data amount of the image data of the second same content error display developed in the drawing area of the second area is compared to the data amount of the image data of the second error display developed in the drawing area of the first area. It's less than the quantity. Also, even when looking at the entire display screen, the amount of image data displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second effect image display device 158 is the same as that of the image data displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157. It is less than the amount of data. As a result, the drawing in the drawing area of the second area is completed faster than the drawing in the drawing area of the first area, and the second error display starts to be displayed on the first effect image display device 157. Before that, the second effect image display device 158 starts displaying a second same-content error display. That is, in FIG. 73(a-1), the relationship between the display screen including the display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display and the display screen including the display ES21' in the first display mode of the second error display with the same content is shown. However, the relationship between the display screen including the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display and the display screen including the display ES22' in the second display mode of the second error display with the same content is also the same.

FIG. 73(b-2) shows the VRAM 518 immediately after the door open error has been resolved, with the status display SS10 such as "The door is open" being displayed. This VRAM 518 shows a second drawing area 5183 in the first area and a second drawing area 5184 in the second area. In the second drawing area 5183 in the first area, the generation of the background display image for effect represented by diagonally downward hatching to the left has been completed only halfway, and the first drawing area 5183 shown in FIG. 73(b-1) On the display screen 1571 of the effect image display device 157, the status display SS10 such as "The door is open" and the display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display remain displayed.

On the other hand, in the second drawing area 5184 in the second area, generation of the image of the background display for effect represented by hatching diagonally downward to the left has been completed. Therefore, on the display screen 1581 of the second performance image display device 158 shown in FIG. 73(b-1), the error notification display is switched to a performance background display represented by hatching diagonally downward to the left. In this modified example, the data amount of the image data of the background display for effect developed in the drawing area of the second area is compared to the data amount of the image data of the background display for effect developed in the drawing area of the first area. It's less than the quantity. As a result, the drawing in the drawing area of the second area is completed faster than the drawing in the drawing area of the first area, and the display of the second error display on the first effect image display device 157 ends. Before that, the display of the second same-content error display ends on the second effect image display device 158.

As explained above, in this modification, the error notification on the display screen 1581 of the second effect image display device 158 starts at an earlier timing than the error notification on the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157. Ru. Previously, even if an error was displayed on one display screen, the player might not notice, but by displaying the error on a different display screen, it is possible to make the player notice that an error has occurred. There are cases where it is possible. Furthermore, by making the notification start time different for each display screen, it may become easier for the player to notice that an error has occurred. In particular, the display can be started on the display screen 1581 of the smaller second effect image display device 158 first, and then the display can be started on the display screen 1571 of the larger first effect image display device 157. This gives the impression that the previously small display has been enlarged, making it possible to realize dynamic error display between different display screens. Moreover, by making the display larger, it becomes easier for players to notice it.

Further, the error notification on the display screen 1581 of the second effect image display device 158 ends at an earlier timing than the error notification on the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157. That is, the effect may be started on the display screen 1581 of the second effect image display device 158 at an earlier timing than on the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157. By doing so, it is possible to give the impression that the small performance display has been enlarged and to realize a dynamic performance display between different display screens.

In the modification described above, the VRAM 518 was divided into a first area for the first effect image display device 157 and a second area for the second effect image display device 158, but the two areas are not separated. Display images may be generated in the same area (hereinafter referred to as "common drawing area"). Even in this case, in order to give the impression that the smaller display has been enlarged, the display is started on the smaller display screen 1581 of the second effect image display device 158 first. , the timing of display start is controlled by the second sub-control unit. Alternatively, the second effect image display device 158 displays the image generated in the common drawing area as is, whereas the first effect image display device 157 enlarges the image generated in the common drawing area on the device side. If the second effect image display device 158 does not perform the enlargement process, the second effect image display device 158 will start displaying at an earlier timing than the first effect image display device 157.

Moreover, among the notifications by the first effect image display device 157, the notifications by the second effect image display device 158, and the notifications by the speaker 180, the notification by the speaker 180 may be started earliest. The error sound is a notification that can be noticed even when the user is looking away (even when not looking at the display screen), and is a notification that is easy for the staff at the game parlor to notice, so it may be started first.

Furthermore, although the above explanation has been given using the slot machine 100 as an example, the error notification explained above can also be applied to pachinko machines. A pachinko machine also has a main body and a front frame door, the main body side is equipped with a first effect image display device (main liquid crystal display device), and the front frame door is equipped with a second effect image display device (sub liquid crystal display device). In addition, there are devices that include both a first effect image display device and a second effect image display device on the main body side. It also has a speaker and a frame lamp. Furthermore, instead of the payout number display 127, a first special symbol display device or a second special symbol display device configured with a 7-segment display device or the like can be used as the notification means. Even in a pachinko machine, when the front frame door is opened, a door open error occurs, and a second error display, a second error display with the same content, or a second error sound can be applied. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine, there is a payout device that pays out the game balls stored in the ball tank, and errors such as insufficient payout error, excessive payout error, and illegal payout error of game balls are provided. There is. In addition, there are magnetic (magnet) errors, impact errors, large winning slot excess winning errors, large winning opening excess discharge errors, and the like. A third error display, a fourth error display, a third error display with the same content, a fourth error display with the same content, a third error sound, and a fourth error sound can be applied to these errors.

In the above description,
``A game machine equipped with a notification means [for example, a first image display device 157, a second image display device 158, a payout number display 127, a side lamp 144, a speaker 180],
When an error is detected, the notification means sends a first error notification [for example, a first error display ES10 saying "error has occurred", a first error display ES10' with the same content saying "error has occurred", a first error display ES10' saying "error has occurred", etc.). means for executing the first error sound by voice],
The first error notification is a notification indicating that an error has been detected,
The first error notification is a notification in which it is impossible to specify what kind of error the detected error is.
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this gaming machine, when a fraudster attempts to perform a fraudulent act on the gaming machine and causes an error, the first error notification that does not specify the error name or type of error is made to make the fraudster anxious. , may be able to deter people from committing fraudulent acts. Additionally, if an error occurs while the player is playing, the player only needs to know that some kind of error has occurred in order to call the gaming clerk, so the player can call the gaming clerk with the minimum necessary information. There are cases where it is possible.

Also,
"The notification means is a means for executing the first error notification when a second error [for example, door opening error] is detected,
The first error notification is a notification in which it is impossible to identify that the detected error is the second error.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The notification means is a means for executing the first error notification even when a third error [for example, hopper empty error] is detected,
The first error notification is a notification that makes it impossible to determine whether the detected error is the second error or the third error.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“When the second error is detected, the notification means executes the first error notification and then issues a second error notification [for example, displaying characters E1 in the error list display EL1 and a door opening error. Display ES21 of the second error display in the first display mode surrounded by a thick rectangular frame, display ES22 of the second error display "Door error" in the second display mode, E1 and door in the error list display EL1' with the same content. Display ES21' of a second error display with the same content in the first display mode in which the text display of opening error is surrounded by a thick rectangular frame; Display ES22' of the second error display with the same content in the second display mode of "Door Error"; means for executing a second audio error sound such as "door opening error";
The notification means executes the first error notification when the third error is detected, and then sends a third error notification [for example, a character display of E2 in the error list display EL1 and a hopper empty error is displayed in a square]. 3rd error display ES30' with the same content surrounded by a thick frame, E2 in the error list display EL1' with the same content, and 3rd error display ES30' with the same content surrounded with the text display of hopper empty error, "Hopper empty error" is a means for executing a third error sound by a voice such as "",
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The second error notification is a notification that can identify that the detected error is the second error,
The third error notification is a notification that can specify that the detected error is the third error.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

When a gaming clerk called by a player due to the first error notification rushes to the gaming machine, the second error notification or the third error notification allows the clerk to understand the content of the error and take action. There are cases.

Also,
"The notification means is means that includes at least a display means [for example, the first image display device 157 and the second image display device 158],
The first error notification [for example, a first error display ES10 saying "an error has occurred", a first error display ES10' with the same content saying "an error has occurred", and a first error sound in a voice saying "an error has occurred"] is detected. the second error is the second error;
The first error notification is a notification using a display that makes it impossible to identify that the detected error is the third error [for example, a first error display ES10 saying "Error Occurrence", a first error display ES10 saying "Error Occurrence", etc. Content error display ES10'],
The second error notification is a notification using a display that can identify that the detected error is the second error [for example, E1 in the error list display EL1 and the character display for door opening error are displayed in a square thick frame. A display ES21 of the second error display in the first display mode surrounded by , a display ES22 of the second error display "Door error" in the second display mode, E1 in the error list display EL1' with the same content, and characters for door opening error. a display ES21' in a first display mode of a second error display with the same content surrounding the display with a thick rectangular frame, and a display ES22' in a second display mode of a second error display with the same content "door error",
The third error notification is a notification using a display that can identify that the detected error is the third error [for example, E2 in the error list display EL1 and the text display of the hopper empty error are displayed with a thick rectangular frame. A third error display ES30 with the same content, E2 in the error list display EL1' with the same content, and a third error display with the same content ES30' with the character display of the hopper empty error enclosed in a thick rectangular frame]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The notification means includes at least one of a sound generating means [for example, the speaker 180] and a light emitting means [for example, the side lamp 144].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``A main body part [for example, the main body 101],
a door section [for example, the front door 102] attached to the main body section so as to be openable and closable;
Equipped with
The main body section is equipped with a payout device [for example, a medal ejection device] that pays out stored game media,
The second error is an error in which the door part is opened [for example, a door opening error],
The third error is an error in which the stored game media are exhausted and the payout device is unable to pay out game media [for example, hopper empty error].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 59],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In the above description,
``A game machine equipped with a notification means [for example, a first image display device 157, a second image display device 158, a payout number display 127, a side lamp 144, a speaker 180],
When a second error [e.g., door opening error] is detected, the notification means sends a second error notification [e.g., E1 in the error list display EL1 and character display of door opening error in a square thick frame. Display ES21 of the enclosed second error display in the first display mode, display ES22 of the second error display "Door Error" in the second display mode, E1 in the error list display EL1' with the same content, and character display of door opening error. Display ES21' in the first display mode of the second error display with the same content surrounded by a thick rectangular frame, Display ES22' in the second display mode of the second error display with the same content "Door error", "Door opening error" a second error sound made by a voice such as
When a third error [e.g., hopper empty error] is detected, the notification means sends a third error notification [e.g., E2 in the error list display EL1 and text display of hopper empty error with a square thick frame. 3rd error display ES30 with the same content enclosed, E2 in the error list display EL1' with the same content, and 3rd error display with the same content ES30' with the text display of hopper empty error surrounded by a thick rectangular frame, and a voice saying "Hopper empty error" 3rd error sound],
The notification means is a means for not executing the second error notification when the second error is detected during execution of the third error notification [for example, the example described using FIG. 69] ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this gaming machine, the clerk at the gaming parlor may be able to concentrate on responding to the third error that occurred first.

Also,
“The notification means is a means for executing the third error notification when the third error is detected during the execution of the second error notification [for example, the example described using FIG. 70 notes],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, between the second error and the third error, the third error is notified with priority. In other words, between the second error and the third error, the third error has a higher priority.

Also,
``Equipped with signal output means [e.g., external centralized terminal board],
The signal output means is a means for outputting a signal indicating that the second error has been detected to the outside when the second error is detected.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, when a fraudster is committing a fraudulent act without noticing the occurrence of the second error, a clerk at the gaming parlor may be able to notice the occurrence of the second error. .

Also,
``When the second error is detected, the notification means issues a first error notification prior to the second error notification [for example, a first error display ES10 saying ``Error Occurrence'', ``Error Occurrence'' means for executing a first error display ES10' with the same content, a first error sound by voice such as "Error occurrence"],
The notification means is a means for executing the first error notification before the third error notification even when the third error is detected,
The first error notification is a notification that makes it impossible to determine whether the detected error is the second error or the third error.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The second error notification is a notification that can identify that the detected error is the second error,
The third error notification is a notification that can specify that the detected error is the third error.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The notification means is means that includes at least a display means [for example, the first image display device 157 and the second image display device 158],
The first error notification is a notification using a display that makes it impossible to identify that the detected error is the second error [for example, a first error display ES10 saying "Error Occurrence", a first error display ES10 saying "Error Occurrence", etc. Content error display ES10'],
The first error notification is a notification using a display that makes it impossible to identify that the detected error is the third error [for example, a first error display ES10 saying "Error Occurrence", a first error display ES10 saying "Error Occurrence", etc. Content error display ES10'],
The second error notification is a notification using a display that can identify that the detected error is the second error [for example, E1 in the error list display EL1 and the character display for door opening error are displayed in a square thick frame. A display ES21 of the second error display in the first display mode surrounded by , a display ES22 of the second error display "Door error" in the second display mode, E1 in the error list display EL1' with the same content, and characters for door opening error. a display ES21' in a first display mode of a second error display with the same content surrounding the display with a thick rectangular frame, and a display ES22' in a second display mode of a second error display with the same content "door error",
The third error notification is a notification using a display that can identify that the detected error is the third error [for example, E2 in the error list display EL1 and the text display of the hopper empty error are displayed with a thick rectangular frame. A third error display ES30 with the same content, E2 in the error list display EL1' with the same content, and a third error display with the same content ES30' with the character display of the hopper empty error enclosed in a thick rectangular frame]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The notification means includes at least one of a sound generating means [for example, the speaker 180] and a light emitting means [for example, the side lamp 144].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``A main body part [for example, the main body 101],
a door section [for example, the front door 102] attached to the main body section so as to be openable and closable;
Equipped with
The main body section is equipped with a payout device [for example, a medal ejection device] that pays out stored game media,
The second error is an error in which the door part is opened [for example, a door opening error],
The third error is an error in which the stored game media are exhausted and the payout device is unable to pay out game media [for example, hopper empty error].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 59],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

In the above description,
``A game machine equipped with a notification means [for example, a first image display device 157, a second image display device 158, a payout number display 127, a side lamp 144, a speaker 180],
When a second error [e.g., door opening error] is detected, the notification means sends a second error notification [e.g., E1 in the error list display EL1 and character display of door opening error in a square thick frame. Display ES21 of the enclosed second error display in the first display mode, display ES22 of the second error display "Door Error" in the second display mode, E1 in the error list display EL1' with the same content, and character display of door opening error. Display ES21' in the first display mode of the second error display with the same content surrounded by a thick rectangular frame, Display ES22' in the second display mode of the second error display with the same content "Door error", "Door opening error" a second error sound by voice],
The second error notification includes a notification in the first notification mode that indicates that the detected error is the second error [for example, the character display E1 in the error list display EL1 and the door opening error are displayed in a square] Display ES21 of the second error display in the first display mode surrounded by a thick frame, E1 in the error list display EL1' with the same content, and a second error display with the same content surrounded by a thick rectangular frame. ES21' in the first display mode] and a notification in the second notification mode indicating that the detected error is the second error [for example, a second display of the second error display "Door Error"] a display ES22 according to the mode, and a display ES22′ according to the second display mode of a second error display with the same content, “Door Error”.
A game machine characterized by:

Conventionally, even if an error notification was made using one notification mode, there were cases in which the player did not notice, but according to this gaming machine, an error may occur to the player by providing an error notification using a different notification mode. Sometimes you can get them to notice.

Also,
"The notification means is a means for performing notification according to the second notification mode even while notification according to the first notification mode is being executed [for example, FIG. 61(a)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The notification means [for example, the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the speaker 180] is configured to notify the gaming machine of the gaming machine where the second error has occurred after the start of execution of the second error notification. Execution of status notifications that indicate the status [for example, status display SS10 such as "The door is open", status display SS10' with the same content such as "The door is open", status notification sound such as "The door is open"] is a means of starting,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to inform the player and the clerk at the gaming parlor about the state of the gaming machine due to the occurrence of the second error through the status notification. In particular, this status notification makes it easy for a person who has no knowledge of the occurrence of the second error to understand the second error that has occurred. Additionally, for those who have committed the fraudulent act that causes the second error, this status notification may allow nearby players to know what condition the gaming machine is in, and they may In some cases, it may be possible to find out whether a person has committed such wrongdoing, and to deter them from committing further wrongdoing.

Also,
"The notification means is a means for performing notification according to the first notification mode even while the status notification is being executed [for example, FIG. 61(b)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The notification means is a means for alternately performing the notification according to the second notification mode and the state notification [for example, the first image display device 157 and the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 62],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The notification means is configured to send a third error notification when a third error [for example, hopper empty error] is detected [for example, E2 in error list display EL1 and character display of hopper empty error] to be displayed with a thick rectangular frame. 3rd error display ES30 with the same content, E2 in the error list display EL1' with the same content, and 3rd error display with the same content ES30' with the character display of the hopper empty error surrounded by a thick rectangular frame, and a voice saying "Hopper empty error" 3rd error sound]
When the second error is detected, the notification means issues a first error notification [for example, a first error display ES10 saying "Error Occurrence"] before the second error notification [for example, a first error display ES10 saying "Error Occurrence"]. means for executing a first same-content error display ES10', a first error sound by a voice such as "Error occurrence";
The notification means is a means for executing the first error notification before the third error notification even when the third error is detected,
The first error notification is a notification that makes it impossible to determine whether the detected error is the second error or the third error.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In addition,
After the execution of the third error notification is started, the notification means may issue an instruction display IS10 representing an instruction to the player [for example, an instruction display IS10 of "Please call a store clerk"; It is a means for starting the execution of a content instruction display IS10', an instruction notification sound such as "Please call a store clerk",
The notification means is a means for executing the third error notification even while the instruction notification is being executed [for example, FIG. 64(a)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
It may be.

Also,
``After the start of execution of the third error notification, the notification means sends an explanation notification explaining how to cancel the error [for example, a first error cancellation explanation display RS10 saying, ``Please replenish medals and press the reset switch.'' , the first error release explanation display RS10' with the same contents as "Please replenish medals and press the reset switch", and the first error release explanation notification sound with voice such as "Please replenish medals and press the reset switch"]. is a means of starting execution,
The notification means is a means for executing the third error notification even while the explanation notification is being executed [for example, FIG. 64(b)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
It may be.

Also,
"The notification means is a means for alternately performing the instruction notification and the explanation notification [for example, the first image display device 157, second image display device 158, and speaker 180 shown in FIG. 65],
A game machine characterized by: ”
It may be.

Also,
"The above-mentioned instruction notifications include notifications instructing to call the clerk of the game parlor [for example, instruction display IS10 "Please call the clerk", same content instruction display IS10'"Please call the clerk", "Please call the clerk ”],
The explanation notification includes a notification explaining the error cancellation operation to the clerk [for example, a first error cancellation explanation display RS10 saying "Please replenish medals and press the reset switch", and a notification RS10 "Please replenish medals and press the reset switch"; The first error release explanation display RS10' with the same contents as "Please replenish the medals and press the reset switch", the first error release explanation sound with a voice saying "Please remove the medals and press the reset switch", and the second error release explanation display RS10' saying "please remove the medals and press the reset switch". 2. Error release explanation display RS20, 2nd error release explanation display RS20' with the same content, ``Please remove the medals and press the reset switch.'', 2nd error release explanation notification sound, ``Please remove the medals and press the reset switch.'' ] is,
A game machine characterized by: ”
It may be.

Also,
"The notification means is means that includes at least a display means [for example, the first image display device 157 and the second image display device 158],
The first error notification is a notification using a display that makes it impossible to identify that the detected error is the second error [for example, a first error display ES10 saying "Error Occurrence", a first error display ES10 saying "Error Occurrence", etc. Content error display ES10'],
The first error notification is a notification using a display that makes it impossible to identify that the detected error is the third error [for example, a first error display ES10 saying "Error Occurrence", a first error display ES10 saying "Error Occurrence", etc. Content error display ES10'],
Notification according to the first notification mode is notification by a display that can identify that the detected error is the second error [for example, by displaying E1 in the error list display EL1 and the character display of door opening error in a square. Display ES21 of the second error display in the first display mode surrounded by a thick frame, E1 in the error list display EL1' with the same content, and the second error display with the same content surrounded with a thick rectangular frame. Display ES21' according to the first display mode],
The notification by the second notification mode is the notification by a display that can identify that the detected error is the second error [for example, the display ES22 of the second error display "Door error" in the second display mode. , a display ES22' in a second display mode of a second error display with the same content as "door error",
The third error notification is a notification using a display that can identify that the detected error is the third error [for example, E2 in the error list display EL1 and the text display of the hopper empty error are displayed with a thick rectangular frame. A third error display ES30 with the same content, E2 in the error list display EL1' with the same content, and a third error display with the same content ES30' with the character display of the hopper empty error enclosed in a thick rectangular frame]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The notification means includes at least one of a sound generating means [for example, the speaker 180] and a light emitting means [for example, the side lamp 144].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``A main body part [for example, the main body 101],
a door section [for example, the front door 102] attached to the main body section so as to be openable and closable;
Equipped with
The main body section is equipped with a payout device [for example, a medal ejection device] that pays out stored game media,
The second error is an error in which the door part is opened [for example, a door opening error],
The third error is an error in which the stored game media are exhausted and the payout device is unable to pay out game media [for example, hopper empty error].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 59],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A first display means [for example, the first image display device 157],
a second display means [for example, second image display device 158];
A game machine comprising:
When a second error [e.g., door open error] is detected, the first display means displays a second error display [e.g., E1 in error list display EL1 and character display of door open error] in a square. Before the display of the second error display in the first display mode ES21 of the second error display surrounded by a thick frame starts to be displayed, an error display with the same content as the second error display (hereinafter referred to as " (referred to as "Same content error display") [For example, according to the first display mode of the second same content error display in which E1 in the same content error list display EL1' and character display of door open error are surrounded by a thick rectangular frame. Display ES21′] starts [for example, FIG. 73(a-1)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

Conventionally, even if an error notification was made using one display means, there were cases in which the player did not notice the error, but according to this gaming machine, an error may occur to the player by providing an error notification using a different display means. Sometimes you can get them to notice. Furthermore, by making the notification start time different for each display means, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to notice that an error has occurred.

Also,
“Before the display of the second error display ends on the first display means, the display of the error display with the same content ends on the second display means [for example, FIG. 73(b-1)] ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``A main body part [for example, the main body 101],
a door section [for example, the front door 102] attached to the main body section so as to be openable and closable;
Equipped with
The second display means is a means provided in the door part,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Even when the door section is open, the same error display is displayed on the second display means, and the same error display can be seen even from the side. Therefore, if an unauthorized person opens the door illegally, the clerk of the game parlor or the surveillance camera may notice that the door has been opened illegally from a lateral viewpoint with respect to the game machine.

Also,
"The first display means is a means provided on the main body,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The second error display on the first display means is a larger display than the error display with the same content on the second display means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Since the second error display by the display means (the first display means) whose notification starts later is larger, it may be possible to make the player more aware that an error has occurred. .

Also,
“The first display means [for example, the first image display device 157] displays an image generated in the first drawing area [for example, the first drawing area 5181 in the first area] of the VRAM [for example, the VRAM 518]. means for displaying the second error display using
The second display means [e.g., second image display device 158] displays the image generated in the second drawing area [e.g., first drawing area 5182 in the second area] of the VRAM [e.g., VRAM 518]. means for displaying the same content error display using
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In addition,
"The first display means [e.g., the first image display device 157] is generated in the first drawing area [e.g., the first drawing area 5181 in the first area] of the VRAM [e.g., the VRAM 518]. means for displaying an image of the second error display;
The second display means [e.g., second image display device 158] is generated in a second drawing area [e.g., first drawing area 5182 in the second area] of the VRAM [e.g., VRAM 518], means for displaying an image of the same content error display;
A game machine characterized by: ”
may be, and furthermore,
“The second error display image generated in the first drawing area is an image generated by expanding the first image data in the VRAM,
The image with the same content error display generated in the second drawing area is an image generated by expanding the second image data in the VRAM,
The second image data is image data having a smaller amount of data than the first image data.
A game machine characterized by: ”
It may be.

Since the second image data has a small amount of data, generation to the second drawing area is completed quickly, and the second display means starts displaying the same content error display at an earlier timing. It turns out.

Also,
“The first display means [for example, the first image display device 157] is a means for displaying the second error display using an image generated in a common drawing area of the VRAM,
The second display means [for example, the second image display device 158] is a means for displaying the same content error display using the image generated in the common drawing area.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 59],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A first display means [for example, first image display device 157] having a first display screen [for example, display screen 1571];
a second display means [for example, second image display device 158] having a second display screen [for example, display screen 1581];
A game machine comprising:
The first display means displays a second error display on the first display screen when a second error [e.g., door opening error] is detected [e.g., a second error display of "door error"]. Display ES22] according to a second display mode of
The second display means displays an error display having the same content as the second error display (hereinafter referred to as "same content error display") on the second display screen when the second error is detected. ) [For example, a display ES22' in a second display mode of a second error display with the same content as "door error"];
The distance from the edge of the first display screen to the second error display displayed on the first display screen is the distance from the edge of the second display screen to the second error display displayed on the second display screen. is different from the distance to the same content error display [for example, the magnitude relationship of the numbers indicated by the arrows in FIG. 61(a)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

Conventionally, even if an error notification was made using one display means, there were cases in which the player did not notice the error, but according to this gaming machine, an error may occur to the player by providing an error notification using a different display means. Sometimes you can get them to notice. Furthermore, by varying the distance from the edge of the display screen to the second error display for each display means, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to notice that an error has occurred.

In addition,
"A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
a sub-control means that receives a command transmitted from the main control means and performs control based on the command;
a third display means [for example, payout number display 127] that displays an error display when a third error is detected;
Equipped with
The first display means is a means controlled by the sub-control means,
The second display means is a means controlled by the sub-control means,
The third display means is a means controlled by the main control means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
It may be.

Further, "the third display means is means for displaying an error message faster than the first display means and the second display means,"
A game machine characterized by: ”
It may be.

Also,
"The third display means is a means that does not display an error display when the second error is detected,
A game machine characterized by: ”
It may be.

Also,
“The first display screen [for example, display screen 1571] is a rectangular display screen,
The second display screen [for example, display screen 1581] is a rectangular display screen,
The horizontal length of the error display with the same content displayed on the second display screen relative to the horizontal length of the second display screen [for example, "6" shown in FIG. 61(a)] , "3" shown in FIG. 61(a)] [e.g., 3/6] with respect to the horizontal length of the first display screen [e.g., "25" shown in FIG. 61(a)]. larger than a ratio [for example, 10/25] of the horizontal length [for example, "10" shown in FIG. 61(a)] of the second error display displayed on the first display screen;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

By varying the display ratio of the error display in the horizontal direction between the two display means, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to notice that an error has occurred.

Also,
``The length in the vertical direction of the second error display displayed on the first display screen relative to the length in the vertical direction of the first display screen [for example, "14" shown in FIG. 61(a)] The ratio [for example, 3/14] of [for example, "3" shown in FIG. 61(a)] is the vertical length of the second display screen [for example, "11" shown in FIG. 61(a)]. ] to the vertical length of the error display with the same content displayed on the second display screen [for example, "0.9" shown in FIG. 61(a)] [for example, 0.9/11] greater than,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

It may also be possible to make the player more aware of the occurrence of an error by varying the display ratio of the error display in the vertical direction between the two display means.

Also,
“The first display screen has a horizontal length [for example, “25” shown in FIG. 61(a)] that is longer than a vertical length [for example, “14” shown in FIG. 61(a)]. long display screen,
The second display screen has a length in the vertical direction [for example, "11" shown in FIG. 61(a)] longer than a length in the horizontal direction [for example, "6" shown in FIG. 61(a)]. The display screen is
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

By using a horizontally long first display screen and a vertically long second display screen, the appearance of the error display displayed on each display screen is different, so that the player can more easily notice that an error has occurred. may be possible.

Also,
``When the second error is detected, the second error display [for example, E1 in the error list display EL1 and the character display of door open error] is displayed on the first display screen by surrounding it with a thick rectangular frame. However, before the display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display starts, the error display with the same content [for example, E1 in the error list display EL1' with the same content and the door opening] is displayed on the second display screen. Display ES21' in the first display mode of the second same error display in which the error character display is surrounded by a thick rectangular frame starts [for example, FIG. 73 (a-1)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“Before the display of the second error display ends on the first display screen, the display of the error display with the same content ends on the second display screen [for example, FIG. 73(b-1)] ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``A main body part [for example, the main body 101],
a door section [for example, the front door 102] attached to the main body section so as to be openable and closable;
Equipped with
The second display means [for example, the second image display device 158] is a means provided in the door part,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The first display means [for example, the first image display device 157] is a means provided in the main body,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The second error display on the first display screen is larger than the error display with the same content on the second display screen,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The first display means [for example, the first image display device 157] displays an image generated in the first drawing area [for example, the first drawing area 5181 in the first area] of the VRAM [for example, the VRAM 518]. means for displaying the second error display using
The second display means [e.g., second image display device 158] displays the image generated in the second drawing area [e.g., first drawing area 5182 in the second area] of the VRAM [e.g., VRAM 518]. means for displaying the same content error display using
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In addition,
"The first display means [e.g., the first image display device 157] is generated in the first drawing area [e.g., the first drawing area 5181 in the first area] of the VRAM [e.g., the VRAM 518]. means for displaying an image of the second error display;
The second display means [e.g., second image display device 158] is generated in a second drawing area [e.g., first drawing area 5182 in the second area] of the VRAM [e.g., VRAM 518], means for displaying an image of the same content error display;
A game machine characterized by: ”
may be, and furthermore,
“The second error display image generated in the first drawing area is an image generated by expanding the first image data in the VRAM,
The image with the same content error display generated in the second drawing area is an image generated by expanding the second image data in the VRAM,
The second image data is image data having a smaller amount of data than the first image data.
A game machine characterized by: ”
It may be.

Since the second image data has a small amount of data, generation to the second drawing area is completed quickly, and the second display means starts displaying the same content error display at an earlier timing. It turns out.

Also,
“The first display means [for example, the first image display device 157] is a means for displaying the second error display using an image generated in a common drawing area of the VRAM,
The second display means [for example, the second image display device 158] is a means for displaying the same content error display using the image generated in the common drawing area.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 59],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The identification prefixes described above, such as "first...", "second...", "third...", etc., may be replaced as appropriate. For example, "the third..." may be replaced with "the fourth...".

Note that the functions and effects described in the embodiments described so far are merely a list of the most suitable functions and effects, and the functions and effects of the present invention are limited to those described here. isn't it. In addition, even if the constituent elements are included only in the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, those constituent elements may be included in other embodiments, examples, modifications, etc. It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. In other words, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent elements contained only in the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. may not be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, etc. Even when applied to examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc., it stands as a cohesive technical idea.

Hereinafter, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel gaming machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 74 to 90. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 74 to 90 are used only for explanations using FIGS. 74 to 90 in principle, and even if the same symbols are shown in other drawings, In the explanation using FIG. 90, priority will be given to the symbols shown in FIGS. 74 to 90.

FIG. 74 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 74 starts rotating when a predetermined number of game media are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the success or failure of internal winning of multiple types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels stops rotating individually by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop match the predetermined payout conditions, the game media will be paid out and the game will end; if not, the game media will be paid out. This is a game machine that plays a series of games that end without paying out a game. Note that this payout of game media may be referred to as profit. Furthermore, something that facilitates the acquisition of profits may be referred to as a benefit.

This slot machine 100 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. The front door 102 is a door member rotatably attached to the main body 101. The front door 102 is provided with a locking function, so that only an employee of the game parlor can open the front door 102.

Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface are stored in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

A suitable number of each pattern is printed on a strip member at equal intervals, and the strip member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the symbol display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of a line.

To explain this specifically using FIG. 75, the symbols displayed on the upper row of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the diagram) are changed to the upper row symbols of the left reel 110 and the symbols displayed on the middle row of the left reel 110 (position 4 shown in the diagram). The displayed symbols are the middle symbols of the left reel, the symbols displayed in the lower row of the left reel 110 (position 7 shown in the figure) are the lower symbols of the left reel, and the symbols displayed in the upper row of the middle reel 111 (position 2 shown in the figure) are the symbols displayed in the lower row of the left reel. The symbol displayed in the middle reel 111 (position 5 in the diagram) is the middle reel symbol, and the symbol displayed in the bottom row of the middle reel 111 (position 8 in the diagram) is the symbol displayed in the middle reel 111. The symbol displayed in the lower row of the middle reel 112 (position 3 shown in the diagram) is the symbol displayed in the upper row of the right reel, and the symbol displayed in the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 6 shown in the diagram) is the symbol displayed in the right reel. The symbols displayed on the middle reel and the lower row of the right reel 112 (position 9 in the figure) are called right reel lower symbols, and the symbols on each reel 110 to 112 are displayed on each reel 110 through the symbol display window 113 112, three in the vertical direction, nine in total are displayed. By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Further, although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 74 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is arranged on the back of each reel 110 to 112 to illuminate each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 113. The backlight is configured to be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. Note that inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting part and a light receiving part is provided near each reel 110 to 112, and this optical sensor (index sensor shown in FIG. 77) A light shielding piece (not shown) of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the light projecting part and the light receiving part of 730). The position of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the active line.

The valid line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the line 114 that is valid. The valid line is the line on which it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed (described later in FIG. 82) (the line on which winning determination is made). When the symbol corresponding to stops, it is determined that the prize has been won. Here, the line is defined as an area corresponding to one symbol for each of the reels 110 to 112 within the area within the display window 113. Note that lines other than valid lines on which winning determination is not made are referred to as invalid lines.

FIG. 75 shows a middle line L1 consisting of a left reel middle symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel middle symbol, a lower right line L2 consisting of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel lower symbol; A rising right line L3 consisting of a left reel lower symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel upper symbol, an upper line L4 consisting of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel upper symbol, and a right reel upper symbol, a left reel lower symbol, Five lines are shown, a lower line L5 consisting of middle reel lower symbols and right reel lower symbols. These lines are just examples, and for example, an area for one symbol is defined for each of the reels 110 to 112, such as a line consisting of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel lower symbol, and a right reel upper symbol. It is fine as long as it is. Note that among the lines shown in FIG. 75, the upper line L4 is used as an effective line in this embodiment. The active line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as game media. The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a three-copy bet-only machine, and when the number of medals inserted is less than three, none of the lines become valid, and when three medals are bet, line L4 becomes valid. (becomes used as a valid line). When the line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135. Note that the number of effective lines is not limited to one line. For example, three lines, the middle line L1, the downward-sloping line L2, and the upward-rightward line L3, may be used as active lines, or the number of active lines depending on the number of bets may be used.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that he or she has internally won a specific prize winning combination (specifically, a special prize) in an internal lottery to be described later, or that the player is in a special gaming state that will be described later. be. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later) is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. This is a lamp that informs the player of the The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two coins are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 will also be referred to as the MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. The storage number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139, each of which includes a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. More specifically, by operating the left stop button 137, the left reel 110 can be stopped, by operating the middle stop button 138, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the right stop button 139, the middle reel 111 can be stopped. By operating the right reel 112, it is possible to stop the right reel 112. Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation will be referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation will be referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. Furthermore, the order of operations in which the first stop operation is an operation to stop the left reel 110 is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order", and the order of operations in which the first stop operation is an operation to stop the right reel 112 is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order". This is called "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push." Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155.

The front door 102 is also provided with a key hole 140, and when a key is inserted into this key hole 140 and turned clockwise, the door is unlocked, and when turned counterclockwise, the door is locked. The slot machine 100 is provided with an open sensor (not shown) that detects when the front door 102 is opened. This open sensor detects that the front door 102 is opened by detecting the opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is opened.

Further, a first chance button 165 and a second chance button 166 are provided between the bet button 132 and the medal slot 141. The first chance button 165 has a built-in first effect lamp, and the second chance button 166 has a built-in second effect lamp. Both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operation means operated by the player during the performance. Further, a left button 167 is provided on the left side of the second chance button 166, and a right button 168 is provided on the right side. By operating the left button 167 and right button 168, it may be possible to move the cursor displayed on the effect image display device 157, and in such cases, the second chance button 166 functions as a confirmation button. Sometimes.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 145 provided at the bottom is a hole for outputting the sound of the bass speaker 277 (see FIG. 76) to the outside. A left side lamp 144L provided on the left side of the front door 102 and a right side lamp 144R provided on the right side are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is also provided at the top of the presentation device 160. This sound hole 143 is a hole for outputting the sound of the upper speaker 272 (see FIG. 76) to the outside. The production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 disposed on the back side of the shutter 163. The structure is such that when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally outward in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (on the player's side). . Note that although the effect image display device 157 is a liquid crystal display device, it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be any display device that can display various effect images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display). Display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display, reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 74, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Furthermore, although the display screen is a flat surface, it may be a curved surface.

Note that what has been referred to as a lamp so far is an example of a light emitting means, and in this specification, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and any device that emits light such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold cathode tube is also referred to as a lamp. Sometimes referred to as a lamp, something that emits light corresponds to an example of a light emitting means.

FIG. 76 is a front view of the slot machine 100 with the front door open. The main body 101 is a box that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and has an opening at the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores a main control board inside is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 249 provided at the top of the back plate 242. A reel unit 700 including three reels 110 to 112 is arranged below. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reel unit 700, that is, on the side plate 260 on the left side, a sub control board storage case 220 that stores a sub control board therein is disposed. The sub control board storage case 220 is provided with a first selection switch 190. Since this first selection switch 190 is provided inside the main body 101, a person who can unlock the front door 102 (for example, a clerk at a game parlor) cannot open the front door 102. However, the front door 102 is configured so that a person who cannot unlock the front door 102 (for example, a player) cannot operate the front door 102. That is, the first selection switch 190 is provided at a position that cannot be operated by the player. Details of the first selection switch 190 will be described later. Furthermore, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side as viewed from the outside, which is connected to the main control board and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device.

A medal dispensing device 180 (device for dispensing medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed on the bottom plate 264. Above the medal dispensing device 180, that is, below the reel unit 700, a power source having a power supply board is provided. A device 252 is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided in front of the power supply device 252. The power supply device 252 converts the alternating current power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies the voltage to each control section such as the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400, and to each device. Furthermore, it is equipped with a power storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to predetermined components (e.g., RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after external power is cut off. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is provided on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is provided behind this storage (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection part to which a power cord 265 is connected, and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 formed in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the symbol display window 113 is provided with a presentation device 160 and a presentation control board for controlling this presentation device 160. (not shown), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. At the bottom of the symbol display window 113, there is provided a medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, a passage 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals, etc. into the medal tray 161. There is. Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145.

Next, the structure of the reel unit 700 will be explained using FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a perspective view showing the configuration of the reel unit 700.

As shown in FIG. 4, the reel unit 700 includes a reel case 702 made of a box-shaped metal plate. A connector 703 for connecting to a power source, main control section 300, and first sub-control section 400 is provided at the top of this reel case 702. Further, this reel case 702 accommodates three reels 110 to 112. These reels 110-112 are attached to a motor 720 for rotationally driving the reels 110-112. This motor 720, an index sensor 730 for detecting the rotational position of the reels 110 to 112, and a backlight module 740 for irradiating light from the back side to the front side of the strip member 710 of the reels 110 to 112 are installed. It is attached to the base 732.

78(a) is a perspective view showing the structure of the backlight module 740, and FIG. 78(b) is a front view of the backlight module 740.

The backlight module 740 includes a reflector 742 and a lighting board 744 that is detachably attached to the back surface of the reflector 742. In the reflector 742, three openings BK1 to BK3 communicating from the front side to the back side are formed in a row in the vertical direction. Furthermore, two LEDs 745 are arranged on the lighting base 744 at positions corresponding to the openings BK1 to BK3.

The openings BK1 to BK3 and the LED 745 are provided at positions corresponding to the symbol positions (positions No. 1 to 9 shown in FIG. 2) that are stopped and displayed on the display window 113 in the attached state. As described above, by providing the LEDs 745 in each of the openings BK1 to BK3, the LED 745 is configured so that when irradiating light, it does not interfere with light irradiated to other positions. Thereby, light can be irradiated to each of the positions No. 1 to No. 9 shown in FIG. 2. For example, by lighting all the LEDs 745, all the symbols visible to the player can be illuminated from behind. In addition, by lighting a part of the symbols, it is possible to illuminate some of the symbols from behind among the symbols that are visible to the player. Note that the number and position of the openings and LEDs are not limited to this configuration.

Next, the first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. 76 will be described in detail. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing the first selection switch 190 etc. shown in FIG. 76.

FIG. 79(a) is an enlarged view of the first selection switch 190. The first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 79(a) includes a circular rotating part 190a that has 16 contacts and is configured to be rotatable, and a circular rotating part 190a that is formed to protrude outward from the rotating part 190a as a base end. and an instruction section 190b. Further, around the first selection switch 190, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are placed, corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating part 190a. The first selection switch 190 is an operation means for selecting one number from among 16 numbers.

These 16 numbers are treated as numerical values representing settings (setting values). That is, the first selection switch 190 is configured to be able to output information on the numerical value indicated by the instruction section 190b to the outside as a detection signal. For example, as shown in FIG. If it points to "B", it means that the hexadecimal value of "B" has been selected, and information on that value can be output as a binary 4-bit detection signal (0b1011). Therefore, by inputting this detection signal, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 81), which will be described later, selects the numerical value (any of the hexadecimal numbers 0 to F) selected by the first selection switch 190. The first sub-control unit 400 handles the numerical value indicated by the instruction unit 190b as the selected setting value.

Note that instead of the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 79(a), for example, a rotary switch 191 as shown in FIG. 79(b) may be applied, or a slide switch as shown in FIG. 79(c) may be used. A switch 192 may also be applied.

The rotary switch 191 shown in FIG. 79(b) has a ring-shaped rotating part 191a that has 16 contacts and is configured to be rotatable, and a notch window 191b formed in this rotating part 191a. . Further, on the bottom of the rotating part 191a of the rotary switch 191, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are provided, corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating part 191a.

This rotary switch 191 selects a numerical value visible through the cutout window 191b, and is configured to be able to output information about the numerical value to the outside as a detection signal. As shown in FIG. 79(b), when the numerical value visible from the notch 191b is "F", the hexadecimal numerical value F is selected, and the information of the numerical value is converted into 4 binary bits. It can be output as a detection signal (0b1111). Therefore, by inputting this detection signal, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 81), which will be described later, selects a selected numerical value (in this example, hexadecimal 0 to The configuration is such that it is possible to detect any one of the numerical values of F.

The slide switch 192 shown in FIG. 79(c) has a rectangular guide groove 192a and a slide portion 192b that has 16 contacts and is slidable along the guide groove 192a. Further, above the slide switch 192, 16 numbers (in this example, hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are provided, corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the slide portion 192b.

This slide switch 192 selects the numerical value at which the slide portion 192b is located, and is configured to be able to output information about the numerical value to the outside as a detection signal. As shown in FIG. 79(c), when the slide portion 192b is located at the location of the numerical value "0", it means that the numerical value of 0 in hexadecimal notation is selected, and the information of that numerical value is converted into binary notation. It can be output as a 4-bit detection signal (0b0000). Therefore, by inputting this detection signal, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 81), which will be described later, selects a selected value (a value from 0 to F in hexadecimal notation) at which the slide portion 192b of the slide switch 192 is located. The configuration is such that it is possible to detect any of the following.

Since the first selection switch 190 described above with reference to FIGS. 79(a) to 79(c) is a mechanical switch, it can be operated even when the power is not energized. Even if the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the selected numerical value (set value) can be maintained. Therefore, once a selection is made, the selected numerical value can be retained even if the power is turned off, and it is easy to set the value to the value intended by the game parlor, for example. In addition, since it is equipped with numbers (display means) that allow you to confirm the selected numerical value, it is easy to confirm the set value, and it is highly convenient.

FIG. 79(d) is an enlarged view of the second selection switch 194. The second selection switch 194 shown in FIG. 79(d) is composed of a left button 167, a right button 168, and a second chance button 166 that functions as a confirmation button, shown in FIG. While the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 79(a) is an operating means provided in a position that cannot be operated by the player, this second selection switch 194 is an operation means that cannot be operated by the player. It is an operating means provided in a position where it can be operated. That is, the second selection switch 194 is a switch that can be operated by the player. For example, by pressing the left button 167 and the right button 168, a numerical value (setting value) representing a setting can be selected. By pressing the chance button 166, the selected setting value is confirmed. Alternatively, the setting value can be selected by pressing the left button 167 and the right button 168, and after a predetermined period of time, the selected setting value is confirmed without pressing the second chance button 166. Good too.

This second selection switch 194 can output a detection signal corresponding to the second chance button 166, left button 167, or right button 168 when any one of the buttons is operated. Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 81), which will be described later, detects which of the second chance button 166, left button 167, or right button 168 has been operated by inputting this detection signal. The configuration is such that this is possible.

Note that instead of the second selection switch 194 shown in FIG. 79(d), for example, as shown in FIG. 195, and this cross key 195 may be used as the second selection switch 194. Further, two types of operating means may be provided, and either one of the operating means may also serve as a chance button, or only one of the operating means may be the second selection switch 194.

Since the second selection switch 194 is not a mechanical switch, it cannot operate when it is not energized and cannot hold the selected value (set value) by itself. Therefore, it is necessary to separately provide a storage means for storing the set values. Although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 74 is configured not to back up the numerical value selected by the second selection switch 194, it may be configured so that it is backed up.

FIG. 79(f) is a diagram comparing the sizes of the second chance button 166 and the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 74. A left button 167 and a right button 168 are also shown in FIG. 79(f). The first chance button 165 is about three times the size of the second chance button 166.

In addition, a cut-in display can be performed on the condition that the second chance button 166 or the first chance button 165 is operated, or one of the chance buttons can be used for a continuous hit effect, and the other chance button can be used as a hidden button. It's okay. Here, a hidden button is one that does not suggest or encourage operation of the operating means (for example, a button that does not suggest or encourage operation of the operating means (for example, an operation suggestion display or an operation promotion display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157, and a built-in effect lamp does not illuminate). (at least one or both), when the operating means is operated, some kind of effect is performed.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of selection of setting values using the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 74, the setting values that can be selected with the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194 include the sounds output from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 (for example, BGM, sound effects, error This is the volume value of the sound (sound, etc.). As described above, the first selection switch 190 is an operating means provided in a position that cannot be operated by a player, and is a switch used by a clerk at a game parlor when selecting a setting value. Further, only the first selection switch 190 of the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194 selects whether to set the slot machine 100 to a power saving mode or a non-power saving mode (normal mode). can also be done. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 74, the power saving mode is set only when a demonstration performance is being performed. Hereinafter, the demonstration will be abbreviated as demo. The demonstration performance is a performance that is started when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without the game being restarted after one game ended. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 74, when a demonstration performance is started with the power saving mode selected, the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode.

When the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode, the animation (demonstration animation) displayed on the effect image display device 157 is played in a dark state, thereby reducing the power consumption of the effect image display device 157 and saving power. . Furthermore, by turning off the first effect lamp built into the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 shown in FIG. 79, the power consumption of these light emitting means can be reduced. Power is saved. Note that when these light emitting means are turned off, the power consumption becomes 0, and the power saving effect of these light emitting means is higher than the power saving effect of the effect image display device 157.

Further, when the first selection switch 190 is operated, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed on the effect image display device 157. In volume selection using the first selection switch 190, one volume level is selected from seven volume levels. Additionally, in the non-power saving mode, you can also select mute.

FIG. 80(A) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "0" shown in FIG. 79(a).

The effect image display device 157 displays a first volume selection icon SI1. This first volume selection icon SI1 displays seven levels of volume level selection values and seven levels of horizontal level display (indicator display). The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 80(A) displays that the selection value of the seven volume levels is 0 (0/7) and the words "mute". Furthermore, none of the seven levels of horizontal level display are lit. When muting is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sounds from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 cannot be heard at all.

FIG. 80(B) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "1" shown in FIG. 79(a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 80(B) displays the characters "Volume 1/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven volume levels is 1. Further, in the seven-level horizontal level display, only the first level on the left is lit in the first color (for example, yellow).

FIG. 80(C) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "7" shown in FIG. 79(a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 80(C) displays the words "Volume 7/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven volume levels is 7. Furthermore, in the seven-level horizontal level display, all levels from the first level to the seventh level are lit in the first color (for example, yellow). When the seventh volume level is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sound from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 becomes the maximum volume.

FIG. 80(D) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "8" shown in FIG. 79(a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 80(D) displays characters indicating that the selected volume value is the exhibition volume. This exhibition volume is a volume suitable for presenting the slot machine 100 at an exhibition or the like, and is, for example, a volume between the fourth volume level and the fifth volume level. Furthermore, in the seven-level horizontal level display, all of the first to seventh levels are lit in the second color (for example, red). Note that instead of the exhibition volume, a special volume may be selected that cannot be selected using the second selection switch 194 and can only be selected using the first selection switch 190. For example, it may be possible to select a step tone in which the volume increases by one step each time a predetermined period of time elapses.

The first volume selection icon SI1 displayed on the effect image display device 157 disappears if the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined period of time.

FIG. 80(a) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "9" shown in FIG. 79(a).

A second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 80(a). The background color of the second volume selection icon SI2 is different from the background color of the first volume selection icon SI1. Further, the second volume selection icon SI2 displays the words "power saving mode", seven volume level selection values, and seven horizontal level display (indicator display). The second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 80(a) displays the text "power saving mode" and the text "Volume 7/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven volume levels is 7. There is. Furthermore, in the seven-level horizontal level display, all of the first to seventh levels are lit in the third color (for example, blue).

FIG. 80(b) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "F" shown in FIG. 79(a).

The second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 80(b) displays the text "power saving mode" and the text "Volume 1/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven volume levels is 1. There is. Further, in the seven-level horizontal level display, only the first level at the left end is lit in the third color (for example, blue).

The second volume selection icon SI2 displayed on the effect image display device 157 also disappears if the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined period of time.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 74, when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "9" or any of "A" to "F" shown in FIG. Setting to power saving mode is selected. Note that even if it is selected to set the power saving mode, the slot machine 100 is not set to the power saving mode, and as described above, in order to be set to the power saving mode, it is necessary to be in the demo state. becomes a condition. On the other hand, when the instruction unit 190b is set to one of "0" to "8" shown in FIG. 79(a), setting the slot machine 100 to the non-power saving mode is selected. If setting to non-power saving mode is selected, the power saving mode will not be set even if the demo state is entered. Further, while a game is being played, the slot machine 100 is set to a non-power saving mode (normal mode).

Note that the volumes output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 are the same whether the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode or the non-power saving mode. Therefore, the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 80(B) and the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 80(b) are the same, and the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 80(C) is the same. The volume output with the selected value is the same as the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 80(a).

FIG. 80(A) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the second selection switch 194 is operated.

When the second selection switch 194 that can be operated by the player is operated while the first guidance display icon GI1, which will be described later, is displayed on the effect image display device 157, the effect image display device 157 displays a third volume. A selection icon SI3 is displayed. The third volume selection icon SI3 displays five levels of volume level selection values and five levels of vertical level display (indicator display). The third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 80(A) displays the words "Volume 1/5" indicating that the selected value of the five volume levels is 1. Further, in the five level display, only the first level at the bottom is lit in the fourth color (for example, green). When the right button 168 of the second selection switch 194 is pressed once, the level increases by one level, and when the left button 167 is pressed once, the level decreases by one level. However, even if the left button 167 is pressed once in the state shown in FIG. 80(A), the level will not drop any further. That is, muting cannot be selected by operating the second selection switch 194. Note that muting may also be selected by operating the second selection switch 194.

FIG. 80(a) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the right button 168 is pressed four times from the state shown in FIG. 80(a).

The third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 80(a) displays the words "Volume 5/5" indicating that the selected value of the five volume levels is 5. Furthermore, in the five-stage vertical level display, all of the first to fifth levels are lit in the fourth color (for example, green).

The third volume selection icon SI3 displayed on the effect image display device 157 disappears if the left button 167 and the right button 168 are not operated for a predetermined period of time.

The volume selected by operating the first selection switch 190 is in seven levels, while the volume selected by operating the second selection switch 194 is in five levels. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 74, the volume setting range is from 0 to 127, and the setting values for each of the seven stages are 18 for the first stage, 36 for the second stage, 54 for the third stage, and 4 stages. The number is 73, the fifth row is 91, the sixth row is 109, and the seventh row is 127. On the other hand, in the 5th stage, excluding the 1st and 7th stages of the 7th stage, the remaining stages are the 2nd to 6th stages. That is, the second stage (36) of seven stages is the first stage of five stages, and the sixth stage (109) of seven stages is the fifth stage of five stages. Therefore, only the clerk at the game parlor can select the setting value (18) for the first stage of the seven stages and the setting value (127) for the seventh stage. In addition, the first stage (18) of the 7th stage may be the first stage of the 5th stage, the 5th stage (91) of the 7th stage may be the 5th stage of the 5th stage, or the 3rd stage of the 7th stage (54) ) may be the first stage of five stages, and the seventh stage (127) of seven stages may be the fifth stage of five stages. Alternatively, each set value in the five stages may be set to 26 for the first stage, 51 for the second stage, 76 for the third stage, 102 for the fourth stage, and 127 for the fifth stage.

While the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 and the first guidance display icon GI1, which will be described later, are displayed on the effect image display device 157, press the left button 167 of the second selection switch 194 once. When pressed, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that had been displayed until then is replaced by the third volume selection icon SI3, and a display indicating that the selected value of the volume level is the second level is displayed. . On the other hand, in the same state, if you press the right button 167 instead of the left button 167 once, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that was displayed until then will be replaced by the third volume selection icon SI3, A display appears indicating that the selected volume value is at the fourth level. These displays are displayed no matter what selection value is displayed by the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. That is, whether the selected value is 1/7 or 7/7, if the left button 167 is pressed once, the selected value of 2/5 will be displayed. Further, whether the selected value is 1/7 or 7/7, if the right button 168 is pressed once, the selected value of 4/5 will be displayed. This is because when switching to the third volume selection icon SI3, the previous selection value is discarded, the initial value of the volume level of 3/5 of the third volume selection icon SI3 is reselected, and the left button 167 or the right button 168, the initial value (3/5) is changed. That is, when the operation of the second selection switch 194 is accepted, the initial value of the third volume selection icon SI3 is set, and when the second selection switch 194 is operated, the value changed from the initial value is set as the first value. 3 Displayed as volume selection icon SI3. The first selection switch 190 is designed to be operated by a store clerk, and the second selection switch 194 is designed to be operated by a player, so that the player's intentions can be prioritized. On the other hand, if the first selection switch 190 is operated while the third volume selection icon SI3 is displayed, the selection value displayed on the third volume selection icon SI3 is inherited and the first selection By operating the switch 190, a value that has been changed from the previously selected value is displayed as the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. However, here too, the initial value (for example, 4/7) of the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 may be set without inheriting the selected value.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 81. Note that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel symbols. A ROM 306 for storing arrays, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT. (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator 315a, and a startup signal The CPU 304 starts the game control (starts the main control section main processing described later) when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338. Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal input from the medal slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, a right stop button 139 sensor, a payment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, and a left reel 110. , the index sensor of the middle reel 111, the index sensor of the right reel 112, etc.).

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, and a right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect operations of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, and are used to input medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 into a game. Detects the input operation when inputting. The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the left reel 110, the index sensor of the middle reel 111, and the index sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and a light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through them. Every time I do it, it becomes L level. The rotational position information indicating how far the reel is rotating from the reference position from once reaching the L level until the next time it becomes the L level is calculated based on the counted value of the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 that selects the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided in the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, various lamps 339 (valid line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, storage number display 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects a slot to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. Outputs gaming information (for example, information indicating gaming status) of the machine 100.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from a power management unit (not shown). If the value is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the configuration is such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command sent by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command, and this basic circuit 402 is connected to a CPU 404 for temporarily storing data. It is equipped with a RAM 408, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, lighting patterns of the backlight module 740, data for controlling various indicators, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sound source IC 418, and the sound source IC 418 is provided with an upper speaker 272 and a bass speaker 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the audio output from the amplifier, the upper speaker 272, and the bass speaker 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, title panel 162 lamp, bet button lamp 200, backlight module 740, first effect lamp built in first chance button 165, second effect lamp built in second chance button 166, etc.) are connected.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at every interrupt time. Furthermore, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a switch sensor 427, and this switch sensor 427 detects the depression of the first chance button 165. Further, the switch sensor 427 also detects the depression of each button of the second selection switch 194 consisting of the second chance button 166, the left button 167, and the right button 168. Detection signals from the shutter sensor 428 and the switch sensor 427 are output to the basic circuit 402 by the sensor circuit 426.

Further, although the first selection switch sensor 190 is directly connected to the basic circuit 402, this first selection switch sensor 190 may also be connected to the basic circuit 402 via the switch sensor 427 and the sensor circuit 426. .

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effect (for example, a control unit that controls motor drive of the shutter 163), and a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157. ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 534 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 are connected to the VDP 534 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

With the circuit configuration described above, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a control signal instructing the setting of the power saving mode to the drive circuit 422 or to the second sub-control unit 500. As a result, the effect image display device 157 receives the control signal via the second sub-control unit 500, and controls the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight. The module 740 receives the control signal without going through the second sub-controller 500.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a demo animation displayed on the performance image display device 157 as a demonstration performance.

There is a predetermined period of time during which no operation is performed by the player while the animation (non-demo animation) that has been displayed on the performance image display device 157 since the game was played or after the game ended is displayed. When the time (for example, 30 seconds) is reached, the display switches from that animation and starts displaying the demo animation. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 74, the demo animation is roughly divided into five scenes. First, the opening animation (demo animation 1/5) is displayed. In this opening animation, the entire screen of the effect image display device 157 becomes white, then the company logo gradually begins to appear from the back of the white display screen, and finally, as shown in FIG. 82(a). The company logo fully appears. When the opening animation ends, the animation in which the characters appear starts. Initially, an animation (demo animation 2/5) in which the main character, the lord, appears is displayed, as shown in FIG. 82(b). Further, when the animation in which the character appears is started, a first guide display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen of the effect image display device 157. This first guide display icon GI1 is an icon that is displayed only during the demonstration performance. In other words, it is displayed only in animations in which the characters in the demo animation appear. However, non-demo animations may also be displayed. A second selection switch 194 is displayed on the first guide display icon GI1. That is, the display 167p of the left button 167 and the display 168p of the right button 168 are both displayed in black, and the words "Volume Adjustment" are also displayed in black, and by operating the left button 167 and right button 168, the upper speaker can be adjusted. It is suggested that the volume of the output sound from the bass speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 can be adjusted. As explained using FIGS. 80(A) and 80(B), when the left button 167 is pressed once while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed, the third volume selection icon SI3 is displayed. When the right button 168 is pressed, the third volume selection icon SI3 is also displayed, and this time, the volume level of the five levels is increased by one level. Further, the display 166p of the second chance button 166 is displayed in white, and the text "gaming information" is also displayed in white, suggesting that gaming information will be displayed by operating the second chance button 166. ing.

FIG. 83(a) is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157 that is displayed when the second chance button 166 is pressed while the first guide display icon GI1 is displayed.

When the second chance button 166 is pressed while the first guide display icon GI1 is displayed, the game information displayed is a payout table. The payout table shown in FIG. 83(a) shows that 8 medals will be paid out when the symbol combination Bell-Bell-Bell is aligned on the active line explained using FIG. - It is shown that 3 medals will be paid out when the watermelon symbol combination is aligned. It is also shown that if the cherry pattern stops on the middle pattern, two medals will be paid out. This payout table is composed of multiple pages, and the payout table shown in FIG. 83(a) is the first page. The first guidance display icon GI1 displayed at the lower left of the display screen has been replaced by the second guidance display icon GI2. In the second guide display icon GI2, the text "Move page" is displayed in black on the display 167p of the left button 167 and the display 168p of the right button 168, which are displayed in black, and the left button 167 and right button 168 are operated. It has been suggested that it is possible to change the page of the payout table by doing so. With the second guidance display icon GI2 being displayed, pressing the left button 167 once will move the payout table page back by one page, and pressing the right button 168 once will move the payout table page forward by one page. Further, the word "End" is displayed in white on the display 166p of the second chance button 166, which is displayed in white, and by operating the second chance button 166, the display of the payout table can be ended. is suggested. When the second chance button 166 is pressed, the display of the payout table disappears on the display screen of the effect image display device 157, and the display of the non-demo animation is started. That is, when the second chance button 166 is operated while the demo animation is being displayed, the demonstration effect ends, and when the display of the payout table ends, the display of the non-demo animation starts.

The first guidance display icon GI1 described above corresponds to an example of the second display, and the display of the payout table corresponds to an example of the response display.

In the demo animation, following the animation in which the main character, the lord, appears as shown in FIG. 82(b), the animation in which the princess appears (demonstration animation 3/5) shown in FIG. 82(c) is displayed. In this animation as well, the first guide display icon GI1 is displayed at the bottom left. Furthermore, in the demo animation, following the animation in which the princess appears, an animation in which the old man appears (demo animation 4/5) shown in FIG. 82(d) is displayed. In this animation as well, the first guide display icon GI1 is displayed at the bottom left. At the end of the demo animation, an ending animation (demo animation 5/5) is displayed. In this ending animation, a warning display is displayed as shown in FIG. 82(e), and the first guidance display icon GI1 has disappeared. When the display of the ending animation is completed, the series of demo animations ends, and if the demo production continues, it returns to the opening animation (demonstration animation 1/5) mentioned above, the entire screen becomes white again, and from then on, a series of demonstration animations ends. The demo animation is displayed repeatedly until some operation is performed.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing step by step the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when a selection is made to set the power saving mode while a non-demo animation is being displayed.

In FIG. 84(a), the effect image display device 157 displays an animation in which a lord is sitting on the upper seat and an old man is reading a letter. This animation is an animation that is continuously displayed on the effect image display device 157 during the game, or is displayed on the effect image display device 157 after the game ends, and is different from the demo animation explained using FIG. 82. It is a different animation (hereinafter referred to as "non-demo animation"). In this non-demo animation, the lord's eyes and fan move, and the old man's hands move. Also, this non-demo animation is displayed. The brightness of the layer on which the non-demo animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157 is normal brightness, and the non-demo animation is played in a bright state. Shown are button 165, second selection switch 194 (first chance button 166, left button 167, right button 168), left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, and three reels 110-112. In the first chance button 165 shown in a), the built-in first effect lamp is lit in white, and in the second chance button 166, the built-in second effect lamp is also lit in white. Both the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R shown in (a) are lit in white.Furthermore, the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 79) provided in each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also lit in white. The three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 84(a) are illuminated in white.

Note that the light emission mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the light emission mode of the right side lamp 144R may be the same. For example, they may be lit in the same color, blink at the same timing, or both may be off. Alternatively, the light emission mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the light emission mode of the left side lamp 144L may be the same. Furthermore, among the first effect lamp, second effect lamp, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, and backlight module 740 (see FIG. 79), only the left side lamp 144L may be turned off.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 84(a), the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "6" shown in FIG. The volume is set to the sixth volume level.

In the example shown in FIG. 84, in order to operate the first selection switch 190, a clerk at a game parlor inserts a key into the key hole 140, turns the inserted key clockwise to unlock, and opens the front door 102. Even when the key is used, when the front door 102 is opened, the above-mentioned open sensor detects that the front door 102 has been opened, and the upper speaker 272 outputs a message "The door is open" when the front door 102 is opened. The error notification sound of the error is repeatedly output, and the effect image display device 157 displays an error display of the door opening error in the form of characters such as "door opening". The output of the error notification sound for the door opening error and the display of the error display continue until the front door 102 is closed. Many players think that the error notification sound is too loud for nearby players to hear. Therefore, a clerk at a game parlor may open the front door 102 while holding down the opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is opened. By doing so, the opening/closing piece does not protrude, the opening sensor no longer detects the opening of the front door 102, and an error notification of a door opening error is no longer performed. In the example shown in FIG. 84, the store clerk operates the first selection switch 190 while opening the front door 102 while holding down the opening/closing piece. An error display indicating a door opening error is not displayed on the performance image display device 157 shown in FIG. 84(b) and subsequent figures. Also, no error notification sound is output.

First, the store clerk performs a switch operation (1) to set the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "7" shown in FIG. 79(a).

When this switch operation (1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 84(b), the effect image display device 157 displays a first volume selection icon SI1 which is the same as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 80(C). is displayed to notify that the seventh volume level has been selected. Note that even if the front door 102 is opened, the non-demo animation continues to be displayed, and even if the first selection switch 190 is operated, the non-demo animation continues to be displayed.

FIG. 85 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. 84. In this FIG. 85, time passes from left to right in the figure, and the timing of (c) in FIG. 85 matches the timing of FIG. 84(c), and the timing of (d) in FIG. 84(d), and the timing of (e) in FIG. 85 matches the timing of FIG. 84(e). Further, FIG. 85 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 and the brightness of the animation display on the effect image display device 157, as well as the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 165. Also shown are the light emitting modes of various light emitting means such as the second production lamp built into the button 166, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 provided in each of the three reels 110 to 112. .

At the left end of the timing chart in FIG. 85, the non-demo animation is displayed at normal brightness on the effect image display device 157, and the first volume selection icon SI1 with the words "Volume 7/7" is also displayed. The current state is shown. Further, the various light emitting means described above are also shown in a state where they are lit in white.

Next, the store clerk performs a switch operation (2) to set the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "8" shown in FIG. 79(a).

When this switch operation (2) is performed, as shown in FIG. 84(c), the effect image display device 157 displays a first volume selection icon SI1 which is the same as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 80(D). is displayed to notify that the exhibition volume has been selected. Even at the timing (c) in the timing chart of FIG. 85, there is a state in which the non-demo animation and the first volume selection icon SI1 displaying the words "Volume for Exhibition" are displayed on the effect image display device 157. It is shown.

Subsequently, the store clerk performs a switch operation (3) to set the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "9" shown in FIG. 79(a).

Previously, the non-power-saving mode setting was selected, but when this switch operation (3) is performed, the power-saving mode setting is selected, and the volume level is selected at the 7th volume level. become in a state of being FIG. 84(d) is a diagram showing the situation immediately after this switch operation (3) is performed. As shown in FIG. 85, the time from when switch operation (3) is performed until the state shown in FIG. 84(d) is reached is as shown in FIG. The time from switch operation (2) to the state shown in FIG. 84(c) is shorter than the time from switch operation (3) to the state shown in FIG. 84(e). ) is the same length of time as the time it takes to reach the state shown in ).

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 84(d), the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 84(c) is replaced with a second volume selection icon SI2 which is the same as the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. are displayed in an overlapping manner, and in the subsequent effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 84(e), the first volume selection icon SI1 has been completely replaced by the second volume selection icon SI2. This replacement of icons is also shown in the time chart shown in FIG. 85.

The second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 84(e) displays the words "power saving mode", but this display indicates that the setting of the power saving mode has been selected; This does not indicate that the mode has been set. The non-demonstration animation continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 84(e), and remains in the non-demonstration state. Therefore, the power saving mode is not set, and as shown in the timing chart of FIG. 84(e) and FIG. 144R and the backlight module 740 (see FIG. 79) of each reel 110 to 112 remain lit in white. Further, the second effect lamp built into the second chance button 166 also remains lit in white. Furthermore, the non-demo animation is played in a bright state without being dark.

FIG. 86 shows the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the user selects to open the front door 102 while holding down the opening/closing piece to set the power saving mode while the demo animation is being displayed. FIG.

In FIG. 86(a), the demonstration effect has started, and the effect image display device 157 has started displaying the opening animation (demonstration animation 1/5) shown in FIG. 82(a). That is, on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 86(a), after the entire display screen once turns white, the company logo that has gradually started to appear from the back is displayed in a state where it has completely appeared. Also, the demo animation is played brightly instead of dark. 86, the first chance button 165, second selection switch 194 (first chance button 166, left button 167, right button 168), left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, and three reels 110-112 are shown. Further, in the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 86(a), the built-in first effect lamp is lit in white, and in the second chance button 166, the built-in second effect lamp is also lit in white. . Further, both the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R shown in FIG. 86(a) are lit in white. Furthermore, the backlight module 740 (see FIG. 79) provided on each of the three reels 110 to 112 is also illuminated in white, and the three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 86(a) are illuminated in white. .

In addition, also in the demonstration effect, the light emission mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the light emission mode of the right side lamp 144R may be the same. For example, they may be lit in the same color, blink at the same timing, or both may be off. Alternatively, the light emission mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the light emission mode of the left side lamp 144L may be the same. Furthermore, among the first effect lamp, second effect lamp, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, and backlight module 740 (see FIG. 79), only the left side lamp 144L may be turned off. Alternatively, the first effect lamp may be blinking in white, and the right side lamp 144R may be lit in red.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 86(a), the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "6" shown in FIG. The volume is set to the sixth volume level.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 86 as well as the example shown in FIG. operate. The error display of the door opening error is not displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 86(b) and thereafter. Also, no error notification sound is output.

First, in this example, as in the example shown in FIG. 84, the store clerk performs a switch operation (1) to set the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "7" shown in FIG. 79(a).

When this switch operation (1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 86(b), the effect image display device 157 displays a first volume selection icon SI1 which is the same as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 80(C). is displayed to notify that the seventh volume level has been selected. Note that even if the front door 102 is opened, the demo animation continues to be displayed, and even if the first selection switch 190 is operated, the demo animation continues to be displayed. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 86(b) displays the animation (demonstration animation 2/5) in which the main character, the lord, appears, as explained using FIG. 82(b), and the first guide The display of the display icon GI1 has started. This first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed overlapping a part of the first volume selection icon SI1, but conversely, the first volume selection icon SI1 is displayed overlapping a part of the first guidance display icon GI1. They may be displayed in an overlapping manner.

Next, the store clerk performs a switch operation (2) to set the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "8" shown in FIG. 79(a).

When this switch operation (2) is performed, as shown in FIG. 86(c), the effect image display device 157 displays a first volume selection icon SI1 which is the same as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 80(D). is displayed to notify that the exhibition volume has been selected. Furthermore, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 86(c) displays the animation in which the princess appears (demo animation 3/5), which was explained using FIG. 82(c), and the first The guidance display icon GI1 continues to be displayed. The first volume selection icon SI1 of the exhibition volume, which started displaying later than the first guide display icon GI1, overlaps with the first guide display icon GI1.

Subsequently, the store clerk performs a switch operation (3) to set the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "9" shown in FIG. 79(a).

Previously, the non-power-saving mode setting was selected, but when this switch operation (3) is performed, the power-saving mode setting is selected, and the volume level is selected at the 7th volume level. become in a state of being

FIG. 87 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. 86. In FIG. 87, as in FIG. 85, time passes from left to right in the diagram. Furthermore, the timing of (c) in FIG. 87 coincides with the timing of FIG. 86(c), and the subsequent timings of (d) to (h) are the same as those of FIG. 86(d) to (h). We are doing so. Furthermore, FIG. 87 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157, and also shows a first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, a second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166, and a left side Also shown are the light emitting modes of various light emitting means such as the lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 provided in each of the three reels 110 to 112.

Also at the left end of the timing chart in FIG. 87, an animation in which a princess appears (demonstration animation 3/5) is displayed in a bright state on the effect image display device 157, and a first A state in which a volume selection icon SI1 and a first guidance display icon GI1 are also displayed is shown. Further, the various light emitting means described above are also shown in a state where they are lit in white.

FIG. 86(d) is a diagram showing the state immediately after this switch operation (3) is performed, and the state shown stepwise after FIG. The state will be shown at a shorter time interval than the state shown.

When setting the power saving mode is selected while the demonstration performance is being executed, that is, the demo animation is being displayed, the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode. In FIG. 86(d), the power saving mode has already been set, and the first production lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and each of the three reels 110 to 112 The provided backlight module 740 is turned off to save power. That is, among the light emitting means that have been lit in white until now, the light emitting means other than the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 are turned off. While the power saving mode is set, only this second effect lamp continues to light in white. Furthermore, in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 86(d), the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 86(c) has the same second volume selection as the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 80(a). The icons SI2 are displayed in an overlapping manner.

Furthermore, if the power saving mode is selected while the demo animation is being displayed, the display of the demo animation will start from the beginning. In other words, as mentioned above, if you select to set the power saving mode while the demo animation is displayed, the power saving mode will be set. is started from the beginning. On the other hand, as explained using FIG. 84, even if it is selected to set the power saving mode when the demo animation is not displayed, the power saving mode is not set and the demo animation is not displayed. It never starts from the beginning. As shown in the timing chart of FIG. 87, at the timing of FIG. 86(d), while demo animation 3/5 is displayed on the effect image display device 157, the opening animation of the demo animation (demo animation 1/5) is played. will also be started.

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 86(e), the first volume selection icon SI1 is completely replaced by the second volume selection icon SI2. Furthermore, the display of demo animation 3/5 has ended, and a company logo has begun to appear faintly on the display screen, which has once turned completely white with the start of the opening animation (demonstration animation 1/5). Furthermore, the first guide display icon GI1 has disappeared.

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 86(f), the company logo has appeared quite clearly, but since the second volume selection icon SI2 overlaps, the company logo is not shown in FIG. 86(a). It is more difficult to see than the state shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 86(f), a power saving mode setting display AI that notifies that the power saving mode is set, ``power saving mode setting in progress'', is started to be displayed at the bottom of the display screen.

At the timing shown in FIG. 86(g), the demo animation begins to darken. When the demo animation starts to get dark, it becomes harder to see than before it starts getting dark, but the visibility of the power saving mode setting display AI and the second volume selection icon SI2 remains unchanged, and the power saving mode setting display AI and The second volume selection icon SI2 is clearly visible. That is, the brightness of the power saving mode setting display AI and the brightness of the second volume selection icon SI2 do not change.

At the timing shown in FIG. 86(h), the first guide display icon GI1 that has disappeared is re-displayed. The redisplayed first guide display icon GI1 is displayed on the nearest layer, partially overlapping the second volume selection icon SI2, and also overlapping the power saving mode setting display AI. The visibility of the first guide display icon GI1 is also the same as that of the first guide display icon GI1 in FIG. 86(b), and the first guide display icon GI1 is also clearly visible. That is, the brightness of the first guide display icon GI1 also does not change.

Note that the power saving mode setting display AI may be displayed on the nearest layer, and may overlap a part of the first guide display icon GI1. Alternatively, the second volume selection icon SI2 may be displayed on the nearest layer, partially overlapping the first guidance display icon GI1, and partially overlapping the power saving mode setting display AI.

The time from when the demonstration animation starts to darken until it becomes completely dark on the effect image display device 157 (FIGS. 86(g) to 86(h)) is determined by the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left The time is longer than the time during which the side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 provided in each of the three reels 110 to 112 are turned off at the timing shown in FIG. 86(d). If the demo animation suddenly becomes dark, the player may think that the effect image display device 157 is malfunctioning or be surprised, but by taking the time to darken the demo animation in this way, the player can transition to the power saving mode. In some cases, players may notice this.

Note that even if the store clerk operates the switch to change the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 from "9" to "8" shown in FIG. 79(a) while the demo animation is displayed in the power saving mode. The demo animation will start displaying from the beginning. In other words, if you select to set to non-power saving mode while the demo animation is displayed, the mode will be set to non-power saving mode, and if you set to non-power saving mode, the demo animation will be displayed from the beginning. The demo animation that was started and played darkly will now be played brightly. Before the demo animation became bright, the light emitting means that had been turned off in the power saving mode (the first production lamp built into the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the three reels 110 to 112) The backlight module 740) provided in each starts lighting. On the other hand, even if you select to change from power saving mode to non-power saving mode when the demo animation is not displayed, the setting will not change because it is already set to non-power saving mode, and the demo animation The display will not start from the beginning.

If the second chance button 166, which is lit in white, is pressed in accordance with the first guidance display icon GI1 while the power saving mode is set, the mode returns to the non-power saving mode, the demonstration animation display ends, and the display shown in Fig. The payout table shown in 83(a) is displayed. Also, if the left button 167 or right button 168 is pressed in accordance with the first guide display icon GI1, the mode returns to the non-power saving mode and changes from the demo animation to the non-demo animation (for example, the animation of the lord and the old man shown in FIG. 84). ), and the third volume selection icon SI3 described using FIGS. 80(A) and 80(B) is displayed.

Also, if the unlit first chance button 165 is pressed while the power saving mode is set, the mode returns to the non-power saving mode, and the demo animation changes to the non-demo animation (for example, the lord shown in FIG. 84). (Tooji's anime), and a certain production may also start.

FIG. 83(b) is a diagram showing a display screen that is displayed when the first chance button 165 is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 86(h).

In the state shown in FIG. 86(h), the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed on the display screen of the effect image display device 157. As described above, the first guidance display icon GI1 does not include the display of the first chance button 165, and the first guidance display icon GI1 is not a display related to the first chance button 165. Furthermore, since the power saving mode is being executed, the first effect lamp built into the first chance button 165 is turned off. In this state, not only is pressing the first chance button 165 not encouraged, but there is also no suggestion regarding the first chance button 165. Nevertheless, when the first chance button 165 is operated, a setting suggestion display for the slot machine 100 is displayed as the above-mentioned certain effect. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, setting values are set that give different degrees of advantage to players. Settings 1 to 6 are prepared as setting values. There is a tendency that the higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage. Although the player normally cannot know this setting value, a setting suggestion display may be displayed as shown in FIG. 83(b). If only the lord's character is displayed, odd number settings (settings 1, 3, and 5) are suggested. If only the old man character is displayed, this suggests an even number setting (setting 2, 4, 6). If only the princess character is displayed, this suggests that the setting is 3 or higher. If both the lord and princess characters are displayed, this suggests that setting 5 or setting 6 is selected. When such a setting suggestion display is performed, the first chance button 165 corresponds to a hidden button.

Note that even if the first chance button 165 is pressed in the states shown in FIGS. 86(d) to 86(g) before the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed, the setting suggestion display is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Alternatively, in the states shown in FIGS. 86(d) to 86(g), even if the first chance button 165 is pressed, the setting suggestion display may not be displayed on the effect image display device 157. You can also do this. Further, whether or not the setting suggestion display is displayed may be determined by a lottery when the first chance button 165 is pressed, or may be determined by the timing at which the first chance button 165 is pressed.

FIG. 88 shows the appearance of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the user selects to open the front door 102 without pressing the opening/closing piece and set the power saving mode while the demo animation is being displayed. FIG.

The example shown in FIG. 88 is an example in which an error notification of a door opening error is being performed. Hereinafter, the differences from the example shown in FIG. 86 in which the error notification of door open error is stopped will be mainly explained.

In the example shown in FIG. 88, before the demo animation starts, the clerk at the game store opens the front door 102. At this time, since the clerk at the game parlor opened the front door 102 without holding down the opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is opened, an error notification of a door opening error is started. That is, the effect image display device 157 displays an error message indicating a door opening error in the form of characters such as "Door is opening," and in FIG. The error notification sound is repeatedly output.

In FIG. 88(a), the demonstration effect has started, and the effect image display device 157 has started displaying the opening animation (demonstration animation 1/5). At the upper left of the display screen of the effect image display device 157, an error display EI1 indicating a door opening error is displayed in the form of characters such as "door opening". This error display EI1 is displayed on the layer closest to you, and continues to be displayed until the front door 102 is closed.

Further, in the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 88(a), the built-in first effect lamp is lit in red, and in conjunction with the first effect lamp, the right side lamp 144R is also lit in red. . On the other hand, the second effect lamp built into the second chance button 166 is also lit in white. Further, the left side lamp 144L is also lit white. Furthermore, the backlight module 740 (see FIG. 79) provided on each of the three reels 110 to 112 is also illuminated in white, and the three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 88(a) are illuminated in white. .

The clerk operates the first selection switch 190 (1), and as shown in FIG. 88(b), the effect image display device 157, which displays the demo animation in which the lord appears, displays "Volume 7". A first volume selection icon SI1 with characters "/7" displayed thereon is displayed. Further, at the lower left, display of the first guide display icon GI1 has started.

Next, the store clerk operates the first selection switch 190 (2), and as shown in FIG. A first volume selection icon SI1 with the words "Volume for Exhibition" displayed thereon is displayed. Furthermore, a first guide display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left.

Subsequently, the clerk operates the first selection switch 190 (3), and the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode. In FIG. 88(d), the power saving mode has already been set, but only the backlight modules 740 provided in each of the three reels 110 to 112 are turned off. That is, the first effect lamp built into the first chance button 165 is still lit in red, and the right side lamp 144R is also kept lit in red. Further, the second effect lamp built into the second chance button 166 is still lit in white, and the left side lamp 144L is also kept lit in white. The off state of the backlight module 740 continues until the setting of the power saving mode is completed.

Further, the display of the demo animation starts from the beginning, and while the demo animation 3/5 in which the princess appears is displayed, the opening animation of the demo animation (demo animation 1/5) also starts to be played. Furthermore, in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 88(d), a second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed to overlap the first volume selection icon SI1. Note that even if the power saving mode is set, the error display EI1 remains displayed. The subsequent steps are the same as the example shown in FIG. 86, except for the aspects of the various light emitting means and the fact that the error display EI1 is continuously displayed, so the explanation will be omitted.

In this example as well, while the demo animation was being displayed in the power saving mode, the store clerk operated the switch to change the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 from "9" to "8" shown in FIG. 79(a). In this case, the display of the demo animation will start from the beginning. In other words, if you select to set to non-power saving mode while the demo animation is displayed, the mode will be set to non-power saving mode, and if you set to non-power saving mode, the demo animation will be displayed from the beginning. The demo animation that was started and played darkly will now be played brightly. Before the demo animation became bright, the light emitting means that had been turned off in the power saving mode (the first production lamp built into the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the three reels 110 to 112) The backlight module 740) provided in each starts lighting. On the other hand, even if you select to change from power saving mode to non-power saving mode when the demo animation is not displayed, the setting will not change because it is already set to non-power saving mode, and the demo animation The display will not start from the beginning.

FIG. 89 is a diagram showing step by step the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when a selection is made to set the power saving mode while the hopper empty error continues to occur.

Inside the slot machine 100, a motor-driven medal discharging device 180 (see FIG. 76) is provided. During the medal dispensing operation, when the game medals in the bucket run out, the medal dispensing sensor detects that a predetermined first time has elapsed. If the hopper does not turn on even when the motor is turned on, and recovery cannot be achieved even after performing the recovery process of rotating the motor in reverse, a hopper empty error will be notified. The hopper empty error occurs by opening the front door 102, replenishing the bucket with medals, and pressing the reset button provided inside the slot machine 100, or by closing the front door 102 and pressing the key inserted into the key hole 140 to the left. The error will be cleared by turning it to .

FIG. 89(a) is a diagram showing a state in which a hopper empty error occurs. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 89(a) displays an error notification in the background display of the error notification (background display of diagonal hatching). In other words, there is an error display EI2 that does not specify the error that has occurred, such as "Error has occurred," and an error display EI3 that explains how to clear the hopper empty error, such as "Please replenish medals and then press the reset switch." Displayed. Note that an error display indicating an instruction to the player such as "Please call the store clerk" may also be displayed.

Further, in the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 89(a), the built-in first effect lamp is lit in red, and in conjunction with the first effect lamp, the right side lamp 144R is also lit in red. . On the other hand, the second effect lamp built into the second chance button 166 is off. Further, the left side lamp 144L is lit white. Furthermore, the backlight module 740 (see FIG. 79) provided on each of the three reels 110 to 112 is also illuminated in white, and the three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 89(a) are illuminated in white. .

The clerk at the game parlor opens the front door 102 without pressing the opening/closing piece, and performs a switch operation (1) to set the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "7" shown in FIG. 79(a). Since the error display EI2 such as "Error Occurrence" is displayed on the effect image display device 157, this error display EI2 is also used to notify the error of the door opening error, and the text such as "Door Opening" shown in FIG. 88 is displayed. The error display EI of the door opening error is not displayed. Further, an error notification sound indicating a door opening error such as "The door is open" is not output. Note that an error notification sound indicating an instruction to the player such as "Please replenish medals" may be output. Alternatively, an error display EI indicating a door opening error may be displayed, or an error notification sound indicating a door opening error may be output.

As a result of the store clerk's switch operation (1) of the first selection switch 190, as shown in FIG. A first volume selection icon SI1 displaying the characters "7/7" is displayed overlapping an error display EI2 indicating "Error Occurrence." The first volume selection icon SI1 may be displayed on the nearest layer, and if an error display indicating an instruction to the player such as "Please call the store clerk" is also displayed, this error display are also displayed overlapping. Alternatively, an error display EI3 explaining how to cancel the hopper empty error may be displayed on the nearest layer.

Next, the clerk operates the first selection switch 190 (2), and as shown in FIG. A first volume selection icon SI1 with the words "Meeting volume" displayed thereon is displayed.

Subsequently, the store clerk operates the first selection switch 190 (3) to select the power saving mode setting, and the volume level becomes the state in which the seventh volume level is selected. However, since the state shown in FIG. 89(d) is not a state in which the demonstration effect is being executed, the power saving mode is not set, and the display of the demo animation is not started from the beginning. On the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 89(d), instead of the first volume selection icon SI1, a second volume selection icon SI2 on which the words "power saving mode" are displayed displays an error message such as "Error Occurrence". It is displayed overlapping display EI2.

Further, in FIG. 89(d), there is no change in the aspects of the various light emitting means, and only the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 remains off.

In addition, in the above explanation, the power saving mode was not set unless the demo effect was being executed, but if the power saving mode setting was selected, it could be set while the game was being played. However, a power saving mode may be set.

In addition, when the power saving mode is set, the animation is played in a dark state to save power. Although power is saved by turning off the backlight module 740 shown in 79, power may be saved in other devices as well. For example, when the power saving mode is set, the output sound from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 may be lowered, the effect movable body may not be moved, or its movement may be restricted. Alternatively, the brightness of the entire display screen of the effect image display device 157 may be reduced, not limited to the reproduction of animation. Further, the second effect lamp built into the second chance button 166 may also be turned off. Furthermore, instead of completely turning off the light emitting means such as the first effect lamp, the second effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740, the brightness (light amount) is reduced. Even if the light is dimmed, it will save power.

Furthermore, the timing to start power saving is different for the first effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the backlight module 740 (the timing shown in FIG. 86(d)), and the effect image display device 157 (the timing shown in FIG. 86(d)). Although the timing is different from the timing of (g)), the first effect lamp, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 start power saving first, and the right side lamp 144R and the effect image display device 157 start saving power later. It may also be possible to start power saving. In addition to the effect image display device 157, a second effect image display device with a small display screen is provided, and the second effect image display device starts power saving first, and the effect image display device 157 starts power saving later. You can do it like this. In addition, combinations of light emitting means and sound output means, combinations of effect movable bodies and display means, combinations of light emitting means and effect movable bodies, combinations of effect movable bodies and sound output means, combinations of display means and sound output means, etc. The timing for starting power saving may be different.

Further, although the brightness (light amount) of the various lamps could not be selected by operating the first selection switch 190, the brightness (light amount) level of the various lamps could also be changed by operating the first selection switch 190 in the same way as the volume level. It may be possible to select it by operation.

Furthermore, although the explanation so far has been given using the slot machine 100 as an example, the selection of the volume level and the selection of setting the power saving mode by operating the first selection switch 190 described above are similar to those of the pachinko machine. It can also be applied to machines.

FIG. 90 is a rear view of a pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied, seen from the back side.

The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100P has a ball tank 150P that has an upwardly opening opening for temporarily storing game balls, and a ball tank 150P that is located below this ball tank 150P and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150P. A tank rail 154P is provided for guiding balls falling through the formed communication hole to a dispensing device 152P located on the right side of the rear surface.

The dispensing device 152P is made of a cylindrical member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily retains the game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154P and flowed down into the payout device 152P, and rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Accordingly, the temporarily retained game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152P.

The payout sensor is a sensor that detects the passing of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and it sends either a high or low signal when the game ball is passing, and when the game ball is not passing, it sends either a high or low signal. The other signal, either high or low, is output to the payout control section. The game balls that have passed through this payout sensor are configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper tray provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 100P. A ball is paid out to the player.

On the left side of the payout device 152P in the figure, there is a main board case 158P that houses a main board 156P that constitutes a main control unit that performs control processing for the overall game, and a main board case 158P that stores a main board 156P that performs control processing related to effects based on processing information generated by the main control unit. A first sub-board case 162P that houses a first sub-board 160P constituting a first sub-control unit to perform, a second sub-control unit that performs control processing related to presentation based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit A second sub-board case 165P that houses a second sub-board 164P that performs the processing, a payout board 170P that constitutes a payout control unit that performs control processing regarding the payout of game balls, and includes an error cancellation switch 168P that cancels errors by operation of a gaming clerk. A payout board case 172P that houses a payout board case 172P that houses a launch board 174P that constitutes a launch control unit that performs control processing regarding the launch of game balls, and a launch board case 176P that accommodates a launch board 174P that constitutes a power supply control unit that supplies power to various electrical gaming devices. and a power supply board case 184P that houses a power supply board 182P that includes a power switch 178P that turns the power on and off when operated by a game store clerk, and an RWM clear switch 180P that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit when operated when the power is turned on; Further, a CR interface unit 186P for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit and the card unit is provided.

The RWM clear switch 180P is a switch that can clear the RWM (initialize the RAM) by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 100P while operating it. In addition, when the RAM clear switch 180P is operated and the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, a predetermined notification (for example, a text display or sound "Please press again to clear RAM", or a text display) and sound), and when the operation is performed again, the RAM may be cleared.

Furthermore, a first selection switch 190P, which is the same as the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 79(a), is provided at the upper left of the first sub-board case 162P. Since this first selection switch 190P is disposed on the back of the pachinko machine 100P, a person who can unlock the front frame door of the pachinko machine 100P (for example, a clerk at a game parlor) cannot open the front frame door. The player can perform the operation by opening the front frame door, but the system is configured such that a person (for example, a player) who cannot unlock the front frame door cannot perform the operation.

The RWM clear switch 180P is located at the bottom left of the back, and the first selection switch 190P is located at the top left of the back. It may be placed at a position far from the gap created when the door is opened, or vice versa.

According to the above description,
“A first device [for example, a first production lamp built into the first chance button 165, a left side lamp 144L, a right side lamp 144R, a backlight module 740],
a second device [for example, the effect image display device 157],
The first setting [for example, power saving mode setting] can be selected according to the operation [for example, by setting the instruction section 190b to "9" or any of "A" to "F" shown in FIG. 79(a). a selection operation means [for example, the first selection switch 190],
A game machine comprising:
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first device shifts to a first state [for example, a light-off state or a dimmed state] corresponding to the first setting. There may be cases where
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second device changes to a second state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a state in which a demo animation is played in a dark state]. ].
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first device shifts to the first state [for example, FIG. 86(d)], and then the second device The state may shift to the second state [for example, FIGS. 86(g) to 86(h)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be easier to confirm that the first device has transitioned to the first state and that the second device has transitioned to the second state. That is, since there is a time lag, it may be possible to check the second state of the second device after checking the first state of the first device.

Also,
``Even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first device does not shift to the first state unless it is in a certain state [for example, a demo state]. ,
The second device does not shift to the second state unless it is in the certain state [for example, a demo state] even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected. ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the above-mentioned certain state refers to a state where a demonstration performance is being performed (demonstration state).

Also,
``The selection operation means is capable of selecting a second setting [for example, setting of non-power saving mode (normal mode)] according to the operation [for example, setting the instruction section 190b to "0" shown in FIG. 79(a). ～If matched with any of ``8''],
The first device consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting,
The second device consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, the first setting is a power saving setting, whereas the second setting is a non-power saving setting (normal setting).

Also,
“The number of the first devices [e.g., 6] is greater than the number of the second devices [e.g., 1],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to reduce power consumption by giving priority to the first device, which has a large number of devices, and shifting the device to the first state.

Also,
"The power consumption [for example, 0] of the first device in the first state is smaller than the power consumption of the second device in the second state,"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, the first device has a higher power saving effect than the second device.

Note that the power consumption in the first device that is executing a certain effect may be greater than the power consumption in the second device that is executing the certain effect. The power consumption can be suppressed by giving priority to the first device that consumes a large amount of power and shifting it to the first state.

Also,
``The selection operation means is provided in a position where the player cannot operate it [for example, inside the main body 101 or on the back side of the game machine].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“A first control means [for example, first sub-control unit 400] that controls the first device;
a second control means [for example, VDP516] for controlling the second device;
Equipped with
The first control means transmits a first signal regarding the first setting,
The first device receives the first signal from the first control means without going through the second control means,
The second device receives the first signal via the second control means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The main control means controls the progress of the game, and the sub-control means receives commands transmitted from the main control means and performs control based on the commands, and the sub-control means controls the first and the second control means. Further, the sub-control means may be a means for controlling effects.

Also,
“The time required for the second device to transition from a state different from the second state to the second state [for example, FIGS. 86(g) to 86(h)] is longer than the time required for the device to transition from a state different from the first state to the first state [e.g., FIG. 86(d)];
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The first device is a first presentation means [for example, a first light emitting means, a first display means],
The second device is a second presentation means [for example, a second light emitting means, a second display means],
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first presentation means shifts to the first state, and then the second presentation means shifts to the second state. There may be cases where
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 74],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The gaming machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 90],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In addition,
"A game machine comprising a first notification means, a second notification means, and an operation means capable of setting a first performance setting, the operation means being operated to set the first performance setting. is set, the first notification means becomes a notification mode corresponding to the first production setting, and then the second notification means becomes a notification mode corresponding to the first production setting. A game machine featuring
Also explained.

Also,
"The operating means is a means that can set a second effect setting by being operated, and the first effect setting is a setting in which the power consumption of the notification means is lower than the second effect setting. A game machine characterized by the following.
Also explained.

Also,
"A gaming machine characterized in that the number of the first notification means is greater than the number of the second notification means."
Also explained.

Also,
"A gaming machine characterized in that the power consumption of the first notifying means that is notifying a certain notification is greater than the power consumption of the second notifying device that is notifying the certain notification."
Also explained.

Also,
"A gaming machine characterized in that the operating means is a means that cannot be operated by a player."
Also explained.

Also,
"The first notification means includes a first control means and a second control means, and the first notification means transmits a signal related to the first effect setting from the first control means to the second control means." The second notification means receives a signal regarding the first effect setting from the first control means via the second control means. A distinctive game machine.”
Also explained.

Also,
"The time it takes to change from a notification mode that does not correspond to the first performance setting to a notification mode that corresponds to the first performance setting is longer for the second notification means than for the first notification means. A game machine characterized by its long length.
Also explained.

According to the above description,
``Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
a selection operation means [for example, first selection switch 190] capable of selecting a first setting [for example, power saving mode setting] according to the operation;
A game machine comprising:
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected [for example, when the instruction section 190b is set to "9" or any of "A" to "F" shown in FIG. 79(a) ], the display means may start displaying the first animation [e.g., demo animation] from the beginning [e.g., FIG. 86(d)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, it becomes easy to check the first animation from the beginning.

Also,
“When the selection operation means is operated while the first animation is displayed and the first setting is selected, the display means selects the first setting. restarts the display of the animation from the beginning [for example, FIG. 86(d)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the first animation may be a demo animation. The demo animation is an animation that starts to be displayed on the display means when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without restarting the game after one game ended. In other words, the demo animation starts when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) is reached in which no operation is performed by the player while the second animation (non-demo animation) is being displayed. This is an anime that will be played.

Also,
``The display means is configured such that when the selection operation means is operated [for example, switch operation (3) shown in FIG. 84] while the second animation [for example, the non-demo animation shown in FIG. 84] is displayed, the first Even if the setting is selected, the display of the first animation is not started from the beginning [for example, the example shown in FIG. 85],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, the game machine according to this example is a game machine that includes a light emitting means, a display means, and a selection operation means that can select a power saving mode setting according to an operation, and the light emitting means is , when the selection operation means is operated and the power saving mode setting is selected, the display means may shift to a first state corresponding to the power saving mode setting; When the selection operation means is operated and the power saving mode setting is selected, the means may shift to a second state corresponding to the power saving mode setting, and when the selection operation means is operated, the power saving mode setting is selected. When the power saving mode setting is selected and the display means shifts to the second state, the light emitting means shifts after shifting to the first state, and the light emitting means does not display the non-demo animation. Even if the selection operation means is operated and the power saving mode setting is selected while the demo animation is displayed, the selection operation means does not shift to the first state. means for shifting to the first state when the setting of the power saving mode is selected by operation, and the selection operation means is operated while the display means is displaying the demo animation to set the power saving mode; is selected, the display means does not display the demo animation to the end and starts displaying the demo animation anew from the beginning, and the display means displays the selection screen while displaying the non-demo animation. The gaming machine is characterized in that even if the power saving mode setting is selected by operating the operating means, the means does not start displaying the demo animation from the beginning.
Further, the game machine according to the present example is a game machine that includes a light emitting means, a display means, and a selection operation means that can select a power saving mode setting according to an operation, wherein the light emitting means is , when the selection operation means is operated and the power saving mode setting is selected, the display means may shift to a first state corresponding to the power saving mode setting; When the selection operation means is operated and the power saving mode setting is selected, the means may shift to a second state corresponding to the power saving mode setting, and when the selection operation means is operated, the power saving mode setting is selected. When the power saving mode setting is selected and the display means shifts to the second state, the light emitting means shifts after shifting to the first state, and the light emitting means does not display the non-demo animation. Even if the selection operation means is operated and the power saving mode setting is selected while the demo animation is displayed, the selection operation means does not shift to the first state. The display means moves to the first state when the power saving mode setting is selected by the operation, and the display means moves to the first state when the selection operation means is operated while the non-demo animation is displayed. Even if the power saving mode setting is selected, the display of the demo animation is not started from the beginning, but the selection operation means is operated while the demo animation is being displayed and the power saving mode setting is selected. When the demo animation is displayed, the demo animation is started from the beginning without being displayed to the end, and the display on the display unit can be dimmed by setting the power saving mode. When the selection operation means is operated and the power saving mode setting is selected while the demo animation is being displayed, the display of the demo animation that is newly started from the beginning is changed to the final one. The game machine is characterized in that the display regarding the power saving mode starts to be displayed on the display means before the display is displayed in a certain darkness.

Also,
``Even if the selection operation means is operated [for example, switch operation (3) shown in FIG. 84] and the first setting is selected while the second animation is being displayed, The animation continues to be displayed [for example, FIG. 84(d)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the second animation may be an animation that is not displayed in the certain state (for example, demo state).

Also,
``When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected while the first animation is being displayed, the display means displays the first animation that has started displaying from the beginning. Display in a display mode [for example, a darkened display mode] corresponding to the settings [for example, FIGS.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``Equipped with a presentation means [for example, a first presentation lamp built into the first chance button 165, a left side lamp 144L, a right side lamp 144R, a backlight module 740],
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the presentation means shifts to a first state [for example, a lights-out state or a dimmed state] corresponding to the first setting. There is a
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means changes to a second state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a state in which the demo animation is played in a dark state]. may be transferred,
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the presentation means shifts to the first state [for example, FIG. 86(d)], and then the display means changes to the second setting. state [for example, FIGS. 86(g) to 86(h)].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the presentation means may be a light emitting means. Further, the first state may refer to a state in which the effect means executes an effect corresponding to the first setting. Further, the second state refers to a state in which the first animation is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the first setting.

Also,
``Even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the presentation means does not change the state to the first state unless the first animation is displayed [for example, a demo state]. It does not transfer to
The display means is configured such that even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means returns to the second state unless the first animation is displayed [for example, a demo state]. It is something that does not migrate,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The selection operation means is capable of selecting a second setting [for example, setting of non-power saving mode (normal mode)] according to the operation [for example, setting the instruction section 190b to "0" shown in FIG. 79(a). ～If matched with any of ``8''],
The production means consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting,
The display means consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, the first setting is a power saving setting, whereas the second setting is a non-power saving setting (normal setting).

Also,
“The number of the presentation means [for example, 6] is greater than the number of the display means [for example, 1],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, power consumption can be suppressed by preferentially transitioning the performance means that have a large number to the first state.

Also,
"The power consumption [for example, 0] of the presentation means in the first state is smaller than the power consumption of the display means in the second state,"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, the effect of power saving is higher for the presentation means than for the display means.

Note that the power consumption in the presentation means that is executing a certain presentation may be greater than the power consumption in the display device that is executing the certain presentation. Power consumption can be suppressed by giving priority to the presentation means that consumes a large amount of power and shifting it to the first state.

Also,
``The selection operation means is provided in a position where the player cannot operate it [for example, inside the main body 101 or on the back side of the game machine].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“A first control means [for example, the first sub-control unit 400] that controls the production means;
a second control means [for example, VDP516] for controlling the display means;
Equipped with
The first control means transmits a first signal regarding the first setting,
The presentation means receives the first signal from the first control means without going through the second control means,
The display means receives the first signal via the second control means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The main control means controls the progress of the game, and the sub-control means receives commands transmitted from the main control means and performs control based on the commands, and the sub-control means controls the first and the second control means. Further, the sub-control means may be a means for controlling effects.

Also,
“The time required for the display means to shift from a state different from the second state to the second state [for example, FIGS. 86(g) to 86(h)] longer than the time required to transition from a state different from the first state to the first state [for example, FIG. 86(d)];
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 74],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The gaming machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 90],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to the above description,
"A first light emitting means [for example, a first production lamp built into the first chance button 165, a left side lamp 144L, a right side lamp 144R, a backlight module 740],
a second light emitting means [for example, a second effect lamp built into the second chance button 166];
The first setting [for example, power saving mode setting] can be selected according to the operation [for example, by setting the instruction section 190b to "9" or any of "A" to "F" shown in FIG. 79(a). a selection operation means [for example, the first selection switch 190],
A game machine comprising:
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first light emitting means shifts to a state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a light-off state or a dimming state]. [For example, FIG. 86(d)]
Even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second light emitting means does not shift to a state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a light-off state or a dimming state]. [For example, it remains lit white in FIG. 86(d)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, the difference between the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means is recognized by simultaneously recognizing that the state corresponds to the first setting and that the state does not shift. It may become easier.

Also,
“A first operation means [e.g., first chance button 165],
a second operation means [e.g., second chance button 166];
Equipped with
The first operation means has the first light emitting means [for example, a first effect lamp],
The second operation means has the second light emitting means [for example, a second effect lamp],
The selection operation means can select a second setting [for example, setting of non-power saving mode (normal mode)] according to the operation [for example, the instruction section 190b can be set to "0" to "0" shown in FIG. 79(a). If matched with any of "8"],
The first setting is a setting that reduces power consumption of the first light emitting means more than the second setting.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The player can easily recognize that the first operating means can be operated by lighting or blinking the first light emitting means. Moreover, the player can easily recognize that the second operating means can be operated by lighting or blinking the second light emitting means. Furthermore, the first setting is a power saving setting, and the second operating means having the second light emitting means that does not shift to a state corresponding to this setting is operable even if the first setting is set. The player can be made aware that this is possible. Moreover, as a result, the load placed on the first operating means can also be reduced.

Also,
``Equipped with display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
The display means is capable of displaying a second display regarding the second operation means [for example, the first guide display icon GI1] in a state where the first setting is set [for example, FIG. 86 (b) to (d) and (h) in the same figure],
With the first setting set, the second display is displayed on the display means, and when the second operation means is operated, the display means displays a response to the operation [e.g. The payout table shown in FIG. 83(a) is displayed.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the second display may be an operation promotion display that promotes operation of the second operation means, or may be an operation promotion display that suggests operation of the second operation means. , the second operating means may be displayed. This second display corresponds to, for example, the first guide display icon GI1.

Also,
“With the first setting set, the second display is displayed on the display means, and when the first operation means is operated, the display means displays a response to the operation [e.g. , the setting suggestion display shown in FIG. 83(b) may be displayed.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the response display is performed when the operation means that is considered to be invalid can sometimes surprise the player.

Note that the state in which the first setting is set may be a demo state. That is, power saving settings are set in the demo state. The state in which the response display may be displayed on the display means may be a non-demonstration state (normal state) transitioned from a demo state. That is, when the first operating means is operated, the demo state shifts to a non-demonstration state (normal state), and even if the first operating means is operated instead of the second operating means, The response display may be performed as an effect, or the first operation means may be a hidden operation means, and game information may be displayed as the response display.

Further, the response display to the operation of the first operation means performed while the second display is displayed may be the same display as the response display to the operation of the second operation means, or may be a different display. There may be.

Also,
“When the first operation means is operated in a state where the first setting is set [for example, whether the second display is displayed or not], the display means A response display to the operation [for example, the setting suggestion display shown in FIG. 83(b)] may be displayed.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the response display is performed when the operation means that is considered to be invalid can sometimes surprise the player.

Note that here, the second display may or may not be displayed on the display means. The display in response to the operation of the first operation means performed in a hidden manner by the second display may be the same display as the display in response to the operation of the second operation means, or may be a different display. Good too.

Also,
``If the first operation means is operated with the first setting set, a response display to the operation may not be displayed on the display means;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means may shift to a state corresponding to the first setting,
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first light emitting means is brought into a state corresponding to the first setting (hereinafter referred to as "first state") [e.g. After transitioning to a state where the display means corresponds to the first setting (hereinafter referred to as a "second state") [e.g. 86(g) to 86(h)].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``Even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first light emitting means remains in a state corresponding to the first setting unless it is in a certain state [for example, a demonstration state]. It does not migrate,
The display means is such that even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means does not shift to a state corresponding to the first setting unless the state is in the certain state [for example, a demo state]. is,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that a certain state refers to a state where a demonstration performance is being performed (demonstration state).

Also,
“The first light emitting means consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting,
The display means consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, the first setting is a power saving setting, whereas the second setting is a non-power saving setting (normal setting).

Also,
"The number of the first light emitting means [for example, 6 pieces] is greater than the number of the display means [for example, 1 piece],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to prioritize the first light emitting means, which is the largest in number, and shift it to the first state, thereby reducing power consumption.

Also,
"The power consumption [for example, 0] of the first light emitting means in the first state is smaller than the power consumption of the display means in the second state,"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, the first light emitting means has a higher power saving effect than the display means.

Note that the power consumption in the first light emitting means while executing a certain effect may be greater than the power consumption in the display means while executing the certain effect. It is possible to prioritize the first light emitting means that consumes a large amount of power and shift it to the first state, thereby suppressing power consumption.

Also,
“A first control unit [for example, first sub-control unit 400] that controls the first light-emitting unit;
a second control means [for example, VDP516] for controlling the display means;
Equipped with
The first control means transmits a first signal regarding the first setting,
The first light emitting means receives the first signal from the first control means without going through the second control means,
The display means receives the first signal via the second control means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The main control means controls the progress of the game, and the sub-control means receives commands transmitted from the main control means and performs control based on the commands, and the sub-control means controls the first and the second control means. Further, the sub-control means may be a means for controlling effects.

Also,
“The time required for the display means to shift from a state different from the second state to the second state [for example, FIGS. 86(g) to 86(h)] is longer than the time required for the transition from a state different from the first state to the first state [for example, FIG. 86(d)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The selection operation means is provided in a position where the player cannot operate it [for example, inside the main body 101 or on the back side of the game machine].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 74],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The gaming machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 90],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The identification prefixes described above, such as "first...", "second...", "third...", etc., may be replaced as appropriate. For example, "second..." may be replaced with "first...".

Note that the functions and effects described in the embodiments described so far are merely a list of the most suitable functions and effects, and the functions and effects of the present invention are limited to those described here. isn't it. In addition, even if the constituent elements are included only in the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, those constituent elements may be included in other embodiments, examples, modifications, etc. It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. In other words, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent elements contained only in the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. may not be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, etc. Even when applied to examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc., it stands as a cohesive technical idea.

Hereinafter, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel gaming machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 91 to 116. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 91 to 116 are, in principle, used only for explanations using FIGS. In the explanation using FIG. 116, priority will be given to the symbols shown in FIGS. 91 to 116.

FIG. 91 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91 starts rotating when a predetermined number of game media are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the success or failure of internal winning of multiple types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels stops rotating individually by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop match the predetermined payout conditions, the game media will be paid out and the game will end; if not, the game media will be paid out. This is a game machine that plays a series of games that end without paying out a game. Note that this payout of game media may be referred to as profit. Furthermore, something that facilitates the acquisition of profits may be referred to as a benefit.

This slot machine 100 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. The front door 102 is a door member rotatably attached to the main body 101. The front door 102 is provided with a locking function, so that only an employee of the game parlor can open the front door 102.

Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface are stored in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

A suitable number of each pattern is printed on a strip member at equal intervals, and the strip member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the symbol display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible.

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing an example of a line.

To explain this specifically using FIG. 92, the symbols displayed on the upper row of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the diagram) are changed to the upper row symbols of the left reel 110 and the symbols displayed on the middle row of the left reel 110 (position 4 shown in the diagram). The displayed symbols are the middle symbols of the left reel, the symbols displayed in the lower row of the left reel 110 (position 7 shown in the figure) are the lower symbols of the left reel, and the symbols displayed in the upper row of the middle reel 111 (position 2 shown in the figure) are the symbols displayed in the lower row of the left reel. The symbol displayed in the middle reel 111 (position 5 in the diagram) is the middle reel symbol, and the symbol displayed in the bottom row of the middle reel 111 (position 8 in the diagram) is the symbol displayed in the middle reel 111. The symbol displayed in the lower row of the middle reel 112 (position 3 shown in the diagram) is the symbol displayed in the upper row of the right reel, and the symbol displayed in the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 6 shown in the diagram) is the symbol displayed in the right reel. The symbols displayed on the middle reel and the lower row of the right reel 112 (position 9 in the figure) are called right reel lower symbols, and the symbols on each reel 110 to 112 are displayed on each reel 110 through the symbol display window 113 112, three in the vertical direction, nine in total are displayed. By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Furthermore, although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is arranged on the back of each reel 110 to 112 to illuminate each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 113. The backlight is configured to be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. Note that inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each reel 110 to 112, and this optical sensor (index sensor shown in FIG. 94) A light shielding piece (not shown) of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the light projecting part and the light receiving part of 730). The position of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the active line.

The valid line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the line 114 that is valid. The valid line is the line on which it is judged whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed (described later in FIG. 99) (the line on which the winning determination is made). When the symbol corresponding to stops, it is determined that the prize has been won. Here, the line is defined as an area corresponding to one symbol for each of the reels 110 to 112 within the area within the display window 113. Note that lines other than valid lines on which winning determination is not made are referred to as invalid lines.

In FIG. 92, a middle line L1 consisting of a left reel middle symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel middle symbol, a right-down line L2 consisting of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel lower symbol; A rising right line L3 consisting of a left reel lower symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel upper symbol, an upper line L4 consisting of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel upper symbol, and a right reel upper symbol, a left reel lower symbol, Five lines are shown, a lower line L5 consisting of middle reel lower symbols and right reel lower symbols. These lines are just examples, and for example, an area for one symbol is defined for each of the reels 110 to 112, such as a line consisting of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel lower symbol, and a right reel upper symbol. It is fine as long as it is. Note that among the lines shown in FIG. 92, the upper line L4 is used as an effective line in this embodiment. The active line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as game media. The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a three-copy bet-only machine, and when the number of medals inserted is less than three, none of the lines become valid, and when three medals are bet, line L4 becomes valid. (becomes used as a valid line). When the line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135. Note that the number of effective lines is not limited to one line. For example, three lines, the middle line L1, the downward-sloping line L2, and the upward-rightward line L3, may be used as active lines, or the number of active lines depending on the number of bets may be used.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that he or she has internally won a specific prize winning combination (specifically, a special prize) in an internal lottery to be described later, or that the player is in a special gaming state that will be described later. be. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later) is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. This is a lamp that informs the player of the The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two coins are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 will also be referred to as the MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. The storage number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139, each of which includes a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. More specifically, by operating the left stop button 137, the left reel 110 can be stopped, by operating the middle stop button 138, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the right stop button 139, the middle reel 111 can be stopped. By operating the right reel 112, it is possible to stop the right reel 112. Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation will be referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation will be referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. Furthermore, the order of operations in which the first stop operation is an operation to stop the left reel 110 is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order", and the order of operations in which the first stop operation is an operation to stop the right reel 112 is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order". This is called "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push." Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155.

The front door 102 is also provided with a key hole 140, and when a key is inserted into this key hole 140 and turned clockwise, the door is unlocked, and when turned counterclockwise, the door is locked. The slot machine 100 is provided with an open sensor (not shown) that detects when the front door 102 is opened. This open sensor detects that the front door 102 is opened by detecting the opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is opened.

Further, a first chance button 165 and a second chance button 166 are provided between the bet button 132 and the medal slot 141. The first chance button 165 has a built-in first effect lamp, and the second chance button 166 has a built-in second effect lamp. Both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operation means operated by the player during the performance. Further, a left button 167 is provided on the left side of the second chance button 166, and a right button 168 is provided on the right side. By operating the left button 167 and right button 168, it may be possible to move the cursor displayed on the effect image display device 157, and in such cases, the second chance button 166 functions as a confirmation button. Sometimes.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 145 provided at the bottom is a hole for outputting the sound of the bass speaker 277 (see FIG. 93) to the outside. A left side lamp 144L provided on the left side of the front door 102 and a right side lamp 144R provided on the right side are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is also provided at the top of the presentation device 160. This sound hole 143 is a hole for outputting the sound of the upper speaker 272 (see FIG. 93) to the outside. The production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 disposed on the back side of the shutter 163. The structure is such that when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally outward in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (on the player's side). . Note that although the effect image display device 157 is a liquid crystal display device, it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be any display device that can display various effect images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display). Display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display, reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Furthermore, although the display screen is a flat surface, it may be a curved surface.

Note that what has been referred to as a lamp so far is an example of a light emitting means, and in this specification, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and any device that emits light such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold cathode tube is also referred to as a lamp. Sometimes referred to as a lamp, something that emits light corresponds to an example of a light emitting means.

FIG. 93 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door open. The main body 101 is a box that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and has an opening at the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores a main control board inside is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 249 provided at the top of the back plate 242. A reel unit 700 including three reels 110 to 112 is arranged below. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reel unit 700, that is, on the side plate 260 on the left side, a sub control board storage case 220 that stores a sub control board therein is disposed. The sub control board storage case 220 is provided with a first selection switch 190. Since this first selection switch 190 is provided inside the main body 101, a person who can unlock the front door 102 (for example, a clerk at a game parlor) cannot open the front door 102. However, the front door 102 is configured so that a person who cannot unlock the front door 102 (for example, a player) cannot operate the front door 102. That is, the first selection switch 190 is provided at a position that cannot be operated by the player. Details of the first selection switch 190 will be described later. Furthermore, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side as viewed from the outside, which is connected to the main control board and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device.

A medal dispensing device 180 (device for dispensing medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed on the bottom plate 264. Above the medal dispensing device 180, that is, below the reel unit 700, a power source having a power supply board is provided. A device 252 is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided in front of the power supply device 252. The power supply device 252 converts the alternating current power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies the voltage to each control section such as the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400, and to each device. Furthermore, it is equipped with a power storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to predetermined components (e.g., RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after external power is cut off. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is provided on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is provided behind this storage (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection part to which a power cord 265 is connected, and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 formed in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the symbol display window 113 is provided with a presentation device 160 and a presentation control board for controlling this presentation device 160. (not shown), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. At the bottom of the symbol display window 113, there is provided a medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, a passage 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals, etc. into the medal tray 161. There is. Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145.

Next, the structure of the reel unit 700 will be explained using FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a perspective view showing the configuration of the reel unit 700.

As shown in FIG. 4, the reel unit 700 includes a reel case 702 made of a box-shaped metal plate. A connector 703 for connecting to a power source, main control section 300, and first sub-control section 400 is provided at the top of this reel case 702. Further, this reel case 702 accommodates three reels 110 to 112. These reels 110-112 are attached to a motor 720 for rotationally driving the reels 110-112. This motor 720, an index sensor 730 for detecting the rotational position of the reels 110 to 112, and a backlight module 740 for irradiating light from the back side to the front side of the strip member 710 of the reels 110 to 112 are installed. It is attached to the base 732.

95(a) is a perspective view showing the structure of the backlight module 740, and FIG. 95(b) is a front view of the backlight module 740.

The backlight module 740 includes a reflector 742 and a lighting board 744 that is detachably attached to the back surface of the reflector 742. In the reflector 742, three openings BK1 to BK3 communicating from the front side to the back side are formed in a row in the vertical direction. Furthermore, two LEDs 745 are arranged on the lighting base 744 at positions corresponding to the openings BK1 to BK3.

The openings BK1 to BK3 and the LED 745 are provided at positions corresponding to the symbol positions (positions No. 1 to 9 shown in FIG. 2) that are stopped and displayed on the display window 113 in the attached state. As described above, by providing the LEDs 745 in each of the openings BK1 to BK3, the LED 745 is configured so that when irradiating light, it does not interfere with light irradiated to other positions. Thereby, light can be irradiated to each of the positions No. 1 to No. 9 shown in FIG. 2. For example, by lighting all the LEDs 745, all the symbols visible to the player can be illuminated from behind. In addition, by lighting a part of the symbols, it is possible to illuminate some of the symbols from behind among the symbols that are visible to the player. Note that the number and position of the openings and LEDs are not limited to this configuration.

Next, the first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. 93 will be described in detail. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the first selection switch 190 etc. shown in FIG. 93.

FIG. 96(a) is an enlarged view of the first selection switch 190. The first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 96(a) includes a circular rotating part 190a that has 16 contacts and is configured to be rotatable, and a circular rotating part 190a that is formed to protrude outward from the rotating part 190a as a base end. and an instruction section 190b. Further, around the first selection switch 190, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are placed, corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating part 190a. The first selection switch 190 is an operation means for selecting one number from among 16 numbers.

These 16 numbers are treated as numerical values representing settings (setting values). That is, the first selection switch 190 is configured to be able to output information on the numerical value indicated by the instruction section 190b to the outside as a detection signal. For example, as shown in FIG. If it points to "B", it means that the hexadecimal value of "B" has been selected, and information on that value can be output as a binary 4-bit detection signal (0b1011). Therefore, by inputting this detection signal, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 98), which will be described later, selects the numerical value (any of the hexadecimal numbers 0 to F) selected by the first selection switch 190. The first sub-control unit 400 handles the numerical value indicated by the instruction unit 190b as the selected setting value.

Note that instead of the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 96(a), for example, a rotary switch 191 as shown in FIG. 96(b) may be applied, or a slide switch as shown in FIG. 96(c) may be used. A switch 192 may also be applied.

The rotary switch 191 shown in FIG. 96(b) has a ring-shaped rotating part 191a that has 16 contacts and is configured to be rotatable, and a notch window 191b formed in this rotating part 191a. . Further, on the bottom of the rotating part 191a of the rotary switch 191, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are provided, corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating part 191a.

This rotary switch 191 selects a numerical value visible through the cutout window 191b, and is configured to be able to output information about the numerical value to the outside as a detection signal. As shown in FIG. 96(b), when the numerical value visible from the notch 191b is "F", the hexadecimal numerical value F is selected, and the information of the numerical value is converted into 4 binary bits. It can be output as a detection signal (0b1111). Therefore, by inputting this detection signal, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 98), which will be described later, selects a selected numerical value (in this example, hexadecimal 0 to The configuration is such that it is possible to detect any one of the numerical values of F.

The slide switch 192 shown in FIG. 96(c) has a rectangular guide groove 192a and a slide portion 192b that has 16 contacts and is slidable along the guide groove 192a. Further, above the slide switch 192, 16 numbers (in this example, hexadecimal numbers from 0 to F) are provided, corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the slide portion 192b.

This slide switch 192 selects the numerical value at which the slide portion 192b is located, and is configured to be able to output information about the numerical value to the outside as a detection signal. As shown in FIG. 96(c), when the slide portion 192b is located at the location of the numerical value "0", it means that the numerical value of 0 in hexadecimal notation is selected, and the information of that numerical value is converted into binary notation. It can be output as a 4-bit detection signal (0b0000). Therefore, by inputting this detection signal, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 98), which will be described later, selects a selected value (a value from 0 to F in hexadecimal notation) at which the slide portion 192b of the slide switch 192 is located. The configuration is such that it is possible to detect any of the following.

Since the first selection switch 190 described above with reference to FIGS. 96(a) to 96(c) is a mechanical switch, it can be operated even when the power is not supplied. Even if the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the selected numerical value (set value) can be maintained. Therefore, once a selection is made, the selected numerical value can be retained even if the power is turned off, and it is easy to set the value to the value intended by the game parlor, for example. In addition, since it is equipped with numbers (display means) that allow you to confirm the selected numerical value, it is easy to confirm the set value, and it is highly convenient.

FIG. 96(d) is an enlarged view of the second selection switch 194. The second selection switch 194 shown in FIG. 96(d) is composed of a left button 167, a right button 168, and a second chance button 166, which functions as a confirmation button, shown in FIG. 91. While the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 96(a) is an operating means provided in a position that cannot be operated by the player, this second selection switch 194 is an operation means that cannot be operated by the player. It is an operating means provided in a position where it can be operated. That is, the second selection switch 194 is a switch that can be operated by the player. For example, by pressing the left button 167 and the right button 168, a numerical value (setting value) representing a setting can be selected. By pressing the chance button 166, the selected setting value is confirmed. Alternatively, the setting value can be selected by pressing the left button 167 and the right button 168, and after a predetermined period of time, the selected setting value is confirmed without pressing the second chance button 166. Good too.

This second selection switch 194 can output a detection signal corresponding to the second chance button 166, left button 167, or right button 168 when any one of the buttons is operated. Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 98), which will be described later, detects which of the second chance button 166, left button 167, or right button 168 has been operated by inputting this detection signal. The configuration is such that this is possible.

Note that instead of the second selection switch 194 shown in FIG. 96(d), for example, as shown in FIG. 195, and this cross key 195 may be used as the second selection switch 194. Further, two types of operating means may be provided, and either one of the operating means may also serve as a chance button, or only one of the operating means may be the second selection switch 194.

Since the second selection switch 194 is not a mechanical switch, it cannot operate when it is not energized and cannot hold the selected value (set value) by itself. Therefore, it is necessary to separately provide a storage means for storing the set values. Although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91 is configured so that the numerical value selected by the second selection switch 194 is not backed up, it may be configured so that it is backed up.

FIG. 96(f) is a diagram comparing the sizes of the second chance button 166 and the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 91. A left button 167 and a right button 168 are also shown in FIG. 96(f). The first chance button 165 is about three times the size of the second chance button 166.

In addition, a cut-in display can be performed on the condition that the second chance button 166 or the first chance button 165 is operated, or one of the chance buttons can be used for a continuous hit effect, and the other chance button can be used as a hidden button. It's okay. Here, a hidden button is one that does not suggest or encourage operation of the operating means (for example, a button that does not suggest or encourage operation of the operating means (for example, an operation suggestion display or an operation promotion display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157, and a built-in effect lamp does not illuminate). (at least one or both), when the operating means is operated, some kind of effect is performed.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing an example of selection of setting values using the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91, the setting values that can be selected with the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194 include the sounds output from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 (for example, BGM, sound effects, error This is the volume value of the sound (sound, etc.). As described above, the first selection switch 190 is an operating means provided in a position that cannot be operated by a player, and is a switch used by a clerk at a game parlor when selecting a setting value. Further, only the first selection switch 190 of the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194 selects whether to set the slot machine 100 to a power saving mode or a non-power saving mode (normal mode). can also be done. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91, the power saving mode is set only when a demonstration performance is being performed. Hereinafter, the demonstration will be abbreviated as demo. The demonstration performance is a performance that is started when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without the game being restarted after one game ended. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91, when a demonstration performance is started with the power saving mode selected, the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode.

When the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode, the animation (demonstration animation) displayed on the effect image display device 157 is played in a dark state, thereby reducing the power consumption of the effect image display device 157 and saving power. . Furthermore, the power consumption of these light emitting means can be reduced by turning off the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 shown in FIG. Power is saved. Note that when these light emitting means are turned off, the power consumption becomes 0, and the power saving effect of these light emitting means is higher than the power saving effect of the effect image display device 157.

Further, when the first selection switch 190 is operated, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed on the effect image display device 157. In volume selection using the first selection switch 190, one volume level is selected from seven volume levels. Additionally, in the non-power saving mode, you can also select mute.

FIG. 97(A) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "0" shown in FIG. 96(a).

The effect image display device 157 displays a first volume selection icon SI1. This first volume selection icon SI1 displays seven levels of volume level selection values and seven levels of horizontal level display (indicator display). The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 97(A) displays that the selection value of the seven volume levels is 0 (0/7) and the words "mute". Furthermore, none of the seven levels of horizontal level display are lit. When muting is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sounds from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 cannot be heard at all.

FIG. 97(B) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "1" shown in FIG. 96(a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 97(B) displays the words "Volume 1/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven volume levels is 1. Further, in the seven-level horizontal level display, only the first level on the left is lit in the first color (for example, yellow).

FIG. 97(C) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "7" shown in FIG. 96(a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 97(C) displays the characters "Volume 7/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven volume levels is 7. Furthermore, in the seven-level horizontal level display, all levels from the first level to the seventh level are lit in the first color (for example, yellow). When the seventh volume level is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sound from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 becomes the maximum volume.

FIG. 97(D) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "8" shown in FIG. 96(a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 97(D) displays characters indicating that the selected volume value is the exhibition volume. This exhibition volume is a volume suitable for presenting the slot machine 100 at an exhibition or the like, and is, for example, a volume between the fourth volume level and the fifth volume level. Furthermore, in the seven-level horizontal level display, all of the first to seventh levels are lit in the second color (for example, red). Note that instead of the exhibition volume, a special volume may be selected that cannot be selected using the second selection switch 194 and can only be selected using the first selection switch 190. For example, it may be possible to select a step tone in which the volume increases by one step each time a predetermined period of time elapses.

The first volume selection icon SI1 displayed on the effect image display device 157 disappears if the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined period of time.

FIG. 97(a) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "9" shown in FIG. 96(a).

A second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 97(a). The background color of the second volume selection icon SI2 is different from the background color of the first volume selection icon SI1. Further, the second volume selection icon SI2 displays the words "power saving mode", seven volume level selection values, and seven horizontal level display (indicator display). The second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 97(a) displays the text "power saving mode" and the text "Volume 7/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven volume levels is 7. There is. Furthermore, in the seven-level horizontal level display, all of the first to seventh levels are lit in the third color (for example, blue).

FIG. 97(b) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "F" shown in FIG. 96(a).

The second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 97(b) displays the text "power saving mode" and the text "Volume 1/7" indicating that the selected value of the seven volume levels is 1. There is. Further, in the seven-level horizontal level display, only the first level at the left end is lit in the third color (for example, blue).

The second volume selection icon SI2 displayed on the effect image display device 157 also disappears if the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined period of time.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91, when the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "9" or any of "A" to "F" shown in FIG. 96(a), the slot machine 100 is Setting to power saving mode is selected. Note that even if it is selected to set the power saving mode, the slot machine 100 is not set to the power saving mode, and as described above, in order to be set to the power saving mode, it is necessary to be in the demo state. becomes a condition. On the other hand, when the instruction section 190b is set to one of "0" to "8" shown in FIG. 96(a), setting the slot machine 100 to the non-power saving mode is selected. If setting to non-power saving mode is selected, the power saving mode will not be set even if the demo state is entered. Further, while a game is being played, the slot machine 100 is set to a non-power saving mode (normal mode).

Note that the volumes output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 are the same whether the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode or the non-power saving mode. Therefore, the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 97(B) and the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 97(b) are the same, and the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 97(C) is the same. The volume output with the selected value is the same as the volume output with the selection value selected in FIG. 97(a).

FIG. 97(A) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the second selection switch 194 is operated.

When the second selection switch 194 that can be operated by the player is operated while the first guidance display icon GI1, which will be described later, is displayed on the effect image display device 157, the effect image display device 157 displays a third volume. A selection icon SI3 is displayed. The third volume selection icon SI3 displays five levels of volume level selection values and five levels of vertical level display (indicator display). The third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 97(A) displays the words "Volume 1/5" indicating that the selected value of the five volume levels is 1. Further, in the five level display, only the first level at the bottom is lit in the fourth color (for example, green). When the right button 168 of the second selection switch 194 is pressed once, the level increases by one level, and when the left button 167 is pressed once, the level decreases by one level. However, even if the left button 167 is pressed once in the state shown in FIG. 97(A), the level will not drop any further. That is, muting cannot be selected by operating the second selection switch 194. Note that muting may also be selected by operating the second selection switch 194.

FIG. 97(a) is a diagram showing the display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the right button 168 is pressed four times from the state shown in FIG. 97(a).

The third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 97(a) displays the words "Volume 5/5" indicating that the selected value of the five volume levels is 5. Furthermore, in the five-stage vertical level display, all of the first to fifth levels are lit in the fourth color (for example, green).

The third volume selection icon SI3 displayed on the effect image display device 157 disappears if the left button 167 and the right button 168 are not operated for a predetermined period of time.

The volume selected by operating the first selection switch 190 is in seven levels, while the volume selected by operating the second selection switch 194 is in five levels. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91, the volume setting range is from 0 to 127, and the setting values for each of the seven stages are 18 for the first stage, 36 for the second stage, 54 for the third stage, and 4 stages. The number is 73, the fifth row is 91, the sixth row is 109, and the seventh row is 127. On the other hand, in the 5th stage, excluding the 1st and 7th stages of the 7th stage, the remaining stages are the 2nd to 6th stages. That is, the second stage (36) of seven stages is the first stage of five stages, and the sixth stage (109) of seven stages is the fifth stage of five stages. Therefore, only the clerk at the game parlor can select the setting value (18) for the first stage of the seven stages and the setting value (127) for the seventh stage. In addition, the first stage (18) of the 7th stage may be the first stage of the 5th stage, the 5th stage (91) of the 7th stage may be the 5th stage of the 5th stage, or the 3rd stage of the 7th stage (54) ) may be the first stage of five stages, and the seventh stage (127) of seven stages may be the fifth stage of five stages. Alternatively, each set value in the five stages may be set to 26 for the first stage, 51 for the second stage, 76 for the third stage, 102 for the fourth stage, and 127 for the fifth stage.

While the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 and the first guidance display icon GI1, which will be described later, are displayed on the effect image display device 157, press the left button 167 of the second selection switch 194 once. When pressed, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that had been displayed until then is replaced by the third volume selection icon SI3, and a display indicating that the selected value of the volume level is the second level is displayed. . On the other hand, in the same state, if you press the right button 167 instead of the left button 167 once, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that was displayed until then will be replaced by the third volume selection icon SI3, A display appears indicating that the selected volume value is at the fourth level. These displays are displayed no matter what selection value is displayed by the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. That is, whether the selected value is 1/7 or 7/7, if the left button 167 is pressed once, the selected value of 2/5 will be displayed. Further, whether the selected value is 1/7 or 7/7, if the right button 168 is pressed once, the selected value of 4/5 will be displayed. This is because when switching to the third volume selection icon SI3, the previous selection value is discarded, the initial value of the volume level of 3/5 of the third volume selection icon SI3 is reselected, and the left button 167 or the right button 168, the initial value (3/5) is changed. That is, when the operation of the second selection switch 194 is accepted, the initial value of the third volume selection icon SI3 is set, and when the second selection switch 194 is operated, the value changed from the initial value is set as the first value. 3 Displayed as volume selection icon SI3. The first selection switch 190 is designed to be operated by a store clerk, and the second selection switch 194 is designed to be operated by a player, so that the player's intentions can be prioritized. On the other hand, if the first selection switch 190 is operated while the third volume selection icon SI3 is displayed, the selection value displayed on the third volume selection icon SI3 is inherited and the first selection By operating the switch 190, a value that has been changed from the previously selected value is displayed as the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. However, here too, the initial value (for example, 4/7) of the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 may be set without inheriting the selected value.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 98. Note that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel symbols. A ROM 306 for storing arrays, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT. (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator 315a, and a startup signal The CPU 304 starts the game control (starts the main control section main processing described later) when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338. Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal input from the medal slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, a right stop button 139 sensor, a payment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, and a left reel 110. , the index sensor of the middle reel 111, the index sensor of the right reel 112, etc.).

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, and a right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect operations of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, and are used to input medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 into a game. Detects the input operation when inputting. The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the left reel 110, the index sensor of the middle reel 111, and the index sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and a light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through them. Every time you do it, it becomes L level. The rotational position information indicating how far the reel is rotating from the reference position from once reaching the L level until the next time it becomes the L level is calculated based on the counted value of the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 that selects the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided in the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, various lamps 339 (valid line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, storage number display 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects a slot to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. Outputs gaming information (for example, information indicating gaming status) of the machine 100.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from a power management unit (not shown). If the value is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the configuration is such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command sent by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command, and this basic circuit 402 is connected to a CPU 404 for temporarily storing data. It is equipped with a RAM 408, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, lighting patterns of the backlight module 740, data for controlling various indicators, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sound source IC 418, and the sound source IC 418 is provided with an upper speaker 272 and a bass speaker 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the audio output from the amplifier, the upper speaker 272, and the bass speaker 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, title panel 162 lamp, bet button lamp 200, backlight module 740, first effect lamp built in first chance button 165, second effect lamp built in second chance button 166, etc.) are connected.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at every interrupt time. Furthermore, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a switch sensor 427, and this switch sensor 427 detects the depression of the first chance button 165. Further, the switch sensor 427 also detects the depression of each button of the second selection switch 194 consisting of the second chance button 166, the left button 167, and the right button 168. Detection signals from the shutter sensor 428 and the switch sensor 427 are output to the basic circuit 402 by the sensor circuit 426.

Further, although the first selection switch sensor 190 is directly connected to the basic circuit 402, this first selection switch sensor 190 may also be connected to the basic circuit 402 via the switch sensor 427 and the sensor circuit 426. .

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effect (for example, a control unit that controls motor drive of the shutter 163), and a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157. ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 534 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 are connected to the VDP 534 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

With the circuit configuration described above, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a control signal instructing the setting of the power saving mode to the drive circuit 422 or to the second sub-control unit 500. As a result, the effect image display device 157 receives the control signal via the second sub-control unit 500, and controls the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight. The module 740 receives the control signal without going through the second sub-controller 500.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a demo animation displayed on the performance image display device 157 as a demonstration performance.

There is a predetermined period of time during which no operation is performed by the player while the animation (non-demo animation) that has been displayed on the performance image display device 157 since the game was played or after the game ended is displayed. When the time (for example, 30 seconds) is reached, the display switches from that animation and starts displaying the demo animation. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91, the demo animation is roughly divided into five scenes. First, the opening animation (demo animation 1/5) is displayed. In this opening animation, the entire screen of the effect image display device 157 becomes white, then the company logo gradually begins to appear from the back of the white display screen, and finally, as shown in FIG. 99(a). The company logo fully appears. When the opening animation ends, the animation in which the characters appear starts. Initially, an animation (demo animation 2/5) in which the main character, the lord, appears is displayed, as shown in FIG. 99(b). Further, when the animation in which the character appears is started, a first guide display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen of the effect image display device 157. This first guide display icon GI1 is an icon that is displayed only during the demonstration performance. In other words, it is displayed only in animations in which the characters in the demo animation appear. However, non-demo animations may also be displayed. A second selection switch 194 is displayed on the first guide display icon GI1. That is, the display 167p of the left button 167 and the display 168p of the right button 168 are both displayed in black, and the words "Volume Adjustment" are also displayed in black, and by operating the left button 167 and right button 168, the upper speaker can be adjusted. It is suggested that the volume of the output sound from the bass speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 can be adjusted. As explained using FIGS. 97(A) and 97(B), when the left button 167 is pressed once while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed, the third volume selection icon SI3 is displayed. When the right button 168 is pressed, the third volume selection icon SI3 is also displayed, and this time, the volume level of the five levels is increased by one level. Further, the display 166p of the second chance button 166 is displayed in white, and the text "gaming information" is also displayed in white, suggesting that gaming information will be displayed by operating the second chance button 166. ing.

FIG. 100(a) is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157 that is displayed when the second chance button 166 is pressed while the first guide display icon GI1 is displayed.

When the second chance button 166 is pressed while the first guide display icon GI1 is displayed, the game information displayed is a payout table. The payout table shown in FIG. 100(a) shows that 8 medals will be paid out when the symbol combination Bell-Bell-Bell is aligned on the active line explained using FIG. - It is shown that 3 medals will be paid out when the watermelon symbol combination is aligned. It is also shown that if the cherry pattern stops on the middle pattern, two medals will be paid out. This payout table is composed of a plurality of pages, and the payout table shown in FIG. 100(a) is the first page. The first guidance display icon GI1 displayed at the lower left of the display screen has been replaced by the second guidance display icon GI2. In the second guide display icon GI2, the text "Move page" is displayed in black on the display 167p of the left button 167 and the display 168p of the right button 168, which are displayed in black, and the left button 167 and right button 168 are operated. It has been suggested that it is possible to change the page of the payout table by doing so. With the second guidance display icon GI2 being displayed, pressing the left button 167 once will move the payout table page back by one page, and pressing the right button 168 once will move the payout table page forward by one page. Further, the word "End" is displayed in white on the display 166p of the second chance button 166, which is displayed in white, and by operating the second chance button 166, the display of the payout table can be ended. is suggested. When the second chance button 166 is pressed, the display of the payout table disappears on the display screen of the effect image display device 157, and the display of the non-demo animation is started. That is, when the second chance button 166 is operated while the demo animation is being displayed, the demonstration effect ends, and when the display of the payout table ends, the display of the non-demo animation starts.

The first guidance display icon GI1 described above corresponds to an example of the second display, and the display of the payout table corresponds to an example of the response display.

In the demo animation, following the animation in which the main character, the lord, appears as shown in FIG. 99(b), the animation in which the princess appears (demonstration animation 3/5) shown in FIG. 99(c) is displayed. In this animation as well, the first guide display icon GI1 is displayed at the bottom left. Furthermore, in the demo animation, following the animation in which the princess appears, an animation in which the old man appears (demo animation 4/5) shown in FIG. 99(d) is displayed. In this animation as well, the first guide display icon GI1 is displayed at the bottom left. At the end of the demo animation, an ending animation (demo animation 5/5) is displayed. In this ending animation, a warning display is displayed as shown in FIG. 99(e), and the first guidance display icon GI1 has disappeared. When the display of the ending animation is completed, the series of demo animations ends, and if the demo production continues, it returns to the opening animation (demonstration animation 1/5) mentioned above, the entire screen becomes white again, and from then on, a series of demonstration animations ends. The demo animation is displayed repeatedly until some operation is performed.

FIG. 101 is a diagram showing, step by step, the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when a selection is made to set the power saving mode while a non-demo animation is being displayed.

In FIG. 101(a), the effect image display device 157 displays an animation in which a lord is sitting on the upper seat and an old man is reading a letter. This animation is an animation that is continuously displayed on the effect image display device 157 during the game, or is displayed on the effect image display device 157 after the game ends, and is different from the demo animation explained using FIG. 99. It is a different animation (hereinafter referred to as "non-demo animation"). In this non-demo animation, the lord's eyes and fan move, and the old man's hands move. Also, this non-demo animation is displayed. The brightness of the layer on which the non-demonstration animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157 is normal brightness, and the non-demo animation is played in a bright state. Shown are button 165, second selection switch 194 (first chance button 166, left button 167, right button 168), left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, and three reels 110-112. In the first chance button 165 shown in a), the built-in first effect lamp is lit in white, and in the second chance button 166, the built-in second effect lamp is also lit in white. Both the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R shown in (a) are lit in white.Furthermore, the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 96) provided in each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also lit in white. The three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 101(a) are illuminated in white.

Note that the light emission mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the light emission mode of the right side lamp 144R may be the same. For example, they may be lit in the same color, blink at the same timing, or both may be off. Alternatively, the light emission mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the light emission mode of the left side lamp 144L may be the same. Furthermore, among the first effect lamp, second effect lamp, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, and backlight module 740 (see FIG. 96), only the left side lamp 144L may be turned off.

In the state shown in FIG. 101(a), the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "6" shown in FIG. 96(a), and the output from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 is The volume is set to the sixth volume level.

In the example shown in FIG. 101, in order to operate the first selection switch 190, a clerk at a game parlor inserts a key into the keyhole 140, turns the inserted key clockwise to unlock, and opens the front door 102. Even when the key is used, when the front door 102 is opened, the above-mentioned open sensor detects that the front door 102 has been opened, and the upper speaker 272 outputs a message "The door is open" when the front door 102 is opened. The error notification sound of the error is repeatedly output, and the effect image display device 157 displays an error display of the door opening error in the form of characters such as "door opening". The output of the error notification sound for the door opening error and the display of the error display continue until the front door 102 is closed. Many players think that the error notification sound is too loud for nearby players to hear. Therefore, a clerk at a game parlor may open the front door 102 while holding down the opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is opened. By doing so, the opening/closing piece does not protrude, the opening sensor no longer detects the opening of the front door 102, and an error notification of a door opening error is no longer performed. In the example shown in FIG. 101, the store clerk operates the first selection switch 190 while opening the front door 102 while holding down the opening/closing piece. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 101(b) and thereafter does not display an error display indicating a door opening error. Also, no error notification sound is output.

First, the store clerk performs a switch operation (1) to set the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "7" shown in FIG. 96(a).

When this switch operation (1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 101(b), the effect image display device 157 displays a first volume selection icon SI1 which is the same as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 97(C). is displayed to notify that the seventh volume level has been selected. Note that even if the front door 102 is opened, the non-demo animation continues to be displayed, and even if the first selection switch 190 is operated, the non-demo animation continues to be displayed.

FIG. 102 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. 101. In this figure 102, time passes from the left to the right of the figure, the timing of (c) in FIG. 102 matches the timing of FIG. 101(c), and the timing of (d) in FIG. 101(d), and the timing (e) in FIG. 102 matches the timing in FIG. 101(e). Further, FIG. 102 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 and the brightness of the animation display on the effect image display device 157, as well as the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 165. Also shown are the light emitting modes of various light emitting means such as the second production lamp built into the button 166, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 provided in each of the three reels 110 to 112. .

At the left end of the timing chart in FIG. 102, the non-demo animation is displayed at normal brightness on the effect image display device 157, and the first volume selection icon SI1 with the words "Volume 7/7" is also displayed. The current state is shown. Further, the various light emitting means described above are also shown in a state where they are lit in white.

Next, the store clerk performs a switch operation (2) to set the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "8" shown in FIG. 96(a).

When this switch operation (2) is performed, as shown in FIG. 101(c), the effect image display device 157 displays a first volume selection icon SI1 which is the same as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 97(D). is displayed to notify that the exhibition volume has been selected. Even at the timing (c) in the timing chart of FIG. 102, there is a state in which the non-demo animation and the first volume selection icon SI1 displaying the words "Volume for Exhibition" are displayed on the effect image display device 157. It is shown.

Subsequently, the store clerk performs a switch operation (3) to set the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "9" shown in FIG. 96(a).

Previously, the non-power-saving mode setting was selected, but when this switch operation (3) is performed, the power-saving mode setting is selected, and the volume level is selected at the 7th volume level. become in a state of being FIG. 101(d) is a diagram showing the situation immediately after this switch operation (3) is performed. As shown in FIG. 102, the time from when the switch operation (3) is performed until the state shown in FIG. 101(d) is reached is as shown in FIG. The time from switch operation (2) to the state shown in FIG. 101(c) is shorter than the time from switch operation (3) to the state shown in FIG. 101(e). ) is the same length of time as the time it takes to reach the state shown in ).

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 101(d), a second volume selection icon SI2 which is the same as the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 97(a) is added to the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. are displayed in an overlapping manner, and in the subsequent effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 101(e), the first volume selection icon SI1 has been completely replaced by the second volume selection icon SI2. This replacement of icons is also shown in the time chart shown in FIG. 102.

The second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 101(e) displays the words "power saving mode", but this display indicates that the power saving mode setting has been selected; This does not indicate that the mode has been set. The non-demonstration animation continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 101(e), and remains in the non-demonstration state. Therefore, the power saving mode is not set, and as shown in the timing chart of FIG. 101(e) and FIG. 144R and the backlight module 740 (see FIG. 96) of each reel 110 to 112 remain lit white. Further, the second effect lamp built into the second chance button 166 also remains lit in white. Furthermore, the non-demo animation is played in a bright state without being dark.

FIG. 103 shows the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the front door 102 is opened while the demo animation is being displayed and the user selects to set the power saving mode by opening the front door 102 while holding down the opening/closing piece. FIG.

In FIG. 103(a), the demonstration effect has started, and the effect image display device 157 has started displaying the opening animation (demonstration animation 1/5) shown in FIG. 99(a). That is, on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 103(a), after the entire display screen once turns white, the company logo that has gradually started to appear from the back is displayed in a state where it has completely appeared. Also, the demo animation is played brightly instead of dark. Furthermore, as in FIG. 101, the figures in FIG. 103 also include a first chance button 165, a second selection switch 194 (first chance button 166, left button 167, right button 168), a left side lamp 144L, a right side lamp. 144R, and three reels 110-112 are shown. Further, in the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 103(a), the built-in first effect lamp is lit in white, and in the second chance button 166, the built-in second effect lamp is also lit in white. . Furthermore, both the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R shown in FIG. 103(a) are lit in white. Furthermore, the backlight module 740 (see FIG. 96) provided on each of the three reels 110 to 112 is also illuminated in white, and the three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 103(a) are illuminated in white. .

In addition, also in the demonstration effect, the light emission mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the light emission mode of the right side lamp 144R may be the same. For example, they may be lit in the same color, blink at the same timing, or both may be off. Alternatively, the light emission mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the light emission mode of the left side lamp 144L may be the same. Furthermore, among the first effect lamp, second effect lamp, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, and backlight module 740 (see FIG. 96), only the left side lamp 144L may be turned off. Alternatively, the first effect lamp may be blinking in white, and the right side lamp 144R may be lit in red.

Furthermore, in the state shown in FIG. 103(a), the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "6" shown in FIG. 96(a), and the output from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 is The volume is set to the sixth volume level.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 103 as well as the example shown in FIG. operate. An error display indicating a door opening error is not displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 103(b) and subsequent figures. Also, no error notification sound is output.

First, in this example, as in the example shown in FIG. 101, the store clerk performs a switch operation (1) to set the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "7" shown in FIG. 96(a).

When this switch operation (1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 103(b), the effect image display device 157 displays a first volume selection icon SI1 which is the same as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 97(C). is displayed to notify that the seventh volume level has been selected. Note that even if the front door 102 is opened, the demo animation continues to be displayed, and even if the first selection switch 190 is operated, the demo animation continues to be displayed. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 103(b) displays the animation (demonstration animation 2/5) in which the main character, the lord, described using FIG. 99(b), and the first guide The display of the display icon GI1 has started. This first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed overlapping a part of the first volume selection icon SI1, but conversely, the first volume selection icon SI1 is displayed overlapping a part of the first guidance display icon GI1. They may be displayed in an overlapping manner.

Next, the store clerk performs a switch operation (2) to set the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "8" shown in FIG. 96(a).

When this switch operation (2) is performed, as shown in FIG. 103(c), the effect image display device 157 displays a first volume selection icon SI1 which is the same as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 97(D). is displayed to notify that the exhibition volume has been selected. Further, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 103(c) displays the animation in which the princess appears (demo animation 3/5), which was explained using FIG. 99(c), and the first The guidance display icon GI1 continues to be displayed. The first volume selection icon SI1 of the exhibition volume, which started displaying later than the first guide display icon GI1, overlaps with the first guide display icon GI1.

Subsequently, the store clerk performs a switch operation (3) to set the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "9" shown in FIG. 96(a).

Previously, the non-power-saving mode setting was selected, but when this switch operation (3) is performed, the power-saving mode setting is selected, and the volume level is selected at the 7th volume level. become in a state of being

FIG. 104 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. 103. In this figure 104 as well, as in figure 102, time passes from left to right in the figure. Furthermore, the timing of (c) in FIG. 104 coincides with the timing of FIG. 103(c), and the subsequent timings of (d) to (h) are the same as those of FIG. 103(d) to (h). We are doing so. Furthermore, FIG. 104 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157, and also shows a first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, a second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166, and a left side Also shown are the light emitting modes of various light emitting means such as the lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 provided in each of the three reels 110 to 112.

Also at the left end of the timing chart in FIG. 104, an animation in which a princess appears (demonstration animation 3/5) is displayed in a bright state on the production image display device 157, and the first volume on which the words "Exhibition volume" are displayed is displayed. A state in which a volume selection icon SI1 and a first guidance display icon GI1 are also displayed is shown. Further, the various light emitting means described above are also shown in a state where they are lit in white.

FIG. 103(d) is a diagram showing the state immediately after this switch operation (3) is performed, and the state shown stepwise after FIG. The state will be shown at a shorter time interval than the state shown.

When setting the power saving mode is selected while the demonstration performance is being executed, that is, the demo animation is being displayed, the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode. In FIG. 103(d), the power saving mode has already been set, and the first production lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and each of the three reels 110 to 112 The provided backlight module 740 is turned off to save power. That is, among the light emitting means that have been lit in white until now, the light emitting means other than the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 are turned off. While the power saving mode is set, only this second effect lamp continues to light in white. In addition, in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 103(d), the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 103(c) has the same second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 97(a). The icons SI2 are displayed in an overlapping manner.

Furthermore, if the power saving mode is selected while the demo animation is being displayed, the display of the demo animation will start from the beginning. In other words, as mentioned above, if you select to set the power saving mode while the demo animation is displayed, the power saving mode will be set. is started from the beginning. On the other hand, as explained using FIG. 101, even if you select to set the power saving mode when the demo animation is not displayed, the power saving mode will not be set and the demo animation will not be displayed. It never starts from the beginning. As shown in the timing chart of FIG. 104, at the timing of FIG. 103(d), demo animation 3/5 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 while the opening animation of the demo animation (demo animation 1/5) is played. will also be started.

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 103(e), the first volume selection icon SI1 has been completely replaced by the second volume selection icon SI2. Furthermore, the display of demo animation 3/5 has ended, and a company logo has begun to appear faintly on the display screen, which has once turned completely white with the start of the opening animation (demonstration animation 1/5). Furthermore, the first guide display icon GI1 has disappeared.

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 103(f), the company logo has appeared quite clearly, but since the second volume selection icon SI2 overlaps, the company logo is not visible in the image shown in FIG. 103(a). It is more difficult to see than the state shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 103(f), a power saving mode setting display AI that notifies that the power saving mode is set, ``power saving mode setting in progress'', is started to be displayed at the bottom of the display screen.

At the timing shown in FIG. 103(g), the demo animation begins to darken. When the demo animation starts to get dark, it becomes harder to see than before it starts getting dark, but the visibility of the power saving mode setting display AI and the second volume selection icon SI2 remains unchanged, and the power saving mode setting display AI and The second volume selection icon SI2 is clearly visible. That is, the brightness of the power saving mode setting display AI and the brightness of the second volume selection icon SI2 do not change.

At the timing shown in FIG. 103(h), the first guide display icon GI1 that has disappeared is redisplayed. The redisplayed first guide display icon GI1 is displayed on the nearest layer, partially overlapping the second volume selection icon SI2, and also overlapping the power saving mode setting display AI. The visibility of the first guide display icon GI1 is also the same as that of the first guide display icon GI1 in FIG. 103(b), and the first guide display icon GI1 is also clearly visible. That is, the brightness of the first guide display icon GI1 also does not change.

Note that the power saving mode setting display AI may be displayed on the nearest layer, and may overlap a part of the first guide display icon GI1. Alternatively, the second volume selection icon SI2 may be displayed on the nearest layer, partially overlapping the first guidance display icon GI1, and partially overlapping the power saving mode setting display AI.

The time from when the demo animation starts to darken until it becomes completely dark on the effect image display device 157 (FIGS. 103(g) to 103(h)) is determined by the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left This is longer than the time during which the side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 provided in each of the three reels 110 to 112 are turned off at the timing shown in FIG. 103(d). If the demo animation suddenly becomes dark, the player may think that the effect image display device 157 is malfunctioning or be surprised, but by taking the time to darken the demo animation in this way, the player can transition to the power saving mode. In some cases, players may notice this.

Note that even if the store clerk operates the switch to change the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 from "9" to "8" shown in FIG. 96(a) while the demo animation is displayed in the power saving mode. The demo animation will start displaying from the beginning. In other words, if you select to set to non-power saving mode while the demo animation is displayed, the mode will be set to non-power saving mode, and if you set to non-power saving mode, the demo animation will be displayed from the beginning. The demo animation that was started and played darkly will now be played brightly. Before the demo animation became bright, the light emitting means that had been turned off in the power saving mode (the first production lamp built into the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the three reels 110 to 112) The backlight module 740) provided in each starts lighting. On the other hand, even if you select to change from power saving mode to non-power saving mode when the demo animation is not displayed, the setting will not change because it is already set to non-power saving mode, and the demo animation The display will not start from the beginning.

If the second chance button 166, which is lit in white, is pressed in accordance with the first guidance display icon GI1 while the power saving mode is set, the mode returns to the non-power saving mode, the demonstration animation display ends, and the display shown in Fig. A payout table shown in 100(a) is displayed. Also, if the left button 167 or right button 168 is pressed in accordance with the first guidance display icon GI1, the mode returns to the non-power saving mode, and the demo animation changes to the non-demo animation (for example, the animation of the lord and the old man shown in FIG. 101). ), and the third volume selection icon SI3 explained using FIGS. 97(A) and 97(B) is displayed.

Also, if the unlit first chance button 165 is pressed while the power saving mode is set, the mode returns to the non-power saving mode, and the demo animation changes to the non-demo animation (for example, the lord shown in FIG. 101). (Tooji's anime), and a certain production may also start.

FIG. 100(b) is a diagram showing a display screen that is displayed when the first chance button 165 is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 103(h).

In the state shown in FIG. 103(h), the first guide display icon GI1 is displayed on the display screen of the effect image display device 157. As described above, the first guidance display icon GI1 does not include the display of the first chance button 165, and the first guidance display icon GI1 is not a display related to the first chance button 165. Furthermore, since the power saving mode is being executed, the first effect lamp built into the first chance button 165 is turned off. In this state, not only is pressing the first chance button 165 not encouraged, but there is also no suggestion regarding the first chance button 165. Nevertheless, when the first chance button 165 is operated, a setting suggestion display for the slot machine 100 is displayed as the above-mentioned certain effect. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, setting values are set that give different degrees of advantage to players. Settings 1 to 6 are prepared as setting values. There is a tendency that the higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage. Although the player usually cannot know this setting value, a setting suggestion display may be displayed as shown in FIG. 100(b). If only the lord's character is displayed, odd number settings (settings 1, 3, and 5) are suggested. If only the old man character is displayed, this suggests an even number setting (setting 2, 4, 6). If only the princess character is displayed, this suggests that the setting is 3 or higher. If both the lord and princess characters are displayed, this suggests that setting 5 or setting 6 is selected. When such a setting suggestion display is performed, the first chance button 165 corresponds to a hidden button.

Note that even if the first chance button 165 is pressed in the states shown in FIGS. 103(d) to 103(g) before the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed, the setting suggestion display will not be displayed on the effect image display device 157. Alternatively, in the states shown in FIGS. 103(d) to 103(g), even if the first chance button 165 is pressed, the setting suggestion display may not be displayed on the effect image display device 157. You can also do this. Further, whether or not the setting suggestion display is displayed may be determined by a lottery when the first chance button 165 is pressed, or may be determined by the timing at which the first chance button 165 is pressed.

FIG. 105 shows the appearance of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the user selects to open the front door 102 without pressing the opening/closing piece and set the power saving mode while the demo animation is being displayed. FIG.

The example shown in FIG. 105 is an example in which an error notification of a door opening error is being performed. Hereinafter, the differences from the example shown in FIG. 103 in which error notification of a door opening error is stopped will be mainly explained.

In the example shown in FIG. 105, before the demo animation starts, a clerk at the game store opens the front door 102. At this time, since the clerk at the game parlor opened the front door 102 without holding down the opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is opened, an error notification of a door opening error is started. That is, the effect image display device 157 displays an error message indicating a door opening error in the form of characters such as "Door is opening," and in FIG. The error notification sound is repeatedly output.

In FIG. 105(a), the demonstration effect has started, and the effect image display device 157 has started displaying the opening animation (demonstration animation 1/5). At the upper left of the display screen of the effect image display device 157, an error display EI1 indicating a door opening error is displayed in the form of characters such as "door opening". This error display EI1 is displayed on the layer closest to you, and continues to be displayed until the front door 102 is closed.

Further, in the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 105(a), the built-in first effect lamp is lit in red, and in conjunction with the first effect lamp, the right side lamp 144R is also lit in red. . On the other hand, the second effect lamp built into the second chance button 166 is also lit in white. Further, the left side lamp 144L is also lit white. Furthermore, the backlight module 740 (see FIG. 96) provided in each of the three reels 110 to 112 is also illuminated in white, and the three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 105(a) are illuminated in white. .

The clerk operates the first selection switch 190 (1), and as shown in FIG. 105(b), the effect image display device 157, which displays the demo animation in which the lord appears, displays "Volume 7". A first volume selection icon SI1 with characters "/7" displayed thereon is displayed. Further, at the lower left, display of the first guide display icon GI1 has started.

Next, the store clerk operates the first selection switch 190 (2), and as shown in FIG. A first volume selection icon SI1 with the words "Volume for Exhibition" displayed thereon is displayed. Furthermore, a first guide display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left.

Subsequently, the clerk operates the first selection switch 190 (3), and the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode. In FIG. 105(d), the power saving mode has already been set, but only the backlight modules 740 provided in each of the three reels 110 to 112 are turned off. That is, the first effect lamp built into the first chance button 165 is still lit in red, and the right side lamp 144R is also kept lit in red. Further, the second effect lamp built into the second chance button 166 is still lit in white, and the left side lamp 144L is also kept lit in white. The off state of the backlight module 740 continues until the setting of the power saving mode is completed.

Further, the display of the demo animation starts from the beginning, and while the demo animation 3/5 in which the princess appears is displayed, the opening animation of the demo animation (demo animation 1/5) also starts to be played. Furthermore, in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 105(d), a second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed overlapping the first volume selection icon SI1. Note that even if the power saving mode is set, the error display EI1 remains displayed. The subsequent steps are the same as the example shown in FIG. 103, except for the aspects of the various light emitting means and the fact that the error display EI1 is continuously displayed, so the explanation will be omitted.

Also in this example, while displaying the demo animation in the power saving mode, the store clerk operated the switch to change the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 from "9" to "8" shown in FIG. 96(a). In this case, the display of the demo animation will start from the beginning. In other words, if you select to set to non-power saving mode while the demo animation is displayed, the mode will be set to non-power saving mode, and if you set to non-power saving mode, the demo animation will be displayed from the beginning. The demo animation that was started and played darkly will now be played brightly. Before the demo animation became bright, the light emitting means that had been turned off in the power saving mode (the first production lamp built into the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the three reels 110 to 112) The backlight module 740) provided in each starts lighting. On the other hand, even if you select to change from power saving mode to non-power saving mode when the demo animation is not displayed, the setting will not change because it is already set to non-power saving mode, and the demo animation The display will not start from the beginning.

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing step by step the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when a selection is made to set the power saving mode while the hopper empty error continues to occur.

Inside the slot machine 100, a motor-driven medal discharging device 180 (see FIG. 93) is provided, and during the medal dispensing operation, when the game medals in the bucket run out, the medal dispensing sensor detects that a predetermined first time has elapsed. If the hopper does not turn on even when the motor is turned on, and recovery cannot be achieved even after performing the recovery process of rotating the motor in reverse, a hopper empty error will be notified. The hopper empty error occurs by opening the front door 102, replenishing the bucket with medals, and pressing the reset button provided inside the slot machine 100, or by closing the front door 102 and pressing the key inserted into the key hole 140 to the left. The error will be cleared by turning it to .

FIG. 106(a) is a diagram showing a state in which a hopper empty error occurs. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 106(a) displays an error notification in the background display of the error notification (background display of diagonal hatching). In other words, there is an error display EI2 that does not specify the error that has occurred, such as "Error has occurred," and an error display EI3 that explains how to clear the hopper empty error, such as "Please replenish medals and then press the reset switch." Displayed. Note that an error display indicating an instruction to the player such as "Please call the store clerk" may also be displayed.

Further, in the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 106(a), the built-in first effect lamp is lit in red, and in conjunction with the first effect lamp, the right side lamp 144R is also lit in red. . On the other hand, the second effect lamp built into the second chance button 166 is off. Further, the left side lamp 144L is lit white. Furthermore, the backlight module 740 (see FIG. 96) provided on each of the three reels 110 to 112 is also illuminated in white, and the three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 106(a) are illuminated in white. .

The clerk at the game parlor opens the front door 102 without pressing the opening/closing piece, and performs a switch operation (1) to set the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 to "7" shown in FIG. 96(a). Since the error display EI2 such as "Error Occurred" is displayed on the effect image display device 157, this error display EI2 is also used to notify the door opening error, and the text such as "Door Opening" shown in FIG. 105 is displayed. The error display EI of the door opening error is not displayed. Further, an error notification sound indicating a door opening error such as "The door is open" is not output. Note that an error notification sound indicating an instruction to the player such as "Please replenish medals" may be output. Alternatively, an error display EI indicating a door opening error may be displayed, or an error notification sound indicating a door opening error may be output.

As a result of the store clerk's switch operation (1) of the first selection switch 190, as shown in FIG. A first volume selection icon SI1 displaying the characters "7/7" is displayed overlapping an error display EI2 indicating "Error Occurrence." The first volume selection icon SI1 may be displayed on the nearest layer, and if an error display indicating an instruction to the player such as "Please call the store clerk" is also displayed, this error display are also displayed overlapping. Alternatively, an error display EI3 explaining how to cancel the hopper empty error may be displayed on the nearest layer.

Next, the store clerk performs a switch operation (2) of the first selection switch 190, and as shown in FIG. A first volume selection icon SI1 with the words "Meeting volume" displayed thereon is displayed.

Subsequently, the store clerk operates the first selection switch 190 (3) to select the power saving mode setting, and the volume level becomes the state in which the seventh volume level is selected. However, since the state shown in FIG. 106(d) is not a state in which the demonstration effect is being executed, the power saving mode is not set, and the display of the demo animation is not started from the beginning. On the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 106(d), instead of the first volume selection icon SI1, a second volume selection icon SI2 on which the words "power saving mode" are displayed displays an error message such as "Error Occurrence". It is displayed overlapping display EI2.

Further, in FIG. 106(d), there is no change in the aspects of the various light emitting means, and only the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 remains off.

In addition, in the above explanation, the power saving mode was not set unless the demo effect was being executed, but if the power saving mode setting was selected, it could be set while the game was being played. However, a power saving mode may be set.

In addition, when the power saving mode is set, the animation is played in a dark state to save power. Although power is saved by turning off the backlight module 740 shown in 96, power may be saved in other devices as well. For example, when the power saving mode is set, the output sound from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 may be lowered, the effect movable body may not be moved, or its movement may be restricted. Alternatively, the brightness of the entire display screen of the effect image display device 157 may be reduced, not limited to the reproduction of animation. Further, the second effect lamp built into the second chance button 166 may also be turned off. Furthermore, instead of completely turning off the light emitting means such as the first effect lamp, the second effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740, the brightness (light amount) is reduced. Even if the light is dimmed, it will save power.

Furthermore, the timing to start power saving is different for the first effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the backlight module 740 (the timing shown in FIG. 103(d)), and the effect image display device 157 (the timing shown in FIG. 103(d)). Although the timing is different from the timing of (g)), the first effect lamp, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 start power saving first, and the right side lamp 144R and the effect image display device 157 start saving power later. It may also be possible to start power saving. In addition to the effect image display device 157, a second effect image display device with a small display screen is provided, and the second effect image display device starts power saving first, and the effect image display device 157 starts power saving later. You can do it like this. In addition, combinations of light emitting means and sound output means, combinations of effect movable bodies and display means, combinations of light emitting means and effect movable bodies, combinations of effect movable bodies and sound output means, combinations of display means and sound output means, etc. The timing for starting power saving may be different.

Further, although the brightness (light amount) of the various lamps could not be selected by operating the first selection switch 190, the brightness (light amount) level of the various lamps could also be changed by operating the first selection switch 190 in the same way as the volume level. It may be possible to select it by operation.

Next, the operation performance in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91 will be explained.

FIG. 107 is a diagram showing two examples of operation effects.

This FIG. 107 shows a performance image display device 157, a first chance button 165, a second chance button 166, a left button 167, and a right button 168. The first performance lamp built into the first chance button 165 is capable of displaying luminescent displays of the seven colors that make up the rainbow (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet), and can also display white light. A luminescent display is also possible. This white light emitting display becomes the default light emitting display of the first chance button 165. The second effect lamp built into the second chance button 166, like the first effect lamp, can also display a luminescent display of seven colors that make up a rainbow, and can also display a white luminescent display as a default luminescent display. It is something that can be displayed. Note that the second chance button 165 may be configured to display only white light emitting display (default light emitting display).

In the state shown on the left side of FIG. 107(a), the operation performance has started. This operation performance is a performance that is started after the end of the game, and is a performance that is executed only during a period when no game is being played. That is, the operation performance is a performance that starts when the third stop operation is performed and all the reels 110 to 112 stop, and when the start lever 135 is operated, the operation performance ends even if it is in the middle, and the game ends. is started. In addition, the operation performance may be a performance that is continuously performed during the game (while the reels are rotating), a performance that continues to be performed even after the game has started, or a performance that is continuously performed during the game (while the reels are rotating). ) may be performed only when

In the first chance button 165 shown on the left side of FIG. 107(a), the built-in first effect lamp lights up in a third color (for example, red), and a light emitting display of the third color is displayed. The production image display device 157 displays an animation in which a lord is sitting on the throne and an old man is reading a letter (hereinafter, this animation will be referred to as a "great hall animation"), and an animation is displayed so as to overlap with this great hall animation. A first operation prompting display HD1 is displayed to prompt the user to operate the first chance button 165. The first operation promotion display HD1 here is composed of a text display LD1 indicating that the first chance button 165 should be pressed, and a first button display 165D representing the first chance button 165. The first button display 165D is a display representing the first chance button 165 displaying the third color light emission display, and is displayed in the same state as the actual first chance button 165.

The start timing of the operation performance may be the timing when the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 changes, or the timing when the display of the first operation promotion display HD1 is started. Note that the timing at which the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 changes and the timing at which the display of the first operation promotion display HD1 starts may be the same timing, but the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 changes. The timing could be faster. Since the timing at which the light emitting display changes is earlier, the player's attention is drawn to the first chance button 165, and the change in the light emitting display functions as a notice that the first operation promotion display HD1 will be performed. However, the timing at which the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 changes may be later.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed, the effect image display device 157 shows that the first chance button 165 has been operated, as shown on the right side of FIG. An operation result display (response display) that is displayed in response to this is displayed. Although the details of the operation result display will be described later, here, the operation result display RD20 as a suggestion display is displayed. The operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display is a display that suggests the level of expectation by the color of a frame display RD21 surrounding the lord's character display RD22, and the frame display RD21 here is a first color (for example, yellow). . Further, the operated first chance button 165 continues to display a third color (for example, red) light emitting display. That is, the display mode has not changed after the operation.

In the first chance button 165 shown on the left side of FIG. 107(b), the built-in first effect lamp lights up in a third color (for example, red), as in FIG. The luminescent display is displayed. Also, as in FIG. 107(a), the effect image display device 157 includes a first operation promotion display including a first button display 165D representing a first chance button 165 displaying a third color light emitting display. HD1 is displayed.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed, the effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. 107(b) also displays the first color as in FIG. 107(a). A suggested operation result display RD20 including a (for example, yellow) frame display RD21 is displayed. On the other hand, in this example, the operated first chance button 165 is off, and the third color (for example, red) light emission display has ended.

Note that the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and even if the first chance button 165 is not operated within this predetermined period of time, the operation result display will not be displayed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed. Is displayed. That is, the operation result display is a display that is displayed whether or not the first chance button 165 is operated, but if the first chance button 165 is operated at an early timing, the operation result display is displayed at an early stage. After watching it, you can start the next game. Note that if the first chance button 165 is not operated within a predetermined period of time, the operation result display may not be displayed.

Next, characteristic operation effects in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91 will be explained.

FIG. 108 is a table summarizing the characteristic operation effects of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91.

There are two types of characteristic operation effects described here, which differ in the type of operation result display. One is a first operation effect, and when the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed, an operation result display notifying the number of AT add-on games is displayed. The other is a second operation effect, and when the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed, an operation result display of a suggestion display is displayed.

Regardless of whether it is the first operation effect or the second operation effect, the light emission display of the first chance button 165 before the operation, the light emission display of the first chance button 165 after the operation, and the frame included in the operation result display There are multiple display color combinations.

FIG. 108(a) is a table summarizing patterns when the first chance button 165 before the operation displays a third color (for example, red) light emission display in the first operation performance. (b) is a table summarizing patterns when the first chance button 165 before the operation is displaying a fourth color (for example, rainbow color) light emission display in the first operation effect. Note that rainbow colors may be a mode in which the display colors change continuously one color at a time to display each of the seven colors that make up the rainbow, or a mode in which the seven colors that make up the rainbow are displayed at once. It may also be displayed in divided areas.

In the first operation performance, the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed on the performance image display device 157 to prompt the user to operate the first chance button 165, but even if the second chance button 166 is operated, the operation result is not displayed. may be displayed. In other words, both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 may become operational buttons. The second chance button 166 is in a state where a default fifth color (for example, white) is displayed, but like the first chance button 165, a third color (for example, red) is displayed, or It may be displayed in a fourth color (for example, a rainbow color). Alternatively, the second chance button 166 is also operable only when the second chance button 166 displays a third color (for example, red) luminescent display or a fourth color (for example, rainbow color) luminescent display. It may also be a button.

The state in which the first chance button 165 displays the third color (for example, red) luminescent display before operation is the same as the state shown on the left side of FIGS. 107(a) and 107(b). Further, in the first operation performance, there is also a state in which the first chance button 165 before the operation is displaying a fourth color (for example, rainbow color) light emission display. In either state, the effect image display device 157 displays a first operation promotion display HD1 that is the same as the first operation promotion display HD1 shown in FIG. 107(a). When the first chance button 165 is operated, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display notifying the number of AT add-on games. The color of the frame display in this operation result display differs depending on the number of AT additional games, as shown in the tables of FIGS. 108(a) and 108(b). Further, after the operation, the first chance button 165 changes to a light emitting display of the same color as the frame display color in the operation result display.

If both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operation valid buttons, even if the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the first chance button 165 The second chance button 166 may have the same luminescent display as the luminescent display before the operation, or may be different from the first chance button 165. Similarly, the light emitting display may change to a color that is the same as the color of the frame display in the operation result display. Alternatively, only when the second chance button 166 is operated, the light emitting display may change to the same color as the frame display color in the operation result display.

Even if the first chance button 165 before operation is displaying a third color (e.g., red) (as shown in the table shown in FIG. 108(a)), the fourth color (e.g., rainbow color) ) (table shown in Figure 108(b)), the color of the frame display in the operation result display is displayed in a fourth color (for example, rainbow color) , the operation result display will not be displayed even if the second chance button 166 is pressed, and the operation result display will not be displayed unless the first chance button 165 is pressed. The number of AT additional games is determined in advance by a lottery before the first operation effect is started, and based on the lottery result, the content of the operation result display that informs the number of AT additional games is determined. It is also determined whether or not the second chance button 166 is to be used as an operation valid button. When displaying the frame display color in the operation result display in a fourth color (for example, rainbow color), the operation of the second chance button 166 is accepted in a control manner, but the operation result display is not displayed. Alternatively, the operation of the second chance button 166 itself may not be accepted in a controlled manner.

FIG. 108(c) is a table summarizing the patterns when the first chance button 165 before the operation displays a third color (for example, red) luminescent display in the second operation performance. (d) is a table summarizing patterns when the first chance button 165 before the operation is displaying a fourth color (for example, rainbow color) light emission display in the second operation effect.

In the second operation performance as well, the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed on the performance image display device 157 to prompt the user to operate the first chance button 165. Both may be operational buttons. The second chance button 166 is in a state where a default fifth color (for example, white) is displayed, but like the first chance button 165, a third color (for example, red) is displayed, or It may be displayed in a fourth color (for example, a rainbow color). Alternatively, the second chance button 166 is also operable only when the second chance button 166 displays a third color (for example, red) luminescent display or a fourth color (for example, rainbow color) luminescent display. It may also be a button.

Also in the second operation performance, before the first chance button 165 is operated, the first operation promotion display HD1, which is the same as the first operation promotion display HD1 shown in FIG. 107(a), is displayed on the performance image display device 157. There is. In the second operation effect, when the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed, the effect image display device 157 displays the operation result display of the suggestion display (see FIG. 107). Ru. The color of the frame display in this operation result display differs depending on the expectation level (reliability) of the suggestion display, as shown in the tables of FIGS. 108(c) and 108(d). Also, in the second operation performance, the first chance button 165 after the operation changes to a light emitting display of the same color as the frame display color in the operation result display.

Furthermore, in the second operation effect, if both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operation valid buttons, the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165. However, the first chance button 165 may change to a luminescent display of the same color as the frame display color in the operation result display, and the second chance button 166 may change to a luminescent display that is the same as the luminescent display before the operation. However, like the first chance button 165, the light emitting display may change to the same color as the frame display color in the operation result display. Alternatively, only when the second chance button 166 is operated, the light emitting display may change to the same color as the frame display color in the operation result display.

Further, even if the first chance button 165 before operation is displaying a light emitting display of a third color (for example, red) (as shown in the table shown in FIG. Even if the color of the frame display in the operation result display of the suggestion display is displayed in the fourth color (for example, rainbow color) (as shown in the table shown in FIG. 108(d)), Only when displayed, the operation result display of the suggestion display is not displayed even if the second chance button 166 is pressed, and the operation result display of the suggestion display is not displayed unless the first chance button 165 is pressed. In addition, the result of the expectation (reliability) of the suggestion display (details will be described later, but whether or not to shift to the AT state) is determined in advance by a lottery before the second operation performance starts, and the lottery result Based on this, the expectation level (reliability) of the suggestion display is determined, and it is also determined whether or not the second chance button 166 is to be made an operationally valid button. When displaying the frame display color in the operation result display of the suggestion display in a fourth color (for example, rainbow color), the operation of the second chance button 166 is accepted in terms of control, but the operation result display of the suggestion display is not displayed. It may be a mode in which it is not displayed, or a mode in which the operation of the second chance button 166 itself is not accepted in a controlled manner.

In addition, whether it is the first operation effect or the second operation effect, the light emission display before the operation of the first chance button 165 is a light emission display of the first color, second color, fifth color, or other color. The color of the frame display and the color of the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 after operation may also be other colors.

Further, the first operation performance and the second operation performance may occur simultaneously. In this case, both the operation result display notifying the number of AT extra games and the operation result display of the suggestion display are displayed, and the color of the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 after the operation is different from the operation result display of the suggestion display. The color will be the same as the frame display color. Note that the color may be the same as the color of the frame display in the operation result display that notifies the number of additional games.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the relationship between colors in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91.

In FIG. 109, the light emitting display mode of the first chance button 165 is shown in a vertical column on the left side.

A vertical column on the left side shows the state of the light emitting display of the first chance button 165.

The vertical line in the center shows the display mode of the operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT add-on games. For example, +25G displayed in the AT additional game number display RD12 represents that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained has been increased by 25 games. The color of the frame display RD11 surrounding this AT additional game number display RD12 is a color corresponding to the number of additional games for which the AT state is maintained. Note that the color of the frame display RD11 may indicate the reliability of other benefits. For example, in the case of a game where points are accumulated, the color of the frame display RD11 may be a color corresponding to the number of points.

The vertical column on the right side shows the display mode of the operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display. What is suggested here is the expectation level (reliability level) of the bonus (AT status in this example) being given to the player. By displaying the lord's character display RD22 inside the frame display RD21, a production that predicts whether or not the state will transition to the state where the above benefits are granted (in this example, if you win, the state will shift to the state where the above benefits are granted) The color of the frame display RD21 indicates the degree of expectation (in this example, the degree of expectation (reliability) of winning the battle performance) that the above-mentioned benefits will be granted. ) represents. In this sense, the operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display also corresponds to a display regarding the player's benefits. In addition, the operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display is also a preview display of the start of a production that predicts whether or not the state will transition to a state in which the above benefits are granted, and a preview display of the start of a production in the next game. Furthermore, it also corresponds to a preview display that a bonus will be given to the player, or a preview display that a player will win in a battle performance. In addition to the AT status, the bonus given to the player may be a big bonus or the like. Further, instead of the lord character display RD22, a princess character display or an old man character display may be displayed. In the case of a princess character display, there is a 50% probability that a performance that predicts whether or not the above benefits will be granted will start, and the color of the frame display RD21 is also a color according to that probability (for example, , the first color), and in the case of the grandfather character display, there is a 0% probability that a performance that predicts whether or not the above benefit will be granted will start, and the color of the frame display RD21 may also be a color (for example, a fifth color) depending on the probability.

In FIGS. 107 to 115, the state where the first chance button 165 is off is represented by a plain state without hatching.

Further, in FIGS. 107 to 115, the fifth color (eg, white) is represented by vertical hatching. This fifth color corresponds to the default light emitting display color of the first chance button 165. In addition, in the operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT additional games, the fifth color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, and corresponds to the color representing that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained has been increased by 25 games. do. Further, the fifth color corresponds to a color that suggests that the expectation level (reliability level) is 0% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display. In other words, the fifth color corresponds to the color that indicates that the expectation of transitioning to the AT state is 0%, or that the reliability as a preview of transitioning to the AT state is 0%, and there is no difference in the AT state. Corresponds to a color that suggests that there will be no transition.

Further, in FIGS. 107 to 115, the first color (for example, yellow) is represented by hatching diagonally downward to the left. This first color corresponds to the color of the first light emitting display in the first chance button 165. In addition, in the operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT added games, the first color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, and corresponds to the color indicating that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained has been added by 50 games. do. Further, the first color corresponds to a color that suggests that the expectation level (reliability level) is 25% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display. That is, the first color corresponds to a color representing that the expectation level of transition to the AT state is 25%, or that the reliability as a preview of transition to the AT state is 25%.

Furthermore, in FIGS. 107 to 115, the second color (for example, blue) is represented by hatching diagonally downward to the right. This second color corresponds to the color of the second light emitting display in the first chance button 165. In addition, in the operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT added games, a second color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, and corresponds to the color representing that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained has been added by 100 games. do. Further, the second color corresponds to a color that suggests that the expectation level (reliability level) is 50% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display. That is, the second color corresponds to a color representing that the expectation level of transition to the AT state is 50%, or that the reliability as a preview of transition to the AT state is 50%.

Furthermore, in FIGS. 107 to 115, the third color (for example, red) is represented by diagonal cross hatching. This third color corresponds to the color of the third light emitting display in the first chance button 165. In addition, in the operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT added games, a third color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, and corresponds to the color that indicates that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained has been added by 300 games. do. Further, the third color corresponds to a color that suggests that the expectation level (reliability level) is 75% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display. That is, the third color corresponds to a color representing that the expectation level of transition to the AT state is 75%, or that the reliability as a preview of transition to the AT state is 75%.

Furthermore, in FIGS. 107 to 115, the fourth color (for example, rainbow color) is represented by cross hatching of vertical lines and horizontal lines. This fourth color corresponds to the color of the fourth light emitting display in the first chance button 165. In addition, in the operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT additional games, the fourth color is displayed as the color of the frame display RD11, and corresponds to the color representing that the number of games in which the AT state is maintained has been increased by 500 games. do. Further, the fourth color corresponds to a color that suggests that the expectation level (reliability level) is 100% in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display. In other words, the third color corresponds to the color that indicates that the expectation level for transitioning to the AT state is 100%, or that the reliability as a preview of transitioning to the AT state is 100%. Corresponds to a color that suggests transition.

In addition, in the explanation here, it was explained that the degree of expectation (reliability) that a benefit is given to the player differs depending on the color, but the fifth color, the first color, the second color, The order of description, such as the third color and the fourth color, may suggest that the player's advantage increases, or may suggest that the expectation level (reliability) of various previews increases.

FIG. 110 is a diagram specifically showing some examples of the first operation performance 1 described using FIG. 108(a). Similarly to FIG. 107, FIG. 110 also shows a performance image display device 157, a first chance button 165, a second chance button 166, a left button 167, and a right button 168 (FIGS. 111 to 115). is the same).

The state shown on the left in each of FIGS. 110(a) to 110(c) is a state in which the operation performance is started after the game ends. The first chance button 165 displays a third color (for example, red) light emitting display. A saloon animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and a first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap this saloon animation. Like the example shown in FIG. 107, the first operation prompting display HD1 here also includes a character display LD1 telling you to press the first chance button 165, and a first chance button 165 displaying a third color light emitting display. The first button display 165D shown in FIG.

If the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation promotion display HD1 is being displayed, the state shown on the right side in each of FIGS. 110(a) to 110(c) will occur. In the state shown on the right side of each figure, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT additional games. Further, the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 has changed from the light emitting display before the operation. The light emitting display of the first chance button 165 changes before the operation result display RD10 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (the same applies to the following examples). By doing so, the display mode of the operation result display RD10 can be suggested in advance by the light emitting display of the first chance button 165.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 110(a), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +50G is displayed in the first color (for example, yellow), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is in the third color. changing from a color (e.g., red) to a first color. Incidentally, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side of this screen also occurs.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 110(b), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +100G is displayed in the second color (for example, blue), and the light emission display of the first chance button 165 is changed to the third color. changing from one color (for example, red) to a second color. Incidentally, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side of this screen also occurs.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 110(c), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +500G is displayed in the fourth color (for example, rainbow color), and the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. color (for example, red) to a fourth color. Note that when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, unlike the previous examples, the operation result display RD10 is not displayed and the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 also changes. do not.

As explained above, the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 after the operation is a light-emitting display related to the display of the operation result of the first chance button 165, and even after the first chance button 165 is operated, the light-emitting display In some cases, you can obtain information depending on the operation. In addition, in the performance image display device 157, various images may be displayed simultaneously or various display colors may be used simultaneously, so the performance represented by the display screen may be difficult for the player to understand. The effect represented by the light-emitting display of the 1 chance button 165 may be easier for the player to understand. Furthermore, since the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 after the operation and the display of the operation result of the first chance button 165 are related displays, a cohesive performance can be developed, and in this respect as well, the player can enjoy the performance. It becomes easier to understand.

FIG. 111 is a diagram specifically showing some examples of the first operation performance 2 described using FIG. 108(b).

The state shown on the left side in each of FIGS. 111(a) to 111(c) is a state in which the operation performance is started after the game ends. The first chance button 165 displays a fourth color (for example, rainbow color) luminescent display. A saloon animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and a first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap this saloon animation. Here, the first operation promotion display HD1 is composed of a text display LD1 that tells you to press the first chance button 165, and a first button display 165D representing the first chance button 165 displaying a fourth color light emitting display. It is configured.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation promotion display HD1 is being displayed, the state shown on the right side in each of FIGS. 111(a) to 111(c) occurs. In the state shown on the right side of each figure, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT additional games.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 111(a), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +25G is displayed in the fifth color (for example, white), and the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. changing from a color (for example, iridescent) to a fifth color. Incidentally, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side of this screen also occurs.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 111(b), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +300G is displayed in the third color (for example, red), and the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. changing from a color (for example, iridescent) to a tertiary color. Incidentally, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side of this screen also occurs.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 111(c), the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the character display of +500G is displayed in the fourth color (for example, rainbow color), and the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. It remains displayed in this color. Note that when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, unlike the previous examples, the operation result display RD10 is not displayed.

FIG. 112 is a diagram specifically showing some examples of the second operation performance 1 described using FIG. 108(c).

The state shown on the left in each of FIGS. 112(a) to 112(c) is a state in which the operation performance is started after the game ends. The first chance button 165 displays a third color (for example, red) light emitting display. A saloon animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and a first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap this saloon animation. Like the example shown in FIG. 110, the first operation prompting display HD1 here also includes a character display LD1 telling you to press the first chance button 165, and a first chance button 165 displaying a third color light emitting display. The first button display 165D shown in FIG.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation promotion display HD1 is being displayed, the state shown on the right side in each of FIGS. 112(a) to 112(c) occurs. In the state shown on the right side of each figure, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display RD20 of a suggestion display. Further, the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 has changed from the light emitting display before the operation.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 112(a), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the lord's character display RD22 is displayed in the first color (for example, yellow), and the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the third color. color (for example, red) to the first color. Incidentally, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side of this screen also occurs.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 112(b), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the lord's character display RD22 is displayed in the second color (for example, blue), and the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the third color. color (for example, red) to a second color. Incidentally, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side of this screen also occurs.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 112(c), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the lord's character display RD22 is displayed in a fourth color (for example, rainbow color), and the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. It changes from a third color (for example, red) to a fourth color. Note that when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, unlike the previous examples, the operation result display RD20 is not displayed and the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 also changes. do not.

FIG. 113 is a diagram specifically showing some examples of the second operation performance 2 described using FIG. 108(d).

The state shown on the left side in each of FIGS. 113(a) to 113(c) is a state in which the operation performance is started after the game ends. The first chance button 165 displays a fourth color (for example, rainbow color) luminescent display. A saloon animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and a first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap with this saloon animation. Here, the first operation prompting display HD1 includes a text display LD1 telling you to press the first chance button 165 and a fourth color light emitting display for the first chance button 165, as in the example shown in FIG. 111. The first button display 165D shown in FIG.

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation promotion display HD1 is being displayed, the state shown on the right side in each of FIGS. 113(a) to 113(c) occurs. In the state shown on the right side of each figure, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display RD20 of a suggestion display.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 113(a), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the lord's character display RD22 is displayed in the fifth color (for example, white), and the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. color (for example, rainbow color) to a fifth color. Incidentally, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side of this screen also occurs.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 113(b), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the lord's character display RD22 is displayed in a third color (for example, red), and the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. (e.g. rainbow colors) to a third color. Incidentally, when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, the state shown on the right side of this screen also occurs.

In the state shown on the right side of FIG. 113(c), the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the lord's character display RD22 is displayed in a fourth color (for example, rainbow color), and the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the fourth color. It remains displayed in the fourth color. Note that when the second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165, unlike the previous examples, the operation result display RD20 is not displayed.

Furthermore, other examples of operation effects will be explained.

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing another example of operation performance.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 114(a) is a state where the operation performance is started after the game ends. The first chance button 165 displays a third color (for example, red) light emitting display. A saloon animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and a first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap this saloon animation. The first operation promotion display HD1 here also includes a text display LD1 indicating that the first chance button 165 should be pressed, and a first chance button 165 displaying a third color light emitting display, as in the example shown in FIG. 110 and the like. It consists of a first button display 165D representing .

When the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed, the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 changes to a third color light emitting display, as shown on the right side of FIG. 114(a). The display changes to a luminescent display of a first color (for example, yellow). Further, in the center of the display screen of the effect image display device 157, an operation result display RD10 is displayed that notifies the number of AT add-on games. This operation result display RD10 has the same size as the operation result display RD10 described so far, and the color of the frame display RD11 surrounding the +100G AT additional game number display RD12 is the same as the color of the light emission display of the first chance button 165. and is displayed in a second color (eg, blue). On the other hand, an operation result display RD20 of suggestion display is also displayed at the lower right of the display screen. The operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display displayed at the bottom right is smaller than the operation result display RD20 described so far and is displayed in a reduced size, but the color of the frame display RD21 surrounding the lord's character display RD22 is different from the first one. It is displayed in the same first color as the color of the light-emitting display of the chance button 165. That is, although the operation result display RD10 notifying the number of AT additional games is displayed with priority over the operation result display RD20 of the reduced-displayed suggestion display, the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 is The operation result display RD20 for the suggestion display is given priority over the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT add-on games, and is displayed in the same color as the frame display RD21 in the operation result display RD20 for the suggestion display. In this way, although the operation result display RD10 and the operation result display RD20 have different priorities, the operation result display RD10 and the operation result display RD20 may be displayed at the same time. When the operation result display RD10 and the operation result display RD20 are displayed at the same time, a battle performance is started when the next game is started, and the right to win the battle performance and shift to the AT state is stocked. That is, even if 100 games have been added and the AT state termination condition is met, the AT state will be re-entered due to the stocked rights. Please note that the battle effect does not start when the next game starts, but when the end conditions of the AT state are met (for example, when the added 100 games are played), the battle effect starts, and that battle There may be a case where the player wins the performance and shifts to the AT state again.

Further, as in this example, the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 is displayed in the same color as the frame display RD21 in the operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display, and the light emitting display of the first color and the The light emitting display of two colors may be displayed alternately. Alternatively, half of the light emitting area may be displayed in the first color, and the remaining half may be displayed in the second color. Furthermore, the area of the light emitting region may be made larger for the color to be prioritized. For example, the first color may be displayed in 3/4 of the light emitting area, and the second color may be displayed in 1/4 of the light emitting area.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 114(b) is also the same as the state shown on the left side of FIG. 114(a), and the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation promotion display HD1 is being displayed. Then, as shown on the right side of FIG. 114(b), the luminescent display of the first chance button 165 changes from the luminescent display of the third color to the luminescent display of the first color (for example, yellow). Further, on the effect image display device 157, an operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT add-on games is displayed, but an operation result display RD20 for a suggestion display is not displayed. In the operation result display RD10 shown on the right side of FIG. 114(b), the color of the frame display RD11 is different from the color of the light emission display of the first chance button 165, and is a second color (for example, blue). In this example, the operation result display RD10 that informs the number of AT additional games is displayed with priority over the operation result display RD20 of the suggestion display, and as a result, the frame display RD21 of the suggestion display is displayed in the first color. The display of the operation result display RD20 is hidden. Depending on the website of the gaming machine manufacturer that introduces this slot machine 100 or the guidebook, the color of the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 may be inconsistent with the color of the frame display of the operation result display displayed on the effect image display device 157. In this case, the player who knows that the operation result display of the frame display of the same color as the color of the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 is hidden, may change the frame display RD21 to the first color. It can be inferred that the operation result display RD20 of the displayed suggestion display is hidden, which may improve the interest of the game. Additionally, if there are three or more types of operation result displays, the player may not know which type of operation result display is hidden, and the desired type of operation result display may be hidden. In some cases, the game becomes more interesting in anticipation of Alternatively, the display may not necessarily be hidden; in this case, the color of the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 and the color of the operation result display displayed on the effect image display device 157 may be changed. The colors of the frame display may not match, and the player does not know whether it is hidden or not. may be improved.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 114(c) is also the same as the state shown on the left side of FIG. 114(a), and the first chance button 165 is operated while the first operation promotion display HD1 is being displayed. Then, as shown on the right side of FIG. 114(c), the luminescent display of the first chance button 165 changes from the luminescent display of the third color to the luminescent display of the first color (for example, yellow). In addition, on the effect image display device 157, the operation result display RD20 that is a suggestion display is displayed, but the operation result display RD10 that informs the number of AT add-on games is not displayed. In the operation result display RD20 shown on the right side of FIG. 114(c), the color of the frame display RD21 is different from the color of the light emitting display of the first chance button 165, and is a second color (for example, blue). In this example, contrary to the previous example, the operation result display RD20 for the suggestion display is given priority over the operation result display RD10 for notifying the number of AT additional games, and as a result, the frame display RD11 is displayed in the first The display of the operation result display RD10 that informs the number of AT add-on games displayed in color is hidden. Depending on the website of the gaming machine manufacturer that introduces this slot machine 100 or the guidebook, the color of the light-emitting display of the first chance button 165 may be inconsistent with the color of the frame display of the operation result display displayed on the effect image display device 157. In this case, the player who knows that the operation result display of the frame display of the same color as the color of the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 is hidden, It can be inferred that the operation result display RD10 notifying the displayed number of AT add-on games is hidden, which may improve the interest of the game. Additionally, if there are three or more types of operation result displays, the player may not know which type of operation result display is hidden, and the desired type of operation result display may be hidden. In some cases, the game becomes more interesting in anticipation of Alternatively, the display may not necessarily be hidden; in this case, the color of the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 and the color of the operation result display displayed on the effect image display device 157 may be changed. The colors of the frame display may not match, and the player does not know whether it is hidden or not. may be improved.

FIG. 115 is a diagram illustrating an example where an operating means other than the first chance button 165 is operated in the operation performance.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 115(a) is also a state in which the operation performance is started after the end of the game, and the first chance button 165 displays a third color (for example, red) light-emitting display. A saloon animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and a first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap this saloon animation. The first operation promotion display HD1 here also includes a text display LD1 indicating that the first chance button 165 should be pressed, and a first chance button 165 displaying a third color light emitting display, as in the example shown in FIG. 110 and the like. It consists of a first button display 165D representing .

When the start lever 135 is operated instead of the first chance button 165 while the first operation promotion display HD1 is being displayed, the game is started. That is, the three reels 110 to 112 start rotating. Although the saloon animation continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. 114(a), operation result displays such as operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT additional games and operation result display RD20 that provides a suggestion display are displayed. (Response display) type of display is not displayed. Note that once the game has started, another animation (for example, an animation exclusively used during the game) may be displayed instead of the saloon animation. Further, the light emitting display of the first chance button 165 has changed to the light emitting display of the fifth color, that is, the default light emitting display. Note that the first chance button 165 may be turned off. If you want to proceed with the game without looking at the light emitting display or operation result display RD10, RD20 as in the example shown in FIG. 110 or the example shown in FIG. 112, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 in this way. Ru.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 115(b) is also a state in which the operation performance is started after the game ends. The first chance button 165 displays a third color (for example, red) light emitting display. On the other hand, the second chance button 166 is in an off state. A saloon animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and a first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed so as to overlap this saloon animation. The first operation promotion display HD1 here also includes a text display LD1 indicating that the first chance button 165 should be pressed, and a first chance button 165 displaying a third color light emitting display, as in the example shown in FIG. 110 and the like. It consists of a first button display 165D representing .

Even if the unlit second chance button 166 is operated instead of the first chance button 165 while the first operation promotion display HD1 is being displayed, as shown on the right side of FIG. 115(b), , the luminescent display of the first chance button 165 that was not operated has changed from the luminescent display of the third color to the luminescent display of the first color (for example, yellow). On the other hand, the operated second chance button 166 remains in the off state. Further, the effect image display device 157 displays an operation result display RD20 as a suggestion display as an operation result display (response display) that is displayed in response to the operation of the second chance button 166. In the operation result display RD20 shown on the right side of FIG. 115(b), the color of the frame display RD21 is the same first color as the color of the light emission display of the first chance button 165 (for example, yellow). In this example, the second chance button 166 was operated without the first chance button 165, but the result is the same as the example when the first chance button 165 is operated (the example shown in FIG. 112(a)). It has become. Note that if the first chance button 165 is not operated and the second chance button 166 is operated, the result may be the same as the example shown in FIG. 112(b) in which the first chance button 165 is operated; The result may be the same as the example shown in FIG. 4(c).

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 115(c) is also a state in which the operation performance is started after the end of the game, but in this state, the first chance button 165 displays a light emitting display of a second color (for example, blue). has been done. On the other hand, the second chance button 166 displays a light emitting display of a fifth color (for example, white). Note that the first chance button 165 may also display a default fifth color (for example, white), or a color other than the first to fifth colors (sixth color). A luminescent display of a color (for example, green) may be displayed. Alternatively, the first chance button 165 may be in an off state. A saloon animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and a second operation promotion display HD2 that urges the user to operate the second chance button 166 is displayed so as to overlap this saloon animation. The second operation promotion display HD2 here is composed of a text display LD2 indicating that the user should press the second chance button 166, and a second button display 166D representing the second chance button 166 on which the index finger is placed. The second button display 166D is a display including the second chance button 166 displaying a fifth color light emission display, and is displayed in the same state as the actual second chance button 166. Before this second operation promotion display HD2 is displayed, the first chance button 165 emits light in a sixth color (for example, green), giving a preview that the second operation promotion display HD2 will be displayed.

When the second chance button 166 is operated while the second operation promotion display HD2 is displayed, the effect image display device 157 displays the operation result of the second chance button 166, as shown on the right side of FIG. 115(c). , an operation result display RD20 with a suggestion display is displayed. Also in the operation result display RD20 shown on the right side of FIG. 115(c), the color of the frame display RD21 is the first color (for example, yellow). In this example, the second chance button 166 after being operated also displays a luminous display of the first color that is the same as the color of the frame display RD21, and the operated operating means indicates that the operating means has been operated. A light-emitting display of the same color as the color included in the operation result display (response display) displayed in response is displayed. On the other hand, the first chance button 165 continues to display the luminescent display of the second color (for example, blue), which is different from the luminescent display color (first color) of the second chance button 166 after the operation. ing.

As explained using FIG. 115(b), even if the second chance button 166 is operated while the first operation promotion display HD1 is displayed, the operation result display is displayed, but the second operation promotion display HD2 is Even if the first chance button 165 is operated during the display, the operation result display (response display) such as the operation result display RD10 notifying the number of AT add-on games and the operation result display RD20 providing a suggestion display is not displayed.

Note that when the second chance button 166 is operated, the first chance button 165 may also display a light emitting display of the first color.

Further, after the operation, the second chance button 166 may remain in the fifth color light emission display, may turn off, or may be illuminated in the second color (for example, blue). There may be cases where the display changes to a light emitting display of another color.

Furthermore, if the second chance button 166 is configured to display only the fifth color, the second chance button 166 may continue to display the fifth color after the operation. , the lights may be turned off.

Note that before displaying operation promotion displays such as the first operation promotion display HD1 and the second operation promotion display HD2, both the first button display 165D and the second button display 166D are displayed on the display effect image display device 157. It may be announced that either one of the first operation promotion display HD1 and the second operation promotion display HD2 will be displayed.

In addition, in the operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT additional games and the operation result display RD20 that provides a suggestion display, the color of the frame displays RD11 and RD21 changes, but the color of the entire operation result display changes, and the color of the background display changes. may change, the color of the lord's character's kimono may change, or the color of the characters displayed or the lines displayed may change. That is, the main color of the operation result display, the most conspicuous color, and the color with the largest display area may change to the color of the light emission display on the operation means after the operation.

Furthermore, when referring to common colors in this specification, they do not have to be completely the same, and there may be differences in shading, or there may be differences due to different types of devices such as liquid crystal display devices and LEDs. Good too. Also, if the hues are similar, such as yellow, blue, or red, they are treated as common colors.

In addition, the display effect on the operation means after the operation may be a display effect related to the operation result displays RD10, RD20, or may be a display effect that matches the color of the operation result displays RD10, RD20. It may be a display effect that makes the result display RD10, RD20 image.

Furthermore, it may be a combination of the operation result display RD10 that notifies the number of AT add-on games and the operation result display that suggests the degree of expectation of transitioning to a state where a big bonus is awarded, or the operation that notifies the number of AT add-on games. Even if it is a combination of the result display RD10, the operation result display RD20 that suggests the degree of expectation to transition to the state where the AT status is granted, and the operation result display that suggests the degree of expectation to transition to the state where the big bonus is granted. good.

To summarize what has been explained above, the display effect (e.g., light emitting display) performed by the operation means after the operation of the operation means (e.g., the first chance button 165) is performed on the display means (e.g., the effect image display device 157). It may be displayed while an effect display (for example, an operation response display) is being displayed. For example, the color displayed in the display effect performed by the operating means is displayed in the effect display performed by the display means.

Furthermore, the display effect (e.g., light emitting display) performed by the operation means after the operation of the operation means (e.g., first chance button 165) is the first display effect (e.g., light emitting display of the first color) and the second display effect (e.g., light emitting display of the first color). The first display effect is selected from a plurality of display effects including a display effect (for example, a light emitting display of a second color), and the first display effect is a first effect display A (for example, , 50, may be displayed while displaying the operation result display RD10 to notify the game addition, and the second display effect (e.g., a light emitting display of a second color) may be displayed on the display means (e.g., the effect image display device 157). ) may be displayed while the first effect display B (for example, the operation result display RD10 notifying the 100 game addition) is displayed. For example, the color displayed in the first display effect is displayed during the display of the first effect display A (for example, the operation result display RD10 notifying the 50 game addition), and the color displayed in the second display effect is This is displayed while the first effect display B (for example, the operation result display RD10 notifying the addition of 100 games) is displayed.

Alternatively, the first display effect (e.g., a light emitting display of the first color) is a second effect display A (e.g., an operation result display RD20 suggesting an expectation level of 25%) on the display means (e.g., the effect image display device 157). ), and the second display effect (e.g., a light emitting display of a second color) may be displayed during the display of the second effect display B (e.g., the expected display effect) on the display means (e.g., the effect image display device 157) It may be displayed while the operation result display RD20) suggesting a degree of 50% is displayed. That is, the color displayed in the first display effect is displayed while the second effect display A (for example, the operation result display RD20 suggesting an expectation level of 25%) is displayed, and the color displayed in the second display effect is , is displayed while the second effect display (for example, the operation result display RD20 suggesting an expectation level of 50%) is displayed.

Further, the third display effect (e.g., a light emitting display of a third color) performed with the operating means (e.g., the first chance button 165) is changed to the first display effect (e.g., the first color) after the operation of the operating means. The third display effect (for example, a third color light emission display) performed by the operation means may change to the second display effect (for example, a second color light emission display) after the operation means is operated. light emitting display).

In addition, although the explanation so far has been given using the slot machine 100 as an example, it is also possible to select the volume level by operating the first selection switch 190, select the power saving mode, and operate the slot machine 100 as an example. The idea of improving the light emitting display after operating the operating means and making the light emitting display after operating the operating means and the manner of the operation result displays RD10 and RD20 related can also be applied to pachinko machines.

FIG. 116 is a rear view of a pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied, seen from the back side.

The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100P has a ball tank 150P that has an upwardly opening opening for temporarily storing game balls, and a ball tank 150P that is located below this ball tank 150P and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150P. A tank rail 154P is provided for guiding balls falling through the formed communication hole to a dispensing device 152P located on the right side of the rear surface.

The dispensing device 152P is made of a cylindrical member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily retains the game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154P and flowed down into the payout device 152P, and rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Accordingly, the temporarily retained game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152P.

The payout sensor is a sensor that detects the passing of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and it sends either a high or low signal when the game ball is passing, and when the game ball is not passing, it sends either a high or low signal. The other signal, either high or low, is output to the payout control section. The game balls that have passed through this payout sensor are configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper tray provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 100P. A ball is paid out to the player.

On the left side of the payout device 152P in the figure, there is a main board case 158P that houses a main board 156P that constitutes a main control unit that performs control processing for the overall game, and a main board case 158P that stores a main board 156P that performs control processing related to effects based on processing information generated by the main control unit. A first sub-board case 162P that houses a first sub-board 160P constituting a first sub-control unit to perform, a second sub-control unit that performs control processing related to presentation based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit A second sub-board case 165P that houses a second sub-board 164P that performs the processing, a payout board 170P that constitutes a payout control unit that performs control processing regarding the payout of game balls, and includes an error cancellation switch 168P that cancels errors by operation of a gaming clerk. A payout board case 172P that houses a payout board case 172P that houses a launch board 174P that constitutes a launch control unit that performs control processing regarding the launch of game balls, and a launch board case 176P that accommodates a launch board 174P that constitutes a power supply control unit that supplies power to various electrical gaming devices. and a power supply board case 184P that houses a power supply board 182P that includes a power switch 178P that turns the power on and off when operated by a game store clerk, and an RWM clear switch 180P that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit when operated when the power is turned on; Further, a CR interface unit 186P for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit and the card unit is provided.

The RWM clear switch 180P is a switch that can clear the RWM (initialize the RAM) by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 100P while operating it. In addition, when the RAM clear switch 180P is operated and the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, a predetermined notification (for example, a text display or sound "Please press again to clear RAM", or a text display) and sound), and when the operation is performed again, the RAM may be cleared.

Further, a first selection switch 190P, which is the same as the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 96(a), is provided at the upper left of the first sub-board case 162P. Since this first selection switch 190P is disposed on the back of the pachinko machine 100P, a person who can unlock the front frame door of the pachinko machine 100P (for example, a clerk at a game parlor) cannot open the front frame door. The player can perform the operation by opening the front frame door, but the system is configured such that a person (for example, a player) who cannot unlock the front frame door cannot perform the operation.

The RWM clear switch 180P is located at the bottom left of the back, and the first selection switch 190P is located at the top left of the back. It may be placed at a position far from the gap created when the door is opened, or vice versa.

On the front side (player side) of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 116, there is a decorative pattern display device that replaces the performance image display device 157, a first performance button that replaces the first chance button 165, and a second chance button. A second effect button that replaces 166 is arranged.

According to the above description,
``Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
a first operating means capable of displaying a light emitting display [e.g., first chance button 165];
A game machine comprising:
The display means is capable of displaying a first operation promotion display [for example, first operation promotion display HD1] that prompts the operation of the first operation means,
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation promotion display is being displayed, the display means displays a first operation result display [for example, an operation result display RD10 notifying the number of AT add-on games]. may be displayed,
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation promotion display is being displayed, the first operation means may display a first light-emitting display [for example, a first color (yellow) light-emitting display]. and
The first light-emitting display is a light-emitting display related to the first operation result display in a first mode [for example, a mode in which the frame display RD11 is a first color (yellow)] [for example, a light-emitting display of a common color system]. display] [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 110(a)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

By looking at the first operating means even after the operation, it may be possible to obtain information corresponding to the operation. Furthermore, in the display means, various images may be displayed at the same time or various display colors may be used at the same time, so it may be difficult for the player to understand the effect displayed on the display screen. The effect represented by the light-emitting display may be easier for the player to understand. Furthermore, since the first light emitting display and the first operation result display are related displays, a cohesive performance can be developed, and in this respect, the performance can be easily understood by the player.

Note that the first operating means may have a built-in light emitting means (for example, an LED) or a built-in image display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device or a dot matrix display device). There may be. Furthermore, the first operating means may be one that performs a display effect instead of a light-emitting display. For example, an effect may be performed in which a certain pattern is displayed.

Also,
"The first operation result display is a display regarding the player's privilege [for example, AT status],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the first operation result display may be a display regarding the amount of benefits granted to the player, a display regarding the granting period of the benefits granted to the player, or a display regarding the amount of benefits granted to the player. The information may also be a display regarding the timing of the award of benefits to the person.

Also,
“Equipped with a second operation means [e.g., second chance button 166],
The first operating means [for example, the first chance button 165] displays the first light emitting display when the second operating means is operated while the first operation promotion display is being displayed. [For example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 115(b)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, since the first operating means is not covered by the player's hand, the first light-emitting display can be easily seen. Further, the first light emitting display is performed by operating the second operating means, which may surprise the player and improve the interest of the game.

Note that the second operating means may be capable of displaying a light-emitting display. For example, the second operating means may have a built-in light emitting means (for example, an LED) or a built-in image display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device or a dot matrix display device). There may be.

Also,
``Equipped with a third operating means [e.g., start lever 135],
The first operation means does not display the first light emitting display when the third operation means is operated while the first operation promotion display is being displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 115(a) )],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the game can be played without looking at the first light emitting display.

Note that the third operating means may be operated so that the game progresses (for example, the game starts).

Also,
“When the first setting [e.g., power saving mode setting] is selected, the first operation means sets the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 to “9” or “A” shown in FIG. ” to “F”], it may shift to the first state corresponding to the first setting [e.g., off state or dimmed state],
Even if the first setting is selected [for example, in a non-demonstration state (normal state)], if the first operating means is operated while the first operation promotion display is being displayed, The first light emitting display may be displayed.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the player can check the first light-emitting display even if the power saving mode is set.

Note that the first operating means may consume less power when it is set to the first setting than when it is set to the second setting. That is, the first setting may be a power saving mode, and the second setting may be a normal mode (non-power saving mode).

Further, the first operating means may be such that, when the first setting is set, the first operating means may shift to a first state corresponding to the first setting. The first state may be a light-off state. That is, it may be in a state where no light emitting display is performed.

The display means displays a second display regarding the second operation means [for example, a first guidance display icon GI1] in a state in which the first setting is set [for example, a demo state in which a power saving mode is set]. ] [For example, FIG. 103(h)], and when the first setting is set, the second display is displayed on the display means, and the second display is displayed on the second operation means. When an operation is performed, a response display to the operation [for example, a display of the payout table shown in FIG. 100(a)] may be displayed on the display means.

Also,
"The display means is capable of displaying the first operation promotion display after the game ends [for example, after the third stop] [for example, the state shown on the left side of FIG. 110(a), etc.] ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The game machine is a slot machine, and includes a plurality of reels (for example, three reels) that stop rotating when a stop operation is performed on each reel, and the display means displays the first operation promotion display. may be displayed after a stopping operation (for example, a third stopping operation) is performed on the reel that has been rotating to the latest among the plurality of reels.

Also,
“The first luminescent display has a main luminescent color that is the same color as the display color in the first embodiment [for example, an embodiment in which the frame display RD11 is the first color (yellow)] [for example, the first luminescent color]. color (yellow)]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to the above description,
``Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
a first operating means capable of displaying a light emitting display [e.g., first chance button 165];
A game machine comprising:
The display means is capable of displaying a first operation promotion display [for example, first operation promotion display HD1] that prompts the operation of the first operation means,
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation promotion display is being displayed, the display means displays a second mode [for example, a mode in which the frame display RD11 is in a second color (blue)]. The first operation result display [for example, operation result display RD10 notifying the number of AT additional games] may be displayed,
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation promotion display is being displayed, the display means displays a first mode [for example, a mode in which the frame display RD21 is in a first color (yellow)]. A second operation result display [for example, operation result display RD20 of suggestion display] may be displayed,
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation promotion display is being displayed, the first operation means may display a first light-emitting display [for example, a first color (yellow) light-emitting display]. and
The first luminescent display is more related to the second operation result display of the first aspect than the first operation result display of the second aspect [for example, the display color in the second aspect] A luminescent display containing a color closer to the display color in the first aspect than the first embodiment,
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, an operation result display can sometimes be suggested by the light-emitting display of the first operating means (the first light-emitting display) after the operation. That is, if the first light-emitting display is displayed earlier than the operation result display, it can be suggested to the player that the operation result display displayed on the display means will be displayed in the first mode. . Further, since the first light emitting display and the second operation result display of the first aspect are related displays, a cohesive performance is developed, and it becomes easier for the player to understand the performance.

Note that the first operating means may have a built-in light emitting means (for example, an LED) or a built-in image display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device or a dot matrix display device). There may be.

Further, the first light-emitting display may be a light-emitting display unrelated to the first operation result display of the second aspect. When the first operation means is operated while the first operation promotion display is being displayed, the first operation means may display a second light-emitting display, and the second light-emitting display corresponds to the second aspect. It may be a light emitting display related to the first operation result display.

The second operation result display may be the same type of operation result display as the first operation result display, or may be a different type of operation result display.

The second operation result display may be a display indicating the degree of expectation of the player to receive a benefit. Alternatively, it may be a display of a notice that a benefit will be given to the player. When viewed as a display of advance notice in this way, it may also be a display representing the reliability of the advance notice.

Also,
``When the first operation means is operated while the first operation promotion display is being displayed, the display means displays both the first operation result display and the second operation result display. may be displayed,
The first operation means may display the first light emitting display while both of the operation result displays are displayed on the display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 114(a) [Status shown on the right]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player can recognize the operation result display with a high priority by looking at the first operation means.

Note that the first operation means displays, on the display means, both operation result displays of the first operation result display of the second aspect and the second operation result display of the first aspect. The first light emitting display may be displayed in a state in which the light emitting display is displayed. Alternatively, the first operation means displays both the first operation result display of the second aspect and the second operation result display of the first aspect on the display means. The first light emitting display may always be displayed in the state in which the display is displayed.

Further, the first operating means may display a third light-emitting display while both of the operation result displays are being displayed on the display means, and the third light-emitting display may be the third light-emitting display. The light emitting display may be different from the first light emitting display and the second light emitting display. For example, the third light emitting display may be a light emitting display related to the first operation result display and also a light emitting display related to the second operation result display. good. More specifically, the third luminescent display may be a display of alternate luminescence of a color common to the display color in the second embodiment and a common color to the display color in the first embodiment. However, even if the display is such that a part of the light-emitting area is displayed in the same color as the display color in the second aspect, and the remaining part is displayed in the same color as the display color in the first aspect. good.

Also,
``The first operation means is configured such that the display means displays the first operation result of the second aspect and the second operation result of the first aspect. The first light emitting display may be displayed while only the second operation result display is being displayed [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 112(a)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the first operation means is configured such that the display means displays the first operation result display according to the second embodiment and the second operation result display according to the first embodiment. The first light emitting display may not be displayed while only the first operation result display is being displayed.

Also,
“Both of the operation result displays displayed on the display means are displays in which the second operation result display is displayed smaller than the first operation result display;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, even if the display with a high priority (the second operation result display) is difficult to see on the display means, the player can see the display of the operation result with a high priority by looking at the first operation means. can be recognized.

Also,
``When the first operation means is operated while the first operation promotion display is being displayed, the first operation means may display a first light emitting display [for example, on the right side of FIG. 110(a) state shown],
The first light emitting display is the first operation result display [for example, an operation result display notifying the number of AT add-on games] in a first mode [for example, a mode in which the frame display RD11 is a first color (yellow)]. RD10] is a luminescent display [for example, a luminescent display including a color common to the display color in the first aspect],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The display color of the first operation result display in the first mode and the display color of the second operation result display in the first mode are a common first color [for example, yellow],
The first luminescent display is a luminescent display whose main luminescent color is the first color,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The first operation result display is a display regarding the player's privilege [for example, AT status],
The second operation result display is a notice that a certain production (for example, a battle production in which the player enters an AT state upon victory) will start.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“Equipped with a second operation means [e.g., second chance button 166],
The first operating means [for example, the first chance button 165] displays the first light emitting display when the second operating means is operated while the first operation promotion display is being displayed. [For example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 115(b)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``Equipped with a third operating means [e.g., start lever 135],
The first operation means does not display the first light emitting display when the third operation means is operated while the first operation promotion display is being displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 115(a) )],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“When the first setting [e.g., power saving mode setting] is selected, the first operation means sets the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 to “9” or “A” shown in FIG. ” to “F”], it may shift to the first state corresponding to the first setting [e.g., off state or dimmed state],
Even if the first setting is selected [for example, in a non-demonstration state (normal state)], if the first operating means is operated while the first operation promotion display is being displayed, The first light emitting display may be displayed.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The display means is capable of displaying the first operation promotion display after the game ends [for example, after the third stop] [for example, the state shown on the left side of FIG. 110(a), etc.] ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to the above description,
``Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
a first operating means capable of displaying a light emitting display [e.g., first chance button 165];
A game machine comprising:
The display means is capable of displaying a first operation promotion display [for example, first operation promotion display HD1] that prompts the operation of the first operation means,
The first operation means may display a third light emitting display while displaying the first operation promotion display [for example, the state shown on the left side of FIG. 110(a)],
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation promotion display is being displayed, the first operation means may display a first light emitting display [for example, as shown on the right side of FIG. 110(a) situation],
When the first operation means is operated while the first operation promotion display is being displayed, the first operation means may display a second light emitting display [for example, as shown on the right side of FIG. 110(b) situation],
The first luminescent display is a display that includes a luminescent color of a first color [for example, yellow],
The second luminescent display is a display that includes a luminescent color of a second color [for example, blue],
The third luminescent display is a display including a luminescent color of a third color [for example, red],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

It would be uninteresting if the state after the operation of the operating means was either to continue the luminescent display before the operation or to turn off the light, but according to this game machine, you can expect the color to change after the operation. This may improve the interest of the game.

The first luminescent display is a display in which the main luminescent color is a first color, and the second luminescent display is a display in which the main luminescent color is a second color. In the third luminescent display, the main luminescent color may be a display of a third color.

Furthermore, the display that includes the first color of light emission may be a display that does not include the second color of light emission and the third color of light emission. Alternatively, even if the display includes at least one of the second color and the third color, the display includes the first color the most, or the first color. It suffices if the color is the most conspicuous.

The display including the second color may be a display that does not include the first color and the third color. Alternatively, even if the display includes at least one of the first color and the third color, the second color may be the second color. It suffices if the display is such that the emitted light color is the most conspicuous.

The display including the emission color of the third color may be a display that does not include the emission color of the first color and the emission color of the second color. Alternatively, even if the display includes at least one of the first color and the second color, the third color may be the third color. The display may be such that the color of the emitted light is the most conspicuous.

Furthermore, the first operation means may display the third light-emitting display when operated while the first operation promotion display is being displayed.

Also,
``The display means is capable of displaying a first suggestion display indicating the degree of expectation that the player will be given a benefit [for example, AT status],
The display means is capable of displaying a second suggestion display suggesting the expectation level,
The display means is capable of displaying a third suggestion display suggesting the expectation level,
The first suggestion display is a display including the first color [for example, the operation result display RD20 in which the frame display RD21 is the first color (yellow)],
The second suggestion display is a display including the second color [for example, the operation result display RD20 in which the frame display RD21 is the second color (blue)],
The third suggestion display is a display including the third color [for example, the operation result display RD20 in which the frame display RD21 is the third color (red)],
The degree of expectation [for example, 25%] suggested by the first suggestion display is different from the degree of expectation [for example, 50%] suggested by the second suggestion display,
The degree of expectation suggested by the first suggestion display is different from the degree of expectation [for example, 75%] suggested by the third suggestion display,
The degree of expectation suggested by the second suggestion display is different from the degree of expectation suggested by the third suggestion display,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the player can recognize the level of expectation based on the color of the light-emitting display after operating the first operating means.

Note that the first suggestion display corresponds to a first aspect of the second operation result display, and the second suggestion display corresponds to a second aspect of the second operation result display, The third suggestion display may correspond to a third aspect of the second operation result display.

Further, the first suggestion display is a display in which the first color is the most prominent among the included colors, and the second suggestion display is a display in which the second color is the most prominent among the included colors. The third suggestion display may be a display in which the third color is the most noticeable display among the included colors. The first suggestion display is a display that matches the first color, the second suggestion display is a display that matches the second color, and the third suggestion display is a display that matches the first color. It may be displayed in accordance with the three colors. The first suggestion display is a display that makes you imagine the first color, the second suggestion display is a display that makes you imagine the second color, and the third suggestion display is a display that makes you imagine the second color. It may be a display that gives an image of three colors.

Also,
“The degree of expectation [e.g., 25%] suggested by the first suggestion display is smaller than the degree of expectation [e.g., 75%] suggested by the third suggestion display,
The degree of expectation [e.g., 50%] suggested by the second suggestion display is smaller than the degree of expectation [e.g., 75%] suggested by the third suggestion display;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the first color is a color that suggests that the expectation level is smaller than the third color, and the second color is a color that suggests that the expectation level is smaller than the third color. It may be a suggested color.

After operating the first operating means, a low-expectation light-emitting display is performed (by changing from the third light-emitting display to the first light-emitting display or the second light-emitting display) to keep the player calm. In some cases, it may be possible to make it happen.

Also,
“When the first operation means is operated while the first operation promotion display is being displayed, the display means displays a first operation result [for example, the operation result display RD10 notifying the number of AT add-on games] is displayed,
The first light-emitting display is a light-emitting display related to the first operation result display in a first mode [for example, a mode in which the frame display RD11 is a first color (yellow)] [for example, a light-emitting display of a common color system]. display] [for example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 110(a)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The first operation result display is a display regarding the player's privilege [for example, AT status],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``In addition to the first aspect, the first operation result display also has a second aspect and a third aspect,
The first aspect is an aspect including the first color [for example, an aspect in which the frame display RD11 is the first color (yellow)],
The second aspect is an aspect including the second color [for example, an aspect in which the frame display RD11 is the second color (blue)],
The third aspect is an aspect including the third color [for example, an aspect in which the frame display RD11 is the third color (red)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the aspect including the first color may be an aspect not including the second color and the third color. Alternatively, even if at least one of the second color and the third color is included, the first color is contained the most or the first color is the most conspicuous. Any aspect is acceptable.

The embodiment including the second color may be a case in which the first color and the third color are not included. Alternatively, even if at least one of the first color and the third color is included, the second color is included the most or the second color is the most conspicuous. Any aspect is acceptable.

The embodiment including the third color may be a case in which the first color and the second color are not included. Alternatively, even if at least one of the first color and the second color is included, the third color is included the most or the third color is the most conspicuous. Any aspect is acceptable.

Also,
“Equipped with a second operation means [e.g., second chance button 166],
The first operating means [for example, the first chance button 165] displays the first light emitting display when the second operating means is operated while the first operation promotion display is being displayed. [For example, the state shown on the right side of FIG. 115(b)]
The first operation means may display the second light emitting display when the second operation means is operated while the first operation promotion display is being displayed.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the first operation means may display the third light-emitting display when the second operation means is operated while the first operation promotion display is being displayed. good.

Also,
``Equipped with a third operating means [e.g., start lever 135],
The first operation means does not display the first light emitting display when the third operation means is operated while the first operation promotion display is being displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 115(a) )],
The first operation means does not display the second light emitting display when the third operation means is operated while the first operation promotion display is being displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 115(a) )],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“When the first setting [e.g., power saving mode setting] is selected, the first operation means sets the instruction section 190b of the first selection switch 190 to “9” or “A” shown in FIG. ” to “F”], it may shift to the first state corresponding to the first setting [e.g., off state or dimmed state],
Even if the first setting is selected [for example, in a non-demonstration state (normal state)], if the first operating means is operated while the first operation promotion display is being displayed, The first light emitting display may be displayed,
Even if the first setting is selected [for example, in a non-demonstration state (normal state)], if the first operating means is operated while the first operation promotion display is being displayed, The second light emitting display may be displayed.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The display means is capable of displaying the first operation promotion display after the game ends [for example, after the third stop] [for example, the state shown on the left side of FIG. 110(a), etc.] ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to the above description,
“A first device [for example, a first production lamp built into the first chance button 165, a left side lamp 144L, a right side lamp 144R, a backlight module 740],
a second device [for example, the effect image display device 157],
The first setting [for example, power saving mode setting] can be selected according to the operation [for example, by setting the instruction section 190b to "9" or any of "A" to "F" shown in FIG. 96(a). a selection operation means [for example, the first selection switch 190],
A game machine comprising:
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first device shifts to a first state [for example, a light-off state or a dimmed state] corresponding to the first setting. There may be cases where
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second device changes to a second state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a state in which a demo animation is played in a dark state]. ].
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first device shifts to the first state [for example, FIG. 103(d)], and then the second device There is a case where the state shifts to the second state [for example, FIGS. 103(g) to 103(h)].
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be easier to confirm that the first device has transitioned to the first state and that the second device has transitioned to the second state. That is, since there is a time lag, it may be possible to check the second state of the second device after checking the first state of the first device.

Also,
``Even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first device does not shift to the first state unless it is in a certain state [for example, a demo state]. ,
The second device does not shift to the second state unless it is in the certain state [for example, a demo state] even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected. ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the above-mentioned certain state refers to a state where a demonstration performance is being performed (demonstration state).

Also,
``The selection operation means can select a second setting [for example, setting of non-power saving mode (normal mode)] according to the operation [for example, the instruction section 190b can be set to "0" as shown in FIG. 96(a). ～If matched with any of ``8''],
The first device consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting,
The second device consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, the first setting is a power saving setting, whereas the second setting is a non-power saving setting (normal setting).

Also,
“The number of the first devices [e.g., 6] is greater than the number of the second devices [e.g., 1],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to reduce power consumption by giving priority to the first device, which has a large number of devices, and shifting the device to the first state.

Also,
"The power consumption [for example, 0] of the first device in the first state is smaller than the power consumption of the second device in the second state,"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, the first device has a higher power saving effect than the second device.

Note that the power consumption in the first device that is executing a certain effect may be greater than the power consumption in the second device that is executing the certain effect. The power consumption can be suppressed by giving priority to the first device that consumes a large amount of power and shifting it to the first state.

Also,
``The selection operation means is provided in a position where the player cannot operate it [for example, inside the main body 101 or on the back side of the game machine].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“A first control means [for example, first sub-control unit 400] that controls the first device;
a second control means [for example, VDP516] for controlling the second device;
Equipped with
The first control means transmits a first signal regarding the first setting,
The first device receives the first signal from the first control means without going through the second control means,
The second device receives the first signal via the second control means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The main control means controls the progress of the game, and the sub-control means receives commands transmitted from the main control means and performs control based on the commands, and the sub-control means controls the first and the second control means. Further, the sub-control means may be a means for controlling effects.

Also,
“The time required for the second device to transition from a state different from the second state to the second state [for example, FIGS. 103(g) to 103(h)] is longer than the time required for the device to transition from a state different from the first state to the first state [for example, FIG. 103(d)];
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The first device is a first presentation means [for example, a first light emitting means, a first display means],
The second device is a second presentation means [for example, a second light emitting means, a second display means],
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first presentation means shifts to the first state, and then the second presentation means shifts to the second state. There may be cases where
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The gaming machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 107],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In addition,
"A game machine comprising a first notification means, a second notification means, and an operation means capable of setting a first performance setting, the operation means being operated to set the first performance setting. is set, the first notification means becomes a notification mode corresponding to the first production setting, and then the second notification means becomes a notification mode corresponding to the first production setting. A game machine featuring
Also explained.

Also,
"The operating means is a means that can set a second effect setting by being operated, and the first effect setting is a setting in which the power consumption of the notification means is lower than the second effect setting. A game machine characterized by the following.
Also explained.

Also,
"A gaming machine characterized in that the number of the first notification means is greater than the number of the second notification means."
Also explained.

Also,
"A gaming machine characterized in that the power consumption of the first notifying means that is notifying a certain notification is greater than the power consumption of the second notifying device that is notifying the certain notification."
Also explained.

Also,
"A gaming machine characterized in that the operating means is a means that cannot be operated by a player."
Also explained.

Also,
"The first notification means includes a first control means and a second control means, and the first notification means transmits a signal related to the first effect setting from the first control means to the second control means." The second notification means receives a signal regarding the first effect setting from the first control means via the second control means. A distinctive game machine.”
Also explained.

Also,
"The time it takes to change from a notification mode that does not correspond to the first performance setting to a notification mode that corresponds to the first performance setting is longer for the second notification means than for the first notification means. A game machine characterized by its long length.
Also explained.

According to the above description,
``Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
a selection operation means [for example, first selection switch 190] capable of selecting a first setting [for example, power saving mode setting] according to the operation;
A game machine comprising:
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected [for example, when the instruction section 190b is set to "9" or any of "A" to "F" shown in FIG. ], the display means may start displaying the first animation [e.g., demo animation] from the beginning [e.g., FIG. 103(d)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, it becomes easy to check the first animation from the beginning.

Also,
“When the selection operation means is operated while the first animation is displayed and the first setting is selected (for example, switch operation (3) shown in FIG. 103), the display means displays the first setting. restarts the display of the animation from the beginning [for example, FIG. 103(d)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the first animation may be a demo animation. The demo animation is an animation that starts to be displayed on the display means when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without restarting the game after one game ended. In other words, the demo animation starts when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) is reached in which no operation is performed by the player while the second animation (non-demo animation) is being displayed. This is an anime that will be played.

Also,
"The display means is configured to display the first animation when the selection operation means is operated [for example, switch operation (3) shown in FIG. 101] while the second animation [for example, the non-demo animation shown in FIG. 101] is displayed. Even if the setting is selected, the display of the first animation is not started from the beginning [for example, the example shown in FIG. 102],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``Even if the selection operation means is operated [for example, switch operation (3) shown in FIG. 101] and the first setting is selected while the second animation is being displayed, The animation continues to be displayed [for example, FIG. 101(d)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the second animation may be an animation that is not displayed in the certain state (for example, demo state).

Also,
``When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected while the first animation is being displayed, the display means displays the first animation that has started displaying from the beginning. Display in a display mode [for example, a darkened display mode] corresponding to the settings [for example, FIGS.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``Equipped with a presentation means [for example, a first presentation lamp built into the first chance button 165, a left side lamp 144L, a right side lamp 144R, a backlight module 740],
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the presentation means shifts to a first state [for example, a lights-out state or a dimmed state] corresponding to the first setting. There is a
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means changes to a second state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a state in which the demo animation is played in a dark state]. may be transferred,
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the presentation means shifts to the first state [for example, FIG. 103(d)], and then the display means changes to the second setting. state [for example, FIGS. 103(g) to 103(h)].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the presentation means may be a light emitting means. Further, the first state may refer to a state in which the effect means executes an effect corresponding to the first setting. Further, the second state refers to a state in which the first animation is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the first setting.

Also,
``Even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the presentation means does not change the state to the first state unless the first animation is displayed [for example, a demo state]. It does not transfer to
The display means is configured such that even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means returns to the second state unless the first animation is displayed [for example, a demo state]. It is something that does not migrate,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The selection operation means can select a second setting [for example, setting of non-power saving mode (normal mode)] according to the operation [for example, the instruction section 190b can be set to "0" as shown in FIG. 96(a). ～If matched with any of ``8''],
The production means consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting,
The display means consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, the first setting is a power saving setting, whereas the second setting is a non-power saving setting (normal setting).

Also,
“The number of the presentation means [for example, 6] is greater than the number of the display means [for example, 1],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, power consumption can be suppressed by preferentially transitioning the performance means that have a large number to the first state.

Also,
"The power consumption [for example, 0] of the presentation means in the first state is smaller than the power consumption of the display means in the second state,"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, the effect of power saving is higher for the presentation means than for the display means.

Note that the power consumption in the presentation means that is executing a certain presentation may be greater than the power consumption in the display device that is executing the certain presentation. Power consumption can be suppressed by giving priority to the presentation means that consumes a large amount of power and shifting it to the first state.

Also,
``The selection operation means is provided in a position where the player cannot operate it [for example, inside the main body 101 or on the back side of the game machine].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“A first control means [for example, the first sub-control unit 400] that controls the production means;
a second control means [for example, VDP516] for controlling the display means;
Equipped with
The first control means transmits a first signal regarding the first setting,
The presentation means receives the first signal from the first control means without going through the second control means,
The display means receives the first signal via the second control means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The main control means controls the progress of the game, and the sub-control means receives commands transmitted from the main control means and performs control based on the commands, and the sub-control means controls the first and the second control means. Further, the sub-control means may be a means for controlling effects.

Also,
“The time required for the display means to shift from a state different from the second state to the second state [for example, FIGS. 103(g) to 103(h)] longer than the time required to transition from a state different from the first state to the first state [for example, FIG. 103(d)];
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The gaming machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 107],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to the above description,
"A first light emitting means [for example, a first production lamp built into the first chance button 165, a left side lamp 144L, a right side lamp 144R, a backlight module 740],
a second light emitting means [for example, a second effect lamp built into the second chance button 166];
The first setting [for example, power saving mode setting] can be selected according to the operation [for example, by setting the instruction section 190b to "9" or any of "A" to "F" shown in FIG. 96(a). a selection operation means [for example, the first selection switch 190],
A game machine comprising:
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first light emitting means shifts to a state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a light-off state or a dimming state]. [For example, FIG. 103(d)]
Even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second light emitting means does not shift to a state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a light-off state or a dimming state]. [For example, it remains lit white in FIG. 103(d)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, the difference between the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means is recognized by simultaneously recognizing that the state corresponds to the first setting and that the state does not shift. It may become easier.

Also,
“A first operation means [e.g., first chance button 165],
a second operation means [e.g., second chance button 166];
Equipped with
The first operation means has the first light emitting means [for example, a first effect lamp],
The second operation means has the second light emitting means [for example, a second effect lamp],
The selection operation means can select a second setting [for example, setting of non-power saving mode (normal mode)] according to the operation [for example, the instruction section 190b can be set to "0" to "0" shown in FIG. 96(a). If matched with any of "8"],
The first setting is a setting that reduces power consumption of the first light emitting means more than the second setting.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The player can easily recognize that the first operating means can be operated by lighting or blinking the first light emitting means. Moreover, the player can easily recognize that the second operating means can be operated by lighting or blinking the second light emitting means. Furthermore, the first setting is a power saving setting, and the second operating means having the second light emitting means that does not shift to a state corresponding to this setting is operable even if the first setting is set. The player can be made aware that this is possible. Moreover, as a result, the load placed on the first operating means can also be reduced.

Also,
``Equipped with display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
The display means is capable of displaying a second display regarding the second operation means [for example, first guide display icon GI1] in a state where the first setting is set [for example, FIG. 103 (b) to (d) and (h) in the same figure],
With the first setting set, the second display is displayed on the display means, and when the second operation means is operated, the display means displays a response to the operation [e.g. The payout table shown in FIG. 100(a) is displayed.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the second display may be an operation promotion display that promotes operation of the second operation means, or may be an operation promotion display that suggests operation of the second operation means. , the second operating means may be displayed. This second display corresponds to, for example, the first guide display icon GI1.

Also,
“With the first setting set, the second display is displayed on the display means, and when the first operation means is operated, the display means displays a response to the operation [e.g. , the setting suggestion display shown in FIG. 100(b) may be displayed.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the response display is performed when the operation means that is considered to be invalid can sometimes surprise the player.

Note that the state in which the first setting is set may be a demo state. That is, power saving settings are set in the demo state. The state in which the response display may be displayed on the display means may be a non-demonstration state (normal state) transitioned from a demo state. That is, when the first operating means is operated, the demo state shifts to a non-demonstration state (normal state), and even if the first operating means is operated instead of the second operating means, The response display may be performed as an effect, or the first operation means may be a hidden operation means, and game information may be displayed as the response display.

Further, the response display to the operation of the first operation means performed while the second display is displayed may be the same display as the response display to the operation of the second operation means, or may be a different display. There may be.

Also,
“When the first operation means is operated in a state where the first setting is set [for example, whether the second display is displayed or not], the display means A response display to the operation [for example, the setting suggestion display shown in FIG. 100(b)] may be displayed.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the response display is performed when the operation means that is considered to be invalid can sometimes surprise the player.

Note that here, the second display may or may not be displayed on the display means. The display in response to the operation of the first operation means performed in a hidden manner by the second display may be the same display as the display in response to the operation of the second operation means, or may be a different display. Good too.

Also,
``If the first operation means is operated with the first setting set, a response display to the operation may not be displayed on the display means;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means may shift to a state corresponding to the first setting,
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first light emitting means is brought into a state corresponding to the first setting (hereinafter referred to as "first state") [e.g. After transitioning to a state in which the display means corresponds to the first setting (hereinafter referred to as the "second state") [for example, in a demo state] In some cases, the animation may be played in a dark state] [for example, in Figures 103(g) to 103(h)].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``Even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first light emitting means remains in a state corresponding to the first setting unless it is in a certain state [for example, a demonstration state]. It does not migrate,
The display means is such that even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means does not shift to a state corresponding to the first setting unless the state is in the certain state [for example, a demo state]. is,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that a certain state refers to a state where a demonstration performance is being performed (demonstration state).

Also,
“The first light emitting means consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting,
The display means consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, the first setting is a power saving setting, whereas the second setting is a non-power saving setting (normal setting).

Also,
"The number of the first light emitting means [for example, 6 pieces] is greater than the number of the display means [for example, 1 piece],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to prioritize the first light emitting means, which is the largest in number, and shift it to the first state, thereby reducing power consumption.

Also,
"The power consumption [for example, 0] of the first light emitting means in the first state is smaller than the power consumption of the display means in the second state,"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, the first light emitting means has a higher power saving effect than the display means.

Note that the power consumption in the first light emitting means while executing a certain effect may be greater than the power consumption in the display means while executing the certain effect. It is possible to prioritize the first light emitting means that consumes a large amount of power and shift it to the first state, thereby suppressing power consumption.

Also,
“A first control unit [for example, first sub-control unit 400] that controls the first light-emitting unit;
a second control means [for example, VDP516] for controlling the display means;
Equipped with
The first control means transmits a first signal regarding the first setting,
The first light emitting means receives the first signal from the first control means without going through the second control means,
The display means receives the first signal via the second control means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The main control means controls the progress of the game, and the sub-control means receives commands transmitted from the main control means and performs control based on the commands, and the sub-control means controls the first and the second control means. Further, the sub-control means may be a means for controlling effects.

Also,
“The time required for the display means to shift from a state different from the second state to the second state [for example, FIGS. 103(g) to 103(h)] is longer than the time required for the transition from a state different from the first state to the first state [for example, FIG. 103(d)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The selection operation means is provided in a position where the player cannot operate it [for example, inside the main body 101 or on the back side of the game machine].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 91],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The gaming machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 107],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The identification prefixes described above, such as "first...", "second...", "third...", etc., may be replaced as appropriate. For example, "second..." may be replaced with "first...".

Note that the functions and effects described in the embodiments described so far are merely a list of the most suitable functions and effects, and the functions and effects of the present invention are limited to those described here. isn't it. In addition, even if the constituent elements are included only in the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, those constituent elements may be included in other embodiments, examples, modifications, etc. It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. In other words, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent elements contained only in the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. may not be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, etc. Even when applied to examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc., it stands as a cohesive technical idea.

Hereinafter, a slot machine according to an embodiment of the gaming machine will be described using FIGS. 117 to 168.

The slot machine of the present embodiment described below starts rotating when a predetermined number of game media are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. At the same time, based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, the internal winning of multiple types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually rotates by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the winning combination based on the lottery result and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop match the predetermined payout conditions, the game media will be paid out and the game will end; if not, the game will end. This is a game machine that plays a series of games that end without paying out game media.

First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. 117 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example of a winning line.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 117 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front side of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface are stored in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible. To explain specifically using FIG. 118, the symbols displayed in the upper row of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the diagram) are displayed in the upper row of the left reel 110 and the symbols displayed in the middle row of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the diagram). The symbol displayed on the left reel 110 is the middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower row of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the diagram) is the symbol displayed on the left reel lower row, and the symbol displayed on the upper row of the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the diagram) The symbol is the upper symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed in the middle row of the left reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the symbol displayed in the middle reel, and the symbol displayed in the lower row of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure) is the symbol displayed in the middle reel. The symbols displayed on the lower row of the middle reel 112, the symbols displayed on the upper row of the right reel 112 (position 7 as shown in the figure) are the upper row symbols of the right reel, and the symbols displayed on the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 8 as shown in the diagram) on the right reel. The middle symbols and the symbols displayed at the bottom of the right reel 112 (position 9 in the figure) are called right reel lower symbols, and the symbols on each reel 110 to 112 are displayed on each reel 110 to 112 through the display window 113. Three of each are displayed vertically, nine in total. By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. Note that as such a display device, in addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be adopted. Further, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the display window 113 is arranged on the back of each reel 110 to 112. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. Note that inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the two. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this optical sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. The winning line is a line on which it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination, which will be explained later in FIG. 121, has been displayed. Only one line, the middle winning line L1, is provided, which is made up of symbols in the middle of the reels. FIG. 118 shows this winning line L1. The valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as gaming media. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 117 requires 2 to 3 medals, and when the number of medals inserted is less than 2, no winning line becomes valid, and when 2 medals are bet and 3 medals are bet. When the winning line L1 is activated, the winning line L1 becomes valid. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135. Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, there is also a downward-sloping winning line consisting of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, and a left reel lower symbol, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of three winning lines, including the upward-to-the-right winning lines, may be set as valid winning lines, or a number of winning lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid winning lines.

The notification lamp 123 indicates, for example, that a specific winning combination (specifically, special prize 1, special prize 2) has been internally won in an internal lottery to be described later, or that a special prize has been internally won (special prize) to be described later. 1 internal winning state or special role 2 internal winning state) or special game state (BB1 operating state or BB2 operating state). The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later) is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. This is a lamp that informs the player of the The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two coins are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 will also be referred to as the MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during the special game state). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. Note that in the following, it may be expressed as being given to the player in the same sense as being paid out to the player. The storage number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139, each of which includes a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. More specifically, by operating the left stop button 137, the left reel 110 can be stopped, by operating the middle stop button 138, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the right stop button 139, the middle reel 111 can be stopped. By operating the right reel 112, it is possible to stop the right reel 112. Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation will be referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation will be referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. Furthermore, the order of operations in which the first stop operation is an operation to stop the left reel 110 is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order", and the order of operations in which the first stop operation is an operation to stop the right reel 112 is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order". This is called "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push." Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker 277 (see FIG. 119) provided below inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to enliven the game. A presentation device 160 is disposed above the front door 102, and a speaker 272 (see FIG. 119) provided above inside the slot machine 100 outputs sound to the outside. A sound hole 143 is provided for this purpose. This effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and an effect image display device 157 (liquid crystal display) disposed on the back side of this shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). ). Note that the display device does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, but may be any display device that can display various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, etc. , a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface. Note that this effect image display device 157 corresponds to an example of display means.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 119. Note that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400. Here, regarding the main control unit 300, if the data capacity becomes large, it becomes difficult to check the program, and the security deteriorates, such as becoming a breeding ground for unauthorized modification. There are limits to the data capacity of the RAM 308. Note that the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a first updating means, a state setting means, an advantage setting means, a storage means, and a bonus lottery means. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 corresponds to an example of a second updating means.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel symbols. A ROM 306 that stores arrays, stop positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a WDT (watch dog timer) 314. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz. =1.504ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator 315a, and a startup signal The CPU 304 starts the game control (starts the main control section main processing described later) when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338. Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal input from the medal slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, a right stop button 139 sensor, a payment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, and a left reel 110. , the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, the optical sensor of the right reel 112, etc.).

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, and a right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect operations of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, and are used to input medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 into a game. Detects the input operation when inputting. The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor of the left reel 110, the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, and the optical sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112. Each time a piece passes, it becomes L level. The rotational position information indicating how far the reel is rotating from the reference position from once reaching the L level until the next time it becomes the L level is calculated based on the counted value of the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 that selects the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided in the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, storage number display 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects a slot to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. Game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the game status) is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from a power management unit (not shown). If the value is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the configuration is such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command sent by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command, and this basic circuit 402 is connected to a CPU 404 for temporarily storing data. It is equipped with a RAM 408, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, data for controlling backlight lighting patterns, various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided with the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the audio output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, (reel backlight, etc.) is connected.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at every interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effect (for example, a control unit that controls motor drive of the shutter 163), and a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157. ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
Next, the symbol arrangement on each of the above-mentioned reels 110 to 112 will be explained using FIG. 120. Note that this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112).

On each reel 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (in this embodiment, 20 symbols with numbers 0 to 19) of a plurality of types (10 types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Further, the numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on each reel 110 to 112. For example, in this embodiment, the number 1 piece on the left reel 110 has a “watermelon symbol,” the number 4 piece on the middle reel 111 has a “bell 1 symbol,” and the number 6 piece on the right reel 112 has a “7 1 pattern" are arranged respectively.

In order to improve the interest of the game, the slot machine 100 in this embodiment is designed to stop the corresponding reels 110 to 112 within the maximum pull-in range (less than 5 frames in this embodiment) from the position where the stop operation is performed. It is configured.

<Type of winning role>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 121. This figure is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including active winning combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the payout (number of awards) of each winning combination.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include special winning combinations 1 and 2, replay winning combinations 1 and 3, and small winning combinations 1 and 7. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in this embodiment, special combination 1 is a combination (activation combination) that moves to a special gaming state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as BB1 activation state) in which a predetermined profit is given to the player upon winning a prize. be. In this embodiment, only 48 medals are awarded in the BB1 operating state. This special combination 1 is a combination that can be won only when three medals are inserted in the normal game state described later (see the remarks column in FIG. 121).

The special combination 2 is a combination (activation combination) that moves to a special gaming state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as BB2 activation state) in which a predetermined profit is given to the player upon winning. In this embodiment, only two medals are awarded in the BB2 operating state. This special combination 2 is a combination that can be won only when two medals are inserted in the normal game state (see the remarks column in FIG. 121).

Furthermore, replay combinations 1 to 3 are combinations that can be replayed without inserting new medals. These special winning combinations 1 to 2 and replay winning combinations 1 to 3 are sometimes called "actuation winning combinations". In addition, "winning" in this embodiment includes cases where a symbol combination of an active role that does not involve a medal payout (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the active line, for example, special role 1 to 2. Includes winnings of re-gaming combinations 1 to 3. In addition, special roles 1 and 2 are special roles that are carried over to the next game if they are not determined to be a winning prize, and other winning roles are general roles that are not carried over to the next game if not determined to be a winning prize. It is a role.

For special winning combinations 1 and 2, medals will not be paid out due to winning the winning winnings themselves. The corresponding symbol combinations are "Bell 2-Watermelon-Replay 2" for special combination 1 and "Bell 2-Seven 1-Replay 2" for special combination 2. In the following explanation, special role 1 may be referred to as "BB1", special role 2 may be referred to as "BB2", and special role 1 and special role 2 may be collectively referred to as "special role" or "BB". be.

When the special winning combinations 1 and 2 are internally won, internal winning flags corresponding to the internally winning special winnings are set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag corresponding to the special combination 1 is set on, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special combination 1 internal winning state. If the flag corresponding to the special combination 2 is set on, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special combination 2 internal winning state. These flags remain on until the corresponding activation combination is won, making it easier to win these activation combinations in subsequent games. Specifically, even if you do not win those prizes in games in which special prizes 1 and 2 are won internally, the state in subsequent games will be the same as that in which special prizes 1 and 2 were won internally, and the corresponding symbol combinations will be All of them will be in a state where it is easy to win a prize.

The special role 1 internally elected state and the special role 2 internally elected state will be described in detail later, but in the special role 2 internally elected state, if a role other than special role 2 has been internally elected, this other role Reel stop control is executed so that the symbols forming the reel line up preferentially.

Re-gaming combinations 1 to 3 are winning combinations (actuation combinations) that allow players to play the next game without inserting medals (game media) by winning, and no medals are paid out. In other words, the game can be played again with the same number of bets as the number of coins inserted last time. The corresponding symbol combinations are that the replay combination 1 is "Replay 1/2 - Replay 1/2 - Replay 1/2" and the replay combination 2 is "Seven 1 - Seven 1 - Seven 1". Role 3 is "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2". Among the above-mentioned re-gaming combinations, re-gaming combination 1 is sometimes referred to as a "normal replay," re-gaming combination 2 is sometimes referred to as a "seven-one replay," and re-gaming combination three is sometimes referred to as a "seven-two replay." Also, if you win a re-gaming combination 2 in the AT state, which will be described later, you will move to the pseudo BB1 state, which will be described later.If you win a re-gaming combination 3, which will be described later, in the AT state, you will move to the pseudo BB2 state, which will also be described later. ). The symbol combination of re-gaming combination 2 is a pseudo BB1 transfer symbol, and the symbol combination of re-gaming combination 3 is a pseudo BB2 transfer symbol. The pseudo BB1 state lasts for 50 games, while the pseudo BB2 state lasts only 20 games.

The replay combinations 1 to 3 may be any combination that allows the player to play the next game without inserting medals. Therefore, for example, if you win a prize in a replay, medals may be automatically inserted in the next game (the number of medals inserted is reset in a storage area for the number of inserted medals prepared in the RAM 308), or in a replay. The medals inserted in the winning game may be carried over to the next game and used as they are.

Small winning combinations 1 to 8 are winning winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning. The corresponding symbol combinations are "BAR-Watermelon-Replay 1" for minor role 1, "Watermelon-Cherry-Replay 1" for minor role 2, and "Seven 1-Cherry-Bell 2" for minor role 3. Yes, minor role 4 is “BAR-Replay 1/2-Replay 1/2”, minor role 5 is “Bell 2-Bell 1-Bell 1”, and minor role 6 is “Bell 1-Bell 1/ 2-Bell 1/2'', minor role 7 is ``Bell 1-Bell 1/2-Replay 1/2'', and minor role 8 is ``Bell 1-Replay 1/2-Bell 1/2''. be. Further, the corresponding number of coins to be paid out is as shown in FIG. 121.

Among the above minor roles, minor role 1 is "watermelon", minor role 2 is "weak cherry", minor role 3 is "strong cherry", minor role 4 is "chance eye", minor role 5 is "common bell", The small winning combination 6 is sometimes referred to as a "push order bell", and the small winning combinations 7 and 8 are sometimes referred to as a "one piece bell". Strong cherries are easier to get benefits than weak cherries, and chance moves are also easier to get benefits. Moreover, the push order bell is a winning combination that, if internally won, will not win unless the operating order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is correct, and is a winning combination that will definitely win regardless of the operating timing as long as the operating order is correct. One bell is a win that is won when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated in the wrong order.

<Types of internally elected roles>
Next, the types of internal winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 122. This figure shows a lottery table for internal winning combinations in the special combination 2 internal winning state as well as the types of internal winning combinations.

FIG. 122 shows 12 types of condition devices (condition device numbers 1 to 12) that are combinations of the hands explained in FIG. 121. The winning combination in the game is one of the combinations corresponding to this condition device. These condition devices are determined by a lottery at the time of the game start operation. At this time, the winning combination corresponding to the conditional device is called an internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination is determined by a lottery at the time of the game start operation. In the following explanation of this operation, it may be referred to as internally winning a winning combination.

As will be described later, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 117 is a gaming machine in which the playing period in the special combination 2 internal winning state (RT2) is likely to be the longest. FIG. 122 shows a lottery table for each internal winning combination in the special winning combination 2 internal winning state (RT2).

Condition device number 1 is a condition device configured by replaying combinations. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the re-gaming combinations are from re-gaming combination 1 to re-gaming combination 3, and if the pseudo BB1 state schedule flag described later is set to on, the symbol combination of re-gaming combination 2 can be stopped. , and if the pseudo BB2 state schedule flag, which will be described later, is set to ON, it becomes possible to stop the symbol combination of the replay combination 3. If none of these pseudo BB state schedule flags are set to ON, it becomes possible to stop the symbol combination of the replay combination 1.

Condition device numbers 2 to 12 are internal winning combinations made up of small winning combinations. Among these, the condition device numbers 7 to 12 are internally won overlapping with the small winning combination 6, the small winning combination 7, and the small winning combination 8, and six types, A to F, are prepared. There are six possible combinations of the operation order (press order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139: "left/right middle", "left middle right", "right left middle", "right middle left", "center left/right", and "center right/left". The six types A to F correspond to each of these six patterns as the correct operation order. That is, for conditional device numbers 7 to 12, the correct answers in the pressing order are different from each other. When the condition device numbers 7 to 12 are internally won, when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated in the correct operation order, the symbol combination of the small winning combination 6 is stopped (15 pieces are paid out). On the other hand, if the stop button 137 to 139 is operated in an operation order different from the correct operation order (incorrect operation order), the symbol combination of the minor winning combination 7 or the minor winning combination 8 will stop (one piece payment).

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 117, setting values are set that give different degrees of advantage to the player. Settings 1 to 6 are prepared as setting values. There is a tendency that the higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage.

In the internal winning combination lottery table shown in FIG. 122, the value obtained by dividing the displayed numerical value by 65536 becomes the internal winning probability. This internal winning probability is determined for each setting value, but in the special winning combination 2 internal winning state (RT2), only the internal winning probability of the small winning combination 5 of the condition device 6 is different. Note that in other gaming states (for example, normal state, special gaming state, etc.), the internal winning probability may be such that the higher the set value, the higher the advantage of the player becomes.

Further, in this embodiment, the internal winning probabilities of the conditional devices with conditional device numbers 7 to 12 are equal, but these internal winning probabilities may be biased.

If the winning combination of each conditional device is not won, it is a loss, and basically the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. Note that the fact that the winning symbol combination is not stopped on the winning line may be referred to as "losing". In addition, not winning any of the winning combinations of the conditional devices may be expressed as "winning on a losing basis."

As mentioned above, in the special winning combination 2 internal winning state, if a winning combination other than special winning combination 2 has been internally won, the reel stop control is performed so that the symbols constituting this other winning combination are aligned preferentially. is executed. Therefore, in order to shift from the special winning combination 2 internally winning state to the BB2 operating state which is the special gaming state, it is necessary to insert two medals, winning internally after losing, and then winning the special winnings 2.

<Type of gaming state>
Next, types of gaming states of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 117 and changes in gaming states will be explained. FIG. 123(a) is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 117.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 117, as shown in FIG. 123(a), the gaming states include a normal gaming state, a special winning role 1 internally winning state, a special winnings 2 internally winning state, a BB1 operating state, and a BB2 operating state. The player is configured to be able to switch between five gaming states with different degrees of advantage, and the degree of advantage changes by changing between these states, thereby improving the interest of the game. Furthermore, in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 117, five states, RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4, are provided as states in which the types and probabilities of internally winning replay combinations differ. and RT have a one-to-one relationship. That is, in the normal gaming state, it is RT0, in the special combination 1 internal winning state, it is RT1, in the special winning combination 2 internal winning state, it is RT2, in the BB1 operating state, it is RT3, and in the BB2 operating state, it is RT4. The gaming state is controlled by the main control section 300. Note that RT1 and RT2 are more likely to be internally won as re-gaming combinations than RT0. Further, RT1 is more likely to be internally elected as a re-gaming combination than RT3, and RT2 is more likely to be internally elected as a re-gaming combination than RT4. Furthermore, the internal winning probabilities of the re-gaming roles in RT1 and RT2 may be the same or different, and the internal winning probabilities of the re-gaming roles in RT3 and RT4 may also be the same or different. It's okay.

The normal gaming state has the lowest internal winning probability of the re-gaming combination, and is the most disadvantageous state for the player. Note that this is also the initial state in this embodiment.

The special role internal winning state (the special role 1 internal winning state and the special winning role 2 internal winning state) is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role is set to ON. In this gaming state, it is easy to shift to the special gaming state (BB1 operating state and BB2 operating state), which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. However, as mentioned above, in the special role 2 internal winning state (RT2), if a role other than special role 2 has been internally won, the symbols constituting this other role will be arranged preferentially. , since the reel stop control is executed, it is not possible to shift to the BB2 operating state.

The special gaming state (BB1 operating state and BB2 operating state) is an advantageous gaming state in which it is easier to win a small prize and to obtain medals than in the normal gaming state and the special prize internal winning state. However, as described above, only 48 medals are awarded in the BB1 operating state, and only 2 medals are awarded in the BB2 operating state.

FIG. 123(a) shows the gaming states described above, and the symbols (A) to (F) attached to the arrows are transition conditions between the gaming states. When each transition condition is met, the gaming state transitions in the direction of the arrow. The transition from the normal gaming state (RT0) shown by the arrow (A) to the special winning role 1 internal winning state (RT1) is performed by internally winning the special winning role 1, and the transition from the normal gaming state (RT0) shown by the arrow (D) to the special winning role 1 internally winning state (RT1) is performed by internally winning the special winning role 1. The transition from (RT0) to the special role 2 internal winning state (RT2) is performed by internally winning the special role 2. In the normal gaming state (RT0), the internal winning probability of the special winning combination 2 is higher than the internal winning probability of the special winning combination 1, and the internal winning probability of the special winning combination 2 is quite high, and the slot machine shown in FIG. 117 100 is a gaming machine where the period for playing in the special combination 2 internal winning state (RT2) is likely to be the longest. The transition from the special winning combination 1 internal winning state (RT1) to the BB1 operating state (RT3), which is indicated by the arrow (B), is performed by winning the special winning combination 1. As mentioned above, in order to win the special winning combination 1, it is necessary to bet 3 cards. The transition from the special winning combination 2 internal winning state (RT2) to the BB2 operating state (RT4), which is indicated by the arrow (E), is performed by winning the special winning combination 2. As mentioned above, in order to win the special winning combination 2, it is necessary to win the special winning combination after placing two tickets and winning internally after losing. The transition from the BB1 operating state (RT3) to the normal gaming state (RT0), which is indicated by the arrow (C), is performed when 48 medals are paid out as the prescribed number. Further, the transition from the BB2 operating state (RT4) to the normal gaming state (RT0), which is indicated by the arrow (F), is performed by paying out two medals as the prescribed number.

<Types of performance status>
Next, types of presentation states of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 117 and changes in presentation states will be explained. As mentioned above, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 117 is a gaming machine in which the period of play in the special combination 2 internal winning state is likely to be the longest, and the transition of the performance state in this special winning combination 2 internal winning state will be explained. Note that the transition of the performance state in other game states is similar to the transition described here. FIG. 123(b) is a transition diagram of the production state in the special winning combination 2 internal winning state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 117.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 117, as shown in FIG. 123(b), the performance states include an initial state, point specialization A state, normal state, point specialization B state, portent state, confrontation state, and AT It is configured to be able to switch between a total of eight performance states: time) state and pseudo BB state. In this embodiment, the state shifts from the initial state through the normal state to the confrontation state, and if the AT lottery is won in this confrontation state, the state returns to the initial state via the AT state, and if the AT lottery is not won, the confrontation state is entered. The system uses a configuration that repeats a series of loops, starting from then returning to the initial state. Below, the period from starting from the initial state to returning to the initial state may be expressed as a cycle. In addition, in this embodiment, items that make it easier to transition to the AT state ("1 enemy destroyed" item and "defeated rate UP" item, which will be described later) are provided, as well as the cumulative total of points earned during the game (hereinafter referred to as cumulative points). ), this item can be obtained depending on the situation. These cumulative points and item information are stored in RAM 308. Hereinafter, each performance state will be explained based on the above explanation.

The initial state is set in the first game after changing the settings or clearing the RAM (at the start of a round). It is also set when the confrontation state or AT state ends (at the start of the next lap). In this initial state, the confrontation mode (described later) and the number of games to transition to the precursor state are set (FIG. 130). That is, in this initial state, it can be said that scheduling regarding the precursor state and the confrontation state is executed at the start of the round. Only one game is set in this initial state, and the state immediately shifts to point specialization A state.

The point specialization A state is a state in which points for acquiring items are more likely to increase than in the normal state. After 30 games have passed in this point specialization A state, the state shifts to the normal state.

The normal state is a performance state in which the vehicle mainly stays during the rotation. In this production state, you may be able to earn points. In the normal state, when the cumulative points reach a predetermined number (1000 in this embodiment), a lottery of acquired items is performed in exchange for this predetermined number of cumulative points, and a performance indicating this is performed (item acquisition performance) . Further, in this normal state, the state shifts to the precursor state according to the schedule set in the initial state, but apart from that, the state may shift to the point specialization B state by lottery.

The point specialization B state is a state in which points for acquiring items are more likely to increase than in the normal state. After five games have passed in this point specialization B state, the state shifts to the normal state.

There are two types of precursor states: true precursor states and false precursor states. The difference is that the true precursor state transitions to a confrontation state after a set number of games have elapsed, whereas the false precursor state returns to the normal state after a set number of games have elapsed. In other words, the false precursor state can be said to be a performance state provided to increase the expectation of transitioning to the confrontation state. You may be able to earn points even in this premonitory state.

In the confrontation state, in the first game, a performance indicating that the game has transitioned to the confrontation state is executed, and further, a confrontation performance between the main character and the enemy character (maximum of three games) is executed. Here, in the first game in the confrontation state, an item is acquired in exchange for the remaining cumulative points, and a performance indicating this (item acquisition performance) may be executed. Furthermore, if the player possesses the "defeat rate UP" item, a performance (item usage performance) using the "defeat rate UP" item is performed in the second game. Note that if there is no "killing rate UP" item in the first game, the showdown effect will start from the second game (the item use effect will not be executed). If the result of the confrontation performance is a complete victory, the system shifts to the AT state, and if the main character is defeated in the confrontation performance, it shifts to the initial state. Note that when transitioning to the AT state, the number of AT remaining games is set.

In the AT state, when the condition devices 7 to 12 (overlapping combinations of small combinations 6 to 8) are internally won, the correct pressing order is announced. Therefore, the player is able to earn more profits. This AT state shifts to the initial state when the set number of remaining AT games becomes 0, but this number of remaining AT games may be added. Further, in the AT state, a lottery is executed to enable transition to the pseudo BB state, and if this lottery is won, an effect is executed to urge the player to stop the replay combination 2 or 3, which is a pseudo BB symbol. Then, when the symbols of the re-gaming combination 2 or 3 stop, the state shifts to a pseudo BB state.

In the pseudo BB state, as in the AT state, if the condition devices 7 to 12 (overlapping combinations of small winnings 6 to 8) are internally won, the correct pressing order is announced, and the player can earn more profits. becomes. There are two types of pseudo BB states: a pseudo BB1 state to which the replay combination 2 moves, and a pseudo BB2 state to which the replay combination 3 moves. The pseudo BB1 state shifts to the AT state after 50 games have elapsed, and the pseudo BB2 state shifts to the AT state after 20 games have elapsed.

FIG. 123(b) shows the performance states described above, and the symbols (a) to (l) attached to the arrows are transition conditions between the performance states. When each transition condition is met, the performance state transitions in the direction of the arrow.

<Processing overview>
The processing of the main control section 300, first sub-control section 400, and second sub-control section 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control section main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 will be described using FIG. 124. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG. 124 according to the control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

When the power is turned on, first, main control unit initialization processing is performed in step S101. In this main control unit initialization process, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupts are disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Permit operation and set initial values. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 126.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted (by care or by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132), and if medals have been inserted, preparations are made to send an insert command indicating this. Note that if the player wins a replay in the previous game, the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so there is no need for the player to insert medals. Also, a check is made to see if the start lever 135 has been operated while a specified number (2 or 3) of medals have been used, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the number of inserted medals and the valid winning line are checked. Confirm and start playing.

In step S105, various lottery processes including an internal winning combination lottery process and the like are executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 128.

In step S107, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300.

In step S109, rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started on the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted in a timer update process described later) is 0, and an initial value is set in the game interval timer. Furthermore, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to send a reel rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400. After that, when the reels 110 to 112 reach a predetermined rotational speed and the optical sensor provided on each reel detects the symbol position of each reel, the stop operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is enabled. Note that the game interval counter ensures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) and suppresses the gambling nature.

In step S111, reel stop control processing is executed. In this process, when any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is pressed after the stop operation is enabled, the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137 to 139 are stopped. Specifically, each time a stop operation is performed, a stop table of reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. Further, for the first stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared, and for the second stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared. Note that for each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (the first to third press commands) is prepared. Preparations are made for transmitting the first to third stop commands) to the first sub-control unit 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S113.

In step S113, winning determination processing is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Seven 1-Cherry-Bell 2" are aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that a small win 3 has been won. Note that after determining the winning combination, preparations are made for transmitting the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, if a winning combination with a payout has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is awarded (paid out), and the number of medals awarded is displayed using the payout number display 127.

In step S117, status update processing is executed. Details of this status update process will be described later using FIG. 135.

With the above, one game ends. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described process.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 125. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Start processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing for temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed (once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

In step S205, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each type of sensor 318. The signal state is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed through this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S209, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in respective time units, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S211, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission in the main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. of the main control section 300 are transmitted to the first sub-control section 400. Note that the output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 includes strobe information (when on, it indicates that data is being set), command type (in this embodiment, basic command, input command, and start lever). Reception command, internal winning command, performance command associated with performance lottery processing, reel rotation start command associated with the start of rotation of reels 110 to 112, first to third press commands associated with acceptance of operation of stop buttons 137 to 139, reel First to third stop commands associated with the stop of 110 to 112, prize winning command, payout number command and payout end command associated with medal payout processing, status update command, item addition command, earned point command, setting change command, power recovery command ), command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it becomes possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S213, external signal setting processing is performed. In this external signal setting process, the gaming information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal dispensing abnormalities, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Illustration omitted) Executes error handling. Furthermore, settings are made for the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators according to the current gaming state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. When a low voltage signal is received (when a power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and when a low voltage signal is not received (when a power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219. move on.

In step S219, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, processes such as setting the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register are performed. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG. 124.

On the other hand, in step S221, information that needs to be saved such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power outage upon power restoration is saved to a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and a predetermined area including at least the used area of the RAM 308 is saved. A checksum value for the area is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and a power flag indicating that power-off processing has been performed is set on.

Next, details of the main control section initial setting process (step S101) in the main control section main process of FIG. 124 will be described using FIG. 126. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit initial setting process (step S101) in FIG. 124.

First, in step S1001 that is executed first, initial settings at startup are performed. This initial setting includes processing such as setting the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), setting the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I/O 310, and initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308. conduct.

In step S1003, whether the low voltage signal is on or not, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 330 determines whether the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment). monitor whether a low voltage signal is output indicating that the voltage has decreased. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects a power cutoff), this step S1003 is repeatedly executed, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 has not detected a power cutoff) Then, the process advances to step S1005. Note that even if the supply voltage does not yet reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, step S1003 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches the predetermined value or more.

In step S1005, it is determined whether the setting key switch is on. Here, the setting key switch is a switch for setting the player's advantage in the slot machine 100 (for example, six types of advantage from 1 to 6), and becomes operable when the front door 102 is opened. If this switch is on (the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch and turned 90 degrees to the right), the process advances to step S1013; otherwise, the process advances to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is on. If this switch is on, the process advances to step S1009; otherwise, the process advances to step S1011.

In step S1009, the RAM 308 is initialized, and this main control unit initialization process ends. Note that in this initialization, for example, item information and cumulative point values are deleted.

In step S1011, RAM data write back processing is executed. In this process, it is first determined whether there is an abnormality in the data stored in the RAM 308. The data determined here is the data saved in the RAM 308 when the power of the slot machine 100 is turned off or when the power is cut off (temporarily drops the voltage below the operating voltage) (see step S221 in FIG. 125). That is, it is determined in step S1011 whether the data has been reliably saved in the RAM 308. Specifically, it is determined whether the power supply flag is normal (on) and whether the calculation result using the checksum is normal, and if both judgments are normal, the recovery data in the RAM 308 is It is determined that there is no abnormality.

If it is determined that there is no abnormality in the restoration data in the RAM 308, processing is performed to restore the state of the register to the state immediately before the power-off processing was performed. In this RAM data write-back process, for example, the data stored in the RAM 308 is written back to the register of the CPU 304, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power outage is read, and the stack Reset to pointer (main setting). In addition, after reading out the values of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power outage and resetting them in each register, interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, the CPU 304 executes the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, and as a result, the slot machine 100 returns to the state at power-off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction executed immediately before branching to timer interrupt processing immediately before the power is cut off. Furthermore, here, a power restoration command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This power recovery command is a command that indicates that the power has returned to the state at power-off. This power restoration command includes information such as RT at the time of power cut, gaming status, performance status, etc., and is transmitted by the main controller timer interrupt process (step S211 in FIG. 125).

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the recovery data of the RAM 308, preparations are made to clear all the storage areas of the RAM 308 except for the used stack area, and then the state shifts to an infinite loop state (RAM error processing). . From this state, it is necessary to turn on the power again with the RAM clear switch or setting key switch turned on. That is, the present embodiment is configured such that if an error occurs in the RAM 308, the progress of the game is stopped.

In step S1013, which is proceeded to when the setting key switch is on in step S1005, a setting change process is executed according to the state of the setting key, and this main control unit initial setting process is ended. Note that details of this setting change process will be described later using FIG. 127.

Next, details of the setting change process (step S1013) in the main control unit initial setting process of FIG. 126 will be described using FIG. 127. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the setting change process (step S1013) in FIG. 126.

First, in step S1101 that is executed first, data in the RAM 308 is cleared, and the process advances to step S1103. Note that the data cleared here includes item information and cumulative point values.

In step S1103, preparations are made to transmit a setting change command indicating that a setting change has started to the first sub-control unit 400 (sent in step S211 in FIG. 125), and the process advances to step S1105.

In step S1105, the interrupt status is set to changing settings, and the process advances to step S1107.

In step S1107, the temporary setting value is set as the display setting value. Through this process, temporary setting values are displayed on the effect image display device 157. After that, the process advances to step S1109.

In step S1109, it is determined whether a setting switch has been accepted. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S1111; otherwise, the process advances to step S1113. Although this embodiment employs a configuration in which a bet button is used as a setting switch, it is also possible to use an operating means related to a game as in this configuration, or a separate setting switch may be provided.

In step S1111, the temporary setting value is updated. In this embodiment, each time the setting switch is operated, the provisional setting value is incremented by 1, and when the setting switch is operated when the provisional setting value is 6, the provisional setting value is set to 1. After this, the process advances to step S1113.

In step S1113, it is determined whether the start lever 135 has been operated. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S1115; otherwise, the process advances to step S1107.

In step S1115, a process of determining the temporary setting value as a setting value is executed, and the process advances to step S1117.

In step S1117, it is determined whether the front door 102 is closed and the setting key switch is off (the setting key switch is turned 90 degrees to the left and the setting key is removed). If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1119, and if not, this step S1117 is repeatedly executed.

In step S1119, preparation for transmitting a setting change command indicating that the setting change has been completed to the first sub-control unit 400 (sent in step S211 in FIG. 125) is executed. Further, in this process, the interrupt status is returned to the status before being changed in step S1105. After this process, this setting change process ends.

Next, details of various lottery processes (step S105) in the main control section main process of FIG. 124 will be described using FIG. 128. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of various lottery processes (step S105) in FIG. 124.

First, in step S1201 that is executed first, an internal winning combination lottery is executed. In this process, an internal winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read out according to the current gaming state and RT, and an internal lottery (winning combination) is performed using this and random numbers obtained from the random number generation circuit 316. and determine the internally elected role. For example, in the RT2 state, which is the special winning combination 2 internal winning state, the internal winning combination lottery table shown in FIG. 122 is read out. As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the activated winning combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination will be turned on.

In step S1203, item addition processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 129(a).

In step S1205, confrontation setting processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 130.

In step S1207, point specialization B state transition lottery processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 132(a).

In step S1209, AT-related processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 133.

In step S1211, preparation for sending an internal winning command (sent in step S211 of FIG. 125) is executed, and this various lottery processing is ended. Note that the internal winning command includes the internal winning combination, the current production state (if the period is limited, it includes information on the number of remaining games such as the number of remaining games in the state and the number of remaining AT games), the showdown result, Information that can identify the results of the AT lottery and AT additional lottery is included. Of the above information, the information regarding the number of AT remaining games may not be included in the internal winning command in the non-AT state, but may be included in the internal winning command only in the AT state. Furthermore, in the AT state or pseudo BB state, the internal winning command for the internal winning combination including the minor winning combination 6 (condition devices 7 to 12 shown in FIG. It also includes operation instruction information indicating the order of operations.

Next, details of the item addition process (step S1203) in the various lottery processes in FIG. 128 will be described using FIG. 129. FIG. 129(a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the item addition process (step S1203) in FIG. 128.

First, in step S1301 that is executed first, it is determined whether the presentation state is the normal state. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S1303; otherwise, the process advances to step S1311.

In step S1303, it is determined whether the cumulative points are 1000 or more. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1305, and if not, this item addition process is ended.

In step S1305, a lottery is performed for items to be acquired. In this embodiment, either the "defeat 1 body" item or the "defeat rate UP" item is selected. Here, the "one enemy destroyed" item is an item that guarantees one victory in a confrontation state, and the "defeat rate UP" item is an item that increases the probability of winning in a confrontation state. There are a total of 5 types of "defeat rate UP" items: "defeat rate UP", "defeat rate small UP", "defeat rate medium UP", "defeat rate large UP", and "defeat rate super UP" in descending order of defeat rate. is provided.

FIGS. 129(b) and 129(c) are diagrams showing tables used for the lottery in step S1305. First, to select either the "Destroy 1 body" item or the "Destroy rate UP" item, the item lottery table A shown in FIG. 129(b) is used. In this table, there is a 25% probability that the item "Destroy 1 body" will be selected, and a 75% probability that the "Destroy rate UP" item will be selected. If the "defeat rate UP" item is selected here, the type of "defeat rate UP" item is further selected using the defeat rate UP lottery table A shown in FIG. 129(c). In this table, if you do not have a "defeat rate UP" item (this is the first "defeat rate UP" item obtained here), the "medium defeat rate UP" item will be selected with a 75% chance, and 24% There is a probability of ``greatly increasing the defeat rate'' item being selected, and a 1% probability of selecting the item ``greatly increasing the defeat rate''. On the other hand, if you have a "defeat rate UP" item (this is the second "defeat rate UP" item obtained here), there is a 70% chance that the "defeat rate small UP" item will be selected, and a 25% chance There is a probability of ``Medium UP'' item being selected, a 4% chance of selecting an item ``Major UP'', and a 1% chance of selecting an item ``Very UP''.

In step S1307, 1000 is subtracted from the cumulative point value, and the process advances to step S1321.

In step S1301, which is executed first, if the production state is not the normal state, then in step S1311, it is determined whether or not it is the first game in the confrontation state. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S1313; otherwise, this item addition process is ended.

In step S1313, it is determined whether the cumulative points are 1 or more. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1315, and if not, this item addition process is ended.

In step S1315, a lottery is performed for items to be acquired. FIGS. 129(d) and 129(e) are diagrams showing tables used for the lottery in step S1315. First, to select either the "Destroy 1 body" item or the "Destroy rate UP" item, the item lottery table B shown in FIG. 129(d) is used. In this table, the "Destroy 1 body" item is selected with a 10% probability, and the "Destroy rate UP" item is selected with a 90% probability. When the "defeat rate UP" item is selected here, the type of "defeat rate UP" item is further selected using the defeat rate UP lottery table B shown in FIG. 129(e). In this table, there is a 90% probability that an item with a "destruction rate? UP" item will be selected, and a 10% probability that an item with a "slightly UP" item will be selected. Note that for the item lottery here, the same table as the table used in step S1305 may be used so that the items acquired in the normal state and the items acquired in the confrontation state are the same.

In step S1317, the value of the cumulative points is cleared (set to 0), and the process advances to step S1321.

In step S1321, processing for acquiring the item selected in step S1305 or step S1315 is executed. In this process, information on the acquired item is stored (added) in the RAM 308. Note that in this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of "defeated one object" items possessed is set to three, and the upper limit of the number of possessed "defeat rate UP" items is set to eight. If the number of selected items in possession has reached the upper limit, no new items will be acquired.

In step S1323, preparation for sending an item addition command is executed (sent in step S211 of FIG. 125), and this item addition process is ended. This item addition command includes information on the number of items in possession, the order in which they are acquired, and the current cumulative points. Note that this item addition command is also sent when no new item has been acquired.

Next, details of the confrontation setting process (step S1205) in the various lottery processes shown in FIG. 128 will be explained using FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the flow of the confrontation setting process (step S1205) in FIG. 128.

First, in step S1401 that is executed first, it is determined whether a confrontation setting condition is satisfied. Here, the confrontation setting condition is satisfied in the initial state. More specifically, this applies to the first game after changing settings, the first game after clearing the RAM, the first game after losing in the confrontation state, and the first game after the AT state ends. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S1403; if not, this confrontation setting process is ended.

In step S1403, confrontation mode setting processing is performed using the table shown in FIG. 131(a). FIG. 131(a) is a diagram showing a table used for setting the confrontation mode. In this embodiment, two types of confrontation modes are provided: a normal mode and a chance mode. Chance mode requires fewer games to play than normal mode (the time from initial state to confrontation state is shorter), it is easier to transition to point-specific B state than normal mode, and it is a pseudo BB lottery than normal mode. It has become easier to win. In the table shown in FIG. 131(a), the setting probability of chance mode increases as the setting value increases. For example, in setting 1, where the player's advantage is the lowest, the chance mode setting probability is 20% (the remaining 80% is normal mode), but in setting 6, where the player's advantage is relatively highest, the chance mode setting probability is 20% (the remaining 80% is normal mode). The mode setting probability is as high as 50% (the remaining 50% is normal mode).

In step S1405, a precursor start zone setting process is performed using the table shown in FIG. 131(b). FIG. 131(b) is a diagram showing a table used for setting the precursor start zone. In this embodiment, the number of games being played is divided into certain ranges and defined as zones, and zones 1 to 12 are shown in FIG. 131(b). In step S1405, a zone is set in which a transition to a precursor state (a true precursor state and a false precursor state) occurs with a lottery probability according to the confrontation mode.

First, the setting of the true precursor state will be explained. Only one of the plurality of zones is set to transition to the true precursor state. In the table of FIG. 131(b), when the showdown mode is normal mode, one of zones 6 to 12 (the number of games in the round is 201 or more) is set, whereas when it is chance mode, zone One of 2 to 4 (the number of games being played is 1 to 150) is set. Therefore, the number of games required to reach the confrontation state is smaller in the chance mode.

Next, the setting of the false precursor state will be explained. The zone that transitions to the false precursor state is set by lottery for each of the plurality of zones. In the table of FIG. 131(b), when the confrontation mode is the normal mode, each of zones 3 to 11 (the number of games in circulation is 51 to 499) may be set as a false omen starting zone, and the chance mode In this case, only zone 3 (number of games being played is 51 to 100) may be set as the false omen start zone. Note that as a result of this lottery, there are cases where a plurality of zones are set to transition to the false omen state, and cases where only one zone is set. Further, when the state shifts to the true precursor state, it then shifts to the confrontation state and returns to the initial state, so the true precursor state is the last precursor state among the precursor states that transition during the cycle. For this reason, zones subsequent to the zone that transitions to the true precursor state may be excluded from the zones that transition to the false precursor state.

In step S1407, a starting game for the precursor state is set for each zone set in step S1405, and this confrontation setting process is ended. In this process, for example, if zone 6 is set as the zone to transition to the false precursor state, the starting game for the false precursor state is set from a range of 201 to 250. Further, when zone 4 is set as the zone to transition to the true precursor state, the starting game of the true precursor state is set from a range of 101 to 150. Note that although the lottery probabilities of the starting game for each zone are equal, these probabilities may be biased.

Note that in the showdown setting process shown in FIG. 130, the configuration is such that a zone is selected once and then a starting game is selected from within that zone; however, the configuration is not limited to a configuration that uses zones, and a transition to a precursor state is performed. Any configuration that selects a starting game may be used.

Next, details of the point specialization B state transition lottery process (step S1207) in the various lottery processes in FIG. 128 will be described using FIG. 132(a). FIG. 132(a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the point specialization B state transition lottery process (step S1207) in FIG. 128.

First, in step S1501 that is executed first, it is determined whether the presentation state is the normal state. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1503, and if not, this point specialized B state transfer lottery process is ended.

In step S1503, it is determined whether the specific combination has been internally won. Here, the specific winning combination refers to condition devices 2 to 5 (small winning combinations 1 to 4). If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1505, and if not, this point specialized B state transfer lottery process is ended.

In step S1505, a lottery process for transition to point specialization B state is executed using the table shown in FIG. 132(b). FIG. 132(b) is a diagram showing a table used for the lottery for transition to point specialization B state. For example, if condition device 2 (small role 1, watermelon) is internally won, if the confrontation mode is normal mode, there is a probability of 3/100 to win (transition to point specialization B state), and confrontation mode is a chance. In mode, there is a 50/100 chance of winning (shifting to point specialization B state). If the player wins, the point specialization B state schedule flag is set to ON. Thereafter, this point specialized B state transition lottery process is ended.

Next, details of the AT-related process (step S1209) in the various lottery processes in FIG. 128 will be described using FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the flow of AT-related processing (step S1209) in FIG. 128.

First, in step S1601 that is executed first, it is determined whether the presentation state is a confrontation state. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S1603; otherwise, the process advances to step S1621.

In step S1603, it is determined whether the specific winning combination (condition devices 2 to 5 (minor winning combinations 1 to 4)) has been internally won. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S1605; otherwise, the process advances to step S1607.

In step S1605, a lottery process for acquiring a "destroy one" item is executed using the table shown in FIG. 134(a). In this table, if the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) is won internally, there is a 1% probability, and if the small winning combination 2 (weak cherry) is won internally, there is a 1% chance of winning the small winning combination 3 (strong cherry). The process of acquiring the "Destroy 1 body" item is executed with a 100% probability if the winning is internally won in the small win 4 (chance number), and with a 13% probability if the winning is internally won in the small win 4 (chance). Note that if the number of "destroy one object" items possessed has already reached the upper limit, the "destroy one object" item will not be obtained. In addition, if the confrontation between the main character and the enemy character has started in the confrontation state, the confrontation result has been determined in the confrontation result lottery process (step S1615) that is executed prior to this, so "one character destroyed" is displayed. ”Instead of the process of acquiring the item, the result of this showdown will be rewritten. Specifically, if one of the three matches includes a defeat for the main character, this one match is rewritten as a victory for the main character. As a result, if the main character wins all three matches, the AT state schedule flag is turned on and the number of AT remaining games is set by lottery. Note that the lottery for the number of AT remaining games is the same as the lottery for the number of AT remaining games in the confrontation result lottery process described later.

In step S1607, it is determined whether the value of the number of remaining games in the confrontation state is 5 or not. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S1609; otherwise, the process advances to step S1613.

In step S1609, it is determined whether or not the player does not possess the "defeat rate UP" item. If the user does not possess the "defeat rate UP" item, the process advances to step S1611, and if the item does exist, the process advances to step S1613.

In step S1611, the value of the number of remaining games in the confrontation state is subtracted by 1, and the process advances to step S1613.

In step S1613, it is determined whether the value of the number of remaining games in the confrontation state is 4 or not. This condition is established in the game immediately before the showdown between the main character and the enemy character (the number of remaining games in the showdown starts from 3) starts. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S1615; otherwise, the process advances to step S1617.

In step S1615, a confrontation result lottery process is executed. In this process, a lottery is performed to determine whether the main character wins each of the three matches. The initial value of the victory probability (defeat rate) for this main character is 50%, but 6% is added as a basic additional amount for each "defeat rate UP" item, and in addition, the table shown in Figure 134 (b) The defeat rate is increased using . For example, if there is a "defeat rate? UP" item, there is a 50/100 probability of 6% (basic additional 6% + table additional 0%), and a 50/100 probability of 11% (basic additional 6%). % + 5% added by the table) will be added to the defeat rate. Based on this added defeat rate, a lottery is performed to determine whether the main character wins each of the three matches. Note that if the result of the previous match is a loss, the lottery for the subsequent match may not be performed.

Furthermore, if there is one "destroy one character" item, the main character's victory is confirmed instead of holding a lottery for one match. That is, if there are three "destroy one" items, it is determined that the main character wins in all three matches without performing a lottery, and the transition to the AT state is ensured.

If the above process results in a confrontation result in which the main character wins in all three battles, the AT state scheduled flag is set to on, and the number of AT remaining games is determined using the table in FIG. 134(c). The lottery and settings will be carried out.

In step S1617, it is determined whether the AT state schedule flag is set to on. If this condition is met, this AT-related process is ended, otherwise the process advances to step S1619.

In step S1619, AT direct hit lottery processing is executed using the table shown in FIG. 134(d). Here, apart from the lottery process in step S1615, a lottery is performed to determine whether to transition to the AT state. In the table of FIG. 134(d), for example, when the set value is 1, the probability of winning the lottery is 1/7500, and when the set value is 6, the probability is 1/1000. If the lottery is won here, and the confrontation result has been determined in the confrontation result lottery process (step S1615), the confrontation result is rewritten as a complete victory for the main character, and the AT state scheduled flag is set to on. At the same time, the number of AT remaining games is selected and set using the table of FIG. 134(c) (same as when the AT state schedule flag is set to on in step S1615). On the other hand, if the result of the showdown has not yet been determined, processing is performed so that the main character wins all the battles (for example, the "one character destroyed" item is added up to the upper limit).

In step S1621, which is proceeded to when the performance state is not a confrontation state in step S1601, it is determined whether the performance state is an AT state. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1623; otherwise, this AT-related process is ended.

In step S1623, a pseudo BB lottery process is executed using the table of FIG. 134(e). According to this table, if the confrontation mode is the normal mode, there is a probability of 1/500, and if the confrontation mode is the chance mode, the probability is 1/100 of winning the lottery. If the player wins, the pseudo BB state schedule flag is set to ON, and the state becomes such that it is possible to shift to the pseudo BB state in a later game.

In step S1625, it is determined whether or not the specific winning combination (condition devices 2 to 5 (minor winning combinations 1 to 4)) has been internally won. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1627; otherwise, this AT-related process is ended.

In step S1627, an additional lottery process for the number of AT remaining games is executed using the table shown in FIG. 134(f). In this table, for example, if the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) is won internally, an additional win is made with a probability of 1/13. Further, the number of additional games at that time is set to 20 with a probability of 9/100, 30 with a probability of 70/100, 50 with a probability of 20/100, and 100 with a probability of 1/100.

Next, the details of the state update process (step S117) in the main control unit main process of FIG. 124 will be described using FIG. 135. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the status update process (step S117) in FIG. 124.

First, in step S1A01 that is executed first, point acquisition processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 136(a).

In step S1A03, RT is updated. As described above, in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 117, the RT and the gaming state have a one-to-one relationship, so when the RT is updated, the gaming state is also updated.

In step S1A05, it is determined whether or not the presentation state is the initial state. If it is the initial state, the process proceeds to step S1A07, and if not the process proceeds to step S1A09.

In step S1A07, initial state processing is executed. Here, the performance state is set to the point specialization A state, and the value of the number of remaining games in the point specialization A state is set to 30. Thereafter, the process advances to step S1A35.

In step S1A09, it is determined whether or not the performance state is in the point specialization A state. If the state is in the point specialization A state, the process proceeds to step S1A11, and if not in the point specialization A state, the process proceeds to step S1A13.

In step S1A11, point specialization A state processing is executed, and the process advances to step S1A35. Note that details of the point specialization A state processing will be described later using FIG. 137(a).

In step S1A13, it is determined whether or not the performance state is a normal state. If the state is normal, the process proceeds to step S1A15, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1A17.

In step S1A15, normal state processing is executed, and the process advances to step S1A35. Note that details of the normal state processing will be described later using FIG. 137(b).

In step S1A17, it is determined whether the performance state is in the point specialization B state. If the performance state is in the point specialization B state, the process proceeds to step S1A19, and if not in the point specialization B state, the process proceeds to step S1A21.

In step S1A19, point specialization B state processing is executed, and the process advances to step S1A35. Note that details of the point specialization B state processing will be described later using FIG. 137(c).

In step S1A21, it is determined whether the performance state is a foreshadowing state, and if it is a foreshadowing state, the process proceeds to step S1A23, and if not, the process advances to step S1A25.

In step S1A23, precursor state processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. Note that details of the precursor state processing will be described later using FIG. 138.

In step S1A25, it is determined whether the performance state is a confrontation state, and if it is a confrontation state, the process advances to step S1A27, and if not, the process advances to step S1A29.

In step S1A27, confrontation state processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A35. Note that details of the confrontation state processing will be described later using FIG. 139.

In step S1A29, it is determined whether or not the performance state is an AT state. If it is an AT state, the process proceeds to step S1A31, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1A33.

In step S1A31, AT status processing is executed, and the process advances to step S1A35. Note that details of the AT state processing will be described later using FIG. 140(a).

In step S1A33, pseudo BB state processing is executed, and the process advances to step S1A35. Note that details of the pseudo BB state processing will be described later using FIG. 140(b).

In step S1A35, preparation for sending a status update command (sent in step S211 in FIG. 125) including information regarding the gaming status, RT, and performance status is executed, and this status update process is ended.

Next, details of the point acquisition process (step S1A01) in the status update process of FIG. 135 will be described using FIG. 136(a). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the point acquisition process (step S1A01) in FIG. 135.

First, in step S1B01 that is executed first, it is determined whether a point acquisition condition is satisfied. The point acquisition conditions here are conditions that are satisfied in the normal state, the point specialization A state, the point specialization B state, and the omen state. However, even in the normal state, the point acquisition condition does not hold for a game (a game in which an item acquisition effect is executed) that is started when the cumulative points exceed 1000. If this point acquisition condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1B03, otherwise, this point acquisition process is ended.

In step S1B03, a point acquisition lottery process is executed using the table shown in FIG. 136(b). FIG. 136(b) is a diagram showing a table used in a lottery for determining the value of acquired points. For example, in the normal state, if you do not win internally for any condition device (in case of a loss), there is a 90% probability that you will get 0 points, a 9% probability that you will get 5 points, and a 1% probability that you will get 5 points. Earn 10 points with probability. The value of the acquired points is then added to the cumulative points. In addition, in this description, the points earned in one game are referred to as earned points, and the cumulative total of earned points during a round is referred to as cumulative points.

In step S1B05, preparation for transmitting the acquired point command (transmitted in step S211 in FIG. 125) is executed. This command includes information on the value of earned points and the performance status. After that, this point acquisition process ends.

Next, details of the point specialization A state processing (step S1A11) in the state update processing of FIG. 135 will be explained using FIG. 137(a). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of point specialization A state processing (step S1A11) in FIG. 135.

First, in step S1C01 that is executed first, the value of the number of remaining games in point specialization A state is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1C03.

In step S1C03, it is determined whether the value of the number of remaining games in point specialization A state is 0 or not. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1C05, and if not, this point specialization A state process is ended.

In step S1C05, the performance state is set to the normal state, and this point specialization A state processing is ended.

Next, details of the normal state processing (step S1A15) in the state update processing of FIG. 135 will be described using FIG. 137(b). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the normal state processing (step S1A15) in FIG. 135.

First, in step S1C11 that is executed first, it is determined whether the point specialization B state schedule flag is set to on. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S1C13; otherwise, the process advances to step S1C17.

In step S1C13, point specialization B state setting processing is executed. Here, the production state is set to the point specialization B state, and the value of the number of remaining games in the point specialization B state is set to 5. After that, the process advances to step S1C15.

In step S1C15, the point specialization B state schedule flag is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S1C17.

In step S1C17, it is determined whether the conditions for transition to the precursor state are satisfied. This transition condition is established when the starting game of the precursor state set in the confrontation setting process (FIG. 130) is reached. If this condition is met, the process proceeds to step S1C19, otherwise this normal state processing is ended.

In step S1C19, the performance state is set to the precursor state, and any value from 1 to 32 is set by lottery (the probability of each value being selected is equal) as the value of the number of remaining games in the precursor state. After that, this normal state processing ends.

Next, details of the point specialization B state processing (step S1A19) in the state update processing of FIG. 135 will be described using FIG. 137(c). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of point specialization B state processing (step S1A19) in FIG. 135.

First, in step S1C21 that is executed first, the value of the number of remaining games in point specialization B state is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1C23.

In step S1C23, it is determined whether the value of the number of remaining games in point specialization B state is 0 or not. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1C25, and if not, this point specialization B state process is ended.

In step S1C25, the performance state is set to the normal state, and this point specialization B state processing is ended.

Next, details of the precursor state processing (step S1A23) in the state update processing of FIG. 135 will be described using FIG. 138. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the precursor state processing (step S1A23) in FIG. 135.

First, in step S1D01 that is executed first, the value of the number of remaining games in the precursor state is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1D03.

In step S1D03, it is determined whether the value of the number of remaining games in the precursor state is 0 or not. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1D05, and if not, this precursor state processing is ended.

In step S1D05, it is determined whether or not the precursor state is a true precursor state. If it is a true precursor state, the process advances to step S1D07, and if it is not a true precursor state (if it is a false precursor state), the process advances to step S1D09.

In step S1D07, the presentation state is set to a showdown state, and 5 is set as the value of the number of games remaining in the showdown state. Thereafter, this precursor state processing is ended.

In step S1D09, the presentation state is set to the normal state, and this precursor state processing is ended.

Next, details of the confrontation state process (step S1A27) in the state update process of FIG. 135 will be explained using FIG. 139. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the confrontation state processing (step S1A27) in FIG. 135.

First, in step S1E01 that is executed first, the value of the number of remaining games in the confrontation state is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1E03.

In step S1E03, it is determined whether the value of the number of remaining games in the confrontation state is 0 or not. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S1E05; otherwise, the process advances to step S1E13.

In step S1E05, it is determined whether the AT state schedule flag is set to on. If this condition is met, the process proceeds to step S1E07, otherwise the process proceeds to step S1E11.

In step S1E07, the presentation state is set to the AT state, and the process advances to step S1E09.

In step S1E09, the AT state schedule flag is set to OFF, and this confrontation state processing ends.

In step S1E11, the performance state is set to the initial state, and this confrontation state processing is ended.

In step S1E13, which is proceeded to when the value of the number of remaining games in the confrontation state is not 0 in step S1E03, it is determined whether or not the main character has been defeated in the current confrontation performance based on the confrontation result (set in the AT-related process in FIG. 133). It will be judged. The three showdown effects and the number of remaining games in the showdown state correspond to each other, with the first match being 3, the second being 2, and the third being 1. Additionally, the showdown results include information about the winners and losers of the three showdowns. Therefore, it is determined from the value of the number of games remaining in the current confrontation state what number of games it is currently in, and the corresponding victory or loss is derived from the confrontation result to determine whether or not the main character has been defeated. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S1E11, otherwise the confrontation state processing is ended.

Next, details of the AT state processing (step S1A31) in the state update processing of FIG. 135 will be described using FIG. 140(a). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of AT state processing (step S1A31) in FIG. 135.

First, in step S1F01 that is executed first, the value of the number of AT remaining games is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1F03.

In step S1F03, it is determined whether the pseudo BB state schedule flag is set on. If this condition is met, the process proceeds to step S1F05, otherwise the process proceeds to step S1F11.

In step S1F05, it is determined whether the pseudo BB symbol has stopped. If this condition is met, the process proceeds to step S1F07, otherwise the process proceeds to step S1F11.

In step S1F07, the presentation state is set to a pseudo BB state, and the process proceeds to step S1F09.

In step S1F09, the pseudo BB state schedule flag is set to OFF, and the number of remaining games in the pseudo BB state is set to a predetermined value (50 in the case of pseudo BB1, 20 in the case of pseudo BB2, see FIGS. 121 and 123(b)). is set. After that, the process advances to step S1F09.

In step S1F09, the pseudo BB state schedule flag is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S1F11.

In step S1F11, it is determined whether the value of the number of AT remaining games is 0 or not. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1F13, otherwise this AT state processing is ended.

In step S1F13, the performance state is set to the initial state, and this AT state processing is ended.

Next, details of the pseudo BB state processing (step S1A33) in the state update processing of FIG. 135 will be described using FIG. 140(b). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the pseudo BB state processing (step S1A33) in FIG. 135.

First, in step S1F21 that is executed first, the value of the number of remaining games in the pseudo BB state is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1F23.

In step S1F23, it is determined whether the value of the number of remaining games in the pseudo BB state is 0 or not. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1F25, and if not, this pseudo BB state processing is ended.

In step S1F25, the presentation state is set to the AT state, and this pseudo BB state processing is ended.

<Processing of first sub-control unit 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 141. Note that FIG. 141(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 141(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 141(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S301, various initial settings are performed. This initial setting is executed when the power is turned on. In this process, initial settings of the input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408, etc. are performed. Through this process, an area for storing internal winning information, which is information representing the result of internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming state, are provided in the RAM 408, respectively. Note that the performance state of the first sub-control unit 400 is set to the initial state.

In step S303, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S305.

In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S309, production control processing is performed. Here, the processing includes processing to expand the effect data and setting device data in the effect execution area provided in the RAM 408, processing to set the effect data in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408, and furthermore, the received command Based on the information included in the command, processing such as setting performance data and executing control processing is performed. Note that the performance data set in the performance reservation area and the device data set in the performance execution area may be updated (overwritten) with different data. In this case, the presentation content is changed based on the overwritten data. Details of this production control process will be described later using FIG. 142.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, control data is acquired from device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277, and the acquired control data is output to the sound source IC 418, thereby causing a sound performance to be executed.

In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to each type of lamp 420 and outputting the acquired control data to the drive circuit 422, the performance using the lamps is executed.

In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the shutter 163 and outputting the acquired control data to the drive circuit 424, the performance by the shutter 163 is executed.

In step S317, information output processing is performed to perform settings for transmitting a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the performance image display device 157, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-control unit 500, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 141(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S321 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 141(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S331, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 141(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S333, the device data set in step S315 is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and the random value for effect is updated.

Next, details of the production control process (step S309) in the first sub-control unit main process of FIG. 141 will be explained using FIG. 142. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the production control process (step S309) in FIG. 141.

First, in step S3001, which is executed first, information acquisition and update processing is executed, and the process advances to step S3003. The first sub-control unit 400 receives various commands from the main control unit 300, and in this information acquisition/updating process, the information included in the various commands (RT, gaming status, performance status, total points, acquired points, item (number of possessions and acquisition order, number of AT remaining games, number of AT additional games, etc.) are acquired as appropriate and these information are stored (updated). The first sub-control unit 400 executes various effects based on this information. Note that when a power restoration command is transmitted from the main control unit 300, information about the gaming state and performance state is updated based on the information included in this power restoration command, but the performance state is the point specialization A state. Only when information indicating this is received, the performance state of the first sub-control unit 400 is updated to the normal state instead of the point specialization A state. Therefore, if a power outage is restored when the performance state of the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is the point specialization A state, after the power is restored, the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 The performance status of becomes inconsistent. Note that this state of mismatch between the presentation states is maintained until the presentation state of the main control section 300 thereafter shifts to the normal state.

In step S3003, display point management processing is executed, and the process advances to step S3005. Note that details of this display point management process will be described later using FIG. 143(a).

In step S3005, display item management processing is executed, and the process advances to step S3007. Note that details of this display item management process will be described later using FIG. 144.

In step S3007, navigation-related display processing is executed, and the process advances to step S3009. For example, when the performance state is an AT state, the number of AT remaining games and the number of AT additional games are displayed, as well as the number of medals acquired in this state. Furthermore, if the condition devices 7 to 12 are internally won, an effect is set to notify the correct operation order, and if the pseudo BB state schedule flag is on and the condition device 1 is internally won, this pseudo BB An effect that prompts the player to stop the winning combination corresponding to the status schedule flag is set. Furthermore, when transitioning from this AT state to the pseudo BB state, if the condition devices 7 to 12 are internally won, an effect is set to notify the correct operation order, and medals can be acquired continuously from the AT state. The number will be displayed. As described above, in this embodiment, the number of medals acquired is displayed in both the AT state and the pseudo BB state. Note that in the pseudo BB state, the value of the number of remaining games in the pseudo BB state is displayed instead of the number of remaining AT games, and the number of remaining AT games is not subtracted.

In step S3009, other effect setting processing is executed, and this effect control processing is ended. Here, for example, a process of displaying a background or executing an appropriate effect according to the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is executed. In this process, if the display points have reached 1000 when all the reels stop, 1000 will be subtracted from the display points and a display will be displayed indicating that you have earned the right to obtain the item in the next game (for example, This includes a process for executing "Roulette x 1"). In addition, in the confrontation state, a process of executing a confrontation performance based on the confrontation result is included. In addition, when displaying the background according to the presentation state in this process, if the presentation conditions of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match, the background according to the presentation state of the first sub-control section 400 is displayed. The background is displayed.

Next, details of the display point management process (step S3003) in the production control process of FIG. 142 will be explained using FIG. 143(a). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the display point management process (step S3003) in FIG. 142.

First, in step S3101 that is executed first, it is determined whether an acquisition point command has been received. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S3103; otherwise, the process advances to step S3111.

In step S3103, it is determined whether the performance states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 are inconsistent (the main control unit 300 is in the point specialization A state, and the first sub-control unit 400 is in the normal state). be done. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S3105; otherwise, the process advances to step S3107.

In step S3105, a point acquisition lottery process is executed using the table shown in FIG. 143(b). FIG. 143(b) is a diagram showing a table used in a lottery for determining the value of acquired points. Note that this table is the same as the part of the table shown in FIG. 136(b) that is used when the presentation state is the normal state. For example, if there is no internal win for any of the conditional devices (in case of a loss), there is a 90% probability that you will get 0 points, a 9% probability that you will get 5 points, and a 1% probability that you will get 10 points. Earn points. Note that this lottery process may be configured to be executed by the main control unit 300. For example, when the performance states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 do not match, the acquired points that the main control unit 300 sends to the first sub-control unit 400 are derived separately from the normal acquired points. However, this value may be used in the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S3107, the value of the acquired points is added to the displayed points, and the process advances to step S3121. For the acquired points added here, the value of the acquired points included in the acquired point command is used as is, but if the presentation states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 do not match, the value is selected in step S3105. The value given is used. Further, the display point is a point displayed on the effect image display device 157.

In step S3111, which is proceeded to when information on acquired points cannot be obtained in step S3101, it is determined whether an item addition command has been received. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S3113; otherwise, the process advances to step S3121.

In step S3113, the cumulative point value included in the item addition command is set to the display point value, and the process advances to step S3121. Note that if there is a mismatch between the cumulative points and the displayed points, this process will resolve the mismatch.

In step S3121, it is determined whether the conditions for displaying the display point are satisfied. This condition is satisfied when the performance state of the first sub-control unit 400 is any one of the initial state, point specialization A state, normal state, point specialization B state, omen state, and confrontation state. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S3123, and if not, this display point management process is ended.

In step S3123, processing for displaying the value of the display point is executed, and this display point management processing is ended.

Next, details of the display item management process (step S3005) in the production control process of FIG. 142 will be explained using FIG. 144. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of display item management processing (step S3005) in FIG. 142.

First, in step S3201 that is executed first, it is determined whether an item addition command has been received. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S3203; otherwise, the process advances to step S3211.

In step S3203, information on the currently possessed item is updated based on the information included in the item addition command, and the process advances to step S3205.

In step S3205, it is determined whether the value of the display point is greater than 0 or whether "roulette x 1" is displayed. If either of these conditions is satisfied, the process advances to step S3207, and if not, this display item management process is ended.

In step S3207, item acquisition performance setting processing is executed, and this display item management processing ends. Note that details of the item acquisition effect setting process will be described later using FIG. 145.

In step S3211, which is proceeded when it is determined in step S3201 that information on adding an item has not been obtained, it is determined whether an internal winning command has been received. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S3213, and if not, this display item management process is ended.

In step S3213, it is determined whether the value of the number of remaining games in the confrontation state is 4 or not. When the production state is a confrontation state in the main control unit 300, the internal winning command includes information on the value of the number of remaining games in the confrontation state, and the value of the number of remaining games in the confrontation state is changed in the game immediately before the confrontation performance. It becomes 4. That is, the above determination is to determine whether or not the current game is the game immediately before the confrontation performance. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S3215; otherwise, the process advances to step S3215. This display item management process ends.

In step S3215, an effect that uses the "defeat rate UP" item among the displayed items is set. Specifically, an effect is executed that erases all displayed "killing rate UP" items and displays the probability of winning against the enemy character (the result of the confrontation determined in the AT-related process of FIG. 133). Note that if the "defeat rate UP" item is not displayed, the above effect is not set.

In step S3217, the item information (possessed items and display items) stored in the RAM 408 is cleared, and this display item management process is ended.

Next, details of the item acquisition effect setting process (step S3207) in the display item management process of FIG. 144 will be explained using FIG. 145. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the item acquisition effect setting process (step S3207) in FIG. 144.

First, in step S3301 that is executed first, the item currently displayed on the effect image display 157 is compared with information on the item currently in possession, and the process proceeds to step S3303.

In step S3303, it is determined whether or not there is a difference between both items as a result of the comparison in step S3301. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S3305; otherwise, the process advances to step S3311.

In step S3305, an item acquisition effect that results in no additional item being obtained is set, and this item acquisition effect setting process is ended.

In step S3311, it is determined whether or not there is only one item difference as a result of the comparison in step S3301. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S3313; otherwise (if there are multiple differences between the items), the process advances to step S3321.

In step S3313, an item acquisition effect indicating that the item has been obtained is set, and this item acquisition effect setting process is ended. When an item is acquired during normal game progress (acquired in step S1321 in FIG. 129(a)), information on the acquired item is added to the information on the possessed item included in the item addition command. This information is not reflected in the displayed item, so when you compare it with the information on the item you already have, only the newly acquired item will be different. From the above, when comparing the displayed item and the information of the item currently in possession, if only the newly acquired item is different, the newly acquired item is added in step S3313. A presentation (item acquisition presentation) is set. Note that when the number of items in possession has reached the upper limit, an item addition command is sent, but since there are no newly acquired items, there is no difference even if the above comparison is performed. In this case, a performance that is the same as the item acquisition performance and in which no item is ultimately added is set (step S3305).

In step S3321, it is determined whether there are a plurality of different items as a result of the comparison in step S3301. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S3313; otherwise, the process advances to step S3321.

In step S3321, it is determined whether the performance state is a confrontation state. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S3313; otherwise, the process advances to step S3323.

In step S3323, it is determined whether or not the player possesses a "defeat rate UP" item that is not displayed on the effect image display device 157. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S3325; otherwise, the process advances to step S3313.

In step S3325, an item acquisition effect is set to add the oldest "killing rate UP" item among the items in the possession that has not yet been displayed, and this item acquisition effect setting process is ended. When the power is restored after a power outage due to the end of business hours, etc., the main control unit 300 restores the information on the items it has (step S1011 in FIG. 126), but the first sub-control unit 400 Information about the displayed item is deleted from RAM 408. If a new item is acquired in this state, the item displayed on the effect image display device 157 and the information on the possessed item included in the item addition command may be different for multiple items including the newly acquired item. There is sex. In this way, when comparing the information of the displayed item and the information of the item in possession, and if there is a difference in information other than the newly acquired one (determination of No in step S3311), the information of the item in possession is An item acquisition effect is set to add the oldest item among the "killing rate UP" items that have not yet been displayed (step S3325). Note that if the player does not possess the "defeat rate UP" item, an item acquisition effect that adds a newly acquired item is set (step S3313). However, when the performance state is a confrontation state, the items to be obtained are different from those in the normal state (steps S1305 and S1315 in FIG. If the item acquisition effect is performed, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, when the performance state is a confrontation state, an item acquisition performance that adds a newly acquired item is set (Yes in step S3321).

<Processing of second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using FIG. 146. Note that FIG. 146(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 146(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 146(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 146(d) is a flowchart of image control processing by the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S401 of FIG. 146(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 508, etc. are performed.

In step S403, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S405.

In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S409, production control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S407, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading out effect data for controlling an image related to a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. It also includes performing processes such as reading out performance data other than this from the ROM 506, and performing update processing of the performance data when it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S409, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding display images (notification images, background images) is performed. This image control processing will be described later using FIG. 146(d). When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S403.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using FIG. 146(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S415 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 146(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S417, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 146(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S419, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control process of step S411 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 146(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S421, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S423, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S425; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. wait until

In step S425, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S421, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S429, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S431; otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal is input. Wait for input.

In step S431, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

≪Operation explanation≫
Hereinafter, the features of the slot machine 100 described above will be explained using an operation example.

[Until the performance state moves from the initial state to the normal state via the point specialization A state]
Hereinafter, the flow of the performance state from the initial state to the normal state via the point specialization A state will be explained using FIG. 147. This figure is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance executed when the performance state changes from the initial state to the normal state via the point specialization A state.

The initial state is set in the first game after changing the settings or clearing the RAM (at the start of a round, step S1009 in FIG. 126, step S1101 in FIG. 127). It is also set when the confrontation state or AT state ends (at the start of the next round, step S1E11 in FIG. 139, step S1F13 in FIG. 140(a)). FIG. 147(a) shows an example of a display on the effect image display device 157 when the initial state is set. "0000/1000" at the bottom left of this display shows the cumulative points on the display at the top and the upper limit of the cumulative points on the display at the bottom. That is, the display of "0000/1000" indicates that the cumulative points are 0 points. This point display is displayed in the confrontation state until the confrontation result is displayed, and is not displayed in the AT state or pseudo BB state (steps S3121 and S3123 in FIG. 143(a)). Note that in this embodiment, a value different from the cumulative points of the main control unit 300 may be displayed as the cumulative points on the display due to a power failure and power restoration.

When a game is started in this state and one game ends (all reels are stopped), the display on the effect image display device 157 becomes the state shown in FIG. 147(b). During this one game, the number of games to shift to the confrontation mode and the precursor state is set (FIG. 130). In FIG. 147(b), a message indicating that the confrontation mode setting is completed is displayed at the top of the screen. Note that at the time of FIG. 147(a), the confrontation mode has not been set yet, and a message indicating that the confrontation mode setting is not completed is displayed at the top of the screen. The transition to the precursor state occurs according to the number of games set here.

Only one game is set in the initial state, and when the next game is started from the state shown in FIG. 147(b), the state shifts to point specialization A state (step S1A07 in FIG. 135). FIG. 147(c) shows an example of a display on the effect image display device 157 when this point specialization A state is set. This point specialization A state is a state in which the points for acquiring items are more likely to increase than in the normal state (see Fig. 136(b)), and in Fig. 147(c), the points for acquiring items are more likely to increase than in the normal state. A message is displayed at the top of the screen indicating that it is easy to use. After 30 games have passed in this point specialization A state, the state shifts to the normal state (step S1C05 in FIG. 137(a)). FIG. 147(d) shows an example of a display on the effect image display device 157 when this normal state is set.

[Until the production state transitions from the normal state to the point specialized B state or false omen state and returns to the normal state]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 148, a flow will be described in which the performance state shifts from the normal state to the point specialization B state or the false omen state, and then returns to the normal state. This figure is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance that is executed when the performance state shifts from the normal state to the point specialization B state or the false omen state and returns to the normal state.

The normal state is a performance state in which the vehicle mainly stays during the rotation. In this performance state, points may be acquired based on the internal winning combination and the confrontation mode (see FIG. 136). FIGS. 148(a) and 148(b) show an example of a display on the effect image display device 157 when this normal state is set. Note that FIG. 148(a) is an example of a state in which no items are displayed, and FIG. 148(b) is an example of a state in which items are displayed. From this normal state, the state transitions to one of the point specialized B state, a false precursor state, and a true precursor state. Among these, the point specialized B state and the false precursor state transition to the normal state again, whereas the true precursor state does not transition to the normal state. Here, transition to the point specialization B state and the false precursor state will be explained.

In the normal state, a lottery to move to the point specialization B state is executed based on the internal winning combination and the confrontation mode (Fig. 132), and if you win this lottery, you will move to the point specialization B state (Fig. 137 (b) ) step S1C13). FIGS. 148(c) and 148(d) show an example of a display on the effect image display device 157 when this point specialization B state is set. Note that FIG. 148(c) is an example of a state in which no items are displayed, and FIG. 148(d) is an example of a state in which items are displayed. This point specialization B state is a state in which the points for acquiring items are more likely to increase than in the normal state (see FIG. 136(b)), and FIGS. 148(c) and (d) show that the points are in the normal state. A message is displayed at the top of the screen indicating that the increase is likely to be more likely than the previous one. After five games have passed in this point specialization B state, the state shifts to the normal state (step S1C25 in FIG. 137(c)).

In addition, in the normal state, when the number of starting games in the false precursor state that has already been set is reached, the number of games in the false precursor state (number of remaining games in the precursor state) is set and the transition to the false precursor state is made (Fig. 137(b) ) step S1C19). FIGS. 148(e) and 148(f) show an example of a display on the effect image display device 157 when this false omen state is set. Note that FIG. 148(e) is an example of a state in which no items are displayed, and FIG. 148(f) is an example of a state in which items are displayed. This false precursor state is a state in which the points for acquiring an item are more likely to increase than in the normal state (see FIG. 136(b)). In FIGS. 148(e) and 148(f), a message indicating a precursor state is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. Note that this screen is the same screen as the true precursor state, and is configured so that the type of precursor state cannot be identified (or is difficult to identify) from this screen alone. This false precursor state transitions to a normal state after the set number of games has elapsed (step S1D09 in FIG. 138).

[Obtaining items when the production state is normal]
The flow of item acquisition when the presentation state is the normal state will be described below with reference to FIG. 149. This figure is a diagram showing an example of an item acquisition performance when the performance state is a normal state.

In the normal state, when the cumulative points reach a predetermined number (1000 in this embodiment), a lottery of acquired items is executed in exchange for the predetermined number of cumulative points (Yes route in step S1303 of FIG. 129(a)). , an effect indicating this is executed (item acquisition effect, step S3207 in FIG. 144, FIG. 145). FIGS. 149(a) to 149(f) show examples of changes caused by this item acquisition performance.

First, FIG. 149(a) shows that the cumulative points on the display have reached 1000 in the normal state. When all the reels stop in this state, 1000 is subtracted from the cumulative points on the display as shown in Figure 149(b), and "Roulette x 1" indicating that you have earned the right to obtain items in the next game. is displayed at the bottom left of the screen.

Subsequently, by operating the start lever 135 to start the game, the display of "Roulette x 1" shown in FIG. 149(b) becomes displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 149(c). Further, as shown in FIG. 149(d), a roulette effect is executed in which one is selected from among the following three options: "Destroy 1 body," "Destroy rate? UP," and "Chance." Further, when all the reels stop, a performance in which one of the options is determined is executed. FIG. 149(e) shows an example of displaying that the "defeat rate small UP" item has been acquired. Furthermore, FIG. 149(f) shows that a display regarding items obtained in the next game has been added.

In FIG. 149(d), "1 object destroyed" and "Defeated rate? UP" indicate the possibility of obtaining items with the same name. Furthermore, the display of "chance" indicates the possibility of acquiring some item. Note that if the number of items reaches the upper limit and the item cannot be acquired, this "chance" is selected and the effect that the item could not be acquired is executed. In other words, what is displayed as options during the item acquisition performance is not limited to items with the same name, but also items that indicate whether or not the item has been acquired, such as "hit" or "missed". Good too.

Furthermore, as explained above, there are cases where you can move from the normal state to the point specialization B state or the omen state and earn more points, but the configuration is such that items cannot be obtained in the point specialization B state or the omen state. It has become. Therefore, for example, a situation may occur in which the point specialization B state (or precursor state) shifts to the normal state when the cumulative points are 2000 or more, but only one item can be acquired in one game. There is. For example, if the cumulative points are 2000 or more, the item acquisition process will be executed for two consecutive games.

[Until the production state shifts from the normal state to the true precursor state and then to the confrontation state]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 150, the flow of the production state from the normal state to the true precursor state to the confrontation state will be described. This figure is a diagram illustrating an example of the performance that is executed from the normal state to the true precursor state to the confrontation state.

FIG. 150(a) shows an example of a display on the effect image display device 157 when this normal state is set. In the normal state, when the number of starting games in the true precursor state that has already been set is reached, the number of games in the true precursor state (the number of remaining games in the precursor state) is set and the transition to the true precursor state is made (see FIG. 137(b)). Step S1C19). FIG. 150(b) shows an example of a display on the effect image display device 157 when this true precursor state is set. This true precursor state is a state in which the points for acquiring an item are more likely to increase than in the normal state (see FIG. 136(b)). In FIG. 150(b), a message indicating a precursor state is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. Note that this screen is the same screen as that for the false precursor state, and is configured so that the type of precursor state cannot be identified (or is difficult to identify) from this screen alone. This true precursor state transitions to a confrontation state after the set number of games has elapsed (step S1D07 in FIG. 138). FIG. 150(c) shows an example of a display on the effect image display device 157 when this confrontation state is set.

[About item acquisition performance during confrontation]
The flow of item acquisition when the performance state is the confrontation state will be described below with reference to FIGS. 151(a) to 151(c). This figure is a diagram showing an example of an item acquisition performance when the performance state is a confrontation state.

In the showdown state, an effect is executed in the first game to indicate that the state has shifted to the showdown state, but if there are any accumulated points remaining in this game, items are obtained in exchange (see Fig. 129(a)). (Yes in step S1313), an effect indicating this (item acquisition effect, step S3207 in FIG. 144, FIG. 145) is executed. There is no route to transition from the confrontation state to the normal state, and items cannot be acquired in the normal state during this round, so 130 points are wasted. For this reason, this embodiment employs a configuration in which items can be acquired in exchange for remaining points that do not reach 1000 points in the normal state.

First, FIG. 151(a) shows that there are 130 cumulative points on the display in the game immediately before transitioning to the confrontation state (true precursor state). Next, by operating the start lever 135 to start the game, the total points on the display are set to 0 as shown in FIG. A roulette effect is executed in which one of the three options is selected. Further, when all the reels stop, a performance in which one of the options is determined is executed. FIG. 151(c) shows an example of displaying that the "defeat rate? UP" item has been acquired. Note that the content of the item acquisition performance here may be the same as or different from the item acquisition performance in the normal state.

The above is the effect executed in the first game in the confrontation state. In the second game, if the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed, an effect using this item is executed (FIGS. 151(d) to (f)). On the other hand, if the "defeat rate UP" item is not displayed, a confrontation performance starts (FIG. 151(g)).

[About item use effects during confrontation]
The flow of item use when the production state is a confrontation state will be described below using FIGS. 151(d) to 151(f). This figure is a diagram showing an example of item use performance when the performance state is a confrontation state.

In the confrontation state, if the "defeat rate UP" item is in possession, a production using the "defeat rate UP" item (item use production) is executed in the second game (Yes in step S3213 in FIG. 144). . First, by operating the start lever 135 to start the second game in the confrontation state, a message "Defeat Rate UP Challenge" is displayed at the top of the screen as shown in FIG. 151(d). Furthermore, when all the reels have stopped, the message "Press the 〇〇 button!" will be displayed as shown in Figure 151(e), and by operating the corresponding button, the message "Press the 〇〇 button!" will be displayed as shown in Figure 151(f). The victory probability (defeat rate) of the main character due to the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed, and the "defeat rate UP" item is deleted. FIG. 151(f) shows that the victory probability (defeat rate) of the main character has become 72% due to the "defeat rate UP" item. Note that the configuration is not limited to the example in which the defeat rate is displayed by the above-mentioned button operation, and the configuration may be such that the defeat rate is displayed without requiring such an operation. Further, the operating means used for button operations may be used for the progress of the game, or may be used for the purpose of performance regardless of the progress of the game.

The showdown effect starts from the next game after the game in which the above-mentioned item use effect was executed. In addition, if the "defeat rate UP" item is not displayed at the end of the first game of the confrontation performance, the above item usage performance will not be executed and the confrontation performance will start from the second game (Figure 151 (g)) is started.

[About the case where you win all the showdowns during the showdown state]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 152, a case will be described in which the player completely wins the showdown performance during the showdown state. This figure is a diagram showing an example of a case where the player completely wins the showdown performance.

In the confrontation state, a lottery is performed to determine whether the main character wins over the enemy character (step S1615 in FIG. 133), and a confrontation performance based on the lottery result is performed (step S3009 in FIG. 142). Note that the "defeat rate UP" item and the "1 body destroyed" item make it easier for the main character to win and transition to the AT state (see the process in step S1615 in FIG. 133).

FIG. 152(a) shows an example of the start of the first match of the confrontation performance, and FIG. 152(b) shows an example of the case where the first match of the confrontation performance is won. At this time, in the lower right corner of the screen in FIG. 152(b), the words "1 body sighted" are displayed, indicating that the first battle has been won. This character remains displayed until the end of the confrontation performance.

FIG. 152(c) shows an example at the start of the second game of the confrontation performance, and FIG. 152(d) shows an example of the case where the second game of the confrontation performance is won. At this time, in the lower right corner of the screen in FIG. 152(d), the words "2 bodies sighted and destroyed" are displayed, indicating that the second match has been won. This character remains displayed until the end of the confrontation performance.

FIG. 152(e) shows an example of the start of the third game of the confrontation performance, and FIG. 152(f) shows an example of the case where the third game of the confrontation performance is won. At this time, in the lower right corner of the screen in FIG. 152(f), the words "3 bodies sighted and destroyed" are displayed, indicating that the third battle has been won. This character remains displayed until the end of the confrontation performance.

When the showdown effect is a complete win, the AT state schedule flag is set to on at the time of the drawing of the showdown results prior to this. As a result, the AT state is entered from the next game in which all wins are won in the confrontation performance (Yes in step S1E05 in FIG. 139). FIG. 152(g) shows an example of a display on the effect image display device 157 when the AT state is set.

[In case of losing the showdown performance during the showdown state]
Hereinafter, a case where the player loses the showdown performance during the showdown state will be described using FIG. 153. This figure is a diagram showing an example of a case where the player loses in the confrontation performance.

In the confrontation state, a lottery is performed to determine whether the main character wins over the enemy character (step S1615 in FIG. 133), and a confrontation performance based on the lottery result is performed (step S3009 in FIG. 142).

FIG. 153(a) shows an example of the start of the first match of the confrontation performance, and FIG. 153(b) shows an example of the case where the first match of the confrontation performance is defeated. As in the example of FIG. 152, if the main character wins all the battle performances, the game shifts to the AT state, but if the main character loses in the battle performance, the game shifts to the initial state from the next game (step S1E11 in FIG. 139). FIG. 153(c) shows an example of a display on the effect image display device 157 when the initial state is set. When the system shifts to the initial state, various settings are executed and the next rotation begins.

[About transition from AT state to pseudo BB or initial state]
The flow from the AT state to the pseudo BB state or the initial state will be described below using FIG. 154. This figure is a diagram illustrating an example of effects executed before transitioning from the AT state to the pseudo BB state or the initial state.

The AT state allows the player to earn more profits by notifying the correct press order (step S3007 in FIG. 142) when the condition devices 7 to 12 (overlapping combinations of minor prizes 6 to 8) are internally won. It is possible to obtain it. FIG. 154(a) shows an example of a display on the effect image display device 157 when this AT state is set. In the example of FIG. 154(a), three numbers are used to notify the correct pressing order of left and right. In addition, at the bottom left of the screen, the number of remaining games in AT state and the number of games that have passed in AT state are displayed, and at the bottom right of the screen, the number of games earned since switching to AT state in this lap is displayed. The number of medals is displayed. The AT state shifts to the initial state when the number of AT remaining games becomes 0 (step S1F13 in FIG. 140). FIG. 154(c) shows an example of a display on the effect image display device 157 when the initial state is set. Note that the number of AT remaining games may be added (step S1627 in FIG. 133).

Further, in the AT state, a lottery is executed to enable transition to the pseudo BB state (step S1623 in FIG. 133). If this lottery is won, the pseudo BB state schedule flag is set to ON, and an effect is performed to prompt the player to stop the replay combination 2 or 3, which is the pseudo BB symbol (step S3007 in FIG. 142). Then, when the symbols of re-gaming combination 2 or re-gaming combination 3 stop, the state shifts to a pseudo BB state (step S1F07 in FIG. 140(a)).

In the pseudo BB state, as in the AT state, if the condition devices 7 to 12 (overlapping combinations of small winnings 6 to 8) are internally won, the correct pressing order is announced, and the player can earn more profits. (Step S3007 in FIG. 142). FIG. 154(b) shows an example of a display on the effect image display device 157 when this pseudo BB state is set. In the example of FIG. 154(b), three numbers are used to notify the correct press order of left and right. Further, at the lower left of the screen, the number of remaining games in the pseudo BB state and the number of elapsed games in the pseudo BB state up to now are displayed. Further, the number of acquired medals is continuously displayed in the lower right corner of the screen from the AT state. There are two types of pseudo BB states: a pseudo BB1 state to which the replay combination 2 moves, and a pseudo BB2 state to which the replay combination 3 moves. The pseudo BB1 state shifts to the AT state after 50 games have passed, and the pseudo BB2 state shifts to the AT state after 20 games have passed (step S1F25 in FIG. 140(b)).

[Regarding the operation of reflecting the state of the main control unit 300 on the first sub-control unit 400]
The operations of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 will be described below using FIG. 155. FIG. 155 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment.

As explained in the operation examples shown in FIGS. 147 to 154, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the points acquired when the production state is the normal state, point specialization A state, point specialization B state, or portent state The configuration is such that the cumulative points increase and items are acquired in exchange for a predetermined value (1000 in the example) of cumulative points. In the example of FIG. 155 (upper part of the figure), the production state changes from the initial state to the point specialization A state to the normal state, and in the next game when the cumulative points (total P in the diagram) reach 1000, It shows that you have acquired a "Medium UP" item in exchange for cumulative points (Main control: Medium UP added to Possession Items column). Also, in the next game after the cumulative points reached 1010 (lower part of the diagram), in exchange for the 1000 cumulative points, a "Small UP" item (main control: small UP added to the owned items column) was obtained. It has been shown that Incidentally, here, only 10 cumulative points remain and are used in the next game and thereafter.

The above operations are executed in the main control section 300, but these states are reflected on the first sub-control section 400. First, the performance state of the first sub-control unit 400 reflects the performance state of the main control unit 300 (step S1A35 in FIG. 135, step S3001 in FIG. 142), and the performance state as shown in the operation examples of FIGS. 147 to 154 is obtained. The state will be according to.

Furthermore, in the first sub-control unit 400, the points acquired for each game are added to the display points (step S3107 in FIG. 143(a)). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 155, the display points and the cumulative points of the main control unit 300 become the same value. By displaying this display point value, the player can grasp the total points of the main control unit 300 (step S3123 in FIG. 143(a)).

Furthermore, in the first sub-control unit 400, when an item is acquired in the main control unit 300, information on the item in possession is transmitted (step S1323 in FIG. 129(a)), and based on this information, the item acquisition performance and display item is updated (step S3207 in FIG. 144, step S3313 in FIG. 145). FIG. 155 shows that in a game in which a possession item is added in the main control unit 300, an item acquisition effect is executed and a display item of the first sub-control unit 400 is added.

[About the handling of points in the event of a power outage and restoration]
Hereinafter, the operation when the presentation states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be explained using FIGS. 156 and 157. FIGS. 156 and 157 are diagrams showing an example of the operation when a power failure occurs in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment.

In FIG. 155, the operation of reflecting the state of the main control unit 300 on the first sub-control unit 400 has been described. However, when the power is restored after a power outage, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power outage, while the display points in the first sub-control unit 400 are cleared. The accumulated points and the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 will not match. FIG. 156(a) shows an example in which the power is restored after a power outage when the cumulative point value is 500. In this case, although there is no change in the total points of the main control unit 300 before and after the power is restored from the power outage, the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 are shown to be 0 after the power is restored. In this case, since the display points increase from this point, the cumulative points of the main control unit 300 and the amount of increase are the same, but the values continue to be inconsistent.

Thereafter, when the cumulative points reach 1000, the main control unit 300 transmits information on the items in possession (step S1323 in FIG. 129(a)), and based on this information, the item acquisition effect and the display item update are executed. (Step S3207 in FIG. 144, step S3313 in FIG. 145). FIG. 156(a) shows that in a game in which a possession item is added in the main control unit 300, an item acquisition effect is executed and a display item in the first sub-control unit 400 is added. There is. Also, at this time, the value of the cumulative points is reflected in the value of the display points (step S3113 in FIG. 143(a)). Therefore, from this point on, the total points of the main control section 300 and the display points of the first sub-control section 400 will match. Note that in this case, the item acquisition effect will be executed before the display points have reached 1000.

Unlike the above example, the configuration is such that if a power outage is restored when the performance state is point specialization A state, not only the points but also the performance state become inconsistent ( Step S3001 in FIG. 142). In FIG. 156(b), an example is shown in which the performance state is the point specialization A state and a power outage restoration occurs when the cumulative point value is 500. In this case, although there is no change in the total points of the main control unit 300 before and after the power is restored from the power outage, the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 are shown to be 0 after the power is restored. Furthermore, although the performance state of the main control unit 300 remains in the point specialization A state before and after the power is restored, it is shown that the performance state of the first sub-control unit 400 is in the normal state. ing. In this case, the amount of increase in the displayed points does not reflect the amount of increase in the total points of the main control unit 300, and the amount of increase is drawn separately (step S3105 in FIG. 143(a)). FIG. 156(b) shows that the amount of increase in cumulative points and the amount of increase in display points may not match. Specifically, after a power outage, the cumulative points increase from 500 to 20, 200, 0, 0, while the displayed points increase from 0 to 5, 20, 5, 0. ing. After that, when the performance state of the main control unit 300 shifts to the normal state, it becomes a state that matches the performance state of the first sub-control unit 400, and from here on, the cumulative points of the main control unit 300 are The amount of increase in the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 becomes the same. Then, when the cumulative points reach 1000, the main control unit 300 transmits information on the items in possession (step S1323 in FIG. 129(a)), and based on this information, item acquisition effects and display item updates are executed ( Step S3207 in FIG. 144, step S3313 in FIG. 145), and the value of the cumulative points is reflected in the value of the display points (step S3113 in FIG. 143(a)). From this point on, the total points of the main control section 300 and the display points of the first sub-control section 400 will match.

FIG. 157 shows an example in which a power outage recovery occurs immediately after the performance state transitions from the initial state to the point specialization A state. In this example, the cumulative points and display points immediately after the power is restored are both 0. Further, as in FIG. 156(b), the presentation state of the main control section 300 remains in the point specialization A state, but the presentation state of the first sub-control section 400 is shown to be in the normal state. ing. In this case, similarly to FIG. 156(b), the increase amount of display points does not reflect the increase amount of the cumulative points of the main control unit 300, and the increase amount is drawn separately (step S3105 of FIG. 143(a) ). FIG. 157 shows that the amount of increase in cumulative points and the amount of increase in displayed points may not match. After that, when the performance state of the main control unit 300 shifts to the normal state, it becomes a state that matches the performance state of the first sub-control unit 400, and from here on, the main control unit 300 The amount of increase in the cumulative points and the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 are the same. Then, when the cumulative points reach 1000, the main control unit 300 transmits information on the items in possession (step S1323 in FIG. 129(a)), and based on this information, item acquisition effects and display item updates are executed ( Step S3207 in FIG. 144, step S3313 in FIG. 145), and the value of the cumulative points is reflected in the value of the display points (step S3113 in FIG. 143(a)). From this point on, the total points of the main control section 300 and the display points of the first sub-control section 400 will match.

[How to add items in the event of a power outage and restoration (1)]
Hereinafter, using FIG. 158, the operation when the presentation states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 become inconsistent will be explained. FIG. 158 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation when a power failure occurs in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, when the power is restored after a power outage, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power outage, while the display points in the first sub-control unit 400 are cleared. Although we have described the operation for holding items, the same operation occurs for information on owned items. Specifically, the information on items in possession managed by the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power cut, but the information on displayed items in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the information on items in possession in the main control unit The display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 158, the main control unit 300 has possession information of the item "Medium defeat rate UP" as a result of a power outage restoration occurring while the item "Killing rate medium UP" is in possession and this item is displayed. An example is shown in which this item is not displayed (there is no display item).

Thereafter, when the cumulative points reach 1000, the main control unit 300 transmits information on the owned items (step S1323 in FIG. 129(a)). In the example of FIG. 158, an example is shown in which a "defeat rate small UP" item is acquired, and in this case, information is sent that the item possesses a "defeat rate medium UP" item and a "defeat rate small UP" item. . The first sub-control unit 400 executes item acquisition effects and updates of displayed items based on this information (step S3207 in FIG. 144). Here, if the possessed item and the display item do not match as shown in Figure 158, the oldest item among the possessed "defeat rate UP" items that are not displayed is displayed (Figure 158). 145 step S3325). In the example of FIG. 158, a production is performed in which the "medium UP" item, which is the oldest item that has not been displayed yet, is the oldest item among the "Medium UP" item and the "Small UP" item. It turns out. In the example of FIG. 158, it is shown that the "defeat rate medium UP" item has been added as a display item.

Further, in the example of FIG. 158, it is shown that the presentation state has subsequently shifted to a confrontation state. In this example, when carrying out an item usage effect in a confrontation state with a "Medium UP" item and a "Small UP" item in possession, and a "Medium UP" item as a displayed item. (In the confrontation state, an item acquisition effect may be performed, but it is omitted here for the sake of explanation.) First, this item usage effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 144). Here, since the "defeat rate medium UP" item is displayed, all "defeat rate UP" items are deleted and an effect is executed to display the probability of defeating the enemy character (defeat rate) (Figure 151 (d) to (f), bottom half of Figure 158). Note that the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the "defeat rate UP" item you have, so the defeat rate also reflects the "defeat rate small UP" item that is not displayed here (Figure 133 step S1615). In FIG. 158, an example is shown in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of the defeat rate of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 62%.

[How to add items in the event of a power outage and restoration (2)]
The operation when the performance states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described below with reference to FIG. 159. FIG. 159 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation when a power failure occurs in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, when the power is restored after a power outage, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power outage, while the display points in the first sub-control unit 400 are cleared. Although we have described the operation for holding items, the same operation occurs for information on owned items. Specifically, the information on items in possession managed by the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power cut, but the information on displayed items in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the information on items in possession in the main control unit The display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 159, the main control unit 300 has possession information of the item "Medium defeat rate UP" as a result of the power outage being restored while the item "Killing rate medium UP" is in possession and this item is displayed. An example is shown in which this item is not displayed (there is no display item).

Thereafter, when the cumulative points reach 1000, the main control unit 300 transmits information on the owned items (step S1323 in FIG. 129(a)). In the example of FIG. 159, an example is shown in which the "1 body destroyed" item is acquired, and in this case, information that the user possesses the "defeat rate medium UP" item and the "1 body destroyed" item is transmitted. The first sub-control unit 400 executes item acquisition effects and updates of displayed items based on this information (step S3207 in FIG. 144). Here, if the possessed item and the displayed item do not match as shown in Figure 159, the oldest item among the possessed "defeat rate UP" items that are not displayed is displayed (Figure 159). 145 step S3325). In the example shown in FIG. 159, an effect is executed in which the "Killing Rate Medium UP" item, which has not been displayed yet and is the oldest item, is acquired. In the example of FIG. 159, it is shown that the "defeat rate medium UP" item has been added as a display item.

Further, in the example of FIG. 159, it is shown that the presentation state has subsequently shifted to a confrontation state. In this example, there is an item that "destruction rate medium UP" and "one enemy destroyed" item as possession items, and there is an item "destruction rate medium UP" as a displayed item, and the item usage effect is executed in a confrontation state. (In the confrontation state, an item acquisition performance may be performed, but it is omitted here for the sake of explanation.) First, this item usage effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 144). Here, since the "defeat rate medium UP" item is displayed, all "defeat rate UP" items are deleted and an effect is executed to display the probability of defeating the enemy character (defeat rate) (Figure 151 (d) to (f), bottom half of Figure 159). Note that the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the "defeat rate UP" item that the player possesses (step S1615 in FIG. 133). In FIG. 159, an example is shown in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of the defeat rate of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 56%. Note that in this example, since the player possesses the item "Destroy one character," the victory of the main character in the first battle of the subsequent showdown is guaranteed.

[How to add items in the event of a power outage and restoration (3)]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 160, the operation when the presentation states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described. FIG. 160 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation when a power failure occurs in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, when the power is restored after a power outage, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power outage, while the display points in the first sub-control unit 400 are cleared. Although we have explained the operation for holding items, the same operation occurs for information on owned items. Specifically, the information on items in possession managed by the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power cut, but the information on displayed items in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the information on items in possession in the main control unit The display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 160, as a result of a power outage restoration occurring in a state in which two items with "medium UP in defeat rate" items are in possession and these items are displayed, the main control unit 300 indicates that the possession of an item with "medium UP in defeat rate" has occurred. An example is shown in which the item is not displayed (no display item) although there is information.

Thereafter, when the cumulative points reach 1000, the main control unit 300 transmits information on the owned items (step S1323 in FIG. 129(a)). In the example of FIG. 160, an example is shown in which a "defeat rate small UP" item is acquired, and in this case, information is sent that indicates that the item possesses two "defeat rate medium UP" items and a "defeat rate small UP" item. be done. The first sub-control unit 400 executes item acquisition effects and updates of displayed items based on this information (step S3207 in FIG. 144). Here, if the possessed item and the display item do not match as shown in Figure 160, the oldest item among the possessed "defeat rate UP" items that are not displayed is displayed (Figure 160). 145 step S3325). In the example shown in Figure 160, of the two "medium UP" item and "slightly UP" item, the effect is executed to obtain the "Medium UP" item, which is the oldest item that has not yet been displayed. will be done. In the example of FIG. 160, it is shown that the "defeat rate medium UP" item has been added as a display item.

Further, in the example of FIG. 160, it is shown that the presentation state has subsequently shifted to a confrontation state. In this example, there are two items in your possession, one with a "medium increase in defeat rate" and an item with a "small increase in defeat rate", and an item with a "medium increase in defeat rate" item as a display item, and an item usage effect in a confrontation state is performed. (In the confrontation state, an item acquisition effect may be executed, but it is omitted here for the sake of explanation.) First, this item usage effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 144). Here, since the "defeat rate medium UP" item is displayed, all "defeat rate UP" items are deleted and an effect is executed to display the probability of defeating the enemy character (defeat rate) (Figure 151 (d) to (f), bottom half of Figure 160). The defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the "defeat rate UP" items you have, so it also reflects the "medium defeat rate UP" and "slight defeat rate UP" items that are not displayed here. (Step S1615 in FIG. 133). In FIG. 160, an example is shown in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of the defeat rate of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 68%.

[How to add items in the event of a power outage and restoration (4)]
Hereinafter, using FIG. 161, an explanation will be given of the operation when the presentation states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match. FIG. 161 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation when a power failure occurs in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, when the power is restored after a power outage, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power outage, while the display points in the first sub-control unit 400 are cleared. Although we have explained the operation for holding items, the same operation occurs for information on owned items. Specifically, the information on items in possession managed by the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power cut, but the information on displayed items in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the information on items in possession in the main control unit The display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 161, as a result of a power outage and restoration occurring in a state in which the "1 body destroyed" item and "defeat rate medium UP" item were in possession and these items were displayed, the main control unit 300 displays the "1 body destroyed" item. An example is shown in which there is possession information for the item '' and the item ``Medium defeat rate UP'', but these items are not displayed (there is no displayed item).

Thereafter, when the cumulative points reach 1000, the main control unit 300 transmits information on the owned items (step S1323 in FIG. 129(a)). In the example of FIG. 161, an example is shown in which an item with "Small increase in defeat rate" is obtained. information will be sent. The first sub-control unit 400 executes item acquisition effects and updates of displayed items based on this information (step S3207 in FIG. 144). Here, if the possessed item and the displayed item do not match as shown in Figure 161, the oldest item among the possessed "defeat rate UP" items that are not displayed is displayed (Figure 161). 145 step S3325). In the example of FIG. 161, a production is executed in which the "medium UP defeat rate" item, which is the oldest item that has not yet been displayed, is selected from among the "medium UP defeat rate" item and the "slight UP" item. It turns out. In the example of FIG. 161, it is shown that the "defeat rate medium UP" item has been added as a display item.

Further, in the example of FIG. 161, it is shown that the presentation state has subsequently shifted to a confrontation state. In this example, in the confrontation state, there are "1 enemy destroyed" item, "defeat rate medium UP" item, "defeat rate small UP" item as the possessed items, and "defeat rate medium UP" item as the displayed item. A case in which an item use effect is executed will be explained (an item acquisition effect may be executed in a confrontation state, but will be omitted here for convenience of explanation). First, this item usage effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 144). Here, since the "defeat rate medium UP" item is displayed, all "defeat rate UP" items are deleted and an effect is executed to display the probability of defeating the enemy character (defeat rate) (Figure 151 (d) to (f), bottom half of Figure 161). Note that the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the "defeat rate UP" item you have, so the defeat rate also reflects the "defeat rate small UP" item that is not displayed here (Figure 133 step S1615). In FIG. 161, an example is shown in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of the defeat rate of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 62%. Note that in this example, since the player possesses the item "Destroy one character," the victory of the main character in the first battle of the subsequent showdown is guaranteed.

[How to add items in the event of a power outage and restoration (5)]
Hereinafter, using FIG. 162, an explanation will be given of the operation when the presentation states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match. FIG. 162 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation when a power failure occurs in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, when the power is restored after a power outage, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power outage, while the display points in the first sub-control unit 400 are cleared. Although we have explained the operation for holding items, the same operation occurs for information on owned items. Specifically, the information on items in possession managed by the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power cut, but the information on displayed items in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the information on items in possession in the main control unit The display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 162, as a result of a power outage and restoration occurring while the item ``Destroyed 1 body'' was in possession and this item was displayed, the main control unit 300 has possession information for the ``1 body destroyed'' item. An example is shown in which no items are displayed (no displayed items).

Thereafter, when the cumulative points reach 1000, the main control unit 300 transmits information on the owned items (step S1323 in FIG. 129(a)). In the example of FIG. 162, an example is shown in which a "defeat rate small UP" item is acquired, and in this case, information that the user possesses a "defeat 1 body" item and a "defeat rate small increase" item is transmitted. The first sub-control unit 400 executes item acquisition effects and updates of displayed items based on this information (step S3207 in FIG. 144). Here, if the possessed item and the display item do not match as shown in Figure 162, the oldest item among the possessed "defeat rate UP" items that are not displayed is displayed (Figure 162). 145 step S3325). In the example of FIG. 162, an effect will be executed in which the "killing rate small UP" item, which has not yet been displayed and is the oldest item, is acquired. In the example of FIG. 162, it is shown that the "defeat rate small UP" item has been added as a display item.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 162, it is shown that the presentation state has subsequently shifted to a confrontation state. In this example, when you have a "1 enemy destroyed" item and a "Small defeat rate UP" item as your possession items, and a "Small defeat rate UP" item as a displayed item, you are performing an item use effect in a confrontation state. (In the confrontation state, an item acquisition performance may be performed, but it is omitted here for the sake of explanation.) First, this item usage effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 144). Here, since the "defeat rate small UP" item is displayed, all "defeat rate UP" items are deleted and an effect is executed to display the probability of defeating the enemy character (defeat rate) (Figure 151 (d) to (f), bottom half of Figure 162). Note that the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the "defeat rate UP" item that the player possesses (step S1615 in FIG. 133). In FIG. 162, an example is shown in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of the defeat rate of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 56%. Note that in this example, since the player possesses the item "Destroy one character," the victory of the main character in the first battle of the subsequent showdown is guaranteed.

[How to add items in the event of a power outage and restoration (6)]
Hereinafter, using FIG. 163, an explanation will be given of the operation when the presentation states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match. FIG. 163 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation when a power failure occurs in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, when the power is restored after a power outage, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power outage, while the display points in the first sub-control unit 400 are cleared. Although we have explained the operation for holding items, the same operation occurs for information on owned items. Specifically, the information on items in possession managed by the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power cut, but the information on displayed items in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the information on items in possession in the main control unit The display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 163, the main control unit 300 has possession information of the item "Medium defeat rate UP" as a result of a power outage being restored while the item "Killing rate medium UP" is in possession and this item is displayed. An example is shown in which this item is not displayed (there is no display item). Further, it is shown that while the cumulative points of the main control unit 300 are maintained at 130 before and after the power is restored from the power outage, the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 are 0 after the power is restored. ing.

In the example of FIG. 163, it is shown that the performance state then transitioned to the confrontation state via the true precursor state. In the first game of this confrontation state, if the main control unit 300 has a surplus of accumulated points (135 in the example of FIG. 163), a process of acquiring an item is executed (step S1315 of FIG. 129(a)), and this acquisition Information on owned items including item information is transmitted (step S1323 in FIG. 129(a)). In the example of FIG. 163, an example is shown in which a "defeat rate? UP" item is acquired, and in this case, information that the "defeat rate medium UP" item and "defeat rate? UP" item are in possession is sent. . The first sub-control unit 400 executes item acquisition effects and updates of displayed items based on this information (step S3207 in FIG. 144). In the item acquisition performance in this confrontation state, the performance for the acquired item is executed regardless of whether the possessed item and the displayed item are in a mismatched state (Yes in step S3321 of FIG. 145). In the example of FIG. 163, a performance in which the "defeat rate? UP" item is acquired will be executed. In this respect, it is different from the item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 158) when the possessed item and the displayed item do not match in the normal state. The example in FIG. 163 shows that the "defeat rate? UP" item has been added as a display item.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 163, there are a "defeat rate medium UP" item and a "defeat rate? UP" item as possessed items, and a "defeat rate? UP" item is displayed as a displayed item. executed. This item usage effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 144). Here, since the "defeat rate? UP" item is displayed, all "defeat rate UP" items are erased and an effect is executed to display the probability of defeating the enemy character (defeat rate) (Figure 151 (d) to (f), bottom half of Figure 163). Note that the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the "defeat rate UP" item in your possession, so the defeat rate also reflects the "medium defeat rate UP" item that is not displayed here (Figure 133 step S1615). In FIG. 163, an example is shown in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of the defeat rate of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 62%.

[How to add items in the event of a power outage and restoration (7)]
Hereinafter, using FIG. 164, an explanation will be given of the operation when the presentation states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match. FIG. 164 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation when a power failure occurs in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, when the power is restored after a power outage, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power outage, while the display points in the first sub-control unit 400 are cleared. Although we have explained the operation for holding items, the same operation occurs for information on owned items. Specifically, the information on items in possession managed by the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power cut, but the information on displayed items in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the information on items in possession in the main control unit The display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 164, as a result of a power outage and restoration occurring in a state in which a "defeat rate medium UP" item and a "defeat rate small UP" item are in possession and these items are displayed, the main control unit 300 displays "defeat rate moderately UP". An example is shown in which there is possession information for a ``UP'' item and an ``Killing Rate Slight UP'' item, but these items are not displayed (there are no displayed items). Further, it is shown that while the cumulative points of the main control unit 300 are maintained at 130 before and after the power is restored from the power outage, the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 are 0 after the power is restored. ing.

In the example of FIG. 164, it is shown that the performance state then transitioned to the confrontation state via the true precursor state. In the first game of this confrontation state, if the main control unit 300 has a surplus of accumulated points (135 in the example of FIG. 164), a process of acquiring an item is executed (step S1315 of FIG. 129(a)), and this acquisition Information on owned items including item information is transmitted (step S1323 in FIG. 129(a)). In the example of FIG. 164, an example is shown in which a "defeat rate? UP" item is acquired, and in this case, a "defeat rate medium UP" item, a "defeat rate small UP" item, and a "defeat rate? UP" item are in possession. information will be sent. The first sub-control unit 400 executes item acquisition effects and updates of displayed items based on this information (step S3207 in FIG. 144). In the item acquisition performance in this confrontation state, the performance for the acquired item is executed regardless of whether the possessed item and the displayed item are in a mismatched state (Yes in step S3321 of FIG. 145). In the example of FIG. 164, a performance in which the "defeat rate? UP" item is acquired will be executed. In this respect, it is different from the item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 158) when the possessed item and the displayed item do not match in the normal state. The example in FIG. 164 shows that the "defeat rate? UP" item has been added as a display item.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 164, there are a "defeat rate medium UP" item and a "defeat rate? UP" item as possession items, and a "defeat rate? UP" item is displayed as a display item, and the item usage effect in the confrontation state is executed. This item usage effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 144). Here, since the "defeat rate? UP" item is displayed, all "defeat rate UP" items are erased and an effect is executed to display the probability of defeating the enemy character (defeat rate) (Figure 151 (d) to (f), bottom half of Figure 164). The defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the "defeat rate UP" items you have, so it also reflects the "medium defeat rate UP" and "slight defeat rate UP" items that are not displayed here. (Step S1615 in FIG. 133). In FIG. 164, an example is shown in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of the defeat rate of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 68%.

[How to add items in the event of a power outage and restoration (8)]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 165, the operation when the presentation states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a power failure occurs in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, when the power is restored after a power outage, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power outage, while the display points in the first sub-control unit 400 are cleared. Although we have explained the operation for holding items, the same operation occurs for information on owned items. Specifically, the information on items in possession managed by the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power cut, but the information on displayed items in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared, and the information on items in possession in the main control unit The display items of the first sub-control unit 400 do not match. In FIG. 165, as a result of a power outage restoration occurring in a state in which the item "Destroyed 1 body" was in possession and this item was displayed, the main control unit 300 has possession information for the "Destroyed 1 body" item, but this item is not displayed. An example is shown in which no items are displayed (no displayed items). Further, it is shown that while the cumulative points of the main control unit 300 are maintained at 130 before and after the power is restored from the power outage, the display points of the first sub-control unit 400 are 0 after the power is restored. ing.

In the example of FIG. 165, it is shown that the performance state then transitioned to the confrontation state via the true precursor state. In the first game of this confrontation state, if the main control unit 300 has a surplus of accumulated points (135 in the example of FIG. 165), a process of acquiring an item is executed (step S1315 of FIG. 129(a)), and this acquisition Information on owned items including item information is transmitted (step S1323 in FIG. 129(a)). In the example of FIG. 165, an example is shown in which the "defeat rate? UP" item is acquired, and in this case, information that the user possesses the "1 body destroyed" item and the "defeat rate? UP" item is transmitted. The first sub-control unit 400 executes item acquisition effects and updates of displayed items based on this information (step S3207 in FIG. 144). In the item acquisition performance in this confrontation state, the performance for the acquired item is executed regardless of whether the possessed item and the displayed item are in a mismatched state (Yes in step S3321 of FIG. 145). In the example of FIG. 165, a performance in which the "defeat rate? UP" item is acquired will be executed. In this respect, it is different from the item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 158) when the possessed item and the displayed item do not match in the normal state. The example in FIG. 165 shows that the "defeat rate? UP" item has been added as a display item.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 165, the item use effect in the confrontation state is executed with the item ``Destroy 1 body'' and the item ``Destroy rate UP'' as the possessed items, and the item ``Destroy rate UP'' as the display item. be done. This item usage effect is executed when the "defeat rate UP" item is displayed (step S3215 in FIG. 144). Here, since the "defeat rate? UP" item is displayed, all "defeat rate UP" items are erased and an effect is executed to display the probability of defeating the enemy character (defeat rate) (Figure 151 (d) to (f), bottom half of Figure 165). Note that the defeat rate displayed at this time is derived from the "defeat rate UP" item that the player possesses (step S1615 in FIG. 133). In FIG. 165, an example is shown in which 6% is added for each "defeat rate UP" item to the initial value of the defeat rate of 50%, resulting in a total defeat rate of 56%. Note that, in this example, since the player possesses the "destroy one character" item, the victory of the main character in the first battle of the subsequent showdown is guaranteed (see the right side of FIG. 165).

[How to add items in the event of a power outage and restoration (9)]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 166, the operation when the presentation states of the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 do not match will be described. FIG. 166 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation when a power failure occurs in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, when the power is restored after a power outage, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power outage, while the display points in the first sub-control unit 400 are cleared. We have explained the operation. Similarly, in the example of FIG. 166, the cumulative point of the main control unit 300 is maintained at 130 before and after the power is restored, while the display point of the first sub-control unit 400 becomes 0 after the power is restored. It is shown that Note that in this example, the user does not have any items at the time of the power outage.

In the example of FIG. 166, it is shown that the performance state then transitioned to the confrontation state via the true precursor state. In the first game of this confrontation state, if the main control unit 300 has a surplus of accumulated points (130 in the example of FIG. 166), a process of acquiring an item is executed (step S1315 of FIG. 129(a)), and this acquisition Information on owned items including item information is transmitted (step S1323 in FIG. 129(a)). In the example of FIG. 166, an example is shown in which the "1 body destroyed" item is acquired, and in this case, information that the user possesses the "1 body destroyed" item is transmitted. The first sub-control unit 400 executes item acquisition effects and updates of displayed items based on this information (step S3207 in FIG. 144). However, a configuration is adopted in which the item acquisition effect in this confrontation state is not executed when the display point is 0 (No in step S3205 in FIG. 144). The example in FIG. 166 shows that although the item "Destroy 1 body" has been acquired, it is not displayed.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 166, although there is an item "Destroy 1 body" as a possessed item, since there is nothing displayed as an item, the display of using the item in the confrontation state is not executed, and the display of confrontation is started. In the example of FIG. 166, it is shown that the first game of the confrontation effect is executed in the second game of the confrontation state. Note that in this example, since the player possesses the item "Destroy one character," the victory of the main character in the first battle of the subsequent showdown is guaranteed.

[About features of this embodiment and other possible configurations (1)]
The slot machine 100 of this embodiment has a configuration in which cumulative points are acquired as the game progresses, items are acquired according to the cumulative points, and an item acquisition performance is performed at that time. When an item is used, it becomes easier to shift to an AT state that is advantageous to the player, so the interest in the game can be improved depending on the degree of cumulative points acquired. In addition, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the cumulative points increase (count up) as the game progresses, but for example, when 1000 points are subtracted (counted down) and become 0 points, an item is obtained. The point update is not limited to addition. Further, the initial value and target value can also be set as appropriate. That is, it is sufficient if the value of the provided counter is updated in a direction closer to the target value.

Furthermore, the items obtained when the points reach the target value may be items that bring an advantageous state to the player like the items in this embodiment, or items that provide information about the game machine. Alternatively, some kind of effect may be executed like the item acquisition effect of this embodiment.

Further, in this embodiment, a display point is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and this display point is updated to the same value as the cumulative point, and the value of this display point is displayed on the effect image display device 157. In this way, a configuration is adopted in which the value of the cumulative points is displayed indirectly. Note that although this embodiment adopts a configuration in which the initial value and update amount of the display points are the same as the cumulative points, the display points are not limited to this configuration, and the display points can be updated to the same value as the cumulative points. Any configuration is fine. The display points are managed by the first sub-control unit 400, and are cleared to the initial value (0) when power is restored after a power failure. On the other hand, the cumulative points are managed by the main control unit 300, and the value is maintained even if the power is interrupted or restored (unless a reset process is involved). Due to this difference in operation, when power is restored after power failure, the cumulative points and display points become inconsistent (the value of the cumulative points differs from the value displayed on the effect image display device 157). However, since item acquisition is based on cumulative points, items may be acquired even if the points (display points) displayed on the effect image display device 157 are less than 1000. By adopting a configuration such as this configuration in which when a certain condition (in this embodiment, power is restored after a power failure) is met, the cumulative points and displayed points do not match, the displayed points (displayed points) Even when the value is less than (or more than) the target value, it is possible to expect that an event such as item acquisition will occur.

In addition, in the above explanation, the case where the cumulative point value is maintained even if the power is restored after a power outage is explained, but when the power is restored after a power outage, there is a case where a reset process is required (in this embodiment, the RAM clear button is is pressed and the setting is changed), and in this case, the value of the cumulative points is cleared to the initial value (0) after the power is restored after power outage (step S1009 in FIG. 126, step S1101 in FIG. 127). . In this case, even if a power failure occurs, the cumulative points and the displayed points will match. In other words, the states after power restoration after power interruption include a state in which the cumulative points and display points match (accompanied by reset processing) and a state in which they do not match (involving no reset processing). Therefore, for example, if a power outage occurs at all gaming machines in the store as the store closes and starts business, the state of the gaming machines can be changed, and players can understand the state of the gaming machines. It can be made difficult to do. In addition, as a state after power restoration when accompanied by reset processing, a configuration in which the initial value of the display point is different from the initial value of the cumulative point (for example, the initial value of the display point is determined randomly, Alternatively, the initial value may be a value obtained by adding a predetermined value to the initial value of the cumulative points. In this case, the cumulative points and the displayed points will be inconsistent both with and without reset processing, making it difficult for the player to grasp the state of the gaming machine.

In this embodiment, compared to the update amount of the cumulative points when the performance state is the normal state, the update amount of the cumulative points when the performance state is the point specialization A state, the point specialization B state, or the omen state is larger. (Figure 136(b)). Although it is not necessarily necessary to adopt a configuration in which the update amount of cumulative points differs depending on the state, providing such a state can add variety to the game and improve the interest of the game, or Even if the number of points is small, if the amount of updates is large, the player may be expected to continue playing the game with great enthusiasm.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a power outage/recovery occurs while the production state is the point specialization A state, the normal states of the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 become inconsistent, which causes the cumulative The updated amounts of points and display points become different (step S3105 in FIG. 143(a), FIG. 156, and FIG. 157). In this case, although it appears that the player is at a disadvantage due to the change in the updated amount of displayed points (display points), the situation is actually advantageous to the player. In this way, if a power outage is restored when the player is at an advantage in updating the cumulative points and display points, the amount of updated points (display points) that will be displayed after the power is restored will be updated before the power outage. By making this different, it is possible to hide a situation that is actually advantageous to the player. Furthermore, players who are aware of this configuration can be made to expect that even if the situation appears to be disadvantageous, it may actually be an advantageous situation. Note that this embodiment employs a configuration in which the above operation occurs when power is restored after a power outage in the point specialization A state. The above-mentioned operation may be made to occur when the power is restored after power interruption in state B). Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a power outage is restored in the point specialization A state, the background of the normal state is displayed instead of the background of the point specialization A state, which is actually advantageous to the player. This further enhances the effect of hiding the current state (step S3009 in FIG. 142).

Furthermore, this embodiment employs a configuration in which when the setting value is changed, the initial state changes to the point specialization A state and then changes to the normal state. That is, the configuration is such that after the setting is changed, the update amount of the cumulative points becomes advantageous before the player becomes disadvantageous. In this case, if the settings are left unchanged after the settings have been changed, there is a risk that the player, who sees that the point specialization A state has been entered, will know whether or not the settings have been changed. However, in the present embodiment, by causing the power outage to be restored at the time of transition to the point specialization A state, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not a setting change has been made.

[About the features of this embodiment and other possible configurations (2)]
The slot machine 100 of this embodiment has a configuration in which cumulative points are acquired as the game progresses, and when an item is acquired according to the cumulative points, an item acquisition effect is executed and the item is displayed. In addition, when using an item, a configuration is adopted in which an item usage effect using the displayed item is executed. When an item is used, it becomes easier to shift to an AT state that is advantageous to the player, so it is possible to make the player look forward to acquiring the item and improve the interest in the game. In addition, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which items are acquired according to the cumulative points, but for example, it is also possible to conduct a lottery for acquiring items for each game, or to conduct an item lottery according to internal winning combinations. The conditions for acquiring the item are not limited. Furthermore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the player can easily shift to an advantageous AT state by using an item, but the effect of this item is not to bring about an advantageous state to the player. Alternatively, information regarding the game machine may be obtained.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, information on items displayed in the first sub-control unit 400 is managed, and this information is updated to the same information as information on owned items managed in the main control unit 300. In addition, by displaying information on the displayed item on the effect image display device 157, a configuration is adopted in which the status of the held item is indirectly displayed. Note that although this embodiment adopts a configuration in which information on all owned items is sent and the information on the displayed items is made the same as the information on the items in the possession, the configuration is not limited to this configuration. Any configuration is sufficient as long as the information on the item can be updated to the same information as the information on the owned item.

The displayed item information will be cleared when the power is restored after a power outage, but the information on the items you own will remain the same even if the power is restored (unless a reset process is involved) ). With this operation, the held item will no longer be displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the event of power failure and power restoration. In this case, even though there is information about the item that the player owns, if the item usage effect is continued as it is, there is a risk that the player will feel uncomfortable. In this embodiment, by re-displaying the item that has ceased to be displayed at the timing when a new item is acquired in the normal state, it is possible to perform the item usage effect without feeling any discomfort (FIGS. 158 to 161). Note that the timing of redisplay is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment, but if the timing of the item use effect is determined in advance, it may be redisplayed earlier. In any case, any configuration is sufficient as long as the item that was displayed before the power outage is re-displayed between the time the power is restored and the item usage effect is executed. If there are multiple items that are not displayed due to a power outage, you can redisplay a large number of items at once by redisplaying fewer items than this number. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable due to the display (FIG. 160). In addition, as in this embodiment, by determining the content displayed in the item usage effect and the advantage (defeat rate) for the player based on the items in possession, there may be items that are not displayed among the items in possession. It is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous situation.

Note that in this embodiment, the "defeat rate UP" item is subject to redisplay, while the "defeat 1 body" item is not subject to redisplay. In this way, items may be set to be redisplayed and items not to be redisplayed, or a configuration may be adopted in which items are uniformly redisplayed. Further, in this embodiment, items to be redisplayed are targeted for item use effects, while items that are not targets for redisplay are not subjected to item use effects. With this configuration, by redisplaying the item that is the target of the item use effect, it may be possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort.

Note that by redisplaying items that are no longer displayed due to a power outage at the timing of the item acquisition performance as in this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable when redisplaying them. Furthermore, by storing information about acquired items, it may be possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage.

Note that, for example, in the case of a configuration in which the item held by the main control unit 300 changes to a more advantageous item based on an internally won condition device, the above-described configuration for redisplaying items can be adopted. In this case, the re-displayed item may be more advantageous and the game may be more interesting. Note that in this configuration, the items displayed before the power outage and the items displayed after the power outage are displayed differently.

[About the features of this embodiment and other possible configurations (3)]
The slot machine 100 of this embodiment has a configuration in which cumulative points are acquired as the game progresses, and when an item is acquired according to the cumulative points, an item acquisition effect is executed and the item is displayed. In addition, when using an item, a configuration is adopted in which an item usage effect using the displayed item is executed. When an item is used, it becomes easier to shift to an AT state that is advantageous to the player, so it is possible to make the player look forward to acquiring the item and improve the interest in the game. In addition, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which items are acquired according to the cumulative points, but for example, it is also possible to conduct a lottery for acquiring items for each game, or to conduct an item lottery according to internal winning combinations. The conditions for acquiring the item are not limited. Furthermore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the player can easily shift to an advantageous AT state by using an item, but the effect of this item is not to bring about an advantageous state to the player. Alternatively, information regarding the game machine may be obtained.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the information on the items displayed in the first sub-control unit 400 is managed, and this information is updated to the same information as the information on the possessed items managed in the main control unit 300. In addition, by displaying information on the displayed item on the effect image display device 157, a configuration is adopted in which the status of the held item is indirectly displayed. Note that although this embodiment adopts a configuration in which information on all items in possession is sent and the information on the displayed items is the same as the information on the items in possession, the configuration is not limited to this configuration. Any configuration is sufficient as long as the information on the item can be updated to the same information as the information on the owned item.

The displayed item information will be cleared when the power is restored after a power outage, but the information on the items you own will remain the same even if the power is restored (unless a reset process is involved) ). With this operation, the held item will no longer be displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the event of a power failure and power restoration. In this case, even though there is information about the item that the player owns, if the item usage effect is continued as it is, there is a risk that the player will feel uncomfortable. In the present embodiment, an opportunity to acquire a new item is provided in the first game of the confrontation state, and a configuration is adopted in which items used for item usage effects can be displayed (step S1315 in FIG. 129(a)). With this configuration, it is possible to create a state in which the player does not feel uncomfortable even if the item usage effect is executed thereafter (FIGS. 163 to 165).

In addition, in this embodiment, the types of items that can be obtained in the confrontation state are different from the types of items that can be obtained in the normal state, so there is a risk that a feeling of discomfort may arise when items that are not displayed in the confrontation state are redisplayed. There is. Therefore, the items that are shown to have been acquired in the item acquisition performance in the confrontation state are items that were acquired in the confrontation state, not the items that are no longer displayed due to power failure and restoration. Note that the timing of item acquisition and item acquisition performance is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment, but if the timing of item use performance is determined in advance, it may be earlier than this. In any case, between the time when the item that was displayed before the power outage disappears due to power restoration and the time when the item use effect is executed, the item acquisition effect is executed for the newly acquired item and the item is displayed. Any configuration that can be displayed is sufficient. Note that in this embodiment, regardless of the number of items that are not displayed due to a power outage, only one item can be obtained and one item can be displayed in the confrontation state. With this configuration, if there are multiple items that are not displayed, a smaller number of items will be newly displayed. If new items could be acquired to match the number of items that are not displayed, there is a risk that the player's interests would be unbalanced or that the player would feel uncomfortable. If the number of newly displayed items is made smaller than the number of items that are not displayed, it may be possible to prevent the item usage effect from feeling strange. In addition, as in this embodiment, by determining the content displayed in the item use effect and the advantage (defeating rate) for the player based on the items in possession, there may be items that are not displayed among the items in possession. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged even if the player

Note that in this embodiment, the "defeat rate UP" item is targeted for item usage performance, while the "defeat 1 body" item is not targeted for item usage performance. In this way, instead of a configuration in which all items are subject to item use effects, it is also possible to provide items that are subject to item use effects and items that are not. Note that in this embodiment, the "defeat rate UP" item, which is the target of the item usage performance, may be displayed as an item acquisition performance in a confrontation state (FIGS. 163 to 165). With this configuration, when there is an item that is not displayed, the item that is the target of the item use effect can be displayed, and the item use effect can be performed without any discomfort. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the item that is the target of the item use effect may not be displayed due to a power outage and restoration, but the contents of the item use effect may not be displayed regardless of whether or not the item that is the target of the item use effect is displayed. (Fig. 163, Fig. 164). With this configuration, even if the item that is the target of the item use effect is not displayed due to a power outage and restoration, it may be possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, the configuration executes the item acquisition performance for the newly acquired item and displays the item after the item that was displayed before the power outage disappears due to power restoration and before the item usage performance is executed. In doing so, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which an item of the same type as the item displayed before the power outage is newly acquired. As a specific example, it may be configured such that when the "defeat rate small UP" item is no longer displayed, a "defeat rate medium UP" item is newly acquired.

[About features of this embodiment and other possible configurations (4)]
The slot machine 100 of this embodiment has a configuration in which cumulative points are acquired as the game progresses, and when an item is acquired according to the cumulative points, an item acquisition effect is executed and the item is displayed. Acquiring an item makes it easier for the player to shift to an advantageous AT state, so it is possible to make the player look forward to acquiring the item and increase the interest in the game. In addition, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the cumulative points increase (count up) as the game progresses, but for example, when 1000 points are subtracted (counted down) and become 0 points, an item is obtained. The point update is not limited to addition. Further, the initial value and target value can also be set as appropriate. That is, it is sufficient if the value of the provided counter is updated in a direction closer to the target value. Furthermore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which items are acquired according to the cumulative points, but for example, it is also possible to conduct a lottery to acquire items for each game, or to conduct an item lottery according to internal winning combinations. The conditions for acquiring the item are not limited. Furthermore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the player can easily shift to an advantageous AT state by using an item, but the effect of this item is not to bring about an advantageous state to the player. Alternatively, information regarding the gaming machine may be obtained.

Further, in this embodiment, a display point is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and this display point is updated to the same value as the cumulative point, and the value of this display point is displayed on the effect image display device 157. By doing so, a configuration is adopted in which the value of the cumulative points is displayed indirectly. Note that although this embodiment adopts a configuration in which the initial value and update amount of the display points are the same as the cumulative points, the display points are not limited to this configuration, and it is also possible to update the display points to the same value as the cumulative points. Any configuration is fine. The display points are managed by the first sub-control unit 400, and are cleared to the initial value (0) when power is restored after power failure. On the other hand, the cumulative points are managed by the main control unit 300, and the value is maintained even if the power is interrupted and restored (except when reset processing is involved). Due to this difference in operation, when power is restored after a power outage, the cumulative points and display points become inconsistent (the value of the cumulative points differs from the value displayed on the effect image display device 157). However, since item acquisition is based on cumulative points, items may be acquired even if the points (display points) displayed on the effect image display device 157 are less than 1000. Here, when the display point is 0, a configuration is adopted in which the item acquisition effect is not executed when an item is acquired (FIG. 166). Like this configuration, by setting up cases where the item acquisition effect is executed and cases where it is not executed when an item is acquired, it is possible to know that the item has been acquired even when the item acquisition effect is not executed. It can make you look forward to it.

Note that, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the item acquisition effect is not performed even if the item is acquired, on the condition that the display point is 0. Even if the display point is 0, if the item acquisition effect is performed, there is a possibility that the user will feel uncomfortable. However, by adopting a configuration in which it is determined whether or not to perform the item acquisition effect according to some value that is displayed, as in the configuration of this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable. Furthermore, when the display point is 0, it also means that the value of the display point has not changed after the power is restored after a power outage, and by not performing the item acquisition effect in such a case, it is difficult to cause a sense of discomfort. There are cases where it is possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of games is set for transition to the true precursor state, and the number of games for transition from there to the confrontation state is separately set. In other words, it can be said that the timing of transition to the confrontation state is set based on the number of games. Furthermore, in this confrontation state, a new item may be acquired in the first game. These configurations can be said to be configurations in which items may be acquired based on the number of elapsed games. By combining this configuration with a configuration in which there are times when an item acquisition effect is executed when an item is acquired, and times when it is not executed, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the number of games while hoping that the item is acquired. .

Note that a difference may be provided in the advantage of the item to be acquired depending on whether or not the item acquisition effect is executed when the item is acquired. For example, the configuration may be such that the acquired item is more advantageous when the item acquisition effect is not executed than when the item acquisition effect is executed. With this configuration, expectations can be increased even when the item acquisition effect is not executed.

In addition, as in this embodiment, by determining the content displayed in the item usage effect and the advantage (defeat rate) for the player based on the items in possession, there may be items that are not displayed among the items in possession. It is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous situation.

[About features of this embodiment and other possible configurations (5)]
In this embodiment, if the state shifts to a confrontation state with an item hidden due to a power outage, the hidden item will not be displayed, but the defeat rate will include this hidden item in the item usage performance. is derived, so the player is not at a disadvantage. Here, unlike this embodiment, when a confrontation state is entered with an item hidden due to a power outage, this item is displayed before the item is erased by the item usage effect. You can also use it as An example of this configuration will be described below using FIG. 167. This figure is a diagram showing an example of redisplaying a hidden item before using (erasing) the item.

In FIG. 167, it is assumed that the state shifts to a confrontation state in the same manner as in FIG. 164, and an item acquisition effect is executed. Specifically, as a result of a power outage and restoration occurring while the cumulative points are 130 and the user has an item with "Medium UP in defeat rate" and an item with "Small UP in defeat rate," the main control unit 300 receives this information. is maintained, but the display shows that there are no items and no cumulative points, and then the presentation state changes to the showdown state via the true precursor state, and the item acquisition performance based on the cumulative points changes to a "destruction rate". ?UP" item is acquired.

In the example shown in FIG. 164, the item use effect is executed in the next game, the defeat rate is displayed at the third stop, and the "defeat rate UP" item is deleted (see Figures 151(d) to (f)). ). At this time, the hidden "Medium UP" item and "Small UP" item are not redisplayed. On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 167, the item acquisition performance and redisplay are executed for the hidden "medium UP" item and "slight UP" item at the timing of the next game start operation, and the third After the defeat rate is displayed when the game stops, all "defeat rate UP" items are deleted. The lower half of FIG. 167 shows changes in the display and non-display of items in this game.

Note that in the example shown in FIG. 167, items that are hidden due to a power outage are redisplayed at a different timing than usual; however, the configuration is not limited to this example; It is good also as a structure where it is provided. With this configuration, since there are multiple display timings of items, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 167, the timing of item display is after the third stop operation (display associated with item acquisition), and when the timing is after the game start operation (display of hidden items in confrontation state) There are two ways. In other words, there are cases where the stop operation in the game has finished (after the third stop operation) and cases where it has not finished yet (after the start operation and before the third stop operation), and not only at the end of the game, but also during the game. By displaying other items, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, in the example of FIG. 167, the frequency of item display at the end of the game is higher than the frequency of item display during the game, which may surprise the player during the game. In addition, as in the example in FIG. 167, by making the item display in a game where the item use effect is executed and by associating one of the multiple display timings, the item display at this timing can be adjusted. It may be possible to improve expectations. In addition, as in the example in Figure 167, by associating one of multiple display timings with the timing for redisplaying items that have been hidden due to a power outage, it is possible to create expectations regarding the display of items at this timing. may be able to improve. In addition, in the example in Fig. 167, depending on the item display timing, the number of displayed items may be one (item display based on cumulative points), or one or more (redisplay of hidden items). ) However, by having a configuration in which the number of items displayed differs depending on a plurality of display timings, it may be possible to improve expectations regarding item display.

[About features of this embodiment and other possible configurations (6)]
As explained above in [About handling of points when power is restored after power outage] and [About handling of items when power is restored after power outage (1)], in this embodiment, When a power failure occurs, the state of the main control unit 300 returns to the state before the power failure, while the display points and display items in the first sub-control unit 400 are cleared. Furthermore, if a power outage occurs while the performance state is the point specialization A state, the performance in the normal state will be executed after power is restored. FIG. 168(a) shows that the display points and display items before the power outage (FIG. 168(a1)) are cleared after the power is restored (FIG. 168(a2)). Further, it is shown that the point specialization A state effect that was being executed before the power outage is changed to the normal state effect after the power is restored.

With the above configuration, for example, the state of the slot machine 100 at the end of business can be difficult to grasp at the start of business the next day. However, for example, if a power outage occurs due to a lightning strike during a game, the display after the power is restored will not match the display before the power outage, which may confuse players or reduce their desire to play. be. Therefore, if a power outage occurs while any of the reels 110 to 112 are rotating (during a game), the display after the power is restored will match the display before the power outage. good. FIG. 168(b) shows that the display points and display items before the power outage (FIG. 168(b1)) are still displayed after the power is restored (FIG. 168(b2)). Furthermore, it is shown that the point specialization A state effect that was being executed before the power outage is being executed even after the power is restored. In addition, in this example, the words "Reels are spinning" are displayed in the center of the screen so that you can understand that the game is in progress after the power is restored, but this display may not be displayed. . In addition, in the example of FIG. 168(b), the display points, display items, and background are the same before and after the power is restored, but some of these displays are Even if the display before and after power restoration is made to match, it may be possible to prevent confusion and a decrease in the desire to play. That is, if a power outage occurs while any of the reels 110 to 112 are rotating (during a game), the display before the power outage will be displayed after the power is restored, and all reels 110 to 112 will be stopped. In such a case, a display different from the display before the power outage may be displayed after the power is restored. In this case, the target display is not limited to a display that includes all of the display points, display items, and background as in the example of FIG. 168, but may be a display that includes any of these.

In order to realize the above operation, for example, in this embodiment, the information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared due to a power outage, so when the reels 110 to 112 resume rotation when the power is restored, information from the main control unit 300 Information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the state before the power cutoff may be restored based on this information. In addition, if the information in the first sub-control unit 400 is not cleared due to a power outage, the information in the first sub-control unit 400 is maintained when the reels 110 to 112 restart rotation when the power is restored; The above operation can also be realized by a configuration in which the information in the first sub-control unit 400 is cleared if it is not necessary. Note that the configuration for realizing the above operation is not particularly limited.

≪Others≫
In the embodiment using FIGS. 117 to 168, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game machine, but the invention is not limited to this, and game balls ( For example, it can be applied to slot machines using pachinko balls (pachinko balls) as a game medium, pachinko machines, arranged ball gaming machines, rock-paper-scissors gaming machines, smart balls, and the like.

Note that a slot machine is a slot machine that operates on a mobile terminal (smartphone, game console) or computer by a program that simulates the operation based on the above configuration, and that only exchanges electronic data without using medals. In this case, the game medium includes electronic data equivalent to medals, and the game medium is input by inputting the computerized data from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). Paying out game media includes outputting electronic data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although this embodiment has been described above using FIGS. 117 to 168, it is not limited to the embodiment described above, and various modifications and changes can be made without departing from the gist of the technical idea. can. It can be said that those involving such transformations and changes are based on the same technical idea and are included in the same technical scope. Furthermore, the functions and effects described in the embodiments are merely a list of the most suitable functions and effects, and the functions and effects are not limited to those described in the embodiments.

≪Correspondence between the structure of the invention and the embodiments≫
The configuration of the invention described in the explanation using FIGS. 117 to 168 above will be described below with reference to the corresponding configuration.

In the above explanation,
a first updating means (e.g., main control unit 300) capable of updating the value of a first counter (e.g., cumulative points) toward a predetermined value (e.g., 1000) according to the progress of the game;
a second updating means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of updating the value of the second counter (for example, display points) according to the progress of the game;
a display means (for example, effect image display device 157) capable of displaying the value of the second counter;
A game machine comprising:
The display means is
A predetermined effect (for example, an item acquisition effect during a normal state) can be displayed based on the value of the first counter reaching the predetermined value,
The second updating means is
When the value of the first counter is updated, the value of the second counter is updated to the same value as the value of the first counter (for example, FIG. 155), and the value of the first counter There are cases where the value of the second counter is not updated to the same value as (for example, FIGS. 156 and 157),
A game machine characterized by the following is described (see [Regarding features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted (1)]).

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with a state setting means (e.g. main control unit 300) capable of setting a first state (e.g. normal state) and a second state different from the first state (e.g. point specialization A state),
The second state is a state in which the amount of update of the value of the first counter is likely to be larger than in the first state.
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When a power failure occurs in the second state, the amount of update of the value of the first counter and the amount of update of the value of the second counter become different (for example, as shown in FIG. 143(a)) Step S3105, FIG. 156, FIG. 157),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The display means is
A first background (for example, the background in the normal state in FIG. 147(d)) can be displayed in the first state,
It is possible to display a second background in the second state (for example, the background of the point specialization A state in FIG. 147(c));
When a power outage is restored in the second state, the first background is displayed (for example, when a power outage is restored in a point specialization A state, the background of the point specialization A state is not displayed). is a means capable of displaying the background in the normal state (step S3009 in FIG. 142);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with advantage setting means (for example, main control unit 300) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values with different advantages,
The state setting means includes:
When the setting value is changed, the second state is set before the first state is set (for example, when the setting value is changed, the point specialization A state is changed from the initial state. (configuration that becomes normal state),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In the above explanation,
A first updating means (e.g., capable of updating the value of the first counter (e.g., cumulative points) from an initial value (e.g., 0) toward a predetermined value (e.g., 1000) in accordance with the progress of the game; , main control unit 300),
a second updating means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of updating the value of the second counter (for example, display points) according to the progress of the game;
a display means (for example, effect image display device 157) capable of displaying the value of the second counter;
A game machine comprising:
The display means is
A predetermined effect (for example, an item acquisition effect during a normal state) can be displayed based on the value of the first counter reaching the predetermined value,
The second updating means is
When the value of the first counter is updated, the value of the second counter is updated to the same value as the value of the first counter (for example, FIG. 155), and the value of the first counter There are cases where the value of the second counter is not updated to the same value as (for example, FIGS. 156 and 157),
The first updating means includes:
A device that may or may not be accompanied by a reset process after the power is restored after a power outage (for example, a reset process is required when the RAM clear button is pressed or a setting change is made),
If a reset process is required after the power is restored after a power outage, the value of the first counter is set to the initial value, whereas if a reset process is not required after the power is restored, the value of the first counter before the power outage is set to the initial value. (For example, if a reset process is involved, the cumulative points are set to 0 in step S1009 in FIG. 126 and step S1101 in FIG. 127),
The second updating means is
After the power is restored from a power outage, the value of the second counter is set to the initial value or an initial value different from the initial value (for example, in the first sub-control unit 400, the display point is set to 0 after the power is restored from the power outage). , so that the cumulative points and display points match, or the initial value of the display points is different from the initial value of the cumulative points so that the cumulative points and display points do not match).
A game machine characterized by the following is described (see [Regarding features of the present embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted (1)]).

Further, the game machine described above,
The second updating means is
After the power is restored from the power outage, the value of the second counter is set to the initial value (for example, the display point becomes 0 in the first sub-control unit 400 after the power is restored from the power outage);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with a state setting means (e.g. main control unit 300) capable of setting a first state (e.g. normal state) and a second state different from the first state (e.g. point specialization A state),
The second state is a state in which the amount of update of the value of the first counter is likely to be larger than in the first state.
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When a power failure occurs in the second state, the amount of update of the value of the first counter and the amount of update of the value of the second counter become different (for example, as shown in FIG. 143(a)) Step S3105, FIG. 156, FIG. 157),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The display means is
A first background (for example, the background in the normal state in FIG. 147(d)) can be displayed in the first state,
It is possible to display a second background in the second state (for example, the background of the point specialization A state in FIG. 147(c));
When a power outage is restored in the second state, the first background is displayed (for example, when a power outage is restored in a point specialization A state, the background of the point specialization A state is not displayed). is a means capable of displaying the background in the normal state (step S3009 in FIG. 142);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with advantage setting means (for example, main control unit 300) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values with different advantages,
The state setting means includes:
When the setting value is changed, the second state is set before the first state is set (for example, when the setting value is changed, the point specialization A state is changed from the initial state. (configuration that becomes normal state),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In the above explanation,
Display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
A storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information on the acquired items (for example, "defeat rate UP" item, "1 object defeated"item);
A game machine comprising:
The display means is
Based on the information on the item acquisition, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 149) indicating that the item has been acquired,
It is possible to display the item that is shown to have been acquired in the item acquisition performance (for example, the "defeat rate small UP" item acquired in FIG. 149(e) is displayed in FIG. 149(f)),
A means capable of executing an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 151(d) to (f)) using the displayed item,
The storage means is a means for maintaining the state in which the information of the item before the power outage is stored when the power is restored after the power outage (for example, in FIG. No change in item information),
The display means is means that, when the power is restored after a power outage, does not display the item that was displayed before the power outage (for example, in FIG. 158, the item that was displayed before the power outage is ” item is not in the display item column after power is restored),
The display means is a means that can re-display the item that was displayed before the power outage between when the power is restored and when the item use effect is executed (for example, in FIG. 158, the item use effect is The item acquisition effect was executed before, and the "Killing Rate Medium UP" item that was displayed before the power outage was added to the display item column again).
A game machine characterized by the following is described (see (2) regarding the features of this embodiment and other possible configurations).

Further, the game machine described above,
The items include items that are to be redisplayed on the display means (for example, "kill rate UP" item) and items that are not to be redisplayed on the display means (for example, "1 body destroyed" item). be,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Items that are not subject to re-display on the display means are items that are not used in the item usage performance (for example, the "Destroy 1 body" item is not used in the item usage performance);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the item acquisition performance that is executed between the time when the power is restored and the item usage performance is executed, the display means displays the item after indicating that the item that was displayed before the power outage has been acquired. (For example, in FIG. 158, the "Defeat Rate Medium UP" item that was displayed before the power outage is displayed again by the item acquisition effect),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The display means executes the item acquisition performance based on information on acquiring a new item between when the power is restored and when the item use performance is executed, and displays the item acquisition performance before the power is cut off in the item acquisition performance. This is a means that can redisplay the item after indicating that the item has been acquired (for example, in FIG. 158, the item acquisition effect is executed by acquiring the "defeat rate small UP" item). However, the "Medium Defeat Rate UP" item that was displayed before the power outage will be displayed again).
The storage means is a means capable of storing information on the new item (in FIG. 158, the "Small Defeat Rate UP" item is added to the Possession Items column);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In the above explanation,
Display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
A storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information on the acquired items (for example, "defeat rate UP" item, "1 object defeated"item);
A game machine comprising:
The display means is
Based on the information on the item acquisition, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 149) indicating that the item has been acquired,
It is possible to display the item that is shown to have been acquired in the item acquisition performance (for example, the "defeat rate small UP" item acquired in FIG. 149(e) is displayed in FIG. 149(f)),
A means capable of executing an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 151(d) to (f)) using the displayed item,
The storage means is a means for maintaining the state in which the information of the item before the power outage is stored when the power is restored after the power outage (for example, in FIG. No change in item information),
The display means is means that, when the power is restored after a power outage, does not display the items that were displayed before the power outage (for example, in FIG. 160, the two items that were displayed before the power outage are ``Medium UP'' item is not in the display item column after power outage restoration),
The display means is
Between the time the power is restored and the item use effect is executed, the item that was displayed before the power outage can be redisplayed (for example, in FIG. 160, the item acquisition effect is performed before the item use effect). This has been executed, and one of the two "Medium Defeat Rate UP" items that were displayed before the power outage has been added to the display item column again).
If there are a plurality of items that are not displayed due to a power outage, this means that fewer than this number of items are redisplayed at one time (for example, in FIG. 160, before the power outage One of the two "Medium Defeat Rate UP" items that were displayed will be displayed again).
A game machine characterized by the following is described (see (2) regarding the features of this embodiment and other possible configurations).

Further, the game machine described above,
The items include items that are to be redisplayed on the display means (for example, "kill rate UP" item) and items that are not to be redisplayed on the display means (for example, "1 body destroyed" item). be,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Items that are not subject to re-display on the display means are items that are not used in the item usage performance (for example, the "Destroy 1 body" item is not used in the item usage performance);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the item acquisition performance that is executed between the time when the power is restored and the item usage performance is executed, the display means displays the item after indicating that the item that was displayed before the power outage has been acquired. (For example, in FIG. 160, the "Defeat Rate Medium UP" item that was displayed before the power outage is displayed again by the item acquisition effect),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The display means executes the item acquisition performance based on information on acquiring a new item between when the power is restored and when the item use performance is executed, and displays the item acquisition performance before the power is cut off in the item acquisition performance. This is a means that can redisplay the item after indicating that the item has been acquired (for example, in FIG. 160, the item acquisition effect is executed by acquiring the "destruction rate small UP" item). However, the "Medium Defeat Rate UP" item that was displayed before the power outage will be displayed again).
The storage means is a means capable of storing information about the new item (in FIG. 160, the "Small Defeat Rate UP" item is added to the Possession Items column);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In the above explanation,
Display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
A storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information on the acquired items (for example, "defeat rate UP" item, "1 object defeated"item);
A game machine comprising:
The display means is
Based on the information on the item acquisition, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 149) indicating that the item has been acquired,
It is possible to display the item that is shown to have been acquired in the item acquisition performance (for example, the "defeat rate small UP" item acquired in FIG. 149(e) is displayed in FIG. 149(f)),
Means capable of performing an item usage effect (for example, FIGS. 151(d) to (f)) that indicates an advantage for a benefit (for example, ease of transition to an AT state) using the displayed item. and
The storage means is a means for maintaining the state in which the information of the item before the power outage is stored when the power is restored after the power outage (for example, in FIG. No change in item information),
The display means is means that, when the power is restored after a power outage, does not display the item that was displayed before the power outage (for example, in FIG. 158, the item that was displayed before the power outage is "The item is not in the display item column after power is restored),
The display means is a means that can re-display the item that was displayed before the power outage between when the power is restored and when the item use effect is executed (for example, in FIG. 158, the item use effect is The item acquisition effect was executed before, and the "Killing Rate Medium UP" item that was displayed before the power outage was added to the display item column again).
The degree of advantage is derived based on the information of the item stored in the storage means (for example, the degree of advantage (defeat rate) regarding AT transition is determined based on the item in possession),
A game machine characterized by the following is described (see (2) regarding the features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, the game machine described above,
The items include items that are to be redisplayed on the display means (for example, "kill rate UP" item) and items that are not to be redisplayed on the display means (for example, "1 body destroyed" item). be,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Items that are not subject to re-display on the display means are items that are not used in the item usage performance (for example, the "Destroy 1 body" item is not used in the item usage performance);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the item acquisition performance that is executed between the time when the power is restored and the item usage performance is executed, the display means displays the item after indicating that the item that was displayed before the power outage has been acquired. (For example, in FIG. 158, the "Defeat Rate Medium UP" item that was displayed before the power outage is displayed again by the item acquisition effect),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The display means executes the item acquisition performance based on information on acquiring a new item between when the power is restored and when the item use performance is executed, and displays the item acquisition performance before the power is cut off in the item acquisition performance. This is a means that can redisplay the item after indicating that the item has been acquired (for example, in FIG. 158, the item acquisition effect is executed by acquiring the "defeat rate small UP" item). However, the "Medium Defeat Rate UP" item that was displayed before the power outage will be displayed again).
The storage means is a means capable of storing information on the new item (in FIG. 158, the "Small Defeat Rate UP" item is added to the Possession Items column);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In the above explanation,
Display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
A storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information on the acquired items (for example, "defeat rate UP" item, "1 object defeated"item);
A game machine comprising:
The display means is
Based on the information on the item acquisition, it is possible to perform an item acquisition effect (for example, FIGS. 151(b) and 151(c)) indicating that the item has been acquired,
It is possible to display the item that is shown to have been acquired in the item acquisition performance (for example, the "defeat rate? UP" item acquired in FIG. 151(c) is displayed in FIG. 151(d)),
A means capable of executing an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 151(d) to (f)) using the displayed item,
The storage means is a means for maintaining the state in which the information of the item before the power outage is stored when the power is restored after the power outage (for example, in FIG. No change in item information),
The display means is means that, when the power is restored after a power outage, does not display the item that was displayed before the power outage (for example, in FIG. 163, the item that was displayed before the power outage is ” item is not in the display item column after power is restored),
The display unit displays the display unit that indicates that a new item different from the undisplayed item has been acquired between the time when the item is not displayed due to power restoration and the time when the item usage effect is executed. It is a means that can execute an item acquisition effect and display the item (for example, in FIG. 163, before the item use effect, an item acquisition effect indicating that a "defeat rate? UP" item has been obtained is executed, and the power is cut off). The "Defeat rate? UP" item has been added to the display item column instead of the "Defeat rate medium UP" item that was displayed previously).
A game machine characterized by the following is described (see (3) regarding the features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, the game machine described above,
The items include items that are subject to use in the item use performance (for example, "defeat rate UP" item) and items that are not subject to use (for example, "defeat 1 body" item),
The display means displays a new item different from the undisplayed item after the item is not displayed due to a power restoration until the item usage effect is executed, and displays the item when the item is used. It is a means that can execute the item acquisition effect indicating that an item to be used in the effect has been obtained and display the item (for example, in FIG. 163, before the item use effect, the target item of the item use effect is displayed). An item acquisition animation that indicates that the "defeat rate? UP" item has been acquired is executed, and the "defeat rate? UP" item is displayed in the item field instead of the "defeat rate medium UP" item that was displayed before the power outage. ),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The item to be used in the item use effect may not be displayed due to power failure and power restoration (for example, in Figure 163, the item use effect is ``Medium Defeat Rate UP'' after power failure is restored). (The item is not displayed)
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The display means is a means that can re-display the item that was displayed before the power was cut off after the item is no longer displayed due to power restoration until the item usage effect is executed (for example, , In Fig. 158, the item acquisition performance (normal state) is executed before the item use performance, and the "Killing Rate Medium UP" item that was displayed before the power outage is added to the display item column again).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In the above explanation,
Display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
A storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information on the acquired items (for example, "defeat rate UP" item, "1 object defeated"item);
A game machine comprising:
The display means is
Based on the information on the item acquisition, it is possible to perform an item acquisition effect (for example, FIGS. 151(b) and 151(c)) indicating that the item has been acquired,
It is possible to display the item that is shown to have been acquired in the item acquisition performance (for example, the "defeat rate? UP" item acquired in FIG. 151(c) is displayed in FIG. 151(d)),
A means capable of executing an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 151(d) to (f)) using the displayed item,
The storage means is a means for maintaining the state in which the information of the item before the power outage is stored when the power is restored after the power outage (for example, in FIG. No change in item information),
The display means is means that, when the power is restored after a power outage, does not display the item that was displayed before the power outage (for example, in FIG. 164, the item that was displayed before the power outage is ” item and “Small defeat rate UP” item are not in the display item column after power outage restoration),
The display means displays a new item that is different from the undisplayed item between the time when the plurality of items are not displayed due to power restoration and the time when the item usage effect is executed. This means can execute the item acquisition effect indicating that a smaller number of the items have been acquired than the number of items that have not been used, and display the item (for example, in FIG. 164, before the item use effect, the An item acquisition animation that indicates that the item "Kill rate UP" has been acquired is executed, and the "Kill rate UP" item is displayed instead of the "Medium kill rate UP" item or "Small kill rate UP" item that was displayed before the power outage. has been added to the display item field),
A game machine characterized by the following is described (see (3) regarding the features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, the game machine described above,
The items include items that are subject to use in the item use performance (for example, "defeat rate UP" item) and items that are not subject to use (for example, "defeat 1 body" item),
The display means displays a new item that is different from the undisplayed item after the plurality of items are not displayed due to power restoration and until the item usage effect is executed. It is a means that can execute the item acquisition effect indicating that an item to be used in the item use effect has been acquired and display the item (for example, in FIG. 164, before the item use effect, the item use effect is displayed). An item acquisition animation that indicates that the target item "Defeat rate? UP" has been acquired will be executed, and instead of the "Defeat rate medium UP" item or "Small defeat rate UP" item that was displayed before the power outage, it will be displayed as ""Defeat rate? UP" item has been added to the display item column),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The item that is the target of use in the item usage performance may not be displayed when the power is restored after a power outage (for example, in FIG. items and "Small defeat rate UP" items are not displayed),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The display means is capable of re-displaying the items that were displayed before the power cut, after the plurality of items are not displayed due to power restoration and before the item usage effect is executed. (For example, in FIG. 158, the item acquisition performance (normal state) is executed before the item use performance, and the "defeat rate medium UP" item that was displayed before the power outage is added to the display item column again),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In the above explanation,
Display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
A storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information on the acquired items (for example, "defeat rate UP" item, "1 object defeated"item);
A game machine comprising:
The display means is
Based on the information on the item acquisition, it is possible to perform an item acquisition effect (for example, FIGS. 151(b) and 151(c)) indicating that the item has been acquired,
It is possible to display the item that is shown to have been acquired in the item acquisition performance (for example, the "defeat rate? UP" item acquired in FIG. 151(c) is displayed in FIG. 151(d)),
Means capable of performing an item usage effect (for example, FIGS. 151(d) to (f)) that indicates an advantage for a benefit (for example, ease of transition to an AT state) using the displayed item. and
The storage means is a means for maintaining the state in which the information of the item before the power outage is stored when the power is restored after the power outage (for example, in FIG. No change in item information),
The display means is means that, when the power is restored after a power outage, does not display the item that was displayed before the power outage (for example, in FIG. 163, the item that was displayed before the power outage is ” item is not in the display item column after power is restored),
The display unit displays the display unit that indicates that a new item different from the undisplayed item has been acquired between the time when the item is not displayed due to power restoration and the time when the item usage effect is executed. It is a means that can execute an item acquisition effect and display the item (for example, in FIG. 163, before the item use effect, an item acquisition effect indicating that a "defeat rate? UP" item has been obtained is executed, and the power is cut off). The "Defeat rate? UP" item has been added to the display item column instead of the "Defeat rate medium UP" item that was displayed previously).
The degree of advantage is derived based on the information of the item stored in the storage means (for example, the degree of advantage (defeating rate) regarding AT transition is determined based on the item in possession),
A game machine characterized by the following is described (see (3) regarding the features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, the game machine described above,
The items include items that are subject to use in the item use performance (for example, "defeat rate UP" item) and items that are not subject to use (for example, "defeat 1 body" item),
The display means displays a new item different from the undisplayed item after the item is not displayed due to a power restoration until the item usage effect is executed, and displays the item when the item is used. It is a means that can execute the item acquisition effect indicating that an item to be used in the effect has been obtained and display the item (for example, in FIG. 163, before the item use effect, the target item of the item use effect is displayed). An item acquisition animation that indicates that the "defeat rate? UP" item has been acquired is executed, and the "defeat rate? UP" item is displayed in the item field instead of the "defeat rate medium UP" item that was displayed before the power outage. ),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The item to be used in the item use effect may not be displayed due to power failure and power restoration (for example, in Figure 163, the item use effect is ``Medium Defeat Rate UP'' after power failure is restored). (The item is not displayed)
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The display means is a means that can re-display the item that was displayed before the power was cut off after the item is no longer displayed due to power restoration until the item usage effect is executed (for example, , In Fig. 158, the item acquisition performance (normal state) is executed before the item use performance, and the "Killing Rate Medium UP" item that was displayed before the power outage is added to the display item column again).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In the above explanation,
Display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
A storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information on the acquired items (for example, "defeat rate UP" item, "1 object defeated"item);
A game machine comprising:
The display means is a means that may execute an item acquisition effect indicating that the item has been acquired, or may not execute the item acquisition effect, when the storage means stores information about the acquired item. Yes (for example, in Figure 155 etc., the item acquisition effect is executed when a possession item is added, but in Figure 166, the item acquisition effect is not executed even if the "Destroy 1 item" item is acquired),
The display means is a means capable of displaying the item that is shown to have been acquired in the item acquisition performance (for example, the "defeat rate small UP" item acquired in FIG. 149(e) is displayed in FIG. 149(f)). , and the "Defeat rate? UP" item obtained in Figure 151(c) is displayed in Figure 151(d)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described (see (4) for features of this embodiment and other configurations that can be adopted).

Further, the game machine described above,
a first updating means (e.g., main control unit 300) capable of updating the value of a first counter (e.g., cumulative points) toward a predetermined value (e.g., 1000) according to the progress of the game;
a second updating means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of updating the value of the second counter (for example, display points) according to the progress of the game;
Equipped with
The storage means is a means for storing information on the item based on the value of the first counter (for example, when the total points reach 1000 or when the total points are not 0 in a confrontation state, the information on the item is stored). ),
The value of the second counter may be the same as the value of the first counter (for example, FIG. 155);
The value of the second counter may be different from the value of the first counter after the power is restored after a power outage (for example, FIG. 156);
The display means is a means capable of displaying the value of the second counter (for example, in FIG. 147 etc., a display point is shown at the lower left of the effect image display device 157),
The display means may not perform the item acquisition effect depending on the value of the second counter when the storage means stores information about the acquired item (for example, in FIG. 166 In this case, if the display point is 0, the item acquisition effect is not executed (No determination is made in step S3205 of FIG. 144 and step S3207 is not executed),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The display means does not perform the item acquisition effect unless the value of the second counter changes after the power is restored (for example, in FIG. 166, the display point is 0 after the power is restored). item acquisition effect is not executed)
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The storage means may store information about the item acquired based on the number of games that have passed (for example, the item may be acquired in the first game of a confrontation state that changes based on the number of games that have passed). ),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The item stored by the storage means when the item acquisition effect is not executed may be more advantageous to the player than the item stored by the storage means when the item acquisition effect is executed (for example, when the item acquisition effect is A configuration in which there is a difference in the advantage of items obtained depending on when the performance is executed and when it is not executed),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
comprising a privilege lottery means (for example, the main control unit 300 performs a lottery for transition to the AT state using the owned items) capable of executing a lottery regarding benefits based on the items stored in the storage means;
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In the above explanation,
Display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
A storage means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of storing information on the acquired items (for example, "defeat rate UP" item, "1 object defeated"item);
A game machine comprising:
The display means is
Based on the information on the item acquisition, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 149) indicating that the item has been acquired,
It is possible to display the items that are shown to have been acquired in the item acquisition performance (for example, the “defeat rate small UP” item acquired in FIG. 149(e) is displayed in FIG. 149(f)),
It is a means that can execute an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 151(d) to (f)) using the displayed item,
There are two timings for displaying new items: a first timing between the start of a game and the start of the next game, and a second timing between the start of the game and the start of the next game.
The first timing is a different timing from the second timing,
A gaming machine characterized by the following is described (see (5) regarding the features of this embodiment and other possible configurations).

Further, the game machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
a start operation means (for example, start lever 135) that accepts a start operation for starting rotation of the plurality of reels;
stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) that accepts a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, main control unit 300) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop operation,
The first timing is a timing after the last stop operation on the plurality of reels,
The second timing is a timing after the timing of the start operation and before the last stop operation for the plurality of reels,
The frequency at which new items are displayed at the first timing is higher than the frequency at which new items are displayed at the second timing.
A gaming machine characterized by the following is described (see (5) regarding the features of this embodiment and other possible configurations).

Further, the game machine described above,
In a game in which the item use effect is executed, a new item may be displayed at the second timing (for example, FIG. 167),
A gaming machine characterized by the following is described (see (5) regarding the features of this embodiment and other possible configurations).

Further, the game machine described above,
The display means is a means that, when the power is restored after a power outage, does not display the items that were displayed before the power outage (for example, in FIG. The item is not in the display item column after power is restored)
If a power outage is restored while an item is being displayed before the game in which the item usage effect is executed, a new item may be displayed at the second timing. (For example, Figure 167),
A gaming machine characterized by the following is described (see (5) regarding the features of this embodiment and other possible configurations).

Further, the game machine described above,
The storage means is a means for maintaining a state in which information on items before power outage is stored when power is restored after power outage (for example, in FIG. 167, information on items owned by the main control unit 300 is (no change in information),
When displaying a new item at the second timing, the display means is a means for displaying an item that is not displayed due to a power failure and restoration (for example, FIG. 167);
A gaming machine characterized by the following is described (see (5) regarding the features of this embodiment and other possible configurations).

Further, the game machine described above,
The number of items newly displayed at the first timing is 1,
The number of items newly displayed at the second timing is one or more.
A gaming machine characterized by the following is described (see (5) regarding the features of this embodiment and other possible configurations).

Further, the game machine described above,
The storage means is a means for maintaining a state in which information on an item before power outage (hereinafter referred to as "first item") is stored when power is restored after power outage (for example, in FIG. There is no change in the possessed item information of the main control unit 300 before and after the power is restored),
The display means is means that, when the power is restored after a power outage, does not display the first item that was displayed before the power outage (for example, in FIG. 167, the first item that was displayed before the power outage is ``Rate UP'' item is not in the display item column after power outage restoration),
The display means executes the item acquisition performance based on information obtained by acquiring a new item (hereinafter referred to as "second item") between the time when the power is restored and the time when the item use performance is executed. In addition, it is a means that can redisplay the first item after indicating that the first item has been acquired in the item acquisition performance (for example, in FIG. After acquiring it, the item acquisition animation will be performed, but the "Defeat Rate Medium UP" item that was displayed before the power outage will be displayed again),
The storage means is a means capable of storing information about the second item (in FIG. 158, the "Small Defeat Rate UP" item is added to the Possession Items column);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first item may be different from the second item,
the first item may be the same as the second item;
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

In the above explanation,
Display means (for example, effect image display device 157);
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
a start operation means (for example, start lever 135) that accepts a start operation for starting rotation of the plurality of reels;
stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) that accepts a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels;
A game machine comprising: a stop control means (for example, a main control unit 300) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop operation after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven,
The display means is
In a period after receiving the start operation and before all of the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop control, the first display (for example, FIG. 168 (a1) and FIG. 168 (b1)) is displayed. When a power outage occurs, the first display that was displayed before the power outage is displayed after the power is restored (for example, FIG. 168(b)),
During a period when all of the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop control, if a power outage occurs while the first display is being displayed, after power is restored, the first display that was displayed before the power outage means for displaying the second display without displaying the display (for example, FIG. 168(a)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described (see (6) regarding the features of this embodiment and other possible configurations).

Further, the game machine described above,
The display means is
If a power outage occurs while the second display is displayed during a period after the start operation is received and before all of the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop control, the power outage occurs after the power is restored. means for displaying the second display that was previously displayed (if a power outage occurs during a game, the display after the power is restored matches the display before the power outage);
A game machine characterized by the following is described (see (6) regarding the features of this embodiment and other possible configurations).

Further, the game machine described above,
The first display is a display including items (e.g., “kill rate UP” item, “1 object destroyed” item) (e.g., FIG. 168 (a1)),
The second display is a display that does not include items (for example, FIG. 168 (a2)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described (see (6) regarding the features of this embodiment and other possible configurations).

Further, the game machine described above,
The first display is a display including that the points updated based on the progress of the game are different from the initial value (for example, FIG. 168 (a1)),
The second display is a display including that the point is an initial value (for example, FIG. 168(a2)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described (see (6) regarding the features of this embodiment and other possible configurations).

Further, the game machine described above,
The first display is a display including a background suggesting that the player is in an advantageous state (for example, FIG. 168(a1)),
The second display is a display that includes a background different from the background that suggests that the player is in an advantageous state (for example, FIG. 168 (a2));
A game machine characterized by the following is described (see (6) regarding the features of this embodiment and other possible configurations).

Further, the game machine described above,
A storage means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of storing information on acquired items (for example, "defeat rate UP" item, "1 object defeated" item),
The display means is
Based on the information on the item acquisition, it is possible to execute an item acquisition effect (for example, FIG. 149) indicating that the item has been acquired,
It is possible to display the items that are shown to have been acquired in the item acquisition performance (for example, the “defeat rate small UP” item acquired in FIG. 149(e) is displayed in FIG. 149(f)),
It is a means that can execute an item use effect (for example, FIGS. 151(d) to (f)) using the displayed item,
The storage means is a means for maintaining a state in which information on an item before power outage (hereinafter referred to as "first item") is stored when power is restored after power outage (for example, in FIG. There is no change in the possessed item information of the main control unit 300 before and after the power is restored),
The display means is means that, when the power is restored after a power outage, does not display the first item that was displayed before the power outage (for example, in FIG. 158, the "defeated item" that was displayed before the power outage ``Rate UP'' item is not in the display item column after power outage restoration),
The display means executes the item acquisition performance based on information obtained by acquiring a new item (hereinafter referred to as "second item") between the time when the power is restored and the time when the item use performance is executed. This means is capable of redisplaying the first item after indicating that the first item has been acquired in the item acquisition performance (for example, in FIG. 158, the item acquisition performance is performed before the item use performance). The production has been executed, and the "Medium Defeat Rate UP" item that was displayed before the power outage has been added to the display item column again).
The storage means is a means capable of storing information about the second item (in FIG. 158, the "Small Defeat Rate UP" item is added to the Possession Items column);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first item may be different from the second item,
the first item may be the same as the second item;
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

[Embodiment H1]
In the slot machine of this embodiment, a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of internal winning of the plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, If the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the multiple reels stop match the predetermined payout conditions, the game media will be paid out and the game will end; if not, the game media will be paid out. This is a game machine that plays a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described using FIG. 169. FIG. 169 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side).

Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 169 to 188 are basically used only for explaining this embodiment, and even if the same symbols are shown in other drawings, they will not be used in the explanation of this embodiment. Priority is given to the codes shown in 169 to 188. Moreover, each example of this embodiment and each example of other embodiments can be applied in combination with each other.

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 169 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface (not shown) are housed inside the center of the main body 101, and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the symbol display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible. By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. Note that as such a display device, in addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be adopted. Further, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is arranged on the back of each reel 110 to 112 to illuminate each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 113. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. In addition, inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each reel 110 to 112, and the light emitting part of this optical sensor A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the reel and the light receiving section. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line. The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the winning line 114 that becomes valid.

For example, the notification lamp 123 informs the player that he or she has internally won a specific winning combination (specifically, a special winning combination (bonus)) in an internal lottery for winning combinations, which will be described later, or that he or she is playing a bonus game. This is a warning lamp. The notification lamp 123 of this embodiment lights up until the bonus game ends after the bonus is announced to notify the player that the bonus has been confirmed. Note that the notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus notification (at the time of the bonus or immediately before the bonus notification). The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, up to a maximum of three coins, two coins are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as the MAX bet button. In addition, although not shown in the drawings, there is provided a performance button that can start a certain performance when an operation is accepted. Note that the production button may also serve as a function of another button (for example, the bet button 132).

Note that the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start button is activated to notify that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored token number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout token number display 127 are composed of seven segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of this embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with each reel 110 to 112, respectively. .

More specifically, by operating the left stop button 137, the left reel 110 can be stopped, by operating the middle stop button 138, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the right stop button 139, the middle reel 111 can be stopped. By operating the right reel 112, it is possible to stop the right reel 112.

Furthermore, light emitters 137a, 138a, and 139a are provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitters 137a, 138a, and 139a are turned on. In addition to notifying the player, the light may also be turned on when performing various notifications to be described later.

Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation will be referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as the second stop operation, the last stop operation will be referred to as the third stop operation, and the first stop operation will be referred to as the third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is sometimes referred to as the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is sometimes referred to as the third stop reel.

Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The order of operations in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 and the stop operation is called "sequential push operation order" or simply "sequential push", and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 and the stop operation is called "sequential push operation order" or simply "sequence push". This is called "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push."

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the AT system gaming state of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can understand that the player is in the high navigation state from the lighting manner of the high navigation state lamp 190.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The upper lamp 142 provided on the upper part of the front door 102 and the side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to enliven the game, and are also used for various notifications to be described later. may also be lit.

A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided at the top of the presentation device 160. This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed on the back side of the shutter 163. , effect image display device), and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) will be displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (game display device). The structure is such that it appears on the person's side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding stop operations (for example, the order and timing of operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139), and also functions as an operation navigation execution device that will be described later. It may be displayed when making various notifications.

Note that it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device, as long as it is configured to display various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, etc. , a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that the entirety can be visually recognized by the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, it is also possible to provide a decoration (not shown) around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen appears oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Note that although the notification lamp 123 and the high navigation state lamp 190 are configured to notify predetermined information by causing the lamps to emit light, the manner of notification is not limited to the light emission of the lamps. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a part of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a full-screen liquid crystal slot machine, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). Hereinafter, when the notification lamp 123 or the high navigation state lamp 190 is referred to as lighting, it is meant to include notifications by other presentation devices (for example, display devices) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 170 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open. The main body 101 is a box that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and has an opening at the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores a main control board inside is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 249 provided at the top of the back plate 242. Three reels 110 to 112 are arranged below. A side plate 260 on the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side, houses a first sub-control board that stores therein a first sub-control board constituting a first sub-control unit. A case 220 is provided. Furthermore, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side as viewed from the outside, which is connected to the main control board and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device.

Further, inside the main body 101, a setting key is provided that can be turned on and off by a rotation operation. This setting key is an operation means for starting to change or confirm setting values (in this example, settings 1 to 6), which will be described later. Further, inside the main body 101, a setting switch is provided that can be pressed to perform an operation for changing settings (setting value changing operation) or an operation for confirming settings. This setting switch is an operating means that also functions as an error cancellation switch that can perform operations to cancel various errors (error cancellation operations), which will be described later. These setting keys and setting switches can be operated by opening the front door 102, and are difficult or impossible to operate when the front door 102 is closed (they are operation means that cannot be operated by the player).

A medal payout device 180 (a device that pays out medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed on the bottom plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided in front of the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate when the front door 102 is closed.

The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and powers each of the main control section 300, first sub-control section 400, second sub-control section 500, etc., which will be described later. Supplies to the control unit and each device. Furthermore, it is equipped with a power storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to predetermined components (e.g., RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after external power is cut off. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is provided on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is provided behind this storage (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion to which a power cord 265 is connected, and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 formed in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and on the top of the liquid crystal display device 157 is a presentation device 160 and a presentation control board (not shown) that controls the presentation device 160. (omitted), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. At the bottom of the liquid crystal display device 157, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, a passage 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops fraudulent medals, etc. into the medal receiving tray 161. There is. Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 180.

<Circuit configuration of control section>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described using FIG. 171. Note that this figure is a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 is equipped with a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used for internal lottery of winning combinations, stop of reels, etc. ROM 306 for storing position etc., RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. Equipped with WDT (watch dog timer) 314. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz. =1.504ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a number in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. It is equipped with a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal), and when the start signal is input from this start signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (main processing of the main control section described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal input from the medal slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, a stop button 139 sensor, a payment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, an index sensor for the reel 110, The status of the reel 111 index sensor, reel 112 index sensor, etc.) is monitored.

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and insert medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 as medals to be inserted into the game. Detect input operation in case. The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals dispensed by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of reel 110, the index sensor of reel 111, and the index sensor of reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes, become the level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives a solenoid provided on the medal selector 170 that sorts the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided on the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored number of coins display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 is provided to drive the display 126, payout number display 127, and high navigation status lamp 190).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) through the information output circuit 334. Outputs gaming information (for example, gaming status) of the machine 100. The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply that is supplied to the main control unit 1300. In this embodiment, if the voltage is less than 9 V), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

The main control section 300 also includes an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 is one-way communication, and the main control section 300 can send signals such as commands to the first sub-control section 400; Signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control commands. There is. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also has a ROM 406 that stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, backlight lighting patterns, data for controlling various indicators, etc. It is set up.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls audio output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with instructions from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input/output interface. 123 etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at every interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
Next, the symbol arrangement on each of the reels 110 to 112 described above will be explained using FIG. 172(a). Note that this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112).

On each reel 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (in this embodiment, 20 symbols with numbers 0 to 19) of a plurality of types (8 types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Further, the numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on each reel 110 to 112. For example, in this embodiment, the number 19 piece on the left reel 110 has a “bell symbol,” the number 19 piece on the middle reel 111 has a “blank symbol,” and the number 18 piece on the right reel 112 has a “Seven 2 "Designs" are arranged respectively. Note that hereinafter, the "Seven 1 symbol" may be referred to as "Blue 7 (design)" and the "Seven 2 symbol" may be referred to as "Red 7 (design)."

<Winning line>
Next, the winning line will be explained using FIG. 172(b). FIG. 172(b) is a diagram showing the winning line of the slot machine according to Embodiment H1 of the present invention.

The symbol displayed on the upper row of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 1) is placed on the left reel upper row symbol and the symbol displayed on the middle row of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 2). The symbols displayed are the middle symbols of the left reel, the symbols displayed in the lower row of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 3) are the lower symbols of the left reel, and the symbols displayed in the upper row of the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the figure) are The symbol displayed in the middle reel 111 (position 5; also referred to as symbol position 5) is the middle reel middle symbol. The symbol displayed on the lower row of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 6) is placed on the lower row of the middle reel 112 (position 7 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 7). The symbols displayed are the upper symbols of the right reel 112, the symbols displayed in the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 8 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 8) are the symbols displayed in the middle row of the right reel 112, and the symbols displayed in the lower row of the right reel 112 (position 9 shown in the diagram) are The symbols displayed at the position (also referred to as symbol position 9) are called right reel lower symbols, and the symbols on each reel 110 to 112 are displayed vertically three times on each reel 110 to 112 through the symbol display window 113. A total of nine are displayed.

In this embodiment, one winning line 114 is provided, which is a middle winning line L1 consisting of a left reel middle symbol (symbol position 2), a middle reel middle symbol (symbol position 5), and a right reel middle symbol (symbol position 8). ing. The winning line 114 is a line that is set at the stop position of symbols that can be seen through the reel window 113, and is a line that is set at the stop position of symbols that can be seen through the reel window 113, and includes symbols that correspond to winning combinations that will be explained later in FIGS. 173(a) and 173(b). This is the line on which it is determined whether or not a combination has been displayed. In FIG. 172(b), a middle winning line L1 is shown. The valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as gaming media.

The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment allows a game with a bet of 3 coins or a bet of 2 coins, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 2, none of the winning lines will be activated, and if the number of medals inserted is 3 or 2. When a coin is bet, the winning line L1 becomes valid. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135.

Further, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, there is also a winning line that drops to the right, which is made up of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, and left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of three winning lines, including the upward-sloping winning lines, may be set as the valid winning lines 114, or a number of winning lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as the valid winning lines 114.

<Type of winning role>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 173. FIG. 173 is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including activation combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and activation or payout of each winning combination.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include special prizes (special prize 1, special prize 2), general prizes (replay prize 1 to replay prize 13, minor prize 1 to minor prize 5), and the like. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in this embodiment, special combination 1 and special combination 2 are combinations that shift to a special gaming state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Furthermore, re-game winning combinations 1 to 13 are roles that can be played again without inserting new medals. These winning combinations are sometimes called "actuation combinations." In addition, "winning" in this embodiment includes a case where a symbol combination of an active role that does not involve a medal payout (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the active line. For example, special role 1, This includes winnings in the special winning combination 2 and replaying combinations 1 to 13.

Special combination 1 and special combination 2 are combinations (actuation combinations) that shift to a special gaming state upon winning. In this example, special combination 1 is a winning combination that can only be won in a 3-card bet game, and special combination 2 is a winning combination that can only be won in a 2-card bet game. Note that medals will not be paid out for winning this role itself. The corresponding symbol combinations are "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2" for special winning combination 1 (BB1) and "BAR-BAR-Seven 1" for special winning combination 2 (BB2).

When the special winning combination 1 or special winning combination 2 is internally won, the special winning internal winning flag corresponding to this internally winning winning combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag is set to ON due to the internal winning of the special winning combination 1, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 1 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Furthermore, if the flag is set to ON due to the internal winning of the special winning combination 2, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special winning winning state of the special winning combination 2 (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3). .

This flag remains on until the internally won winning combination is won, and it becomes easier to win the internally winning winning combination in subsequent games. In other words, even if you do not win the special role in a game where you win the special role 1 or 2 internally, you will be in a state where you win the special role internally in the next game and thereafter, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (for example, special If the winning combination is won internally, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2 (BB1)") will be in a state where it is easy to win. The special role 1 internal winning state (RT2) and the special winning role 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to a special gaming state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination 1 or special winning combination 2 being displayed. Furthermore, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of coins (in this example, 110 coins for winning with BB1 and 55 coins for winning with BB2) is paid out, a low re-gaming probability state (hereinafter, this state will be referred to as RT1) ). The special gaming state (RT4) and the low replay probability state (RT1) will be described later.

“Re-gaming role (re-gaming role 1 to re-gaming role 13)” is a winning role (activation role) that allows you to play the next game without inserting medals (game media) by winning a prize. No medals will be paid out. The corresponding symbol combinations are: Replay role 1 (normal replay) is "Replay-Replay-Replay", replay role 2 (direction replay 1) is "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1", and re-game role 3 (Production replay 2) is "Seven 1-Seven 2-Seven 1", etc., as shown in FIG. 173.

“Small role (Small role 1 to Small role 5)” is a winning role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning, and the corresponding symbol combinations are “ANY-Cherry-ANY” for Small role 1 (Cherry), The hand 2 (Watermelon 1) is "Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon", etc., as shown in FIG. 173. Further, the corresponding number of coins to be paid out is also as shown in the figure. In the case of "ANY-Cherry-ANY", the symbol on the middle reel 111 only needs to be "cherry", and the symbols on the left reel 110 and right reel 112 can be any symbol.

<Reel stop control>
Next, the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be outlined. The reel stop control is performed by selecting one of multiple types of predetermined reel stop control data based on predetermined conditions (for example, the results of internal lottery processing for winning combinations described later), and stopping the selected reel. Performed based on control data.

In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame slipping control) is performed. Pull-in control is to shift the stop position of the reels 110-112 within a certain number of frames (number of symbols) (pull-in range; here, maximum 4 frames) after the player operates each of the stop buttons 137-139. Control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300. Each reel stop data includes a permission control that allows symbol combinations of a predetermined winning combination to be displayed on the winning line, and a prohibition control that prevents symbol combinations of any winning combination from being displayed on the winning line. It is broadly divided into .

Examples of permissible control include when a certain winning combination is internally won, or when a special winning combination is internally won (the flag is being carried over), and the timing when the player operates each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. Even if the numbers are bad, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning combinations are displayed within the range of the above-mentioned number of frames. However, since it is only "allowed", the symbol combinations may not be aligned depending on the timing of operating each of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

For example, in the case of an internal win for Small Win 2 (Watermelon 1), the watermelon symbol is arranged over four frames, so if the timing of operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not appropriate, the watermelon symbol will be placed on the winning line. Don't stop.

However, depending on the arrangement of symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of symbols drawn, there may be cases where 100% alignment is possible. For example, since the arrangement interval of replay symbols corresponding to replay combination 1 (normal replay) is a maximum of 4 frames, if replay combination 1 is internally won, the winning will be 100% regardless of the timing.

On the other hand, an example in which the prohibition control is performed is, for example, when the internal lottery result is a loss and the special winning combination is not internally won (the flag is being carried over), and the timing when the player operates each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. At best, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning combinations are not displayed together within the range of the above-mentioned number of frames.

<Type of gaming state>
Next, types and changes of gaming states of the slot machine 100 will be explained. FIG. 174(a) is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

The main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a low replay probability state (RT1), a special combination 1 internal winning state with a high replay probability state (RT2), and a special combination 2 internal winning state with a high replay probability state. It has a state (RT3) and a special gaming state (RT4). In this embodiment, these four gaming states are referred to as RT-based gaming states. In addition, in this embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as an AT-based gaming state), and according to the AT-based gaming state determined by the main control unit 300, The first sub-control unit 400 is configured to set the gaming state. The AT system game state will be described later using FIG. 174(b).

In addition, the re-gaming low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability that the condition device related to the re-gaming combination operates does not change (default state), special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) and the special gaming state (RT4) are also states in which the probability of activation of the condition device related to the re-gaming combination varies with respect to the default state.

<Lottery table>
FIG. 175(a) is a diagram showing a lottery table used for internal lottery processing for winning combinations. The horizontal axis represents each gaming state (RT system gaming state), and the vertical axis represents the lottery value of each winning combination.

The internal winning probability of each winning combination in each gaming state, which will be explained later, is determined by inputting numerical data corresponding to the range of lottery data associated with each winning combination from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306 to random numbers acquired during the internal lottery. It is calculated by dividing the value by numerical data in the numerical range (for example, 65535). For example, in the re-game low probability state (RT1), the lottery value of the small winning combination 2 is 512, and the winning probability of the small winning combination 1 is 512/65536×100≈0.8%. The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each win or loss.

It is determined which winning combination the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery data corresponds to, and the internal lottery winning combination is determined. This lottery data is prepared with settings 1 to 6 in which the winning probability of at least one winning combination is different, and the staff at the gaming parlor can arbitrarily select and set any of the setting values. Note that the internal winning probability shown in this figure is an example, and is not limited to this probability.

Hereinafter, the RT-type gaming state of the slot machine 100 will be explained with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Low replay probability state (RT1)>
The low replay probability state is a gaming state (disadvantageous to the player) in which the internal winning probability of replaying is the lowest among other gaming states (e.g., gaming states excluding special gaming states), and is referred to as the normal gaming state. There is also. In the low replay probability state, a winning combination that is internally won is drawn by referring to the drawing table in the "RT1" column on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 175(a).

The winning combinations that are internally won in the low replay probability state include special combination 1 (condition device No. 1. Only for 3-coin bet games), special combination 2 (not shown; only for 2-coin bet games), and re-gaming combination 1 ( Condition device No. 2), replay combination 2, 4 to 10 (condition device No. 3), replay combination 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13 (condition device No. 4), small combination 1 to small There is a role 5 (conditional device No. 5-9). Note that if you do not win the winning combination, you will lose, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed. Note that the fact that the winning symbol combination is not stopped on the winning line is sometimes referred to as "losing". In addition, not winning the winning combination may be expressed as "winning by mistake."

Here, "Re-gaming role 2, 4 to 10" refers to Re-gaming role 2, Re-gaming role 4, Re-gaming role 5, Re-gaming role 6, Re-gaming role 7, Re-gaming role 8, Re-gaming role 9. , and re-gaming combination 10 are internally won at the same time. In this case, it is determined which symbol combination corresponds to which combination will be displayed according to the player's operation order. More specifically, if the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is the predetermined operation order (in this example, the stop operation is performed by reverse pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to re-gaming combination 2 is It is displayed on the winning line, and in other cases, depending on the timing of the stop operation of each reel 110 to 112, a re-gaming combination 4, a re-gaming combination 5, a re-gaming combination 6, a re-gaming combination 7, and a re-gaming combination are displayed on the winning line. 8, a symbol combination corresponding to either the re-gaming combination 9 or the re-gaming combination 10 is displayed on the winning line. Incidentally, a winning combination, such as the "Re-gaming combinations 2, 4 to 10", whose winning combination is determined by the order of operations may be referred to as a "push order combination".

In addition, "Re-gaming role 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" means Re-gaming role 3, Re-gaming role 4, Re-gaming role 6, Re-gaming role 8, Re-gaming role 10, Re-gaming role 11 , Re-gaming combination 12, and Re-gaming combination 13 are internally won at the same time. In this case, it is determined which symbol combination corresponds to which combination will be displayed according to the player's operation order. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order which is the predetermined operation order (in this example, when the stop operation is performed by reverse pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to re-gaming combination 3 is It is displayed on the winning line, and in other cases, depending on the timing of the stop operation of each reel 110 to 112, re-gaming role 4, re-gaming role 6, re-gaming role 8, re-gaming role 10, re-gaming role A symbol combination corresponding to any one of 11, re-gaming combination 12, and re-gaming combination 13 is displayed on the winning line.

If "Small win 4" is won internally, it is determined whether the symbol combination corresponding to the small win 4 (Bell) is displayed on the winning line according to the player's operation order (see FIG. 175). a) See notes section). More specifically, if the stop operation is performed in accordance with the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, "Bell-Bell-Bell" will be displayed on the winning line, and 11 medals will be paid out ( Bell prize). On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in accordance with the correct operation order, "Bell-Bell-Bell" is not displayed on the winning line (loss).

Furthermore, if "Small Winning 4" is composed of "Small Winning 4a" and "Small Winning 4b" and "Small Winning 4a" is internally won, "Bell-Bell-Bell" is selected according to the player's operation order. ” will be displayed on the winning line. However, if “Small Role 4b” is internally won, “Bell-Bell-Bell” will be displayed on the winning line regardless of the order of operations. It may be configured so that

Here, using FIG. 175(b), the correct operation order for "Small win 4" will be explained in detail. “Small role 4” is precisely six types: “Small role 4LCR,” “Small role 4LRC,” “Small role 4CLR,” “Small role 4CRL,” “Small role 4RLC,” and “Small role 4RCL.” The game is set up in subdivisions, and different correct operation orders are assigned in correspondence to each of the subdivisions of "Small Wins 4". Note that the range of lottery data associated with each of the six subdivided "small winning combinations 4" is the same.

For example, if "Small win 4 LCR" is internally won among "Small win 4", the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The stop operation is the correct operation, and other stop operations are incorrect operations. Also, if "Small win 4 CRL" is internally won among "Small win 4", the first stop reel will be the middle reel 111, the second stop reel will be the right reel 112, and the third stop reel will be the left reel 110. The correct operation is the stop operation.

FIG. 174(a) shows that when the special winning combination 1 is internally won (when condition (A) is satisfied), the state shifts to the special winning role 1 internal winning state (RT2), which will be described later. When the special winning combination 2 is internally won (when condition (B) is satisfied), it is shown that the state shifts to the special winning combination 2 internal winning state (RT3), which will be described later.

<Special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), special role 2 internal winning state (RT3)>
The special role internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as the "special role internal winning state") are the low replay probability state (RT1). ), the internal winning flag corresponding to special winning combination 1 or special winning combination 2 is set to on, and the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing. This is a gaming state in which a symbol combination corresponding to the special combination corresponding to this flag can be displayed by doing so.

In the special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), a winning combination to be internally won is drawn with reference to the lottery table in the "RT2" column on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 175(a), and the special role 2 internal winning state ( In RT3), a winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the drawing table in the "RT3" column on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 175(a). The winning roles that are internally won in the special role internal winning state include re-gaming roles 1, re-gaming roles 2, 4-10, re-gaming roles 3, 4, 6, 8, 10-13, and small roles 1-4. There is. Note that if you do not win the winning combination, you will lose, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed. In addition, in FIG. 174(a), when a symbol combination corresponding to special role 1 or special role 2 is displayed in the special role internal winning state (when condition (C) is satisfied), the special game described later is A transition to state (RT4) is shown.

<Special gaming state (RT4)>
The special gaming state (RT4) is the most advantageous gaming state for the player among all the gaming states. In the special game state, a winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the drawing table in the "RT4" column on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 175(a). The only winning combination that is internally won in the special gaming state is the small winning combination 5. Furthermore, if the winning combination is not won, the player loses and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

FIG. 174(a) shows that in the special gaming state (RT4), when a specified number of coins are paid out (when condition (D) is satisfied), the state shifts to the low replay probability state (RT1). ing. Specifically, when the special game state is entered based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to special combination 1, if more than 110 medals are paid out, the replay low probability state (RT1) is entered. to move to. In addition, if the special gaming state is entered based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to special combination 2, if more than 55 medals are paid out, the state will be shifted to the low replay probability state (RT1). .

In this embodiment, the special gaming state ends when a specified number of coins are paid out, but for example, the special gaming state may end when a predetermined winning combination (for example, single bonus) is won, or even a predetermined number of payouts ( The game may end when a prize is won (for example, 8 times) or when the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 6 times). That is, the condition (D) shown in FIG. 174(a) is not limited to this example.

<Transition of AT system game state>
Next, the AT system game state will be explained using FIG. 174(b). FIG. 174(b) is a transition diagram of the AT system gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

As shown in the figure, the AT system gaming states are roughly divided into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability that operation navigation will be executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode. The high navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is higher than that in the low navigation state, and is also referred to as AT mode. Here, the operation navigation refers to the internal winning of the push order winning combination (in this example, replaying combinations 2, 4 to 10, replaying combinations 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13, or small combination 4). This refers to the performance that informs the correct operation order in a case. That is, the operation navigation refers to an effect that notifies the contents of the stop operation for acquiring medals, the contents of the stop operation for shifting to an advantageous gaming state, or maintaining an advantageous gaming state.

Here, the operation navigation will be explained using FIG. 175(b) and FIG. 176. In this embodiment, the operation navigation is executed using the payout number display 127 and the effect image display device 157. FIG. 175(b) is a diagram illustrating the correct operation order of the push order combinations of the slot machine according to Embodiment H1 of the present invention, and FIG. This is a diagram.

For example, display data 01 is data that suggests a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, display data 02 is data that suggests a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, and display data 03 is data that suggests a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the middle reel 111. , is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112.

Therefore, in the AT mode, when "Re-gaming combinations 2, 4 to 10" or "Re-gaming combinations 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" are internally won, the first stop reel is set to the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is correct, display data 03 indicating that the first stop operation is on the right is selected, and the payout number display 127 displays the lighting mode corresponding to display data 03, as well as the effect image display. The device 157 displays an image (for example, the characters "--1") suggesting that the first stopped reel is the right reel 112.

In addition, display data 04 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. Display data 06 indicates a stop operation in which the left reel is 110, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the middle reel 111. Display data 07, which suggests a stop operation in which the left reel 110 and the third stop reel are the right reel 112, indicates that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel. Display data 08, which is data suggesting a stopping operation in which the first stopping reel is the right reel 112, data suggesting a stopping operation in which the first stopping reel is the right reel 112, the second stopping reel is the left reel 110, and the third stopping reel is the middle reel 112. , display data 09 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110.

Therefore, if the small winning combination 4CLR of "small winning combination 4" is internally won in AT mode, the first stopping reel is the middle reel 111, the second stopping reel is the left reel 110, and the third stopping reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is correct, display data 06 indicating that the first stop operation is middle, the second stop operation is left, and the third stop operation is right is selected, and the payout number display 127 shows display data 06. The lighting mode corresponding to is displayed, and the effect image display device 157 suggests that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. An image (for example, the characters "213") is displayed.

In this embodiment, it is configured such that it is possible to determine whether the internal winning combination is a replay combination or a minor combination 4 based on the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. However, for example, the stop operation for the correct answer for the small winning combination 4 may be made into three choices like a replaying winning combination, and the small winning combination 4 may also be configured to be notified using the display data 01 to 03. In this case, internal winning combinations cannot be determined based only on the lighting pattern. Further, the correct stop operation for the replay winning combination may be set to 6 options like the small win 4, and the replay winning combination may also be configured to be notified using the display data 04 to 09. In this case as well, internal winning combinations cannot be determined based only on the lighting pattern.

Note that in this embodiment, the low navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is defined as a state in which the probability of execution of operation navigation is higher than the low navigation state. A state in which operation navigation is not executed or a high navigation state may be set as a state in which operation navigation is executed. If a stop operation is performed in accordance with the operation contents of the operation navigation, an advantageous result is brought to the player, so the high navigation state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, advantageous specifically refers to the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine compared to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets on the gaming machine when playing for a predetermined period of time. It refers to the ratio, so-called payout rate (ball output rate).

In this embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied in the low navigation state (for example, when a winning combination other than a loss is won), the game shifts to the normal state of the high navigation state. After that, as shown in FIG. 174(c), for example, the transition is made in the order of confirmation notification state → AT1 state → judge state, and from this judge state, the game goes through the pullback state to the normal gaming state or the AT2 state. There are routes and routes that directly transition from the judge state to the AT2 state. In this embodiment, when it is determined to shift to the AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state), a predetermined number (for example, 50 games, etc.) of the number of AT mode games (hereinafter referred to as the number of AT games) is provided. Further, although details will be described later, if a certain condition is satisfied in the high navigation state, the state shifts to the LMT (limit) state.

<AT system state transition>
FIG. 174(b) is a diagram showing performance states in each AT system game state. Each gaming state of the AT system is managed in a further subdivided manner, as shown in FIG. 174(b), and this is called a performance state. In detail, the performance states of the low navigation state are the normal state, and the performance states of the high navigation state include the normal state, confirmed notification state, judge state, pullback state, AT1 state, AT2 state, and LMT (limit) state. . Note that the AT1 state, AT2 state, and LMT (limit) state are states in which the number of balls produced increases in principle.

Here, the limit state basically refers to the production state from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state, which is the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state (from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state). There may be cases where the presentation state is not the limit state, but this case will be discussed later). In this embodiment, when there are 20 or fewer games remaining in the high navigation state, an ending effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ED effect") indicating the end of the high navigation state is executed.

<Operation of slot machine>
Based on the above characteristics, the processing of the main control section 300, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500 will be described below using the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 177. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG. 177 according to the control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. Details will be described later using FIG. 181, but this initial setting includes setting the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting interrupt prohibition, initial setting of the I/O 310, and various variables stored in the RAM 308. initial settings, permission to operate the WDT 314, and initial value settings.

In step S102, a bet number setting/start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, it is checked whether medals have been inserted or not, and preparations are made to send an insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted. Note that if the player wins a replay combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so there is no need for the player to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether the start lever 135 has been operated or not, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the process advances to step S103.

In step S103, a winning line determination process is performed to determine the number of inserted medals and to determine a valid winning line.

In step S104, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is acquired, and a winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read out according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the obtained random number value, and the results of this internal lottery are displayed. Preparations are made for transmitting the internal lottery command to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the activation combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S105, a reel stop data selection process is performed to select reel stop data based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery process. Note that this reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300. Further, in step S105, preparations are made to transmit a reel stop data command including information regarding the selected reel stop data to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S106, based on the start lever operation, the performance state control process A regarding the control of the AT system game state described above is executed. In step S107, production processing is executed. In this production processing, various production controls and the like are performed.

In step S108, a reel rotation start process is executed, and rotation of all reels 110 to 112 is started.

In step S109, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any stop button is pressed, a stop table of reel stop data is created in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Referring to this, one of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. When all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S110. In addition, in this step S109, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (in detail, for the first stop operation, a stop button reception 1 command, a second stop operation (for the stop button reception 2 command, for the third stop operation, the stop button reception 3 command) is prepared to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel Reel stop command regarding the stop position (in detail, for the first stop reel, reel stop 1 command, for the second stop operation, reel stop 2 command, for the third stop operation, reel stop command) 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, a winning determination process is performed to determine winning. In this winning determination process, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" are aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that a small winning combination 3 (Bell) has been won. Further, in this step S110, preparations are made for transmitting a winning determination command indicating the winning determination result to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S111, medal award processing is performed. In the medal awarding process, if a prize is won in any winning combination that has a payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S112, a gaming state control process is performed. In the game state control process, processing related to transition of each RT-based game state is performed, and the game state is transitioned when the start condition or end condition is satisfied. Also, preparations are made for transmitting a gaming status command including information indicating the current RT-based gaming status.

In step S113, the production state control process B related to the control of the AT system gaming state described above is executed. In step S114, high navigation state termination processing regarding the termination of the high navigation state is executed.

With the above, one game ends. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S2006 in FIG. 178) of the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 178. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Start processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S2001, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing for temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

In step S2002, the WDT 314 is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed (once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

In step S2003, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each type of sensor 318. The signal state is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S2004, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed. In step S2005, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in respective time units.

In step S2006, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it becomes possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S2007, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

In step S2008, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S2003, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Illustration omitted) Executes error handling. Furthermore, settings are made for the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators according to the current gaming state.

In step S2009, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (if power cutoff is detected), the process advances to step S2011, and if the low voltage signal is off (if power cutoff is not detected), the process goes to step S2010.

In step S2010, various processes are performed to terminate the timer interrupt termination process. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S2001 are set in each original register. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG. 177.

On the other hand, in step S2011, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at power outage upon power restoration are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as restoration data, and power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 179. Note that FIG. 179(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 179(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 179(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 179(a).

When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S3001. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408, etc. are performed. Through this process, an area for storing internal winning information, which is information representing the result of internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming state, are provided in the RAM 408, respectively.

In step S3002, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S3003. In step S3003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S3004, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S3005, effect control processing is performed. Here, preparations for the performance are made in accordance with the performance reservation information in the performance reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing an update process of the effect data if it is necessary to update the effect data.

In step S3006, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S3005, this command is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S3007, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command for the various lamps 420 in the performance data read in step S3005, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S3008, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if the effect data read in step S3005 includes a command for the shutter 163, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. In step S3009, information output processing is performed to perform settings for transmitting a command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S3005, settings are made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S3002.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 179(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S3101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 179(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S3201, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S3002 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 179(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S3002, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S3202, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S3009, and the random value for effect is updated.

<Processing of second sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 180. Note that FIG. 180(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 180(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 180(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 180(d) is a flowchart of image control processing by the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S4001 of FIG. 180(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S4001. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 508, initialization of the storage area in the VRAM 536, etc. are performed.

In step S4002, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S4003. In step S4003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S4004, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S4005, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S4004, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading out effect data for controlling an image related to a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. It also includes performing processes such as reading out performance data other than this from the ROM 506, and performing update processing of the performance data when it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S4006, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S4005. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S4005, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding display images (notification images, background images) is performed. When this image control processing is completed, the process returns to step S4002.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using FIG. 180(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S4101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 180(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S4201, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S4002 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 180(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S4002, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S4202, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control process of step S4006 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 180(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S4301, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 536), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 534 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 536. Set the command to start data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S4302, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S4303; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. wait until

In step S4303, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S4301, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 536, image size , VRAM coordinates (location coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 534. The VDP 534 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S4304, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S4305, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S5306; otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal is input. Wait for input.

In step S4306, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Initial setting process>
Next, the initial setting process (step S101) of the main control section main process described using FIG. 177 will be described using FIG. 181. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the flow of initial setting processing.

First, in step S201 that is executed first, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, etc. .

In step S202, whether the low voltage signal is on or not, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 330 determines whether the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment). monitor whether a low voltage signal is output indicating that the voltage has decreased. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects a power cutoff), this step S202 is repeatedly executed, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 has not detected a power cutoff) Then, the process advances to step S203. Note that even if the supply voltage has not yet reached the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, step S202 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches the predetermined value or higher.

In step S203, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a value in the counter timer 312 that determines the period for periodically executing the main control unit timer interrupt process, a process of setting a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, a test output port, Processing to output a clear signal from the output port to the sub-control unit 400, setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, etc. are performed.

In step S204, it is determined whether the setting key has been rotated to the on position. If the setting key has been rotated to the on position, the process advances to step S211; otherwise, the process advances to step S205.

In step S205, the setting change flag is set to OFF, and then the process proceeds to step S207. In step S207, it is determined whether there is any abnormality in the data stored in the RAM 308. The data determined here is data saved in the RAM 308 when the power of the slot machine 100 is turned off or due to a momentary power outage. That is, it is determined in step S207 whether the data has been reliably saved in the RAM 308. If there is an abnormality in this data, the process advances to step S208, and if there is no abnormality, the process advances to step S209.

In step S208, RWM error processing is performed. In this RWM error processing, preparations are made to clear all the storage areas of the RAM (RWM) 308 except for the used stack area, and then the process shifts to an infinite loop state. From this state, after turning the power back on, the game can be started by operating the setting key switch.

In step S209, it is determined whether forced RWM clear is in the ON state. Specifically, when the power is turned on and the RWM clear button (not shown) is pressed for a long time (for example, pressed for 5 seconds or more), forced RWM clear is turned on. Then, if the forced RWM clear is in the ON state, the process moves to step S212, and if it is in the OFF state, the process moves to step S210.

In step S210, the data stored in the RAM 308 is written back to the register of the CPU 304, and the register state is returned to the state immediately before the power-off processing is executed.In the next step S213, the power-on setting After executing related processing (details will be described later), the process advances to step S214.

In step S211, which is proceeded when the setting key has been rotated to the on position in step S204, RWM clear processing is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S212. In step S212, the setting change flag is set to on, and in the next step S213, a power-on setting related process (details will be described later) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S214.

In step S214, processing for starting the WDT 314 is performed. Here, startup permission for the WDT 314 and initial value settings are performed. Note that in this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value equivalent to 32.8 ms as an initial value. After that, this initial setting process ends.

<Processing related to power-on settings>
Next, the power-on setting related processing (steps S206 and S212) of the initial setting processing described using FIG. 181 will be described using FIGS. 182 and 183. FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the flow of power-on setting-related processing, and FIG. 183 is a diagram showing an example of various notifications.

Prior to explaining the power-on setting-related processing, various means used for various notifications will be explained using FIG. 183(a). FIG. 183(a) is a front view schematically showing the appearance of the slot machine 100.

The slot machine 100 uses the light emitting bodies 137a of each of the upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, and stop buttons 137 to 139 described with reference to FIG. , 138a, 139a, and a backlight for each reel 110 to 112.

Details will be described later, but in this example, in various notifications, the light emitting bodies 137a, 138a, 139a of the upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, and stop buttons 137 to 139 are lit in red, and when the error is resolved, lights up the light emitters 137a, 138a, and 139a of each of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in pink. Further, the backlight of each of the reels 110 to 112 in a stopped state lights up in red, and the backlight of each of the rotating reels 110 to 112 in a stopped state lights up in blue.

In addition, the slot machine 100 includes a payout number display 127, a stored number display 125, a liquid crystal display device (effect image display device), and a liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) as display means capable of displaying various types of information when making various notifications. Equipped with 157 etc. Although details will be described later, in this example, when an error occurs, an error code is displayed on the payout number display 127, and when the error is resolved, the error code is erased (cleared). Further, when confirming the setting, the set value is displayed on the payout number display 127.

Further, the slot machine 100 includes the speakers 272, 277, etc. described using FIG. 171 as sound output means capable of outputting sounds when making various notifications. Although details will be described later, in this example, various sounds are output from the speakers 272 and 277 depending on the contents of various notifications.

Note that the notification mode (color, means, etc.) of various notifications is not limited to this example; for example, a lamp or an LED may be lit in a color other than red or pink, or a light output means, a sound output means, etc. Instead of (or in addition to) the display means, various notifications may be made by, for example, the movement of a movable means such as the shutter 163.

As shown in FIG. 182, in step S301 of the power-on setting related process, an instruction is given to execute a power-on notification to notify that the power has been turned on, and then the process advances to step S302.

FIG. 183(b) is a diagram showing an example of power-on notification. In this example, in response to a power-on notification instruction, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the light emitting bodies 137a, 138a, 139a of each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the backlight of each reel 110 to 112 in a stopped state are turned red. lights up, and the speakers 272 and 277 output a voice saying "Power has been turned on."

If no error occurs when the power-on notification is executed, the payout number display 127 is hidden (without displaying an error code), and the setting key is turned off when the power-on notification is executed. In this case, the stored number of medals display 125 is used to display the number of credits (the number of electronically stored medals) at the time of the most recent power outage.

In step S302, it is determined whether a certain error has occurred, and if so, the process advances to step S303, and if not, the process advances to step S310. In step S303, an instruction is given to execute error notification to notify the error code (identifier) of a certain error that has occurred, and then the process advances to step S304.

Here, errors that may occur in the slot machine 100 include medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow error, RAM failure, prize winning error, and the like.

Medal insertion error 1 occurs when the inserted medals are stuck, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E1. Medal insertion error 1 is resolved when the error release switch (setting switch in this example) is operated after the cause of the error is removed. Medal insertion abnormality 2 occurs when the number of inserted medals is equal to or greater than the specified number, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E2. The medal insertion error 2 can be resolved by changing the set value or clearing the RAM.

The medal insertion abnormality 3 occurs when either the insertion sensor 1 or the insertion sensor 2 is turned on other than during the medal insertion process, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E3. The medal insertion error 4 occurs when the inserted medals do not pass through the insertion sensor 1 and the insertion sensor 2 normally, and the corresponding error code is, for example, EA. The medal insertion abnormality 3 and the medal insertion abnormality 4 are resolved when the error release switch (setting switch in this example) is operated after the cause of the error is removed.

Medal payout abnormality 1 occurs when no medals are paid out for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is driven, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E4. Medal payout abnormality 2 occurs when medals are accumulated when the medal payout device is driven, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E5. The medal payout abnormality 3 occurs when either the payout sensor 1 or the payout sensor 2 is turned on other than during the medal payout process, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E5. All of the medal payout abnormalities 1 to 3 are resolved when the error release switch (setting switch in this example) is operated after the cause of the error is removed.

The overflow abnormality occurs when the overflow terminal of the medal auxiliary storage is turned on, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E7. The overflow abnormality is resolved when the error release switch (setting switch in this example) is operated after the cause of the error is removed. A RAM failure occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM 308, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E8. A RAM failure is resolved when an operation of an error release switch (setting key in this example) is accepted. A winning abnormality occurs when, after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, a winning symbol different from the winning symbol determined by the internal lottery is won, and the corresponding error code is, for example, E9. The winning abnormality is resolved when the operation of the error release switch (setting switch in this example) is accepted.

Note that the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to the slot machine 100, but can also be applied to a pachinko machine. Errors that can occur in pachinko machines include, for example, lower tray full error, payout device error, payout excess error, incorrect payout error, main control communication error, magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, frame opening error, and RAM clear error. , impact sensor error, etc. These errors are also resolved when the error release switch is operated after the cause of the error is removed.

FIG. 183(e) is a diagram showing an example of notification of a certain error and notification of a setting change impossible state. In this example, in response to an error notification instruction, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the light emitters 137a, 138a, 139a of each of the stop buttons 137-139, and the backlight of each reel 110-112 in a stopped state are turned red. While maintaining the lighted state, an error code (for example, E1) is displayed using the payout number display 127.

In step S304, as part of the setting change operation, an instruction is given to execute a setting change impossible state notification to notify that the setting cannot be changed even if the setting key is operated (first state). Afterwards, the process advances to step S305. In this example, in response to an instruction to notify a state in which settings cannot be changed, an image including a character string "settings cannot be changed" is displayed using the liquid crystal display device 157 while maintaining error notification. In addition, if a certain error that makes a setting change invalid occurs multiple times, the display on the liquid crystal display device 157 may be the same, or the configuration may be such that information that allows identification of the type of error is also notified. It's okay.

In step S305, it is determined whether a certain error has been resolved. If the error has not been resolved, the determination process of step S305 is continued; if the error has been resolved, the process advances to step S306.

The method for resolving a certain error is not particularly limited, but as mentioned above, in most cases of errors that may occur in the slot machine 100, after the cause of the error is removed, the operation of the error release switch (in this example, the setting key) is accepted. It will be resolved if

The setting switch can be operated to change settings (setting value change operation) or to confirm settings, and can also be used as an error release switch that can be used to eliminate various errors (error resolution operation). is also a functioning operating means, so if you reset the error by pressing the setting switch and then move to a state where settings can be changed, the setting value may change (for example, +1) due to the incorrect pressing of the setting switch. There is a risk that you will be

However, in this example, when both the setting value changing operation and error resolving operation are possible, the error resolving operation takes priority and is valid, and the setting value changing operation is invalidated, so the setting value may be set incorrectly. In addition, it is possible to give priority to solving the error, and the game can be started after the error is solved as soon as possible.

In step S306, an instruction is given to execute error code hiding to erase the error code corresponding to a certain error that has been resolved, and then the process advances to step S307. In this example, in response to the instruction to hide the error code, the displayed error code is erased (cleared) using the payout number display 127.

In step S307, it is determined whether or not the setting key has been rotated to the on position. If the setting key has been rotated to the on position, the process advances to step S308, and if not, the power-on setting related Finish the process. In step S308, an instruction is given to execute setting confirmation notification to notify that setting confirmation (details will be described later using FIG. 184) is possible, and then the process advances to step S309.

FIG. 183(d) is a diagram showing an example of setting confirmation notification. In this example, in response to the setting confirmation notification instruction, each of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is pressed while keeping the upper lamp 142, side lamp 144, and backlights of the stopped reels 110 to 112 lit in red. The light emitters 137a, 138a, and 139a are turned on in pink, and the payout number display 127 is used to display the current set value (for example, the number 3 indicating the set value 3). Further, the speakers 272 and 277 output a voice saying "Settings are being confirmed."

Further, in step S308, a setting confirmation process is performed. In this setting confirmation process, when a press operation of the setting switch is detected, the initial setting value (for example, setting 1) or the setting value set by changing the setting (any of setting 1 to setting 6) is set. is displayed on the payout number display 127.

In step S309, it is determined whether the setting key is off (whether it has been turned back from on to off by rotating the setting key), and if it is on, the process returns to step S307 and the setting can be confirmed using the setting switch. continue in this state. On the other hand, when the setting key is off (when the setting key is turned from on to off by rotating the setting key), the power-on setting-related process is ended. Thereby, the process moves to the bet number setting/start operation acceptance process (step S102) of the main control unit main process, and the normal game is started.

In step S310, which is proceeded when it is determined in step S302 that a certain error has not occurred, it is determined whether or not the setting key has been rotated to the on position. If so, the process advances to step S311, and if not, the power-on setting-related process is ended.

In step S311, it is determined whether the setting change flag is on or off, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S312, where setting change notification is sent to notify that setting change (details will be described later using FIG. 184) is possible. After giving an instruction to execute, the process proceeds to step S314, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S313, and after giving an instruction to execute the setting confirmation notification described using FIG. 183(d), the process proceeds to step S314. .

Note that the determination as to whether to proceed to the setting change process in step S313 or the setting confirmation process in step S313 is not limited to the one based on the flag; for example, it is determined whether the setting key is on after power is turned on, The configuration may be such that when the setting key is turned on (when the setting key is turned on after the power is turned on), the process proceeds to the setting confirmation process.

FIG. 183(c) is a diagram showing an example of setting change notification. In this example, in response to a setting change notification instruction, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the light emitting bodies 137a, 138a, 139a of each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the backlight of each reel 110 to 112 in a stopped state are turned red. The current set value (for example, the number 3 indicating the set value 3) is displayed using the payout number display 127 while maintaining the lit state. Further, the speakers 272 and 277 output a voice saying "The door is open."

Further, in step S312, a setting change process is performed. In this setting change process, each time a pressing operation of the setting switch is detected, the currently set setting values 1 to 6 are added and updated by 1, and when the setting value exceeds 6, it returns to 1. Execute repeatedly. It also determines whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the setting value currently displayed on the payout number display 127 is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 308. and confirm the setting value.

Further, in step S313, a setting confirmation process is performed. In this setting confirmation process, when a press operation of the setting switch is detected, the initial setting value (for example, setting 1) or the setting value set by changing the setting (any of setting 1 to setting 6) is set. is displayed on the payout number display 127.

In step S314, it is determined whether or not the setting key is off (whether the setting key has been turned from on to off by rotating the setting key), and if it is on, the process returns to step S310 to change or set the settings using the setting switch. Continue to be able to confirm. On the other hand, if the setting key is off (when it is detected that the setting key has been turned back from on to off by the rotational operation of the setting key), the process advances to step S315.

In step S315, it is determined whether the setting change flag is on or off, and if it is on, the process advances to step S316, and if it is off, the process related to the settings at power-on is finished, and the setting change flag is set in the main process of the main control unit. - The process moves to start operation acceptance processing (step S102), and the normal game is started.

In step S316, an instruction is given to execute a setting change completion notification to notify that the setting change has been completed, and in the next step S317, after setting the setting change flag to OFF, the power-on setting related process is ended, The process moves to the bet number setting/start operation reception process (step S102) of the main control unit main process, and the normal game is started. In this example, in response to the setting change completion notification instruction, as shown in FIG. 183(c), the speakers 272 and 277 output a voice saying "Settings are complete."

<Errors that take priority over setting changes/setting changes and setting confirmation>
Next, setting changes and setting confirmations that can be executed by the gaming machine according to this embodiment will be explained using FIGS. 184 and 185.

Here, setting change refers to changing the setting value of the gaming machine, and in this example, while displaying the setting value (any of settings 1 to 6) on the payout number display 127, the operation means ( Each time a press operation of the setting switch (setting switch) is detected, the currently set setting values 1 to 6 are incremented by 1 and updated, and when the setting value exceeds 6, the process returns to 1, which is repeated. It is possible to change the setting value.

Note that if the start lever 135 (described later) is operated without pressing the operating means (setting switch) or by repeatedly pressing the operating means (setting switch), the set value will change once (for example, setting 5). → When setting 5) and operating the start lever 135, the settings will be the same as the settings before the power cut.

In addition, setting confirmation refers to checking the setting values of the game machine, and in this example, the initial setting value (for example, setting 1) or setting By displaying the changed set value (any of settings 1 to 6) on the payout number display 127, the set value can be confirmed.

<Errors that take priority over setting changes/Setting changes and setting confirmation/Normal times>
FIG. 184(a) is a diagram showing an example of the flow of setting changes in normal times when no error occurs in the gaming machine, and FIG. 185 is a diagram showing an example of various notifications.

When the power is turned on (FIG. 184(a)(2)) with the setting key on (FIG. 184(a)(1)), the setting change flag is set in the initial setting process explained using FIG. 181. This is set to on, and the power-on setting-related processing described using FIG. 182 is executed.

In this power-on setting-related process, first, after the power-on notification (FIG. 184(a) (3)) as shown in FIG. 185(a) is executed, no error has occurred in this example. , and since the setting change flag is on, the setting can be changed by operating the setting switch, and when the setting switch is operated, the setting change notification as shown in FIG. 184(a)(4)).

In addition, if it is detected that the setting key has returned from on to off after the operation of the start lever 135 has been accepted and the setting value has been determined, a setting change completion notification ( 184(a)(5)) and confirming the setting value currently displayed on the setting value display, the normal game is started based on this setting value (Fig. 184(a) (6)).

FIG. 184(b) is a diagram showing an example of the flow of setting confirmation in normal times when no errors occur in the gaming machine.
@
When the power is turned on (FIG. 184(b)(1)) with the setting key in the OFF state, the setting change flag is set to OFF in the initial setting process explained using FIG. The described power-on setting-related processing is executed.

In this power-on setting-related process, first, after a power-on notification (FIG. 184(b) (2)) as shown in FIG. 185(a) is executed, no error has occurred in this example. , and since the setting change flag is off, if the setting key is on (Fig. 184(b) (3)), the setting confirmation notification as shown in Fig. 185(d) (Fig. 184(b) )(4)).

Further, when it is detected that the setting key has returned from on to off, the normal game is started based on the current setting value (FIG. 184(b)(5)).

<Errors that take priority over setting changes/Setting changes and setting confirmation/When an error occurs>
FIG. 183(c) is a diagram showing an example of the flow of setting confirmation when an error occurs in a game machine.

When the power is turned on (Fig. 184 (c) (2)) in a state where a certain error has occurred (Fig. 184 (c) (1)), the settings related to the power-on settings explained using Fig. 182 Processing is executed while an error occurs in processing.

In this power-on setting-related process, first, after a power-on notification (FIG. 184(c) (3)) as shown in FIG. 185(a) is executed, an error occurs in this example. Therefore, while the liquid crystal display device 157 is preparing, as shown in FIG. 185(b), before the liquid crystal display device 157 starts displaying, the error code determined by the error determination (E1 in this example) is displayed to display the number of coins to be paid out. At the same time, when the preparation of the liquid crystal display device 157 is completed, an error notification is displayed on the device 127 (FIG. 184(c)(4)), and a setting change impossible status notification is displayed as shown in FIG. 185(c). By executing (FIG. 184(c)(5)), it is notified that an error has occurred and that the settings cannot be changed (first state).

Furthermore, when the error that has occurred is resolved (Fig. 184(c)(6)), the error notification and setting change impossible status notification are terminated (Fig. 184(c)(7)), and the setting key is is on, a setting confirmation notification (Fig. 184(c) (9)) as shown in Fig. 185(d) is executed, and when it is detected that the setting key has returned from on to off, , the normal game is started based on the current setting value (FIG. 184(c)(10)). Further, even if the setting key is in the OFF state after the error is resolved, the normal game is started based on the current setting value (FIG. 184(c)(8)).

To continue changing settings, turn on the power again with the setting key turned on, and perform the operation according to the flow of changing settings described using FIG. 184(a).

According to this example, even if a certain error is resolved, the settings cannot be changed without performing operations that follow the flow of setting changes, so the settings can be changed reliably.

<Errors that take priority over setting changes/features of the invention>
As explained above, the game machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 169, the pachinko machine) is a game machine that can notify a certain error, and the certain error is It is at least one error out of multiple types of errors (for example, medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow error, RAM failure, prize winning error, etc.) that may occur in the gaming machine, and If the power is turned off with an error occurring and the error continues when the power is turned on after the power is turned off, operate the setting key as part of the setting change operation (for example, A state in which the set value cannot be changed even if the setting key switch is turned on (as shown in FIG. 184(a)(1)) (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"; for example, in FIG. 182 This game machine is characterized in that it enters a setting change impossible state (shown in step S304).

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent a situation where an error occurs after the operation to change the setting value is completed and the game is started, and the operation to change the setting value is wasted. This can be avoided and work efficiency can be improved.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 169, the pachinko machine) is a gaming machine that can notify a certain error, and the certain error is caused when the gaming machine This is at least one error among multiple types of errors that may occur (for example, medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow error, RAM failure, prize winning error, etc.), and the certain error occurs. If the power is turned off while the power is on, and the error continues when the power is turned on after the power is turned off, operate the setting key as part of the setting change operation (for example, in Figure 184 (a) ) (1), in which the setting value cannot be changed even if the setting key switch is rotated to turn it on (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"; for example, in step S304 of FIG. 182). After the notification of the certain error (for example, the notification of the certain error shown in FIG. 183(d)) is started, the notification of the first state is started. (For example, a setting change impossible state notification as shown in FIG. 183(d) is performed).

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent a situation where an error occurs after the operation to change the setting value is completed and the game is started, and the operation to change the setting value is wasted. This can be avoided and work efficiency can be improved. In addition, in order to notify the first state after a certain error notification has started, it is easy to understand that a certain error has occurred and that the setting value cannot be changed. It is possible to improve workability.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 169, the pachinko machine) is a gaming machine that can notify a certain error, and the certain error is caused when the gaming machine This is at least one error among multiple types of errors that may occur (for example, medal insertion errors 1 to 4, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow error, RAM failure, prize winning error, etc.), and the certain error occurs. If the power is turned off while the power is on, and the error continues when the power is turned on after the power is turned off, operate the setting key as part of the setting change operation (for example, in Figure 184 (a) ) (1), in which the setting value cannot be changed even if the setting key switch is rotated to turn it on (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"; for example, in step S304 of FIG. 182). After the power-on notification (for example, the power-on notification shown in FIG. 183(b)) is started, the notification that the first state is in the first state is started (for example, 183(d)).

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent a situation where an error occurs after the operation to change the setting value is completed and the game is started, and the operation to change the setting value is wasted. This can be avoided and work efficiency can be improved. In addition, since the first state is notified after the power-on notification has started, it is possible to clearly notify that the power has been turned on and that the setting value cannot be changed. This can further improve work efficiency.

In addition, if a power outage is detected in the first state with the certain error resolved and the power is turned on after the power outage, the setting value can be changed by the setting change operation (e.g. , a state in which settings can be changed as shown in FIG. 17(f)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting value while reliably eliminating the error, and it is possible to prevent unnecessary work from occurring.

The operating means (for example, a setting key) is provided, and the operating means is an operating means capable of executing a setting value changing operation that changes a setting value as part of the setting changing operation, and the operating means The operating means is capable of performing an error clearing operation to clear a certain error, and when the operating means is operated in the first state, the error clearing operation becomes valid and the setting value changing operation becomes invalid. It may be.

With such a configuration, not only will the setting value not be set incorrectly, but it will also be possible to give priority to resolving the error, allowing the error to be resolved as soon as possible and the game to be started. .

In addition, when the power is turned on, a state in which the certain error does not occur is a state in which setting values can be changed (hereinafter referred to as a "second state". For example, as shown in FIG. 184(a), (a state in which settings can be changed) and a state in which setting values can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as the "third state"; for example, a state in which settings can be confirmed as shown in FIG. 184(b)). Turning on the power while a certain operation using the setting key (for example, turning on the setting key switch as shown in FIG. 184(a)(1)) is performed as part of a setting change operation. In this case, the second state occurs, and the certain operation (for example, the operation of turning the setting key switch to turn it on as shown in FIG. 184(b)(3)) is performed after the power is turned on. If the power is turned off while the certain error occurs, and the power is turned on after the certain operation is performed, the third state will occur. When the first state is reached and the certain error is resolved in the first state, the state may be shifted to the third state.

With this configuration, the settings can be checked after the error has been resolved, making it possible to ensure that the settings have not been changed to incorrect values due to an error (or malfunctions have occurred). can be confirmed and work efficiency can be improved.

Further, the certain error may include an error related to the payout of game media (for example, medal payout abnormalities 1 to 3).

With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an error will occur even if the game is started.

<Button effects that change depending on the operating method>
Next, button effects that change depending on the operating method will be described using FIGS. 186 to 188.

<Button production/first production that changes the production depending on the operation method>
FIGS. 186 and 187 are diagrams chronologically showing an example of a performance (pseudo bonus) in which the first performance (first button performance) is executed.

A certain effect consists of a first operation (in this example, one press operation (single press) of the effect button shown in FIG. 169) and a second operation different from the first operation (in this example, The long press operation (including automatic operation) and continuous press operation of the effect button shown in FIG. A presentation (in this example, a presentation including an operation response display) is executed.

In addition to the pseudo-bonus effects described with reference to FIGS. 186 to 188, certain effects include bonuses, AT games, mini-games, etc. If the game machine is a pachinko machine, there may be a jackpot. Includes performances such as games. Further, the first effect includes various effects executed based on the first operation, in addition to the first button effect described using FIGS. 186 and 187.

FIG. 186(a) shows an example of performance in a normal game. In this example, in a normal game, two icons IC1 and IC2 (character images in this example) are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 to notify the player that two items have been awarded. ing.

Here, the item is a benefit given to the player according to the internal winning combination, the number of addictive games, and the like. In this example, the item given to the player can be used as a pseudo bonus, and the configuration is such that one button effect can be performed for each item. In addition, by acquiring items, the possibility of moving to AT gaming (excluding pseudo bonuses) increases after the pseudo bonus ends, but if the pseudo bonus does not move to AT gaming after the pseudo bonus ends, the player will switch to normal gaming. .

Subsequently, FIG. 186(b) shows an example of a bonus confirmation effect indicating that the shift to a pseudo bonus has been confirmed. In this example, in a normal game, a bonus confirmation effect (in this example, a display including a character string such as "Bonus Confirmed!!") is executed to notify that the transition to a pseudo bonus has been confirmed, and the liquid crystal display device 157 By displaying four icons IC1 to IC4 (in this example, character images) in the display area, the player is notified that four items have been awarded.

Subsequently, FIG. 186(c) shows an example of a pseudo bonus start effect indicating that a pseudo bonus has started, and an item display indicating the current number of items. In this example, the third stop operation in the game is used as an opportunity to display an item display (in this example, a character string such as "4 Chances" to notify the player that four items have been awarded) and a character image. A pseudo-bonus start effect (in this example, a display including a character string such as "Press the button to get the item") is started.

Subsequently, FIG. 186(d) shows an example of button IN animation 1 that foretells that the first operation will become effective before the operation validity period of the first first operation. In this example, by displaying the effect image EF1 in the button IN animation 1, the first operation request display (button image BT1) appears (is displayed) at the display position of the effect image EF1, that is, , suggesting that the first operation is valid.

Subsequently, FIG. 186(e) shows an example of button IN animation 2 that foretells that the first operation will become effective before the operation validity period of the first first operation. In this example, by displaying the effect image EF2 in the button IN animation 2, the first operation request display (button image BT1) appears (is displayed) at the display position of the effect image EF2, that is, This suggests that the first operation is effective.

Subsequently, FIG. 186(f) shows an example of the first operation request display. In this example, after erasing effect EF2 of button IN animation 2, a button image BT1 imitating the appearance of the production button and a character string such as "Press!" are started to be displayed as an operation request display. It suggests that the first operation (single press of the production button) is valid (the validity period of the first operation has started) and prompts the first operation (single press of the production button). .

Subsequently, FIG. 186(g) shows an example of an operation response display and a result display in response to the first operation (single press of the production button). In this example, when the first operation (single press of the production button) is received, the operation response display corresponding to the operation is given, indicating that a benefit advantageous to the player has been granted. A display SG1 (in this example, a display including a character string such as "winning rate level 1 UP") and a result display RG1 consisting of a character image of a bancho are displayed.

Subsequently, FIG. 186(h) shows an example of a continuation of the result display RG1 of the operation response display. In this example, an animation is executed in which the privilege award display SG1 displayed in FIG. 10G is erased and the result display RG1 displayed in FIG.

Subsequently, FIG. 186(i) shows a continuation of the result display RG1 of the operation response display and an example of the button IN animation 1 that foretells that the second first operation (single press of the production button) will be effective. ing. In this example, by executing an animation that gradually reduces the size of result display RG1, and displaying effect image EF1 on button IN animation 1 so as to overlap in front of the animation, the second This indicates that the first operation (single press of the production button) is valid and the first operation is valid.

Subsequently, FIG. 186(j) shows a continuation of the result display RG1 and an example of a button IN animation 2 that foretells that the second first operation (single press of the effect button) will become effective. In this example, by executing an animation that gradually reduces the size of result display RG1, and displaying effect image EF2 on button IN animation 2 so as to overlap in front of the animation, the second This indicates that the first operation (single press of the production button) is within the operation validity period and the first operation is valid.

Subsequently, FIG. 186(k) shows an example of the second operation request display. In this example, a character string such as "Press!" is started to be displayed as an operation request display, and the appearance of the production button is modeled so that it overlaps in front of the result display RG1 corresponding to the first operation request display. By displaying the pressed button image BT2, it is suggested to the player that the first operation (single press of the performance button) is valid (the validity period of the operation has started), and the first operation (single press of the performance button) is displayed. (single button press).

According to this example, in the case of a single press of the production button, the previous operation response display (result display RG1) is overlapped with the next operation request display (button image BT2), so the operation method of the operation means is It is possible to perform a performance according to the user's needs, prevent the game from becoming monotonous, and make the game more exciting. Further, by making the next operation request display stand out, it is possible to improve the player's desire to perform the operation.

Subsequently, FIG. 186(l) shows an example in which the display mode of the second operation request display is changed. In this example, the result display RG1 corresponding to the first operation request display is moved to the lower right of the display area, and the button image BT2 displayed in FIG. (Big button). The button image BT3 (big button) is a display (chance up button display) that is easier to derive a more advantageous result than the button image BT2, and in this example, it is configured to increase the winning rate by two or more levels.

According to this example, in the case of a single push of the performance button, a display that tends to lead to an advantageous result may be displayed, so that it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming monotonous and to enliven the game.

Subsequently, FIG. 187(m) shows an example of the operation response display and result display in response to the second first operation (single press of the production button). In this example, when the second first operation (single press of the production button) is received, the operation response display corresponding to the operation indicates that a benefit advantageous to the player has been granted. A display SG2 (in this example, a display including a character string such as "AT additional level 2UP") and a result display RG2 consisting of a panda character image are displayed.

FIG. 187(n) shows an example of a result display in response to the first to fourth operations (single press of the effect button). In this example, after the fourth first operation (single press of the production button), the operation response display corresponding to all the first operations from the first to fourth times suggests the benefits granted in the pseudo bonus. A bonus granting display SGA (in this example, a display including a character string such as "Winning rate LV4, add-on LV3") and lottery result displays RG1 to RG4 in the pseudo bonus starting game are displayed.

FIG. 187(o) shows an example of a confrontation performance during a pseudo bonus. In this example, an animation including a scene where Yoshimune and Chuta confront each other is executed as a confrontation effect.

FIG. 187(p) shows an example of result determination (win effect), and FIG. 187(q) shows an example of an AT game effect. In this example, if the conditions for transitioning from a pseudo-bonus to an AT game are met (for example, if more than a predetermined number of items can be obtained in the pseudo-bonus), after executing the confrontation effect shown in FIG. 187(o), As a result determination, after executing a victory performance (in this example, an animation including a scene in which Yoshimune wins a confrontation) suggesting a transition to an AT game, the AT game is started in the next game.

FIG. 187(p') shows an example of result determination (defeat effect), and FIG. 187(q') shows an example of normal game effect. In this example, if the conditions for transitioning from a pseudo-bonus to an AT game are not met (for example, if more than a predetermined number of items could not be obtained in the pseudo-bonus), the confrontation effect shown in FIG. 187(o) is executed. Later, as a result determination, a defeat effect (in this example, an animation including a scene in which Yoshimune loses in a confrontation) suggesting a transition to a normal game is executed, and then the normal game is continued in the next game.

<Button performance/Second performance that changes depending on the operation method>
FIG. 188 is a diagram chronologically showing an example of a performance (pseudo bonus) in which a second performance (second button performance) is executed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 188(d) to 188(f) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 186(d) to 186(f), so the explanation thereof will be omitted.

A certain effect consists of a first operation (in this example, one press operation (single press) of the effect button shown in FIG. 169) and a second operation different from the first operation (in this example, This is a performance in which at least the long-press operation (including automatic long-press operation (long-press auto) and continuous press operation) of the performance button shown in FIG. 169 is effective, and in the certain performance, the second operation is If so, a second performance (in this example, a performance including an operation response display) is performed.

Note that, as described later, even if a third operation (for example, a continuous press operation in which one press is repeated at short intervals) is performed, the third operation is different from the first operation and the second operation. The configuration may be such that the second effect is executed.

Note that the second effect includes various effects executed based on the second operation in addition to the second button effect described using FIG. 188.

FIGS. 188(g) and 188(h) show examples of operation request displays. In this example, by starting to display a button image BT1 that imitates the appearance of the production button and a character string such as "Press!" as an operation request display, the player is prompted to perform the second operation (long-press the production button). ) is valid (the validity period of the operation has started).

Subsequently, FIGS. 188(i) and 188(j) show an example of an operation response display and a result display in response to the first second operation (long-press automatic production button). In this example, when the second operation (auto long press of the production button) is accepted for the first time (auto operation (automatic operation) is set by the player, and the long press of the production button is performed, the game When the control unit of the machine deems it), as an operation response display corresponding to the operation, a privilege granting display SG1 indicating that an advantageous privilege has been granted to the player (in this example, "Winning rate level 1 UP") is displayed. A display including a character string) and a result display RG1 consisting of a character image of the bancho are displayed.

Subsequently, FIG. 188(k) shows an example of a continuation of the result display RG1 of the operation response display. In this example, an animation is executed in which the privilege award display SG1 displayed in FIG. 12(j) is erased, and the result display RG1 displayed in FIG. 12(j) is moved to the center of the liquid crystal display device 157.

Next, Fig. 188(l) shows button IN animation 1 that foretells that the second operation (long press the production button auto) will become effective, and An example of an operation response display and a result display according to the push button (press auto) is shown.

In this example, by displaying effect image EF1 on button IN animation 1, in a state that suggests that the second first operation (long-press the production button auto) is enabled, the second operation Since the second operation (long-press auto performance button) has been accepted, the operation response display corresponding to the operation is a benefit award display SG2 (in this example, A display including a character string such as "AT additional level 2 UP") and a result display RG2 consisting of a panda character image are displayed.

In this example, the next operation response performance can be executed by accepting the operation of the operation means during the period before the display imitating the appearance of the operation means is displayed, so that the player who is enjoying the game can The operation request display can be clearly shown to prompt the player to perform the operation, and the results can be shown with priority to the player who is in a hurry to play the game, thereby increasing the player's satisfaction level.

Subsequently, FIG. 188(m) shows an example of a continuation of the result display RG2 of the operation response display. In this example, the effect image EF1, result display RG1, and privilege award display SG2 displayed in FIG. Running animation to move.

Subsequently, FIG. 188(n) shows button IN animation 1 that foretells that the third second operation (long press the production button auto) will become effective, and the second operation (long press the production button auto) for the third time. An example of an operation response display and a result display according to the push button (press auto) is shown.

In this example, by displaying effect image EF1 on button IN animation 1, in a state that suggests that the first operation (long-press the production button auto) for the third time will be effective, Since the second operation (long-press automatic production button) has been accepted, the operation response display corresponding to the operation is a benefit award display SG3 (in this example, A display including a character string such as "Winning rate level 1 UP") and a result display RG3 consisting of a character image of the bancho are displayed.

FIG. 188(o) shows an example of a result display in response to the first to fourth second operations (long-press automatic performance button). In this example, after the completion of the fourth second operation (long-press automatic performance button), the benefits granted in the pseudo bonus are displayed as operation responses for all the second operations from the first to fourth times. A suggested benefit award display SGA (in this example, a display including a character string such as "winning rate LV4, additional LV3") and all result displays RG1 to RG4 for pseudo bonuses are displayed.

<Button performance/features that change the performance depending on the operation method>
As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 169, the pachinko machine) has production means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157, the speakers 272, 277) that can perform a certain production. etc.), wherein the certain performance includes a first operation (for example, a single press of a performance button) and a second operation different from the first operation (for example, a single press of a performance button). If the first operation is performed in the certain effect, the first effect (for example, FIG. 186(g), FIG. 187(m)) is enabled. , the operation response display shown in FIG. (i), the operation response display shown in FIG. This is a unique game machine.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a plurality of types of performances in accordance with operations by a player in a certain performance, so that the performance does not become monotonous and the game can be made more exciting.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has production means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, etc.) that can execute a certain production. The game machine is equipped with a game machine in which the certain performance is performed by a first operation (for example, a single press of the performance button) and a second operation different from the first operation (for example, a long press of the performance button). ) is at least an effective effect, and if the first operation is performed in the certain effect, the first effect (for example, FIG. 186(g), FIG. 187(m), n) etc.) is executed, and when the second operation is performed in the certain performance, the second performance (for example, FIG. 188(i), FIG. 188(j), The operation response display shown in FIG. This is a game machine characterized in that it is a performance in which a plurality of operations may be performed, and a plurality of operation request displays can be displayed in the certain performance.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a plurality of types of performances in accordance with operations by a player in a certain performance, so that the performance does not become monotonous and the game can be made more exciting. Furthermore, since the operation may be performed multiple times, the performance effect can be enhanced by executing the performance corresponding to the operation.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has production means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, etc.) that can execute a certain production. The game machine is equipped with a game machine in which the certain performance is performed by a first operation (for example, a single press of the performance button) and a second operation different from the first operation (for example, a long press of the performance button). ) is at least an effective effect, and if the first operation is performed in the certain effect, the first effect (for example, FIG. 186(g), FIG. 187(m), n) etc.) is executed, and when the second operation is performed in the certain performance, the second performance (for example, FIG. 188(i), FIG. 188(j), The operation response display shown in FIG. This is a performance that may involve multiple operations, and in the certain performance, multiple operation request displays can be displayed, and the multiple operation request displays include a first operation request display (for example, a diagram). 186(f), the operation request display shown in FIG. 188(k), etc.), and a second operation request display different from the first operation request display (for example, FIG. 188(g), FIG. 188(h), etc.) The game machine is characterized in that the second operation request display is a display that can more easily lead to a more advantageous result than the first operation request display.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a plurality of types of performances in accordance with operations by a player in a certain performance, so that the performance does not become monotonous and the game can be made more exciting. Furthermore, since the operation may be performed multiple times, the performance effect can be enhanced by executing the performance corresponding to the operation. In addition, since the second operation request display is a display that is easier to derive a more advantageous result than the first operation request display, when the second operation request display is displayed, it increases the player's sense of expectation. be able to.

Further, the present invention is provided with an operation means (for example, a performance button) provided at a position that can be operated by a player, and the certain performance is a performance that may be operated multiple times, and the certain performance is a performance that may be operated multiple times. The performance includes a performance in which an operation request display for an operation means is displayed, and the operation request display is a display including an image imitating the appearance of the operation means, and the first operation is performed in the certain performance. 186(g), FIG. 187(m). , the operation response display shown in FIG. As a performance, an operation response display corresponding to the second operation (hereinafter referred to as "second operation response display"), for example, FIGS. (o) etc.) may not be displayed overlappingly with the operation request display.

With such a configuration, the operation response display may or may not overlap the operation request display depending on the player's operation, so the performance does not become monotonous and the game can be enlivened.

Further, the first operation response display is a result display based on a lottery based on the first operation (hereinafter referred to as "first lottery"), and the second operation response display is a result display based on the lottery based on the first operation (hereinafter referred to as "first lottery"). The result display is based on an operation-based lottery (hereinafter referred to as "second lottery"), and the first lottery and the second lottery may be performed using the same lottery table. .

With such a configuration, the player can obtain the same result regardless of his/her own operation, and the player will not feel unfair.

Further, the first operation is an operation in which the operation means is performed once in the certain performance (for example, a single press), and the first operation is an operation in which the operation request is performed in the certain performance. After the display is executed, the first operation response display is displayed in response to the first operation, the first operation response display is displayed overlappingly with the newly generated operation request display, and further The presentation may include content in which the next first operation response display is displayed in response to the next first operation.

With such a configuration, the content of the first performance executed by the first operation can be easily understood by the player, and the player can perform the first operation or the second performance according to his/her preference. This allows the player to decide whether to perform any of the following operations, thereby increasing the player's satisfaction level.

Further, the second operation is an operation in which multiple operations (for example, long press auto) are enabled by continuously pressing the operation means in the certain performance, and the second operation is After the operation request display is executed in the production, the second operation response display is displayed in response to the second operation, and as the newly generated operation request display, a display that imitates the appearance of the operation means is displayed. The display may include a content in which the next second operation response display is displayed before the image is displayed.

With such a configuration, the content of the second performance performed by the second operation can be easily understood by the player, and the player can perform the first operation or the second performance according to his/her preference. This allows the player to decide whether to perform any of the following operations, thereby increasing the player's satisfaction level.

Further, the second performance is such that after the animation display of the newly generated operation request display starts, and before an image imitating the appearance of the operation means is displayed, a new operation response is displayed. The display may be an effect that includes the content to be displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly show the operation request display to the player who is enjoying the game and prompt him to perform the operation, while at the same time, by performing the second operation, the player can play the game without waiting for the operation request display. This increases the level of satisfaction of players who want to progress through the game quickly.

Further, the certain production is a production in which a third operation (for example, a continuous press operation) different from the first operation and the second operation is effective, and in the certain production, the third operation is effective. When the operation is performed, the second performance is performed, and the third operation is an operation in which the operation by the operating means is performed once in the certain performance, and the third operation is performed twice in a row. The interval between these operations may be shorter than the interval between the first operations.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible to perform performances in response to the third operation, so that the performances do not become monotonous and the game can be made more exciting.

The player also includes an operating means (for example, a performance button) provided at a position that can be operated by a player, and a performance means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157, speakers 272, 277, etc.) that can execute a certain performance. The certain performance includes a performance that prompts the user to operate the operating means a plurality of times, and in connection with the certain performance, an animation display regarding an operation request display for the operating means is displayed, and the animation The display includes an animation in which a display imitating the appearance of the operating means is displayed, and when the operating means is operated in the certain effect, an operation response effect is executed, the animation display is started, and the animation display is Even if the operating means is operated in the period before the display imitating the appearance of the operating means is displayed (for example, when it is determined that the presentation button is long press auto), the operation response presentation is not performed. (For example, the operation response display shown in FIG. 188(l) etc.) may be executed.

With such a configuration, the next operation response performance can be executed by operating the operation means during a period before a display imitating the appearance of the operation means is displayed in the animation display, so that the game For players who enjoy playing, the operation request display can be clearly shown to encourage them to operate, and for players who are in a hurry to play, the results can be prioritized, increasing player satisfaction. can.

The player also includes an operating means (for example, a performance button) provided at a position that can be operated by a player, and a performance means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157, speakers 272, 277, etc.) that can execute a certain performance. the gaming machine, in which an animation display related to an operation request display of the operating means is displayed in connection with the certain performance, and the animation display is a first display imitating the appearance of the operating means. This is a display that may perform an animation, and the animation display is a display that may perform an animation in which a second display imitating the appearance of the operating means is displayed, and the first display and the The second display is a different display, and when the operation means is operated in the certain performance, an operation response performance is executed, the animation display is started, and the appearance of the operation means is imitated in the animation display. The game machine may be characterized in that the operation response effect is executed even if the operation means is operated during a period before the display is displayed.

Further, the operation request display in the certain performance may be a display prompting one operation. Further, the operation request display in the certain performance may be an operation request display that prompts two or more operations, or may be a repeated operation request display that urges continuous hits.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine, and for example, a game machine in which one operation validity period is set for one button performance is used to create a certain performance with a plurality of successive blocks. It can also be taken as Furthermore, even if the button operation request display occurs once at a time, a continuous valid period of one operation can also be regarded as a certain effect.

Furthermore, although a large button display has been exemplified as another example of the operation request display, operation request displays with different colors or related to other operation means may also be displayed.

Further, a certain performance may include a plurality of operations, and only one of the operations may be the second performance. For example, even if the second operation is performed during a part of a production and the first operation is performed during a part of the performance, the second operation may be performed while the second operation is performed. It also includes those in which a performance is performed.

Further, the game machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one in which game balls enclosed within the game machine are reused. Further, the main control section, the first sub-control section, and the second sub-control section may be configured in one chip, or the main control section and the first sub-control section may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Moreover, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Further, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Further, by applying the content described in one of the plurality of configurations described in the above embodiment to another configuration, the range of games may be further expanded.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the slot machine of this embodiment, a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of internal winning of the plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, If the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the multiple reels stop match the predetermined payout conditions, the game media will be paid out and the game will end; if not, the game media will be paid out. This is a game machine that plays a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described using FIG. 189. FIG. 189 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side).

Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 189 to 200 are basically used only for explaining this embodiment, and even if the same symbols are shown in other drawings, they will not be used in the explanation of this embodiment. Priority is given to the codes shown in 189 to 200. Moreover, each example of this embodiment and each example of other embodiments can be applied in combination with each other.

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 189 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface (not shown) are stored in the center of the main body 101, and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the symbol display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible. By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Further, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is arranged on the back of each reel 110 to 112 to illuminate each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 113. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. In addition, inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each reel 110 to 112, and the light emitting part of this optical sensor A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the light-receiving section and the light-receiving section. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line. The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the winning line 114 that becomes valid.

For example, the notification lamp 123 informs the player that he or she has internally won a specific winning combination (specifically, a special winning combination (bonus)) in an internal lottery for winning combinations, which will be described later, or that he or she is playing a bonus game. This is a warning lamp. The notification lamp 123 of this embodiment lights up until the bonus game ends after the bonus is announced to notify the player that the bonus has been confirmed. Note that the notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus notification (at the time of the bonus or immediately before the bonus notification). The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, up to a maximum of three coins, two coins are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as the MAX bet button. The bet button 132 also functions as a performance button that can start a certain performance when an operation is accepted. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a performance button.

In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored token number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout token number display 127 are composed of seven segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of this embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with each reel 110 to 112. . More specifically, by operating the left stop button 137, the left reel 110 can be stopped, by operating the middle stop button 138, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the right stop button 139, the middle reel 111 can be stopped. By operating the right reel 112, it is possible to stop the right reel 112.

Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation will be referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as the second stop operation, the last stop operation will be referred to as the third stop operation, and the first stop operation will be referred to as the third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is sometimes referred to as the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is sometimes referred to as the third stop reel.

Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The order of operations in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 and the stop operation is called "sequential push operation order" or simply "sequence push", and the order of operations in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 and the stop operation is called " This is called "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push." Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body may be turned on to notify the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the AT system gaming state of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can understand that the player is in the high navigation state from the lighting manner of the high navigation state lamp 190.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. A medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided at the bottom of the title panel 162.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to enliven the game. A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided at the top of the presentation device 160. This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed on the back side of the shutter 163. , effect image display device), and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (game display device). The structure is such that it appears on the person's side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of this embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding stop operations (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

Note that it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device, as long as it is configured to be able to display various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, etc. , a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that the entirety can be visually recognized by the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Note that although the notification lamp 123 and the high navigation state lamp 190 are configured to notify predetermined information by causing the lamps to emit light, the manner of notification is not limited to the light emission of the lamps. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a part of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a full-screen liquid crystal slot machine, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). Hereinafter, when the notification lamp 123 or the high navigation state lamp 190 is referred to as lighting, it is meant to include notifications by other presentation devices (for example, display devices) having the same function.

<Circuit configuration of control section>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine will be explained. The control section of a slot machine can be roughly divided into a main control section that controls the progress of the game, and a main control section that controls the main effects according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control section. and a second sub-control unit that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit.

The main control section includes an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section, and enables communication with the first sub-control section. Note that information communication between the main control unit and the first sub-control unit is one-way communication, and the main control unit can send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit. Unable to send commands or other signals to the unit.

The first sub-control unit includes a basic circuit that receives control commands transmitted by the main control unit via an input interface, and controls the entire first sub-control unit based on the control commands. The first sub-control unit controls sound output means (speakers, sound source ICs, etc.), various lamps, and the like.

The second sub-control unit includes a basic circuit that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit via the input interface, and controls the entire second sub-control unit based on the control command. The second sub-control unit controls the liquid crystal display device and the like.

<Winning line>
Next, the winning line will be explained.

The symbols displayed on the upper row of the left reel are the left reel upper row symbols, the symbols displayed on the middle row of the left reel are the left reel middle row symbols, the symbols displayed on the lower row of the left reel are the left reel lower row symbols, and the symbols displayed on the middle reel upper row. The displayed symbol is the middle reel upper symbol, the symbol displayed in the middle reel is the middle reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed in the lower middle reel is the middle reel lower symbol, and the symbol displayed in the upper right reel is the middle reel lower symbol. The symbols displayed in the upper row of the right reel, the symbols displayed in the middle row of the right reel are called the right reel middle symbols, and the symbols displayed in the lower row of the right reel are called the right reel lower symbols. Each symbol on each reel can be viewed through the symbol display window. Each reel will display three vertically, nine in total.

In this embodiment, one winning line is provided, which is a middle winning line consisting of a left reel middle row symbol, a middle reel middle row symbol, and a right reel middle row symbol. The winning line is a line set at a stop position of symbols that can be visually recognized through the symbol display window, and is a line on which it is determined whether a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed. The valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as gaming media.

The slot machine of this embodiment allows games with a bet of 3 or 2 coins, and if the number of inserted medals is less than 2, none of the winning lines will be activated, and the number of medals placed is 3 or 2. The winning line becomes active when a bet is placed. Once the winning line is activated, the player can start the game by operating the start lever.

Further, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line, there is also a downward-sloping winning line that consists of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, and left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of three winning lines, including the upward winning lines to the right, may be set as valid winning lines, or a number of winning lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid winning lines.

<Type of winning role>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIGS. 190(a) and 190(b). In addition, figure (a) is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including active roles), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, payouts (number of awards), and notes for each winning combination, and figure (b) ) is a diagram showing the types of normal pressing order bells and special pressing order bells, and payouts corresponding to each pressing order.

On each reel 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (for example, 20 symbols) of a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a replay symbol, a watermelon symbol, a cherry symbol, a bell symbol, etc. shown in FIG. 190(a)) are arranged. .

The winning roles of the slot machine 100 include a special role (not shown) (special role 1, special role 2), general role (replay role, small role 1 to small role 4, normal push order bell, special push order bell), etc. There is. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in this embodiment, special combination 1 and special combination 2 are combinations that shift to a special gaming state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Furthermore, the replay combination is a combination that allows replaying without inserting new medals. These winning combinations are sometimes called "actuation combinations." In addition, "winning" in this embodiment also includes a case where a symbol combination of an active role that does not involve a medal payout (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the active line. For example, special role 1, This includes winning the special winning combination 2 and the replay winning combination.

Special combination 1 and special combination 2 are combinations (actuation combinations) that shift to a special gaming state upon winning. In this example, special combination 1 is a winning combination that can only be won in a 3-card bet game, and special combination 2 is a winning combination that can only be won in a 2-card bet game. Note that medals will not be paid out for winning this role itself. The corresponding symbol combinations are, for example, special combination 1 (BB1) is "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2", and special combination 2 (BB2) is "BAR-BAR-Seven 1".

When the special winning combination 1 or 2 is internally won, the special winning internal winning flag corresponding to the internally winning winning combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit). When the flag is set to ON due to the internal winning of the special winning combination 1, the main control section shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 1 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Further, when the flag is set to ON due to the internal winning of the special winning combination 2, the main control section shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 2 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3).

This flag remains on until the internally won winning combination is won, and it becomes easier to win the internally winning winning combination in subsequent games. In other words, even if you do not win the special role in a game where you win the special role 1 or 2 internally, you will be in a state where you win the special role internally in the next game and thereafter, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (for example, special If the winning combination is won internally, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2 (BB1)") will be in a state where it is easy to win. The special role 1 internal winning state (RT2) and the special winning role 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit shifts the gaming state to a special gaming state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination 1 or special winning combination 2 being displayed. Furthermore, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of coins (in this example, 110 coins for winning with BB1 and 55 coins for winning with BB2) is paid out, a low re-gaming probability state (hereinafter, this state will be referred to as RT1) ).

A "re-game winning combination" is a winning combination (activation combination) that allows you to play the next game without inserting medals (game media) by winning a prize, and no medals are paid out. Note that the corresponding symbol combination is "Replay-Replay-Replay".

“Small role (Small role 1 to Small role 4)” is a winning role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning a prize. Role 2 (cherry) is "Cherry-ANY-ANY", etc., as shown in FIG. 190(a). Further, the corresponding number of coins to be paid out is also as shown in the figure.

In addition, small winnings 1 (watermelon) and small winnings 2 (cherry) are winning hands that can be won by operating the correct timing, and in the case of "Cherry-ANY-ANY", the symbol on the left reel 110 is "cherry". This indicates that the symbols on the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be any symbols. In addition, although the details will be described later, Small Win 3 and Small Win 4 are roles that can be won by operating the correct answer press order. There are cases where this happens.

<Reel stop control>
Next, the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be outlined. The reel stop control is performed by selecting one of the predetermined types of reel stop control data based on predetermined conditions (results of internal lottery processing for winning combinations), and based on the selected reel stop control data. conduct.

In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame slipping control) is performed. Pull-in control is to shift the stop position of the reels 110-112 within a certain number of frames (number of symbols) (pull-in range; here, maximum 4 frames) after the player operates each of the stop buttons 137-139. Control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM of the main control section. Each reel stop data includes a permission control that allows symbol combinations of a predetermined winning combination to be displayed on the winning line, and a prohibition control that prevents symbol combinations of any winning combination from being displayed on the winning line. It is broadly divided into .

Examples of permissible control include when a certain winning combination is internally won, or when a special winning combination is internally won (the flag is being carried over), and the timing when the player operates each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. Even if the numbers are bad, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning combinations are displayed within the range of the above-mentioned number of frames. However, since it is only "allowed", the symbol combinations may not be aligned depending on the timing of operating each of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

For example, if you win the small prize 1 (watermelon) internally, the watermelon symbol is placed over four frames, so if you operate the stop buttons 137 to 139 at the wrong time, the watermelon symbol will fall on the winning line. Do not stop.

However, depending on the arrangement of symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of symbols drawn, there may be cases where 100% alignment is possible. For example, since the arrangement interval of the replay symbols corresponding to the replay combination is a maximum of 4 frames, if the replay combination is internally won, the winning will be 100% regardless of the timing.

On the other hand, an example in which the prohibition control is performed is, for example, when the internal lottery result is a loss and the special winning combination is not internally won (the flag is being carried over), and the timing when the player operates each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. At best, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning combinations are not displayed together within the range of the above-mentioned number of frames.

<Press order bell>
Next, the normal pressing order bell and the special pressing order bell will be explained in detail using FIG. 190(b).

<Normal press order bell>
If one of the "normal push order bells 1 to 6" is internally won, multiple small winnings (in this example, small winnings 3 and 4) will be won multiple times, and depending on the order of the player's operations, The symbol combination displayed on the winning line is determined. It should be noted that it is possible to internally win the "normal pressing order bells 1 to 6" regardless of the setting value from settings 1 to 6. It should be noted that additional small winning combinations may be combined to allow multiple winnings.

As shown in FIG. 190(b), each of the "normal pressing order bells 1 to 6" has six types: "LCR", "LRC", "CLR", "CRL", "RLC", and "RCL". In this example, a 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is assigned to one type of the six types of pressing order. Note that the range of lottery data associated with each of the six types of pressing orders is the same.

For example, if you internally win "Normal Push Order Bell 1 LCR" out of "Normal Push Order Bell 1", the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel. The stop operation for the reels 112 is the correct operation (correct press order), and the other stop operations are incorrect operations (incorrect press order). Also, if you internally win "Normal Push Order Bell 4CRL" out of "Normal Push Order Bell 4", the first stop reel will be the middle reel 111, the second stop reel will be the right reel 112, and the third stop reel will be the left reel. The stop operation for the reels 110 is the correct operation (correct press order), and the other stop operations are incorrect operations (incorrect press order).

If the stop operation (correct answer pressing order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 pieces) that suggests the order of operations to win the 12-piece small win (small role 3), the “Bell-” corresponding to the small role 3 "Bell-Bell" is displayed on the winning line, and 12 medals are paid out.

On the other hand, if a stop operation that does not follow the 12-piece acquisition navigation (incorrect press order operation) is performed, "Bell-Bell-Replay" corresponding to the 1-card small win (small win 4) will be won. is displayed on the winning line, and one medal is paid out, or if you miss out on the small winning combination 4 (if the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is not displayed on the winning line), the medal is paid out. It will not be done (it will be a loss).

In addition, if the stop operation (correct answer press order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for winning 1 piece) that suggests the operation order to win the 1-piece small winning combination (small winning number 4), the " ``Bell-Bell-Replay'' is displayed on the winning line, and if one medal is paid out or if you miss the minor role 4 (the symbol combination corresponding to the minor role 4 is not displayed on the winning line) ), no medals will be paid out (resulting in a loss).

On the other hand, if a stop operation is performed that does not follow the navigation for acquiring one coin (incorrect press order operation), "Bell-Bell-Bell" corresponding to small winning combination 3 will be on the winning line depending on the order of operations. is displayed and 12 medals are paid out, or "Bell-Bell-Replay" corresponding to minor role 4 is displayed on the winning line and 1 medal is paid out, or when minor role 4 is missed. (If the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is not displayed on the winning line), no medals are paid out (it becomes a loss).

In this example, "Normal push order bells 1 to 6" is assigned a 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) to one of the six types of push orders, so "Normal push order bells 1 to 6" are assigned. If any one of them is won internally, 12 medals will be paid out with a probability of 1/6. Note that the winning probability of the 12-piece small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is not limited to this example, and may be greater than 1/6.

<Bonus push order bell>
If you win internally for any of the "Benefit Pressing Order Bells 1 to 6", you will win multiple small roles (in this example, small roles 3 and 4), and depending on the order of the player's operations. The symbol combination displayed on the winning line is determined. Note that even if the set value is set to any of settings 1 to 6, it is possible to win internally for "Benefit Pressing Order Bells 1 to 6." It should be noted that additional small winning combinations may be combined to allow multiple winnings. Further, the combination of small winning combinations may be different between the normal pressing order bell and the special pressing order bell.

As shown in FIG. 190(b), each of the "Bonus Pressing Order Bells 1 to 6" has six types: "LCR", "LRC", "CLR", "CRL", "RLC", and "RCL". In this example, one small winning combination (small winning number 4) is assigned to one of the six types of pressing orders, and the six types of pressing orders are divided into I try to assign 12 small winnings (minor winning 3) to the five types. Note that the range of lottery data associated with each of the six types of pressing orders is the same.

For example, if you internally win "Bonus Push Order Bell 1 LCR" out of "Bonus Push Order Bell 1", the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel. The stop operation for the reels 112 is the correct operation (correct press order), and the other stop operations are incorrect operations (incorrect press order). Also, if you internally win "Bonus Push Order Bell 4 CRL" out of "Bonus Push Order Bell 4", the first stop reel will be the middle reel 111, the second stop reel will be the right reel 112, and the third stop reel will be the left reel. The stop operation for the reels 110 is the correct operation (correct press order), and the other stop operations are incorrect operations (incorrect press order).

If the stop operation (correct answer press order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for winning 1 piece) that suggests the operation order to win the 1-piece small win (small win 4), the “Bell-” corresponding to the small win 4 is performed. "Bell Replay" is displayed on the winning line, and one medal is paid out.

On the other hand, if a stop operation is performed that does not follow the 1-piece acquisition navigation (incorrect press order operation), "Bell-Bell-Bell" corresponding to the 12-piece small winning combination (small winning combination 3) will be won. displayed on the line.

In addition, if the stop operation (correct answer press order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 pieces) that suggests the operation order to win the 12-piece small winning combination (small winning 3), the " "Bell-Bell-Bell" is displayed on the winning line, and 12 medals are paid out.

On the other hand, if a stop operation is performed that does not follow the navigation for acquiring 12 coins (incorrect press order operation), "Bell-Bell-Replay" corresponding to small winning combination 4 will be displayed on the winning line, One medal is paid out.

In this example, "Bonus Pressing Order Bells 1 to 6" is assigned 12 small winnings (small winnings 3) to 5 of the 6 types of pressing order, so "Bonus Pressing Order Bells 1 to 6" If any one of them is won internally, 12 medals will be paid out with a probability of 5/6. Note that the winning probability of the 12-piece small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is not limited to this example, and may be greater than or smaller than 5/6. Furthermore, even if you are internally elected to any of the bells 1 to 6 in the order of pressing the bonus, the payout will not be 0 due to a loss. Therefore, the player easily notices that he has won the bonus push order bell.

<Advantageous section, unfavorable section>
Next, the advantageous section and non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 191(a). FIG. 191(a) is a diagram schematically showing an advantageous section and a non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100.

The slot machine 100 has a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section that is more advantageous to the player than the non-advantageous section. After turning on the power or changing the setting value, a non-advantageous section is set as the initial state, and if the conditions for transition to the advantageous section are met in this non-advantageous section (for example, when winning a re-gaming combination in a certain game) Then, set an advantageous section from the next game.

Also, if the non-advantageous section transition conditions are met in this advantageous section (for example, when the AT state ends after transitioning from the normal state to the AT state, or when the limiter is reached, etc.), the next game will be non-advantageous. An advantageous section is set, and the navigation counter 2 is initialized to 0.

Here, the navigation number counter 2 is a counter that indicates the cumulative number of times the navigation in the advantageous section (the navigation for acquiring one ticket executed when the bonus push order bell was internally won), and when the transition from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section. It is initialized to 0 when the RAM is cleared or when the RAM is cleared, and 1 is added each time navigation is executed in an advantageous section. Although the details will be described later, this navigation counter 2 is used, for example, when displaying the numerical value of the navigation counter 2 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

<Type of gaming state>
Next, the gaming state and transition of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 191(b). FIG. 191(b) is a diagram showing an example of the transition of the gaming state of the slot machine 100.

The slot machine 100 has gaming states that include at least a normal state, a first chance state, a second chance state, and an AT state, in addition to the above-mentioned advantageous sections and non-advantageous sections.

<Normal state>
After turning on the power or changing a set value, the normal state is set as the initial state. When the condition for transition to the first chance state is satisfied in this normal state (in this example, when the navigation number counter 1 reaches 50), the game will transition to the first chance state from the next game. This state includes a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section.

Here, the navigation number counter 1 is a counter that indicates the total number of times the navigation of the bonus pressing order bell (navigation for acquiring one ticket) is executed, and it is a counter that indicates the total number of times the navigation of the bonus pressing order bell (navigation for acquiring one ticket) is executed. It is initialized to 0 when you execute , and every time you perform a navigation (navigation for acquiring 1 piece) that suggests the operation order to win the bonus push order bell and win a 1-piece small prize (small prize 4). 1 is added to . Although the details will be described later, this navigation frequency counter 1 is used when calculating the navigation compliance rate, when displaying the numerical value of the navigation frequency counter 1 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the like.

In addition, if the conditions for transition to the second chance state are met in the normal state (in this example, if you win the lottery for transition to the second chance state (for example, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/300)), the next time The game shifts to the second chance state. Further, when the conditions for transition to the AT state are satisfied in the normal state (in this example, when the navigation number counter 2 reaches 300), the next game will transition to the AT state.

<First chance state>
The first chance state is a state in which it is possible to transition to the second chance state, and is a state more advantageous to the player than the normal state. In this example, the first chance state is 5 games (fixed), and every game, a lottery is held to determine whether to transition to the second chance state (a lottery to transition to the second chance state. This example Then, a lottery with a probability of winning of 1/5 will be held.

If the conditions for transitioning to the second chance state are met in this first chance state (in this example, if you win the lottery to transition to the second state), you will be transferred to the second chance state from the next game. Transition. Additionally, if the conditions for transitioning to the normal game are met in the first chance state (in this example, if the lottery for transitioning to the second chance state is not won), the next game will transition to the regular game. At the same time, the navigation number counter 1 is initialized to 0.

<Second chance state>
The second chance state is a state in which an AT lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the AT state, and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state and the first chance state. In this example, the second chance state is 5 games (fixed), and each game is a lottery to determine whether to transition to the AT state (AT transition lottery. In this example, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/10). )I do.

If the conditions for transition to the AT state are satisfied in this second chance state (in this example, if the AT transition lottery is won), the game will transition to the AT state from the next game. Furthermore, if the conditions for transition to the normal game are met in the second chance state (in this example, if the AT transition lottery is not won), the next game will transition to the normal game.

In addition, in this example, the configuration is such that the transition from the AT state to the second chance state is not possible, but the transition may be made possible. In this case, since the transition is to the second chance state via the AT state, it is possible to win the AT transition lottery. It is preferable that the probability is set to 1/2 regardless of the navigation compliance rate described later, and that the game quality is different from the second chance state that does not go through the AT state.

<AT state>
The AT state is a state in which AT games can be played a predetermined number of times (in this example, one set of 30 games), and is more advantageous for the player than other gaming states.

In this AT game, in the starting game of the AT game, a set continuation lottery (for example, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/4) is executed to determine whether or not to continue the AT game, and if this set continuation lottery is won, a predetermined number of times ( In this example, AT games (30 games per set) are provided, and the AT state is extended.

When the conditions for transition to the normal game are satisfied in this AT state (in this example, when all the games in the AT state are played), the next game is shifted to the normal game.

Note that the benefits granted to the player in the AT state are not limited to the provision of AT games; for example, the period of AT games may be extended (for example, from 30 games to 40 games), or the period in the AT state may be extended. You can increase the probability of winning the extension lottery (for example, from 10% to 20%), or increase the probability of entering the specialized zone (extension determination period) in the AT state (for example, from 20% to 30%). ), the extension decision rate in the AT state may be increased (e.g., from an average of 10 additional games to an average of 30 additional games), or the navigation rate in the AT state may be increased (e.g., from 80% to 100%). (increase).

<Navigation compliance rate>
Next, the navigation compliance rate will be explained using FIG. 192.

In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the bonus pressing order bell is won in the normal state, a navigation (navigation for acquiring one piece) is performed that suggests the order of operations to win a one-piece small prize (small prize 4). , adds 1 to the navigation number counter 1. When the player performs an operation according to the navigation for acquiring one coin, it is treated as having performed the correct answer pressing order operation, and 1 is added to the correct answer operation counter indicating the number of times the correct answer pressing order operation has been performed. , when an operation is performed that does not follow the one-piece acquisition navigation, it is treated as an incorrect answer press order operation and 1 is not added to the correct answer operation counter.

In this example, the navigation counter 1 and the correct operation counter are updated during the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state, and the correct operation counter is divided by the navigation counter 1. The navigation compliance rate is calculated, and based on the navigation compliance rate, the winning probability of the transition lottery in the first chance state and the second chance state and the winning probability of the set continuation lottery in the AT state are changed.

In addition, in this example, if the stop operation is continued in accordance with the navigation for obtaining one ticket during a certain period, and the case where the stop operation is continued in accordance with the navigation for obtaining one ticket during a certain period, The system is designed so that the profits of the players will be approximately the same if it lasts for a long period of time. In addition, if you continue to stop the operation according to the navigation for acquiring one coin, the amount of medals consumed will increase in normal times, but it will be advantageous in later games. If you continue to do so, the amount of medals consumed will decrease in normal times, but it will not be advantageous in later games.

For this reason, the player has no choice but to end the game in front of the ceiling by deciding between a stop operation that follows the navigation for acquiring one coin and a stop operation that does not follow the navigation for acquiring one coin, depending on the player's budget. This makes it possible to reduce situations in which the player ends the game without winning, and does not reduce the player's desire to play.

Note that the navigation compliance rate may be calculated using other methods. For example, it is possible to determine the number of times a player does not follow the navigation for acquiring one coin every 100 games, and if the number of times is 0, it may be reset (the navigation compliance rate is set to 100%). In this case, it may be possible to make the game less susceptible to the gaming history of other players. Alternatively, the number of times the player does not follow the navigation for acquiring one ticket may be simply counted, and the probability of winning may be changed in accordance with the count value. In this case, the processing load related to calculation may be reduced. This also applies to other states.

In addition, the winning probability of the transition lottery in the first chance state and the second chance state and the winning probability of the set continuation lottery in the AT state are based on other numbers instead of (or in addition to) the navigation compliance rate. For example, even if the navigation compliance rate is low, if the number of operational errors is small, the navigation compliance rate may be treated as high.

<Navigation compliance rate and transition lottery (first chance state)>
FIG. 192(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the navigation compliance rate and the probability of winning the transition lottery in the first chance state.

As mentioned above, in the first chance state, if you win the transition lottery with a winning probability of 1/5, you will move to the second chance state from the next game, but if the navigation compliance rate exceeds 90% increases the probability of winning the transition lottery from 1/5 to 1/3, and when the navigation compliance rate is 70 to 90%, increases the probability of winning the transition lottery from 1/5 to 1/4, If the compliance rate is less than 70%, the system is configured to maintain the probability of winning the transition lottery.

In other words, in the first chance state, if the navigation compliance rate during a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state) is high, the probability of winning the transition lottery increases. becomes higher, making it easier to transition to a second chance state.

In other words, if the player wins the bonus pressing order bell during a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state), one piece that is disadvantageous to the player The more you perform the correct answer pressing order according to the navigation (navigation for winning one ticket) that suggests the order of operations to win the small prize (small prize 4), the higher the probability of winning the transition lottery, and the transition to the second chance state. It becomes easier to do.

With such specifications, players will operate according to the navigation in order to increase the navigation compliance rate in order to increase the probability of transition to the second chance state. It becomes possible to realize the ball payout rate and gameplay that match the wishes of the players.

Note that the ease of transition from the first chance state to the second chance state may be the same regardless of the navigation compliance rate. Furthermore, when operating according to the navigation (when the navigation compliance rate is high), matters related to the second chance state determined in the first chance state may be configured to be advantageous. It is also possible to extend the length of the state period (resulting in making it easier to transition to the AT state), or increasing the likelihood of winning the lottery in the second chance state (resulting in the transition to the AT state). (You can make it easier)

<Navigation compliance rate and transition lottery (second chance state)>
FIG. 192(b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the navigation compliance rate and the probability of winning the transition lottery in the second chance state.

As mentioned above, in the second chance state, if you win the transition lottery with a winning probability of 1/10, you will transition to the AT state from the next game, but if the navigation compliance rate exceeds 90%, you will not be able to transition. Increase the probability of winning the lottery from 1/10 to 1/8, and if the navigation compliance rate is 70 to 90%, increase the probability of winning the transition lottery from 1/10 to 1/9, and increase the navigation compliance rate. If it is less than 70%, the winning probability of the transition lottery is maintained.

In other words, in the second chance state, if the navigation compliance rate during a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state) is high, the probability of winning the transition lottery increases. becomes higher, making it easier to shift to the AT state.

In other words, if the player wins the bonus pressing order bell during a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state), one piece that is disadvantageous to the player The more you perform the correct answer press order operations according to the navigation (navigation for winning one ticket) that suggests the order of operations to win the small prize (small prize 4), the higher the probability of winning the transition lottery becomes, and the easier it is to transition to the AT state. .

If such a specification is adopted, players will operate according to the navigation in order to increase the navigation compliance rate in order to increase the probability of transition to the AT state, so it will not be possible to comply with the intentions of the game machine designer. This makes it possible to achieve a ball payout rate and playability that are consistent with the above.

<Navigation compliance rate and set continuation lottery (AT state)>
FIG. 192(c) is a diagram showing the relationship between the navigation compliance rate in the AT state and the probability of winning the set continuation lottery.

As mentioned above, in the AT state, if you win a set continuation lottery with a winning probability of 1/4, you will be given 30 AT games per set and the AT state will be extended, but if the navigation compliance rate is 90% If the number exceeds the limit, the probability of winning the set continuation lottery will be increased from 1/4 to 1/2, and if the navigation compliance rate is 70-90%, the probability of winning the set continuation lottery will be increased from 1/4 to 1/3. If the navigation compliance rate is less than 70%, the probability of winning the set continuation lottery is maintained.

In other words, in the AT state, if the navigation compliance rate during a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state) is high, the probability of winning the set continuation lottery is high. Therefore, AT games are more likely to be awarded in the AT state.

In other words, if the player wins the bonus pressing order bell during a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state), one piece that is disadvantageous to the player The more the correct answer press order operations are performed according to the navigation (navigation for obtaining one ticket) that suggests the operation order for winning the minor prize (minor prize 4), the more likely the AT game will be awarded in the AT state.

With such specifications, players will operate according to the navigation to increase the navigation compliance rate in order to increase the probability of continuation of the set. It becomes possible to realize the ball payout rate and gameplay.

<Various navigation>
Next, various types of navigation will be explained using FIG. 193.

<Various navigation/non-AT state>
FIG. 193(a) is a diagram showing an example of various types of navigation in a non-AT state.

In this example, in the non-advantageous section (non-AT state), even if you win the special push order bell, the navigation system (1 piece acquisition The configuration is such that neither the navigation (for winning 12 coins) and the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 coins) that suggests the order of operations for winning a 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) are executed.

This non-advantageous period (non-AT state) is a period in which it is extremely likely that the player will remain in the non-advantageous period (non-AT state) after the setting is changed (immediately after the game parlor opens), and it is difficult to shift to the AT state immediately. In other words, since it is a disadvantageous period for the player compared to the advantageous period, by not navigating during this non-advantageous period, it is easier to win a 12-piece small prize (small prize 3) (5/6 The probability of winning a 12-card small hand (small hand 3) is set.

On the other hand, in the advantageous section (non-AT state), if you win the normal push order bell, the navigation that suggests the operation order to win the 1-card small win (small win 4) (navigation for obtaining the 1-card push order) , and the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 coins) that suggests the order of operations to win the 12-piece small prize (small prize 3) are not executed, but if you win the bonus pressing order bell, some of the navigations will be executed. With the exception of , the system is configured to execute a navigation (navigation for acquiring one card) that suggests the order of operations to win a one-card small win (small win 4).

In this advantageous section (non-AT state), if the bonus push order bell is won, we want to strongly urge the player to follow the navigation to get one ticket, so the normal push order bell is won in the AT state. The notification mode is different from that of the 12-piece acquisition navigation (for example, the navigation described later using FIG. 193(c)).

Specifically, in the AT state, a sound effect (navigation sound) different from the 12-piece acquisition navigation performed when the normal push order bell is won is output, and a display suggesting the operation order (RCL in this example) is output. By surrounding it with an effect image EF, the player is alerted to strongly urge the player to operate according to the navigation for acquiring one ticket.

Note that the manner in which the navigation for acquiring one ticket is performed when winning the privilege pressing order bell in the advantageous section (non-AT state) is not particularly limited, and for example, the color of the navigation image may be different (for example, If the image of the navigation for acquiring 12 pieces when the normal push order bell is won in the AT state is black, it may be displayed in red). In addition, the display position of the navigation image may be changed (for example, if the position of the navigation image for acquiring 12 pieces, which is performed when the normal push order bell is won in the AT state, is below the display area, the display (It may be displayed in the center of the area). In addition, it is preferable to turn on a dedicated lamp or turn off a lamp that is always on to make it easier for the player to notice.

FIG. 193(b) is a diagram showing an example of various types of navigation in an advantageous section (non-AT state).

As described above, in the advantageous section (non-AT state), navigation is not performed if the normal push order bell is won, so the frequency of navigation in the advantageous section (non-AT state) is lower than in the AT state. For this reason, in advantageous sections (non-AT states), players who are accustomed to operating conventional machines have the preconception that this is a period in which navigation will not be performed, and even if navigation is performed, players will experience inertia. There is a possibility that you will perform a sequential press operation (an incorrect press order operation).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 193(b), when winning a combination other than the bonus pressing order bell (for example, a re-gaming combination), the configuration is such that navigation is performed in the same way as when winning the bonus pressing order bell. For example, by increasing the frequency with which the navigation is executed and impressing the player with the execution of the navigation, it is possible to reduce erroneous operations by the player and increase the player's satisfaction level. Navigation may be performed every time a re-gaming combination is won, or navigation may be performed an appropriate number of times (for example, about once every three times). Furthermore, even if navigation is performed when winning a re-gaming role, the navigation at the time of winning the re-gaming role is unrelated to the navigation compliance rate, and navigation is more important than when winning the bonus pushing order bell. Since the intensity is low, the effect image EF for calling attention may be configured not to be displayed.

In addition, if you configure the system to perform navigation even if you do not win a winning combination (in the case of a loss) in the same way as when you win the bonus pressing order bell, you can increase the frequency of navigation and increase the frequency of navigation. By making an impression on the player, it becomes possible to reduce the player's erroneous operations and increase the player's satisfaction level. Note that navigation may be performed every time the player loses, or navigation may be performed an appropriate number of times (for example, about once every five times).

<Various navigation/advantageous sections (AT state)>
FIG. 193(c) is a diagram showing an example of various types of navigation in an advantageous section (AT state).

In the advantageous section (AT state), if you win the normal push order bell, with some exceptions, a navigation system (navigation for acquiring 12 coins) that suggests the order of operations to win a 12-piece small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is displayed. ) is configured to run.

Although not shown, if the player performs operations according to the navigation for acquiring 12 medals, a sound effect (payout sound) is output when paying out 12 medals, and a sound effect (payout sound) is output when the 12 medals are paid out. A display indicating that this has been done (for example, a display including the character string "Get 12 pieces") is performed.

In addition, in the advantageous section (AT state), even if you win the bonus pressing order bell, with some exceptions, the 12-piece small prize (small prize 3) will be awarded in the same manner as when winning the regular pressing order bell. It is configured to execute a navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 coins) that suggests the order of operations to win a prize.

In addition, even if you perform an incorrect pressing order operation due to an operational error and win a 12-piece small winning combination (small winning combination 3), the sound effect (payout sound) will be played in the same manner as when you perform the correct pressing order operation. ) is output, and a display indicating that 12 coins have been paid out (for example, a display including the character string "Get 12 coins") is displayed. The AT state is a state in which a large number of medals are awarded to the player, so even if the player performs an incorrect press order, if the player can obtain 12 medals, the correct press order will be changed. By performing the same performance as the operation, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing in the AT state.

In addition, in this example, if you win the bonus pressing order bell (for example, bonus pressing order bell 1), you can select any one of the 5 pressing orders excluding the pressing order of 12 tickets (for example, the pressing order of LCR). However, when selecting one of the 12 ticket acquisition navigations from multiple types, if the navigation is selected by lottery, the order of pressing may be biased. Therefore, fairness can be ensured.

In addition, when selecting one of the 12 ticket acquisition navigations of multiple types, a predetermined navigation may be executed. For example, if the bonus push order bell 1 is won, the bonus push order By executing the navigation (predetermined navigation) to be executed when Bell 2 is won, it is possible to reduce the control burden related to determining the order of pressing.

Also, during AT gaming, you may execute navigation that reduces the operating conditions (for example, navigation that reduces the number of options in the pressing order, navigation that reduces the difficulty of operation by widening the press range, etc.). For example, when bonus push order bell 1 is won in a non-AT game, the so-called 6-choice press order navigation that specifies the order of LCR is executed, while when bonus push order bell 1 is won in an AT game, "first By executing the so-called 3-selection-press-order navigation that specifies "Stop the middle reel when the player stops playing," the player can easily perform operations during the AT game, and the player's satisfaction level can be increased.

Also, if you apply one, more, or all of the processing to execute a predetermined navigation, or the processing to execute a navigation that requires fewer operating conditions during AT gaming, the order of presses can be determined. While reducing the control burden involved, it is possible to reduce operational errors made by players during AT games and increase player satisfaction.

<Navi number counter>
Next, the navigation frequency counter will be explained using FIG. 194. FIG. 194 is a diagram showing a display example of the navigation frequency counter.

The state shown in (i) in the same figure is the state where the navigation display has started, and in this example, each stop button 137 to 139 is pressed in the reverse pressing operation order (LCR) based on the winning of the privilege pressing order bell 6. A navigation system prompting users to operate the vehicle and an effect image EF have started to be displayed.

In the same state, the current numerical value of the navigation counter 1 is displayed in the counter 1 display area CT1 provided at the upper right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the counter 2 provided below the counter 1 display area CT1 is displayed. The current numerical value of the navigation counter 2 is displayed in the display area CT2.

Note that although the numerical values of counter 1 and counter 2 are displayed as numerical values that match the internally stored numerical values, there are cases where numerical values that do not match with the internally stored numerical values are displayed. For example, immediately after the power is turned on, the numerical value of counter 1 and the numerical value of counter 2 both display 0, so they may not match the internally stored numerical values.

As mentioned above, the navigation number counter 1 is a counter that indicates the total number of times the navigation for the bonus pressing order bell is executed, and in this example, the total number of times that the navigation for the bonus pressing order bell is executed is 1 at the time of starting the game. , the number 1 is displayed. Further, the navigation frequency counter 2 is a counter that indicates the cumulative number of navigation operations in the advantageous section, and in this example, since the cumulative number of navigation operations in the advantageous section at the start of the game is 14, the numerical value 14 is displayed. ing.

The subsequent state shown in (ii) of the same figure is a state in which the first stop operation (pressing the stop button 139) is performed to set the first stop reel as the right reel 112. In this example, the first stop operation is Since it has been accepted, the navigation that prompts the first stop operation (right) (in this example, the image with 1 circled) is erased, and the navigation that prompts the second stop operation (middle) (in this example, 2 is circled with circles). image) is enlarged.

The subsequent state shown in (iii) of the same figure is a state in which the second stop operation (pressing the stop button 138) is performed to set the second stop reel to the middle reel 111, and in this example, the second stop operation is performed. Since it has been accepted, the navigation that prompts the second stop operation (middle) (in this example, the image with 2 circled) is deleted, and the navigation that prompts the third stop operation (left) (in this example, 3 is circled with circles). image) is enlarged.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 4(iv) is a state in which the third stop operation (pressing the stop button 137) is performed to set the third stop reel to the left reel 110. In this example, the third stop operation is performed. Since it has been accepted, the navigation (in this example, the image with 3 circled) prompting the third stop operation (left) and the effect image EF are deleted.

In addition, in the same state, since a one-coin winning (minor prize 4) has been won, a payout process is executed to pay out one medal, and a display suggesting the payout of a medal (in this example, a one-coin payout) is executed. A display containing the character string "+1" indicating In addition, in this example, one medal is paid out, and the result is that the number of medals decreases in the game, so even if the stop operation is performed in the correct operation order, when paying out the medals, It is configured so that no payout sound (sound effect) is output. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

In addition, through the payout process of paying out one medal, it is determined that the player has performed the correct pressing order operation according to the navigation, and it is also determined that the player has won a small prize (minor prize 4) by performing the correct pressing order operation. A suggestive display (in this example, a display including the character string "success") has started.

The subsequent state shown in (v) of the same figure is the state after the payout of medals has been completed. 4) The display indicating that the player won a prize (success) is deleted.

In addition, since the total number of navigation executions (navigation frequency counter 1) for the privilege pressing order bell in the game has been incremented by one, the numerical value 2 (=1+1) is displayed in the counter 1 display area CT1. Note that the value of the navigation counter 1 displayed in the counter 1 display area CT1 is incremented by one even if an operation other than the correct answer pressing order is performed due to an operation error, etc. can be prevented from decreasing more than necessary.

In addition, since the cumulative number of navigation operations (navigation frequency counter 2) in the advantageous section in the game has been incremented by one, the counter 2 display area CT2 is displaying a numerical value of 15 (=14+1). Note that the value of the navigation counter 2 displayed in the counter 2 display area CT2 will be incremented by one even if a prize winning combination other than the bonus press order bell is won (for example, if the value is added based on the winning of a re-played combination) Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of updating the display of the navigation counter 2, and the player can play the game at a good tempo while appropriately increasing the presentation effect.

<Navi execution period>
Next, the navigation execution period will be explained using FIG. 195. FIG. 195(a) is a diagram showing an example of a navigation execution period and a non-execution period.

As explained using FIG. 193(a), in the advantageous section (non-AT state), if the normal push order bell is won, the order of operations is suggested to win a 1-card small win (small win 4). It is configured so that neither the navigation (navigation for acquiring 1 coin) and the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 coins) that suggests the order of operations to win a 12-coin small prize (minor prize 3) is executed. A period T2b shown in FIG. 195(a) indicates a period in which navigation is not executed.

On the other hand, in the advantageous section (non-AT state), if you win the bonus pressing order bell, with some exceptions, the navigation (1 The period T1a shown in FIG. 195(a) indicates the period during which the one-piece acquisition navigation is executed.

In addition, when the transition condition to the AT state is satisfied in the state where the transition to the AT state is confirmed, that is, the second chance state in this example (in this example, when the AT transition lottery is won), or, If the conditions for transitioning to the AT state are met in the normal state (in this example, when the navigation counter 2 reaches 300), even if you win the bonus pressing order bell, the navigation for acquiring one ticket The period T1b shown in FIG. 195(a) indicates the period in which the one-ticket acquisition navigation is not performed (the period in which AT confirmation is notified).

During this period T1b (the period in which AT confirmation is notified), as shown in FIG. While displaying a video related to AT confirmation, the navigation for acquiring one ticket is not executed.

During period T1b (the period during which AT confirmation is notified), AT gaming has not started, but since reducing the number of balls that are put out will be disadvantageous to the player, the navigation for acquiring one coin is not executed, and 12 To make it easier to win a prize in a winning role (small role 3). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction level without giving the player an excessive disadvantage.

In addition, depending on the player's skill, there is a possibility that he will win more in the 1-card role (minor role 4) than in the 12-card role (minor role 3) (from the time the AT confirmation notification starts until the start of AT gaming) During this period, the number of medals paid out may be reduced by a large amount), so during this period, the number of medals paid out is managed, and if it is determined that the number of medals paid out is small, 12 It may be configured to perform a navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 pieces) that suggests the order of operations to win a small winning combination (minor winning 3).

With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the sense of unfairness among players and increase the satisfaction level of players. During this time, when you win the normal push order bell, you may run a navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 coins) that suggests the order of operations to win a 12 coin minor prize (minor prize 3), and it is determined that the number of coins to be paid out is small. In this case, it is possible to increase the possibility of increasing the number of coins to be paid out at an early stage.

In addition, as explained using FIG. 193(c), in the advantageous section (AT state), with some exceptions, if the normal push order bell is won, 12 pieces of small winnings (small winnings 3) It is configured to execute a navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 coins) that suggests the order of operations to win a prize, and period T2a shown in FIG. 195(a) indicates a period in which the navigation for acquiring 12 coins is executed. .

In addition, in the advantageous section (AT state), with some exceptions, even if you win the bonus push order bell, there is a navigation system (12 pieces acquired The period T1c and the period T1e shown in FIG. 195(a) indicate the period during which the 12-piece acquisition navigation is executed.

In the period T1c, as shown in FIG. 3(c), while an AT notification is made to notify that the AT is in progress (in this example, a video regarding the AT state is displayed), a 12-piece acquisition navigation is executed. It is configured to do so. With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the player's desire to play during AT.

Similarly, in period T1e, as shown in FIG. is configured to run Navigation. With such a configuration, even in the ending period when the AT state ends soon, the player can play the game in a good mood, and the player's desire to play can be increased.

On the other hand, during a certain period (in this example, the AT continuous judge period) in the advantageous section (AT state), even if you win the normal push order bell or the specific push order bell, It is configured so that the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 coins) that suggests the order of operations to win the 12-piece small win (small win 3) is not executed, and the period T2c and period T1d shown in FIG. 195(a) are 12 This indicates a period during which the ticket acquisition navigation is not executed.

In the period T1d, as shown in FIG. 3(d), an AT continuation judge effect (in this example, a video display regarding whether or not to continue the AT set) is displayed to notify that the AT continuation judge is in progress. The system is configured so that the 12-piece acquisition navigation is not executed while performing a performance that indicates whether or not to execute it by determining the outcome of the battle performance (victory or defeat). With such a configuration, the navigation display will not obstruct the visibility of the AT continuation judge performance, and the player can fully enjoy the performance.

Furthermore, depending on the skill of the player, there is a possibility that the player may win more in the 1-card role (minor role 4) than in the 12-card role (minor role 3), so during this period, the number of medals paid out will be managed. After processing, if it is determined that the number of coins to be paid out is small, a navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 coins) will be performed that suggests the order of operations to win a 12-coin minor prize (minor prize 3) when the bonus pressing order bell is won. It may be configured as follows.

With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the sense of unfairness among players and increase the satisfaction level of players. During this time, when you win the normal push order bell, you may run a navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 coins) that suggests the order of operations to win a 12 coin minor prize (minor prize 3), and it is determined that the number of coins to be paid out is small. In this case, it is possible to increase the possibility of increasing the number of coins to be paid out at an early stage.

<Modified example>
Next, a modification of the gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described using FIGS. 196 to 200.

<Normal game mode>
FIG. 196(a) is a diagram showing an example of the modes in the normal state and the count value of the navigation frequency counter 2 corresponding to each mode, and FIG. 196(b) is a diagram showing the navigation compliance rate and the lottery for each mode. It is a figure showing an example of a value.

In this example, three modes, modes 1 to 3, are provided for the normal game. When the conditions for transition to normal games are met in the AT state (in this example, when all games in the AT state have been played), the navigation compliance rate and the lottery data are determined by referring to the lottery data shown in FIG. Based on this, one of modes 1 to 3 is selected by lottery, and when the state shifts to the normal state, the mode shifts to the mode selected by lottery.

Here, mode 1 is a mode in which transition to the AT state is determined when the counter value of the navigation counter 2 reaches 500 in the normal state. Furthermore, mode 2 is a mode in which transition to the AT state is determined when the counter value of the navigation counter 2 reaches 400 in the normal state. Furthermore, mode 3 is a mode in which transition to the AT state is determined when the counter value of the navigation counter 2 reaches 300 in the normal state.

For example, if the navigation compliance rate at the end of the AT state is over 90%, mode 1 is selected with a 50/100 probability, mode 2 is selected with a 30/100 probability, and mode 2 is selected with a 20/100 probability. Select mode 3 with probability.

Furthermore, if the navigation compliance rate at the end of the AT state is in the range of 70% to 90%, mode 1 is selected with a probability of 70/100, mode 2 is selected with a probability of 20/100, and mode 2 is selected with a probability of 10/100. Mode 3 is selected with a probability of 100.

Also, if the navigation compliance rate at the end of the AT state is less than 70%, mode 1 is selected with a 90/100 probability, mode 2 is selected with a 5/100 probability, and mode 2 is selected with a 5/100 probability. Select mode 3.

That is, in this example, the higher the navigation observance rate at the end of the AT state, the more likely the mode (mode 3 in this example) to easily transition to the AT state is selected. With such a configuration, players will operate according to the navigation in order to increase the navigation compliance rate in order to make it easier to transition to the AT state. It becomes possible to achieve a higher ball payout rate and playability.

<Modified example of navigation counter display>
FIG. 197 is a diagram showing a modification example of the display of the navigation frequency counter.

In the above embodiment, even if an operation other than the correct operation order is performed due to an operation error etc., 1 is added to the navigation counters 1 and 2, and the added value is displayed. In this example, if an operation other than the correct pressing order operation is performed due to an operation error or the like, the navigation counters 1 and 2 are configured not to be incremented by 1. Note that the numerical values on the navigation counters 1 and 2 are displayed as numerical values that match internally stored numerical values.

Specifically, the state shown in FIG. 6(i) is the state in which the navigation display has started, and in this example, each stop button 137 to 139 is pressed in the reverse direction based on the winning of the privilege push order bell 6. A navigation system that prompts users to operate in sequence (LCR) and an effect image EF have started to be displayed.

In addition, in the same state, since the total number of executions of the navigation of the privilege push order bell at the time of the start of the game is 1, the number 1 is displayed in the counter 1 display area CT1, and the navigation in the advantageous section at the time of the start of the game is displayed. Since the cumulative number of times is 14, the numerical value 14 is displayed in the counter 1 display area CT2.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 3) and 1-card small win (small win 4), the navigation and effect image EF are deleted, and due to the payout process, the player does not follow the navigation and performs operations other than correct answer pressing order. It is determined that the stop operation has been performed, and a display indicating a failure (in this example, a display including the character string "FAIL") is started.

The subsequent state shown in (iii) of the same figure is a state after winning has been determined, and the display indicating a loss (failure) has been erased.

In addition, in this game, an operation other than the correct answer pressing order operation is performed, and the total number of navigation executions for the bonus pressing order bell (navigation number counter 1) is not added, so the number 1 is displayed in the counter 1 display area CT1. However, since the cumulative number of navigation operations in the advantageous section (navigation frequency counter 2) is not added, the numerical value of 14 is displayed in the counter 2 display area CT2.

In addition, in the above embodiment, when the player performs an operation according to the navigation for acquiring 12 medals, an example is shown in which a sound effect (payout sound) is output when paying out 12 medals. In this example, since an operation other than the correct operation order (operation not recommended) was performed, the sound effect (payout sound) is not output even if a 1-card winning combination (small winning combination 4) is won. It consists of

In this example, as a result of operations other than the correct answer pressing order operation, the number of balls that come out can be reduced, so the process of changing the transition probability to the second chance state or AT state based on the navigation compliance rate, There is no need to perform processing to change the probability of continuation of the set. Therefore, the control burden on the game machine can be reduced. In addition, if the gameplay is such that the game state changes according to the numerical values of the navigation counters 1 and 2, the gameplay can be made so that it is not easily affected by operation mistakes made by other players.

<Variation example of navigation execution period>
FIG. 198 is a diagram showing a modification of the navigation execution period.

In the above embodiment, in the advantageous section (AT state), with some exceptions, if you win the normal pressing order bell, the navigation for acquiring 12 pieces is executed, and even if you win the special pressing order bell, , an example of executing the 12-piece acquisition navigation is shown, but as shown in FIG. Even in the case where the privilege push order bell is won in the period T1c1, the navigation for acquiring 12 tickets may be configured to be executed 100% of the time.

In addition, as shown in (ii) of the same figure, in the advantageous section (AT state), if you win the normal push order bell in period T2a2, the navigation for acquiring 12 pieces is executed 100%, and the privilege push in period T1c2. When winning the first bell, the navigation system that notifies only the first stop operation in the correct operation sequence (for example, displays "?-1-?" in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157) is executed 100%. It may be configured as follows.

With this configuration, the probability of winning a 12-piece small win (small win 3) will be from 5/6 to 1/2, so the difficulty level of winning can be increased, making it possible to play a game where you guess the correct operation order. It is possible to improve the gameplay. In this case, there is a possibility that the first stop operation is performed on a stop button other than the stop button on the middle reel, but this does not pose a problem if the gameplay treats these operations as incorrect operations.

In addition, as shown in (iii) of the same figure, in the advantageous section (AT state), if you win the normal push order bell in period T2a3, the navigation for acquiring 12 pieces is executed 100%, and the special push bell is executed in period T1c3. If the player wins the first bell, the navigation for acquiring 12 tickets may not be executed.

With this configuration, the probability of winning a 12-piece small winning combination (small winning 3) is 5/6, so it is essentially the same as when executing the 12-card acquisition navigation, but when executing the navigation. The frequency of the display can be lowered, the navigation display does not obstruct the visibility of the performance (for example, the ending performance) during the AT state, and the player can fully enjoy the performance.

<Navi modification example>
FIG. 199 is a diagram showing a modification of the navigation system.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which a game with a small number of balls is played by executing the navigation for acquiring one coin in an advantageous section (non-AT state). It may be configured to execute a navigation that does not allow the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) to be won when the winning result is won.

Specifically, the state shown in (i) in the same figure is the state where the navigation has started displaying, and in this example, based on the winning of the small winning combination 1 (watermelon), the corresponding small winning combination 1 (watermelon) is displayed. Navigation (in this example, the text string ``Caution'') that prompts you to perform a stop operation (missing the watermelon) so that the symbol combination (in this example, ``Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon'') does not appear on the winning line display) and effect image EF are started.

The subsequent state shown in (ii) of the same figure is a state in which the third stop operation (pressing the stop button 139) is performed to set the third stop reel to the right reel 112. In this example, the third stop operation is performed. Since it was accepted, the navigation and effect image EF that prompts you to miss the watermelon have been deleted.

In addition, through the payout process, it is determined that the player has performed a stop operation according to the navigation so as to miss the small win 1 (watermelon), and a display indicating that the watermelon has been missed (in this example, "success" is displayed) ) is starting.

With such a configuration, by controlling the display on the navigation system, it is possible to play games with fewer balls, and it is possible to realize the ball output rate and playability that match the intentions of the game machine designer. It becomes possible.

Note that the same navigation may be performed for the small winning combination 2 (Cherry), which is the missed winning combination, or the same navigation may be performed for both the small winning combination 1 (Watermelon) and the small winning combination 2 (Cherry). In addition, since it is possible to drop both the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) and the small winning combination 2 (cherry) even without a navigation that prompts players to drop the winnings, the game may be played without navigation. Even if there is no navigation that prompts players to miss out, if a certain predetermined operation mode is executed every game, it becomes possible to cause more missed wins compared to when the specific operation mode is not executed every game. The degree of advantage can be changed using the result of directly or indirectly determining that the operation mode has been executed. Since the operation mode does not need to be changed every game, it is possible to provide a gaming experience in which operation errors are less likely to occur. Furthermore, by setting the internal winning probability of a combination that can win a prize when performing a specific operation mode to be lower than the internal winning probability of a combination that can win a prize when other operation modes are performed, By executing each game, the frequency of winning can be reduced compared to the case where a specific operation mode is not executed every game.

<Modified example of AT state>
FIG. 200(a) is a diagram showing a modification of the AT state, and FIG. 200(b) is a diagram showing an example of an AT end screen displayed during the AT extension period.

In the above embodiment, the AT state is set to 30 games in one set, but as in this example, if there is a mistake in the pressing order (an operation other than the correct pressing order) during one set (30 games), the The AT state may be extended by increasing the number of games in the AT state depending on the order error.

Specifically, as shown in Figure (a), in one set (30 games), there were X number of wrong presses (operations other than the correct press order for the 12-card combination), and the 12-card combination was incorrectly pressed X times. If the winning combination is missed, the AT state may be extended until the 12-card winning combination is won X times.

Furthermore, if the AT state is extended by the number of incorrect presses (X times in this example) until a 12-card winning combination is won, there is a possibility that the profit given to the player will become excessive due to the winning of other winning combinations, etc. Therefore, the AT state may be extended until a 12-card winning combination is won a number of times less than the number of times of incorrect press order (X times in this example).

In addition, when extending the AT state, the display that was displayed at the end of one set (30 games) (for example, the AT end screen as shown in FIG. 6B) continues to be displayed. Since the extension period of the AT state is uncertain and the frequency of extension is low, the configuration is such that no special display for extension is provided. In order to clarify the total number of medals to be paid out, a display indicating the total number of medals to be paid out may be displayed on the AT end screen.

During the advantageous period (non-AT state), it is possible to increase the number of coins paid out by performing operations that do not follow the navigation for acquiring one coin, so players who have noticed this can There is a possibility of performing operations that do not follow the navigation instructions. Therefore, as in this example, if the AT state is extended until a 12-card winning combination is won by the number of incorrect presses, the player's profit can be secured in the extended ATT state. Player satisfaction can be increased.

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 189) has a plurality of reels (for example, the reel 110 shown in FIG. ~112), a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 189) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels; an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to one or more winnings or losses (for example, processing of a winning prize internal lottery); and after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, A stop control means (for example, processing of reel stop control) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed based on the lottery result derived by the lottery means, and the stop control means A gaming value imparting means (e.g., medal payout processing) that imparts gaming value in accordance with the stop state of the plurality of stopped reels, and operation information that notifies operation information (eg, operation navigation) in the AT state. A game machine comprising a notification means, and a game control means that controls the progress of the game and can change the advantage level (for example, a process of changing the game state), the game control means including a first One gaming state can be set from a plurality of gaming states including at least a gaming state (e.g., normal state) and a second gaming state (e.g., AT state) different from the first gaming state; Based on the fact that a predetermined condition is met while the gaming state is being set (for example, winning the AT transition lottery), the first gaming state is ended and the second gaming state is set. When a specific lottery result (for example, bonus push order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state, the stop operation of the stop button is stopped in the first game state. The game is more effective when the second operation according to the second operation conditions (for example, the operation to stop the LCR, etc.) is performed than the first operation according to the operation conditions (for example, the operation to stop the RCL). It is possible to acquire a large amount of value (for example, medals), and the game control means controls a stop operation of the stop button when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state. The smaller the number of times the second operation is performed, the more advantageous the second gaming state is. The second gaming state is the AT state. This game machine is characterized by:

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, performing the stop operation of the stop button as the first operation increases the advantage regarding the AT state. In this case, the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and the provision of game value such as payout of game media can be appropriately controlled.

In addition, "the more times the stop button is stopped by the second operation, the more advantageous the second game state is changed" means "the more the stop button is stopped by the second operation, the lower the advantage is for the second gaming state" The content is not limited to ``the more times the operation is performed in the second operation, the more the advantage regarding the second gaming state is ``always'' changed to a lower advantage.'' The more times the stopping operation is performed in the second operation, the more the advantageous degree regarding the second gaming state changes to a lower advantageous degree.'' The same applies to game machines).

Therefore, for example, the advantage regarding the second gaming state may be set to the same advantage when the second operation is performed 3 times and 4 times, or when the number of times performed in the second operation is 4. Due to other factors (for example, lottery, etc.), the second game state may be set to have a higher advantage than the third time, or Even if the number of times the second operation is performed is 0 (for example, 0 operation errors), the advantage regarding the second gaming state may not change.

Further, the "specific lottery result" according to the present invention is not limited to a single lottery result (for example, bonus push order bell 1), but one of a plurality of lottery results (for example, privilege push order bell 1). to 6) (the same applies to game machines described below).

Therefore, for example, if a small role X, a small role Y, and a small role Z are set as a specific small role group, and a small role X, a small role Y, or a small role Z are internally won, the specific small role group is internally won. (a "specific lottery result" according to the present invention has been derived), the small winning combination Small win Y is a win when the right reel is the first stop reel, and small win X is a win when compared to small win Y and small win Z. , is a winning combination with a low internal winning probability, and small winning combinations X, small winning combination Y, and small winning combination Z may be a winning combination in which the number of medals paid out is the same (e.g., 8 medals) when winning a prize.

With such a configuration, if the player continues playing a game with the left reel as the first stop reel (a game in which the first operation was performed), the number of medals that the player can obtain will be reduced, and the number of medals paid out will decrease when the left reel is the first stop reel. If the player continues to play the game with the left reel as the first stop reel (a game in which the second operation is performed), the number of medals the player can obtain will increase, but if the player continues to play the game with the left reel as the first stop reel In addition, games such as AT games can be changed advantageously.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 189) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 189) that are decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate. , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 189) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each having one or more roles. an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to winnings or losses (for example, processing of an internal lottery for winning combinations); and after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, processing of reel stop control) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, based on the lottery result that has been performed; A gaming value imparting means (for example, a medal payout process) that imparts gaming value in accordance with the stop state of a plurality of reels, an operation information notifying means that notifies operating information in the AT state, and a controlling device that controls the progress of the game. , a game control means (for example, processing for transitioning the game state) that can change the advantage, and the state before the AT state includes a normal state and a chance state. , the chance state is a state in which it is easier to shift to the AT state than the normal state, and the game control means is configured to control a first gaming state (for example, a normal state) and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state. One game state can be set from a plurality of game states including at least two game states (e.g., a second chance state), and a predetermined condition is satisfied when the first game state is set. means that can end the first gaming state and set the second gaming state based on the fact (for example, winning the AT transition lottery), When a specific lottery result (for example, privilege push order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means, the stop operation of the stop button is performed as the first operation according to the first operation condition (for example, the RCL stop operation). ), it is possible to obtain more of the gaming value (for example, medals) by performing the second operation according to the second operation condition (for example, stop operation of LCR, etc.), and the game control The means is configured such that when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state, the smaller the number of times the stop operation of the stop button is performed in the second operation, the more the second lottery result is determined. The gaming machine is characterized in that the second gaming state is the chance state.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, performing the stop operation of the stop button as the first operation increases the advantage regarding the chance state. In this case, the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and the provision of game value such as payout of game media can be appropriately controlled.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 189) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 189) that are decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate. , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 189) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each having one or more roles. an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to winnings or losses (for example, processing of an internal lottery for winning combinations); and after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, processing of reel stop control) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, based on the lottery result that has been performed; A gaming value imparting means (for example, a medal payout process) that imparts gaming value in accordance with the stop state of a plurality of reels, an operation information notifying means that notifies operating information in the AT state, and a controlling device that controls the progress of the game. , a game control means (for example, processing for transitioning the game state) that can change the advantage, and the state before the AT state includes a normal state and a chance state. , the chance states include a first chance state and a second chance state, the second chance state is a state in which it is easier to transition to the AT state than the normal state, and the first chance state is a state in which the higher the advantage, the easier it is to shift to the second chance state, and the game control means is a state different from a first gaming state (for example, a normal state) and the first gaming state. One gaming state can be set from a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state (for example, a first chance state), and a predetermined condition is satisfied while the first gaming state is set. The means is capable of terminating the first gaming state and setting the second gaming state based on the fact that the player has won an AT transfer lottery (for example, winning an AT transition lottery), The predetermined condition is set after the predetermined condition is satisfied, based on the result of the player's operation of the stop button when a specific lottery result (for example, bonus push order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means. The means is capable of changing the degree of advantage regarding the second gaming state, and when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state, the stopping operation of the stop button is changed in the first gaming state. The second operation (for example, stop operation of LCR, etc.) according to the second operation condition is more effective than the first operation (for example, stop operation of RCL) according to the operation conditions of A large amount of gaming value (for example, medals) can be acquired, and the game control means controls the stop operation of the stop button when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state. The smaller the number of times the second operation is performed, the more advantageous the second gaming state becomes. This game machine is characterized by being in a state for transitioning to a chance state.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, performing the stop operation of the stop button as the first operation increases the advantage regarding the state for transitioning to the chance state. , it is possible to prompt the player to perform the first operation in the first gaming state, and it is possible to appropriately control the provision of gaming value such as payout of gaming media.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 189) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 189) that are decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate. , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 189) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each having one or more roles. an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to winnings or losses (for example, processing of an internal lottery for winning combinations); and after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, processing of reel stop control) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, based on the lottery result that has been performed; A gaming value imparting means (for example, a medal payout process) that imparts gaming value in accordance with the stop state of a plurality of reels, an operation information notifying means that notifies operating information in the AT state, and a controlling device that controls the progress of the game. , a game control means that can change the advantage (for example, a process for changing the game state), and the game control means is configured to change the first game state (for example, the normal state) and the corresponding game state. One game state can be set from a plurality of game states including at least a second game state (for example, an AT state) different from the first game state, and a predetermined state is set in the state in which the first game state is set. means that is capable of terminating the first gaming state and setting the second gaming state based on the condition being met (for example, winning the AT transition lottery); When a specific lottery result (for example, bonus press order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means in one gaming state, the stop operation of the stop button is performed by a first operation ( For example, you can earn more of the gaming value (for example, medals) if you perform a second operation according to the second operation condition (for example, a stop operation of LCR, etc.) than if you perform a second operation (for example, a stop operation of LCR, etc.) than a stop operation of RCL. and the game control means determines the number of times the stop button is operated in the second operation when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state. The larger the number, the means for changing the advantageous degree regarding the second gaming state to a lower advantageous degree, the second gaming state is an AT state, and the first gaming state is a means for changing the advantageous degree regarding the second gaming state to a lower advantageous degree, and the second gaming state is an AT state. A plurality of modes (for example, modes 1 to 3 shown in FIGS. 196(a) and 196(b)) are included, and the game control means controls the stop operation of the stop button to The smaller the number of times the second operation is performed (for example, the higher the navigation compliance rate), the mode in the first gaming state may be changed to a mode with a higher degree of advantage regarding transition to the AT state. This game machine is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, performing the stop operation of the stop button in the first operation increases the advantage regarding the second advantageous state. It is possible to prompt the player to perform the first operation in the gaming state, and it is possible to appropriately control the provision of gaming value such as payout of gaming media. In addition, when a specific lottery result is derived, if the stop operation of the stop button is performed as the first operation, the mode becomes easier to shift to the AT state. Operation can be prompted, and it is possible to appropriately control the provision of game value such as payout of game media.

Further, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state, it is possible to execute notification for causing the stop button to be stopped by the first operation. Good too.

With such a configuration, it is possible to impress the first operation on the player by providing a notification that prompts the first operation in the first gaming state.

Further, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the second gaming state, a notification (for example, 12 coins acquired) to cause the stop button to be stopped by the second operation. It may also be possible to execute the navigation system.

With such a configuration, in the second gaming state, by providing notification to encourage the player to perform the second operation with a high profit, it is possible to impress upon the player that the second operation is advantageous. At the same time, player profits can be granted.
Further, in a game in which the notification is executed, a count value indicating the number of times the notification is executed may be displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to visually grasp the number of times the notification is executed, and it is possible to increase the player's motivation for operation.

Further, the specific lottery results include a first lottery result (for example, a normal push order bell) and a second lottery result that is different from the first lottery result (for example, a bonus push order bell). , when the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the second lottery result is derived more than when the player performs a stop operation of the stop button using the second operation. In this case, if the player performs the stop operation of the stop button using the second operation, it is possible to obtain more of the gaming value, and in the first gaming state, the internal lottery means selects the second When a lottery result is derived, it may be possible to execute notification for causing the first operation to perform a stop operation of the stop button.

With such a configuration, even if the player performs the second operation that does not comply with the notification, the player can gain profit, so even if the notification prompts the first operation, the player will not feel dissatisfied. can be resolved.

<Navi count>
Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 189) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 189) that are decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate. , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 189) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each having one or more roles. an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to winnings or losses (for example, processing of an internal lottery for winning combinations); and after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, processing of reel stop control) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, based on the lottery result that has been performed; A gaming value imparting means (for example, a medal payout process) that imparts a gaming value according to the stop state of the plurality of reels; a game control means that controls the progress of the game (for example, a process that changes the gaming state); The game machine is equipped with It is possible to set one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a chance state, a first chance state), and a predetermined condition is satisfied while the first gaming state is set (for example, The means is capable of ending the first gaming state and setting the second gaming state based on the winning of the AT transition lottery, and the second gaming state is the first gaming state. A stop operation of the stop button when the state is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state and a specific lottery result (for example, bonus press order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state. The case where the second operation according to the second operating conditions (for example, stopping operation of LCR, etc.) is performed rather than the first operation according to first operating conditions (for example, stopping operation of RCL) is able to acquire a large amount of the gaming value (for example, medals), and when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the number of times the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the second operation The larger the number of games, the greater the number of games until the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the number of games that will be updated when performed by the first operation. This game machine is characterized in that it can display count values (for example, the numerical values of navigation counters 1 and 2 shown in FIG. 194).

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, performing the stop operation of the stop button as the first operation increases the advantage regarding the AT state. In this case, the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and the provision of game value such as payout of game media can be appropriately controlled. Further, since a count value that is updated when a specific lottery result is derived is displayed, it becomes possible to grasp the lottery result, and it is possible to maintain the player's desire to play.

Further, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, a notification (for example, navigation for acquiring 1 ticket, navigation for acquiring 12 tickets, etc.) for causing the stop button to be stopped by the first operation. Navigation) may be possible.

With such a configuration, a stop operation can be notified, and the player's motivation for operation can be increased.

Further, the certain count value may be a count value indicating the number of times the stop operation has been performed in accordance with the notification in a game in which the notification has been executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to visually grasp the number of times the notification is executed, and it is possible to increase the player's motivation for operation.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 189) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 189) that are decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate. , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 189) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each having one or more roles. an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to winnings or losses (for example, processing of an internal lottery for winning combinations); and after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, processing of reel stop control) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, based on the lottery result that has been performed; A gaming value imparting means (for example, a medal payout process) that imparts a gaming value according to the stop state of a plurality of reels, and a gaming control means (for example, a gaming state) that controls the progress of the game and can change the advantage. A game machine comprising: a first game state (e.g. normal state) and a second game state different from the first game state (e.g. , an AT state, a second chance state, and a first chance state), and when a predetermined condition is met while the first gaming state is set. The means is capable of terminating the first gaming state and setting the second gaming state based on the fact that the first gaming state is satisfied (for example, winning the AT transition lottery), and the first gaming state In this state, when a specific lottery result (e.g., bonus pressing order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means, the player performs a first operation (for example, a stop operation of the stop button) according to a first operation condition. For example, you can earn more of the gaming value (for example, medals) if you perform a second operation according to the second operation condition (for example, a stop operation of LCR, etc.) than if you perform a second operation (for example, a stop operation of LCR, etc.) than a stop operation of RCL. and the game control means determines the number of times the stop button is operated in the second operation when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state. The less the advantage, the more the advantage regarding the second gaming state may be changed, and when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the stop operation of the stop button It is possible to execute a notification (for example, navigation for acquiring 1 coin, navigation for acquiring 12 coins) to cause the above-mentioned first operation or second operation to be performed, and in the game in which the notification is executed, the information is updated. This game machine is characterized in that it can display a certain count value (for example, the numerical value of the navigation counter 2 shown in FIG. 194).

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, performing the stop operation of the stop button as the first operation increases the advantage regarding the AT state. In this case, the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and the provision of game value such as payout of game media can be appropriately controlled. Further, since a count value indicating the number of executions of the notification is displayed, the number of executions of the notification can be visually grasped, and the player's motivation for operation can be improved.

Further, the game control means may be a means for changing the degree of advantage in the game to a degree of advantage that increases as the certain count value increases.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prompt the player to operate according to the navigation, and it is possible to appropriately control the provision of game value such as payout of game media.

Further, the specific lottery results include a first lottery result (for example, a normal push order bell) and a second lottery result that is different from the first lottery result (for example, a bonus push order bell). , when the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the second lottery result is derived more than when the player performs a stop operation of the stop button using the second operation. In this case, if the player performs the stop operation of the stop button using the second operation, it is possible to obtain more of the gaming value, and in the first gaming state, at least the first When the second lottery result is derived, it may be possible to execute notification for causing the first operation to perform a stop operation of the stop button.

With such a configuration, even if the player performs the second operation that does not comply with the notification, the player can gain profit, so even if the notification prompts the first operation, the player will not feel dissatisfied. can be resolved.

<Navi non-execution period>
Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 189) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 189) that are decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate. , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 189) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each having one or more roles. an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to winnings or losses (for example, processing of an internal lottery for winning combinations); and after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, processing of reel stop control) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, based on the lottery result that has been performed; A gaming value imparting means (for example, a medal payout process) that imparts a gaming value according to the stop state of a plurality of reels, and a gaming control means (for example, a gaming state) that controls the progress of the game and can change the advantage. A game machine comprising: a first game state (e.g. normal state) and a second game state different from the first game state (e.g. , an AT state, a second chance state, and a first chance state), and when a predetermined condition is met while the first gaming state is set. The means is capable of terminating the first gaming state and setting the second gaming state based on the fact that the first gaming state is satisfied (for example, winning the AT transition lottery), and the first gaming state In this state, when a specific lottery result (for example, privilege push order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means, the stop operation of the stop button is performed by a first operation (for example, RCL) according to the first operation condition. It is possible to obtain more of the gaming value (for example, medals) when performing a second operation according to the second operation condition (for example, a stop operation of LCR etc.) than when performing a second operation (for example, a stop operation of LCR etc.) than a second operation (for example, a stop operation of LCR etc.), The game control means, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state, the fewer the number of times the stop operation of the stop button is performed in the second operation, It is a means that may change the degree of advantage regarding the second game state to a high degree of advantage, and the game control means is a means that may change the degree of advantage regarding the second game state to a high degree of advantage, and the game control means is a means that may change the degree of advantage regarding the second game state to a degree of advantage, and the game control means is a means that may change the degree of advantage related to the second game state. If the second operation is used to stop the stop button in a non-advantageous section), the advantageous degree regarding the second gaming state is not included in the number of changes. It's a game machine.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, performing the stop operation of the stop button as the first operation increases the advantage regarding the AT state. In this case, the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and the provision of game value such as payout of game media can be appropriately controlled. Further, since there is a period in which the advantage level does not change, it is possible to add variety to the game and maintain the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 189) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 189) that are decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate. , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 189) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each having one or more roles. an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to winnings or losses (for example, processing of an internal lottery for winning combinations); and after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, processing of reel stop control) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, based on the lottery result that has been performed; A gaming value imparting means (for example, a medal payout process) that imparts a gaming value according to the stop state of a plurality of reels, and a gaming control means (for example, a gaming state) that controls the progress of the game and can change the advantage. A game machine comprising: a first game state (e.g. normal state) and a second game state different from the first game state (e.g. , an AT state, a second chance state, and a first chance state), and when a predetermined condition is met while the first gaming state is set. It is possible to end the first gaming state and set the second gaming state based on the satisfaction (for example, winning the AT transition lottery), and in the first gaming state, the When a specific lottery result (for example, privilege push order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means, the stop operation of the stop button is performed as the first operation according to the first operation condition (for example, the RCL stop operation). ), it is possible to obtain more of the gaming value (for example, medals) by performing the second operation according to the second operation condition (for example, stop operation of LCR, etc.), and the game control The means is configured such that when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state, the smaller the number of times the stop operation of the stop button is performed in the second operation, the more the second lottery result is determined. The game control means may change the degree of advantage regarding the game state to a high degree of advantage, and the game control means may change the stop operation of the stop button to the second operation in a specific period in the first game state. 195(b), the advantageous degree related to the second gaming state is not included in the number of times the advantage is changed, and the specific period is a means of not including the advantageous degree regarding the second gaming state in the number of changes. ) is being executed.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, performing the stop operation of the stop button as the first operation increases the advantage regarding the AT state. In this case, the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and the provision of game value such as payout of game media can be appropriately controlled. Further, since there is a period in which the advantage level does not change, it is possible to add variety to the game and maintain the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 189) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 189) that are decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate. , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 189) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each having one or more roles. an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to winnings or losses (for example, processing of an internal lottery for winning combinations); and after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, processing of reel stop control) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, based on the lottery result that has been performed; A gaming value imparting means (for example, a medal payout process) that imparts a gaming value according to the stop state of a plurality of reels, and a game control means (for example, a game control means that can control the progress of a game and change the degree of advantage in the game). , a process for transitioning a gaming state), and the game control means controls a first gaming state (for example, a normal state) and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state. It is possible to set one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least states (for example, AT state, second chance state, and first chance state), and in the first gaming state, the internal lottery means selects a specific game state. When a lottery result (e.g., privilege pressing order bell 6) is derived, the stop operation of the stop button is set to a second operation than the first operation (for example, RCL stop operation) according to the first operation condition. It is possible to obtain more of the gaming value (for example, medals) when the second operation (for example, stop operation of LCR etc.) is performed in accordance with the operation conditions, and the game control means When the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in a gaming state, the smaller the number of times the stop button is operated in the second operation, the more advantageous the second gaming state becomes. The game control means is a means that may change the degree of advantage to a high degree of advantage, and the game control means is a means for changing the degree of advantage to a high degree of advantage, and the game control means is a means for controlling a specific period in the second game state (for example, a period T1d shown in FIG. 195(a); a continuous judgment period of the AT state). The gaming machine is characterized in that when the stopping operation of the stop button is performed by the second operation, the advantageous degree regarding the second gaming state is not included in the number of times of changing. .

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, performing the stop operation of the stop button as the first operation increases the advantage regarding the AT state. In this case, the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and the provision of game value such as payout of game media can be appropriately controlled. Further, since there is a period in which the advantage level does not change, it is possible to add variety to the game and maintain the player's desire to play.

Further, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the second gaming state, it is possible to issue a notification to cause the stop button to be stopped by the second operation. , the notification may not be executed during a certain period in the second gaming state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to add variety to the game, and it is possible to sustain the player's desire to play.

Further, the specific period may be a period in which the gaming value given to the player changes less than periods other than the specific period.

With such a configuration, it is possible to add more variety to the game and increase the variety of games.

Further, if the total amount of the gaming value awarded in the specific period is less than a certain amount, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, a stop operation of the stop button is performed. It may be possible to perform notification for performing the second operation.

With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid putting the player at a disadvantage, and it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction level.

Further, the specific lottery results include a first lottery result (for example, a normal push order bell) and a second lottery result that is different from the first lottery result (for example, a bonus push order bell). , when the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the second lottery result is derived more than when the player performs a stop operation of the stop button using the second operation. In this case, if the player performs the stop operation of the stop button using the second operation, it is possible to obtain more of the gaming value, and in the first gaming state, at least the first When the second lottery result is derived, it may be possible to execute notification for causing the first operation to perform a stop operation of the stop button.

With such a configuration, even if the player performs the second operation that does not comply with the notification, the player can gain profit, so even if the notification prompts the first operation, the player will not feel dissatisfied. can be resolved.

<Navigation when winning other winning roles>
Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 189) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 189) that are decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate. , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 189) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each having one or more roles. an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to winnings or losses (for example, processing of an internal lottery for winning combinations); and after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, processing of reel stop control) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, based on the lottery result that has been performed; A gaming value imparting means (for example, a medal payout process) that imparts a gaming value according to the stop state of a plurality of reels, and a gaming control means (for example, a gaming state) that controls the progress of the game and can change the advantage. A game machine comprising: a first game state (e.g. normal state) and a second game state different from the first game state (e.g. , an AT state, a second chance state, and a first chance state. When a lottery result (e.g., privilege pressing order bell 6) is derived, the stop operation of the stop button is set to a second operation than the first operation (for example, RCL stop operation) according to the first operation condition. It is possible to obtain more of the gaming value (for example, medals) when the second operation (for example, stop operation of LCR etc.) is performed in accordance with the operation conditions, and the game control means When the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in a gaming state, the smaller the number of times the stop button is operated in the second operation, the more advantageous the second gaming state becomes. When the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state, the stop operation of the stop button is changed to a high advantage. A first notification (for example, navigation for acquiring one ticket with an effect image EF shown in FIG. 193(b)) to be performed by operation can be executed, and in the first gaming state, the internal lottery means Even if a lottery result different from the specific lottery result (for example, re-gaming combination, loss) is derived, a second notification (for example, , one-image acquisition navigation without effect image EF shown in FIG. 193(b)) can be executed, and the second notification and the first notification are at least partially the same in aspect. This is a game machine that features:

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, performing the stop operation of the stop button as the first operation increases the advantage regarding the AT state. In this case, the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and the provision of game value such as payout of game media can be appropriately controlled. Further, since notification is made even when a lottery result different from a specific lottery result is derived, it is possible to make the players play the game at a good pace.

Further, in a game in which the first notification is executed, a count value indicating the number of times the first notification is executed may be displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to visually grasp the number of times the notification is executed, and it is possible to increase the player's motivation for operation.

Further, the game control means may be a means for changing the degree of advantage in the game to a degree of advantage that increases as the count value increases.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prompt the player to operate according to the navigation, and it is possible to appropriately control the provision of game value such as payout of game media.

Further, the specific lottery results include a first lottery result (for example, a normal push order bell) and a second lottery result that is different from the first lottery result (for example, a bonus push order bell). , when the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the second lottery result is derived more than when the player performs a stop operation of the stop button using the second operation. In this case, if the player performs the stop operation of the stop button using the second operation, it is possible to obtain more of the gaming value, and in the first gaming state, at least the first When the second lottery result is derived, it may be possible to execute notification for causing the first operation to perform a stop operation of the stop button.

With such a configuration, even if the player performs the second operation that does not comply with the notification, the player can gain profit, so even if the notification prompts the first operation, the player will not feel dissatisfied. can be resolved.

<Navi in AT state>
Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 189) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 189) that are decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate. , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 189) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each having one or more roles. an internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to winnings or losses (for example, processing of an internal lottery for winning combinations); and after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, processing of reel stop control) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed, based on the lottery result that has been performed; A gaming value imparting means (for example, a medal payout process) that imparts a gaming value according to the stop state of a plurality of reels, and a gaming control means (for example, a gaming state) that controls the progress of the game and can change the advantage. A game machine comprising: a first game state (e.g. normal state) and a second game state different from the first game state (e.g. , an AT state, a second chance state, and a first chance state), and in the first gaming state, the internal lottery means selects a specific lottery result ( For example, when the privilege pressing order bell 6) is derived, the stop operation of the stop button is set to the second operation condition rather than the first operation according to the first operation condition (for example, RCL stop operation). It is possible to obtain more of the gaming value (for example, medals) by performing the second operation (for example, stop operation of LCR, etc.), and the game control means When the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the smaller the number of times the stop button is stopped by the second operation, the higher the advantage level regarding the second gaming state is. It is a means that may change the advantage, and the specific lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, a normal pressing order bell) and a second lottery result (for example, a normal pressing order bell) and a second lottery result different from the first lottery result. For example, in the case where the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means and the player performs the stop operation of the stop button with the second operation, When the second lottery result is derived, if the player performs the stop operation of the stop button using the second operation, it is possible to obtain more of the game value, and the second lottery result is obtained. When the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the state, it is possible to execute a notification (for example, a navigation for acquiring 12 tickets) to cause the stop button to be stopped by the first operation. and when the second lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the second gaming state, a notification (for example, 12 This game machine is characterized by being able to execute a game machine (Navi for acquiring coins).

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, performing the stop operation of the stop button as the first operation increases the advantage regarding the AT state. In this case, the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and the provision of game value such as payout of game media can be appropriately controlled. In addition, in the second gaming state, in both cases when the first lottery result is derived and when the second lottery result is derived, in order to notify the user to perform the second operation, In the second gaming state, it is possible to easily acquire gaming value without worrying about the lottery result, and the player's satisfaction level can be increased.

Further, when the first lottery result (for example, a bonus push order bell of 1) is derived by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state, the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the first operation. and when the second lottery result (for example, privilege pressing order bell 2) is derived by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state, a stop operation of the stop button can be performed. It may be possible to perform notification for causing the second operation to be performed.

Furthermore, the second gaming state may be an AT state.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily acquire gaming value without worrying about the lottery result in the AT state, and it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction level.

Further, the notification is performed when the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the second gaming state, and the second lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the second gaming state. The notifications executed when the above is derived may have the same notification mode.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily acquire gaming value without being conscious of the stop operation, and it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction level.

Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine 100 according to the above embodiment. Therefore, for example, the "first gaming state" and "second gaming state" according to the present invention may be a combination of different gaming states, such as a normal state, a CZ state, an AT state, a specialized zone, In addition to the ED state, it may be a combination of gaming states such as RT, AT, ART, bonus, AT or ART pullback zone.

In addition, "the predetermined condition is met" according to the present invention is not limited to winning an AT lottery, for example, the number of games has reached a predetermined number of games, the number of points has reached a predetermined number of points, etc. This includes reaching a certain amount, winning an internal prize (or winning a prize) in a predetermined condition device, and fulfilling a bonus termination condition.

Furthermore, the combination of "first gaming state" → "predetermined condition is met" → "second gaming state" according to the present invention is "normal game" → "AT lottery winning" → "AT state". For example, "CZ state" → "AT lottery win" → "AT state", "Bonus" → "AT lottery win" → "AT state", "Normal state" → "Number of games is the default" "Number of games has reached" → "AT status", "AT status" → "Number of games has reached the default number of games" → "Specialized zone", "Normal game" → "Number of points has reached the default number of points" "Achieved" → "AT state", "AT state" → "Number of points has reached the predetermined number of points" → "Specialized zone", "AT state" → "Number of points has reached the predetermined number of points" → "Pseudo bonus", "Normal state" → "Internally won (or won) in a predetermined condition device" → "AT state", "Normal state" → "Internally won (or won) in a predetermined condition device It may be "bonus" → "bonus", "bonus" → "bonus termination conditions have been met" → "normal state", "bonus" → "bonus termination conditions have been met" → "AT state", etc. .

Furthermore, the "stop button operation result" according to the present invention is not limited to the timing at which the player presses the left reel, but includes, for example, the timing at which the player presses the middle reel or the right reel, the order in which the stop button is pressed (sequential presses, It also includes symbols (or symbol combinations) that are stopped and displayed by operating the stop button (reverse push) or stop button.

Furthermore, the "ease of obtaining gaming value" according to the present invention is not limited to the ease of adding on the number of AT games, but includes, for example, the ease of adding on the number of differential cards in AT, the ease of obtaining the number of AT sets, etc. Ease of entering the specialization zone, high/low frequency of execution of push order bell navigation, ease of transition to good RT on ART machine (high/low probability of navigation for push order promotion replay), good RT ease of transition to , frequency of execution of replay navigation, ease of continuation of states in which it is easy to obtain gaming value (e.g. AT, ART, RT, bonus), state in which it is easy to obtain gaming value ( It may also be the ease of transition to an AT high probability, AT specialized zone, or the like.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) that are decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven, and a plurality of reels provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and a plurality of reels provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels. A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) for individually stopping the rotation of the , and an internal lottery for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of lottery results, each of which corresponds to one or more winnings or losses. means (for example, a winning combination internal lottery), and after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation was performed is stopped based on the lottery result derived by the internal lottery means. a stop control means (e.g., reel stop control) that performs stop control, and a gaming value imparting means (e.g., medal payout) that imparts a gaming value according to the stop state of the plurality of reels stopped by the stop control means. ), and a game control means (for example, game start state processing and game state update processing) that can control the progress of the game and change the ease with which game values can be acquired, the game machine comprising: The game control means controls one game from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and a second game state (for example, an advantageous section) different from the first game state. A state can be set, and based on a predetermined condition being satisfied in the state where the first gaming state is set, the first gaming state is ended and the second gaming state is set. is possible, and is set after the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the operation result of the stop button by the player in the first gaming state (for example, the timing when the player presses the left reel 110). The means is capable of changing the ease of acquiring the game value (for example, the ease of adding on the number of AT games) in the second gaming state, and when the player presses the stop button in the first gaming state. It is easier for the player to obtain profit when the player performs the second operation according to the second operation condition than the first operation according to the first operation condition, and the game control means When the second operation is performed more than the first operation in the gaming state, the predetermined condition is satisfied compared to the case where the first operation is performed more than the second operation. The gaming machine may be characterized in that the ease of acquiring the gaming value in the second gaming state that is set after being satisfied may change disadvantageously for the player.

According to such a gaming machine, the ease of acquiring gaming value in the second gaming state after transition can be changed depending on the result of the player's operation of the stop button in the first gaming state. It becomes possible to appropriately control the payout of gaming value through the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

Further, the game machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one in which game balls enclosed within the game machine are reused. Further, the main control section, the first sub-control section, and the second sub-control section may be configured in one chip, or the main control section and the first sub-control section may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Moreover, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Further, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Furthermore, by applying the content described in one of the plurality of configurations described in the embodiment to another configuration, the range of games may be further expanded.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the game machine of this embodiment (slot machine in this example), a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are rotated by a predetermined rotation start instruction operation (for example, as described below). The rotation starts when the rotation start instruction operation (for example, operation using the stop button described later) is received, and based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation (for example, operation using the stop button described later), the internal winning of multiple types of winning combinations is determined by lottery. Each of the plurality of reels stops rotating individually by accepting a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, and the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the lottery result and the symbol combination when the plurality of reels stop are determined. This is a gaming machine that runs a series of games in which if a predetermined payout condition is met, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if it is not met, the game is finished without paying out the game medium.

Next, the slot machine of this embodiment will be explained in detail using FIGS. 201 to 207. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 201 to 207 are basically used only for explaining this embodiment, and even if the same reference numerals are shown in other drawings, they will not be used in the explanation of this embodiment. Priority is given to the codes shown in 201 to 207.

Moreover, each example of this embodiment and each example of other embodiments can be applied in combination with each other. In particular, there are other embodiments in which the same winning combination as shown in FIG. Additional effects may be obtained by combining the examples of the embodiments.

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 201 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface (not shown) are stored in the center of the main body 101, and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the symbol display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible. By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Further, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is arranged on the back of each reel 110 to 112 to illuminate each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 113. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. In addition, inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each reel 110 to 112, and the light emitting part of this optical sensor A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the light-receiving section and the light-receiving section. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line. The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the winning line 114 that becomes valid.

For example, the notification lamp 123 informs the player that he or she has internally won a specific winning combination (specifically, a special winning combination (bonus)) in an internal lottery for winning combinations, which will be described later, or that he or she is playing a bonus game. This is a warning lamp. The notification lamp 123 of this embodiment lights up until the bonus game ends after the bonus is announced to notify the player that the bonus has been confirmed. Note that the notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus notification (at the time of the bonus or immediately before the bonus notification). The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, up to a maximum of three coins, two coins are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as the MAX bet button. The bet button 132 also functions as a performance button that can start a certain performance when an operation is accepted. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a performance button.

In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored token number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout token number display 127 are composed of seven segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of this embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with each reel 110 to 112. . More specifically, by operating the left stop button 137, the left reel 110 can be stopped, by operating the middle stop button 138, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the right stop button 139, the middle reel 111 can be stopped. By operating the right reel 112, it is possible to stop the right reel 112.

Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation will be referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as the second stop operation, the last stop operation will be referred to as the third stop operation, and the first stop operation will be referred to as the third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is sometimes referred to as the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is sometimes referred to as the third stop reel.

Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The order of operations in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 and the stop operation is called "sequential push operation order" or simply "sequence push", and the order of operations in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 and the stop operation is called " This is called "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push." Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body may be turned on to notify the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the AT system gaming state of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can understand that the player is in the high navigation state from the lighting manner of the high navigation state lamp 190.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. A medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided at the bottom of the title panel 162.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to enliven the game. A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided at the top of the presentation device 160. This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed on the back side of the shutter 163. , effect image display device), and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (game display device). The structure is such that it appears on the person's side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of this embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding stop operations (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

Note that it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device, as long as it is configured to be able to display various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, etc. , a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that the entirety can be visually recognized by the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Note that although the notification lamp 123 and the high navigation state lamp 190 are configured to notify predetermined information by causing the lamps to emit light, the manner of notification is not limited to the light emission of the lamps. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a part of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a full-screen liquid crystal slot machine, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). Hereinafter, when the notification lamp 123 or the high navigation state lamp 190 is referred to as lighting, it is meant to include notifications by other presentation devices (for example, display devices) having the same function.

<Circuit configuration of control section>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine will be explained. The control section of a slot machine can be roughly divided into a main control section that controls the progress of the game, and a main control section that controls the main effects according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control section. and a second sub-control unit that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit.

The main control section includes an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section, and enables communication with the first sub-control section. Note that information communication between the main control unit and the first sub-control unit is one-way communication, and the main control unit can send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit. Unable to send commands or other signals to the unit.

The first sub-control unit includes a basic circuit that receives control commands transmitted by the main control unit via an input interface, and controls the entire first sub-control unit based on the control commands. The first sub-control unit controls sound output means (speakers, sound source ICs, etc.), various lamps, and the like.

The second sub-control unit includes a basic circuit that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit via the input interface, and controls the entire second sub-control unit based on the control command. The second sub-control unit controls the liquid crystal display device and the like.

<Winning line>
Next, the winning line will be explained.

The symbols displayed on the upper row of the left reel are the left reel upper row symbols, the symbols displayed on the middle row of the left reel are the left reel middle row symbols, the symbols displayed on the lower row of the left reel are the left reel lower row symbols, and the symbols displayed on the middle reel upper row. The displayed symbol is the middle reel upper symbol, the symbol displayed in the middle reel is the middle reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed in the lower middle reel is the middle reel lower symbol, and the symbol displayed in the upper right reel is the middle reel lower symbol. The symbols displayed in the upper row of the right reel, the symbols displayed in the middle row of the right reel are called the right reel middle symbols, and the symbols displayed in the lower row of the right reel are called the right reel lower symbols. Each symbol on each reel can be viewed through the symbol display window. Each reel will display three vertically, nine in total.

In this embodiment, one winning line is provided, which is a middle winning line consisting of a left reel middle row symbol, a middle reel middle row symbol, and a right reel middle row symbol. The winning line is a line set at a stop position of symbols that can be visually recognized through the symbol display window, and is a line on which it is determined whether a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed. The valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as gaming media.

The slot machine of this embodiment allows games with a bet of 3 or 2 coins, and if the number of inserted medals is less than 2, none of the winning lines will be activated, and the number of medals placed is 3 or 2. The winning line becomes active when a bet is placed. Once the winning line is activated, the player can start the game by operating the start lever.

Further, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line, there is also a downward-sloping winning line that consists of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, and left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of three winning lines, including the upward winning lines to the right, may be set as valid winning lines, or a number of winning lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid winning lines.

<Type of winning role>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIGS. 202(a) and 202(b). In addition, figure (a) is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including active roles), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, payouts (number of awards), and notes for each winning combination, and figure (b) ) is a diagram showing the types of normal pressing order bells and special pressing order bells, and payouts corresponding to each pressing order.

On each reel 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (for example, 20 symbols) of a plurality of types of symbols (for example, a replay symbol, a watermelon symbol, a cherry symbol, a bell symbol, etc. shown in FIG. 202(a)) are arranged. .

The winning roles of the slot machine 100 include a special role (not shown) (special role 1, special role 2), general role (replay role, small role 1 to small role 4, normal push order bell, special push order bell), etc. There is. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in this embodiment, special combination 1 and special combination 2 are combinations that shift to a special gaming state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Furthermore, the replay combination is a combination that allows replaying without inserting new medals. These winning combinations are sometimes called "actuation combinations." In addition, "winning" in this embodiment also includes a case where a symbol combination of an active role that does not involve a medal payout (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the active line. For example, special role 1, This includes winning the special winning combination 2 and the replay winning combination.

Special combination 1 and special combination 2 are combinations (actuation combinations) that shift to a special gaming state upon winning. In this example, special combination 1 is a winning combination that can only be won in a 3-card bet game, and special combination 2 is a winning combination that can only be won in a 2-card bet game. Note that medals will not be paid out for winning this role itself. The corresponding symbol combinations are, for example, special combination 1 (BB1) is "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2", and special combination 2 (BB2) is "BAR-BAR-Seven 1".

When the special winning combination 1 or 2 is internally won, the special winning internal winning flag corresponding to the internally winning winning combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit). When the flag is set to ON due to the internal winning of the special winning combination 1, the main control section shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 1 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Further, when the flag is set to ON due to the internal winning of the special winning combination 2, the main control section shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 2 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3).

This flag remains on until the internally won winning combination is won, and it becomes easier to win the internally winning winning combination in subsequent games. In other words, even if you do not win the special role in a game where you win the special role 1 or 2 internally, you will be in a state where you win the special role internally in the next game and thereafter, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (for example, special If the winning combination is won internally, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2 (BB1)") will be in a state where it is easy to win. The special role 1 internal winning state (RT2) and the special winning role 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit shifts the gaming state to a special gaming state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination 1 or special winning combination 2 being displayed. Furthermore, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of coins (in this example, 110 coins for winning with BB1 and 55 coins for winning with BB2) is paid out, a low re-gaming probability state (hereinafter, this state will be referred to as RT1) ).

A "re-game winning combination" is a winning combination (activation combination) that allows you to play the next game without inserting medals (game media) by winning a prize, and no medals are paid out. Note that the corresponding symbol combination is "Replay-Replay-Replay".

“Small role (Small role 1 to Small role 4)” is a winning role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning a prize. Role 2 (Cherry) is "Cherry-ANY-ANY", etc., as shown in FIG. 202(a). Further, the corresponding number of coins to be paid out is also as shown in the figure.

In addition, small winnings 1 (watermelon) and small winnings 2 (cherry) are winning hands that can be won by operating the correct timing, and in the case of "Cherry-ANY-ANY", the symbol on the left reel 110 is "cherry". This indicates that the symbols on the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be any symbols. In addition, although the details will be described later, Small Win 3 and Small Win 4 are roles that can be won by operating the correct answer press order. There are cases where this happens.

<Reel stop control>
Next, the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be outlined. The reel stop control is performed by selecting one of the predetermined types of reel stop control data based on predetermined conditions (results of internal lottery processing for winning combinations), and based on the selected reel stop control data. conduct.

In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame slipping control) is performed. Pull-in control is to shift the stop positions of the reels 110-112 within a range of a certain number of frames (number of symbols) (pull-in range; here, maximum 4 frames) after the player operates each of the stop buttons 137-139. Control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM of the main control section. Each reel stop data includes a permission control that allows symbol combinations of a predetermined winning combination to be displayed on the winning line, and a prohibition control that prevents symbol combinations of any winning combination from being displayed on the winning line. It is broadly divided into .

Examples of permissible control include when a certain winning combination is internally won, or when a special winning combination is internally won (the flag is being carried over), and the timing when the player operates each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. Even if the numbers are bad, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning combinations are displayed within the range of the above-mentioned number of frames. However, since it is only "allowed", the symbol combinations may not be aligned depending on the timing of operating each of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

For example, if you win the small prize 1 (watermelon) internally, the watermelon symbol is placed over four frames, so if you operate the stop buttons 137 to 139 at the wrong time, the watermelon symbol will fall on the winning line. Do not stop.

However, depending on the arrangement of symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of symbols drawn, there may be cases where 100% alignment is possible. For example, since the arrangement interval of the replay symbols corresponding to the replay combination is a maximum of 4 frames, if the replay combination is internally won, the winning will be 100% regardless of the timing.

On the other hand, an example in which the prohibition control is performed is, for example, when the internal lottery result is a loss and the special winning combination is not internally won (the flag is being carried over), and the timing when the player operates each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. At best, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning combinations are not displayed together within the range of the above-mentioned number of frames.

<Press order bell>
Next, the normal pressing order bell and the special pressing order bell will be explained in detail using FIG. 202(b).

<Normal press order bell>
If one of the "normal push order bells 1 to 6" is internally won, multiple small winnings (in this example, small winnings 3 and 4) will be won multiple times, and depending on the order of the player's operations, The symbol combination displayed on the winning line is determined. It should be noted that it is possible to internally win the "normal pressing order bells 1 to 6" regardless of the setting value from settings 1 to 6.

As shown in FIG. 202(b), each of the "normal pressing order bells 1 to 6" has six types: "LCR", "LRC", "CLR", "CRL", "RLC", and "RCL". In this example, a 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is assigned to one type of the six types of pressing order. Note that the range of lottery data associated with each of the six types of pressing orders is the same.

For example, if you internally win "Normal Push Order Bell 1 LCR" out of "Normal Push Order Bell 1", the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel. The stop operation for the reels 112 is the correct operation (correct press order), and the other stop operations are incorrect operations (incorrect press order). Also, if you internally win "Normal Push Order Bell 4CRL" out of "Normal Push Order Bell 4", the first stop reel will be the middle reel 111, the second stop reel will be the right reel 112, and the third stop reel will be the left reel. The stop operation for the reels 110 is the correct operation (correct press order), and the other stop operations are incorrect operations (incorrect press order).

If the stop operation (correct answer pressing order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 pieces) that suggests the order of operations to win the 12-piece small win (small role 3), the “Bell-” corresponding to the small role 3 "Bell-Bell" is displayed on the winning line, and 12 medals are paid out.

On the other hand, if a stop operation that does not follow the 12-piece acquisition navigation (incorrect press order operation) is performed, "Bell-Bell-Replay" corresponding to the 1-card small win (small win 4) will be won. is displayed on the winning line, and one medal is paid out, or if you miss out on the small winning combination 4 (if the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is not displayed on the winning line), the medal is paid out. It will not be done (it will be a loss).

In addition, if the stop operation (correct answer press order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for winning 1 piece) that suggests the operation order to win the 1-piece small winning combination (small winning number 4), the " ``Bell-Bell-Replay'' is displayed on the winning line, and if one medal is paid out or if you miss the minor role 4 (the symbol combination corresponding to the minor role 4 is not displayed on the winning line) ), no medals will be paid out (resulting in a loss).

On the other hand, if a stop operation is performed that does not follow the navigation for acquiring one piece (incorrect press order operation), "Bell-Bell-Bell" corresponding to small winning combination 3 will be on the winning line depending on the order of operations. is displayed and 12 medals are paid out, or "Bell-Bell-Replay" corresponding to minor role 4 is displayed on the winning line and 1 medal is paid out, or when minor role 4 is missed. (If the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is not displayed on the winning line), no medals are paid out (it becomes a loss).

In this example, "Normal push order bells 1 to 6" is assigned a 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) to one of the six types of push orders, so "Normal push order bells 1 to 6" are assigned. If any one of them is won internally, 12 medals will be paid out with a probability of 1/6. Note that the winning probability of the 12-piece small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is not limited to this example, and may be greater than 1/6.

<Bonus push order bell>
If you win internally for any of the "Benefit Pressing Order Bells 1 to 6", you will win multiple small roles (in this example, small roles 3 and 4), and depending on the order of the player's operations. The symbol combination displayed on the winning line is determined. Note that even if the set value is set to any of settings 1 to 6, it is possible to win internally for "Benefit Pressing Order Bells 1 to 6."

As shown in FIG. 202(b), each of the "Bonus Pressing Order Bells 1 to 6" has six types: "LCR", "LRC", "CLR", "CRL", "RLC", and "RCL". In this example, one small winning combination (small winning number 4) is assigned to one of the six types of pressing orders, and the six types of pressing orders are divided into I try to assign 12 small winnings (minor winning 3) to the five types. Note that the range of lottery data associated with each of the six types of pressing orders is the same.

For example, if you internally win "Bonus Push Order Bell 1 LCR" out of "Bonus Push Order Bell 1", the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel. The stop operation for the reels 112 is the correct operation (correct press order), and the other stop operations are incorrect operations (incorrect press order). Also, if you internally win "Bonus Push Order Bell 4 CRL" out of "Bonus Push Order Bell 4", the first stop reel will be the middle reel 111, the second stop reel will be the right reel 112, and the third stop reel will be the left reel. The stop operation for the reels 110 is the correct operation (correct press order), and the other stop operations are incorrect operations (incorrect press order).

If the stop operation (correct answer press order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for winning 1 piece) that suggests the order of operations to win the 1-piece small winning combination (small winning number 4), the “Bell-” corresponding to the small winning number 4 is performed. "Bell Replay" is displayed on the winning line, and one medal is paid out.

On the other hand, if a stop operation is performed that does not follow the 1-piece acquisition navigation (incorrect press order operation), "Bell-Bell-Bell" corresponding to the 12-piece small winning combination (small winning combination 3) will be won. displayed on the line.

In addition, if the stop operation (correct answer press order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 pieces) that suggests the operation order to win the 12-piece small winning combination (small winning 3), the " "Bell-Bell-Bell" is displayed on the winning line, and 12 medals are paid out.

On the other hand, if a stop operation is performed that does not follow the navigation for acquiring 12 coins (incorrect press order operation), "Bell-Bell-Replay" corresponding to small winning combination 4 will be displayed on the winning line, One medal is paid out.

In this example, "Bonus Pressing Order Bells 1 to 6" is assigned 12 small winnings (small winnings 3) to 5 of the 6 types of pressing order, so "Bonus Pressing Order Bells 1 to 6" If any one of them is won internally, 12 medals will be paid out with a probability of 5/6. Note that the winning probability of the 12-piece small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is not limited to this example, and may be greater than or smaller than 5/6.

<Type of gaming state>
Next, the types and changes of gaming states of slot machines will be explained.

The main control unit of the slot machine can be roughly divided into a low replay probability state (RT1), a special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2) with a high replay probability state, and a special combination 2 internal winning state with a high replay probability state (RT2). RT3), and a special gaming state (RT4). In this embodiment, these four gaming states are referred to as RT-based gaming states. In addition, in this embodiment, the main control unit also controls a state related to so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as an AT-based gaming state), and the first The sub-control unit is configured to set the gaming state. The AT system gaming state will be described later using FIG. 203(A).

In addition, the re-gaming low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability that the condition device related to the re-gaming combination operates does not change (default state), special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) and the special gaming state (RT4) are also states in which the probability of activation of the condition device related to the re-gaming combination varies with respect to the default state.

Hereinafter, the RT-type gaming state of the slot machine will be explained.

<Low replay probability state (RT1)>
The low replay probability state is a gaming state (disadvantageous to the player) in which the internal winning probability of replaying is the lowest among other gaming states (e.g., gaming states excluding special gaming states), and is referred to as the normal gaming state. There is also.

If special role 1 is internally elected, the state will move to special role 1 internally elected state (RT2), which will be described later.If special role 2 is internally elected, it will move to special role 2 internally elected state (RT3), which will be described later. do.

<Special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), special role 2 internal winning state (RT3)>
The special role internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as the "special role internal winning state") are the low replay probability state (RT1). ), the internal winning flag corresponding to special winning combination 1 or special winning combination 2 is set to on, and the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing. This is a gaming state in which a symbol combination corresponding to the special combination corresponding to this flag can be displayed by doing so.

In the special role internal winning state, when a symbol combination corresponding to special role 1 or special role 2 is displayed, a transition is made to a special game state (RT4) to be described later.

<Special gaming state (RT4)>
The special gaming state (RT4) is the most advantageous gaming state for the player among all the gaming states.

In the special gaming state (RT4), when a specified number of coins are paid out, the state shifts to a low re-gaming probability state (RT1). Specifically, when the special game state is entered based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to special combination 1, if more than 110 medals are paid out, the replay low probability state (RT1) is entered. to move to. In addition, if the special gaming state is entered based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to special combination 2, if more than 55 medals are paid out, the state will be shifted to the low replay probability state (RT1). .

<Transition of AT system game state>
Next, the AT system game state will be explained.

The AT system gaming state is broadly divided into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability that operation navigation will be executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode. The high navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is higher than that in the low navigation state, and is also referred to as AT mode.

Here, the operation navigation refers to an effect that notifies you of the correct operation order when the push order combination is internally won. That is, the operation navigation refers to an effect that notifies the contents of the stop operation for acquiring medals, the contents of the stop operation for shifting to an advantageous gaming state, or maintaining an advantageous gaming state. In this embodiment, the operation navigation is executed using the payout number display and the effect image display device.

Note that in this embodiment, the low navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is defined as a state in which the probability of execution of operation navigation is higher than the low navigation state. A state in which operation navigation is not executed or a high navigation state may be set as a state in which operation navigation is executed. If a stop operation is performed in accordance with the operation contents of the operation navigation, an advantageous result is brought to the player, so the high navigation state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, advantageous specifically refers to the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine compared to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets on the gaming machine when playing for a predetermined period of time. It refers to the ratio, so-called payout rate (ball output rate).

In this embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied in the low navigation state (for example, when a winning combination other than a loss is won), a transition is made to the normal state (normal gaming state) of the high navigation state. After that, as shown in FIG. 203(A), for example, the state shifts to the AT1 state, and after repeating the first round of the AT1 state for a plurality of sets (for example, 2 sets or 10 sets), the state returns to the normal state (normal gaming state). A route that transitions to the AT1 state for the second time after repeating multiple sets (for example, 10 sets) of the AT1 state (for example, 10 sets), and a route that transitions (returns) to the AT1 state for the second time, or a route that goes through the pullback state. There is a route in which the game mode is changed to the normal gaming state or the AT2 state.

In this embodiment, when it is determined to shift to the AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state), a predetermined number (for example, 50 games, etc.) of the number of AT mode games (hereinafter referred to as the number of AT games) is provided. Further, if a certain condition is satisfied in the high navigation state, the state shifts to the LMT (limit) state.

<AT system state transition>
Each gaming state of the AT system is managed in a further subdivided manner, and this is called a performance state. In detail, the performance states of the low navigation state are the normal state, and the performance states of the high navigation state include the normal state, confirmed notification state, judge state, pullback state, AT1 state, AT2 state, and LMT (limit) state. . Note that the AT1 state, AT2 state, and LMT (limit) state are states in which the number of balls produced increases in principle.

Here, the limit state basically refers to the production state from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state, which is the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state (from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state). (It is also possible that the performance state of is not the limit state). In this embodiment, when there are 20 or fewer games remaining in the high navigation state, an ending effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ED effect") indicating the end of the high navigation state is executed.

<Production table>
Next, the effect table included in the first sub-control unit will be explained.
@
The storage means (for example, ROM) of the first sub-control unit stores an effect table provided for each effect state. The first sub-control unit acquires performance information (for example, performance status, high navigation state counter, performance status counter, etc.) included in the command received from the main control unit, and refers to a performance table corresponding to the performance status, etc. , performs a performance according to the performance state counter, etc. For example, if the current performance state is the AT1 state, the performance table corresponding to the AT1 state (AT1 state performance table) is referred to, and processing such as reading performance data for executing the AT1 performance from the ROM is performed. If the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In addition, if the current performance state is a judge state, the performance table corresponding to the judge state (judge state performance table) is referred to, and processing such as reading performance data for executing the judge performance from the ROM is performed. If the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (1)/Summary>
The gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 201) includes a control means (for example, a main control section) that can set one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states, and an internal winning combination of winning combinations. A lottery means that can perform a lottery and derive the lottery results (for example, processing of internal lottery of winning combinations), and a gaming value giving means that gives a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, payout of medals) processing), and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels.

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push order bell 6 shown in FIG. 202(b)), if the operation in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation) is performed, multiple When the reels stop in the first stopping manner (for example, the manner in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the second operation is performed. When an operation is performed in a certain manner (for example, a sequential push operation), the plurality of reels stop in a second stopping manner (for example, a manner in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), The gaming value imparting means is configured to provide a higher value when the plurality of reels stop in the second stop mode (for example, payout of 12 coins) than when the plurality of reels stop in the first stop mode (for example, payout of 1 coin). The player is configured to give more of the gaming value.

Furthermore, the plurality of gaming states include a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a non-AT state in an advantageous section) and a first specific advantageous gaming state that can be entered after the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, FIG. 203 (A ), the AT1 state shown in FIG. AT2 state (ending state) shown in FIG. The first condition includes the fulfillment of the first requirement (for example, when winning a lottery for transition to the AT1 state), and the second condition includes: includes the fulfillment of the second requirement (for example, when winning the lottery to enter the AT2 state), and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (the plurality of reels is stopped in the first stop mode), the advantage for satisfying the first requirement (for example, the AT1 transition rate 21 shown in FIG. 203(B)) is that the plurality of stop buttons Advantageousness for satisfying the first requirement when the operation is performed in the operation mode (when the operation is not stopped in the first stop mode) (for example, AT1 transition rate of 15% shown in FIG. 203(B)) higher than the above, and the advantage is that the second requirement is satisfied when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode). degree (for example, AT2 transition rate of 9% shown in FIG. 203(B)), when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (not stopped in the first stop mode). case) for satisfying the second requirement (for example, the AT2 transition rate of 11% shown in FIG. 203(B)).

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (1)/Specific example>
FIG. 203(B) is a diagram showing a specific example of advantageous section control (1) when the operation navigation is ignored.

In the state shown in FIG. 203(B)(1), in the normal state, for example, the prize push order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived), and the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode) is performed. The operation navigation that prompts you is executed.

The AT1 transition rate in the same state (probability of winning to transition to AT1 state by transition lottery; advantage for satisfying the first requirement) is 20%, and the AT2 transition rate in the same state (winning probability to transition to AT2 state by transition lottery) is 20%. The probability (favorability for fulfilling the second requirement) is 10%.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 203(B)(2) is a state in which the player performs a stop operation according to the operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, since the player performed a stop operation according to the operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation, multiple reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, the "Bell-Bell-Replay" symbol is displayed on the winning line). When the combination is complete, the machine stops and one medal is paid out.

In addition, in the same state, since multiple reels stopped in the first stopping pattern (in this example, the pattern in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), the AT1 transition rate (first The rate of transition to AT2 (the advantage for satisfying the second requirement) increased from 20% to 21% (more advantageous), and the AT2 transition rate (the advantage for satisfying the second requirement) decreased from 10% to 9% (more advantageous). 1 point is given, increasing the total number of points from 20 to 21.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 203(B)(3), the player does not follow the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode), This is the state in which the stop operation was performed (operation).

In this example, because the player did not follow the operation navigation prompting for a reverse push operation and instead performed a stop operation using a forward press operation, the multiple reels changed to the second stop mode (in this example, a "bell" appeared on the winning line). The machine stops when the symbol combination "-Bell-Bell" is aligned, and 12 medals are paid out.

In addition, in the same state, multiple reels stopped in the second stopping mode (a mode in which the "Bell-Bell-Bell" symbol combination is aligned on the winning line) (they did not stop in the first stopping mode). Therefore, the AT1 transition rate (advantageous degree for satisfying the first requirement) decreases from 20% to 15% (the advantageous degree becomes lower), and the AT2 transition rate (advantageous degree for satisfying the second requirement) is 10%. The rate has increased from 11% to 11% (higher advantage), and no points are awarded.

That is, in this example, if the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation (ignoring the operation navigation), the AT1 transition rate will decrease and it will be difficult to transition to the AT1 state, but the AT2 transition rate will increase. This makes it easier to transition to the AT2 state.

If the player does not follow the operation navigation, the player is put at a disadvantage even when it comes to a second specific advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT2 state) where it is unknown whether or not it will transition after the first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT1 state). Although this is harsh, according to this example, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the second specific advantageous gaming state can be made more advantageous than if the player had followed the operation navigation. As a result, the player's desire to play can be maintained until the player's operational error or the like is corrected and the game shifts to the second specific advantageous gaming state.

As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 201) has a control means (for example, the main control section) that can set one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states. , a lottery means capable of performing a lottery regarding internal winning of winning combinations and deriving the lottery results (for example, processing of internal lottery for winning combinations), and a gaming value giving means that grants gaming value according to the stop state of a plurality of reels. (for example, a medal payout process), and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels to individually stop the rotation of the reels (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 201). ), wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, the privilege push order bell 6 shown in FIG. 202(b)), and the lottery result includes the first lottery result. In the case of a lottery result, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (for example, a reverse push operation), the plurality of reels are activated in the first stop mode (for example, a "bell" appears on the winning line). -Bell-Replay'' symbol combinations are aligned), and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (for example, sequential pressing operation), the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode. (for example, in a mode in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the game value giving means is configured to control the number of reels when the lottery result is the first lottery result. If the game value is stopped in the second stopping mode (for example, paying out 12 coins) than in the first stopping mode (for example, paying out 1 coin), more of the gaming value is awarded. The plurality of gaming states include a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a non-AT state in an advantageous section) and a first specific advantageous gaming state that can be entered after the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, FIG. 203 The AT1 state shown in (A) and the judge state regarding whether to transition to the AT state) and the second specific advantageous gaming state that can be transitioned to after the first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT1 state shown in FIG. ) is included in the AT2 state (ending state) shown in FIG. It is configured to be able to shift to a second specific advantageous gaming state, and the first condition includes fulfillment of the first requirement (for example, when winning a lottery to shift to the AT1 state), and the second The conditions include satisfaction of the second requirement (for example, when winning the lottery for transition to the AT2 state), and a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, when AT transition occurs in the 1st G after transition to the advantageous section). has not been determined) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, and the first requirement is satisfied when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode. The degree of advantage (for example, the AT1 transition rate of 21% shown in FIG. 203(B)) is the degree of advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. (for example, the AT1 transition rate of 15% shown in FIG. 203(B)), and the degree of advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the plurality of stop buttons is operated in the first operation mode (For example, the AT2 transition rate of 9% shown in FIG. 203(B)) is the degree of advantage (for example, , the AT2 transition rate (11%) shown in FIG. 203(B).

If the player does not follow the operation navigation, the player is put at a disadvantage even when it comes to a second specific advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT2 state) where it is unknown whether or not it will transition after the first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT1 state). Although this is harsh, according to the game machine according to the present embodiment, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the second specific advantageous gaming state is better than if the player had followed the operation navigation. Since the game can also be made advantageous, the player's desire to play can be maintained until the player's operational error or the like is corrected and the game transitions to the second specific advantageous gaming state.

Furthermore, "satisfaction of the second requirement" is not limited to cases such as winning a lottery to enter the AT2 state, but includes, for example, cases where the number of acquired gaming media reaches a certain number (for example, 1840 pieces). (The same applies to other embodiments).

Further, the notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) capable of making a notification is provided, and the notification means prompts an operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The notification means is configured to be able to execute a first operation navigation (for example, an operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation), and the notification means is configured to perform an operation in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The second operation navigation (for example, the operation navigation that prompts sequential pressing operations) may be configured to be executable.

In addition, a certain counter (for example, the remaining ceiling counter shown in FIG. 204(A) or the second counter shown in FIGS. 206(C) and (D)) related to the satisfaction of the first requirement is provided, and one game is The count value of the certain counter may be updated each time the count value is executed, and the notification means may be capable of starting a count display indicating the count value.

Further, if 0 is displayed as the count display after the power is restored after the power outage, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode after the power is restored, the numerical value indicated by the count display is The count values may match, and if the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode after the power is restored after a power outage, the numerical value indicated by the count display and the count value match. It may be something that does not exist.

With this configuration, it is possible to increase the level of satisfaction of players who have performed operations according to the operation navigation, and to alert players who have not performed operations according to the operation navigation.

Further, the plurality of gaming states include a normal state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) that is more advantageous than the normal state regarding the display of the operation navigation, and the advantageous state includes , the first specific advantageous gaming state and the second specific advantageous gaming state are included, and in the advantageous state, there are cases where the transition to the second specific advantageous gaming state does not occur after the first specific advantageous gaming state. There may be.

With such a configuration, the variety of games can be increased, and the satisfaction level of the players can be increased.

Further, the second operation navigation is configured to be executable in the first specific advantageous gaming state, and the degree of advantage for satisfying the second requirement when an operation according to the second operation navigation is performed. may be such that the degree of advantage for satisfying the second requirement is not lower than that in the case where the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the satisfaction level of a player who performs operations according to the operation navigation.

Further, even if the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed, the plurality of reels may stop in the second stop mode.

With such a configuration, even if the operation navigation is ignored, a profit can be given to the player, and the player's satisfaction level can be increased.

Furthermore, when the second operation navigation is executed, either the operation according to the second operation navigation is performed or the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed. Even if it is, it is possible to perform a performance according to the operation, and when the first operation navigation is executed, only when the first operation according to the first operation navigation is performed. It may also be possible to perform a performance according to the operation.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier to understand the difference between when an operation is performed according to the second operation navigation and when an operation is performed according to the first operation navigation by using a difference in presentation. Not only that, but the effect of the production can be enhanced by making the production different.

Further, the gaming value imparting means is configured not to impart the gaming value when the plurality of reels stop in the first stopping mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. may have been done.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a control means that can set one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states, a lottery means that can perform a lottery regarding internal winning of a role and derive a lottery result, and a plurality of a gaming value imparting means for imparting a gaming value according to the manner in which the reels are stopped; a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels; the gaming machine, wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a first operation mode; When the plurality of stop buttons is operated in the second operation mode, the plurality of reels stop in the second stop mode, and the plurality of reels stop in the second stop mode. When the lottery result is the first lottery result, the gaming value imparting means determines that when the plurality of reels stop in the second stop mode, the reels stop in the second stop mode, when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The plurality of gaming states include a normal advantageous gaming state, a first specific advantageous gaming state that can be entered after the normal advantageous gaming state, and a first specific advantageous gaming state that can be entered after the normal advantageous gaming state. A second specific advantageous gaming state that can be transitioned to after the specific advantageous gaming state is included, and when the first condition is satisfied, the system is configured to be able to transition to the first specific advantageous gaming state, and the second condition is If the game is established, the game is configured to be able to shift to the second specific advantageous gaming state, the first condition includes the fulfillment of the first requirement, and the second condition includes the fulfillment of the second requirement. , and in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode, the first The degree of advantage for satisfying the requirement is higher than the degree of advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, The degree of advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the plurality of reels is stopped in the second manner is lower than the degree of advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second manner. It may be a game machine characterized by the following.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a control means that can set one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states, and a gaming value imparting means that imparts a gaming value according to the stopping state of the plurality of reels. , one state is set from among a plurality of game value grant states in relation to the game value grant status (for example, base (so-called machine discount), acquisition status of bells in pressing order, navigation compliance rate, etc.) A gaming machine comprising a possible gaming value imparting state control means, wherein the plurality of gaming states include a normal advantageous gaming state and a first specific advantageous gaming state to which a transition can be made after the normal advantageous gaming state. and a second specific advantageous gaming state that can be transitioned to after the first specific advantageous gaming state, and is configured to be able to transition to the first specific advantageous gaming state when the first condition is satisfied. , is configured to be able to shift to the second specific advantageous gaming state when the second condition is satisfied, and the first condition includes the fulfillment of the first requirement, and the second condition includes the fulfillment of the first requirement. includes satisfaction of the second requirement, and the plurality of gaming value awarding states include at least a first gaming value awarding state (for example, a state where the base is 60%) set in the normal advantageous gaming state. and a second gaming value granting state (for example, a state where the base is 80%m), and the gaming value granting state control means controls the gaming value granting state to be in a certain situation (hereinafter referred to as "the first situation"). ), the first gaming value granting state can be set when the gaming value granting state is in a certain situation different from the first situation (hereinafter referred to as the "second situation"). ), the second gaming value awarding state can be set, and the second situation is more advantageous to the player with respect to the gaming value awarding situation than the first situation. , when the first gaming value granting state is set in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a state in which the number of acquired coins (MY) is 0 in the 300th G of the normal advantageous gaming state, etc.); The degree of advantage for satisfying the first requirement is higher than the degree of advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the second gaming value granting state is set, and The degree of advantage for satisfying the second requirement when is set is lower than the degree of advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the second gaming value granting state is set. It may also be a game machine featuring:

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (2)/Summary>
In the gaming machine described using FIG. 203(B), when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode), the second The advantage for satisfying the second requirement is the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when multiple stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (when they are not stopped in the first stop mode). However, in the game machine according to the present embodiment, when a plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (a plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode), The degree of advantage for satisfying the second requirement in case of It is the same as the degree of advantage for satisfying the requirements.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (2)/Specific example>
FIG. 203(C) is a diagram showing a specific example of advantageous section control (2) when the operation navigation is ignored.

In the state shown in FIG. 203(C)(1), in the normal state, for example, the prize push order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived), and the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode) is performed. The operation navigation that prompts you is executed.

The AT1 transition rate in the same state (probability of winning to transition to AT1 state by transition lottery; advantage for satisfying the first requirement) is 20%, and the AT2 transition rate in the same state (winning probability to transition to AT2 state by transition lottery) is 20%. The probability (favorability for fulfilling the second requirement) is 10%.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 203(C)(2) is a state in which the player performs a stop operation according to the operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, since the player performed a stop operation according to the operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation, multiple reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, the "Bell-Bell-Replay" symbol is displayed on the winning line). When the combination is complete, the machine stops and one medal is paid out.

In addition, in the same state, since multiple reels stopped in the first stopping pattern (in this example, the pattern in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), the AT1 transition rate (first The advantage for satisfying the second requirement) will increase from 20% to 21% (the advantage will become higher), and the AT2 transition rate (the advantage for satisfying the second requirement) will remain at 10% (the advantage will change). (No), 1 point is given and the total number of points pt increases from 20 to 21.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 203(C)(3), the player does not follow the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode), This is the state in which the stop operation was performed (operation).

In this example, because the player did not follow the operation navigation prompting for a reverse push operation and instead performed a stop operation using a forward press operation, the multiple reels changed to the second stop mode (in this example, a "bell" appeared on the winning line). The machine stops when the symbol combination "-Bell-Bell" is aligned, and 12 medals are paid out.

In addition, in the same state, multiple reels stopped in the second stopping mode (a mode in which the "Bell-Bell-Bell" symbol combination is aligned on the winning line) (they did not stop in the first stopping mode). Therefore, the AT1 transition rate (advantageous degree for satisfying the first requirement) decreases from 20% to 15% (the advantageous degree becomes lower), and the AT2 transition rate (advantageous degree for satisfying the second requirement) is 10%. (advantage does not change) and no points are awarded.

That is, in this example, if the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation (ignoring the operation navigation), the AT1 transition rate will decrease and it will be difficult to transition to the AT1 state, but the AT2 transition rate will change. do not.

If the player does not follow the operation navigation, the player is put at a disadvantage even when it comes to a second specific advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT2 state) where it is unknown whether or not it will transition after the first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT1 state). However, according to this example, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, there is no difference in the advantage in the second specific advantageous gaming state compared to when the player follows the operation navigation. Since this is not provided, it is possible to maintain the player's desire to play until the transition to the second specific advantageous gaming state while relieving the player of operational errors and the like.

As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 201) has a control means (for example, the main control section) that can set one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states. , a lottery means capable of performing a lottery regarding internal winning of winning combinations and deriving the lottery results (for example, processing of internal lottery for winning combinations), and a gaming value giving means that grants gaming value according to the stop state of a plurality of reels. (for example, a medal payout process), and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels to individually stop the rotation of the reels (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 201). ), wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, the privilege push order bell 6 shown in FIG. 202(b)), and the lottery result includes the first lottery result. In the case of a lottery result, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (for example, a reverse push operation), the plurality of reels are activated in the first stop mode (for example, a "bell" appears on the winning line). -Bell-Replay'' symbol combinations are aligned), and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (for example, sequential pressing operation), the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode. (for example, in a mode in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the game value giving means is configured to control the number of reels when the lottery result is the first lottery result. If the game value is stopped in the second stopping mode (for example, paying out 12 coins) than in the first stopping mode (for example, paying out 1 coin), more of the gaming value is awarded. The plurality of gaming states include a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a non-AT state in an advantageous section) and a first specific advantageous gaming state that can be entered after the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, FIG. 203 The AT1 state shown in (A) and the judge state regarding whether to transition to the AT state) and the second specific advantageous gaming state that can be transitioned to after the first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT1 state shown in FIG. ) is included, and when the first condition is satisfied, the AT2 state (ending state) shown in FIG. The first condition includes the fulfillment of the first requirement (for example, when winning a lottery for transition to the AT1 state), and the second condition includes the fulfillment of the second requirement (for example, winning the lottery to shift to the AT2 state), and includes a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, when the AT shift occurs in the 1st G after shifting to the advantageous section). undetermined state) and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode, and the first requirement is satisfied. The degree (for example, the AT1 transition rate of 21% shown in FIG. 203(C)) is the advantageous degree (for example, the AT1 transition rate of 21% shown in FIG. 203(C)) for satisfying the first requirement when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. For example, the degree of advantage ( For example, the AT2 transition rate (10%) shown in FIG. 203(C) is the degree of advantage (for example, This gaming machine is characterized by having the same AT2 transition rate (10%) shown in FIG. 203(C).

If the player does not follow the operation navigation, the player is put at a disadvantage even when it comes to a second specific advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT2 state) where it is unknown whether or not it will transition after the first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT1 state). However, according to the game machine according to the present embodiment, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the second specific advantageous gaming state will be the same as if the player had followed the operation navigation. Since there is no difference in advantageousness, it is possible to maintain the player's desire to play until the second specific advantageous gaming state is reached, while relieving the player of operational errors and the like.

Further, in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the first lottery result when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode. Even if the advantage in the specific advantage gaming state is higher than the advantage in the first specific advantage gaming state when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. good.

Further, the notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) capable of making a notification is provided, and the notification means prompts an operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The notification means is configured to be able to execute a first operation navigation (for example, an operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation), and the notification means is configured to perform an operation in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The second operation navigation (for example, the operation navigation that prompts sequential pressing operations) may be configured to be executable.

In addition, a certain counter (for example, the remaining ceiling counter shown in FIG. 204(A) or the second counter shown in FIGS. 206(C) and (D)) related to the satisfaction of the first requirement is provided, and one game is The count value of the certain counter may be updated each time the count value is executed, and the notification means may be capable of starting a count display indicating the count value.

Further, if 0 is displayed as the count display after the power is restored after the power outage, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode after the power is restored, the numerical value indicated by the count display is The count values may match, and if the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode after the power is restored after a power outage, the numerical value indicated by the count display and the count value match. It may be something that does not exist.

With this configuration, it is possible to increase the level of satisfaction of players who have performed operations according to the operation navigation, and to alert players who have not performed operations according to the operation navigation.

Further, the plurality of gaming states include a normal state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) that is more advantageous than the normal state regarding the display of the operation navigation, and the advantageous state includes , the first specific advantageous gaming state and the second specific advantageous gaming state are included, and in the advantageous state, there are cases where the transition to the second specific advantageous gaming state does not occur after the first specific advantageous gaming state. There may be.

With such a configuration, the variety of games can be increased, and the satisfaction level of the players can be increased.

Further, the second operation navigation is configured to be executable in the first specific advantageous gaming state, and the degree of advantage for satisfying the second requirement when an operation according to the second operation navigation is performed. may be such that the degree of advantage for satisfying the second requirement is not lower than that in the case where the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the satisfaction level of a player who performs operations according to the operation navigation.

Further, even if the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed, the plurality of reels may stop in the second stop mode.

With such a configuration, even if the operation navigation is ignored, a profit can be given to the player, and the player's satisfaction level can be increased.

Furthermore, when the second operation navigation is executed, either the operation according to the second operation navigation is performed or the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed. Even if it is, it is possible to perform a performance according to the operation, and when the first operation navigation is executed, only when the first operation according to the first operation navigation is performed. It may also be possible to perform a performance according to the operation.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier to understand the difference between when an operation is performed according to the second operation navigation and when an operation is performed according to the first operation navigation by using a difference in presentation. Not only that, but the effect of the production can be enhanced by making the production different.

Further, the gaming value imparting means is configured not to impart the gaming value when the plurality of reels stop in the first stopping mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. may have been done.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a control means that can set one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states, a lottery means that can perform a lottery regarding internal winning of a role and derive a lottery result, and a plurality of a gaming value imparting means for imparting a gaming value according to the manner in which the reels are stopped; a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels; the gaming machine, wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a first operation mode; When the plurality of stop buttons is operated in the second operation mode, the plurality of reels stop in the second stop mode, and the plurality of reels stop in the second stop mode. When the lottery result is the first lottery result, the gaming value imparting means determines that when the plurality of reels stop in the second stop mode, the reels stop in the second stop mode, when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The plurality of gaming states include a normal advantageous gaming state, a first specific advantageous gaming state that can be entered after the normal advantageous gaming state, and a first specific advantageous gaming state that can be entered after the normal advantageous gaming state. A second specific advantageous gaming state that can be transitioned to after the specific advantageous gaming state is included, and when the first condition is satisfied, the system is configured to be able to transition to the first specific advantageous gaming state, and the second condition is If the game is established, the game is configured to be able to shift to the second specific advantageous gaming state, the first condition includes the fulfillment of the first requirement, and the second condition includes the fulfillment of the second requirement. , and in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode, the first The degree of advantage for satisfying the requirement is higher than the degree of advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, The degree of advantage for satisfying the second requirement in the case where the plurality of reels is stopped in the second manner is the same as the degree of advantage in satisfying the second requirement when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second manner. It may be a game machine characterized by the following.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a control means that can set one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states, and a gaming value imparting means that imparts a gaming value according to the stopping state of the plurality of reels. , a gaming value granting state control means capable of setting one state from among a plurality of gaming value granting states in relation to the gaming value granting state, the gaming machine comprising: includes a normal advantageous gaming state, a first specific advantageous gaming state that can be transitioned to after the normal advantageous gaming state, and a second specific advantageous gaming state that can be transitioned to after the first specific advantageous gaming state. and is configured to be able to transition to the first specific advantageous gaming state when a first condition is met, and configured to be able to transition to the second specific advantageous gaming state when a second condition is met. and the first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement, the second condition includes the satisfaction of the second requirement, and the plurality of gaming value granting states include at least the satisfaction of the second requirement. A first gaming value imparting state and a second gaming value imparting state are included, which are set in the normal advantageous gaming state, and the gaming value imparting state control means controls the gaming value imparting state to be set in a certain situation (hereinafter referred to as The first gaming value granting state can be set when the gaming value granting state is in a certain situation different from the first situation (hereinafter referred to as the "first situation"). 2), the second gaming value granting state can be set, and the second situation is better for the player regarding the gaming value granting situation than the first situation. In an advantageous situation, and in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state, the degree of advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the first gaming value granting state is set is the second gaming value. The degree of advantage for satisfying the first requirement is higher when the granting state is set, and the degree of advantage for satisfying the second requirement is higher when the first gaming value granting state is set. The gaming machine may be characterized in that the degree of advantage for satisfying the second requirement is the same as the degree of advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the second gaming value granting state is set.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (3)/Summary>
The gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 201) includes a control means (for example, a main control section) that can set one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states, and an internal winning combination of winning combinations. A lottery means that can perform a lottery and derive the lottery results (for example, processing of internal lottery of winning combinations), and a gaming value giving means that gives a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, payout of medals) processing), and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels.

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push order bell 6 shown in FIG. 202(b)), if the operation in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation) is performed, multiple When the reels stop in the first stopping manner (for example, the manner in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the second operation is performed. When an operation is performed in a certain manner (for example, a sequential push operation), the plurality of reels stop in a second stopping manner (for example, a manner in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), The gaming value imparting means is configured to provide a higher value when the plurality of reels stop in the second stop mode (for example, payout of 12 coins) than when the plurality of reels stop in the first stop mode (for example, payout of 1 coin). The player is configured to give more of the gaming value.

Further, the plurality of game states include a normal state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 203(A)) and an advantageous state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 203(A) that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the display of the operation navigation). AT1 state, AT2 state shown in FIG. The count value of the first counter (first count value) can be updated every time, and the second counter related to a certain profit grant (for example, the ceiling remaining counter shown in FIG. 204(A)) and is configured to be able to update the count value of the second counter (second count value) every time one game is played in the advantageous state, and when the advantageous state and the lottery result are the same as in the first game. In the case of the lottery result, if the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode), the first and the second count value can be updated, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (the plurality of reels are (in the case of not being stopped in a stopping manner), only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value can be updated.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (3)/Specific example>
FIG. 204(A) is a diagram showing a specific example of advantageous section control (3) when the operation navigation is ignored.

In the state shown in FIG. 204(C)(1), in the normal state, for example, the prize push order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived), and the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode) is performed. The operation navigation that prompts you is executed.

The count value (first count value) of the high navigation counter (first counter) in the same state is 900, and the count value (second count value) of the ceiling remaining counter (second counter) in the same state is It is 550. Here, the remaining ceiling counter is a counter that indicates the number of games remaining until the ceiling is reached.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 204(A)(2) is a state in which the player performs a stop operation according to the operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, since the player performed a stop operation according to the operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation, multiple reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, the "Bell-Bell-Replay" symbol is displayed on the winning line). When the combination is complete, the machine stops and one medal is paid out.

In addition, in the same state, since multiple reels stopped in the first stop mode (in this example, the mode in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), the high navigation counter (first The count value (first count value) of the counter) is subtracted by one and updated to 899, and the count value (second count value) of the ceiling remaining counter (second counter) is subtracted by one to 549. It has been updated to.

On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. 204(A)(3), the player does not follow the operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode), This is the state in which the stop operation was performed (operation).

In this example, because the player did not follow the operation navigation prompting for a reverse push operation and instead performed a stop operation using a forward press operation, the multiple reels changed to the second stop mode (in this example, a "bell" appeared on the winning line). The machine stops when the symbol combination "-Bell-Bell" is aligned, and 12 medals are paid out.

In addition, in the same state, multiple reels stopped in the second stopping mode (a mode in which the "Bell-Bell-Bell" symbol combination is aligned on the winning line) (they did not stop in the first stopping mode). The count value (first count value) of the high navigation counter (first counter) is subtracted by one and updated to 899, but the count value (second count value) of the ceiling remaining counter (second counter) is subtracted by one. value) has not been updated.

In other words, in this example, if the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation (ignoring the operation navigation), the count value (first count value) of the high navigation counter (first counter) is updated. However, the count value (second count value) of the remaining ceiling counter (second counter) is not updated.

It would be cruel to put the player at a disadvantage if the player does not follow the operation navigation, but according to this example, the second count value (for example, ceiling Even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the first count value (for example, advantageous section counter) is updated in the same way as if the player had followed the operation navigation. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player's operations, and it is also possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing due to operational errors and the like.

As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 201) has a control means (for example, the main control section) that can set one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states. , a lottery means capable of performing a lottery regarding internal winning of winning combinations and deriving the lottery results (for example, processing of internal lottery for winning combinations), and a gaming value giving means that grants gaming value according to the stop state of a plurality of reels. (for example, a medal payout process), and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels to individually stop the rotation of the reels (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 201). ), wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, the privilege push order bell 6 shown in FIG. 202(b)), and the lottery result includes the first lottery result. In the case of a lottery result, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (for example, a reverse push operation), the plurality of reels are activated in the first stop mode (for example, a "bell" appears on the winning line). -Bell-Replay'' symbol combinations are aligned), and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (for example, sequential pressing operation), the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode. (for example, in a mode in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the game value giving means is configured to control the number of reels when the lottery result is the first lottery result. If the game value is stopped in the second stopping mode (for example, paying out 12 coins) than in the first stopping mode (for example, paying out 1 coin), more of the gaming value is awarded. The plurality of gaming states include a normal state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 203(A)) and an advantageous state (for example, FIG. ), and includes a first counter related to the advantageous condition (for example, a high navigation counter or an advantageous section counter shown in FIG. 204(A)), and one game is performed in the advantageous condition. The count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value") is configured to be able to be updated each time the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value") is updated. A), and is configured to be able to update the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as the "second count value") each time one game is played in the advantageous state. and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode in the advantageous state and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the first lottery result is the first lottery result. Both the count value and the second count value can be updated, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode in the advantageous state, the first count value The game machine is characterized in that only the first count value of the count value and the second count value can be updated.

It would be cruel to put the player at a disadvantage if the player does not follow the operation navigation, but according to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the second Even if the count value (e.g. ceiling counter) can be updated, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the first count value (e.g. advantageous section) will be updated in the same way as if the player had followed the operation navigation. Since the counter is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player's operations, and it is also possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing due to operational errors and the like.

Further, the advantageous states include a normal advantageous gaming state and a first specific advantageous gaming state that can be transitioned to after the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT1 state shown in FIG. 203(A), or the AT state shown in FIG. (judge state regarding whether or not), and is configured to be able to shift to the first specific advantageous gaming state when the first condition is satisfied, and the first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement. is included, and in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a state where AT transition is not determined such as the 1st G after transition to the advantageous section) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of lottery results are included. The degree of advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the stop button is operated in the first operation mode is the advantage of satisfying the first requirement when the stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. The degree of advantage for satisfying the first requirement may be higher.

Further, the notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) capable of making a notification is provided, and the notification means prompts an operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The notification means is configured to be able to execute a first operation navigation (for example, an operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation), and the notification means is configured to perform an operation in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The second operation navigation (for example, the operation navigation that prompts sequential pressing operations) may be configured to be executable.

Further, the advantageous state includes a first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state), and when the second count value reaches a second value, the first specific advantageous gaming state It may be configured to move to

Further, when the first count value reaches a first value (for example, a ceiling value), the system is configured to shift to the first specific advantageous gaming state, and in the advantageous state, the first operation navigation If the operation according to the above is performed, the second count value is configured to reach the second value before the first count value reaches the first value. may have been done.

Further, the advantageous state includes a second specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 state) that can be transitioned to after the first specific advantageous gaming state, and that can be granted in the first specific advantageous gaming state. The amount of the gaming value may be greater than the amount of the gaming value that can be provided in the second specific advantageous gaming state.

Further, when an operation according to the first operation navigation is performed in the advantageous state, the advantageous state ends before the first count value reaches the first value. There may be cases.

Further, the count display indicating the first count value (for example, advantageous section counter display) can be started from the middle of the advantageous state, and the count display indicating the second count value (for example, ceiling remaining counter display) can be started from the middle of the advantageous state. ) may be able to be displayed until a certain point in time before the count display indicating the first count value is started.

Further, the gaming value imparting means is configured not to impart the gaming value when the plurality of reels stop in the first stopping mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. may have been done.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a control means that can set one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states, a lottery means that can perform a lottery regarding internal winning of a role and derive a lottery result, and a plurality of a gaming value imparting means for imparting a gaming value according to the manner in which the reels are stopped; a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels; , wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a first operation mode. When an operation is performed, the plurality of reels stop in a first stop mode, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a second operation mode, the plurality of reels stop in a second stop mode, When the lottery result is the first lottery result, the gaming value imparting means determines that when the plurality of reels stop in the second stopping manner than when the plurality of reels stops in the first stopping manner. is configured to provide a large amount of the gaming value, and the plurality of gaming states include a normal state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the display of the operation navigation, and the first one regarding the advantageous state The counter is configured such that the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value") can be updated every time one game is played in the advantageous state, and the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value") can be updated. The game machine is equipped with a second counter related to giving, and is configured to be able to update the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") each time one game is played in the advantageous state. , when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode in the advantageous state and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the first count value and the second count If both count values of the value are updatable and the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop manner, the first count value of the first count value and the second count value This gaming machine is characterized in that only the count value of is updateable.

<Ending/Summary when the operation navigation is ignored>
The gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 201) includes a control means (for example, a main control section) that can set one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states, and an internal winning combination of winning combinations. A lottery means that can perform a lottery and derive the lottery results (for example, processing of internal lottery of winning combinations), and a gaming value giving means that gives a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, payout of medals) processing), and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels.

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push order bell 6 shown in FIG. 202(b)), if the operation in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation) is performed, multiple When the reels stop in the first stopping manner (for example, the manner in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the second operation is performed. When an operation is performed in a certain manner (for example, a sequential push operation), the plurality of reels stop in a second stopping manner (for example, a manner in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), The gaming value imparting means is configured to provide a higher value when the plurality of reels stop in the second stop mode (for example, payout of 12 coins) than when the plurality of reels stop in the first stop mode (for example, payout of 1 coin). The player is configured to give more of the gaming value.

Further, the advantageous states include a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 203(A)) and a first type of specific advantageous gaming state (for example, the 203(A)) and a second type of specific advantageous gaming state that can be transitioned to after the first type of specific advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT2 state shown in FIG. 203(A)). The first type of specific advantageous gaming state is a more advantageous gaming state in terms of execution of the operation navigation than the normal advantageous gaming state, and the second type of specific advantageous gaming state is more advantageous than the normal advantageous gaming state. The advantageous gaming state is a more advantageous gaming state with respect to the execution of the operation navigation, and in the normal advantageous gaming state, when the first lottery result is derived as the lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are pressed. When only a game operated in the second operation mode is played, the normal advantageous gaming state shifts to the second type of specific advantageous gaming state without passing through the first type of specific advantageous gaming state. It is possible.

<Ending/specific example when the operation navigation is ignored>
FIG. 204(B) is a diagram showing a specific example of the ending when the operation navigation is ignored.

In the state shown in FIG. 204(B)(1), in the normal state, for example, the prize push order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived), and the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode) is performed. The operation navigation that prompts you is executed.

The AT1 transition rate in the same state (the winning probability of transitioning to the AT1 state by the transition lottery) is 20%.

In the following states shown in FIG. 204(B)(2) to FIG. 204(B)(3), the player does not follow the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode), and for example, the forward push operation is performed. This is a state in which a stop operation has been performed (operation in the second operation mode).

In this example, because the player did not follow the operation navigation prompting for a reverse push operation and instead performed a stop operation using a forward press operation, the multiple reels changed to the second stop mode (in this example, a "bell" appeared on the winning line). The machine stops when the symbol combination "-Bell-Bell" is aligned, and 12 medals are paid out.

In addition, in the same state, multiple reels stopped in the second stopping mode (a mode in which the "Bell-Bell-Bell" symbol combination is aligned on the winning line) (they did not stop in the first stopping mode). Since then, the state has not shifted to the AT1 state (the first type of specific advantageous gaming state).

Subsequently, FIG. 204(B)(4) shows a state in which the normal state has shifted to the bonus ending AT2 state (second type of specific advantageous gaming state).

Although not shown, in the normal state shown in FIG. Since it stopped in the stopping mode (a mode in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line) (it did not stop in the first stopping mode), the AT2 state of the bonus ending (second type of (specified advantageous gaming state).

On the other hand, FIG. 204(B)(5) shows the normal ending AT2 state (not shown) from the normal state shown in FIG. This is a state in which the state has transitioned to a second type of specific advantageous gaming state.

In this example, the player performs a stop operation according to the operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation, and multiple reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line). Since the game stopped in the state (aspect), the game moves to the AT2 state (second type of specific advantageous gaming state) with a normal ending via the AT1 state (first type of specific advantageous gaming state).

Even if a player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, the operation is not an error, so it is difficult to alert the player, and the player continues to perform operations that do not follow the operation navigation unintentionally. However, according to this example, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, there is a second type of advantage that allows the player to win the ball. Since it is possible to shift to a gaming state, it is possible to maintain the player's desire to play until the state shifts to the second type of advantageous gaming state, while relieving the player of operational errors and the like.

As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 201) has a control means (for example, the main control section) that can set one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states. , a lottery means capable of performing a lottery regarding internal winning of winning combinations and deriving the lottery results (for example, processing of internal lottery for winning combinations), and a gaming value giving means that grants gaming value according to the stop state of a plurality of reels. (for example, a medal payout process), and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels to individually stop the rotation of the reels (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 201). ), wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, the privilege push order bell 6 shown in FIG. 202(b)), and the lottery result includes the first lottery result. In the case of a lottery result, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (for example, a reverse push operation), the plurality of reels are activated in the first stop mode (for example, a "bell" appears on the winning line). -Bell-Replay'' symbol combinations are aligned), and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (for example, sequential pressing operation), the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode. (for example, in a mode in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the game value giving means is configured to control the number of reels when the lottery result is the first lottery result. If the game value is stopped in the second stopping mode (for example, paying out 12 coins) than in the first stopping mode (for example, paying out 1 coin), more of the gaming value is awarded. The plurality of gaming states include a normal state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the execution of the operation navigation, and the advantageous state includes a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, FIG. 203 ( A), a first type of specific advantageous gaming state that can be transitioned to after the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT1 state shown in FIG. 203(A)), and a specific state of the first type. A second type of specific advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT2 state shown in FIG. 203(A)) that can be entered after the advantageous gaming state is included, and the first type of specific advantageous gaming state is more favorable than the normal advantageous gaming state. The state is a gaming state that is more advantageous with respect to the execution of the operation navigation, and the second type of specific advantageous gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous with respect to the execution of the operation navigation than the normal advantageous gaming state. Yes, in the normal advantageous gaming state, when the first lottery result is derived as the lottery result, only a game in which the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode is played; The gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible to shift from the normal advantageous gaming state to the second type of specific advantageous gaming state without passing through the first type of specific advantageous gaming state.

Even if a player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, the operation is not an error, so it is difficult to alert the player, and the player continues to perform operations that do not follow the operation navigation unintentionally. However, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, it is possible for some players to obtain balls. Since it is possible to shift to the second type of advantageous gaming state, it is possible to maintain the player's desire to play until the transition to the second type of advantageous gaming state, while relieving the player of operational errors and the like.

In addition, when a certain condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the first type of specific advantageous gaming state, and the certain condition includes the satisfaction of a certain requirement, and the normal advantageous gaming state is In a certain state (for example, a state where AT shift such as the 1st G after shifting to an advantageous section has not been determined) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode. The degree of advantage for satisfying the certain requirement when the operation is performed in the second operation mode is greater than the degree of advantage for satisfying the certain requirement when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. It may be expensive.

Further, the notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) capable of making a notification is provided, and the notification means prompts an operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The notification means is configured to be able to execute a first operation navigation (for example, an operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation), and the notification means is configured to perform an operation in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The second operation navigation (for example, the operation navigation that prompts sequential pressing operations) may be configured to be executable.

Furthermore, the second type of specific advantageous gaming state may be an advantageous gaming state that can be continued until the advantageous state ends.

Further, it is provided with a counter related to the first type of specific advantageous gaming state, and is configured to be able to update the count value of the counter every time one game is played in the advantageous state, and in the advantageous state, the count value of the counter is configured to be able to be updated. If the operation according to the operation navigation is not performed, the count display indicating the count value may not be updated.

Further, the second type of specific advantageous gaming state includes at least a first ending (for example, a normal ending shown in FIG. 204(B)(5)) and a second ending different from the first ending. There are several endings (for example, the bonus ending shown in FIG. 204(B)(4)), and the amount of profit that can be given to the player in the first ending (for example, the number of games, the frequency of navigation (the winning order of the pressing bell, etc.) (time notification frequency, etc.), full navigation execution frequency, medal payout amount, etc.) are greater than the amount of profit that can be given to the player in the second ending, and in the advantageous state, the first operation navigation If the operation in accordance with the above is not performed, even if the transition to the second type of specific advantageous gaming state does not transition to the first ending but the second ending. good.

In addition, in the second type of specific advantageous gaming state, a setting value suggestion display suggesting a setting value (for example, a display suggesting that the setting value is an even number (or an odd number), a display suggesting that the setting value is an even number (or an odd number), Setting 6 etc.) can be displayed, and the frequency at which the setting value suggestion display is displayed in the first ending is higher than the frequency at which the setting value suggestion display is displayed in the second ending. The frequency may be higher than the frequency of

Further, in the second ending, the setting value suggestion display may not be displayed.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a control means that can set one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states, a lottery means that can perform a lottery regarding internal winning of a role and derive a lottery result, and a plurality of a gaming value imparting means for imparting a gaming value according to the manner in which the reels are stopped; a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
, wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a first operation mode. When an operation is performed, the plurality of reels stop in a first stop mode, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a second operation mode, the plurality of reels stop in a second stop mode, When the lottery result is the first lottery result, the gaming value imparting means determines that when the plurality of reels stop in the second stopping manner than when the plurality of reels stops in the first stopping manner. is configured to provide a large amount of the gaming value, and the advantageous states include a normal advantageous gaming state, a first type of specific advantageous gaming state that can be transitioned to after the normal advantageous gaming state, and a first type of specific advantageous gaming state that can be transitioned to after the normal advantageous gaming state. A second type of specific advantageous gaming state that can be transitioned to after the type of specific advantageous gaming state is included, and the first type of specific advantageous gaming state is better than the normal advantageous gaming state. The second type of specific advantageous gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous in terms of execution, and the second type of specific advantageous gaming state is a more advantageous gaming state in terms of the execution of the operation navigation than the normal advantageous gaming state, and in the normal advantageous gaming state, When the first lottery result is derived as the lottery result, if only a game in which the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stopping mode is played, the normal advantageous gaming state is changed to the first lottery result. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible to shift to the second type of specific advantageous gaming state without passing through the second type of specific advantageous gaming state.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a control means that can set one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states, and a gaming value imparting means that imparts a gaming value according to the stopping state of the plurality of reels. , a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and a plurality of gaming value imparting states in relation to the gaming value imparting status. A gaming machine comprising: a gaming value imparting state control means capable of setting a state from one to one; the advantageous state includes a normal advantageous gaming state; a specific advantageous gaming state of a type, and a second type of specific advantageous gaming state that can be transitioned to after the first type of specific advantageous gaming state, and the specific advantageous gaming state of the first type is higher than the normal advantageous gaming state. The advantageous gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous with respect to the execution of the operation navigation, and the second type of specific advantageous gaming state is a more advantageous game with respect to the execution of the operation navigation than the normal advantageous gaming state. The second type of specific advantageous gaming state is a gaming state related to an ending, and the plurality of gaming value giving states include at least a first gaming value giving state set in the normal advantageous gaming state. and a second gaming value granting state, and the gaming value granting state control means controls the game value granting state when the gaming value granting state is in a certain situation (hereinafter referred to as the "first situation"). It is possible to set a gaming value granting state of A value imparting state can be set, and the second situation is a more advantageous situation for the player in terms of the gaming value imparting situation than the first situation, and a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state. If the second gaming value granting state is set, the normal advantageous gaming state changes to the second type of specific advantageous gaming state without passing through the first type of specific advantageous gaming state. This game machine is characterized by being transferable.

<Bell Guessing Performance/Summary>
The gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 201) includes a control means (for example, a main control section) that can set one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states, and an internal winning combination of winning combinations. A lottery means that can perform a lottery and derive the lottery results (for example, processing of internal lottery of winning combinations), and a gaming value giving means that gives a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, payout of medals) processing), a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels, and presentation means (for example, a liquid crystal display device).

In addition, the lottery results include a first lottery result (for example, the privilege pushing order bell 6 shown in FIG. 202(b)) and a second lottery result different from the first lottery result (for example, FIG. Normal push order bell 1) shown in (b) is included, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result and the operation in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation) is performed, multiple reels are It stops in the first stopping mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, it stops in the second operating mode. When an operation (for example, sequential push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels stop in a second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the game value is The awarding means is larger when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, 12 coins are paid out) than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, 1 coin is paid out). It is configured to give the gaming value of .

In addition, when the lottery result is the second lottery result, if an operation in the third operation mode (for example, a reverse push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels will move in the third stop mode (for example, " If the lottery result is the second lottery result and the fourth operation mode (for example, sequential push operation) is performed, the lottery result is the second lottery result. The plurality of reels stop in the fourth stopping mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the gaming value imparting means It is configured such that more of the gaming value is given when the game is stopped in the fourth stop mode (for example, 12 coins are paid out) than when it is stopped in the stop mode (for example, 1 coin is paid out). .

Further, one of the plurality of types of displays may be a certain effect that can be displayed when the lottery result is the first lottery result or the second lottery result (for example, as shown in FIG. 204(C)). The certain performance includes a case where the plurality of reels stop in the second stop mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result, and a case where the lottery result is the first lottery result and the plurality of reels stop in the second stop mode. In the case of the second lottery result, when the plurality of reels stop in the fourth operation mode, it is an effect that suggests success (for example, an effect that displays a display including the character string "success"), or In a game, the probability that the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stopping manner (for example, 5/6) is higher than the probability that the plurality of reels are stopped in the fourth stopping manner (for example, 1/6). ) is higher.

<Bell hit performance/specific example>
FIG. 204(C) is a diagram showing a specific example of the bell hit performance.

In the state shown in FIG. 204(C)(1), in the AT1 state, for example, if the normal push order bell 1 is won (the second lottery result is derived), the operation navigation that prompts the bell winning performance (a certain performance) is activated. It is in the executed state.

In the bell hit performance (a certain performance) of this example, the LCD display device 157 is used to indicate that AT1 is displayed when a correct press order operation (in this example, an LCR press order operation that pays out 12 medals) is performed. A notification suggesting that the state should be continued (in this example, a display including the character string "Continue AT1 with correct press order!!") and a press order guess that hides all the correct press orders and allows the player to guess. Display (in this example, display of "???") is performed.

Also, although not shown, if the player's stop operation matches the correct press order operation (in this example, the LCR press order operation) (if the player's stop operation is correct), the player will be placed on the winning line. The symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell" is completed (it stops in the fourth stop mode), 12 medals are paid out, and a display indicating success (for example, a display containing the character string "Success") is displayed. performance) will begin.

In this example, if the normal pressing order bell 1 is won (the second lottery result is derived), the probability that the player's stop operation matches the correct pressing order operation (LCR pressing order operation) is It is 1/6.

On the other hand, in the state shown in (C) (2) of the same figure, in the AT1 state, for example, the player wins the bonus pressing order bell 6 (the first lottery result is derived) and performs an operation to prompt the bell winning performance (a certain performance). Navigation is running.

In the bell hit performance (a certain performance) of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to perform correct answer pressing operations (in this example, any one of LCR, LRC, CLR, CRL, and RLC from which 12 medals are paid out). If a press order operation) is performed, a notification indicating that the AT1 state will be continued (in this example, a display including the character string "Continue AT1 with correct press order!!") and a notification indicating that all correct press orders are performed. A secret push order guess display (in this example, a display of "? ? ?") is performed for the player to guess.

In addition, in this example, the player can perform either a bell winning performance (a certain performance) based on normal pressing order Bell 1 (second lottery result) or a bell winning performance based on bonus pressing order Bell 6 (first lottery result). In order to be able to distinguish between performances (certain performances), the display format of the pressing order is made different for the bell winning performance (certain performance) based on the bonus pressing order bell 6 (first lottery result). (In this example, the square line surrounding the "?" is made thicker.) With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the player has won the first lottery result that is advantageous to the player by the display mode of the bell winning effect (a certain effect), thereby increasing the player's sense of expectation. I can do it.

Although not shown, if the player's stop operation matches the correct press order operation (in this example, the press order of LCR, LRC, CLR, CRL, or RLC) (the player's stop operation If you win), the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell" will be aligned on the winning line (it will stop in the second stop mode), 12 medals will be paid out, and a production indicating success (for example, , an effect that displays a display including the character string "success") is started.

That is, in this example, if the normal pressing order bell 1 is won (the second lottery result is derived), the probability that the player's stop operation matches the correct pressing order operation (LCR pressing order operation) is 1/6, and if the prize press order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived), the player's stop operation is the correct press order operation (LCR, LRC, CLR, CRL, RLC). Since the probability of matching the above press order operation is 5/6, the probability that the plurality of reels will be stopped in the fourth stopping mode in a certain game is higher than the probability that the plurality of reels will be stopped in the fourth stopping mode. The probability of being stopped is higher.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment performs an operation navigation in which the 1-card winning combination is completed, and as a result, the player is forced to miss the 12-card winning combination, which may cause the player to feel dissatisfied. According to the above, since it is possible to perform a certain performance in relation to the operation navigation, it is possible to reduce the aversion to the operation navigation, and it becomes possible to eliminate the player's dissatisfaction.

Note that the second lottery result is not limited to the normal push order bell, and if there is a push order combination other than the first lottery result, the other push order combination may be applied.

FIG. 204(C)(3) is a diagram showing a first modification of the bell hitting performance, and FIGS. 204(C)(4) and (5) are diagrams showing a second modification of the bell hitting performance. be.

In the bell guessing performance (a certain performance) explained using (1) and (2) of the same figure (C), a pressing order guessing display ("?? ? '' display), but as in Modified Example 1, some incorrect press orders may be disclosed, while other correct press orders may be kept secret for the player to guess. In a production that includes an order display (in this example, the display of "x? ?" that discloses that the first stop operation is not the left stop button and suggests that the second and third stop operations are hidden) There may be.

If such an effect is performed, when the first lottery result is derived, it is possible to increase the probability that the player's stop operation matches the correct pressing order operation, and the player's desire to play can be improved. can.

In addition, as in Modification 2, a press order guessing display that discloses part of the correct press order and hides the other part of the correct press order for the player to guess (in this example, the first stop operation is The display may include a display of "? 1 ?" that indicates that the button is a middle stop button and hides the second and third stop operations.

If such an effect is performed, when the first lottery result or the second lottery result is derived, it is possible to increase the probability that the player's stop operation matches the correct answer pressing order operation, and the player's game Can improve motivation.

As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 201) has a control means (for example, the main control section) that can set one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states. , a lottery means capable of performing a lottery regarding internal winning of winning combinations and deriving the lottery results (for example, processing of internal lottery for winning combinations), and a gaming value giving means that grants gaming value according to the stop state of a plurality of reels. (for example, a medal payout process), and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels to individually stop the rotation of the reels (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 201). ), and presentation means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.), and the lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, the order of privilege pressing shown in FIG. 202(b)). bell 6) and a second lottery result different from the first lottery result (for example, the normal pressing order bell 1 shown in FIG. 202(b)), and the lottery result is different from the first lottery result. In this case, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation pattern (for example, a reverse push operation), the plurality of reels are moved to a certain winning combination (hereinafter referred to as "first winning combination"). It stops in a first stopping mode that does not correspond to winning (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a second operation pattern (for example, , sequential push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels stop in a second mode corresponding to the winning of the first winning combination (for example, the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line). mode), and when the lottery result is the second lottery result, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a third operation pattern (for example, reverse push operation), the plurality of reels are The game stops in a third stopping manner (for example, a manner in which the symbol combination “Bell-Bell-Replay” is aligned on the winning line) that does not correspond to the winning of a certain winning combination (hereinafter referred to as “second winning combination”). However, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a fourth operation pattern (e.g., sequential pressing operation), the plurality of reels are activated in a fourth stop mode (e.g., corresponding to the winning of the second winning combination). , the number of operation patterns that become the second operation pattern is higher than the number of operation patterns that become the fourth operation pattern. and the gaming value imparting means stops the plurality of reels in the second stopping manner more than when the plurality of reels stop in the first stopping manner when the lottery result is the first lottery result. In the case where the lottery result is the second lottery result, the game value is awarded more in the case where the plurality of reels stop in the third stop mode. The system is configured such that more of the gaming value is awarded when the game stops in the fourth stopping mode, and the effect means is configured to provide at least the first lottery result or the second lottery result when the lottery result is the first lottery result or the second lottery result. , is configured to be able to execute a certain effect (for example, the bell winning effect shown in FIG. 204(C)), and the certain effect that is executed when the lottery result is the first lottery result is at least the plurality of An effect that is successful when the reels stop in the second stopping manner (for example, an effect that displays a display including the character string "success"), and when the lottery result is the second lottery result. The gaming machine is characterized in that the certain performance executed is a performance that becomes successful when at least the plurality of reels stop in the fourth stopping manner.

The game machine according to the present embodiment performs an operation navigation in which the 1-card winning combination is performed, and as a result, forces the player to miss the 12-card winning combination, which may make the player feel dissatisfied. However, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, Since it is possible to execute a certain performance in relation to the operation navigation, it is possible to reduce the aversion to the operation navigation, and it becomes possible to eliminate the player's dissatisfaction.

Note that the first winning combination and the second winning combination may be the same winning combination or may be different winning combinations. Further, the difference in the operation pattern is not limited to the order in which the stop buttons are pressed, but may be a difference in the timing at which the stop buttons are stopped. Therefore, for example, a stop operation (eye press) may be performed aiming at specific symbols on the reels (for example, red and blue symbols). It may be configured such that an effect is executed that is a success when the red, red, and blue are aligned, and an effect that is a success is not executed when the red, red, and blue are aligned.

Further, the plurality of gaming states include a normal state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the normal state in terms of display on the operation navigation, and the advantageous states include a normal advantageous gaming state and a normal advantageous gaming state. A first type of specific advantageous gaming state that can be transitioned to later is included, and when a certain condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to transition to the first type of specific advantageous gaming state, and the certain condition includes: The plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation pattern in a certain state in which a certain requirement is satisfied, and in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state and the lottery result is the first lottery result. The degree of advantage for satisfying the certain requirement in the case where the plurality of stop buttons is operated in the second operation pattern is higher than the degree of advantage for satisfying the certain requirement in the case where the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation pattern. It may be.

Further, the above-mentioned certain performance is a performance that is started before the operation of the plurality of stop buttons is performed, and is a performance that makes the player guess the successful operation pattern of the plurality of stop buttons. It may be something.

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result, when an operation in the first operation mode (for example, a reverse push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are moved in the first stop mode (for example, on the winning line). When the lottery result is the first lottery result, the second operation mode (for example, sequential push operation) is performed. and the plurality of reels stop in a second stopping mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the gaming value imparting means It is configured such that more of the gaming value is awarded when the game stops in the second stopping manner (for example, paying out 12 coins) than when stopping in the first stopping manner (for example, paying out 1 coin). , when the lottery result is the second lottery result, when an operation in the third operation mode (for example, a reverse push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are moved in the third stop mode (for example, on the winning line). If the lottery result is the second lottery result, the fourth operation mode (for example, sequential push operation) is performed. The plurality of reels stop in a fourth stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the gaming value imparting means stops the plurality of reels in the third It is configured such that more of the gaming value is awarded when the game stops in the fourth stopping mode (for example, paying out 12 coins) than when stopping in the fourth stopping mode (for example, paying out 1 coin), One of the plurality of types of displays is a certain effect that can be displayed when the lottery result is the first lottery result or the second lottery result (for example, a bell shown in FIG. 204(C)). The certain performance includes a case where the plurality of reels stop in the second stopping mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result, and a case where the lottery result is the second lottery result. In the case of a lottery result, when the plurality of reels stop in the fourth operation mode, the performance includes a display suggesting success (for example, a display including a character string "success"), In a certain game, the probability that the plurality of reels will be stopped in the second stopping manner (for example, 5/6) is higher than the probability that the plurality of reels will be stopped in the fourth stopping manner (for example, 1/6). 6) may be higher.

Further, the notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) capable of making a notification is provided, and the notification means prompts an operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The notification means is configured to be able to execute a first operation navigation (for example, an operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation), and the notification means is configured to perform an operation in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The second operation navigation (for example, the operation navigation that prompts sequential pressing operations) may be configured to be executable.

Further, the plurality of game states include a normal state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 203(A)) and an advantageous state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 203(A) that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the display of the operation navigation). (AT1 state, AT2 state), and if the advantageous state has the right to continue, the certain effect may be executed at least once in the advantageous state.

Further, the lottery result includes a third lottery result (for example, another winning combination) that is different from both the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the certain performance is The effect may be performed even when the lottery result is the third lottery result.

Further, the advantageous state includes an AT state, and during a period in which the advantageous state is not the AT state, the first operation navigation is executed when the lottery result is the first lottery result. It is possible, and during the period in which the game is in the advantageous state and in the AT state, execution of the certain performance may be started when the lottery result is the first lottery result.

Further, the gaming value imparting means is configured not to impart the gaming value when the plurality of reels stop in the first stopping mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. It may be something that has been done.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (4)/Summary>
The gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 201) includes a control means (for example, a main control section) that can set one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states, and an internal winning combination of winning combinations. A lottery means that can perform a lottery and derive the lottery results (for example, processing of internal lottery of winning combinations), and a gaming value giving means that gives a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, payout of medals) processing), a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for stopping the rotation of the reels individually, and a production means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of executing a plurality of types of production. , speakers, etc.).

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push order bell 6 shown in FIG. 202(b)), if the operation in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation) is performed, multiple When the reels stop in the first stopping manner (for example, the manner in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the second operation is performed. When an operation is performed in a certain manner (for example, a sequential push operation), the plurality of reels stop in a second stopping manner (for example, a manner in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), The gaming value imparting means is configured to provide a higher value when the plurality of reels stop in the second stop mode (for example, payout of 12 coins) than when the plurality of reels stop in the first stop mode (for example, payout of 1 coin). The player is configured to give more of the gaming value.

Also, a first game (for example, a 3-piece bet game) in which the number of game media bet is a first number (for example, 3 pieces), and a first game in which the number of game media bet is a second number (for example, 2 pieces) , the first number and the second number are different numbers, and the first number is higher than the second game. This game is more advantageous for the player.

Further, the plurality of game states include a normal state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 203(A)) and an advantageous state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 203(A) that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the display of the operation navigation). AT1 state, AT2 state shown in FIG. The count value of the first counter (first count value) can be updated every time, and the second counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the second counter shown in FIGS. 206(C) and (D)) can be updated. 2 counters), each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the second counter (second count value) can be updated, and in the advantageous state, the count value of the plurality of When the reels are stopped in the first stopping manner, both the first count value and the second count value can be updated, and in the advantageous state, the plurality of reels are If it is not stopped in the first stopping mode, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value can be updated.

Further, one of the plurality of types of performances includes a first scene (for example, scene 1 shown in FIG. 205(A)) and a second scene (for example, scene 2 shown in FIG. 205(A)). If the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the first scene is performed, the first scene is performed in the first game. If execution of the second scene effect can be started and execution of the second game is started after the game in which the first scene effect is performed, the second scene effect is started in the second game. If execution of the performance of the second scene is not started and then execution of the first game is started, execution of the performance of the second scene can be started in the first game, In a game after the game in which the first scene is produced, when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. Even if the game is stopped (even in a game where the plurality of reels are not stopped in the first stopping mode), execution of the performance of the second scene can be started in the game.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (4)/Specific example>
Figures 205 (A) to (C) are diagrams showing specific examples of advantageous section control (4) when the operation navigation is ignored, and Figure 205 (A) shows a case where the 3-coin game is continued in a continuous performance. It is a diagram showing an example of scene transition of interlocking effects.

Here, the linked performance is a performance that is executed continuously (or intermittently) over a plurality of games, and is composed of a plurality of scenes including a first scene and a second scene. For example, the interlocking effect shown in FIG. 205(A) is composed of three scenes, scene 1, scene 2, and scene 3, and scene 2 further includes scene 2-1, scene 2-2, scene 2-3, etc. It consists of multiple scenes including.

In this example, if execution of a 3-bet bet game (first game) is started after a game in which scene 1 (first scene) is performed, scene 2 (second scene) is execution of the scene) can be started. In addition, if the execution of a 3-bet bet game (first game) is started after the game in which this scene 2 (first scene) is performed, scene 3 (second scene) is performed in the game. ) execution of the performance can be started.

That is, in this example, if the 3-coin bet game is continued while the linked effect is being executed, the scene of the linked effect progresses.

FIG. 205(C) is a diagram showing an example of scene transition of a linked performance when a two-stakes game is executed in a continuous performance.

In this example, if execution of a 2-bet game (second game) is started after a game in which scene 1 (first scene) is performed, scene 2 (second scene) is executed in the game. If the performance of scene 2 (second scene) is not started and then the 3-bet game (first game) is started, the performance of scene 2 (second scene) will start in that game. It is possible.

In addition, if the execution of a 3-bet bet game (first game) is started after the game in which this scene 2 (first scene) is performed, scene 3 (second scene) is performed in the game. ) execution of the performance can be started.

That is, in this example, if a two-coin bet game is executed while the linked effect is being executed, the scene of the linked effect does not proceed. In addition, when a two-coin bet game is executed during execution of an interlocking effect, the next scene of the interlocking effect may be displayed for a moment.

FIG. 205(B) is a diagram showing an example of scene transition of interlocking effects when the operation navigation is executed in continuous effects.

In the example shown in (B) (1) of the same figure, execution of a 3-bet bet game (first game) is started in a game after the game in which scene 1 (first scene) is performed, and the scene At the same time as starting the performance of 2-1, for example, if you win the special push order bell 6 (the first lottery result is derived), the operation navigation prompts you to perform a reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode). This is an example in which the player performs a stop operation according to the operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, the execution of scene 2-2 is triggered by the first stop operation (in this example, pressing the right stop button), and then the second stop operation (in this example, pressing the middle stop button) The execution of scene 2-3 is triggered by the pressing operation of the left stop button, and then the execution of scene 2-4 is started by the third stop operation (in this example, the pressing of the left stop button). It has started.

Although not shown, in this example, since the player performed a stop operation according to the operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, "" is displayed on the winning line). The game stops when the symbol combinations of ``Bell-Bell-Replay'' are aligned, and one medal is paid out.

On the other hand, in the example shown in (B) (2) of the same figure, execution of a 3-bet bet game (first game) is started in a game after the game in which scene 1 (first scene) is performed. , starts the execution of the scene 2-1, and, for example, wins the privilege push order bell 6 (the first lottery result is derived) and prompts the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode). This is an example in which the navigation is executed and the player performs a stop operation without following the operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, execution of scene 2-2 is triggered by the first stop operation (in this example, pressing the left stop button), and then the second stop operation (in this example, pressing the middle stop button) The execution of the scene 2-3 effect is triggered by the pressing operation of the right stop button), and then the execution of the scene 2-4 is started by the third stop operation (in this example, the pressing operation of the right stop button). It has started. In addition, in this example, since the visibility of the performance in scene 2-4 is reduced, at least a part of the winning performance that is executed after the third stop operation is not executed during the performance in scene 2-4. It consists of

Although not shown, in this example, because the player performed a stop operation by forward press operation without following the operation navigation that prompts reverse press operation, the plurality of reels changed to the second stop mode (in this example Then, the game stops when the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line, and 12 medals are paid out.

As explained above, in this example, it is a game after the game in which the first scene (in this example, scene 1) is performed, and the lottery result is the first lottery result (in this example, the bonus When the number of reels is 6), multiple reels are not stopped in the first stopping mode (in this example, a mode in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line) (when the player operates Even in a game in which the stop operation is performed without following the navigation, execution of the second scene (in this example, scene 2) can be started in the game.

Even if a player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, the operation is not an error, so it is difficult to alert the player, and it is difficult to alert the player or repeat consecutive performances as a penalty. However, according to this example, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the continuous performance can be continued. Therefore, the player's desire to play can be maintained without making the player feel embarrassed.

As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 201) has a control means (for example, the main control section) that can set one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states. , a lottery means capable of performing a lottery regarding internal winning of winning combinations and deriving the lottery results (for example, processing of internal lottery for winning combinations), and a gaming value giving means that grants gaming value according to the stop state of a plurality of reels. (for example, a medal payout process), and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels to individually stop the rotation of the reels (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 201). ) and a performance means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) capable of executing a plurality of types of performances, and the lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, FIG. 202 (b), and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation) When this is done, the plurality of reels stop in the first stop mode (for example, the mode in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), and the plurality of stop buttons stop in the second operation mode. When an operation (for example, a sequential push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels stop in a second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and When the lottery result is the first lottery result, the gaming value imparting means is arranged such that when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the reels stop in the second stop mode rather than when the plurality of reels stop in the first stop mode (for example, one payout). A first game in which the number of game media bet is a first number (for example, 3 pieces), which is configured so that more of the game value is awarded when the game is stopped in a certain manner (for example, when 12 coins are paid out). (for example, a 3-piece bet game) and a second game (for example, a 2-piece bet game) in which the number of game media bet is a second number (for example, 2 pieces), and the second number are different numbers, and the first game is more advantageous for the player than the second game, and the plurality of game states include the normal state ( For example, the normal state shown in FIG. 203(A)) and the advantageous state (for example, the AT1 state and AT2 state shown in FIG. 203(A)) which are more advantageous than the normal state regarding the display of the operation navigation are included. A first counter related to an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation counter or an advantageous section counter shown in FIG. 204(A)) is provided, and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter ( Hereinafter, this will be referred to as the "first count value." ), and a second counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the second counter shown in FIGS. 206(C) and 206(D), a counter that counts the number of remaining ATs during AT, an AT transition a counter that counts a certain count value for the game, and updates the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as the "second count value") every time one game is played in the advantageous state. When execution of the first game is started in the advantageous state, both the first count value and the second count value can be updated; When execution of the second game is started in the advantageous state, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value can be updated; The states include a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a non-AT state in an advantageous section) and a certain specific advantageous gaming state that can be transitioned to after the normal advantageous gaming state, and the state is higher than the normal advantageous gaming state. The specific advantageous gaming state is a more advantageous gaming state with respect to the execution of the operation navigation, and when a certain condition is met, it is configured to be able to shift to the certain specific advantageous gaming state, and the certain condition is , the fulfillment of the first requirement (for example, when winning a lottery for transition to the AT1 state or AT2 state), and a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, AT transition such as the 1st G after transition to the advantageous section). has not been determined) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, and the first requirement is satisfied when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode. The degree of advantage is higher than the degree of advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode, and one of the plurality of types of effects is is a production consisting of a plurality of scenes including a first scene (for example, scene 1 shown in FIG. 205(A)) and a second scene (for example, scene 2 shown in FIG. 205(A)), If execution of the first game is started after a game in which the first scene is performed, execution of the second scene can be started in the first game, If execution of the second game is started after the game in which the first scene is performed, the execution of the second scene is not started in the second game, and the next game is performed. If execution of the first game is started in the first game, execution of the second scene effect can be started in the first game, and the execution of the second scene effect can be started in the first game. In the later game, when the lottery result is the first lottery result, even if the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode, the first lottery result in the second game This game machine is characterized in that execution of the second scene can be started.

Even if a player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, the operation is not an error, so it is difficult to alert the player, and it is difficult to alert the player or repeat consecutive performances as a penalty. However, according to the game machine according to the present embodiment, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the player may feel embarrassed if the player interrupts the operation. By advancing the performance, the player's desire to play can be maintained without making the player feel embarrassed.

Further, the notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) capable of making a notification is provided, and the notification means prompts an operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The notification means is configured to be able to execute a first operation navigation (for example, an operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation), and the notification means is configured to perform an operation in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The second operation navigation (for example, the operation navigation that prompts sequential pressing operations) may be configured to be executable.

Further, if an operation according to the first operation navigation is not performed in the advantageous state, only the count display (for example, ceiling remaining counter display) indicating the first count value can be updated; The count display indicating the second count value may not be updated.

Further, the specific advantageous gaming state includes a first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state), and the second operation navigation is configured to be executable in the first specific advantageous gaming state; When a plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode, an effect corresponding to each operation can be executed, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. In this case, the effect corresponding to each operation may not be executed.

Further, in the second game, if the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed and the plurality of reels stop in the first stop mode (for example, when only one medal is paid out), Even if there is, it may be possible to start a display suggesting the total amount of gaming value awarded in the advantageous state (for example, displaying an image including a character string "500 coins acquired").

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (5)/Summary>
The gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 201) includes a control means (for example, a main control section) that can set one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states, and an internal winning combination of winning combinations. A lottery means that can perform a lottery and derive the lottery results (for example, processing of internal lottery of winning combinations), and a gaming value giving means that gives a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, payout of medals) processing), a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of executing a plurality of types of effects. etc.) and.

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push order bell 6 shown in FIG. 202(b)), if the operation in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation) is performed, multiple When the reels stop in the first stopping manner (for example, the manner in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the second operation is performed. When an operation is performed in a certain manner (for example, a sequential push operation), the plurality of reels stop in a second stopping manner (for example, a manner in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), The gaming value imparting means is configured to provide a higher value when the plurality of reels stop in the second stop mode (for example, payout of 12 coins) than when the plurality of reels stop in the first stop mode (for example, payout of 1 coin). The player is configured to give more of the gaming value.

Also, a first game (for example, a 3-piece bet game) in which the number of game media bet is a first number (for example, 3 pieces), and a first game in which the number of game media bet is a second number (for example, 2 pieces) , the first number and the second number are different numbers, and the first number is higher than the second game. This game is more advantageous for the player.

The plurality of game states include a normal state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 203(A)) and an advantageous state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 203(A) that is more advantageous than the normal state in terms of execution of the operation navigation). AT1 state shown in FIG. The count value of the first counter (first count value) is configured to be updateable, and the second counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the second counter shown in FIGS. 206(C) and 206(D) ), and is configured to be able to update the count value of the second counter (second count value) each time one game is played in the advantageous state, and in the advantageous state, the plurality of reels When stopped in the first stopping mode, both the first count value and the second count value can be updated, and in the advantageous state, the plurality of reels are If it is not stopped in the stopping manner, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value can be updated.

Furthermore, one of the plurality of types of displays is a specific display (for example, the attention-calling display shown in FIG. 206(A)) that is a display regarding caution to the player and is not an effect display; When the second game is played, the specific display is displayed, and in a certain state in the normal advantageous game state and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are set to the second lottery result. The configuration is such that the specific display is not displayed even if the operation is performed in the operation mode shown in FIG.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (5)/Specific example>
FIGS. 206A and 206B are diagrams showing a specific example of advantageous section control (5) when the operation navigation is ignored.

As shown in (A) of the same figure, in this example, in a three-coin bet game (first game), a warning display (a certain display) indicating to the player that it is a two-coin bet game is displayed. However, in a two-bet game (second game), it is possible to display a warning display (a certain display).

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 3B, execution of a two-bet bet game (second game) is started in a game after the game in which scene 1 (first scene) is performed, and for example, a bonus The player wins the push order bell 6 (the first lottery result is derived), executes the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode), and the player This is an example in which the stop operation was performed without following the operation navigation that prompts the user to perform the operation in the following manner.

In this example, a warning display (a certain display) is displayed in response to the first stop operation (in this example, pressing the left stop button), and then the second stop operation (in this example, pressing the middle stop button) A warning display (certain display) is displayed when the third stop operation (in this example, the right stop button is pressed) is triggered, and a warning display (certain display) is then displayed when the third stop operation (in this example, the right stop button is pressed) is triggered. it's shown. Further, in this example, after the third stop operation, the warning display (a certain display) is erased, and the performance of scene 1 is started.

On the other hand, although not shown, the execution of the 3-bet bet game (first game) is started, and for example, if the prize push order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived), the reverse push operation (the first If a player performs a stop operation without following the operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode), a warning is issued. It is configured so that the display (certain display) is not displayed.

Even if a player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, the operation is not an error, so it is difficult to alert the player, and if the player does Although there is a risk of embarrassing the player, according to this example, a certain display (warning display) can be displayed in the second game (two bet game) that requires a warning. However, by not displaying a certain display (warning display) if the player does not follow the operation navigation, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling embarrassed and maintain the player's desire to play. can.

As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 201) has a control means (for example, the main control section) that can set one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states. , a lottery means capable of performing a lottery regarding internal winning of winning combinations and deriving the lottery results (for example, processing of internal lottery for winning combinations), and a gaming value giving means that grants gaming value according to the stop state of a plurality of reels. (for example, a medal payout process), and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels to individually stop the rotation of the reels (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 201). ) and a performance means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) capable of executing a plurality of types of performances, and the lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, FIG. 202 (b), and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation). When this is done, the plurality of reels stop in the first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), and the plurality of stop buttons stop in the second operation mode. When an operation (for example, sequential push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels stop in a second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the game value is When the lottery result is the first lottery result, the awarding means is configured to cause the plurality of reels to stop in the second stop mode rather than in the first stop mode (for example, one payout) when the lottery result is the first lottery result. A first game (for example, a first game where the number of game media bet is a first number (for example, 3 pieces) is configured such that more of the game value is given when the game is stopped (for example, 12 pieces are paid out), and the number of game media bet is the first number (for example, 3 pieces) , 3-piece bet game) and a second game (e.g., 2-piece bet game) in which the number of game media bet is a second number (e.g., 2), and the first number and the second number are different numbers, the first game is a game more advantageous to the player than the second game, and the plurality of game states include a normal state (for example, 203(A)) and an advantageous state (for example, the AT1 state and AT2 state shown in FIG. 203(A)) that are more advantageous than the normal state in terms of execution of the operation navigation, the advantageous state 204(A), and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter, It is called "first count value." ), and a second counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the second counter shown in FIGS. 206(C) and 206(D), a counter that counts the number of remaining ATs during AT, an AT transition a counter that counts a certain count value for the game, and updates the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as the "second count value") every time one game is played in the advantageous state. When execution of the first game is started in the advantageous state, both the first count value and the second count value can be updated; When execution of the second game is started in the advantageous state, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value can be updated; The states include a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a non-AT state in an advantageous section) and a certain specific advantageous gaming state that can be transitioned to after the normal advantageous gaming state, and the state is higher than the normal advantageous gaming state. The specific advantageous gaming state is a more advantageous gaming state with respect to the execution of the operation navigation, and when a certain condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the certain specific advantageous gaming state, and the certain condition is , when the first requirement is satisfied (for example, when winning a lottery to transition to the AT1 state or AT2 state), the state is in the normal advantageous gaming state, and the lottery result is the first lottery result. In this case, the degree of advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode is as follows: If the first requirement is met, one of the plurality of types of displays may be a specific display (e.g. , the attention-calling display shown in FIG. (a state in which AT transition has not been determined such as 1G) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode; The game machine is also characterized in that it is configured so that the specific display is not displayed.

Even if a player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, the operation is not an error, so it is difficult to alert the player, and if the player does Although there is a risk that the player may feel embarrassed, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a certain display (warning display) is displayed in the second game (two bet game) that requires attention. However, if the player does not follow the operation navigation, a certain display (warning display) is not displayed, thereby preventing the player from feeling embarrassed and reducing the player's desire to play. can be sustained.

Further, the notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) capable of making a notification is provided, and the notification means prompts an operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The notification means is configured to be able to execute a first operation navigation (for example, an operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation), and the notification means is configured to perform an operation in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. The second operation navigation (for example, the operation navigation that prompts sequential pressing operations) may be configured to be executable.

Further, the present invention is provided with a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of production, and one production among the plurality of production types is performed in a first scene (for example, scene 1 shown in FIG. 205(A)) and a second scene. (For example, scene 2 shown in FIG. 205(A)) is a performance that is composed of a plurality of scenes, and the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the first scene is performed. In this case, execution of the second scene effect can be started in the first game, and execution of the second game is started after the game in which the first scene effect is performed. If the performance of the second scene is not started in the second game, and then the first game is started, the second scene is not executed in the first game. It is possible to start the performance of the second scene, and in a game after the game in which the first scene performance was performed, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of Even if the stop button is operated in the second operation mode, the performance of the second scene may be started in the game.

With this configuration, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the continuous performance will continue, thereby preventing the player from feeling embarrassed and maintaining the player's desire to play. be able to.

Further, the specific advantageous gaming state includes a first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state), and the second operation navigation is configured to be executable in the first specific advantageous gaming state; When a plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode, an effect corresponding to each operation can be executed, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. In this case, the effect corresponding to each operation may not be executed.

Further, in the second game, if the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed and the plurality of reels stop in the first stop mode (for example, when only one medal is paid out), Even if there is, it may be possible to start a display suggesting the total amount of gaming value awarded in the advantageous state (for example, displaying an image including a character string "500 coins acquired").

FIG. 206(C) is a time-series diagram showing an example of a three-coin bet game in the AT state, and FIG. 206(D) is a time-series diagram of an example of a two-coin bet game in the AT state. FIG.

In this example, the second state (AT state in this example) is an advantageous state, and the advantageous state is more advantageous to the player than the first state (normal state in this example). is provided with a first counter related to the advantageous state (for example, the first counter shown in FIGS. The count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value") is configured to be updateable, and for example, as shown in FIG. 206(C), in the advantageous state, the first game (for example, a 3-coin bet game), both the first count value and the count value related to the count display (for example, a remaining ceiling counter, etc.) are updated. If the second game (for example, a two-coin bet game) is started in the advantageous state, only the first count value is updated, and the count value related to the count display is not updated. It is configured as follows.

Further, in this example, the advantageous state is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states, and one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a certain advantageous gaming state. 206 (C) and (D)), each time one game is played in the first advantageous state. , the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is configured to be updateable, and one of the plurality of types of displays is an image showing a certain value. (hereinafter referred to as the "first display"; for example, the first display d1 shown in FIGS. 206(C) and (D)), and one of the plurality of types of displays includes the A display including an image representing an updated value of a certain value (hereinafter referred to as a "second display"; for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 206(C)), and the certain value is This is a value related to the second count value, and for example, as shown in FIG. , both the first count value and the second count value are updated, and the second display is configured to be displayable in the first game, for example, as shown in FIG. 206(D). As shown in , when execution of the second game (for example, a two-coin bet game) is started in the certain advantageous state, one of the first count value and the second count value Only the first count value is updated, and the second display is not displayed in the second game.

<Variation example of advantageous section control when ignoring the operation navigation>
Next, a modification of the advantageous section control when the operation navigation is ignored will be described using FIG. 207.

FIG. 207(A) is a diagram showing modification example 1 of advantageous section control when the operation navigation is ignored.

In the state shown in FIG. 207(A)(1), in the AT1 state, for example, the prize pressing order bell 5 is won (the first lottery result is derived), and the RLC stop operation (operation in the second operation mode) is performed. ) has been executed. Note that the AT2 transition rate in the same state (the winning probability of transitioning to the AT2 state by the transition lottery; the degree of advantage for satisfying the first requirement) is 30%.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 207A (2) is a state in which the player performs a stop operation in accordance with the operation navigation that prompts the RLC stop operation (operation in the second operation mode).

In this example, since the player performed a stop operation according to the operation navigation that prompts the player to stop the RLC, the plurality of reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, "Bell-Bell-Bell" is displayed on the winning line). The machine stops when the symbol combinations are aligned, and 12 medals are paid out.

In addition, in the same state, since multiple reels stopped in the second stopping pattern (in this example, the pattern in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), the AT2 transition rate (first (the degree of advantage for satisfying the requirements) has increased from 30% to 31% (the degree of advantage has become higher).

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 207(B)(3), the player does not follow the operation navigation that prompts the RLC stop operation (operation in the second operation mode). This is the state in which the stop operation has been performed (operation in mode).

In this example, because the player did not follow the operation navigation that prompts the RLC to stop, and performed a stop operation by pressing sequentially, multiple reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, "" is displayed on the winning line. The game stops when the symbol combinations of ``Bell-Bell-Replay'' are aligned, and one medal is paid out.

In addition, in the same state, multiple reels stopped in the first stopping mode (a mode in which the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line) (but did not stop in the second stopping mode). Therefore, the AT2 transition rate (the degree of advantage for satisfying the first requirement) has decreased from 30% to 29% (the degree of advantage has become lower).

That is, in this example, if the stop operation is performed according to the operation navigation, the AT2 transition rate increases and the transition from the AT1 state to the AT2 state becomes easier, but if the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation (when the operation navigation is ignored), the AT2 transition rate decreases and it becomes difficult to transition from the AT1 state to the AT2 state.

Furthermore, as shown in (A) (4) in the same figure, if the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation (ignoring the operation navigation), the AT2 transition rate may be maintained (AT2 transition rate rate does not need to change).

FIG. 207(B) is a diagram showing a second modification of advantageous section control when the operation navigation is ignored.

The example shown in FIG. 207(B)(1) is an operation navigation that prompts a person who wins the bonus pressing order bell 6 (the first lottery result is derived) to perform a reverse pressing operation (operation in the first operation mode). This is an example in which the player performs a stop operation according to the operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, a certain effect (in this example, a display including the character string "Good!" and output of a sound effect) is started in response to the first stop operation (in this example, pressing the right stop button). However, the configuration is such that nothing is displayed in response to the subsequent second stop operation (in this example, pressing the middle stop button) and third stop operation (in this example, pressing the left stop button). are doing.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 207(B)(2), for example, the player wins the bonus push order bell 6 (the first lottery result is derived) and is prompted to perform a reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode). This is an example in which the operation navigation is executed and the player performs a stop operation without following the operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, the first stop operation (in this example, pressing the left stop button), the second stopping operation (in this example, pressing the middle stop button), and the third stop operation (in this example, pressing the right stop button) The configuration is such that nothing is displayed when the stop button is pressed.

The example shown in FIG. 207(B)(3) is an operation in which, for example, the prize push order bell 5 is won (the first lottery result is derived) and the RLC stop operation (operation in the first operation mode) is prompted. This is an example in which the navigation is executed and the player performs the stop operation according to the operation navigation that prompts the RLC stop operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, the first effect (in this example, a display including the character string "Okay!" and the output of a sound effect) is started when the first stop operation (in this example, pressing the right stop button) is triggered. Then, triggered by the second stop operation (in this example, pressing the left stop button), a second performance (in this example, a display including the character string "Good!" and output of a sound effect) is performed. , and then, triggered by the third stop operation (in this example, pressing the middle stop button), the third production (in this example, a display containing the character string "Yoshaa!" and a sound effect) is started. output) is starting.

The example shown in FIG. 207(B)(4) is an operation in which, for example, the prize push order bell 5 is won (the first lottery result is derived) and the RLC stop operation (operation in the first operation mode) is prompted. This is an example in which the navigation is executed and the player performs the stop operation without following the operation navigation that prompts the RLC stop operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, the first effect (in this example, a display including the character string "Okay!" and the output of a sound effect) is started when the first stop operation (in this example, pressing the right stop button) is triggered. Then, triggered by the second stop operation (in this example, pressing the middle stop button), a second effect (in this example, a display containing the character string "What are you doing!" and a sound effect) is started. output), and then nothing is displayed when the third stop operation (in this example, pressing the left stop button) is triggered.

Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine 100 according to the above embodiment. Therefore, for example, the advantageous state is not limited to the AT1 state or the AT2 state, but may be another gaming state. Further, the first game is not limited to a three-coin bet game, and the second game is not limited to a two-coin bet game. Further, the first counter is not limited to the advantageous section counter, but may be another counter related to the advantageous state. Further, the alert display may not be based on text, but may be based on other images or the like. Furthermore, the game value is not limited to game media such as medals, but may also be benefits that are advantageous to the player (such as winning an AT game, being awarded an AT game, etc.).

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. When the reels are stopped, the plurality of reels stop in the second stop mode, but depending on the stop position of any one of the plurality of reels (for example, the left reel), the plurality of reels stop in the first stop mode. It may be configured such that it is determined whether to stop in the second stopping mode or in the second stopping mode. That is, the first operation mode and the second operation mode may have the same pressing order (for example, left-center-right), but the timing at which the left reel stops may be different. Further, in the above embodiment, there are two options, the first stopping mode and the second stopping mode, but there may be a case where the third stopping mode (for example, a loss) is selected.

Further, the game machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one in which game balls enclosed within the game machine are reused. Further, the main control section, the first sub-control section, and the second sub-control section may be configured in one chip, or the main control section and the first sub-control section may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Moreover, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Further, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Furthermore, by applying the content described in one of the plurality of configurations described in the embodiment to another configuration, the range of games may be further expanded.

The game machine according to the present invention can be applied to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. can.

100 Slot machine 110-112 Reel 113 Symbol display window 130-132 Bet button 135 Start lever 137-139 Stop button

Claims (1)

A light emitting means;
a display means;
a selection operation means that can select the power saving mode setting according to the operation;
A game machine comprising:
The light emitting means is means that may shift to a first state corresponding to the power saving mode setting when the selection operation means is operated and the power saving mode setting is selected,
The display means is means that may shift to a second state corresponding to the power saving mode setting when the selection operation means is operated and the power saving mode setting is selected,
When the selection operation means is operated to select the power saving mode setting and the display means shifts to the second state, the light emitting means shifts after shifting to the first state;
The light emitting means does not shift to the first state even if the selection operation means is operated and the power saving mode setting is selected while a non-demo animation is being displayed, but the light emitting means does not shift to the first state when the demo animation is being displayed. means for shifting to the first state when the selection operation means is operated in the state where the power saving mode setting is selected;
The display means does not start displaying the demo animation from the beginning even if the selection operation means is operated and the power saving mode setting is selected while the non -demo animation is being displayed. When the selection operation means is operated and the power saving mode setting is selected while the demo animation is being displayed , the demo animation is not displayed until the end and the demo animation is restarted from the beginning. It is a means to start from
It is configured such that the display on the display means can be darkened by setting the power saving mode,
When the selection operation means is operated and the power saving mode setting is selected while the demo animation is being displayed, the display of the demo animation, which is newly started from the beginning, eventually becomes a certain darkness. starting to display a display related to the power saving mode on the display means before the display is displayed on the power saving mode;
A game machine characterized by: